r


♦\ >': t- x
•:^>'

K
!vs,
^>&*
•>' ft ,.'J

;*-". •>.
3?f *-. «^
£%#:
r**
^
wjj
■ -■*>.■  T
.'W
*£■;;.
 
A):
SURGEON GENERAL'S OFFICE
     LIBRARY.
'iiWEX
 Section,
Mo. J'

jMij
s  •«
:*i.:'.f«.---T7TT"
* 'Ml** ,
.1
f 5**- s" 
 
 
 
r
A\ 
fa:iily phv   ^an,
            \:vd
                      PART I.
       CiMtains the Theory and Practice of Phy-i,'.
                     PART  II.
Diseases of Women and C!iiUiv:i, and the Botanic Practice.
                     PART III.
  Dispensatory, Anatomy, and the Practice of Surgery;
                  TOGETHER WITH
    The History,  Causes, Symptoms and Treatment
                     OF THE
            ASIATIC CHOLERA:
A Glossary explaining the most difficult words that occur in
    medical science, and a copious Index ; to which is
                 added an Appendix.
By Dr. Daniel
HL Whitney.           /
 " I hare always thought it a greater happinew to discover a certain^method
•fearing even the slightest dineane, than to accumulate the largest fortune;
and whoever compaases the former, I esteem not only happier, but wiser ana
better too"                                 Hjdkjiham.
       PENN-YAN:
PRINTED  BY II. GILBERT..
1833. 
 Northers District op New-York, to wit:
     BE IT REMEMBERED, That on the twelfth day if September, Anno
 Domino, 1833,  Daniel H. Whitney, of the said district hath deposited in
 this office, the title of a book—the title of which is in the wotfg. to wit:—
   " The Family Physician and Guide to Health; in three /arts—Part 1st,
 Contains the theory and practice of physic.  Part 2d, Diseasesof women and
 children and the botanic practice.  Part 3d, Dispensatory, anattmy, and the
 practice of surgery.  Together with the history, causes, symptom* and treat-
 ment of the Asiatic Cholera; a glossary explaining the most difficult words
 that occur in medical science, and a copious index; to which is addtd  an ap-
pendix—by Dr. Daniel H.  Whitney.  "I have always thought it t greater
happiness to discover a certain method of curing even the  slightest disease.
than to accumulate the largest fortune; and whoever compasses the former I
esteem not only happier but wiser and better too."—Sydenham."
  The right whereof he claims as Author and Proprietor,  in conformity with
an Act of Congress, entitled An Act to amend the  several Acts respecting
Copy Rights.
                                 RUTGER B. MILLER, Clerk,
                                                 North. Dist. N. Y.
  N. B.  The additions to this work more than was promised in  the  Pros-
pectus, consisting of 50 pages extra, and comprehending the Botanic Practice,
the Asiatic Cholera, the Thomsonian Practice of medicine, the Plates &c. &c.
have involved a heavy additional expence; the agents are therefore directed
to dispose of none, except to subscribers, for less than two dollars and twenty^
five cents per copy. 
INTRODUCTION.
   The object of this book is to treat in a  clear and  concise
 manner of the diseases  to which the human body is subject:  to
 give their common names, their symptoms, causes, and the means
 of their prevention and  cure.
   As all are alike interested in the preservation of life and health,
 the author flatters himself, in offering this volume to the public,
 that irs contents will be found to be of the greatest importance to
 every  class of community.
   To present a work which will answer  the above object—one
 that he who reads may understand ;  one that should be,  in word
 and in fact, a guide to health ; and which will enable every per-
 son to prescribe  for himself with perfect safety, not in a few
 simple cases  only, but  in almost all cases, and to judge of the
 qualifications of physicians, has induced me to forego every other
 consideration, and for the benefit of my fellow beings to deliver
 to them,-in plain English, a  book on the various branches  of
 medical science, in such a style as will enable every person with
 very little  pains to  be in possession of all the facts  that are  of
 practical importance, as known to the medical faculty.
   Every gentleman and every lady  in community should be ac-
 quainted with those  natural and general laws that govern the
 animal system ; and the virtues of  the different  kinds of medi-
 tw:-,  and the quantity of each necessary for a dose;  for this
 simple, yet incontrovertable reason,  that every person is  best
 acquainted with his own'constitution.  And it is believed,  that
 if people would <_ive this subject but a small share of that inve?-
 tieation which they be-tow upon others, they would  be no more
 under the  necessity of sending for a physician to tell  them what
 kind, and how much medicine  they  must take at a time, and
 when necessary, than they are- now of sending for the butcher  or
 the baker, to determine the kind and quantity of food they should
 eat, and the proper time of usiw: it;  or of calling on  tho tailor
 for instructions fr r pjttine: on their  woollens.
  Medicines  are naturally divided ii.to classes, (as will  be seen
 by  referring  to the Dispensatory,)  and in eadi class are many
cifferont subst-    s, bet all in their  particular (lass have a simi-
 lar operation: und here it is when-  physicians have ever found
 a tower impregnable to  the ma >.? of the people, and which they
 kave Tenderer! • ,  :cessible by entrenching it around with difficult
 terms of their on  invention;  a.id  thus  fortified they impose,
 not on!y\pon <  ,h other,  but directly on community. 
iv                  INTRODUCTION.
  To impose upon each other,  I have seen doctors  who were
called as counsel, give different medicines of the same class, but
were sure to take those the effect of which  would be nearest to
that which the  patient had been taking,  and with much stress,
dealing out a few more drops or  a few less than another physi-
cian,  and enjoining  the strictest attention on the part  of the
nurses in giving it; sealing the whole by the mysterious name of
solution of nitrate of potass, (or salts  of nitre.)  This medicine,
reader, which you took so much  of when  you  had the fever last
summer, and to which you looked with so much confidence, and
took precisely once an hour,  was salt petre dissolved  in water.
Some physicians use one medicine of the class, some others, ac-
cording to their particular notion; hence  we may  account for a
great deal of the difference in  the prescription  of different physi-
cians.  But I am digressing. In the science of medicine, I
assure you, that there is no mystery, and that  it  may all be as
easily obtained  as any other science.
  What reason, therefore,  there can be for neglecting the sub-
ject of health, while  all are vigorously prosecuting every other
pursuit which offers profit or pleasure, is unknown to me.   And
why the science of medicine,  to which people look with so much
confidence, is not considered  a part of every young gentleman's
education, I am at a loss to determine.  That health, which is
of more consequence to every human being than all other earthly
considerations put  together,  is  neglected  and treated as if a
knowledge of the prevention, symptoms  and means of cure of
diseases, was an impenetrable mystery, is astonishing to the en-
terprising and philanthropic.
  But the necessity of the people being themselves  awake to
this important subject, must  appear  obvious  to every one;  all
admitting that any complaint is much easier prevented than cured;
and when once the disease is formed, that if taken in the com-
mencement, it is  easier cured than  when it has been of some
days continuance, and that the means then necessary are  very
simple.   If people only understood this matter, one half at least
of all the sickness now suffered, and of the expenses now incur-
red, might be avoided.
  I have always been surprised to see people  look with so much
confidence to the  physician,  in cases of  imminent danger,  and
place so much stress upon  the necessity of his presence, when
all that he was doing or could do, was to give an emetic perhaps,
or a dose of calomel.
   This volume contains a full exposition of medical treatment,
and of medical mysteries; and at  the same time  assures the
reader that there is nothing incomprehensible about it, and that
the practice of medicine is not of half the consequence that it is
generally imagined to be. 
INTRODUCTION.
v
   That part of the work which treats of the theory and pructicc
 of physic, contains not a few recipes for the cure of a few com-
 plaints, but the symptoms and treatment as understood and pur-
 sued by the most' celebrated physicians, together with the wm'>
 AND WHEREFOKE's.
   The diseases of taomen  and children are assigned a seperate
 place in this work, because they are not immediately  connected
 with other diseases, and  are common to women and children
 only ; whereas, other diseases are common to both sexes and all
 d^es.   In this part I have labored to give every thing in as deli-
 cate vet plain language as possible.  Every one must know it to
 be <nfficult to give as full a description of the special sickness of
 w#raan as might be done on a few pages, and yet have it a book
 suitable for general use.   But if my readers will but give me tie
 credit of being an honest man, I shall have the pleasure, I hope,
 of reflecting'that I have said enough to do away the unnecessary,
 indelicate, and abominable practice of calling on men to attend iu
 such cases.
   The  treaties on anatomy is necessarily brief, but contains all
 that  is essential to the practice of medicine and surgery, and phi-
 losophically understanding the structure of the human body.
   The  cases of surgery, most  particularly dwelt on, are those
 which may be performed by any person of ordinary firmness  of
 nerves  and composure  of mind.   Nevertheless,  I  have  given
 sufficient to enable any man of common judgment to proceed  in
 all cases of emergency correctly, and with full assurance of suc-
 cess.
   The  dispensatory and malerea medica, should be studied vlth
 considerable  care, as it gives  a full description of the medicines
 iu use that are possessed of much efficacy ; a description of their
 virtues of the quantity of each kind for a dose, and what they
 are obtained  from, (or made of.)  With  barely the knowledge
 which may be derived from this part of the work,  a careful per-
 son might practice medicine for years with as good success as a
 :c"_Milar  physician.   This also directs the preparation of all the
 valuable compounded medicine's, and contains many other  valu-
 able  receipts.  Here those who think  that  the composition ol
 medicine is at all mysterious, or what is  still more surprising and
 shocking to common sense, that some medicines are* made from
 dead human  bodies, will be politely  informed of their mistake.
 And  those  errors  respecting  medicine,  which  physicians ha\c
 sown for the purpose of keeping people ignorant, will be cor-
 rected.
   The botanic practice  of medicine, will embrace the principal
of that branch of medical science as practised by the best bota-
nists.
                            1* 
VI
INTRODUCTION.
   The glossary, will contain an  explanation of all  the difficult
terms used in this work, and most of the big words used by med-
ical gentlemen ; all of which, I own, do not sound quite so large
when told in plain English.
  Now let all take notice.   You have not to read this book
through to become acquainted with the symptoms of, and proper
medicines for any complaint; nor to ascertain the manner of
making a phial of paregoric or a box of bilious pills,  &c.  But
turn to the index and there you will find in plain  language the
object of your search, with refference to the page where you will
find a full description of it.
  But before  concluding,  perhaps I should  say that you  may
possibly meet  with some physicians, who fearing that this work
if circulated will injure the  profession, will  say this tells  but
part of the story ; and to lessen your confidence in the work and
yourselves, they will give medicine under different names.  Thus
in one instance, they will  call  the medicine,  (we will name but
one kind  for  illustration,)  emetic, again tartar,  again tartar
emetic, again  emetic tartar, at another time tartrat of antimony,
and again antimonium  tartarizatum, and again tartarized anti-
mony, &c,  now either or  all of these  mean nothing more  than
the common white puke, (tartar emetic.)  And they who wish to
attach a great deal of mystery to their skill, will mix the medicine
with some other substance ; in this case it would not be easy for
a physician to tell what they give ; and as before stated, they will
use of a different kind, though  of the same class;  this tends to
keep people ignorant of medicine, and to make them think it is
enveloped in mystery ; a mystery, however, which  wants noth-
ing more than attention to  be understood.
   And finally, if this work shall be found to answer the end for
which it was written, to meliorate the  conditions of the  human
family, it will be the zenith and ultimatum of my desires, and I
shall  reap an ample reward from the consciousness  of  having
successfully performed the task for the benefit of my/ellow men,
                                               D. H. W. 
                      PART I.            ^

 THEORY AND  PRACTICE OF PHYSIC.


                    CHAPTER  I.

      OF FEVERS, OR FEBRILE DISEASES.

  Of all the morbid  affections of which the human body is
susceptible, fever is the most important,  because  the  most
common, and most fatal disease with which we meet.   Some
diseases are alwavs accompanied by fever ;  others are not al-
ways attended bv it, but in those which are not, we must be
prepared for it, if it  should make its appearance.   By the
presence or absence of  fever,  all our plans of treatment are
regulated ;  and bv the degree  of its violence  we are enabled
to estimate the danger in each particular case.
   When a person is suddenly seized with shiverings  or ri-
gors, followed by a hot  skin, a quick pulse, thirst, loss of ap-
petite, uneasiness, and  a feeling of general langor and  lassi-
tude, he is said to have an attack of fever.  As before observed,
shivering or chilliness is the first symptom of fever, and though
sometimes very slight,  it is one  perhaps that is never want-
ing.  In some cases the rigors or cold chills are so  violent as
to make the teeth chatter, and the patient complains bitterly
of cold.  His limbs tremble, the features  shrink, Jhe skin is
contracted, pale, and rough to  the touch.   There is generally
a pain in the back, head, and  limbs, with tightness across the
breast, and frequently a sensation is felt as of cold.water run-
ning down the back.
   The duration of the cold stage varies from one hour to two,
or even three days.   The time when the cold stage makes its
appearance ought to be taken notice of and  remembered, as
marking definitely the  time at which the fever commenced,
which  is of importance  to know  in order that the proper med-
icines may be given in  time to meet the several stages which
we wish to interrupt.   The chills subside  bv depress, and are
succeeded by a heat of  the body, much greater than the nat-
ural warmth.   The color of the  skin returns, the cheeks 
8
Or FEVER  IN GENERAL.
become flushed, the eyes are suffused, afid the features gener-
ally appear fuller than in health.   This is called the hot stage
of fever, which, as in the case of ague, goes off in a few hours,
or may continue for many  days, as in common  continued
fever.
   After the hot stages have subsided, the sweating stage com-
mences.   The  breathing becomes free and easy, the pulse is
softer, and the urine, after standing a while, deposites a sedi-
ment or settling at the bottom, which is generally of a later'i-
tious or brick dust color, though sometimes of a whiteish
appearance ;  and the patient is now left free from pain, but
much exhausted, and subject to subsequent returns of all the
symptoms at indefinite periods, of uncertain continuance ami
severity.
   Although the above are only the most prominent symptoms
of fever, I have thought them sufficient at present, as I shall
have occasion to notice the more  minute derangements of the
animal functions, when treating of individual diseases.   But
here permit me to say, that the symptoms vary in the same
fever on different  individuals, and on  the same persons in
different places  and under different circumstances.  You will
ask then, perhaps, will it not be difficult to know how to pro-
ceed under so many different circumstances ?  I answer, there
is nothing more easy, if we  only remember one thing,  and
that is, that the same symptoms,  wherever we find them,
always require the very same treatment.   You must there-
fore make it an  invariable rule never to prescribe for a name,
but to watch the symptoms, to treat the symptoms, and noth-
ing but the symptoms.
  The first and most natural division of pyrexia, or fever, is
into idiopathic  and symptomatic.   A fever sometimes arises
spontaneously, without any obvious cause.   It is then called
idiopathic fever.  Fever again is sometimes occasioned bv
an injury, or by some other local  affection, such as swelling
and redness of  the throat,  acute  pain in the side, &c. ;  it is
then called symptomatic fever.
  The divisions of fever might be multiplied to a great ex-
tent ; but all  this would amount  to just nothing at all  in a
practical point of view, and I shall therefore only make three
divisions of idiopathic  fever, viz:  intermittent, continued,
and eruptive.
   Intermittent fever is that which comes on in regular fits or 
INTERMITTENT FEVER.
9
paroxisms, with a complete intermission of fever after the fit
iocs off.   This is generally called the ague and fever.
" Continued fever is that which has no intermission, and fre-
quently continues from soven to twenty-one days
  Eruptive  fever is that which is accompanied by an erup-
tion, such as small pox,  chicken pox, cow pox, measles, and
scarlet fever.

   REMITTENT FEVER, OR AGUE AND FEVER.
   A paroxysm*or fit" of the ague and fever,  is divided into
the cold, the hot, and the sweating stages.   The  cold stage
comes on (as  before  alluded to) with rigors, which  are  so
violent as to make the  patient complain of cold, the  t«eth
chatter, the  whole frame is shaken ; the blood retreats  from
the surface of the body,  leaving the skin rough; all the ex-
ternal features are lessened, and there is often violent pain in   .
the head and back.   After a few hours  this subsides, and the
hot stage supervenes attended with sickness at the stomach,
sometimes vomiting,  scanty and high colored urine, a hurried
breathing, considerable  headach, throbbing  of the temples,
confusion of thought, amounting sometimes to delirium.  At
length a moisture  begins to break out on the face  and neck,
which soon  extends  over the whole body,  the pulse comes
down to its  natural standard, the heat, headache, and nausea
soon  subside,  the  mind  becomes clear and  calm, the  fever
goes off entirely, and the system is, in a  great measure, re-
stored to its healthy action.
   The duration of the paroxysm varies, but upon an average
it lasts about sLx or eight hours.  After a certain interval, the
same paroxism returns,  accompanied by the same  symptoms,
and the time that intervenes between the paroxysms is called
the tvpe of the fever.  Quotidian  signifies every day; and
so when the paroxysm  comes on every day, it is therefore
called the quatidian type.   Tertian  signifies every  third
day ;  and so  when  it comes on every third day,  it is called
the tertian type.   Quartan signifies every fourth day; and
consequently,  whenever it comes on avcry  fourth day, it is
then called the quartan  type.  What the causes may be that
produces these different  types of the same disease,  is not well
known ; but this much  is  certain, that climate and  season,
and  peculiarity of constitution have a gnat  influence over
them in some way or other,  it is well  known ; for instance,
that agues in  the  spring  are most  frequently of  the tertian 
 10               INTERMITTENT  FEVE2.

 type, and that those of the quartan type most generally pre-
 vail in autumn.   The quartan ague is considered more diffi-
 cult to cure than any other.   In the course of the disease one
 type frequently changes into another; the quotidian into the
 tertian, the tertian into the quartan, &c.   The ague and fever
 sometimes  continues a long time in cold countries, without
 producing any material injury ; but not so in hot climates—
 there,  the continuance  of ague in a very short time induces
 inflamatory affections of the  internal  parts, especially of the
 liver and spleen, and this affection of the lattej*, produces that
 which  is known by the name of ague  cakes.
   Prognosis, or foretelling the event of any disease, is al-
 ways a matter of more  sound than substance ; and although
 the  season  and climate in which the ague appears, together
 with the previous duration of the  disease, may assist  us in
 forming some idea of the danger,  it is impossible to foretell
.the  certain event of this or of any  other  disease.   In this
 country, in England, and Holland, ague and fever is not gen-
 erally a dangerous disease, while in Sierra Leone, and along
 the neighboring coasts, it is said that it cannot be exceeded in
 malignity by any known disorder.  If the ague has been pre-
 sent for any considerable length of time, it will be found diffi-
 cult to  remove, liable  to return,  and will tend materially to
 injure the constitution.

                        CAUSES.
   Exhalations from  soil and marshes, called by the physi-
 cians marsh Miasmata, is the great occasional cause of ague.
 The manner in which marsh miasmata occasions the ague is
 certainly very obscure, but the observations of the most learned
 and  celebrated  have placed this as  a  cause beyond doubt.
 And though the  inhabitants  of low and  marshy grounds are
 generally affected with  intermittents, yet  marsh miasmata
 exerts  a  powerful  influence over every species  of  fever,
 and  the  people  residing about  such places are generally
 short lived.   The means of obviating this difficulty is to drain
 and cultivate the lands, to clear out all the timbers and old
 vegetable substances, as it is from these, after being covered
 a part of the year with water, that the  poison exhales when
 exposed to the sun,  and arising with the aqueous or« watery
 vapors, load the atmosphere with disease and death.
   New countries are always subject to the ague, which sub-
 sides, however, upon the clearing  up and cultivation of the 
                  INTERMITTENT  FEVER.                11

 soil, by whicli the whole surface is exposed  to the action of
 pure air.   Persons should choose  if possible for their place*
 of residence, the most elevated points of the town or country,
 and if obliged  to  pass their  time  in  low situations,  should
 occupy the loftiest room of the building, keeping the windows
 shut which front  the marsh.
   Certain states of the air favor the disposition of the body to
 ague, and  rivet it  in the constitution by inducing a  tendency
 to relapse  from verv slight causes, such as exposure to cold,
 a moist state of the atmosphere, the prevalence of an easterly
 wind, and  exposure to the night;  the latter of which  should
 be carefullv avoided.  Weakness of body, unwholesome diet,
 long watching, residing in houses the lloors of which lie near
 the ground,  is not only productive of agues,  but often of the
 most malignant fevers.
   We are  far from being  acquainted with all (he causes that
 may have any agencv in producing intermittent or ague and
 fever;  but the marsh miasmata before mentioned, arising from
 the combination of earth and moisture withdecayed vegetable
 matter, is much the most common  and  the most important.

                     TREATMENT.
   It lias been questioned  whether agues ought to be cured :
 many people suppose that there is something salutary in the
 auge and fever.   But as  it  frequently  becomes complicated
 with other diseases by neglecting to cure it in time, I would
 earnestly advise every one who has it, to gef rid of it as soon
 as may  be, for as no possible danger can result from curing the
 disease ; it is better to throw it off at once than  to risk  the
 consequences of neglecting it.   And notwithstanding it is  a
 fact, that physicians are entirely unacquainted with the man-
 ner in which marsh mhi^mata produce agues ; and although
 they are equally ignorant  of the modus operandi, or practical
 manner in  which any medicine acts in curing the ague, still,
their ignorance of this matter  does  not lessen the value of
such medicines as  we know from experience'  docs  cure it.
  In the treatment of agues, as in all other complaints,  we
 must vary  our means with the existing circumstances; and
 though certain it is that most cases are within the  control of
 art, yet  some baffle every elfort to effect a (tire.   But such
generally wear themselves out  in a few weeks.   We should
 use all our means, however, to cure it, as the local affections
which it creates are dangerous, and 1 have  often noticed that 
 12              INTERMITTENT  FEVER.

 if such persons are attacked with fever within the course of a
 few months after the fits leave them, they almost invariably
 die.
   As it is not possible  to stop the fit after it has once com-
 menced, the object must be to make it shorter and less violent
 by hastening the different stages.   When the cold stage is on,
 therefore, we should endeavor to cut it short and bring on the
 hot stage by giving stimulating and warm drinks,  and by
 putting the feet into hot water.  The patient should be put
 into a warm bed with bottles filled with hot water,  or with
 bricks having been boiled  in hot water, wrapped up in cloths
 and applied to the body.   Or the patient may be rubbed with
 a brush until a glow of warmth is excited on the skin ; and
just before the cold stage is expected to commence, the bowels
 and stomach should be  cleansed either by  a cathartic  or a
 gentle emetic.   If an emetic should be given, (which is gen-
 erally to  be preferred,) take of emetic tartar  from  6 to 10
 grains for a grown  person, which  is about the same as one
 eighth part of a common teaspoonful, dissolve it in a  tea cup
 ful of warm water, and let the patient drink four table-spoon-
 fuls at once.  If this should not operate as  a puke in 15  or
 20 minutes, take  one table-spoonful of the same  every ten
 minutes until it  does operate.   Or you might mix half the
 above mentioned quantity of emetic tartar,  with half a tea-
 spoonful ipecac; then put it into half a tea-cupful of warm
 water, and drink half at once.   If it does not operate as a
 puke  in fifteen or twenty  minutes,  take half the  remainder,
 and if it should  be necessary take the  rest of it.  Or even
 ipecac alone might  answer the  purpose, though it is not  so
 powerful as emetic tartar,  or that and ipecac mixed together.
 But if you should choose  to use ipecac  alone, take as  much
 as a tea-spoonful in warm tea  or water, and repeat the dose
 once in fifteen  or twenty minutes until it operates as an emet-
 ic, drinking plenty of warm water  or of warm chammomile
 tea, in order to facilitate the operation.
   If a  cathartic or physic should be given, instead of the
 emetic or puke,  it might  be  better perhaps to give  it about
 two hours before the  cold stage is expected.  A smart does
 of calomel and castor oil will answer this purpose well.   Not
 less than ten nor more than twenty grains weight of calomel,
 (about half as much in bulk as you would give of emetic tar-
 tar for a puke,) should be mixed up well with a table-spoon-
 ful of castor oil, and after  taking it the mouth should be well 
INTERMITTENT FSVER.               13
 rinsed with warm water; then avoid taking cold> and abstain
 from cold  drinks, and there  will be no danger of having a
 sore mouth.   If it should not operate in two or three  hours,
 take a second dose ;  if it should operate too much, take a few
 drops of laudanum or paregoric,  say  ten or fifteen drops, or
 more if necessary.   If the calomel  and oil should  happen to
 be vomited up soon after taking, it  will be best then to take
 something to  settle the stomach, a  few drops of essence of
 peppermint and laudanum mixed with water, or a little of the
 oil of cinnamon dropped on a lump of sugar, mashed up and
 mixed  with water or spirits in a table-spoon  may be given,
 and as soon as the stomach becomes settled, try the calomel
 and oil again, and if the patient cannot keep it down, why
 then he must be contented to take a puke instead of the physic.
 If th« patient has a strong dislike to oil, a tea-spoonful of jalap
 and a common dose of calomel, mixed together  in molasses,
 may be given instead of the oil ; or the jalap may  be admin-
 istered  without the  calomel,  increasing the  dose to  a tea-
 spoonful and a half perhaps, and if it does not operate in two
 or three hours repeat the dose as before directed.
   As soon as  the hot stage comes on, it will be proper  to
 discontinue the warm drinks and stimulants, and make  use of
 c*ld and sour  drinks, such as lemonade, or elixir  of vitriol,
 or barley water with vinegar, or vinegar whey,  or dissolve
 about a drachm of nitre (the eight part of an ounce,) in a
 pint of  water  or flaxseed tea,  and take a tea-spoonful of it
 every hour.   Or warm  boneset tea may be taken; or dis-
 solve a  little emetic  tartar in cold water, making it weaker,
 than you would for a puke, and take a tea-spoonful once an
 hour, just so as to produce a slight nausea at the stomach, but
 not so much as to induce vomiting.   Or one fourth of a tea-
 spoonful of ipecac may be mixed with water and given in  the
 same  way, for the same purpose ; that  is,  to reduce the fever
 and create a moisture on the skin ; and if the fever runs verv
 high,  attended with severe pain and a white tongue, a  small
 bleeding will be of service.
   When the sweating stage comes on you may discontinue
 the use of the foregoing means, and omit giving any medicine
 until it goes off, and a perfect intermission takes place.   Dur-
ing the intermission, the object is now to prevent the return of
the paroxysm or fit by giving tone or strength to the system.
For this purpose it will be proper  to steep an ounce of Peru-
vian bark in a  pint of water, and  take  a table-spoonful of it 
 14               INTERMITTENT FEVER.

once an hour; or the bark may be taken without being steep-
ed,  by mixing it up with molasses or milk, or with any thing
you please, and take about a table-spoonful every  hour;  and
if it does not sit well on the stomach,  add a few drops of the
essence of cinnamon or peppermint to it, or what  is better, a
few drops of laudanum ;  or quinine may be given instead of
the  bark.   Qiunine, or rather, the sulphate of quinine, is ob-
tained from Peruvian bark by a chemical process;  it possesses
the  same strengthening properties as the bark, and is generally
considered better, because it  requires  less  for a dose  and
agrees better with the stomach.  The best way to give  qui-
nine is to fill a two ounce phial with water,  and drop into it
fifteen or twenty drops of sulphuric acid, (oil of  vitriol,) or
enough at least to make the water as sour as vinegar, then
put something like  half  a tea-spoonfui  of quinine into the
phial, shake it until the quinine is dissolved, and then give a
tea-spoonful of it in a table-spoonful of water once an  hour
until the time for the next fit to come on shall have«passed over.
If, however, the paroxysm should return at the expected time,
notwithstanding  the means used here to prevent it, you may
then discontinue the bark or quinine, until  the fit is over.
Or you may continue the use of it  through  the cold stages,
taking hot drinks at the same time, putting the  feet into hot
water, &c. &c,  the same as  before directed for treating the
eold stages.   But as  soon  as the hot stages comes on you
must discontinue the bark,  or quinine, and then proceed ac-
cording to the directions previously given for treating the hot
stages.

          SUBSTITUTES FOR THE BARK.
  The bark of the broad  leafed willow is sometimes given in
the ague, as a substitute for Peruvian  bark.   One ounce and
a half of the dried and pounded bark should be infused in one
quart of water for six hours, then boil it over a gentle fire for
a quarter of an hour, and strain for use ; half a gill may be
given as a dose five or six times a day during  the intermis-
sion.   The barks of our  common willows, which are bitter
and astringent, have been used with success in the same dis-
ease.   And I consider  the  bark  of  the common dogwood
 (Cornus Florida,) to be but little, if any, inferio'r to the Pe-
ruvian bark, and it  may be given in the same manner for the
ague and fever.
  Arsenic is now considered to be a valuable  medicine in 
INTERMITTENT FEVER.
15
the ao-ue.   The arsenical solution* is given in the intermission.
The dose is five drops, gradually increased  to ten or twelve,
several times in the dav.   This will sometimes produce vom-
iting, in which rase it will be proper to suspend its use, and
ffive a cathartic of rhubarb.   As a substitute  for arsenic,  the
sulphate of zinc, (white vitriol,) m doses of one or two grains
combined with a little opium,.may be given two or three times
a day during the intermission.  We must bear in mind, how-
ever  that while using these medicines, it is important to give
a gentle  cathartic,  such as rhubarb, or  castor oil, or salts,
everv few days, in order to keep the stomach and bowels reg-
ular and to carrv oft* the medicine which the patient is taking;
and that after  the fever  is entirely  interrupted, we  should
continue  the medicine for several days to prevent its return.
   The patient will frequently experience benefit from taking,
two or three times a day, a small quantity of gum myrrh and
Virginia snake  root in brandy.  And when all  other means
fail, as they sometimes do, I generally had  good success in
giving two or three grains of calomel,  mixed with about the
same quantitv of quinine,  three or four times a day,  when
there was no fever, taking care to  give a dose of castor oil
or epsom salts just-before the next paroxysm was  expected,
in order to  carrv off the calomel and quinine out of the sys-
tem.
   The different remedies and cures for  ague and  fever, are
almost as numerous as the  number  of persons who have at-
tempted  to cure  it.  The plan which I have marked ©ut,
however, is the most relied on by physicians, and is generally
the most successful.
   There are some practitioners who are in the habit of dis-
guising their medicine under  as many different forms as their
ingenuity can devise, in  order to prevent the patient from
knowing what the medicine is, and they call it by some pretty
name or other, such as tasteless ague drops, the ague pills, the
aromatic  pills,  kc.   All  these  are  preparations of arsenic
and quinine, and if any of them be given during the hot stage,
they increase»and  prolong the fever, and in  many cases en-
danger the  life of the  patient; but as soon as the patient  has
gone through  the  old, the hot, and the sweating stages, these
medicines might then  be given with perfect safely.
Se« the diapcuaatory. 
   16          BILIOUS,  OR REMITTENT FEVER.


                       CHAPTER II.

           BILIOUS OR REMITTENT  FEVER.

                          CAUSES.
     Remittents are produced from the same causes that in-
   termittents are,  and differ from intermittents only in being
   more violent.  Intemperance, especially in the use of ardent
   spirits, produces fevers of the most malignant form.

                        SYMPTOMS.
    . In remittent fever  there is a remission  or abatement, but
   the fever does* not go entirely  off as remittent;  this is the
   characteristic difference between the two.  It commences with
   coldness, shivering, violent pains in the head and back, dejec-
   tion of spirits, sickness at  the stomach,  giddiness,  loss of
   strength and difficulty of breathing.   This is followed by
   heat, the pulse which was small in the cold stage becomes
   full and quick,  all the symptoms increase  in violence, the
   sickness of the stomach frequently amounting to full  vomit-
   ing.   Soon these symptoms abate, the skin becomes moist,
   and the patient feels almost well; but he is soon disappointed
,  by another attack, which comes on with increased violence,
   and if not checked, great restleness, delirium, offensive dis-
   charges, twitchings of the tendons, profuse clammy sweats,
   and convulsions frequently come on, which soon terminate
   in death.

                       TREATMENT.
     In the treatment of this fever, our object is to bring the
   remission to an intermission; for which, on' the commence-
   ment, if there  is much pain in the head,  with a hard, quick
   pulse, bleeding will be useful, and may be repeated in quan-
   tities of from half a pint to a pint, according to circumstances,
   once in ten or twelve hours, until the urgent symptoms abate.
   But the most important is, to evacuate the bowels and stom-
   ach of their impure contents ; first take of tartar emetic ten
   grains, or about one fourtli of a tea-spoonful,  put  into a tea-
   cup of hot water,  give to a grown (adult) person four table-
   spoonfuls, wait twenty minutes, if it does not operate  give
   one table-spoonful every ten minutes  until it produces full
   vomiting; when it begins to  operate the patient should drink 
            BILIOUS, OR REMITTENT FEVER.           17

freely of warm water,  this favors the operation  of the puke
and renders it much easier.   In the same manner  may  also
be given ipecac in dose of twenty-five or thirty grains, or a
ua-spoonful and a half;  or half the emetic Jartar, and  half
the ipecac mixed together and taken in the same manner.   In
managing in this manner, (giving a part at a time,) the pos-
wbilitv of danger is avoided.   These are the emetics in most
common use, but anv of those  mentioned under the  head of
emetics may be used.
   When an emetic or cathartic operates too excessively, give
a small pill of opium half as large as a field  pea, and repeat
once an hour until it checks the operation ; or give fifteen or
thirlv drops  paragoric or laudanum.   If the puke does not
operate as physic, it should  be  followed  in a few hours  by a
cathartic, in common dose, bilious pills, calomel, jallap, olium
ricini, (caster oil,) or any other that is convenient.
   Or where an emetic cannot be given, we must give active
cathartics ; calomel from  five to ten  grains with  fifteen or
twenty grains of jallap ;  or  give the calomel with  about a
half dose of any other physic;  or give jallap or  any other
physic without the calomel.  When the  emetic has operated
smartly, it will not be proper to repeat it  on the recurrence of
the very next paroxysm,  unless the  symptoms are very vio-
lent, but should then content ourselves with an active cathar-
tic.  When the first passages have been well evacuated, and
the fever yet comes on as usual in relation to time  and stage,
give in the hot stage a table-spoonful of salt-petre,  (called by
the doctor, solution of salts of nitre, or nitrate of potass,)  pre-
pared by putting a tea-spoonful into a tea-cup of cold water,
give once an hour, this is a refrigerent (cooling)  ;  or once an
hour in  a little cold  water,  elm or flax-seed lea, give a tea-
spoonful of spirits of nitre, or Dover's powders, (which  sec)
this  promotes  perspiration  by causing  the  blood to  flow
to the surface of the body, and always is followed by an abate-
ment  of the symptoms.   Also, the saline  mixture, snirits
mindererus,  antimonial  powders; or  what  is  just as well,
put half a tea-spoonful of antimony (tartar emetic,) in a tea-
cupful of cold water, give a tea-spoonful once an hour, until
the fever abates;  or calomel one grain, antimony two grains,
once in two hours, or ipecac three grains ; little soda or peat I
ash, a little camphor, one  half grain opium.
  The warm bath is highly useful, and  when it  cannot  he
used for want of a proper vessel, the feet should  be put in
warm water once a day. 
18          BiLIOUS, OR REMITTENT FEVER.

  The cold affusion is best, but must be used only when the
fever is at its height.  The most convenient way of applying
eold, is by sponging the body with cold water or vinegar and
water; this should  never be neglected in any case of fever,
especially in hot weather and hot climates.
  Blisters must be  applied, in cases of violent pain, as  near
the part affected as may be.   In delirium or great pain in the
head, apply them to the arms, back of the neck, or between
the shoulders.
  When th'e fever goes off with a perspiration and the patient
is relieved of all the violent symptoms, the pulse is soft and
regular, the heat of skin and the flush of the face have passed
off* we have an  intermission, and must give tonics; cinchona
(Jesuits, or Peruvian bark,) in dose of half a table-spoonful
once an hour, mixed in any thing convenient; or steep one
ounce of the bark in a pint of boiling water, give of this a table-
spoonful  once an hour with the same quantity of port wine ;
or sulphate of quinine three grains, or about one sixteenth of
a tea-spoonful, in a little wine once an hour, or prepare the
quinine as directed in ague and feVer.  The different kinds
of tonics mentioned in this work may be used, if any particular
kind disagrees with the stomach add a few drops of laudanum
or change it.   If any of these produce fever you must lessen
the dose, and if yet the fever is increased suspend entirely the
use of them, and give an emetic or cathartice, for the stomach
and bowels are not sufficiently cleansed.    If the  patient be-
comes suddenly faint, extremely weak, deranged, sinking of
the pulse, twitching of the tendons, the  tongue furred  and
black, it approaches to typus, and wine and  bark,  quinine,
columbo, &c,  with ether or hartshorn in a  dose of a tea-
spoonful  once an  hour; castor five or ten grains to allay the
irritability, or  a  small  pill of opium; apply blisters to  the
arms and legs, and- sinapisms of mustard,  onions, &c. to the
feet and palms of the hands.
  To allay the  excessive vomiting which sometimes  attends
the commencement of this fever,  we must  apply  flannels
wrung out of hot water, vinegar or spirits, or a mustard poul-
tice, or blister over the  region of the  stomach ;  at the same
time we  are directed by authors to give infusion of columbo.
opium, new milk, sweet oil and molasses, lime water, soda,
magnesia, &c. ; but whatever is given with a view to check
it must be in as small quantities as possible, or it  will over-
load the stomach and increase the vomiting. 
         YELLOW FEVER, OR TYPHUS ICTERODJJS.       19

   The food and drink must be  adapted in general to the
taste of the patient; the lightest and  most nourishing will of
course be the best, such as rice,  arrow root, panado, vermi-
cella, gruel, mush, custards, roasted apples, and  mild kinds
of ripe fruits.   The patient must be kept clean, and every
tiling about him so.
   The onlv means which we can use by way of prevention,
are to avoid exciting causes, by living temperately, or going
to a warm climate, and taking every other night two or three
grains of calomel or a small dose of rhubarb, or any gentle
cathartic ; if there is fullness of  habit to  have a few ounces
of blood  taken.  In all situations and in  all  places to  shun
hard drinking ;  avoid  cold  moist  air, all sudden exposures
to cold, and observe the utmost cleanliness in  our persons
and dwellings.
   Different circumstances  will of course arise  to alter the
treatment in some instances, and  we must therefore vary our
treatment as the symptoms  indicate.*
                    CHAPTER III.

            OF  THE YELLOW FEVER.

  This fever has mostly prevailed in  the West Indies, on
the shores of North  America, and  in the southern  parts  ol
Spain,  it is considered among the endemics (peculiar to)  of
hot climaresj and  has excited attention from its having  pre-
vailed  epidemically (generally) in  those countries with un-
paralleled mortality at particular seasons.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   Tit", most common form of yellow fever commences with
laiigor and  rigoi*., sometimes dejection of countenance, an
aversion to motion,  and at sometimes then; is an appearance
Jl intoxication ; the head aches, the face is flushed,  the eves
appear dull, gjassy,  suffused,  and protruded ;  the tongue  at
first is fured and moist,  which by degrees becomes  dry  and
black, sometimes of a fiery red color ; slight heat of the 4in ;
the patient is  sometimes very  restless, and sometimes  lies
* .-itf general treatment of (ever.
7 
20      YELLOW FEVER, OR TYPHUS ICTERODES.

almost in an  insensible state ;  great irritability of the stom-
ach comes on, the matter thrown up is generally slimy and
tasteless, very seldom bile.
   As the disease advances this assumes the appearance of
coffee grounds ; this is called the  black vomit, but is not al-
ways present.
   Symptoms in its most violent form.   The attack is fre-
quently without chill, with violent pain in the head, back and
limbs, prostration of strength, vomiting, eyes  red, suffused,
face tumid, the patient speaks thick like an intoxicated man;
the skin is hot and dry, severe pain in the forehead and bot-
toms of the orbits of the eyes, and great heat at the pit of the
stomach, large drops of sweat stand on the face, the tongue
generally moist and trembling.
   High and fierce delirium comes on about the second day,
the patient requires two or three persons to hold him in bed ;
the eyes look as if they would start from their  sockets, anil
roll with a fierce and  ghastly expression.   These symptoms
soon subside and the senses return and the patient is easy,
but soon to experience a recurrence of the above symptoms,
frequently with syncope, faintings, or convulsions, which are
the last and fatal symptoms, and death closes the tragic scene
on the third or fourth day from the commencement.  In the
common  form of this fever the duration is from five to seven
days,  and in  this form death is sometimes preceded  by low
muttering delirium, at other times the patient sinks exhausted
into the arms of death  with the mind unimpaired.   If the pa-
tient passes the sixth day without the occurrence of the black
vomit or difficulty of making water, the chance is favorable.
Relapses in this fever are not common.
   The symptom  from which this disease takes its name, yel-
lowness of the skin, is not a necessary  characteristic of the
complaint,  for many  cases run through their  whole course
without exhibiting it.

                     TREATMENT.
   The fact is, that no  treatment in yellow fever has been dis-
covered on which we can place much confidence.   The course
recommended by the most celebrated physicians I subjoin.
   Toremove thesickness atthe stomach, give copious draught,
of warm water or camomile tea,' or strong tea  of bone set
(eupatorium perforatum,) until it produce vomiting.   If the
sickness continues, give frequently a table-spoonfull  or twe 
         YELLOW FEVER,  OR TYPHUS  ICTERODES.      21

 of lime water and milk, or twenty drops of spirits of turpen-
 tine on sugar once in two hours, or ten grains of carbonate of
 potash with a.tea-spoonful  of vinegar, small doses of lauda-
 num, eight or ten drops, with a little essence of peppermint;
 at the same time apply a blister to the pit of the stomach, or
 a warm mustard seed or onion poultice to the same part, and
 strong drafts to the soles of the feet and palms of the hands.
   Charcoal finely powdered may be given in a dose of a tea-
 spoonful once an hour, this is  said to have succeeded in cases
 where every other means proved unavailing.   Sugar of lead
 (sacharum saturni or acetate of lead,) is recommended in dose
 from half to two  grains, once  in four hours.   But it appears
 to me that a large dose of calomel and oil, or a dose of croton
 oil given half drop every five minutes until it operates, would
 sooner allay the irritability  of the stomach,  by removing the
 morbid  matter  which produced  the  disposition to vomit.
 Bleeding is said to be useful if used on the first or second day
 of the  disease, in cases of affection of the head, delirium or
 violent pain,  especially in persons of full habit of body, and
 natives of northern latitudes, and large bleedings are prefera-
 ble to  small ones ; persons of  slender constitutions will  not
 bear large  bleeding,  it hastens the typhoid stage and  greatly
 endangers  life.
   The blood is no guide to our treatment, as it exhibits ever)
 variety of appearance.  Bleeding  if employed should be  al-
 ways practised in the hot stage.   Some give an emetic in  the
 first stage  and follow it by bleeding; an emetic every one
 knows determines to the surface of the  body and  produces
 perspiration and external heat, and no doubt is the best med-
 icine that can  be  given in the  commencement,  but I am  not
 readv to admit that this should be followed by bleeding.   Af-
 ter bleeding or an emetic, the bowels must be freely opened bv
some gentle purgative, as calomel, rhubarb, aloes, jalap, scam-
 monv,  colocyiith, senna, calcined  magnesia;  these produce
colored and natural  discharges, and are  the most advisable
 kinds of physic ;  they may be given  in  their usual doses,
 mixed  in molasses or any thing convenient.
   Salivation frequently cures the d:: ease ; it may be effected
by giving small doses frequently,  combined with opium, or
by rubbing  in mercurial ointment, one scruple* every three
hours until it produces its effect, rub  it on the sides, arm-pits
and groins.  The quickest way of producing salivation is to
take spirits of ammonia two drachms or a table-spoonful, six 
22
MILIARY FEVER.
ounces of distilled, rain or brook Water, and four ounces  of
calomel mix,  it should  then be strained off and the powder,
when dried, must be thrown on a hot shovel and covered with
a tin funnel and the vapor inhaled  (breathed) into the lungs.
  Diaphoretics may be used  when the skin is hot and dry,
but generally  are of little use.   The urgent  headache may
be relieved by cold applications  to the head,  and blisters.
When the powers of life  begin to fail,  stimulants and cor-
dials must be used>; sour drinks must be used as water  and
elixir vitriol,  sulphuric or nitric  acid, cream of tartar,  &c.
Strict attention must be paid to diet, and the patient suffered
to eat nothing but what is nourishing and easy of digestion.
  Yellow fever is contagious.  Its latent period,  or that time
which elapses  from exposure to its showing itself, is from two
to ten days.  And although a person who has once had the
yellow fever, is not very likely to take it a second time, yet
there are instances of the same person having had it several
times.
  Strangers should observe the strictest temperance, and on
visiting an infected country should take a  gentle cathartic;
if of a full habit of body a small bleeding will be proper, and
a tea-spoonful of peruvian bark in a table-spoonful of wine
thrice a day will  act as  a preventative;  he should look out
for his residence a dwelling in the highest part of the district,
and occupy the loftiest room in the building and keep the
windows closed which  front the  water,  low  grounds,  or
marsh.  Exposures to cold, wet  and evening  air must be
carefully avoided.
  These precautions should be strictly attended to by soldiers
when marching, and their marches should be short, and their
quarters on high'airy grounds, or if on low marshy grounds
it should be drained by ditching.
  Mercury taken so as to make the mouth a little sore, is said
to be an excellent preventative.  Yet all means hitherto em-
ployed in yellow fever are to be looked upon as doubtful.


                 MILIARY FEVER

                     SYMPTOMS.
  A roughness produced by cold is first observed on the skin,
and soon after this large numbers of red pustules or pimples
appear, which are sometimes in clusters and sometimes  dis- 
MILfARY FEVER.                   23
 tinct or  separate, and so prominent  as to be easily  felt, but
 not always to be seen, for when there is not much inflammation
 the color of them is the same  as that of the skin.  In ten or
 twelve hours these pustules are  changed into a whey colored
 vesicle or blister,  which soon  becomes  white.   Sometimes
 the fluid or waterv humor which is in them turns yellow, and
 in two  or  three days they fall off in  scales.  This fluid is
 acrid or sharp, and of a bad smell.  They  are first  seen on
 the neck and breast, and they appear  and disappear frequently
 in the course of the disease.
    Before the eruption appears there  is frequently pricking or
 itching in the skin, numbness  of the fingers and toes, deliri-
 um, pain in the head, ringing  in the  ears, sore eyes,  aphthae
 or sore mouth, heat in the back, epilepsy, and finally a pro-
 fuse sweat, which if not checked, will  cause the«eruption to
 continue for manv days.
   When the eruption steadily continues full and red,  with
 moderate sweat,  free breathing, without much debility, the
 case is favorable, otherwise it is unfavorable.

                        CAUSES.
   Excessive evacuations of any kind, bad  diet, a moist and
 lnarshy air, intemperance, and offending matters in the stom-
 ach produce it.   In spring it is most common, less in autumn,
 still less in summer, and least  in winter;  the old,  and the
 very young, and  women,  are the classes mo^t liable  to it.

                     TREATMENT.
   When there  is much  fever and  the  pustules are red and
 inflamed, bleed, give a dose of some  kind of phvsic, and cold
 applications are good.   But if there  is much debility, which
 is most generally the case,  and the  pustules are  white as,  I
 relaxed,  strengthening remedies  are proper, such as sulphuric
 acid diluted with  water, Peruvian bark,  &c.  If the stomach
 is oppressed, with headache, nausea, griping, or  swelling of
 the bowels,  an emetic  will then he necessary.  If the  erup-
 tion strikes in, and the sweating stops suddenly, cordials and
stimulating medicines are proper, such as brandy, ether, harts-
horn,  camphor,  &c   \  smart dose of  phvsic in  the begin-
ning,  especially when women in child bed are attacked  with
it, will generally  throw off the disease at once. 
24-
OF CONTINUED  FEVER.
                   CHAPTER IV.

             OF CONTINUED  FEVER.

   Some authors have divided continued fever into three kinds?
while others have made out as many as twenty-five divisions
of it.   Many of these arbitrary divisions are now considered
unnecessary ; and we should remember that none of them are
intended to direct the method  of cure, but merely to enable
us the more easily to remember the different symptoms that
may occur ; for it is neither names nor divisions of names
that are to  be treated,  but symptoms, and them alone.  A
continued fever will sometimes show the symptoms of strong
inflamation«during the whole of its course ; it is then called
synocha, or inflammatory  fever.   Sometimes it  is attended
with depressed nervous  energy or loss of  strength, together
with symptoms  of putrefaction; it  is then called nervous,
putrid, or typhus  fever.  Sometimes  the  beginning of the
course will  be marked  with the symptoms of inflammatory
fever, and the latter part of it with the symptoms of typhus ;
it is then called synochus or mixed fever, or common contin-
ued fever.   This division of continued fever will perhaps be
as good as  any other, remembering however that the same
symptoms wherever we find them always require the same
treatment.
   The symptoms of continued fever are modified by the cli-
mate, the season, the state of the air, and the constitution
and habit of body.  For instance, in  hot climates the syno-
cha or inflammatory type of continued  fever is the most prev-
alent ;  whereas, in cold or temperate climates the nervous or
typhoid  form is most common.  With regard to season, the
inflammatory fever prevails most in spring and summer, ty-
phus in  autumn and winter.  The  fevers of warm climates
or warm seasons are apt to become complicated with disease
of the liver  and spleen,  and those of cold climates with com-
plaints of the lungs.   A moist marshy or impure air is more
likely to induce nervous than inflammatory fever ; and a dry,
cold atmosphere will sooner produce the inflammatory than
the nervous fever..  Inhabitants of low countries, from the in-
fluence of habit, may be almost proof against the nervous dis-
eases of their own country, when at  the same time, by re-
moving  to a dry hilly country they become more liable to in- 
                 OF CONTINUED  FEVER.               35

 flammatory fevers than others.  And so it is that our northern
 people become sick on going to the south ; and the southern
 on coming to the north.  With respect to constitution and
 habit of body, the period of youth, the sanguine or hot tem-
 perament, a full diet of animal food,  with wine or distilled
 spirits, have a natural tendency to induce fever to be inflam-
 matory.  On the other hand, weakness of body, and flaceid-
 ity or looseness of fibre, whether it be the  effect of original
 formation or of previous disease, or of hard labor, or of long
 watchings, or of deficient nourishment, always conduce  to the
 low and tvphoid form of fever ; and it is therefore in individ-
 uals of this habit of body that the purest cases of typhus fever
 are found.

      SYMPTOMS OF INFLAMMATORY FEVER.
   The most violent form of synocha or  inflammatory  fever
 is not often met with in this country,  but is generally  found
 in hot climates.  Yet even in cold countries when the weath-
 er is dry, and in very plethoric and strong  constitutions, the
 violence of the symptoms are sometimes very nearly the  same.
 The attack, which is generally very sudden, commences with
 excessive prostration of strength  and shivering, which are
 soon succeeded by a violent heat of the skin, pain in the hack,
 headache, giddiness, and general uneasiness.   The headache
 is very acute, the eyes are suffused and cannot bear the light;
 the face is full  and red, and the whole countenance flushed ;
 the arteries of the head beat violently.  There is often bleed-
 ing at the nose, sometimes delirium, and  the tongue becomes
 rapidly coated  with a  thick fur;  nausea or sickness at the
 stomach, vomiting of bile, great thirst, and a costive state of
 the bowels prevail.   The pulse varies from one hundred to
one hundred and twenty in a minute, strong, full and regular.
 Sometimes the  pulse is weak and depressed, but rises imme-
diately on bleeding.   The breathing is quick, the skin very
hot and dry, and the urine scanty and high colored.   If suf-
fered to run its course it may prove fatal in less than twenty-
four hours.

                       CA (S ES.
   In general this fever is produced by excessive cold or heat
suddenly applied, where the system is greatly excited by ex-
ercise, spirituous liquors, violent passions,  robust habit, ani- 
26
TYPHUS, OR  NERVOUS FEVER.
 mal food,  and a residence  in  a dry air.  In short, all the
 causes before mentioned which excite fever have their effect.

    TREATMENT OF INFLAMMATORY FEVER.
   The patient is to be immediately bled until he  begins to
 feel faint.  A powerful emetic should then be administered,
 after which, if the imflammatory symptoms return, it  may be
 necessary to repeat the bleeding even within a few hours af-
 ter the first;  and to allay the burning heat of the skin the
 body  may  be sponged with cold water.   It  will be  proper
 likewise to give a brisk  cathartic, unless  the emetic should
 operate as physic, and even if it should operate so, cathartics
 must not be neglected, especially whenever the fever begins
 to rise.  After bleeding, puking and purging,  sudorific or
 sweating medicines are to be used when  the skin is hot  and
 dry, and discontinued as the  feverish symptoms go off and the
 skin becomes moist.   Six grains of emetic tartar dissolved in
 a quart of  water, is a very good sudorific ; a  wine  glass full
 may be taken  once in four hours, or half that quantity  onco
in two hours, less or more, as the patient can bear it without
puking.  Cooling drinks  likewise,  such as nitre or  cremor
tartar dissolved in water, may be given once an hour between
the times of taking the sudorific.  After the system  is  pro-
perly  reduced  by bleeding, &c, if  there should be a deter-
mination of blood to the head, and a stupor or constant incli-
nation to sleep should come on, a blister must be applied to
each arm, between the elbow and shoulder, or a blister on the
back of the neck ;  and if the  pain should now determine to
any other  part of the body, a  blister is to be applied to it.
As soon as the general fever goes off, and the  skin continues
moist, the tongue becomes clean, and there is no very  partic-
ular determination of pain to any part of the body the  patient
may begin  to take  strengthening or  tonic medicines, such as
Peruvian bark, or quinine, or seneka snake root, &c.


                     CHAPTER V.

         TYPHUS, OR NERVOUS FEVER.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   The patient complains of chilliness alternated with sudden
flushes of heat, he is listless  and uneasy, and  if he  sleeps he 
              TYPHUS, OR NERVOUS  FEVER.           27

groans and starts, and rises without being refreshed ;  he com-
plains of dull aching pain  in the head and  limbs, with sore-
ness of the llesh, oppression in breathing, nausea and want of
appetite ; increasing for several days,  the patient being well
enough to be up without having power to attend to business.
The disease  is then  fairlv set  in,  increasing in the evening
and declining in the  morning.   The tremor or  trembling ob-
served on putting out the tongue or raising the hand is  one of
the most common symptons  of this fever.   As the fever ad-
vances these symptoms become more intense, attended with
confusion of the head, nausea, a sense  of weakness, dejection
of spirits, and  frequent sighing witlnnit knowing the  cause.
The pulse varies  during the day,  sometimes a  little quicker
than usual, at other times about the natural standard.    Some-
times the disease  sets in more violently with great pains in
the back and limBs,  weariness, a burning pain  in the stom-
ach, vomiting,  virtigo, dimness of sight, and numbness of the
extremities.   The hands now  tremble so as to  prevent guid-
ing them to his mouth ; the  fingers are in constant motion  ;
tongue becomes dry,  of a dark color, and trembles on attempt-
ing to put it out.   Stupor finally comes on, involuntary dis-
charge of excrement, hiccough, twitching of the tendons, cold
clammy sweats, and death.

                        CAUSES.
   It is occasi  r. <1 by impure  Sir,  and putrid  effluvia from
vegetaMe and animal matter.  AVe are therefore,  not surpri-
sed to find it often originate in gaols, ships, and  dirty dwel-
lings, when numbers are crowded together, and  when it is
not possible to have sufficient ventilation.   It is a contagious
d:--<i-", and although human contagion, and the effluvia above
mentioned are the most frequent and active causes of this dis-
ease, yet they  cannot be  considered  the  only  ones, lor we
sometimes meet, with it in a country neighborhood, when;  it
cannot be traced either to contagion, or to anv ellluvia aris-
ing from  animal matter.   It  is evident therefore that unclean-
ness, a moist atmosphere,  much fatigue, depressing passions,
a poor diet, excessive study, and whatever weakens the nerv-
ous system,  mav be enumerated among the  causes.

                    TREATMENT.
   In some cases where the disease sets  in very viblentlv,
bleeding may  be (autiously used at first; but the safest way 
 28           TYPHUS, OR NERVOUS  FEVER.

 is to produce a smart eyacution of the stomach and bowels.
 For this purpose 20 or 30 grains of  ipecacuanha, or half the
 ipecac with 4 or 5 grains of tartar emetic may be dissolved in
 a pint or more of weak camomile tea,  of which the patient may
 drink a gill every fifteen or twenty  minutes until it excites
 vomiting,  and this should be assisted by drinking freely of
 warm  water.   If this emetic should not operate as physic, a
 cathartic of rhubarb, or castor oil, or  cremor tartar, should be
 given the next day.   To abate thirst give the saline mixture
 (see dispensatory)  every two hours.  Yeast is  a powerful
 remedy in  this disease, and after the  stomach and bowels are
 cleansed, it sometimes effects a cure without any thing else.
 It may be  given alone in doses of a half or a whole  table-
 spoonful every  hour or  two ;  or mixed up with powdered
 charcoal, or two table-spoonfuls of it  may be added to a quart
 of beer or  porter, and a wine glass full iriay be taken  every
 hour or two.   Sponging the body with cold water is likewise
 one of the  most powerful  means that can  be made use of in
 typhus fever, and the sooner it is adopted, after cleansing the
 stomach and bowels, the better.  It  may be used at any time
 of the day  when there is no sense of  chilliness present,  when
 the heat is  above what is natural, and when there is no pro-
 fuse perspiration or  sweating.   If great debility with sinking
 of the spirits should  come on after reducing the heat by spong-
 ing or  otherwise, some cordial such as wine or brandy should
 be given immediately.
   In this fever, the greater the debility,  the greater will be
 the danger, and therefore as soon as there is any remission of
 fever the great point is to keep up the strength by a liberal
 use of quinine dissolved in wine, or of Peruvian  bark with
wine, and a nourishing diet, such as wine  panada, arrow root,
 rice, toast,  &c.   By this general  plan a cure will generally
 be effected  ; but if at any time the head  should be  affected
with stupor and delirium, it will be proper to shave the head
 and frequently apply cloths wrung out ©f cold vinegar and
 water to it, or if that should not be effectual, a blister  to the
 head and mustard sinapasms to the  feet will  be  necessary.
 When  a diarrhea or  looseness occurs, three or four  drops of
 laudanum should be given, to be repeated and the  dose in-
creased as  may be found necessary.   But if these means fail
and there is great prostration of strength  with stupor,  old
 madeira  wine must  be given in large  quantities  ; he will rel-
ish it better mulled at first, but will soon  be able to take it 
SIMPLE  CONTINUED FEVER.
20
 clear to the extent of one or two  quarts a day without any
 danger of intoxication.   It should  be taken until the pulse
 fills, the delirium abates, and warmth returns to the extreni-
 eties ; and upon the smallest appearance of the stupor return-
 ing, the pulse quickening and  sinking, the wine  must be
 resumed and continued  in that quantity  which is found suffi-
 cient to  keep the patient from sinking.  When wine cannot
 be had, rum or brandy diluted with milk or sweetened water
 will answer, and with some patients  is  relished better.   As
 soon as the patient  is able to take nourishment, the quantity
 of wine must  be gradually diminished,  for even a third part
 of what was necessary when laboring under the disease would
 now produce dangerous  intoxication. .
   In very malignant cases, this fever is fatal on or before the
 seventh day ;  more frequently, however, those who die are
 carried off towards the end  of the second week.   When the
 patient lives over the twentieth day he generally recovers.
   In the earlv stage of this disease  when there is much heat,
 washing the face and lends with cold vinegar and water, and
 wiping the body with cloths wrung out of the same,  will be
 highly refreshing;  and  in  the  more advanced  stage of the
 disease when  there  is less heat, bathing  daily in a strong de-
 coction of black or  red oak bark about milk warm, will pro-
 duce the happiest effects.  The patient should have his linen
 and bedding changed often, and  every thing that contributes
 to cool air and cleanliness should be adopted.


                    CHAPTER  VI.

  SYNOCHUS, MIXED FEVER, OR SIMPLE CON-
                   TINUED FEVER.

                     SYMPTOMS.
   Simple continued fever  is that  which is most common in
this country.   The  symptoms in the first stages  of this fever
are similar to those which occur in svnochaor inflammatory li-
ver ; and, in the latter stages of it,  the symptoms are nearly
the same as those which take  place in tvphus.  The inflam-
atory symptoms however, are  not generally so violent as they
are in synocha, nor  are the typhoid  symptoms so alarming as
they are in  true typhus  fever.   The patient is generally un-
well  sometime before he is confined  to his bed; the pulse: 
so
SIMPLE CONTINUED FEVER.
wh?ch is quick and strong at  first, grows weaker without
diminishing in frequency.  The duration of the  disease is
very various, but when it once subsides the patient recover*
his strength very rapidly.

                     TREATMENT.
  In all  fevers we must recollect that nature is interrupted
in her course, and is struggling to regain her native channel.
The principle  object therefore is .to assist nature in re-estab-
lishing .a healthful action, by opposing with proper  means
every symptom  that  operates against this.   In simple  con-
tinued fever every variety of symptoms are occasionally met
with, and our  first and.general plan must be to moderate ar-
terial excitement by small bleedings when the pulse are full
and quick, and the pain  in the head considerable, and  the
patient of full habit of body ; and the bowels and stomach
must be evacuated of  their contents by a gentle emetic or ca-
thartic, or both.   Bleeding should be used only in the com-
mencement of the fever,  and practiced when  the fever is on,
and the heat above the natural standard of health.   The pa-
tient must be kept quiet and every source of irritation of body
or mind must be avoided.  Blisters must be applied if there
is local pain, and if the circulation is unequally diffused, de-
noted by cold feet, legs, hands arms, apply blisters and stim-
ulating drafts to the parts to cause the blood to circulate more
equally, for whjch  purpose give also Dover's powders once
an hour or any other diaphoretic, in their common  dose, (see
diaphoretics, dispensatory,) when the heat is great and the fever
high in addition to the diaphoretics;  or alone, give solution
of salts of nitre, or a  tea-spoonful  of  spirits of nitre once in
two hours.
  If typhoid symptoms come  on, delirium, tongue  black and
scabrous, with footed  breath, and black and offensive dischar-
ges,  the same  course  recommended  in  typhus must be pur-
sued ; and after  a. laxative of three grains calomel and eight
or ten  rhubard,  repeated until it moves the  bowels once or
twice ; give freely of port wine, quinine, bark, columbo, &c.
  The patient may be washed or sponged all over with cold
water at any time when the fever is on, and his linen and bed
clothes changed  frequently, but only when the heat and pulse
is above the natural standard.   The diet should be light and
nourishing, such as toast, gruel, tapioca, panado, rice, arrow
root, strong coffee, &c. 
TYPHUS SYXCOP.VLIS.
31
   N.  B.  In this fever, more than any other, the treatment
 is to be regulated according to discretion, and we must watch
 and combat  the symptoms as they show themselves.   The
 drink should be slightly soured with lemon  juice, any of the
 acids,  ripe peaches, tamarinds,  apples sliced in water, water
 and cream of tartar, and soda dissolved in water, and if the
 stomach reject these the inclination of the  patient must be
 consulted.  Cold drink must not be given when the patient
 is in a sweat.   If stupor comes on, in addition to tonics and
 stimulants, blisters must be applied to the arms and legs ;  the
 symptoms of irritability allay ed by musk, castor and opium
 as in true typhus.


                    CHAPTER  VII.

               TYPHUS  SYXCOPALIS.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   This kind of typhus or nervous  fever has appeared princi-
 pally in North America.   It is distinguished by sudden and
 great debility from the very tir^t, which prostrates the system
 at once, without any appearance of reaction throughout the
 whole disease.   The  manner of the  attack is like that of
 fainting, hysteria, palsy, apoplexy, or of general and exces-
 sive weakness.  The symptoms are  excessively rapid and
 df -tructive ;  the extremities are cold,  and the skin is insen-
 sible to the most powerful rubefacients  and blisters.   It is
 attended with pain in the head, vertigo, and a feeling of great  •
 sinking, or a painful  sense of vacuity and faintness at the
 epigastrium or pit of the stomach.   The stomach and bowel*
 are either entirely insensible, or very irritable ;  and the  least
 exertion greatly exhausts the patient.   Ii  sometimes runs its
 course in from three to seven days, and sometimes not under
 seveiol weeks.   I once saw  a < -a.se  whi< h continued nearly
 six months.   In this case there was violent  pain in the head
and symptoms of palsy.  One of the characteristics of this
disease is the great versatility or changeable ness uf symptoms.
 with extreme prostration ol strength in all of them, a  re-action
 seldom <*r never t.kingplace.   Sore throat sometimes accom-
 panies it, and petechia; or spots resembling Ilea bites will often
 occur.   Diflicult respiration, insensibility, coma, coldness of
 the surface, irritability of the stomach,  difficulty of swallow-
 ing, and petechia', arc fatal  symptoms. 
32
PESTIS OR PLAGUE.
                        CAUSES.
   Cold is most frequently the exciting cause ;  but it may ori-
 ginate from contagion or from exposure to a moist atmosphere,
 or from grief, fear, fatigue, excessive stimulation, or debility
 produced by other diseases.

                     TREATMENT.
   Every thing that has a tendency to waste the vital powers
 must  be avoided.  Bleeding,  purging, and  vomiting, will
 generally prove fatal, or at least will greatly retard recovery.
 Opium is considered the main stay in this disease.   The bow-
 els should be opened with some gentle laxative as castor oil,
 with which should be combined a grain of opium to prevent
 its operating much,  as two or three smart operations  might
 occasion the death of the patient.   When there is great stu-
 por witii insensibility approaching epilepsy, blisters may be
 applied to the arms, legs or back of the neck, and in such
 cases I have administered the croton oil with good effect.   It
 is said that calomel joined with a diaphoretic  medicine so as
 not to operate as physic under  twelve hours, cures the patient
 effectually.   In this disease the bowels may not be opened for
 three or four days or a week without inconvenience ;  but if
 there should  be tenderness or slight pain in the bowels they
 should then  be  moved by a gentle laxative, such as small do-
 ses of magnesia, or injections may be used, the opium in the
 mean time must be continued through the whole  disease.
 The quantity of opium to be given is three or foti? grains an
 hour, or even more ;  and if the pulse be soft and quick, with
 general weakness,  the system must  be  supported with warm
 sweetened wine or brandy by the tea-spoonful, .and continued
 while necessary without any regard to quantity, so long as it does
 not intoxicate.   As the system rises, a nourishing diet must
 be used instead of the wine, brandy and op: urn, and in all ca-
 ses the mind should be kept perfectly easy and tranquil, by
 concealing the danger of the case,, and encouraging the hope
 of recovery.


                 OF THE PLAGUE.

                     SYMPTOMS.
  The symptor •  of this terrible malady very nearly resem-
ble those of  typhus.  The great line of distinction between 
                   PETIS OR PLAGUE.                 .3J

them is, that the plague is always attended with  buboes in
the groins and armpits,  which are not 1o be observed in ty-
phus.  The attack, which is generally towards evening, com-
mences with a feeling of great lassitude and weakness, cold-
ness, but soon succeeded by heat of skin, giddiness, with pain
in the temples and eyebrows.   The natural expression of
countenance is changed into a wild furious look, or sometimes
a look claiming pity, with a sunk eye and contracted feature.
The pulse is small,' hard and  quick, and sometimes intermit-
ting.  Staggering, sudden and extreme prostration of strength
come rapidly on,  the speech  faulters, the stomach  rejects al-
most everv thing, the tongue  is white and  moist;  there is a
constant inclination to void urine, the evacuations are highly
otlensive, and the patient is perfectly indifferent about recov-
ery.  Generally on the third day the  buboes commence form-
ing bv excruciating pains in  the groins and armpits, and  the
patient then frequently goes  off delirious;  or if he survives
till the fith day when the febrile symptoms abate, he is almost
sure to die from debility. But if  the patient lives over  the
fifth dav, and the  bubo is fully formed, he is then considered
as nearly out oT danger.

                        CAUSES.
   It  is generally communicated by contagion  from actual
contact with the person  or clothing of the living or dead body
affected with it.   Those who have once had  the disease, al-
though not so liable to it as others,  are not considered  safe
from a second attack.   It may be U.ken like small pox, by
inoculation ;  but  that does not mitigate the disorder.   Doc-  *
tor Whyte,  in 1801, tried the experiment on himself, and
died on the fourth day.   Mr.  Van Rosenfeldt did  the same in
1817, and died on the  second day.    The plague generally
begins at Grand  Cairo, spreads to Alexandria,  and  from
thence through Syria to Smyrna and  Constantinople.

                    TREATMENT.
   The plague is  generally considered beyond the reach of
medicine.   Some  authors, however, are firm in  the belief
that it doe6 not differ materially from other summer fevers of
a high grade, and that it may be  prevented, and often cured.
It  is stated that sudorifics and  mercury alwavs do good ; that
when the disease is inflammatory and  attacks the brain, which
is known by the incessant headache and furious delirium from 
34     ERUPTIVE FEVERS, OR THE EXANTHEMATA.

the onset, blood  should be taken in a standing posture until
fainting is completely produced ;  and when the  perspiration
which follows it takes place, it should be enpouraged by warm
drinks.   The patient is then  to be immediately salivated in
the shortest time  possible, and  for  this purpose the Hindoo
method of doing it by cinnabar fumigations should be adopted,
as follows : bees-wax is melted and spread over strips of cot-
ton cloth ; an equal quantity of cinnabar in powder is spread
over the waxed strips, which are then rolled up in the shape
of candles ; the person to be salivated being seated, a blanket
is thrown over him, and the lighted cinnabar candle is placed
under the blanket so that  he inhales  the vapor.


                     CLASS II.

ERUPTIVE  FEVERS, OR THE  EXANTHEMATA.

                    CHAPTER I.

  The next subject to which we shall direct our  attention
is the exanthemata,  or third kind of idiopathic fever.  The
genuine exanthemata are small-pox, chicken-pox, cow-pox,
measles, and scarlet fever.  There are some diseases of less
importance which are allied in  some respects to these, and
may with propriety  be arranged in this part of the work, un-
der the title of the minor exanthemata.  In this chapter we
shall notice only the former.
  The exanthemata are attended with fever, and an eruption
which like the fever goes through a regular series of changes.
They occur seldom, or never more than once to an individual
during life, and arise from specific contagion.
   The character of oqj exanthematous fever, except in one
form of scarlatina,  is inflammatory, and this it assumes, in
the young and old, in all  climates,  seasons, and situations ;
and it is a striking phenomenon in nature developing disease.
that every race of men, under every variety of circumstances,
climate,  age,  and constitution  should be susceptible of  the
same disease, and that it should present every where the same
character and run through the same stages, and that having
occured, should scarcely, if ever, appear in the same individ-
ual a second time, though exposed to the utmost malignity of
infection.   There are many cases recorded in which it is ta\d
4 
SMALL POX.
35
 to have occured more than once in the same person ; but there
 are so many eruptive  diseases which may be mistaken  for
 small-pox &c.  that we feel safe in saying that any one who
 has once had an exanthematous affection may attend those la-
 boring under it without apprehending danger.   Some  persons
 remain invulnerable for  years and then take it; and a few
 remain so for life.
   Small-pox arises from  specific contagion, (see general doc-
 trine of contagion,) but we  are ignorant of its nature in the
 exanthematous diseases ;  but this, that it is of so subtle a na-
 ture  that a single vesicle of  small-pox  contains sufficient of
 the specific  matter of contagion,  to communicate the disease
 ~o hundreds.


                     CHAPTER  II.

                     SMALL POX.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   At the end  often or fourteen  days after receiving Small
 Pox contagion  into the system, the eruptive fever commences
 with severe pain in the back and head ;  with vomiting,  and dis-
 iressing pain at the pit of the stomach.   The  patient  is very
 drowsy, and sometimes delirious.   On the third day  of this
 fever the eruption appears like flea bites, first on the face and
 limbs, and gradually extending over the  body.   On the third
 day of the eruption a small vesicle or blister,* having a cen-
 tral depression, is observed on the top of each pimple  or pus-
 tule.  On the sixth day of the eruption, these pustules instead
 of having a  central depicssion or flatness, are now filled up
 with a thick yellowish matter, and become plump and round.
 On the seventh and eighth days of the eruption the pustules
 burst, and scabbing commences over the  body.  The  mildest
 form is when the pustules are distinct from each other  and
 are well filled up with matter ; it is then called distinct stmll
pox.  When the  pustules run together and remain flaf-fit is
 termed the confluent small  pox, and is much the most dan-
 gerous.

                    TREATMENT.
  All that can be done is to moderate the  violence of the fever
in the first stage by bleeding if the pulse ba full; during the
                           3 
 36     KINE POX, COW POX, OR VARIOLA VACCINA.

 disease cold air may be freely admitted into the room ; cool-
 ing and sour drinks should be given, and the bowels must be
 kept open either by mild purgatives or glysters.  In the con-
 fluent kind, and especially when the  clusters  are of a dark
 red color, the disease is more of a putrid nature, and  conse-
 quently, instead of bleeding, requires a liberal use of bark and
 wine to invigorate the constitution, as directed in the nervous
 fever.   If couvulsions, or great restlessness prevail,  the pa-
 tient must  be exposed to cold air, and  a dose of laudanum
 given.   If there should be difficult breathing, or swallowing,
 blisters are to bfe applied to the breast  and neck,  and such
 gargles as are recommended for sore throats may be employ-
 ed.  He must  live on a vegetable diet,  such as arrow root,
 panada, milk, rice, &c.  If the disease be of the putrid kind,
 wine, cider, perryr, porter or milk toddy, may be given freely.
   When the vaccine or cow pox matter cannot be procured,
 those who are about to be exposed to the small pox should
 be inoculated with small  pox matter, as  it renders the disease
 much safer ;  and for this purpose the system should  be pre-
 pared for it by a few doses of some gentle and cooling physic,
 a spare vegetable  diet, sour drinks,  and a cool airy room.
 The matter must be taken from the  pustule of a person who
 is otherwise healthy, or it may be obtained from one who has
 been inoculated, although he may have  had  the small pox
previous to  his being inoculated.  The  matter, made nearly-
 fluid may be inserted with a needle, or the point of a lancet,
 or on a bit  of thread by raising the  skin with the point of a
 knife or lancet and pushing it under.   On the third day the
pimple appears, and on the seventh or eighth day rigors come
on.  The feet should  be put in warm water once a day after
the pustule begins to appear ; this determines the blood to the
extremeties and lessens the eruption and inflammation about
the face and throat.  But the best way  of curing the small
pox is to prevent it entirely  by being  inoculated for the kine
pox.


  KINE POX, COW POX, OR V   i," r \ VACCINA.

   The genuine cow  pox original.,.     ' *■ \grease in the
.heels of horses.   Itappearson the tea'. '■ <■■  . i>   w, in the form
 of vesicles  of a  blue color approa/;■'.::\, -   ':   ; they are ele-
 vated at the margin, depressed at. the c>-wiw, and surrounded 
        KINE POX, COW POX, OR VARIOLA VACCINA.      31

 with inflammation.  Dr. Jenner, in the year 1798, discov-
 ered that those who are inoculated with the kine pox matter
 are effectually  protected  from the  small  pox.  The matter
 may be taken from the cow, or from the arm of a person al-
 ready inoculated.   The person  from whose arm it is taken
 should have no other cutaneous disease about him, otherwise
 the  matter will  not be good.   It should  be taken  from the
 arm about on the eighth day.   It makes but little difference
 how the matter is applied, but as good a way as any perhaps
 is to raise up the skin with the  point of a knife or lancet, and
 push in a bit of cotton thread which has been previously'soak-
 ed in the matter.  If the matter be good, and has taken effect,
 it will generally show  itself on  the the third day  by a circular
 small red spot a little elevated; it  continues to  increase in
 size and by the fifth day the vesicle  or blister is quite distinct.
 On the eighth day an areola or inflamed circle begins to forth
 around the vesicle,  which is now in  its perfect state.
   It is proper to observe that when the matter does not take
 effect a  false  eruption will sometimes appear ; and  although
 the regular progress of the pustule as above described will
 generally distinguish the  true from  the false» still the only
 sure method  of  determining the point is to  vaccinate with
 good matter the second time.   If it takes effect the second
 time we may be sure  it  failecPthe  first time; for those who
 have had the true kine pox once will  never  have  it again.
 By  making broad punctures on the body and shoulders, and
 introducing the matter at those places,  the  inoculation will
 take effect thirty or  forty hours sooner than  it will by intro-
 ducing it into the arm.   If a  person  he inoculated  for lb->
 kine pox after taking the small  pox,  they will both proceed
 together.and  modify each other.   The following case, " x
child exposed to the influence of the natural  small  pox vva;>
 vaccinated, and four days after  the operation was repeated.
 On the eighth day from the first vaccination no  appearance
was observed of the progress of the kine pox.   Further vacci-
 nation was then considered unnecessary and too late, and the
 parents were  advhed to  have the chid inoculated with On*
 small pox, which was  preferable to having  it in the natural
way.  Matter was taken from the hrothei, who had the'small
pox  very badly in  the  adjoining room, and  insert-id in the
arm, near where the vaccine matter had been inserted.   The
pox  rose on ihe arm, and to the surprise of the physician, the
vaccine vesicle also rose, and they progressed together,rnofj 
  38      VARICELLA, VARIOLODES, VARIOLOID, &C.

  fying each other.   The vaccine pox was smaller than usual,
  and went through its stages sooner than is common, though it
  had previously laid dormant, and appeared to have been put
». into  activity by  the  small pox.  The small pox was also
  modified, the pox were few, the sickness trifling, the confine-
  ment nothing; and the child  recovered  before his brother,
  who was first taken."
VARICELLA, VARIOLODES, VARIOLOID,OR MOD-
                IFIED SMALL POX.

  After stating, as a general rule, that vaccination secures
tfie system from small pox, it must be confessed that there
are some exceptions to this  rule, and that small pox does
sometimes take place in  those who  have been inoculated for
the kine  pox.  This,  however, is  not common ;  and most
generally whenever it does happen, the disease is rendered so
mild and the eruption so modified, by the  previous  vaccina-
tion, that it  is now by some authors  called varioloid, or
modified small pox.  The  eruptive fever is generally se-
vere, but it hardly ever fails  to go off entirely as soon as the
eruption  comes out, the pustules of which are frequently hard
or horny, and  they generally maturate on the fifth day.—
These pustules, however, have depressed centres like small
pox ; and it is a bone of contention among authors  whether
varioIoid.be a different disease from small pox, or  only the
same thing in a  milder form.  It is admitted by all that an
unprotected person who  is inoculated with varioloid  matter
will  have the true small  pox.   It may  safely be  said that
vaccination* secures the greater part of mankind both from
small pox and varioloid; still there are same constitutions
which it secures from small pox,  but does not protect from
the varioloid; there are  some other  constitutions  which it
does not protect at all ; and some likewise that small  pox it-
self does not  prevent from taking small pox  again, as often
as they are exposed to it.   But why it is,  that some constitu-
tions are thus incapable of being protected from small  pox, is
wot yet known, and probably never will be.
* Inoculation for theldne pox 
OF THE MEASLES.
39
VARICALLA, LYMPHATICA, OR CHICKEN POX.

   After a very slight fever the eruption appears in vesicles
or blisters about the size of a split pea, perfectly transparent,
like that which is raised by a saxld or blister ; but they have
no central depression like small pox.   About on the  fourth
day the matter in them becomes thick,  and  then  they very
much resemble  that stage of the small pox when the central
depression of its pustules is swelled out with matter.

                    TREATMENT.
   It is generally sufficient that the patient be kept moderately
cool, and  supplied with cold or sour drinks  and light food.
If there should be much fever, a dose of salts may he given;
and finally  the whole general plan to be adopted, both in this
disease and in the varioloid, is the same as that which is prac-
tised in small pox.
                    CHAPTER III.

                 OF THE MEASLES.

   This disease made its appearance in Europe about the same
 time of the small pox, and was for a longtime considered as a
 variety or modification  of  that complaint.  But  it  is now
 known to be a distinct disease.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   The measles commence with the usual symptoms of fever,
 from which at  first it cannot be distinguished.   We  are to
judge of  the disease from the prevailing epidemic; the eye-
 lids are swelled, the eyes suffused, a watery and morbidly sen-
 sible to light;  there  is a thin discharge from the nose, with
 sneezing,  and  a dry  cough and hoarseness, and difficulty of
 breathing.   Beside these catarrhal symptoms, the eruptive
 stage is marked by heaviness, drowsiness, great heat of skin,
 frequent and hard  pulse, and on the fourth  day from the oc-
currence  of cold chills the eruption usually  shows itself, but
 is some times delayed a few days longer.  The eruption first
appears on the forehead, and gradually spreads over the whole
body.   It first appears in red circular spots, which soon run 
40
OF THE MEASLES.
into irregular patches, the color is of a dingy red, very differ-
ent from the livid redness of the scarlet fever.  The fever is
commonly high, the stomach irritable, the cough severe, and
the symptoms merge to an acute inflammation of  the lungs.
In about five days the eruption disappears, but this is not al-
ways attended with a subsidence of the other symptoms.   It
is said by the doctors that measles have occurred eight times
in the same individual.   I never knew but one man who said
he had  had  the measles  more than once ; this man said he
had them seven timies, and in the seventh and last case his
head was literally striped of hair, and his finger and toe nails
come off.   Measles generally  prevail during the spring
months.  In feeble frames we have sometimes to witness the
dreadful spectacle of gangrenous erosions ; the gums ulcerate
and the teeth loosen and fall  out; a black  spot appears on
the cheek or on the corner of the lip, which spreads and des-
troys the patient.   This is called cancrum oris.
   The measles arise from specific contagion, and remain
in the system about eight days ; in many cases much longer,
even to two or three weeks.
  Inoculation is said to produce the measles and renders them
milder than when they  occur in the natural way.   The inoc-
ulation must be performed by  laying a piece of lint, dipped in
the blood of a person laboring under the measles, on a scarified
surface, or inserted beneath the skin of the person in whom ii
is to be produced.

                    TREATMENT.
  The treatment must  in the main be regulated by the symp-
toms.  If the disease is slight nothing more  is necessary than
to keep the body  open by  gentle cathartics, as epsom salts,
castor oil, senna, &c.   But if the febrile symptoms run high,
with difficulty  of breathing, we must bleed  largely, give an
emetic,  or brisk cathartic ; blister the breast, arms and legs
to draw the blood from the lungs ;  breathe through a tea-pot
the steam of hot water, and give Dover's powders or  small
doses of antimony or ipecacuanha or any of the  seudorifics
(sweating medicine) used  in fever.  This  course  will  be
particularly appropriate in cases where  they have  receded,
gone back, to bring them out; with putting the feet  in warm
water, and giving warm drink, wine whey, warm sling, mint
tea, &c.; but the patient must not be exposed to  cold while
the  eruptions are coming out.   If the cough is troublesome, 
            SCARLET I EVER, OR SCARLATINA.          41

 give freely  of flaxseed tea, slippery elm or solution of gum
 arabic.   Laudanum or paregoric may also be taken at night
 to allay the cough.
   We are to dread the consequences arising from measles in
 many instances as much as  the immediate disease, for fre-
 quently  phthisis pulmonalis (consumption) arises and des-
 troys the  patient.   Or the bowels may be left in a weak state,
 permitting a diarrhea  which  sometimes proves fatal.  An
 obstinate  inflammation of the eyes frequently ensues,  if the
 disease is neglected in the commencement.   These are gen-
 erally obviated by bleeding and  evacuting the first passages,
 in the first stage of the disease.
   But if the symptoms manifest a malignant kind of the dis-
 ease, and a  putrid  tendency  prevail, the treatment must be
 right to the  reverse of the above, and the cure must be con-
 ducted as in nerverous fever;. which see.
   Regimen ; should  be  proportioned to the degree of fever ;
 cooling mucilaginous drinks,  such  as rice,  or barley  water,
 flaxseed tea, elm tea, solution of gum arabic, &c. ; with jel-
 lies, toast, panado,  rice, arrow root, sago,  and gruel.   The
 greatest caution must be observed, that the patient be not ex-
 posed suddenly to cold.   I knew a young woman killed in a
 few hours,  through the over officiousness of attendants, by
 changing  her clothes when she was in a profuse perspiration.


      SCARLET FEVER, OR  SCARLATINA.

   The scarlet  fever attacks the skin,  the  tonsils, and the
 mucous membrane  in  their neighborhood, in mild cases there
 is but little or no affection of the fauces,  but a slight efflor-
escence.
   Scarlatina is divided into  three varieties.
   1st.  Scarlatina  simplex,  which  commences with  weari-
ness, dejection, chills, alternated with heat, sickness, and all
the common symptoms of fever in a slight degree.   The erup-
tions appear on the second day,  about the neck and face  in
red points, which in a few  hours cover the whole body, on
the limbs there  is a continuous efflorescence, but on the body
the rash is in irregular patches, the  color is  a bright scarlet,
being most distinct about the bendings  of the joints.   The
eruption is often rough to the touch,  but the simplest and sur-
est symptom of the disease is the papillae of the tongue, which 
42                  SCARLET FEVER.
are always elongated and extend their scarlet points through
the white fur that covers the tongue.
   2d.  Scarlatina angina, begins with  the  symptoms more
violent, and in addition  to the above  an inflammation of the
fauces appears, with  uneasiness in the throat, the voice is
thick, swallowing  difficult,  the throat appears red and swel-
led as in quinsy ; and  in most cases this goes on to ulcera-
tion, which produces a disagreeable fcetor, and the throat is
clogged with vicid phlegm.   In this form the eruptions sel-
dom appear before the third day,  frequently vanishing and
reappearing.   About the fourth or sixth day from its first ap-
pearance it goes off, and extensive exfoliation of the  cuticle
begins, which continues several days.
   The febrile symptoms are usually very high and of an in-
flammatory character, the heat of the  skin is more intense in
this than in any other form  of fever ;  the headache is gener-
ally severe, and not unfrequently  permanent deafness is the
consequence of this disease.
   3d.  Scarlatina malligna  is that  form  which appeared  in
London in  1745, which is thus described by Dr.  Fothergill.
"It is ushered in by  rigors, giddiness, acute  headache, rest-
lessness, faintings, a  sense  of heat and soreness  of  throat,
vomiting or purging.   An efflorescence appears at irregular
periods, but is seldom permanent.  A remarkable tumefac-
tion of the  fingers sometimes takes place.   In the throat ap-
pear dark sloughs (sluffs)  surrounded by a  livid base, and
occasioning intolerable fcetor,  the paroted glands  swell and
are painful to the touch, the  mouth is  encrusted with a brown
fur, and the throat is clogged with vicid phlegm, the inside
of the nostrils is of a deep red color, from which a corrosive
sanies flows, excoriating the cheeks and angles of the mouth."
These  are frequently attended by severe diarrhea, with dis-
charges of  blood from the bowTels, nose and mouth.   And if
the patient survive these, he has to  struggle through the great-
est debility or hectic fever which follows.  The fever in this
variety of  scarlatina is  typhoid  from the  beginning,  and is
frequently attended with coma.
   This disease is liable to be  confounded with measles ;
in scarlet fever the eruptions generally appear on  the second
day ; and spreads  more, and consists of pimples  under the
skin, in some places distinct, in others running together.  In
measles these are distinct and rough  to the touch, leaving a
space of natural skin  between the eruptions.   In scarlet fe- 
SCARLET FEVER.
43
 ver the color is a bright red.  In measles it is of a dark red in
 color resembling  a raspberry.   In  scarlatina the  cough is
 short,  without expectoration •  in  measles obstinate with a
 discharge of phlegm.  In scarlatina the eyes bear the light;
 not so in measles ;  and we will be further able to distinguish
 between the two from the character of the fever and the af-
 fection of the throat.
   Prognosis;  in the first variety we  need apprehend no
 danger ; in the second variety there is  some danger, but the
 third or malignant form we must look upon as a disease  of
 the utmost danger.   Specific contagion is the cause of scar-
 let fever, and it remains in the system  from four to six days.

                     TREATMENT.
   In the first variety sufficient will be  gathered on the treat-
 ment from the svmptoms  detailed, from the course recom-
 mended in  fever, and from a knowledge  of the treatment  in
 the other varieties of the disease.
   Where inflammation prevails, it must be moderated ;  and
 when typhoid symptoms are present, the system must be  sup-
 ported.  The cold affusion must  be  had  recourse  to in the
 extreme heat of the skin ;  there is no tendency to inflamma-
 tion  in  the  chest in this  complaint,  the application  of  cold
 water is therefore safe, even though there are ulcers in the
 throat, and  must be repeated, but  only when the skin is hot
 and dry.  The bowels must be opened  by ten or fifteen grains
 of submuriate of mercurv (calomel,) or some other  brisk
 cathartic medicine ; with  cold or acidulated water or lemon-
 ade for drink  when  the fever  is on, and a weak solution of
 tartrite of antimony in dose of a tea-spoonful once  an hour.
 When the disease attacks adult persons of full habit of body,
bleeding will  be indispensably necessary ; headache and op-
pression are the  symptoms which require it.   Leeches  may
be applied to the throat with  advantage when the tonsils are
much swelled.   Ifemeticsarcused it mustbein the commence-
ment, and given when the fever is on.   Ipecacuanha, or tar-
tar emetic, will  be best ;  this  clears the throat and  stomach
of the improper secretions and  acrid sordes that are lodged
there, which might occasion  fatal diarrhea.   Take ipeca<
one scruple, tartrite antimony one grain, mix, for grown  per-
son;  or take tartrite antimony three grains, wine of ipecac
six drams, chalk prepared drams li., water six ounces, syrup
J.'alf  ounce, mix, take atable-spoonful  every half hour until 
44                  SCARLET FEVER.
it vomits;  for children lessen the quantity.  These must not
be given where the disease is typhus.   If  diarrhea comes on
purgatives of rhubarb and soda will generally stop it.   The
vitiated mucus must be washed away during the disease by
gargles of rose water,  port  wine, decoction  of bark,  with
tincture of myrrh &c.  In typhus form the free use of bone-
set tea (eupatorium perforatum,) or- camomile, will be ser-
viceable if given  in the commencenpent, as the disease ad-
vances it will be found necessary to support the patient with
quinine, decoction of bark  and sulphuric acid, wine, opium.
and aromaiics in their  usual doses.   You  mu^t not forget to
move the bowels once a day with oleum riani or rhubarb, to
free them of the fceted matter that is constantly accumulating,
and produces diarrhea.   A valuable gargle is made by tak-
ing two table-spoonfuls of red pepper, and two tea-spoonfuls
of fine salt, beat them into a paste, add half pint-boiling wa-
ter, strain when cold, add half pint sharp  vinegar,  a table-
spoonful may be taken every hour ; the throat may  also be
gargled with the same.
  Blisters to the neck, arms, legs and between the shoulders
are useful in this form and in short the course as recommen-
ded in typhus must be followed here.
  The dropsy frequently succeeds every variety of this fever,
and occurs on an average upon  the  twenty-second day from
the decline of the eruption.  The common method of treat-
ing this form of dropsy is by purges, squills, digitalis and the
other diuretic medicines, at the same time that we support the
system by aromatics, and bark and wine.
   With regard to the prevention ; the sick must be confin-
ed to separate apartments,  the patient and every thing about
him must be kept perfectly clean, and the room well  ventila-
ted ;  frequently syringing or gargling  the throat and washing
the hands  of  the attendants will  render  perfect security.
The  above  precautions,  and  confining the  sick to a  sep-
erate room  irl  the house, will prevent the  spread of the
disease. 
THE MINOR EXANTHEMATA.             46
                    CHAPTER  IV.

  THE MINOR EXANTHEMATA, OR  SMALLER
                    ERUPTIONS.

                       HERPES.
   This term is appropriated to a disease attended with febrile
 symptoms, in  which the vesicles  pass through a course  of
 increase, maturation, and decline, terminating generally in a
 fortnight or three weeks.   These vesicles are distinguished
 by their occurring in distinct clusters appearing in quick sm>
 cession, set near together upon an inflamed base, which ex-
 tends some way beyond  the margin  of each  cluster.   The
 pain at the close of  the  disease is sometimes  so  intense  as
 scarcely to be allaved by opium.   The most frequent form of
 the disease is the shingles (herpes  roster,)  which  for the
 most part appears on the abdomen (belly.)
   The young are most subject to it.   But little is known of
 its causes; irregular modes of life  are probably the most
 common causes.  Herpes circinatus (ringworms) often prove
 severe in hot climates.

                    TREATMENT.
   The common purgative draught,  infusion  of senna, one
 ounce jalap,  fifteen  grains super tartrat  of potash, twenty
 grains, syrup of orange peel  (cortex aurantii)  half an ounce,
 repeated as circumstances require, or some other mild purg-
 ative, as salts and castor  oil, will  in general  be all that  is
necessary ; but occasionally we meet with cases which re-
quire a rigorous anti-  (against) phlogistic (inflammation)
treatment.   I have  always  managed the shingles  without
difficulty,  by giving a dose of salts, followed with Dover's
powders once an  hour, and washing  the  eruptions with a
weak solution of sugar lead.
   Herpes of the prepuce, are treated by laxative medicines,
with lead water applied  to the part or the black lotion, cal.
one dram with six ounces  lime water, may  he substituted.
Those occuring on the eyelids are best treated by laxatives,
lead water  to the part yellow ointment, (unguentum mtrifas
hydrargyri,) &c. 
46
THE minor exanthemata.
         NETTLE RASH, OR  URTICARIA.

   Urticaria is preceded by symptoms of fever, the eruptions
appear in the forms of white blister's similar to those produced
by the stinging  of nettles, and are called  wheals.  It is very
itchy at night or on exposing  the skin to the air.   It contin-
ues about a week, and is brought on in children by teething,
and  at different ages by disordered state of the  bowels and
stomach, and  taking improper food.  When  it arises from
improper food as shell  fish, almonds,  cucumbers, &c.  An
emetic followed by physic is the course,  and in children cut-
ting the teeth with a lancet and cooling physic is all  that is
requisite.


                       LICHEN.

   This is frequently mistaken for the genuine exanthemata;
lichenous  eruption is papular, of redish color inclining  to
purple, is in clusters, and for the most part very copious about
the hands and bendings of the wrist, and elbow ;  it does not
advance to the formation of vesicles, but usually ends in three
or four weeks by desquamation of the cuticle.  In many ca-
ses the constitution  is unimpaired,  at other times there are
violent febrile symptoms present.   There is  an  unpleasant
tingling and itching of the skin, increased by warmth.  Lich-
enous eruptions arise from  various  causes, from the heat of
the atmosphere, (lichen tropicus,) from the venerial poison,
but generally the causes are not well defined or probably un-
known.  This is without danger, and all that  is necessary to
be done, is to give saline apperients,  (dose epsom salts, for
instance,) observe a low diet  and cool regimen.


                    PEMPHIGUS.

   This is attended with fever, the vesicles are from the size
of a  pea to that of a walnut.   Sometimes the blister com-
mences round a small brown point  produced  by  the rupture
of a  small vessel.   The  vesicles affect the throat and some-
times extend through the whole tract of the bowels.
   Difficulty of swallowing and the appearance of vesicles jn 
              THE MINOR EXANTHEMATA.            47

the mouth, distinguish it when in the gullet.  Hiccup, pain
in the stomach and nausea, vomiting a bloody matter, show
its seat in the stomach ; general soreness of  the  belly, with
bloody stool*, in the bowels.   The vesicles when they lieal
leave pits like those of the small pox.
   When this is of an inflammatory nature the course recom-
mended in synocha is  proper here.   The  blisters  must be
opened  and washed frequently with milk and water.   The
purgatives must  be mild when the throat and bowels are af-
fected, castor oil and  salts will be proper.   And saline and
cooling medicines are  proper in the typhus  form,  together
with the tonics recommended in that fever.
                    POMPHOLYX,

   This is a chronic  ailment with  an eruption  of bullae, or
vesicles of the size of a  walnut  which appear in successive
crops, mostly on the arms and legs.   This differs from pem-
phigus, in not being attended with  fever.  It seems to be
owing to a depraved and debilitated state of the system.  The
doctors say medicine has no power over it.  I have seen bark
and  wine, with previous  laxatives,  have a good effect iu
pompholyx.


          THE  YAWS,  OR FRAMBCESIA

   This  prevails chiefly among  negroes, and  is endemic ia
Africa and the West Indies.  There is a slight fever followed
by pimples, increasing for eight or ten days, when pustules
form, wiiich are soon covered with loose irregular crusts, be-
neath which foul, sloughy ulcers form, which gradually shoot
out a fungus, resembling in appearance  a mulberry.  The
disease we„rs itself out in about eight months ;  is not atend-
ed with danger ; and laxatives, a cooling regimen, and the
application of (he actual  cautery, (hot iron,) or escharotics,
(corrisive sublimate, burnt alum, &c.) to the ulcers, and a
generous diet and tonics, toward the decline embraces the
whole treatment. •
   The minor exanthemata  are frequently mistaken  for the
genuine ; and this accounts satisfactorily  to me for the many
supposed cases of a recurrence  of measles, small pox,  &c. iu 
48   PHRENITIS, OR INFLAMMATION OF THE BRAIN.

the same individual.  Chicken pox and other similar cutane-
ous eruptions are frequently mistaken for the small pox, &c.
but the probability is that no individual is ever effected with
any of them more than once.            %


                    CHAPTER  V.


  LOCAL  INFLAMMATORY  DISEASES.

PHRENITIS,OR INFLAMMATION OFTHE BRAIN.

                     SYMPTOMS.
  The attack commences suddenly, by pains in the back of
the neck shooting into the head ; violent throbbing in the ar-
teries of the neck and temples ; redness of the face and about
the eyes ;  terrible headache ; incapability of bearing light or
noise ;  the ideas become confused ; the  pain increases ;  the
eyes sparkle ;  fierce delirium  comes rapidly on ;  the  patient
obstinately shuts his teeth against all food and medicine, and,
with any thing he can lay hold of, he attempts to destroy his
own life.

                       CAUSES.
  Exposure of the head  to  the scorching rays of the sun ;
violent fits of passion ; deep and long continued study ; sud-
den exposure,  to cold after great heat;  intemperate  use  of
ardent spirits ; suppression of usual  evacuations ; poison ;
want of sleep;  erysipelas of the face, fracture of the skull, &c-

                    TREATMENT.
  Twenty ounces of blood should be taken from  the  arm in
a full  stream,  and during the  bleeding the patient must be
held in a standing posture.  When the pulse rises, the bleed-
ing is to be repeated as the symptoms may indicate, or  the
strength of the patient permit.  Immediately after bleeding
a large dose of salts, or of calomel and jalap, must be given,
and in two hours, if it does not operate, it should be repeated.
The head should be constantly wet with ice, or cold vinegar
and water.  After the pulse is reduced by  bleeding, if  the
pain in the head should still continue severe, then cupping or
leeches should be forthwith  applied to the temples, forehead, 
DELIRIUM TREMENS.
19
and back of the neck.  And if the symptoms still prove ob-
stinate the head ought to  be instantly shaved, and the whole
of it covered with a blister.  It will be of great service like-
wise,  either to<put the feet and legs into  warm water, or  to
wrap  them up in cloths wrung out of hot water,  and after-
wards to bind hot mustard plasters on the feet, in order  to
produce a revulsion  of blood from the head.   Salts of nitre
dissolve*! in cold water should be given  in  a common dose,
(see  dispensatory,)  once in  two hours; and emetic tartar
may be taken between the times of taking the nitre, just so  as
to create a nausea at the stomach, but not  so much as to in-
duce vomiting.   And finally the  patient  should be kept in a
standing posture as much as possible, in a dark  room, and
everv thing around him ought to be quiet in order to keep the
mind  perfectly calm.
               DELIRIUM TREMENS.

                     SYMPTOMS.
   Trembling of the hands or whole frame ;  complete sleep-
 e^sness ;  delusions of sight,  the patient sees things that do
not exist; talks incessantly and incoherently;  and although
he is actually delirious, still there is not that violent pain  and
active inflammation which always  attends phrenitis.   Deli-
rium tremens is, however,  a dangerous  disorder.   If  not
cured,  it  usually runs  its course in  four or five days,  and
sometimes terminates in a fatal epileptic fit.

                       CAUSES.
   Intemperance, or suddenly abstaining  from  ardent spirits
ifter a long  intemperate  use  of them,  is the most common
cause.   It is said, however, that rheumatism, violent agita-
tions of the mind,  the poison of lead, and  the long continued
use ol opium, will produce it.

                    trf\tmi:nt.
   Opium is  th-3 main stay  and grand sheet anchor  in  thi*
complaint.   Bleeding is to  be strictly forbidden,  except by
leeches on the back of the neck and  about the head.   If it be
occasioned by suddenly abstaining from st->ng drink, it should
be given to  him again  in  small  quantities   Tie principal 
50                   OPHTHALMIA.
object is to calm the disturbance of the nervous system, and
procure sleep ;  and for this purpose  opium must be given in
large doses until it produces the effect.  Ethe,r,  hartshorn,
and camphor, are likewise useful; and a dose of physic should
be given in the beginning in order to regulate the state of the
bowels.


 OPHTHALMIA, OR INFLAMMATION  OF*THE
                         EYE.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   This disease commences with a pain or prickling sensation
as of sand in  the  eye ; increased redness of the corner and
inside of the eyelid ; attended  with pain and  heat over the
whole surface of the eye,  and  a plentiful effusion of tears.
As it becomes more violent it is accompanied  with  general
headache, impatience of light, a severe darting pain in the
eye and eyebrow, shooting into the head, with a feeling as if
the orbit were too j.mall for the eyeball.                  p

                       CAUSES.
   The same causes that induce inflammation of other parte,
will produce inflammation of the eye ; such as exposure of
the eyes to a strong light, or cold  winds, sudden transition
from heat to cold, particles of dust  and  sand,  night watch-
ing, sewing, reading, or writing between daylight and dark,
or by candle  light, and external violence done  to  the eyelids
or to the eve itself.   A scrofulous habit of body may also pre-
dispose to it; or it may be occasioned by small pox, or vene-
real complaints.

                     TREATMENT.
   If not very severe, it is easily cured  by  low died^gentle
purging, frequent application of cold water to the eyes, or, in
weak habits, by applying warm milk  and water mixed with
a  little brandy, or by  using an eyewater of four grains of
while vitrib! dissolved in half a gill of soft water, adding a
few drops of laudanum.  But when there is much inflamma-
tion, bleeding from the arm, and leeches to the eyelids, blis-
ters to the  temples,  or on the back of the neck, emetics, purg-
atives, and cooling  drinks will be proper; and if there be
 violent pain in the head the eyes may be frequently bathed 
INFLUENZA.
51
in a strong decoction of poppy heads,  or with warm  weak
laudanum.   Or soft linen cloths  kept constantly  wet with
cold water will sometimes reduce the heat and inflammation
of the eye better than warm applications ; and if one does not
answer, the  only way to determine which is preferable, is to
try the other.   The eyes must be defended from  the light
either by confinement in a dark room, or by wearing a piece
of green silk over them.  If the inflammation be occasioned
bv small pox, a seton on the back of  the neck is one of the
best remedies ;  an ounce of cremor tartar mixed with two or
three grains of emetic tartar,  may be divided into four or six
doses, to be given morning and evening ; and an eyewater of
sugar of lead (see dispensatory) adding a little camphorated
spirits, is likewise beneficial.   If it proceeds from scrofula,
or venereal  affections, the general system must be treated as
directed for those complaints.


        t           CHAPTER VI.

    CATARRH, COMMON COLD IN THE HEAD.

   Catarrh is attended with a sense of fullness in the nose,
weight and  fullness in the head, with an altered state of the
discharge  from the parts.  At first the  secretion  from th<
schneiderian membrane of the nose is entirety checked ; after
a time there is a copious acrid discharge from the nose, whic:.
::t length becomes natural in the quantity and quality.   The
inflammation extends to the mucous membranes in the neigh-
borhood,  and produces redness and watering of the eyes,
horseness, soreness in the throat, cough, oppression about the
chest and difficulty of breathing.

                       CAUSES.
  The exciting causes of catarrh are cold  and  changes of
weather.   There is one variety of this disease which appears
to be contagious, and is known by the name of influenza.


                    INFLUENZA.

  The epidemic catarrh or influenza is sudden in  its attack
and is attended  with uncommon languor and debility, severe
                           4 
52                      QUINSY.
headache  and a disorded state  of the stomach ;  it generally
runs its course in three or four days.   It is not a  very dan-
gerous disease except when it attacks infants and elderly per-
sons, to them for the most  part it is mortal.

                    TREATMENT.
  The patient should keep within doors, take a dose of salts,
abstain from animal food, and promote a profuse sweat.  To
relieve the cough and soreness of the throat, fake flaxseed or
elm tea, or gum arabic one oz., water three oz., or cinnamon
water one oz., rnix and take a table-spoonful or two occasion-
ally ;  or tincture of opium and  camphor half an ounce, wine
of antimony  half an ounce, half an ounce salts of nitre, laud-
anum one eighth of an ounce, gum arabic two ounces, water
eight ounces, take a tea-spoonful once an hour ;  or any of a
similar composition.  If there is considerable oppression about
the chest with dry  cough and fever, bleed and pursue  more
active means of depletion as emetics and cathartics.
  In the epidemic  catarrh the same general  treatment is to
he pursued, diaphoresis and expectoration must be promoted
by the common diaphoretic and expectorant  medicines,  as
preparations of antimony,  ipecac, Dover's powders, squills,
snake root, liquorice, &c.   On account of the great  debility
attendant on  influenza  in a day  or two from the commence-
ment give bark and cordials.


    QUINSY, OR CYNANCHE TONSILLARIS.

  This is an inflammation of the throat,  affecting especially
the glands, called  the  tonsil glands, and spreading in many
instances to the palate, uvala, pharynx, and nose.

                      SYMPTOMS.
  It is distinguished by redness and  swelling in the throat,
by difficulty of swallowing, and fever.   The swelling some-
times extends to the eustachian  tube, and produces deafnes?.
The fever is generally  urgent, the pule is often as high os
one hundred and twvuy a  minute, the tongue covered with a
thick  coat of fur.   The duration of the disease varies from a
few days to several w^eks.   When the inflammation  is active
it terminr.tcs by supuration  in one or both of the glands, which
hursts in six or eight days ; when the iuflamalion is of a pur- 
QUINSY.
C:
 pie color, it partakes of the nature of erycipelas, and generally
 terminates in small ulcers of a grey color, resembling cyncho
 maligna, but  these go off in a few days without producing
 any other inconvenience.  This in general is not considered
 q disease of much danger, yet it is that which deprived' no?
 the United  States only, but the world of her brightest orn/i
 ment, George Washington.*

                       TREATMENT.
    When the symptoms are urgent and the fever high,  lll&ed,
 or apply leeches  externally  to the  throat;  when the tonsils
 or palate are much swelled they should  be  scarified  Vfilh.n
 knife or lancet, a little blood  obtained  directly from  thea-
 parts will afford great relief.  The throat must be rubed with
 some rubefacient  lineament,  the best of which is equal parte
 aqua ammonia and sweet oil.  I have frequently  arrested  i'.
 by giving an emetic in the commencement, this is somelim ;.
 useful in the later stages  as the action frequently causes (Ir
 swelling to burst.  The bowels must be  oioved by a smert
 dose of salts.   The use of gargle.% as decoction of cinchaqia
 bark made strong with alum, or infusion of roses and pepner
 sweetened with honey, or cayenne pepper, a tea-spoonful, Iiqi
 water half pint, three ounces peruvian bark, to which add a.
 few drops muriatic acid, rinse the throat frequently ; or wh8r
 is as good as any  thing in the world in form of gargle,  taki a.
 ea-spoonful red or any kind of pepper* half pint boiling water.
 a small piece of alum, and if convenient,  one pint strong! v»
 «r decoction of dogwood ; gargle the mouth and  throat fre^

  * On the afternoon of the 13Ui December, 1793, whila the General war. nd
 uig out to oae of hw farms, he was o/<;"t i'-; i by a rain which soon turnod
 into a yno-.v storm.   A quantity of imow wm deposited betwixt his rravs.1 nr/,
 neck, to w.lich ho paid no particular attention,  l>u. on his return home sup
 ped and  wont to hi -A  as muni.  Som.j time  befo:<r diy lie was awqlierwd,
 with sore throat, and difficult hre4thing.  A dor.  > i<; wan called up, who blod
 hiin, wind ..Tord'id no relief.  About ten o'clc.:' i«r. (,'raik, ofAiexiid ii,
 reached ." ;o nit Vernon : h • immediately callod Cu; "oiiqhoI, doctor* >>rl srirf
 !5;own.  All was done t tat human *kill coal! do; but the moments hastened
 ■ ii!y to coniirn toe previous declaration of the UL^trious sufferer. " thai hi
 hoar w.~;com^."
  Toobli?.! Mrs. Washington he contin>ir:d lotako mslicinenntil the  ipfiajn-
 mation o:.>t!icted Bwailowing; he then undrowd himself and  went  to had,
 as he said, "I'ldis.."  About half a;i )i<-ur before Le died, ho desired eU to
leave him, that he might spend his last munioii:.-, wi'h God.
  Thus, lie who had baen the xage m cmncil, 'U:-. t*.o7^ in war, and ho, who
kai filled up the meavxre of his cuanlry'a /jlcrt; was  fha triumyhtat chruV/ir
ia the ttri.is of death!
                              4* 
54
LARYNGITIS.
quontly ; but these must not be swallowed as they aggravate
the Complaint  Apply blisters to the throat, upper  part of
the breast or behind the ears, and more especially if the dis-
ease appears to be stationary.  When the tumor is so large
as to impede respiration, a  deep incision must be made with
the lancit, this will let out the matter if formed, and if not the
flow of blood  will lessen the  inflammation and  give  instant
relief.   When the quinsy leaves a permanent  tumor, it is
recommended to exterpate  it with the knife or by a ligature,
this should not be resorted to unless the tumor is likely to
suffocate the patient.   Inhaling the fumes of warm vinegar
through the spout of a tea-pot, and warm applications to the
thrd'at, when  it cannot be  scattered,  must be resorted to, to
favor supuralion.


     MUMPS, OR  CYNANCHE PAROTEDCEA.

   This is an inflammation of the paroted  gland situated at
the corner of the jaw.   It begins with slight fever, followed
by swelling at  the angle of the jaw, the swelling continues
three or four days, and then  usually goes off bv  resolution
In a few cases it has terminated  in su;>pecration.  This* dis-
ease is manifestly contagious.  As the tumor subsides other
parts are likely to be affected, when this occurs the treatment
»:•: the same as if it had arisen from any other cause.

                    TREATMENT.
   The mumps seldom require medical treatment.  Confine-
ment to the house, warm fomentations, and a dose of salts are
,idi that is necessary in ordinary  cases.  _ W here it is morr
f^vere, bleeding and brisk purging, small doses of tartar
emetic, and  blisters near the swell.ng will be proper.   If tho
(estes are  affected, use cooling applications  and suspend  tin.
j'.trts.


 LARYNGITIS, INFLAMMATION OF THE LARYNX
       OR UPPER PART OF THE WINDPIPE.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   The upper part of the w ndp'-   is called the larynx ; the
 lower part,  the trachea.   A::u'.  i ' •;> <;i ition-of the larynx 
CHRONIC LARYNGITIS.
65
is known by a pain in that part of the windpipe ; by difficul-
ty of breathing and swallowing, hoarseness, loss of voice, and
a terrible sense of suffocation.   The pain is increased by pre*
sing on the thyroid cartilage, (Adam's apple.)   Putting out
the tongue is also generally attended with pain.  There is
almost a perpetual hawking and spitting up of a tough mucu*
or phlegm.  It is a very dangerous disease, and is apt to ter-
minate one way or the other in about four days.

                       CAUSES.  .
  It has never been  known to arise from any thing else ex
cept cold, and seldom attacks those who are less than forty
vears of age.

                    TREATMENT.
  Prompt and  vigorous measures are to  be adopted at the
very onset.   The patient  should immediately be bled until
fainting is produced, and repeated if necessary, until the vio-
lence of the inflammation abates.   The bowels must be open-
ed by glysters, and as soon  as he can swallow, a  brisk ca-
thartic of fifteen or twenty grains of calomel should be given,
and repeated in doses of  from five to ten grains every third
hour, or even in larger doses if the rising of the inflammatory
symptoms should require it.   A weak solution of emetic taT-
tar  in water, given in small doses to nauseate the stomach, is
very valuable in reducing the inflammation ;  but it must not
be increased so far as to excite vomiting, as  this would in-
crease the inflammation.   Leeches to the  throat are likewise
beneficial, and when they are taken  away a blister  on thf
same place will have a good effect.


              CHRONIC LARYNGITIS.

  There is a chronie or slow  lingering inflammation of U.t<
lyrynx, which  is more common than the acute of which I
have just been speaking.   It continues sometimes from three
to twelve months, and begins by pricking  pains in the throat,
cough, difficulty of breathing, and a long inspiration or draw-
ing of the breath, with a singular noise, very much  like that
which happens in the croup.   An expectoration of ropy mu-
cus takes place, hoarseness, pain in the side or breast, and ;.
slow hectic fever.   It is attended with a hot skin, dry tongiu . 
'5b                     PLEURISY.
quick pulse, and  costiveness of the bowels.   The breathing
at iength  becomes more and more difficult,  and the patient
fjnally dies from actual suffocation.

                     TREATMENT.
   It is relieved for a time by frequently applying leeches, or
blisters, to the throat.   Small doses of calomel, (cicputa oison
hemloc) and opium, are generally recommended with a view
to produce an  alteration in the system ; but the truth  of the
matter seems to be, that it is easier for doctors to describe the
symptoms of this  complaint, than to cure it.


                   CHAPTER VII.

                    PNEUMONIA.

   Pneumonia is an acute  inflammation occurring in any of
the parts within the thorax.  These all arise from too  great
a flow of blood to the part,  and  by distending the small ves-
sels produce the pain ; consequently the object is to lessen
the quantity of blood, and  by  blisters and stimulating drafts
to draw the  blood to other parts of the body.


                      PLEURISY.

   The  four following  symptoms characterize the various
forms of inflammation, fever, pain of the side, difficult breath-
ing, and cough.   In pleurisy there is an acute pain generally
of the left  side, breathing increases the pain,  is short and hur-
ried, particularly  when lying on  the side affected, the  cough
is at first dry,  the pulse frequent, strong, and hard, the tongue
is covered with a thick fur, and thirst, restlessness, hot  skin,
scanty and high colored urine ; attended with urgent fever is
characteristic of pleurisy.

                       CAUSES.
   This is generally caused by cold ; any thing that obstructs
perspiration  as exposing the body suddenly to cold when in a
state of perspiration, or very warm ; and is produced by any-
thing that  increases the circulation, and by the use of ardeiU
spirits. 
             INFLAMMATION of the lungs.           57

                     TREATMENT.
   In all acute thoracic inflammations,  bleeding is  the main
anchor of our hope.   The  blood should be drawn off from a
large orifice ;  physicians have always been struck with the
instantaneous relief which follows the taking of a quantity of
blood (say a pint) in a few seconds ; and the subsequent de-
bility is not so great as follows the taking half the quantity in
triple the time.  On standing, the blood is covered with buff,
a substance resembling starch, (this appearance blood exhi-
bits in all inflammations, and in pregnancy.)   Cathartics of
<alts will in general be  best, but any others may be used.
(Misters must be applied to  the side, and if the pain continues
they may be applied to the  arms.   The bleeding and physic
must be repeated once in twenty-four hours, or oftener if the
symptoms are urgent until the patient experiences relief.  The
fever must be  treated as directed in inflammatory fever, give
nitre, tea-spoonful salt petre in  a tea-cupful of cold water in
dose of table-spoonful once  an hour, or tea-spoonful spirits of
nitre once an hour, or a weak solution of tartar emetic, tea-
spoonful  once an hour ; or one grain emetic tartar, two grains
ipecac  every hour.  This determines the blood to the surface
of the body and relieves  the pain.   Cataplasms of mustard to
the hands and feet favor this object.   To relieve  the trouble-
some cough and  promote a raising,  let the patient  drink of
any of the mucilages or  expectorants mentioned under their
respective heads; such as liquorice stick or ball half an ouncej
two table-spoonfuls oxymel of squills, one ounce gum arabic,
half an once  gum ammoniacum, seneka snake root  half an
ounce, one pint boiling water, give a table-spoonful  as occa-
sion may  require.   Tea of slippery elm bark, small doses of
solution of antimony in flaxseed tea or a solution of gum ara-
bic, &c.  &c.
  INFLAMMATION OF THE LUNGS, OR PERI-
                    PNIXMONY.

                      SYMPTOMS.
  This is characterized by fever, difficulty of breathing, tough
and pain  under the breast bone, and betwixt the shoulders u
sense of fullness and tightness across the chesl, great anxiety,
restlessness, loss of appetite and sleep, quick, hard pulse, the
breath  is hot, the  tongue is covered with  a yellowish fur ; 
58           inflammation of the lungs.
urine turbid.   The free passage of the blood  through  the
lungs being obstructed, the veins of the neck are distended,
the face swollen, with dark red upon  the cheeks and  about
the eyes.  The pain  is aggravated  by  lying on the side most
affected, and generally  the patient prefers lying on his back.
   When the mucous membrane lining, the large branches of
the windpipe  that terminate in the lungs, is affected by acute
inflammation  it is called acule bronchitis, the  most urgent
symptom of this form is tightness about the chest, respiration
is hurried, and accompanied  by wheezing  in the throat,  and
the cough is from the first attended  with some degree of ex-
pectoration.
   A copious and easy raising of rrucus marks the decline of
the inflammation, and  it is not unfavorable if the spittle is
tinged with blood.   A  cream  like deposition in the urine  and
a free warm perspiration are equally favorable, but if the pa-
tient be very weak  the expectoration  may .exhaust  him, it
being in greater quantity than  he can raise; this is called
effusion.
   The termination of peripneumony are by vomica, or ab-
seesses occasionally, these may remain for years without  pro-
ducing fatal consequences, and if they are in a person of strong
habit of body will frequently heal;  and by gangrene (sloughy,
mortified, abcess,) this seldom occurs  and cannot be detected
during life ; and hepatization or hardening of the lungs,  this
is produced by coagulaqle lymph, which is thrown out by the
vessels of the substance of the lungs.

                       CAUSES.
   Inflammation of the lungs  is most commonly produced bt
cold and  sudden changes of weather; it is also occasioned by
other diseases, such as  measles, small pox, catarrh, hooping
cough and occasionally rheumatism and gout; and  is produ-
ced by severe exercise, as loud and long speaking and  also
by the use of ardent spirits.

                    TREATMENT.
   The structure of the lungs  is so  delicate that it will not
bear acute inflammation many hours  before the important
functions are destroyed, or the foundation  for  consumption
laid.
   The antiphlogistic treatment must be adopted with prompt-
ness and energy to produce resolution, the only safe termina- 
peripneumonia notha.              59
 tion.  The patient must be bled freely from a large orifice,
 nnd repeated every few hours until it produces relit-f.  Chil-
 dren, no matter  how young,  must be bled  if a vein can be
 found.   I am in  the constant practice of following blood let-
 ting with an emetic, ten grams tartar emetic in half pint warm
 water, and  give  two table-spoonsful every ten  minutes  until
 it operate, to children  in  the  same manner give fifteen or
 twenty grains ipecac ;  this 1 follow up wilh a cathartic of ten
 grains of calomel, and  table-spoonful of castor oil,  (propor-
 tioned, however, to the age of the patient,)  or some other ac-
 tive physic.   When an emetic cannot be  given the  calomel1
 and oil must not  be omitled.   Asa substitute for  bleeding in
 cases of children, I use small and  frequently repeated doses
 of solution of tartar emetic, after evacutmg the first passages.
   Refngerent medicines may be employed at (he same time,
 as, twenty-five grains  nitre, half pint water acidulated  with
 lemon juice, give a table-spoonful once in two hours, or spir-
 its of nitre,  Sec.   The  best medicine in use perhaps for these
 thoracic  inflammations  is asclepias  decumben  or  pleurisy
 root, (see this in  dispensatory,) a half a tea-cupful of the in-
 fusion is given every  two hours.   The  oxymel of squills,
 gum arabic, liquorice, snake root, gum ammonicum, &c. must
 be given to promote expectoration.  Blisters are  indispensa-
 bly  necessary, and must be applied early  in the complaint
 betwixt the shoulders, to the arms and breast.  In very youn^
 children blisters are too severe, and we must substitute cata-
 plasms of mustard, or paper dipped in vinegar and sprinkled
 over with fine pepper.   When the brealhing continues diffi-
 cult, the use of the tincture of digitalis in dose  of six to ten
 drops every three hours, gradually increased, (dose from one
 to five drops for children.)  When the inflammation abates
 and  the pain subsides, the patient must be supported bv tonics
 and  a nourishing  diet.   When it puts on a  typhoid form it
 must be treated by  gentle  emetics and cathartes, and on tho
 same plan as other typhoid forms of fever.   (This variety i*
called pneumonia biliosa.)


            PERIPNEUMONIA NOTHA.

   Whev pleurisy occurs in the debilitated, (he  old or  the
phlegmatic, it is known under the name  of bastard pleurisy
->r perepneumonia notha. 
60                    CONSUMPTION.
                      SYMPTOMS.
   Cold and hot alternately, acute pain in the head, constant
cough,  quick and  difficult respiration, cheeks swelled, eye*
slightly inflamed, intermitting pulse, sickness at the stomach.
giddiness, general  lassitude and pains in the chest, character-
ize what is called subacute bronchitis.
   Chronic bronchitis is attended  with frequent pulse, furred
tongue, pain in the side,  or head, cough, slight  difficulty ot
breathing, increased by exercise,  and cold extremities.
   I name these because they are generally  noticed by physi-
cians ; but it is of no consequence, the treatment is the same
as in inflammation of the lungs ; proportioned to the age and
constitution of the  patient.


                   CONSUMPTION.

   Is a chronic inflammation of the substance  of the  lungs.
It most generally occurs in those of a scrofulous disposition or
habit.   The scrofulous disposition is known by  a clean fan-
skin, bright eyes, white teeth, delicate rosy complexion, san-
guine temperament, great  sensibility, thick  lips, and large
veins.   Persons who are very small around the breast, that
is, those of a narrow chest, and prominent shoulders, are also
more liable to this disease than others.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   It begins  with internal heat,  uneasiness and  pain in the
breast or side, increased by exercise, with a quick pulse, dry
tickling cough, husky dryness of the  palms of the hands, with
a slight flush of fever  which  is  worse towards  evening and
better in the morning ; the bowels are generally costive, and
there is an increase of high colored urine, which on cooling
deposits a large quantity of reddish or soapy sediment.   Spit-,
ting up fresh frothy blood at length takes place ; the cough
becomes more and more troublesome, with  night sweats, and
an uneasy dull  heavy  pain is now seated in the left side, or
breast.  The appetite  is good, but the flesh is fast wasting a-
way.  Taking a long breath begins to increase the pain, and
the matter or  pus  now raised up in choughing,  appears in
round lumps of a straw color, and sinks in water.   The  mind
is frequently even  stronger and more discriminating than it is
in health, but his judgment is generally erroneous on one sub- 
CONSUMPTION.
61
 ject;  for let the danger be what it may, he is full of hope and
 enjoys himself in the  delusive anticipation of approaching
 health.   The patient sometimes dies from extreme weakness ;
 sometimes from the bursting of an abscess, or the rupture oi
 a large blood vessel of the lungs;  but most generally  he is
 finally suffocated by the accumulation of pus in the bronchia.*

                        CAUSES.
   Besides the scrofulous habit and particular formation  of
 body  already mentioned, which predispose to consumption,
 some  of the exciting causes are hooping cough, measles^ small
 pox,  pleurisy, intemperance,  violent passions, playing  upon
 wind  instruments, and every thing that has a tendency to ii*- <
 duce a weak inflammatory state of the lungs.

                     TREATMENT.
   By physicians both of the past and present  time, it is gen-
 erally pronounced  incurable ;  but  in order  to palliate the
 symptoms and give temporary relief, the common practice in
 the first stage of the complaint is to bleed  in small quantities
 two or three times a week, according to the force of the pulse.
 Blisters to the  breast and back are  likewise  recommended.
 Small doses of emetic tartar to promote  expectoration  and
 perspiration, by nauseating the stomach ; digitalis or faxglove
 (see dispensatory)  to lessen the force  of the blood in the ar-
 teries; and cooling drinks of nitre or cremor tartar to mode-
 rate the general fever, are also  directed.   After the inflam-
 matory symptoms are reduced, small  doses of calomel arc
 sometimes given until the gums  begin to be sore, and the
 bowels are to be kept in good order by some gentle laxative,
 such as oil, manna, magnesia, &c.  Other expectorants (see
 dispensatory) may be used instead of the emetic tartar.   The
 night sweats are to  be checked and the system supported (so
 far as it can be done without increasing the fever,) by the u;><
of lime water, elixir of vitriol, tar water, port wine,  peruvi-
an bark, &c. (see dispensatory.)
   The dress should be regulated according to the changes of
the weather, and a pure air, with moderate exercise is to bo
advised.   In the first or inflammatory stages, the diet should
be light and cooling, such as milk,  buttermilk, rice,  arrow
root, sago, ripe fruits, and vegetables.   But in the latter sta-
The windpipe when it branches into the lungs. 
62                   PERICARDITIS.
ges a more nutritious diet is necessary, and the patient may
eat fat meats, raw oysters,  and whatever else he  1 kes, and
finds to be easy of digestion.   Issues and setons are beneficial
in this disease.   Dr. Mudge cured himself by  keeping con-
stantly open an issue between his shoulders of fifty peas ; and
by using at the same time a milk and vegetable diet.   Sul-
phur  mixed  with peruvian bark  is highly recommended.
Another  plan is, to mix eight ounces of vinegar with the same
■quantity  of rain  water, sweetened with sugar,  the  whole to
be taken during the course of twenty-four hours, with a  light
vegetable diet, and  only two meals a day.  Inhaling ihe va-
pors of tar has a good effect.  One ounce of subcarbonate of
potash is to be added to every pound of tar, which is then to
be placed in a vessel over a spirit lamp and boiled slowly, so
as to prevent burning.
   The lichen islandicus or iceland moss, has been highly cel-
ebrated  for curing consumptions.  It affords a nutritious mu-
cilage, which  is bitter and very strengthening to the stomach.
Whatever doubts there may he with respect to its  being  an
infallible remedy,  one thing is certain, it can do no harm to
try it.   The  method of preparing and using it  is,  to boil an
ounce or an ounce and  a half of the lichen slowly for fifteen
minutes  in a quart of milk, and drink a tea-cupful  frequently
in the course  of the day ;  or two drachms of  the moss may
be boiled in a pint of milk for ten minutes, and used for break-
fast and  supper.  If milk disagrees with the stomach, water
may be used  instead of it, adding two drachms of sliced li-
quorice root about five minutes before it is done boiling, and
a tea-cupful may be taken four times a day.


  PERICARDITIS, OR  INFLAMMATION OF THE
                   PERICARDIUM.

   The pericardium is that membranous sack  or  bag which
encloses the heart.   As a primary affection, it  is very seldom
that the heart itself is ever inflamed.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   Besides the inflammatory symptoms which are common to
 cither diseases,  inflammation of the pericardium is known by-
 pain in the region of the heart, or pit of  the stomach,  like a
 suffocating weight, and extending to the right  side ; it is at- 
PERICARDITIS.
63
tended with palpitation and violent throbbing of the heart and
arteries.  Noise in the ears,  giddiness,  sighing, and  great
anxiety of countenance, are common ;  he breathes by catches
or starts,  and is obliged to draw in his breath very graudu-
?.lly.   Breathing is frequently so difficult that the patient ap-
prehends  immediate death.   There is generally a dry  inces-
sant cough  which, is increased by  pressing on the pit  of the
stjmach ; the  pulse has a harsh jarring feeling, and finally
becomes irregular ; the tongne is white, and the whole body
is covered with a copious perspiration.

                        CAUSES.
   Sometimes it is occasioned by cold, but more commonly it
is caused  by the metastasis of acute rheumatism.   (The word
metastasis  signifies the translation or changing of a disease
from  one  place to another.   When rheumatism changes its
place and  settles on  the pericardium, it produces inflamma-
tion of  the [>ericardium ; and  this  inflammation of  the peri-
cardium is therefore caused by the  metastasis of that rheuma-
tism.)  Persons of a broad chest and  plethoric habit of body
are supposed to be more liable to this disease  than others.

                     TREATMENT.
   The treatment  must be conducted on  the general plan of
reducing inflammation.   Blood should immediately  be  taken
from the arm to as great an  extent as the patient can bear.
A dose  of calomel and jalap, or of some other active physic
is then to  be given.   Cupping, or  leeches over the part affec-
ted, with  warm fomentations are  proper ; and  afterwards,
blisters  may be applied.  Nitre, and small doses of ipecac,
or emetic  ts.rtar should also be given every hour or two, in
wler  to assist in  reducing  the fever.   If the  patient cannot
bear much bleeding, five grains of calomel mixed with three
of emetic  tartar may  be  administered every  two  or  thre>
hours ;  and  at night a  portion of Dovers powders,  (see dib-
pensabwy) will allay the irritation ol  the cough  and procure
sleep.   As the  patient begins to get belter, a drain should  be
made  nearly opposite the heart by means of a  seton,  and kept
open a month or two;  he should avoid all  severe exercise.
[•strain his pav-ions or any emotion of the mind which would
lend to  hurry the  circulation, ;md occasionally take  a portion
of s,,n:e kind of physic. 
G4
GASTRITIS.
                   CHAPTER VIII.


 GASTRITIS, OR INFLAMMATION OF THE STOM-
                         ACH.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   Burning heat and acute pain at  the pit of  the  stomach,
 increased upon swallowing even the mildest drinks.  There
 is a constant inclination to vomit; distressiny thirst;  tossing
 of the body;  anxietyof countenance ;  extreme debility, and
 sometimes delirium ;  the pulse  becomes quick  and intermit-
 ting, the extremities cold, and death soon follows.

                       CAUSES.
   External injury, powerful emetiis, poisions, hard indiges-
 tible substances, or drinking  cold water  when the body  is
 much heated by exercise,  may produce it.  It  is sometimes
 occasioned by the metastasis of  other diseases,  such as gout,
 measles, &c.

                     TREATMENT.
   Unless the inflammation can be reduced in the beginning:,
 mortification fakes place in a very short time, and the patient
 will die in spite of  medicine.   Therefore, a violent pain  in
 the stomach with sickness and fever, should never  be neg-
 lected.   Immediate and copious bleeding is positively neces-
 sary.  The pulse  may appear to be small; hut this must not
 be regarded, for it will rise again immediately after bleeding.
 As soon as possible  after bleeding let a barrel or half  hogs-
 head be  filled with warm water, put the patient into it, and
cover the top with a blanket; keep him in as long as he can
bear it conveniently, then wipe  him  dry with warm woollen
cloths, and put a large blister over the stomach.   As ■olhin*'
can be borne on the stomach  until sometime after the inflam-
mation is abated, it is  necessary that the bowels should bo
evacuated by injection, and that water gruel, or weak broth
svith the addition of sweet oil and a little nitre, should  be
given  the same  way for nourishment.   When the  patient is
so far  recovered as to  be able to bear any  thins: on his stom-
ach, a brisk cathartic should be given to clear out the bc-Wwks 
             INFLAMMATION OF THE BOWELS.          65

effectually ;  his food should then be of the lightest kind, and
his drinks may consist of barley water  and the mucilage of
gum arabic.


INFLAMMATION  OF THE  BOWELS  OR INTES-
               TINES.   (ENTERITIS.)

                      SYMPTOMS.
   Tension, and acute pain over the whole abdomen or belly,
but more especially around the naval, and the  bowels are ve-
ry sore to the slightest touch.   There is a hard,  small, and
quick pulse ; great debility,  anxiety, thirst,  vomiting, and
obstinate costiveness.   As the pain increases,  the  bowels by
a kind of spasm seem  to be drawn together into  lumps, and
the urine is voided  with  great difficulty and pain.  If not
attended to immediately, it often ends  in mortification in ll>e
space of a f:\v hours from the commencement.

                        CAUSES.
   They are very  much the same as those  which  induce  in-
flammation of the stomach.   Or it may be occasioned by rup-
ture, colic, dysentary, worms, by cold applied to the bo web,
w by l.mg continued costiveness.

                     TREATMENT.
   Whatever we do now, we must do quickly, for there isn<>
time to lose.  The treatment  is  nearly the same as  that of
inflammation of the stomach ;  we should bleed immediately,
c;ive an injection (see  dispensatory) to evacuate the contents
of the bowels, and put the patient into a bath  of warm water
as directed in inflammation of the  stomach; then apply a
large blister io the belly, and the bloating of the bowels must
\s: kept do-.vi. by promptly repeating the injections as often as
may he necessary ;  and as soon as (he soreness and inflam-
mation abate'} a dose  of castor  oil and calomel, or of some
otlnr physic, thould be given by the mouth  in order to cleiu
out the whole, intestinal canal effectually ;  and after its ope-
ratic-), a dose of  laudanum should be  given  either by the
mouth, or by injection, in order to allay irritation and  give
&ie v ;,) Ihe patient.
   /kit v.h n the complaint does not begin very violently and
the bov.els ?rr> not extr"v.",v sore, it will be  safe to give by 
66           inflammation of the liver.

the mouth  a  small  dose  of physic  in  the  very beginning.
Fresh olive oil may be given by  the mouth in dose of a table-
spoonful, in cases where the soreness of the bowels will  not
bear any thing else to be given  in that way.  After the  dis-
ease shall have been removed and the patient becomes con-
valescent, he must be very  careful of himself for some time,
by making use of some kind of light diet which is not flatu-
lent or windy, and by avoiding  all irritating causes, such as
cold, severe exercise, &c,  for if a relapse should come on,
there would be hardly a possibility of saving the patient.       /


INFLAMMATION OF THE LIVER.  (HEPATITIS.

  There are two kinds, the acute and chronic.

                     SYMPTOMS.
  The acute is marked by  a pungent pain of the right side,
rising to the top of  the  shoulder, something like that  of ti.-?
pleurisy, attended with considerable fever, difficulty of breath-
ing, dry cough, and often bilious vomitings.

                       CAUSES.
  The application of cold, external  injuries, and violent ex-
ercises ;  sudden  changes in the weather,  especially cold
nights after very hot days ;  sitting on the damp ground, or ii
a. stream of air when the body  is heated; drinking  distilled
spirits, concretions  in the liver,  kc.  It may also  be occa-
sioned  by long continued intermittent and remittent fevers.

                    TREATMENT.
  Acute inflammation of (he liver is treated by copious bleed-
ing at first, followed by fifteen  or twenty grains of  calome-
mixed  with twenty  or thirty grains of jalap, or with a table-
spoonful of castor oil.   A large blister must then he applied
to the side, and small doses of ipecac or of emetic  tartar tc
nauseate the stomach and cause  a moisture on the skin, mutst
be remembered.   After 1 Ids, frequent  doses of calomel and
rhubarb to  physic off" the bile, are absolutely necessary.
   Chronic, or slow inflammation of the liver, gives a yellow-
ish, unhealthy, complexion to the features;  there isflatulence,
loss of appetite, a dull pain on the right side in  the region of
the liver, and extending to the right shoulder, or  sometimes t« 
inflammation of the  liver.
67
 the left,  and between the shoulders.   The patient has  some
 fever which is worse at night,  and attended  with much de-
 bility and oppression.   The  urine deposits a red sediment
 and  ropy mucus, and the stools are generally  clay colored.
 The eyes grow7 dull, the body emaciates;  there is a sense  of
 fulness and swelling of the right side, difficult breathing, and
 the cough is  aggravated when the patient lies on the leftside.

                     TREATMENT.
   Calomel in doses of two or three grains should be taken
 every night until the  gums begin  to be sore ; the  use  of  it
 may then be  discontinued for a  while, but after a few days,
 it should be resumed.  Or, the  blue pill  (see dispensatory)
 may be taken in the same way for  the same purpose, that is,
 to restore the healthy action of the liver.   Or the mercurial
 ointment (unguentum hydrargyri,  see dispensatory) may be
 rubbed on the  side until the mouth becomes sore.  In the
 mean time the bowels should be  moved occasionally by a dose
of rhubarb  and soda, or of bilious  pills, (see dispensatory.)
 Either a blister or a seton should be kept open on the affected
 side, and as  the febrile  symptoms  abate, the use of tonics
 should at the same time be adopted ;  such  as quinine, or pe-
 ruvian bark and snake root,  or columbo root in powder and
 iron  ru^  (see di-p.)  mixed together;  the common  dose
 should be taken three times a day.  Those  of a  scrofulous
habit, or Mich as are weak and debilitated,- may  take nitric
acid  intend of the calomel or mercury.   One  or two  tea-
■■poonfuls of the acid must be  diluted with a quart of water,
so'as to mak* it considerably sour.   The dose should be small
at first and  frequently repeated,  but the patient will soon be
able  to take the  whole of the  quart in the  course of the day,
or even more;  and  this medicine should  be  continued,  the
 same as calomel, until the mouth becomes atlected.   The
 patient's  food should  he  easy of digestion, and a change of
climate, moderate exercise in the open air, will be agreeable
 and salutary.    Affections of the spleen or ague cakes,  are
 treated in the  same manner as chronic inflammation of the
 liver.
■i 
68                    rheumatism.
                    CHAPTER IX.

              ACUTE RHEUMATISM.

                     SYMPTOMS.
  Rheumatism is an affection of the extremities  and exter-
nal  coverings of  the body, having its seat in the muscles and
tendons, and  is characterized by pain, stiffness and swelling
of the joint, attended with fever when the disorder is violent.
The fever is ushered  in  by chills which  are followed by the
usual symptoms of fever, and is easily distinguished by great
pain, swelling of one or  more joints, with difficulty to move
them, and redness and  pain upon touch.   The pains are
worse at night, and frequently shift from one joint, or part of
the  body,  to another, and sometimes the use  of the  joint is
destroyed.  The skin is  generally in a state of perspiration,
the  tpngue is always loaded, there is great thirst, and a cos-
tive state of  the bowels.  The brain  is seldom or never af-
fected.   The inflammation is liable to shift, as before observed,
from one part to  another, this is called metastasis; the heart
and stomach are  most liable  to be thus affected, and it is this
liability and result which constitute the principal danger.

                        CAUSES.
  Cold with moisture, particularly where long applied, is its
most common if  not only cause; hence  it is generally attri-
buted to sleeping in damp beds or on the ground, putting on
of damp clothes,  and working in damp situations.

                    TREATMENT.
  Large and repeated bleedings are necessary in ilu com-
mencement, and  at any time if there is much pain ami a  full
pulse, this must  be followed with a smart dose i f salts ; and
to abate the fever and thirst let the patient drink fr. ■••-.■  of flax-
seed tea, balm tea, barley or rice water, with       ' nitre
dissolved in them; and small doses antimony ((;;        \_[c\
or Dover's powders to  promote diaphoresis.           .tors
applied so as to cover the whole ->f the af ected j       one
of our most powerful  and certain em?s.  These        ,vjsl'
be repeated until the  nllammation subsides.   Th      must
then be  allayed by opium or laudanum.  The :-       may
now be supported h\ bark and  wine and  a genen.      ■*.. 
RHEUMATISM.
6f)
              CHRONIC  RHEUMATISM.

   This is of constant occurence and is characterised by pain
 of the joints, aggravated on motion, stiffness of the joints, and
 swelling of the several  structures about them.   It  is distin-
 guished from acute rheumatism, by the absence of fever and
 redness of the affected  part.   The pain shifts  from joint to
 joint, and frequently the joints are permanently  enlarged and
 distorted.

                     TREATMENT.
   There are no certain rules  laid down  for the treatment of
 chronic rheumatism.   Attention must be paid to the state of
 the constitution.   In some forms, particular in  lumbago and
 sciatica, cupping will be of great benefit; and if  the pains are
 verv severe blood may  be taken from  the arm.   When it is
 attended with chills and sickness at the stomach,  an emetic
 of ipecac or a cathartic must be given, followed by sweating
 medicines, as this sometimes gives immediate relief.   Warm
 and stimulating applications must be made to the parts, such
 as spirits of turpentine,  oil of sassafras,  volatile liniment,
 tincture of cantharides,  &c.;  and frictions  with  flannel or a
 flesh brush over the joint.   Colc'iicum is very highly spoken
 of, its dose is from five to fifteen drops of the tincture once in
 three hours ; we should however, begin with about five drops
 and increase gradually until it produces slight nausea, dizzi-
ness and loss of appetite.   If there is  torpor and debility,
stimulants  and  tonics of various kinds will be proper.
   Mercury given so as to affect the mouth will frequently
effect a  cure.   Where it can be traced to cold while under
the operation of mercury, small doses of salts or cream of tar-
tar, or sulphur, or decoction of sarsaparilla, and guaiacum,
will  generally  be- attended  with  success.   Warm  bathing
should always  be resorted to.   In all  forms of  rheumatism
the pain when violent must be r.llayed by opiates.
   I have always  found  blisters the most  effectual  remedy,
when then  affection was confined to a  joint.   Sciatica, is
rheumatism in the cellular envelope  of the great reiatic nerre,.
 (which  see.)    Lumbago, is rheumatism of the loins; these.
are treated  in the same manner as the above.
y* 
70
GOUT.
                GOUT.   (PODAGRA.)

                     SYMPTOMS.
  A paroxysm  of the gout sometimes  comes  on suddenly
without any  previous warning; frequently,  however,  it is
preceded by loss of appetite, costiveness, torpor and lassitude
over the whole body ; great fatigue after the least exercise ;
the  feet and legs are  colder than usual,  attended with prick-
hno-, or a sensation of numbness ;  and the day before the at-
tack the appetite  is generally better than common.   The
patient awakes from  sleep with a  violent pain  in the great
toe, or perhaps, in the ball of the foot,  the heel,  the  whole
foot, "or the calf of the leg.  The  pain  resembles that  of a
dislocated bone, with a sensation as if cold water was poured
upon the part; the feet are often swelled and inflamed, and
he cannot endure the least motion without suffering intolera-
ble  pain.  But the most dangerous symptom  that accompa-
nies gout is metastasis ;  for it is very apt to leave  the toes in
a twinkling, and seize on the  brain, heart, lungs,  bowels, or
stomach, without any ceremony at all, not even the politeness
of saying " by your leave."

                       CAUSES.
  Hereditary predisposition ;   stimulating luxurious diet;
habitual indulgence in wine : inactivity of body ; intense ap-
plication to study ;  excess in venery ;  night watching ;  cold ;
severe exercise ; and  sudden changes in the  manner of liv-
ing, from low to high living, or from a  full to a very spare
diet.   It is very seldom  that gout is permanently cured.

                    TREATMENT.
  In all cases which  are attended with general fever, bleed-
ing, according to the  strength of the patient, will always be
found necessary; and the  bowels  should  be  evacuated by
some active cathartic : ten grains of calomel, twenty of jalap,
and three of gamboge, mixed together, will answer the  pur-
pose ; and afterwards a gentle physic may be used with ad-
vaut ige, such  as castor oil, sulphur, cream of tartar, rhubarb,
senna, &c.   While the inflammatory stage continues, cooling
diaphoretic medicines such as nitre, ipecac, and  the like, are
useful in exciting perspiration.   After the feverish  symptoms 
ERYSIPELAS.
71
are reduced by these means, a blister may be applied to the
parts affected, and tonics should  then be given, as, quinine,
peruvian bark, iron rust, &c.  When the gout takes hold of
the stomach or any other internal part, the object must be to     ,
bring it back to the joint as soon as possible, and for this pur-
pose, stimulating medicines such as ether, laudanum, brandy,
sweet flag, red pepper,  and ginger, must be given immedi-
ately, and frictions  on the stomach and bowels  with cloths
wrung out of hot spirits and pepper, and a hot mustard poul-
tice to the feet, are to be used with industrious perserverance.
For preventing  the gout,  temperance and exercise are two
of the most important medicines.
   Dr.  Ewell relates an anecdote of an  English  nobleman,
who " after twenty years of riotous living awoke one morn-
ing in  the torments of the gout.    As he lay writhing with
pain, his servant ran up stairs to  him  with great joy in his
countenance : ' 0 !  sir, good news ! good news  ! there  is a
famous gout doctor below, who says he will venture his ears
he can cure  your  honor in a  week.'  ' Ah ! that  is good
news indeed,  Tom  ; well, run my good boy, and put up his
carriage and horses, and treat the doctor like a prince.'   ' 0
sir, the gentleman  has no carnage and horses ; I believe he
walked a foot.'  '  Walk a foot!  what!  cure the gout  and
walk a foot!  go down Tom, go down, and instantly drive the
rascal out of the house ; set the dogs upon him, do you hear ?
the lying varlet! why if he could cure the gout he might ride
in a richer carriage than his majesty."
                     ERYSIPELAS.

                      SYMPTOMS.
  Idiopathic erysipelas  commences  most usually on the
face and legs,  but occasionally on other parts  of the body.
It commences  by febrile symptoms of considerable severity,
the pulse is frequent,  full  ancl hard, and drowsiness, confu-
sion of the head accompanies the hot stage.  On the second
or third day from  the attack of chills, redness  and swelling
appears.   There is distressing heat and tingling in the  in-
flamed surface, and where the face is the seat  it swells, and
in two or three days the eyes  become  closed.   The disease
occasionally  goes  off by desquamation ; but  more   usually 
72
OF BLEEDING FROM THE NOSE.
 blisters form, containing a yellowish  fluid.   The duration is
 liable  to considerable variation, and  sometimes towards the
 latter stages it assumes a typhoid  character, and great debil-
 ity attends the period of recovery, (convalescence, so called
 familiarly, by the ingenious Dr.-----.)
   The causes are not well understood ; in some persons
 there is a strong disposition  to it, and in them it is brought
 on by very trifling causes.   It is produced by external inju-
 ry, debility, unwholesome diet or bad air, a  long residence in
 hot climates, and the use of that favorite beverage, whiskey.

                     TREATMENT.
   The acute erysipelas is to  be treated like any other inflam-
 matory affection.   Bleeding  and  active physics, with sweat-
 ing medicine to keep it out; and the exhibition of bark, wine,
 quinine, &c, after the inflammation has subsided, constitute
 the principal treatment.   When the symptoms are not urgent,
 physic, and wash the  part affected with  a  weak solution of
 sugar of lead.   When it happens to  the old and debilitated,
 or to persons just recovering  from a fit of sickness, after giv-
ing a dose of bilious bills, give the tonics as above directed.
When  it is translated to the brain and produces delirium, and
other  symptoms  of inflammation of that organ, it must be
treated  by  venesection, blisters  and  purgatives as in true
phrenitis, which see.
                    CHAPTER X.

                  HEMORRHAGES.

  These are produced by the rupture of blood vessels, which
may be occasioned by various causes from extreme weakness,
or too great fullness of  the blood vessels, and may be  either
from the  veins or from the arteries.
OF BLEEDING FROM THE NOSE, OR EPISTAXIS.

  The vessels that ramify upon the lining membrane of the
nostrils are very  numerous,  which have but a thin delicate
covering that is easily ruptured.   When the bleeding does not 
BLEEDI?«"G FROM THE LUNGS.
73
  happen from accident, it is preceded by headache, throbbing
  of the arteries of the temples and neck, flushing of the cheeks,
  giddiness, and a sense of weight or fullness in the nose.

                         CAUSES.
    Among the causes, pathologists have named both heat and
  cold, and it is attributable to bodily exertions,  particular pos-
  tures as stooping or laying with the head low, and to the sup-
  pression of other evacuations, and in such cases it afford relief
  to the other symptoms.

                      TRE vTMENT.
    This seldom requires any treatment, but if it  does the pa-
  tient must use  a light diet, and take an occasional close of
  salts.  In severe cases it will be necessary to  bleed and give
  cathartics, and direct regular exercise, and to give  from fif-
  teen to twenty drops of  tincture  of digitalis,  given once in
  two or three hours, will  be  useful.   An astringent solution
 such as  a strong solution of alum or sugar of  lead or of gum
 kin.>,  must be snuffed, or injected up the nose ; and the  nos-
 trils must be stopped up with  dossils  of lint both anteriorly,
 and posteriorly, dipped in the above solution, and cold water
 must  be applied to the nose  and  poured upon the back of the
 neck, or the whole head may be immersed in water  ; blisters
 to the back of the neck are  also useful.  A hog's gut filled
 with vinegar and introduced into the nose is generally attended
 witli success by pressing upon the bleeding vessel.  The pa-
 tient must be kept cool  and in an erect posture  : (his  is all
 the doctor can do if you send for him.   (See this in surgery
 J>r the manner of plugging the nostrils.)



          BLEEDING FROM  THE LUNGS.

                      SYMPTOMS.
  There is a sense of feeling,  heat, weight, tightness  and
oppression about  (he chest,  difficult breathing and a  short
tickling cough.  Symptoms of fever are also present, such as
shiverings, pains in the back and  loins, lassitude,  costiveness,
a dry skin, and hard pulse ; these are subject however, to
great variety.   The spitting up of blood is commonly  pre-
ceded by a degree of irritation felt in the throat, and a saltish 
74
APOPLEXY.
taste in the mouth.   The blood is of a bright red and frothy,
this with the general habit of body and the preceding symp-
toms will distinguish it from vomiting of blood.

                    TREATMENT.
   This being intimately connected with consumption, it will
require a similar treatment.   It will only be necessary here,
therefore, to point out in a few words the treatment which is
recommended, with a view to check the immediate effusion
of blood.  When the blood is flowing admit cool air, and
avoid speaking and  all exertion ; give cold drinks, and sul-
phuric acid in the dose of eight or ten drops every hour, and
when the patient is feverish it will  be proper to let a little
blood.   A close of  salts must be given  and the cold drinks
continued, and nitre, tincture of digitalis, and powdered alum,
and the sugar of lead three grains, (as much  as will lay on
the point of a pen  knife,)  and extract of hyosciamus three
grains, and any of the astringents may be given in their com-
mon doses,  (see  astringents,) as kino, catechu, sulphate  of
copper ;  with either that is used give a few grains of opium.
To relieve the cough give oxymel of squills, and any mucil-
aginous mixtures, as gum arabic, elm or flaxseed tea, liquor-
ice, &c.  Blisters and  warm applications to  the arms and
legs will be proper, these cause the blood  to flow to the ex-
tremities and of course relieve the lungs.  If the patient is
of a weakly habit, a contrary course is required and bark and
wine will be requisite.   From three to five grains of  black
pepper given every  ten minutes is highly spoken of.
                    CJiASS  III.

                    CHAPTER I.

                     APOPLEXY.

                     SYMPTOMS.
  This dieadful complaint may sometimes be prevented, but
is hardly ever cured ; the premonitory or warning symptoms
are ihe re fore more important  to be known than those which
take place during the fit.   And first, the apoplectic forma- 
APOPLEXY.
75
Hon of body is a premonitory consideration ;  a person of a
large head, short thick neck, broad shoulders, short stature,
florid complexion, with tendency to corpulency, is more par-
ticularly predisposed to apoplexy than those of  a  different
make.  Other  premonitory symptoms  are,  sense of wejght
and pain in the  head, with a feeling as if the head were bound
round with a cord or wire; giddiness on stooping, or on turn-
ing the  head quickly round ;  deafness, ringing in the ears ;
blindness, or flashes of light, and other unusual appearances.
before the sight; stupor,  drowsiness, loss  of memory  and of
temper; faltering of the  speech, twisting of the mouth, fall-
ing of the eyelids, numbness or palsy of any part of the body,,
&c.   But it is  more frequently the case,  that without much
previous indisposition,  the patient falls down  suddenly, de-
prived of all sense and motion; he lies  like  a person  in a
deep sleep, with difficult and  noisy  breathing, the blood at
the same time  continues to  circulate  as usual.   Sometimes
the fit commences with sudden and violent pain in the heady
paleness, sickness at the  stomach, vomiting, and loss  of rec-
ollection ; he falls down  perhaps, appearing like one who has
fainted, recovers in  a few minutes, and is able to walk ; but
the headache continues, and after a few hours he gradually
sinks into the fit.    At other times, the patient  is suddenly
seized with  palsy of one  side  and loss of speech, which  aftet
a while gradually passes  into a state of apoplexy.

                         CAUSES.
   The  immediate  cause of apoplexy is  compression  of the
brain, induced  either by an over-distension of the blood  ves-
sels,  or  by  the effusion  of  blood or serum  on the  brain.
Of course,  whatever  increases the  quantity  and impetus
of blood in  the head, will have a tendency  to  produce it;
such  as  violent fits of passion,  intemperance, tight neck-
cloths, exposure to great  heat or cold,  large doses of opium,
external injury, overloading  the stomach, stooping down
for some  length of time, severe  exercise, &c, and these
causes will be more likely to produce the  etfect in persons of
plethoric habits, and who  have the ajx/plecticform of body,

                    TREATMENT.
   By way of prevention, the causes which produce it are to
be avoided;   those  of a full  plethoric habit should  be  light 
76
PALSY.
and sparing in their diet, and keep the bowels regular.   Those
of debilitated habits,  may use a  more nourishing diet, and
take strengthening medicines to give tone to the vessels.   In
the actual paroxysm of apoplexy, the patient, with his head
ins'^ntly raised, should be placed where he can breathe cool
air ; and if he be of a robust plethoric habit, a quart or more
of blood should be immediately taken from the arm, and re-
peated in a short time if he should not be relieved.  Leeches
or cupping on the temples, blisters to  the  back of the neck,
arms and legs, rubbing with hot vinegar, or spirits and pep-
per, hartshorn applied to the nostrils, hot mustard poultices
to the feet, or even  searing the soles  of the feet  with a hot
iron, should be  tried in order to rouse the system.   At the
same time, stimulating injections should also be given ; and
as soon as  he can swallow,  an active cathartic,  as calomel
and oil, or jalap, followed  by  a dose of salts and senna, should
be given.   If none of these can be made to operate, the cro-
ton oil may be administered.   One  drop is a  common dose,
but two, three or even four drops at once, may now be taken
every hour, until you have given it  a fair trial. ^
  If the patient be old, or of a debilitated habit, bleeding from
the arm wTill not be proper ; but leeches, or cupping, may be
used instead of it; and all other means mentioned here must
be thoroughly attended to.   If the patient  recovers, a seton
should be kept open for some time on the arm or  back of the
neck.
                        PALSY.

   Is a loss of the power of  voluntary motion.   It is distin-
guished from  apoplexy  by  its  affecting certain parts, of the
body only, as one side, or the lower half of the body.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   Previous to the attack there  is universal torpor, giddiness,
a sense of weight or uneasiness in the head, loss of memory,
dullness of comprehension, a sensation of something creeping
on the body,  pain,  trembling and a sense of coldness  in the
part about  to be affected.   Palsy, if not cured, is linallv suc-
ceeded by apoplexy ; and consequently the 
                        EPILEPSY.                     77

                        CAUSES,
   Are frequently the same as those which produce apoplexy.
 Or, it may be occasioned by the poisons of lead, arsenic, &c.
 by injuries  to the spinal marrow, extreme  debility, and by
 old  age.

                     TREATMENT.
   li is  treated the same as apoplexy in those cases which de-
 pend on  the  same cause.   In plethoric and  robust habits,
 bleeding will be  proper, and the bowels should  be kept loose
 n gentle phvsic  for some time after the symptoms disappear.
 In weak  and debilitated habits every (lung that  can have a
 tendency to stimulate the body, and rouse the nervous symp-
 tom into action, should be employed.   For this purpose, a
 table spoonful of horse radish  scraped,  or the  same quantity
 of ground mustard  seed may  be swallowed  three  or  four
 times a day, or oftener.  The tincture of guaiacum, or vola-
 tile alkali (see dispensatory) may also be given in large do-
 ses.  At  the  same  time external  stimulants  must  not be
 neglected, such as blisters, dry frictions over the palsied part
 with a flesh brush, or with  flannels wet  with  oil  of turpen-
 tine, volatile liniment, oil of sassafras, or tincture  of canthar-
 ides.  In plethoric habits  the  diet should be of the lightest
 kind possible—but in weak and debilitated constitutions, the
 food should  be warm and  strengthening, and the drink may
 be of the same nature, such as port wine, mustard  whey, gin-
 ger  tea, or brandy and water.


       EPILEPSY,  OR FALLING SICKNESS.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   The cp.i'ptic  fit comes on  very  suddenly ;  those who
 have been sidiject to  it for  any hi gth of time  are generalh
 warned  of its approach sometimes by headache, giddiness of
 sight, by the a; . earance of spectres, or of flashes,  of light be-
 fore  the eyes ; but more frequently, bv a  creeping sensation
 or feeling of cold  air, which begins at the extremity of a limb
 and  gradually ascends to (he head.  The patient then fiills
 down suddenly, is deprived of all  sense,  but  not of motion,—
 for the muscles of the face and of every part of the body an;
 violently agitated  ; he foams at the mouth, the cms arc turn-
ed hack and  fixed, the teeth  gnash against  each other, thu 
78                     EPILEPSY.
 tongue  is thrust  forward  and often severely bitten, and the
 breathing is irregular and laborious.  Sometimes the fit con-
 tinues only a few minutes ; sometimes  an hour, or even lon-
 ger.  When the paroxysm goes off it is  common for the pa-
 tient to remain for  some time motionless as in a profound
 sleep ;  he then recovers by degrees, but  without any recol-
 lection of what has happened.  There are some variations of
 its  appearance in different individuals;  in  some cases the
 whole system is relaxed ; sometimes during the fit, there is
 a tonic  spasm or constant rigidity of the muscles ; and there
 have been instances in which the  patient is not only uncon-
scious of every thing  around him, but remains, during the
whole fit, in the same position of body  in which he happen-
ed  to be  taken;  sometimes the patient recovers from the fif:
 as suddenly as he was taken ; and it is not always the case
 that he  is perfectly unconscious, for even the nightmare (in-
cubus)  is a species of epilepsy.                          <

                       CAUSES.
  Hereditary  predisposition—intemperance—injuries of the
head—irritation from worms—teething—severe fright—or it
may be  occasioned by suppression of menstruation.

                    TREATMENT.
  When it is preceded by the sensation as of cold air creep-
ing up towards the head, the fit may be prevented by apply-
ing a ligature  above the part so affected.  The causes which
produce it should be removed if possible—as, when it occurs
in children from teething, the gums should be lanced ; if from
worms,  they are to be  dislodged : or if it be Caused bv sup-
pression of menstruation, the course of nature is to be restor-
ed by the  means recommended in that  complaint; if  bv  in-
temperance, the bottle must be abandoned, &c.   When the
epileptic paroxysm has actually come on, the  patient  ought
to be placed on a bed in order to prevent him from injuring
himself  in struggling ;  a bit of wood should be put between
his jaws so that the  tongue will not be in danger, and if he
has overloaded his stomach, or has been drinking ardent spir-
its,  an emetic will cleanse the stomach and terminate the par-
oxysm.   Sugar of lead (acetate of lead)  may be  given after
the  lit is over  in the dose of one fourth  of a  grain, gradually
increased  to one or two grains, three  times a  clay, made into
pills with bread ; and a small pill  of opium should be given 
MADNESS.                     79
at the same time.   Or lunac caustic (nitrate of silver) may
be administered in the dose of one fourth of a grain made into
pills with bread, gradually and cautiously  increasing the dose
to a grain.  It is  said that the complaint has been cured ef-
fectually by giving six or eight grains of the flowers of zinc
morning and  evening.   Or the herb called cardamine or la-
dies smock, in the dose of a drachm three or four times a day,
may be tried.  But after all, the truth of the story is, that
when this disease  is once fairly  established in the  consti-
tution it is not much under the  control of medicine.
                     CHAPTER II.

                MADNESS, OR MANIA.

   Is  a disorder of the mind in.which imaginary things are
 mistaken for those which have an actual existence.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   Sometimes the attack is sudden, violent and  unexpected ;
 but more generally it comes on gradually, and a predisposi-
 tion to it is manifested, at first, by slight aberrations of mind
 and oddities of manner ;  he is frequently subject to very hWh
 or low spirits : fretful and angry on trivial occasions, distrust-
 ful of his best friends, and strongly rffected by every emotion
 or passion of  the mind.   As these symptoms increase,  other
 mistaken and  wild ideas are treasured up as  truth in the im-
 agination, until finally the brain is completely turned and the
 patient is then said to be insane, mad or crazy.   If the per-
 son be of a sanguine temperament, it is  very  likely to be ac-
companied at  first by  some pain in the head,  redness of the
face, rolling and glistening of  the eye, grinding of the teeth,
 loud roaring, and violent exertion  of strength.
   Those of a melancholic temperament, on the  contrary, are
 not liable to high excitements  of this kind, but  are naturally
 inclined to sadness, dejection of spirits, &c.

                       CAUSES.
   The  most general predisposing cause is hereditary predis-
position.   In  such constitutions it is often excited, and  iu 
80                      MADNESS.
 others may be  acquired by  anxiety, grief, love, fanaticism,
 terror, enthusiasm, disappointed ambition,  severe study, in-
 toxication, palsy, masturbation, suppression of the lochia, or
 of periodical evacuations, itc.

                     TREATMENT.
   The treatment of mania must be partly applied to the mind
 and partly to the body.   In treating the body, it is proper, in
 the beginning of the disease where there is much febrile ex-
 citement, to take as much blood  at  once as the patient can
 well bear, but small bleedings frequently repeated are more
 likely  to confirm the disease than to cure  it.   Where  the
 complaint has been of long continuance, if there  should at
 any time, be a dangerous accummulation of blood in the head,
 it is to be reduced either  by blisters to the  arms, cupping, or
 by leeches to  the back of  the neck and temples.   For this
 purpose also, and to evacuate the bile and cleanse the stom-
 ach and bowels, purges of calomel combined with some  oth-
 er physic, should  be  frequently  given,  and if  the strength
 will admit, in  large doses.  Emetics sometimes have a good
 effect.   Camphor has beeen  given with great success ;  and
 digitalis may  be useful from its power of  lessening arterial
excitement—but other narcotics, and opium in  particular,
are not to be recommended  when there is much fulness of
 the vessels of  the head.  But when mania occurs in melan-
cholic  temperaments, there  is generally a  lack of  excite-
ment ;  a more nourishing diet should then be directed ; the
 medicinal remedies may be tonic and even  stimulating;  the
state of the bowels must be  attended  to,  and regular  ex-
ercise,  or even hard labor in those  accustomed to it, will be
beneficial.   In treating the mind of maniacs, it is necessary
to  inspire them with a certain degree of awe, and at the same
time to gain their confidence  and affection by steadiness  and
humanity.   If they are very obstinate, or should threaten the
lives of the attendants, coercion and confinement may some-
times  be necessary.   If the patient  be  a man. he submits
most easily to  a  female keeper ; if a woman, to a male.   In-
 stead of directly opposing any of their extravagant notions,
 it  is better to  give way to all their whims,  to sympathise in
 their complaint;, to appear to obey  their  commands; and af-
 ter thus gaining  an ascendency over them, their minds should
 bo artfully drawn to  some other subject, but with asdittle
appearance of design as  possible.    If  he  misbehaves,  the 
                   ST. VITUS'S DANCE.                 81

crime should be  imputed to another person, and thus he be-
comes ashamed  of it.   The diet should be chiefly vegetable
and such  as will keep the bowels open, and the hours of ea-
ting, rest, exercise or labor, should be  fixed and remain un-
changed.   The use of the swing is now very generally adop-
ted in  cases of mania and is found  to  be highly beneficial.
It often takes away all muscular power,  producing  vertigo,
paleness, nausea, vomiting, discharge of  urine, slowness  of
die pulse, and faint ings ;  which are followed  by refreshing
sleep, convalescence, and recovery.   A hammock or even a
common chair in which the person is fastened,  may be slung
up by ropes to the ceiling ;  it is now to be turned round un-
til the ropes became twisted,  and then by letting it  untwist
itself, the  patient will be whirled round the other way with
great velocity.   In young, plethoric, and furious cases, it may
bring on a fit  of  the apoplexy, and should  not therefore  be
used until the violence of the symptoms is reduced by bleed-
ing, purging, &c.
       ST. VITUS'S DANCE, OR  CHOREA.

   This usually  makes  its attack between  the  eighth  and
fourteenth year of life.   The  convulsions  are preceded for
s-ime time  by  an awkward dragging of the leg, twitching of
die muscles of the face,  and unsteadiness of the fingers and
hands.   These are followed by an affection of all the muscles
of voluntary action.  The  hands  and arms  are in constant
motion, the patient can grasp no object,  even with the great-
est exertion of the will,  he walks  un.steadily, going as the
saying  is, one  step forward  and two back, and is now an ob-
ject of  singular but  painful observation.  These  symptoms
v ,ry in violence, and  in most cases  cease  entirely  dunno-
sleep.   As thy complaint advances articulation  is impeded
or suspended, swallowing is  performed  with difficult, the
< ye looses its lustre, and the face is thin and pale.   The mind
frequently partakes of the bodily  disorder, and becomes  as
weak as in infancy.
   With these evidences of disturbance; of the brain there are
rnarksofaderangedcor.ditionofthe.stomach and bowels. There
is often in  the commencement a ravenous  appetite, costive-
ness, swelling and hardness, or flabbiness  of the abdomen ; 
82
ST. TITUS'S DANCE.
when more advanced it is attended with impaired digestion,
offensive evacutions, and wasting of the whole body.
  This attacks young  boys and  girls indiscriminately, and
occasionally adults ; it is seldom attended with danger, and in
the few cases of fatal termination, it had merged into epilep-
sy,  and probably become complicated with diseases in  the
head.

                        CAUSES.
  The causes of chorea sancti vitii. are not well understood,
it is evidently produced by any thing that occasions debility,
by long confinement, excessive exercise, improper food,  the
wse of certain metals, as lead,  mercury, &c.;  frights, sup-
pressed eruptions, teething, worms costiveness,  acrid matter
in the stomach and bowels;  and by wounds of the tendons
and nerves of the brain.

                    TREATMENT.
  The majority of cases of chorea get well  in a short time
without the aid of medicine.   In the early stage, before the
bowels have lost their  tone, and (he accumulation in them i.<
grgat, gentle purgatives repeated as  occasion requires, will
generally effect a cure.   When the disease is farther advanced,
active physic must be persevered in. as calomel, jalap, rhu-
barb, scammonv, senna, bilious pills, ice. in their usual do.»es
(see dispensatory)  until the discharges are natural,  once in
two or three days will generally  be often enough.   The ca-
thartic should be followed by  a pill of opium.  And  in weak
constitutions between  the times'of giving physic,  we should
give tonics of columbo, camomile, and peruvian bark, steeped
in water, and wine or other  spirits added,  to keep it from
souring.  Worms frequently produce it, or continue it when
produced ; it will therefore be proper to give occasionally
twenty or thirty drops  oil of turpentine on sugar or in honev,
or a  quarter of a tea-spoonful cowitch mixed  in molasses,
about an hour before giving the physic, that it may have time
to operate on the worms before carried off, or pink or anv of
the worm medicines may be given.
   The food must be  light and  nourishing, and the patient
must exercise in the open air.   Cold bathing  is  one of the
 most powerful means,  and in languid states of the system fre-
quently acts like a charm.  Leeches to the temples, and along
 the back is recommended.   The preparations of iron or steel. 
                      LOCKED JAW.                   S3

are among the most powerful tonics, and  should  be given
especially to young ladies, as this  produces  and  regulates
their periodical turns, which with them is frequently all that
is requisite to cure the disease ; and if nature once establishes
this, they generally get well without medicine ;  and when it
attacks girls from ten to fifteen, the means recommended to
regulate  that habit must be used, as this irregularity is most
likely  the cause.   The sub-carbonate of iron and pulverised
columbo, each five grains, may be given every two  hours, or
the muriatic tincture of iron ten or fifteen drops in three table-
spoonfuls of water, will have a good effect; and these may
also be given to patients of either sex or any age, that are la-
boring under the disease, for their principle virtue is that of a
powerful tonic.  The oxyde of zinc, in doses of three grains
four times a day, is also spoken of by medical writers.   The
power of  habit frequently keeps up the disease, this morbid
chain must be broken by an emetic ; blisters to the  arms and
below the loins ; in addition to the above assafoetida and other
tr.ti-spasmodics have been used with success,  and  from its
resemblance to, and frequent connection with hysterics, they
should always be tried.  The  arsenical solution  (which see)
nuy be given, to a child ten years of age in dose of five drops
three times a days.   When  the disease proves  incurable it
generally ends in epilepsy, or  mania, but  more frequently in
fd;otisrn.



                    CHAPTER III.

          LOCKED  JAW,  OR TETANUS.

                      SYMPTOMS.
  This first symptom is a stiffness about the back of the neck
increasing to pain so as to render all motion of the head pain-
ful and difficult.  In a  few mild cases the complaint advances
no further, but  most generally the  root of  the  tongue, th«
throat and breast,  are  next affected,  and  the muscles of th :
jaw  are now seized  with a rigid contraction, or spasm, in
consequence of which  the jaws  are finally closed or locked
together.
   If there is now a sense of pain at the pit of  the stomach,
darting backward to the spine,  the  patient may expect that 
84                    LOCKED JAW.
the muscles of his back are shortly to be seized with spasms,
by which the body is bent violently backwards.   The mus-
cles of the fore part of the body are soon attacked in the same
manner, and contract so powerfully as to counterbalance i.;e
back muscles, by which the body is brought back again, with
horrible and excruciating torture into a straight and immove-
able position.  The sufferings of the patient becomes greater
than  words can express, and violent convulsions put an end
to his misery and life together.

                       CAUSES.
   Tetanic affections are occasioned either by exposure to
cold, or by some  irritation of the nerves in consequence of
local injury, by punctures or wounds from rusty nails, splin-
ters,  pieces of glass, &c.   And wounds that tear and lacerate
the tendons and muscles produce  tetanus, and especially in
hot climates these prove a never failing source of these com-
plaints.   Any blunt  instrument that  tears the  parts is much
more likely to produce tetanus, than a sharp instrument that
divides the nerves and fibres completely.  Tetanus from cold
occurs generally within three or four days from exposure, ancl
from an injury about the eighth day.

                    TREATMENT.
   Opium is the remedy on which we are to place our chief
reliance, and we must begin its use as soon as the symptoms
appear.   It must be given in very large doses and frequently
repeated, for the system will now resist the operation of that
quantity of almost any  medicine which at other times would
destroy  life.  We should  begin with  thirty drops of lauda-
num, or three grains of opium, and repeat it  once  in two
hours or oftener until it produces some effect.  We must bear
in mind that there is every moment danger of the jaws becom-
ing closed, and we must therefore push  our remedies before
 his difficulty occurs, and  if it does arise we must give laud-
anum and other  medicine by injection, and strong laudanum
way be bathed into the parts where most pain is felt.  An
active purge of one fourth of a tea-spoonful of calomel with
a table-spoonful of oil  or  some other active physic must be
given in the onset, and repeated at intervals of two hours until
it opeiates.   Salivation must  be  produced  if  it can be,  for
which calomel should be rubbed upon the gums, and mercu-
 rial  ointment on the sides, a half tea-spoonful strong ointment 
THE BITE OF A MAD DOG.
85
may be rubbed on, once in four hours.  An emetic in the
commencement will sometimes effect a cure.   The patient
should always be bled largely, and put into a warm bath, a
hogshead of warm water is all that is requisite.   Cold bath-
ing is also recommended.   Prusic acid, two drops every two
hours, in water,  with  blisters and issues upon  the  spine is
highly spoken of.   In  salivating, wine may also be given
freely.  The employment  of wine,  bark, gin,  brandy, and
aromatic (spiced)  cordials, in large quantities are highly
spoken of, and may be tried; at the  same time  the opium,
musk, camphor,  and the other  anti-pasmodics must not be
neglected, for the probability is,  that these have affected the
cures which are attributed  to other medicines.   The disease
will in most instances prove fatal.  These are  the principal
means of constitutional treatment.   (For particular treatment
when produced bv wounds, see tetanus, in surgery.)
 THE BITE OF A MAD DOG, OR HYDROPHOBIA.

   Hydrophobia, from water, and  to fear, the dread of
water, rabies canina,  canine madness.
   This affection belongs properly  to the canine genus, viz.
dogs, foxes, and wolves; to these it is natural and with them
arises spontaneous;  and is communicated to others  of the
same species, and to all animals by  bites or the application
of the poison to a wounded (abraded) surface.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   When a dog is affected  with madness he becomes dull,
and hides himself, seldom barking but making a murmuring
noise, and refusing all  kinds  of meat and drink, he flies at
strangers, his head and tail hang down, he walks as if over-
powered by sleep; a bite at this period is dangerous, but is
not so apt to bring on the disease as  at a later period.   At
length the dog begins to pant, his tongue hangs out, his mouth
is open and discharges a large quantity of froth.  Sometimes
he walks slowly, and then runs suddenly forward, his eyes
are dull, watery and red, he grows thin and  weak, and at-
tempts to bite every thing that comes near him.  In this stage
the animal seldom lives over thirty hours, and the bites to-
ward the end of his  existence are the most dangerous.
                            6* 
86
THE BITE Of A MAD DOG.
  In the human species the symptoms attendant upon  tm-
bite of a mad animal are (sometime after the bite, frequently
after the bitten part is quite  well,) slight  pain  in  the part,
attended with itching occasionally, but generally resembling
a, rheumatic pain.   Then comes on wandering pain, uneasi-
ness, and  heaviness, disturbed sleep,  frightful dreams, rest-
lessness, sudden  startings, and spasms, sighings, anxiety  ur:i
a love for solitude.   These increase  daily, the pains shoct
from the place which was wounded all along up to the throat,
with a sensation of choking, and horror at the sight of liquids,
together with a loss of appetite and constant tremor.   Al-
though the patient cannot swallow water or any fluid, he caa
take solid substances with tolerable ease.
  A vomiting of bilious matter soon comes on with hot fever,
Sreat thirst, dryness and roughness of the tongue, hoarseness,
and a discharge of visil saliva from the mouth, together wita
spasms of the genital and urinary  organs ; his respiration Is
laborious, but so long as he retains the power < f speech his
answers are distinct, and his judgment unaffected.  In a very
few instances delirium arises and  ends  the  sufferings of thj
patient.   On dissection there are  marks of in*1 animation in
the throat and stomach, and an effusion  of bloc d in the lung;,
and an appearance of inflammation in the brain.
   There is no known cure for this dreadfully alarming mal-
ady.  To keep from being bit is a certain preventative,  and
U be bit is almost as certain  death.   Books, newspaper;.
and almanacs, are frequently filled with cures for the bite vi
a mad dog, and almost every quack boasts of his ability to
cure hydrophobia, but the means on which we  are to placo
any  reliance is to excise, cut the part completely out, and tv
sure that it  is done as deep  as the tooth has penetrated,  and
do not wait for  the doctor to come;  a razor  or any  sharp
knife, and,a determination  to do it, is all that is necessary ;
a moment lost may be lost forever -t the wound must be tilled
up with table salt or fine lime, or washed out with a strong
solution of pearl ash.  And though this mav be neglected or
impracticable in the onset, it may be practiced at any  period,
but with less hopes of success, for it may be that the poison
is carried through the  circulation, if  so  (uncertain) then
physic, salivation, and bleeding are our  principle reliance,
but both of these plans  must  be adopted at the same time,
and then  if the poison produces  its effects on the nerves, the
 incision  will divide the nerves, and remove the poison  and 
           PAINFUL AFFECTION OF THE VERVES.        87

thus prevent the irritation upon the  nerves and the danger
of absorption, and if  in  the circulation the cathartics  and
salivation  may  (doubtful)  drain the system  of,  or  neu-
'ralize the  poison.  When the part cannot be cut out, it
must be  burnt with a hot iron,  and the wound kept  open
for some time bv  spirits of turpentine or  mercurial  oint-
ment.   Opium must be given in large and frequently repeated
doses as in tetanus.  The patient generally dies betwixt the
eighth and twelfth day from the appearance of the symptoms.
    PAINFUL AFFECTION OF  THE NERVES.
     CALLED ALSO, NEURALGIA, AND TIC DOULOUREUX.

   This mostly attacks the nerves of the face, but the nerves
of other parts are occasionally  affected similarly.   When it
affects the face, it has its seat chiefly in one or more branches
of the fifth and seventh pair of nerves, which are spent upon
the face.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   The pain is confined to one side of the face, and comes on
in paroxysms, which in duration and frequency depend much
on the length of the standing of the complaint.  It is excited
to extreme  violence  by the  least exertion  of the body,  by
speaking, by the slightest touch, or by even a breath of wind.
When the affection is fully formed the pain exceeds any other
variety of human suffering, and is equally severe by dav and
oy night.  It is attended with convulsive twitchings of the
muscles of the face, which press upon the observer a sense
 ■f the pain which (he patient experiences.   Its natural ten-
dency is to fix itself in the system for life, and though it  is
ilie most excruciating pain  that affects the human body,  it
seldom injures the  constitution  materially.   Its causes are
not known;  it probably arises  from  the same causes that
produce tetany.

                     TREATMENT.
  The means  in common use for  this disease are narcotics
and nervines, local irritants,  and the division of the affected
oerve.   Of the narcotics the principal  are opium, cicuta,
(hemlook,) castor, and belladonna.  Opium is the principal 
89
BROtVCHOCELE.
and must be given in dose of two grains once in two hours
until it has effect.  The other  narcotics may be combined
with opium or given alone in their usual dose.  The carbon-
ate of iron is a most valuable  medicine in  this disease, it
allays irritability,  and gives tone to the system ; it must be
given in dose of a tea-spoonful, mixed in molasses, every three
hours.   The  peruvian bark, quinine,  and liquor arsenicale
in their usual quantities will have a good effect.  Leeches
and blisters must not  be neglected.   Other irritating and
stimulating applications, as tincture of Spanish flies, volatile
lineament, &c.  may be applied to the part.
   A case lately come under my observation which I treated
by bleeding from the arm, cathartic of fifteen grains calomel,
twenty grains of jalap, followed by three grains opium, four
grains castor, two grains camphor, three grains  ipecac, re-
peated  in two hours, in which time the patient was  perfectly-
relieved.  But, by the by, I did not weigh the above medi-
cine, I done just as you can do, give  a pretty large dose- of
physic, (no matter about bleeding,) after it operates make a
pill of opium  about as large as afield pea, take as much again
castor,  half as much camphor,  and as  much  ipecac as wilt
lay on  the point of a penknife,  and repeat this  every two
hours until it  gives ease, put a blister as near the seat of pain
as may be, when the pain is removed give iron rust, &c,
and you will  cure all cases that medicine can reach.
   Treatment by surgical operation,  is to divide the nerve ;
but the uncertainty of the particular branch affected, and the
difficulty of dividing the nerve above all the col lateral branches,
and the little  success which has hitherto attended! this opera-
tion, renders it a means  on which but  little reliance can be
placed.


CHRONIC DISEASES OF THE THORAX.

                    CHAPTER  IV.

                  BRONCHOCELE.

  Bronchocele, or goitre-, is an enlargement of the thyroid
gland, producing swelling of the fore part of the neck, often tx>
such extent as to produce deformity, yet there is but little incon-
venience experienced, or danger to be apprehended. 
ASTHMA.                     89
   The causes of bronchocele are involved in great obscurity,
 but no doubt has many causes differing essentially from each
 other.   It has long been known to prevail in particular fam-
 ilies, and in many districts, owing to some inexplicable cause,
 few persons escape it.

                     TREATMENT.
   From the unsightly appearance of  this  disorder, and its
 most general attack on females,  physicians have been indu-
 ced to trv every plan which ingenuity  could  suggest, or
 caprice devise; but the plans have  been tried, and  the phy-
 sicians time, and the patients money spent in vain.   Burnt
 sponge given internally  is a medicine  most relied  on; it
 should be made up into pills with bread and taken, or allowed
 to dissolve slowly in the mouth, and it  must be persevered in
 for several weeks before any benefit can be looked  for.   Io-
 dine  is considered the element of burnt sponge, and is now
 used,  but it must be with caution.   Give tincture of iodine
 twenty to  twenty-five drops, thrice a day to an adult;  it is
 made  by taking iodine pulverized forty grains, and add one
 half gill high wines.   When given in  pills, make one grain
 into two pills, one is to be taken morning and evening.   When
 used in form of ointment, rub a drachm of iodine with an ounce
 or two of lard, rub on the  part about the size of a filbert twice
 a day.   Burnt sponge answers as well, and being always at
 hand,  is generally used; take ten grains burnt sponge, ten of
 burnt cork, make into a pill and put it under the tongue and
 allow it to dissolve, repeat it twice a day.   Mercury may be
 combined with each dose, one grain.   Cathartics and bleed-
 ing, leeches to the part, and frictions with mercurial ointment
 is also recommended.  (See surgery for further  treatment.)


    ASTHMA AND DIFFICULT  BREATHING.

  This is often hereditary; when attended with expectora-
tion of phlegm, it is termed moist or humoral, and when with
little or none, dry or nervous asthma.

                     SYMPTOMS.
  It generally comes on at night with a sense of tightness
across the breast, and difficult breathing ; when thus taken if
(he patient  is lying down,  he is obliged to get into an erect 
90
HOOPING COUGH.
posture, and in free and cold air ;  when the fits are  violent
speaking is difficult.

                    TREATMENT.
  Bleeding is serviceable on  the first attack, if the pain in
the chest and difficulty of breathing is considerable,  but not.
so afterward, as the disease has a natural tendency to take off
the plethoric state of the system.   When the fit is brought on
by an overloaded stomach, an emetic will  give  immediate
relief; a cup of cold water with a  table-spoonful of vinegar,
when it  proceeds  from the irritation of mucous,  is a good
remedy.   An emetic will always give relief, and cathartics
must be given when  necessary ; these must be followed by
anti-spasmodics as in other spasmodic affections.  Laudanum
and  aether mixed  in epual  quantities  must be  given in
dose of a tea-spoonful in any quantity of  water,  and  re-
peated once  an hour until  it  has effect.   Liquor  arseni-
calis, tincture of digitalis, cicuta, &c. may be  tried in their
usual dose.   Sudorifics  must be given  so  as  to  produce
gentle diaphoresis, (see sudorifics.)    Vinegar  of  squills,
liquorice and  squills,  and mucilages, must be  freely used
during the whole  paroxysm.   Particular attention must be
paid to keep  the bowels open.  Smoking tobacco,  strammo-
nium, (stinking norris,) or the leaves of digitalis, (foxglove)
generally produce  immediate  relief.
  A light diet and cool drinks  are proper for  asthmatics,
and the feet must be kept warm and dry, and flannel should
be worn nexUthc skin in cold weather.
  During the absence of the fit, tonics and the cold  bath
together with moderate exercise will be mostlikelv to obviate
its recurrence.


                  HOOPING COUGH.

                     SYMPTOMS.
   Hooping cough atlaoks in paroxysms or fits of convulsive
cough, with loud noise or hoop at each  respiration, and gen-
erally terminating by vomiting.   It is the effect of specific
contagion, and like the small pox  and measles affects the
individuel but once in life. 
          CHRONIC AFFECTIONS OF THE HEART.       91

                     TREATMENT.
  The treatment must be regulated by the degree of fever and
spasm.   If the fever is considerable,  bleeding is  necessary,
and bli&ters should be applied  to the breast.  Cathartics of
salts, oil, rhubarb, &c, together with such as promote per-
spiration, a decoction of  snake root,  Dovers powders, or  the
antimonial solution,  (see sudorifics.)  When the  spasms  arc
considerable  and fever present, an emetic of ipecac will be
highly useful: this should be followed by an anodyne, (opi-
ium &zc.)  Mucilages, flaxseed tea, and slippery  elm tea, or
 i solution of gum arabic  must  be  given freely, if this does
not allay the cough,  a few drops of paregoric may be added
when there is not much,  fever present.   When there is  but.
little or no fever, give tincture of bark one ounce and a half,
paregoric half an ounce,  tincture of cantharides one drachm,
mix, and  give in syrup or tea, a half tea-spoonful  three times
a day.  On the third day there will be difficulty  of  voiding
urine, and the hooping cough seldom continues  more than
:bree or four clays afterwards.
  A grain of assnicedita given four or five times a  day will be
very useful in allaying the «pasms.  When the disease returns
(is recurrent,) after its  apparent  departure, as  is frequent
upon taking cold, an emetic and a dose of gentle  physic,  fol-
lowed by an opiate,  and the administration of diaphoretics
will soon remove it.  The diet should be light, milk and
vegetables, and  change of  air and tonic  medicines  will he
proper.   There  are  as many cures for the hooping cough as
there are old ladies whose children have had it, but the above
is the correct and only sure  treatment.  Sometimes a disease
is modified, suspended, or cured by an other disease  ; there-
fore, if  the child has never  bad the  kine pox,  it should bo
vaccinated.
                     CHAPTER  V.

    CHRONIC AFFECTIONS  OF THE  HEART.

   There are no diseases so little understood, and so difficult
of comprehending, and so far beyond the control of art,  as
chronic affections of the  heart.  Their characters  are so  ill
defined, so difficult is it to distinguish the idiopathic affections 
92
PALPITATION OF  THE  HEART.
of this organ from those cases in which its functions are sym-
pathetically disturbed, so impossible to  anticipate with cer-
tainty by the symptoms the presence of the disease there ; in
short, so intimately are the  functional disorders of the heart
connected with those of the brain, that an attempt to arrange
systematically  the disease, or lay down definite rules of treat-
ment, may be considered  as impossible.


            FAINTING,  OR SYNCOPE.

  This consists, as is well known, in a temporary suspension
of the functions of the heart and of the whole body.  A dim-
ness comes on  before the  eyes, a deadly paleness overspreads
the cheeks, the pulse fails, respiration is  entirely suspended,
and all  the senses cease.   The patient falls down,  and  this
posture quickly renews the supply of blood to the heart,  and
frequently this alone puts an end to the fit.
   The most common causes are violent and  long continued
exertion, long standing erect, violent pain, excessive evacu-
ations, especially of blood, external heat, passion, previous-
debility, and objects of love, dread or antipathy.

                    TREATMENT.
  The treatment is obvious and simple ;  lay the patient upon
his back, admit a free current of cold air, sprinkle cold  water
over the face, apply hartshorn or ether to the nostrils, or  any
of the volatile  oils, and when the patient is  sufficiently re-
covered let him swallow  some, and give such strengthening
medicines as seem requisite.   In  those  cases which are the
consequence of loss of blood, the most powerful stimulants,
as ether and brandy must  be given unremittingly as this alone
can ensure safety.


         PALPITATION OF THE HEART.

  This is attended with  great uneasiness,  and well known
to every one.  Whenever the action  of the  heart becomes
perceptible to the individual, he is said  to  have palpitation
of the heart.   This may  be sharp and  strong, or  soft  andf
feeble. 
ANGINA PECTORIS.
93*
                        CAUSES.
   The most severe and dangerous forms  arise from water in
 the chest, milder forms may arise from deranged  structure.
 It is also excited by strong emotions and passions of the mind,
 violent  exercise, irritability of habit, and is often connected
 with other diseases, and arises from plethora ;  the heart labor-
 ing to rid itself of the superabundance of blood, from sympathy
 with a deranged condition of the abdominal  viscera, and is
 consequently a frequent symptom of dyspepsia, constipation,
 and diseased liver, weakness of the heart also produc es pal-
 pitation.
   It is not  possible to lay  down any precise rules for  the
 treatment  of palpitation.  The  taking of a  few ounces of
 blood from the arm will most always give relief.  Where the
 stomach and bowels are in fault, give an  emetic of ipecac or
 cathartic of pills.   When it occurs in irritable, or debilitated
 habits, and in females, rest of body, quiet of mind, tonics and
 temperance will generally effect a cure in a short time.


                 ANGINA PECTORIS.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   It consists of repeated paroxysms of pain about the chest,
 occurring generally when walking up hill, or soon  after eat-
 ing.  The pain is so acute as frequently to give the appre-
 hension of immediate death ; it is referred to the breast bone,
 and a little to one side, shooting across  the breast to the left
 arm, terminating in the elbow, in some cases it passes to the
 right side in the same manner.   At length they are brought
 on by the slightest exertion, and  continue  for a half hour or
 more, the face and extremities become pale and are bathed
 in cold  sweat;  the pulse varies, ancl there is a distressing
sense of suflbcation.   This disease has been known to last for
many years, but in the most of the cases it proves  suddenly
fatal.   In many instances the cause cannot he known, but the
most common cause is an ossified (bony) state of the  coronary
vessels of the heart, (the vessels that supply the substance of
the  heart.) 
94
SUSPENDED  ANIMANTION.
                    TREATMENT.   '
  The object is to moderate the circulation by bleeding, and
allay the pain and  irritability by opiates and antispasmodics.
An emetic will generally give relief, and the bowels must be
kept regular; the food must be light,  and late suppers and
spiritous liquors must be  strictly avoided.  Warm bathing
and frictions are useful by promoting the  circulation  in the
pxtremetics and surface of the body.  Digitalis, hyosciamus,
and the prussic  acid in  their usual dose may be tried; but
bleeding, active cathartics of calomel, and occasional opiates
are our principal means.
   SUSPENDED ANIMATION, OR ASPHYXIA.

  Asphyxia cannot be considered  as  a disease, but a state
approaching to it,  in which  the sources of life are suddenly
and  violently invaded.  All  sudden deaths are of one or
other of the following kinds :  1. death beginning at the lungs ;
2. death beginning at the brain;  3. death  beginning at the
heart; 4. the simultaneous destruction of animal and organic
life.

      DEATH  BEGINNING AT THE LUNGS.

  In many kinds of death, (as in suffocation,) two stages are
perceptible.  In the first stage, sensations, thought, and vol-
untary motions are destroyed ; in the second, circulation and
the organic functions cease.   The body is said to be alive so
long as any animal  actions  are going on; therefore we do
not stop  when we  come to  the cessation of  the  mind, but
follow the changes as long as any  movements take place in
the body.
  The heart continues to act after respiration has ceased ; the
left ventricle of the heart continues to propel the blood to all
parts of the body ; but the blood is now incapable of support-
ing life,  and a few waves to the brain, destroy its functions,
and the blood from want of  exposure to air in the lungs, de-
stroys the  action  of the heart itself and every part through
which it circulates.  This blood is venous and acts as a poison
upon the nerves, and muscles  of tha body.  Here sensation, 
SUSPENDED ANIMATION.               95
or animal  life, with  which suffering is connected, ceases
before the organs  (organic life) ceases to operate.


      DEATH BEGINNING AT THE  BRAIN.

  In this the functions of the brain, sensibility, thought, ant:
voluntary motion, cease  first.   Respiration is dependant or.
sensibility and next fails.  But in the state  of  coma and
apoplexy, respiration continues slow and difficult,  sometimes
after every other mark of sensibility has ceased.
  Sudden  deaths  beginning at the brain, occur in the cas>
of severe injury, to the head, epileptic fits, and the taking of
narcotics and other poisons.


     DEATH BEGINNING AT THE HEART.

  Here the order  is reversed, the pulsations of the heart arc
first stopped, and as the brain is not supplied with  the'stimu-
lus  of  blood, thought, feeling, and motion gradually fail.
Breating in  this case is the latest act of life.  Sudden death
beginning from the heart occurs from poison, diseases affecting
the heart, and from extreme cold.
DEATH  BY THE  EFFECT  UPON  THE  SYSTEM
                    GENERALLY.

  Hemorrhage  produces death by its effect upon the whole
system, and not by its suddenly checking the  hearts action;
tor the heart continues to act after all supply to it is cut oil.
In death from arsenic, lightning, exposures to the vapour oi'
>ulpher, and by  impressions  made on the brain and spinal
marrrow, vitality  in all the animal economy ceases at once.

          SYMPTOMS AND TREATMENT.
  This subject is  involved in great obscurity and  experience
is rather to be preferred  to theory.
  The first question I anticipated is, how long may breathing
be impeded, and the body be susceptible of roanimatiou ?  In-
stances are recorded of persons being recovered after having
been a half an  hour  under water.  This, however, is very 
96               SUSPENDED ANIMATION.
much to be doubted;  after a person has remained five minutes
under  water, recovery is generally uncertain.   But as one
exception to this rule let me observe ; if the patient in falling
is hurt so  as to produce fainting, or in any way, a suspension
of animation, he may remain  as long beneath the water as
above and yet be recovered,  instances of this kind have oc-
curred, where  sailors, falling from the mast have struck and
in common  language beat the  breath out of them, and have
been resuscitated after a lapse of fifteen or twenty minutes.
   There are no definite symptoms by which we can judge of
the possibility or the impossibility of resuscitation.  The pu-
trefaction  of the body, is evidence that recovery is impossible.
The body of a person drowned is livid, swollen, cold, relaxed,
the head bloated, the face leaden or black, the eyes flaceid,
dim and partly closed, the teeth set, the mouth and nose
covered with froth,  the  tongue blue and swollen, the chest
raised, belly  tense, beating of the heart gone,  and the limbs
are generally stiff.
   If recovery takes place it appears  first  in feeble, irregular,
convulsive efforts to breath, gasping, agitations of the limbs,
pulse beating at intervals, water coming out from  the nose
and mouth, with froth, the skin  becomes soft, vomiting some-
times takes place, and the patient gradually regains his powers.
If there is the least motion of the lungs it may be ascertained
by holding a lighted candle near the nostrils, or by condensing
the vapour of the breath upon a looking glass held before the
mouth  and nose, or bv placing a cup of water on the chest
and observing the motion produced by breathing.
   To recover a droivned person, the body should be con-
veyed to a house, wiped dry and wrapped in warm blankets.
It must be laid on  a bed in a horizontal position, or brought
near a warm fire,  or the  body may be  enveloped in cloths
wrung out of warm water, or the bed may  be heated bv a
warming pan, or the body may be surround with warm bricks
or bottles filled with hot water, or  the body may be  placed
betwixt two persons in bed, or be put in a warm bath.  Arti-
ficial respiration must be tried in every case : it may be done
by blowing into the nostrils with any small tube, or insert the
pipe of a  hand-bellows into the nostril, and close the other,
press the cartilage upon the fore part of the throat backward,
to prevent the air from getting into the  stomach, and when
the air is to be discharged, open the closed nostril and empty
(he lungs  by pressing backward and upward upon the  breast- 
SUSPENDED ANIMATION.
97
bone.  Or the valve of the bellows may be raised and the
air permitted to pass  out, immediately repeating the  infla-
tion.
  About  ten  or fifteen respirations are  sufficient;  the  air
should be introduced very gently, as it might otherwise force
its wav through the texture of  the  lungs into different parts
of the body.   Wrhere the lungs cannot be inflated from the
nose or mouth, an attempt must be made to pass a tube into
(he lungs, as directed in surgery, and  if this is  impracticable,
the operation of bronchatomy (which see)  must be performed.
Electricity and galvanism, notwithstanding people  look  to
them with so much confidence, certainly are not worth trying;
to cut off from the heart a part of the blood, by cording the
arms and legs for a few minutes has been found useful.  The
limbs should be rubbed with flannel, volatile liniment may be
rubbed upon the patient and hartshorn applied to the nose,
and a small quantity  turned into the mouth.   Tobacco may
be used in form of injection ;  bleeding takes the  pressure off
from the  heart, and should therefore be tried.
  Asphyxia from hanging is  treated in the same way.   If
a person  has not been hanging over half an hour, and his neck
is not broken, by warm baths, bleeding, and brisk friction, he
can generally be revived.
   When children are suffocated bv cats lying on their mouths,
the remedies are the same as from drowning.
  From noxious vapours, is treated by sprinkling cold water
on the face, and frictions of snow or ice on the body, with
the above means.
  From cold, the  body should be put into ice  cold water, or
rubbed with snow,  increasing the temperature of the applica-
tions and room gradually, as life begins to appear; and  nour-
ishment must be early, yet gradually administered.   Spiritu-
ous liquors have a  tendency to weaken the system and hasten
dissolution, and should he carefully  abstained from in cold
weather.
  Frwmfevers, give freely of wine  or other stimulating cor-
dials, with inflation of the lungs, frictions, &c. &c.
  From lightning, gentle bleeding, clashing water over the
face, warm bath, or a warm bed, inflation, frictions with flan-
nel  and vinegar or  spirits or volatile  liniments,  and cooling
remedies to allay fever.   Pallisadoes,  trees,bell wires, metal
conductors, spouts, &c, should  be avoided during a thunder 
9-8                      poisons.
t^orm.   The safest position is, seated in the middle of a room
with the feet raised upon the rounds of the chair.
  From pressure of the cord fyc, in neio born infants,
take cold water or spirits in the moutli, and spirt it upon the
breast frequently, and inflate the lungs  by  raising up, anc
suddenly depressing the ribs, or blowing into them as before
spoken of.    If this fail, hold the child before a warm fire ant
chafe it gently,  or immerse  the body into warm  water.   I
recovered my own child, after  animation had been apparently
suspended for fifteen  minutes  by immersing the body up tc
the chin two or three times, suddenly, in cold water it was
then wiped dry  and wraped in  warm flannel.   A current of
cool air must always be admitted.
                    CHAPTER VI.

                      POISONS.

       SYMPTOMS OF CORROSIVE  POISONS.
  Their general action  is  produced upon  the  brain and
lieart, and in large doses  injures the alimentary  canal,  thf
nervous system,  or  the  organs of circulation.   Heat, eu: -
striction about  the throat, mouth, tongue, gullet, stomach
and bowels;  with excruciating pains of the latter, hiccup,
nausea, painful  and continual vometing, sometimes accompa-
nied with blood, bloody-stools, pulse small, hard and frequent,
sometimes imperceptable, with an  icy coldness, sometime-
intence heat, great thirst, urine voided  with difficulty and
frequently tinged with blood, cold sweats, purple spots, anc*
often an eruption of small pimples,  sudden derangement o:
the countenance, loss of sight, convulsions and loss of mind
are the symptoms.   Evacuant, antiphlogistic and  antispas-
modic treatment is the most certain of success.


                      ARSENIC.

                     SYMPTOMS.
   Offensive  breath, teeth on  edge, austere taste,  hiccup
nausea,  vomiting, anxiety  and faintness, heat and  pain at 
CORROSIVE SUBLIMATE.
99
the  pit of  the  stomach, pulse small and frequent,  cold
sweats, palpitations, great thirst and heat, loss of feeling in
the feet and hands, breathing  difficult,  urine scanty, red and
bloody, delirium, falling  off  of the  hair,  convulsions and
death.

                 CHEMICAL TESTS.
   The most certain test is to calcine  the suspected matter in
a tube, with equal parts of potash and charcoal, if there is the
least bit of arsenic present,  it will adhere  to the inside  of
the tube in form of a shining,  metalic coating.   Or, put the
suspected matter into tea, add  sulphuretted hydrogen, and the
arsenic will  fall to  the bottom, of a beautiful yellow color,
from gelatine, albumen, and bile, arsenic if present is pre-
cepitated bv solution  of lunar caustic (nitrate of silver) in a
white powder.  The ammoniacal sulphate of copper, added
to a solution of arsenic, produces a beautiful grass-green pre-
cipitate, if dissolved  in wine  should be dark blue.   The ap-
pearance on dissection i»a grained surface of the stomach, the
color of which is red interspersed  with dark spots,  general
inflammation, and perforation of the alimentary canal, detach-
ments of the mucous  membrane, and  gangieneous  scaling of
the integui ments.

                    TREATMENT.
   An emetic must be given if the poison has not been long in
the stomach, warm teas, and mucilages sweetened with sugar
or honey must be trken with a view to dilute the poison, and
sheathe the coats of the stomach.   (If an emetic  c.nnot be
made to operate, the  stomach pump, or gum elastic tube and
syringe, must be used to pump it out;  for this, a Surgeon will
be  necessary.   Fat  substances of all .kinds arc dangerous.
The best  antidote that we arc possessors of is lime wafer;
(see Dispensatory ;) it forms an arsenite of  lime, which has
but little ;:ction upon the stomach.  In the inflammatory state,
bleeding, bn'V*,  and  emmolient glyslors must be  used.   If
the nerves ar^r.rfx:!?;] assafetida, musk, castor and opium &e.
in their coon do-e will be highly useful.


              "TTCROSIVE  SUBLIMATE.

   In dose of       hth  of a g-rain produces une is: i-ss in the
                            7 
100              CORROSIVE SUBLIMATE.
  stomach, ?n a larger dose and if long continued, it causes
  colic and pain and inflammation of the salivary glands, the
  teeth soon grow  black,  becoming  loose, fall out, the gums
  swell and ulcerate,  the  palate b;>nes become  carious, swal-
  lowing and breath.ng becomes difficult.  Heart burn, diarrhoea,
  snitting of blood, violent pain in the limbs, and joints, trem-
  bling of the  limbs,  paralysis,  tetanus, mania, &c, are its
  results.
    It is precipitated white by drop] ing ammoria into a solu-
  tation of it, yellow by  potash, and  of an orange color  by
  lime water, by nitrate of tin a copious t'ark brown rercipitate
  is farmed, ancl by albumen or  mixed with cold water, a white
  floculent one.

                      TREATMENT.
    Copious  draughts of linseed, rranh mallow.lea or rice
•  water,  sugared  water, gelatinous broths, or  what  is still
  better sever;;! ghttes of the white cf eggs heat up with water,
  must be given, or pump out the stou ach.  Grerry M.L:lances
  are of no u^e.  * If (he care  is recent, bleed  ar.d c/ive emollient
  clysters to wh'ch add (wenty  drops  of  laudn.um,  r.r;d cover
  the belly with cloths wrung out of warm  water.  rihe diet.
  must be low.   If mrvocs mit] terns arise, j.s twilch'rgsand
  delirium, opium and other, antisj airrxti cs will be | roj er.
    The  cure of poirons whether miner.,I or vegetable must
  always  be conducted as directed above.   ril.e firf.t thirg is
  t > produce an immediate evacuation of (hem, cr a cm r.ieii.c-
  lion of  their effects,   i.lue or  white vitriol will be I c: t, ;.s
  ;;n emetic,  because fhey operate ^oenc-rt,  and may Le given
  in ('fce  of tan grains every fifteen minute.-, va  i it I'gir.s to
  operate,  and  (!;cn (be  patient  mutt drink fr;e!y < !  >.;.rm
  water  to as'-V  (he  ."oration.  A  calharl'c  a  att 1  ■ riven,
  v.fvcr the emet'c has had  e iect, to carry from (I.e. I... \  !.- wl.a!
  may have got (hare :  (•;••:.'  r o 1.  Bet a caila r-;. r. c; ! ,,t be
  riven  hef.rj  an  emet'c, fa-  it w'll carry tlto vvh L.flhe
  pois.ui into tJic'bi.w. ir, ard cortu'aly j aoduce  <  ;ai,
    To  remove the aiupefci.^n wheh  ei^ues Tier \ >.v so of
  narcotic laedc'i.e ; as op:um; y; ve  !in c  juice, <r , • cgar.
  V.' the ; at;c\,< !aj s ;n r da. C]y ttiqor, w th cob   e:.  ,    I es;
  bii; I errand si/mchu'iigdr; f,s u.rst be apj fed ;  • ihr     ar.d
  mT.is,  bauds ard fee!, aid the lags aid  an. :   re'   :i  with
  ca u;;ii,,abal cp'r'is ;~b ;i an e.net'c ir,wl i e gi» . :a:    en ::j
  the patient is  taiaicienlly r..'Covered, and av/eat   i,;   . c.c, 
INDIGESTION OR L:SPEPS?A
101
as before drected must be given.   These  are  the  r:,, vdlics,
let the poison be wlat it may: nnd unlers quickly resold
to, death must take place.   If fever supervenes the antiphlo-
gistic treatment must be adopted.


                    PEARL ASH.

   When  pearl ash or any  of the alkalies have been taken,
vinegar is the proper  antidote;  it must  be  taken in large-
quantities.  It neutralizes the alkali.


                         ACID.

   When any of the strong acids  are introduced into the sto-
mach, the reverse of the above is the treatment.   If there is
pain of the stomach and bowels, cramps, burning heat in ihe
throat, vomiting, hiccup, copious stools,great thirst, irregular
pulse, and difficult breathing, after the taking of any of the
acids, give an oz. cf  cab r ed 1  agr.csia, inaquart of water,
a gill every three minutes, soap, ?oda, chalk and water, also
answer when the mag;;us a cannot be got.  Vomiting is to
03 excited b/  ipecac or  hbelia.  And drink given; and
spasms allayed by opium; as'befjre directed.
                    CHAPTER VII.

          INDIGESTION, OR DYSPEPSIA.

                      SYMi'TOMS.
   THEfiyrrptorrs are a v.; utcf aprcrto, rllrrded with nau-
sea, sjr. etimes vomiting, I.e. rt-hi rn, <■;?t.vei e;s, di: tensions
cf the .'to, ach, rr.oafinc.'.1 ard  ja.i;  upon (akii g foul, f-hnrp
acidl q'mrf.c ouei.tly ri.'.ii g iat > the threat a.sahix f t.i.d gested
f>ad.

                        CAUSES.
   Oaaa:  oral ar.d lab'ti; I ovcrl..' dirgof (I.c Morrach, ir.dai-
rrionc;  of spir tunes I qucr.-, \v;  t.t cf exorc's-.c ar.d  ; r, ex-
C33.Tiv 3 or long continued evacuation?-, cold, anx cf y, affections
                           7* 
102            INDIGESTION OR DYSPEPSIA.
 of the  liver, too  much exercise, the use of opium, and loud
 and long speaking, are the most common causes of indiges-
 tion.

                     TREATMENT.
   If there is oppression at the stomach with nausea, give an
' emetic of five grains of ipecac and five grains of tartar emetic
 dissolved in  half point warm water.   And follow this with a
 strong  decoction  of columbo, cammomile and  orange peek,
 two table spoons full thrice a day, with ten grains iron rus;
 The bowels  must  be kept open with gentle  laxatives, as the
 tincture of rhubarb, or rhubarb in substance.  Mustard seed,
 when there  is flatulency and  sourness  of  the  stomach, as
 also lime water in doses of  a wine glass full thrice a day.
   When there is pain in the stomach, the means recommended
 in heart burn, which see, may be used to allay it, and use
 frictions with a flesh brush over the  stomach; if these do not
 grye relief, administer a dose of ether and  laudanum,  put a
 bjister over the stomach, and relieve costiveness by injections
 oe gentle laxatives; and when relief is obtained, endeavor
 to restore the tone of the stomach by bark, steel, and the other
 tonics.
   To relieve the costiveness which  always attends Uiistiom-
 pftiint, give medicines that  gently stimulate  the intestines to
 a more regular action, this is best effected by flour of sulphur,
 mfagnesia, or the chewing of the  root of rhubarb every day.
 Strong purgatives always weaken  the b  we Is,  and in  this
 complaint do more hurt than good.   If the  disease is brought
 on by hard drink, as is often the case, quit  drinking and take
 elixir vitriol, fifteen drops thrice a day in water or any  tonic
 mixture; or in some vehicle lake ten drops tincture of  iron.
 These are valuable in dyspepsia arising from any cause.
   If  indigestion arises from deficiency  of bile, give strong
 tincture of aloes,  or thrice a day twenty grains  columbo, or
 the same quantity of ox gall, or any of the bitter medicines;
 in common dose.  In some cases it is occasioned by putrid
 matter, from decayed teeth, wash  the mouth  frequently with
 alum water, or  lime  water, or  fine  charcoal  and  water.
 Costiveness  is most effectually obviated by sacredly observing
 die practice  of going every morning to the temple of cloa
 c\na, whether you want to or not.   Sira-king tobacco is the
 mfyst fruitful source of indigestion, and least frequently re-
 moved, because it requires abstaining from the pipe. 
JAUNDICE                      103
    The diet must be principally of animal food, and it must be
  well chewed, and taken in small quantities, followed with a
  glass of wine,  or good water, many cases have been cured
  effectually, by  a  diet of milk ; it must always be new when
  taken.   Drinking new milk every morning and evening on
  an empty  stomach,  will be useful  while  employing other
  means.   All known causes must be avoided ; and the patient
  must rise early ;  ancl exercise  in the morning air cannot be
  enough recommended.
    Exercise on horseback is valuable, and persons who are
  dyspeptic, will generally recover by getting into business that
  requires labor op horseback.
    There is no specific for this complaint, but by temperance.
  and an  observance of the above directions the disease may
  generally be removed, and its recurrence forever prevented.


                       JAUNDICE.

                         CAUSES.
    The passage  of gall stones, which appear to consist of the
 ingredients of bile, differing only in  their  size, number and
  figure ;  produce obstructions  in passing from the gall bladder
 through the ducts of  the intestines producing if their size be
 large great pain and jaundice.
   Enlargements of the neighboring  parts pressing upon the
 ducts; or any thing obstructing the  mouth of the duct, where
 it enters the intestine produces it,  infantile jaundice has  its
 origin in this cause :  hence that speedy relief afforded by pur-
 gatives ;  spasms of the gall duct, inflammation of the ducts,
 originating in them,  or spreading from the liver; or any of
 the viscera;  exposures to cold, drinking cold  water when
 very warm, vicidity if the bile and intemperate and indolent
 habits are causes of the jaundice.    And  it is a  common
 symptom of a diseased state of the liver.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   The symptoms  are yellowness of the skin and urine and
 white of the eye, and  a clay colored appearance of the stools.
 These symptoms differ in intensity, and have thence been di-
 vided into the yellow, the green and  black jaundice.  The
 urine tinges linnen of a yellow color, and  all the secretions
are similarly affected.   There is also languor, lowness of spir- 
104
HEPATALGIA.
its, itching of the skin, sluggish pulse, debility, indigestion, loss
of appetite, flatulence, and a  sour state of the stomach.
  Jaundice of infants and young persons, is a disease of
little or no danger,  while with the aged it is frequently the
precursor  of  the dropsy and  apoplexy, and becomes certain
evidence of a broken down constitution.

                     TREATMENT.
  Remember that symptoms are the only guide to practice ;
where pain is urgent give an emetic or a cathartic, this by
its operation will be likely to  remove the  gall stone if that be
the cause, or if it arises from obstruction of Che duct in any
other way. But a continued use of these wi}l not be prudent;
if after the operation of either of the above, the pain continues
a dose of  opium must be given,  two or three grains in  the
solid form, or 20 or 30 drops of laudanum ; and repeat accord-
ing to the  urgency of the  symptoms, and in very aggravated
symptoms the patient must be bled a  few  ounces, and  the
warm  bath in many instances, will give  immediate and per-
manent relief.
  Saline  cathartics,  alkalies and  bitter tonics are recom-
mended in green jaundice ; but it is incurable.  A generous
diet, cheerful company, change of scene, and moderate exer-
cise, in the open air, will frequently do as much as a regular
course of  medicine in chronic cases.   Bitters and aromatics
may also  be  tried,  the medicines for dissolving  the  biliary
calculus,  (gall  stone,) are soap, alkalies, nitric acid,  mineral
waters, mercury, blood root, from  thirty  to eighty drops of
the tincture,  and  the seeds  of common hemp;  but all  are
doubtful remedies  except  mercury,  which will relieve .any
form, and generally cure that depending on a diseased state
of the liver.
                   HEPATALGIA.

  This is peculiar  to females from the fifteenth to the thir-
tieth year of life, characterized by constant pain in the side ;
it may be either in  the right  or left side, and is tedious and
difficult to cure, but is not  dangerous.  Bleeding  from the
arm is attended with but little or no relief, leeches, cupping
glasses and blisters  to the side will generally afford relief; if
the symptoms are urgent, the taking of a few ounces of blood 
DYSENTARY.                    105
 from (he arm may be tried   Cathartics, such as ten grains
 mercury, fifteen jalap, or rhubarb, mixed  together;  a  dose
 of pills, or any of the common cathartics,may be given  with
 good effect, the bowels must be kept regular, and (he patient
 must take tonics especially, or  the muriatic tincture of iron.
 Electricity may be useful, early r.sing, and moderate exercise
 certainly are.



                    CHAPTER VIII.

                 i    DYSENTARY.

                       SYMPTOMS.
   A discharge of  mucus by stools,  often  bloody, violent
 gripings,  pain in the loins, constant inclination  to go to stool
 without being able to void any thing, and frequently fevec

                     THE CAUSES,
   Are putrid air, unwholesome food, green fruit, active ca-
 thartics, perspiration suddenly suppressed, unseasoned meats,
 and whatever irritates the  bowels.

                     TREATMENT.
   The first thing to  be done in order to carrv the patient safe
 through, is to give a close often or fifteen grains (to an adult)
 of calomel, with half a table spoonful  of rhubarb, or  with a
 table-spoonful of castor'oil.   If the fever is high and the pa-
 tient of full habit, bleeding will be proper.  The phvsic  must
 be repeated if it does not operate in  (wo hours ;  and after it
 has operated, give an anodyne of twenty-five to thirty drops
 of paregoric,  or two grains of opium, and repeat, if it does
 not give ease in twenty minutes.   If improper  food has been
 the cause, an emetic of ipecac may be serviceable in the on-
set,  f diowed by a  cathartic of  rhubarb ;  but  vomiting in
 general will do more hurt than good.   On  the fallowing day
 after giving  a dose of physic, if  (here is no  cvarulions of a
 natural appearance, rhubarb and  calomel, or rhubarb alone,
 in small doses must be given until (his effect  is obtained.
  The no(ion of giving opiates and astringants  (o cure diarr-
 hoe is a mistake ; they serve to lock  the disease in the sys-
 tem, but not  to drive it out.  The cure can only be effected 
106
DYSENTARY.
   by a thorough operation of physic, by which  the stomach and
   bowels are cleared of (he  morbid matter which keeps up dys-
   entary, and the bowels are stimulated to healthy action.—
   When the disease  prevails  generally,  the cathartic as  first
   recommended, must be given, and the calomel in doses of two
   grains combined with a grain of opium, and  four grains of
   rhubarb,  or  the opium and calomel with magnesia, or  pre-
   pared chalk, and  if after giving three or four doses of  this
   (two hours between each)  (here is no natural evacutions, a
   dose of castor, oil must be given.  If acidity (sourness) of
   the  stomach prevails, known by heat, sour belching and vom-
   iting, and excoriations about the fundament, it will be neces-
   sary to join with the above doses a  few grains < f soda, or of
   pearl ash, and to  give mucilaginous drinks,  as flax  seed, or
   elm tea, or solution of gum arabic, with a few drops  of laud-
   anum, or a spoonful of new milk and lime  water  may be
   given every three hours.
     .When  there is apprehension of inflammation of the bowels,
   the  warm bath, or fomentions to the bowels is recommended ;
   blisters and cupping or a  small  bleeding  will be absolutely
   necessary.  When the disease begins to decline, or the symp-
   toms of a putrid nature appear, an infusion of bark, columbo,
   &c. must be given, and the bowels left open with purges of
   rhubarb.   When the  diarrhea Continues after giving proper
   evacuants, and opiates, as above, we shoultl  try astringents,
   alum in pretty large doses, or  sugar of lead  in doses of  two
   grains once in two hours, (not more than three doses,)  and
   follow it with some gentle laxative.   A solution  of common
   salt in lemon juice or vinegar, is also recommended.  Starch
   injections, with a tea-spoonful of laudanum,  may be given
   once a day for a day or two.
     ^Throughout the wThole  course the diet should consist of
   gruel, toast,  arrow  root,  sago,  panado,  and  rice, and  the
   drinks must be of a cooling and  sheathing nature, and  ripe
   fruit, such as  peaches, oranges,  &c. may be allowed.    All
   offensive odours must be immediately removed, and the room
   fumigated with vinegar, and the clothing frequently renewed.
   To avoid, as much as  may be, all exciting causes, keep per-
   fectly clean,  and on the first appearance of a diarrhea, (when
   dysentary prevails epidemically,) a cathartic of ten grains
*  calomel and same of rhubarb, is all that can be done by way
   of prevention. 
CHOLIC.
107
                        CHOLIC.

   Cholic naturally admits of four divisions, the first is acci-
dental, which arises from acrid matter irritating (he bowels ;
the second is the-bilious, arising  from arendundancy of bile,
and other causes that  produce cholera  ; (he  (bird is colica
pictonum, arising  from the poison of lead ; and  (he fourth
ileus, which arises from disorganization of abdominal viscera.

                         CAUSES.
   Flatulence, indigestible substances  taken into the stomach,
acrid bile, hardened fasces, costiveness,  worms, acids, impro-
per  cure, er sudden disappearance of intermittents, sudden
check of perspiration, and the taking or the application of
poisons.

                     TREATMENT.
   When there is pain, with rumbling in the bowels, and ease
from a discharge of wind, or from the patient's laying on his
belly, it arises from wind, and may be relieved by a glass of
brandy, gin, or a tea-spoonful of ether and laudanum, or gin-
ger, pepper, calimus,  (sweet* flag,)  or  mint  tea.  These
should not be used in any case but that  occasioned by wind.
In full habits where the pain is fixed  and severe, bleeding is
necessary to relieve pain,  arid a  brisk cathartic must be im-
mediately given, aided bjggtgmulating  clysters ; and  when
these means fail the war*ni^l|ifh  must  be Iried,  or flannels
wrung out of hot water must'lie  applied to  the belly.   And
if the pain remains obstinate, Opium, laudanum, or paregoric
must be given in large doses until tjie pain abates; this will
take off the spasms, and the  physic will 0[fc»dfte, and  relief
will  be produced as if by charm; the mixture of ether and
laudanum is the best form.   It is also advised that when all
other means fail, that the patient  be made to.stand up, and a
pail of cold water be thrown on his feet  and  legs.
  In every variety an emetic will produce (he soonest relief,
and it should always be followed  by a brisk cathartic ; and if
yet the pain continues, opium must be given as above direc-
ted.   A blister to the pit of the stomach  will often give relief
The patient must carefully avoid  all  exposures to cold, and
the use of all acid and flatulent food. 
108
WORMS.
   Cholicpictonum requires no different treatment from the
other varieties, except that there -must always  be  given a
grain or two of opium with (he cathartic ; and this is neces-
sary when we  know  it arises  from the use of lead, because
the spasms are so strong as to defeat the operation of the most
active purgatives, without the  relaxation which opiates pro-
duce.


                       WORMS.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   The symptoms are  often very indistinct, the most general
are dyspepsia,  irregular  actions of the bowels, a  sense of
tightness across the breast, inability to swallow, uneasiness
about the stomach, (he belly is hard  and  swelled,  (here is
picking at the nose, hiccup, disturbed sleep, grinding of the
teeth, irregular pulse, offensive breath, a constant dry cough,
furred tongue, slow fever and emaciation.  Sometimes worms
produce giddiness and epileptic fits.
   Varieties.—The  lumbricus teres,  or  round worm re-
sembling in  its appearance  the  common earth worm.   The
tcsrtia, or tape worm is often very long, from twenty  to thirty
feet ; it occupies the upper part of the intestines, and  feeds on
the chyle.  The seperate j >in's of this worm have (he appear-
ance of gourd seeds   The ascarides, or thread worms, are
about half an inch in length, of a yellowish white color, and
remarkable for their quick motion.

                    TREATMENT.
   It would be tedious and useless to enumerate all  the rem-
edies that have been  recommended for worms.   The first
object is  usually to expel  the worms.  This is frequently
attempted by drastic cathartics, which clear the  bowels not
only of the worms but of the mucus also, in which the worms
imbed themselves.  It will be well to give-in  the  first  in-
stance four or five grains cowich, andafler waiting an hour
or so, give five grains of calomel with a tea-spoonful of jalap
or rhubarb,  or  in a  table-spoonful of castor oil, or  give  a
strong decoction of pink root, and follow it immediately with
an infusion of senna or some other active cathartic,  or  three
or four small doses of calomel given once an hour, and then a
brisk .cathartic will frequently  expell the worms.   The oil 06 
i
            DRACUNCULUS, OR GUINEA WORM.         109

turpentine given to children in dose of a tea-spoonful, mixed
with honey and milk or water, is perfectly safe, and one of
the surest means we possess ;  it generally produces an intox-
icating effect which quickly  passes off.   This will remove
the tape worm, which is almost impossible to move by any
other means.  Worm  tea, worm seed, oil  of worm seed,
tansy, rue, and wormwood are useful.  Tin powder and fil-
ings are  recommended, but (hey are not safe.
   Different remedies are recommended with a view of  poi-
soning the worms, such as tobacco,  arsenic  and  helebore,
but these are worse than the  disease.   But (here  has  been
too much dependance placed on all vermifuges.  The object
should b: t» strengthen the systenrugenerally, and excite  that
energy in the constitution which  will  enable  the bowels to
expel  the worms  and resist their  subsequent formation; by
regulating (he diet, keeping up a regular action of the bowels,
the general system  must be strengthened  by exercise in the
open air, by the cold hath, ancl the use of the various prepar-
ations  of steel, (for other worm medicines see anthelmintics.)


       DRACUNCULUS, OR GUINEA WORM,

   Is peculiar to hot climates ; it is caused by a worm which
insinuates itself into the soft parts of the body, creating  irri-
tation  and fever.   Its body is  white, head black, and is  long
and small  like a hair,  it is found most commonly in the  legs
and thighs, immediately under the cellular membrane, and is
from one to two and a half feet long.   About (he time of its
exit (he part about  (he head swells and inflames l.ke a small
boil which breaks and the head protrudes.

                    TREATMENT.
   As soon as the part  becomes painful,  a poultice must be
applied, and as soon as (he head can be got hold of it must be
wrapped  round a quill or any small roll,  gradually rolling it
every day till  the whole is extracted.   Creat  pains must be
taken not to break it, as small abscesses would be formed
along the whole extent of the worm. 
110        VOMITING AND PURGING OF BLOOD.
                    CHAPTER IX.

       ABDOMINAL  HEMORRHAGE.


     VOMITING AND  PURGING OF  BLOOD.

                       CAUSES.
  This is, first symptomatic of fever of a highly malignant
or typhoid character, or  ushers in an attack  of small pox or
idiopathic petechial fever,;  this is indicative of the greatest
danger, and is seldom if ever subdued.   In the second place,
hamorrhage from the bowels and stomach is the consequence
of inflammatory action in the alimentary canal.   In the third
place it is known as common to young women, between the
ages of fifteen and five  and twenty.   The matter rejected is
seldom pure blood, and generally is nothing more than a mor-
bid secretion of the stomach tinged with blood ;  it is seldom
attended with danger, or debility ; in most cases it is in con-
sequence of the irregularity of the periodical evacutions.—
And it arises also from colic, costiveness, and from disease of
some of the organs, obstructing the free passage of blood and
producing ruptures of the vessels..

                    TREATMENT.
  In young plethoric persons, especially women, it will be
proper to take away blood by the arm, and repeat it according
to the urgency of the symptoms.   Purging will  be proper in
all forms, but where the liver is diseased and the constitution
weak,  the  bowels should be simply  unloaded by castor oil,
or epsom salts;  if the bleeding is much, and continues long
astringents  will be necessary, (see treatment of bleeding from
the lungs.)   The oil of turpentine in small  doses is said to
be a preventative, but it is not to be relied on.  When it
occurs in young women the muriatic tincture of iron, &c. as
recommended in irregular menstruation must be resorted to.
Ipecacuanha in  full dose is said to have cured  some cases.
When  it is  from the bowels, and is attended  with emaciation
and extreme debility, glysters of cold water  should be tried ;
I have  seen this put an immediate stop to  it, this must be
followed by gentle purgatives. 
SEA  SICKNESS.
IU
             PILES,  OR HEMORRHOIS.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   A flow  of blood from the fundament, or  painful tumora
about it.  The causes are various, costiveness, strong aloeti€
and othei purges, riding, sedentary habits, &c.

                    TREATMENT.
   If the patient is of a full habit, bleed and enjoin a spare diet
and strict temperance ;  keep the body gently open with equal
parts of sulphur ancl cream of tartar, in dose of a (ea-spoonful
two or three times a day.  Set over the steam of hot  water
to abate the pain, and anoint  the parts with sweet oil, or oint-
ment of  thorn  apple, (which see,) and  wash the  part fre-
quently with astringent washes, such as lead water, solution
of alum, kino  or decoction of soft maple, spotted  maple, or
oak bark.  If these prove ineffectual anoint  the tumors night
and morning with  unguentum, in  which  is mixed pulverised
opium.   Leeches to the tumor are highly useful.   If the dis-
ease arises from debility, give ten grains of steel thrice a day.
When they  are of  the  bleeding sort apply  cloths dipped  m
cold vinegar and water, or a strong solution of alum, or  white
vitriol, and use the above ointments, and give tonics to restore
the tone of the vessels.


                   SEA SICKNESS

                     SYMPTOMS.
   It is sometimes so violcrt as to be attended with bleeding
from the stomach, with a swisti :gatid violent pain.   It begins
with giddiness and  fullness of the head, which is soon followed
by nausea, and violent vomiting.

                    TREATMENT
   It is proposed by some physicians, that persons before going
'> sea should accustt m  ihemselvi s to turning round rapidly
as a prevention, lying down wih the eyes shut, to avoid look-
ing at the Water, or keep as much  as possible on deck and  in
active exercise, and keep the bowels freely open by any com-
mon purgative^ and compress ihe abdomen  by tying a hand- 
112
GRAVEL.
kerchief around  it; and  laudanum, ether,  lemonade, warm
punch, bitters, bark, i «•• &c. puis:  be given after (he opera-
tion of the physic, especially if the patient is much debilitated.



                     CHAPTER  X.

     GRAVEL.  (STONE IN THE BLADDER.)

  This is known by  pain in  the loins and  urinary  passage,
sickness at the stomach, and sometimes a discharge of blouiy
urine.

                     TREATMENT.
  The most powerful medicine, is the cans'ic ali ali,made by
mixing two parts of quick lime with one of pot-ash, and when
the  lixivium is  firmed,  filter through  paper,  if  ihe'solution
does not form readily  add a little water, login w.ih a fma'l
dose and  increase gradually  as  the stomach w.ll  hear;  a
must always be given in  mucilaginous drabs.    An infusion
of wild carrot seeds sweetened is very  ustfol ; either cf these
must be continued for a long time if there is an alaiement of
the  symptoms. •  Pain must he  allayed  by  opium,  and  we
must give freely  of diuretics, (which see,) to force if possible
the  stone away with the urine.   To (i,!aie  the passage with
bogues will fi.vor (he  ubjecl ; the bowels must he opened by
sal.ne cathartics.   Where (he pain is great, h!ce<! ng will be
proper, as al o (he warm bath, fomentations and se;t ng over
hot  water.   To  r•■Sieve (he pain, hyoseiamus is best because
it does tiiit bind the body,   'i he patient must carefully avoid
all  sources of  irritation,  as violent  c\cici.*>e,  long  .'lauding
n\:< !, riding in a w.goo,  or on lu>r.-e back ;  these agitate (he
stone and bring  its rough  surface in contact  with the delicate
Eui'J'ace of ihe' bladder.
  For this complain! (hern  are cures  without  nan,bar  rrd
phys cians ha\e  many medicines which (hey tell  you will
dssohc the stone ; all oflic-e will  I.e. found under the head
lith >:tr:ptics ;  but I ltd! you (hat if (he above wT.l! not cauaw
(he  stone to come  away, ti.e patient will have (o rubmit to
an operation, or  suEur the elects of the alone fur  l.fe. 
BLEEDING FROM THE URETHRA.
113
     INFLAMMATION OF  THE KIDNEY, OR
                     NEPHRITIS.

                     SYMPTOMS.
  The pain comes on  sometimes suddenly, at other times
gradually ; it is heavy, acute, in (he loins,  shooting into the
privates, bladder, scrotum, and  perineum ; if lying on the
belly, coughing, sneezing, going to ."-tool and heat of the bed,
increase these s\ mpionis, there can he no doubt of its seat in
the kidneys.   The breathing is difficult,  (he  pulse  full and
hard, which becomes feeble  and intermits as (he pain rises;
sleeplessness, convulsions and headache also attend i(.  When
it arises from a stone, (he  pain is more  acute  than  when it
arises from any other cause.
   The causes are the same that  produce other inflammations,
and it arises from other diseases filing upon the kidneys, and
from the formation cf stones in ihe kidney, but  more com-
manly, the inflammation causes the formation of calculus.

                    TREATMENT.
  General and  local bh> >d letting, mild purgatives, cmo'ient
clysters, demulcent dribs, and the wci\n hcth are the prin-
cipal resources  ; blisters must be avoided, they chin | reduce
the disease.  Where (he \ ain is extreme, or we have room
to suspect  the  [ rc-ence i.f calculus, opium will  lc  | roper.
The  essential  o Is,  and  .stimulating   medicines  must  be
avoided.  Sometimes it will require llo  nu'.st act.vc  cathar-
tics.  I Knew a < asc in which,  after lai.  »-g several  doses of
c.il  unci & -. without  effect, (he patient  a><>k fifleen drops of
crot.ai oil.   Iij:cii ns  iuc pailicularly useful  in  ihe decline
oi l!.i^ c - a 11; l.i nt.  A i ersi.n laboring i.udcr (his  cempl.-.int
must liw; almost ont.n-lv on  vegetable fiecl, and avoid  (he
tiie of all fern,enled and spiritous l.quois.


BLLIiUiNG   FROM Tilt:  URETHRA,  OR IIE?uA-
                        iURIA.

  This sometimes errors  with vomiting of I.loir1  ''.^mnto-
mess,)  httt in  u.ost cases  it  is Mmplomaic of I  ■ . ' ,  .-< a;>o
in the ur.nary system.   It seldom pr/.o > hurtful,  i  :tatient 
114          GONORRHOEA  DORMIENT1UM.
should take a dose of salts, and use for drink some mucila-
ginous preparation.   When it  occurs in the last stages of
measles, small pox or scurvy, it is a mortal symptom, and if
any thing can be done, it is to support the system by tonics.


A STOPPAGE OF THE FUNCTIONS OF THE KID-
          NEYS, OR ISCHURIA RENALIS.

   In this disease the urine is retained in the  blood, there is
a small dull pain in  the iliac regions, anxiety nausea, vomit-
ing, hiccup, cramps, restlessness, sometimes delirium, lethargy
and coma, with a constant desire to void  urine when there is
not a drop in the bladder.  The taste of  urine is perceptible-
in the mouth, and the sweat has a urinous smell.
   The causes are those which  derange  the functions of th*
body, particularly those that operate upon the urinary system.

                   TREATMENT.
   Wrarm bath, stimulating diuretics, cathartics,  followed by
opiates, and cupping from the back of the neck.


                    INPOTENCY.

   When tho patient is gross and of full  habit, bleed and re-
duce by cooling ph\sic.  If the system is weak,  take twenty
drops of tincture of Spanish flies every three hours ; and when
this has subsided renew the medicine, ancl  take iron  rust,
tincture of iron, and other tonics ;  much exercise  weakens
any part, be therefore, temperate in this respect.


INVOLUNTARY  DISCHARGE OF THE SEMEN,
         GONORRHOEA DORMIENTIUM.

   Tnis  takes  place generally during sleep,  and seems to
arise from dreams, libidinous conversation,  loose books, any
thing  that  quickens the circulation,  too much  bed clothes,
stimulating food, strong  drink,  costiveness, aloctic purges,
riding on  horseback, and any  execessive  exercise.   This
must be treated by cooling  aperients,  water casters,  from
half pint to a pint warm water, and  to this  may be added a 
SCROFULA.                    115
tea-spoonful of laudanum.  The bladder  should  ahva\ s be
emptied before going to bed, and the patient must use tonics,
and avoid all known causes.



                    CLASS IV.

CHRONIC CONSTITUTIONAL DISEASES


                    CHAPTER I.

              t      SCROFULA.

   Scrofula' is designated as  a morbid stale of the lymphatic
glands.  The marks by which  we distinguish apredispositioi.
: >  scrofula is, a fair, thin, smooth skin,  light, soft hair, large
i'iue eves, and a  blooming complexion, thick lips, long slen-
der fingers, lorn: neck, narrow chest, and prominent shoulders,
with acute ami lively intellect.   Among  the earliest symp-
toms that devefe euh'-msclvcs, are swellings of (he glands of
the r.eck ; th<-.-e tumors often  remain for a long time without
jirouucing any inconvenience; this is the  mildest form under
which it ever appears.   When  these do not sulfide tponta-
neou-ly. an  imperfect suppuration takes  place,  followed bv
open ulceration : the ulcers heal slowly,  leaving ragged and
uijsighjh  scars,  and other tumors form  and run a sin.da.
cours?. keeping up  the disease very often for a number of
year.-.   Scroti, la aifects other  structures,  and (he scrofulous
abscess is distinguished  by its jagged and  uneven sides ; the
pu> is  ihin, ichorcvf,  and mixed with  curdy  fla);cs: the
ruf.rgin overlaps the sore which is of a light < ■■>' color, and
the granulations vre flabby and indistinct, and the  nicer re-
mains stationary for a great length of time.
   Tl.u climate mu-t be chang'd if practicable ;  flannel musi
be  vo:n i / \t the. skin in cold  climates; sea bathing is of the
greatest importance,  or the wann bath, or warm  sah bath
may be preferable ; there  isreason to believe (hat perseverance
in  sea bathing'for two or three \ ears has cured the complaint.
Moderate exercise and early rising.will  be proper, and atten-
tion to diet is of the utmost imooru m<■<-, it must bu nourii.hir.r,
not stimulating, and taken oj'.m* m .-» Tittle at a  (ice.   Th
                          8 
116
SCURVY.
remedies chiefly,  which deserve confidence, are five grains
calomel with half a dose of any other physic, and this followed
by bitters and tonics ; when the stomach and bowels are dis-
ordered, soda, quarter of a tea-spoonful in water,  and steel,
bark, mineral acids twenty drops,  several times a day,  and
mild  alteratives,  such  as decoction  of sarsaparilla and the
liquor of potash ; to this might be added thousands of drugs
which have been recommended in this disease, but  which are
of no consequence in the treatment.


                    KING'S EVIL,

  Is that  form in which the glands of the neck become en-
larged with  or without  inflammation.  The  course  before
recommended is applicable here, and stimulating  remedies.
such  as lotions and poultices, made of sea water,  mercurial
plasters, and  frictions with volatile liniment.   [For further
on scrofula see surgery.]


                     CACHEXIA,

   Is a term  used to express that depraved  condition of the
system which is the result of depressing causes long operating
without fever.


                       SCURVY.

   This is a  cutaneous eruption dependent on a bad state of
the blood, called scorbutic.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   The scurvy is gradual in its approach, attended  with lassi-
 tude, difficulty of breathing, pale yellowish countenance, the
 gums swell,  and bleed upon the slightest touch, the breath i>
 offensive, skin dry  and rough, or smooth and shining, witn
 large livid blotches about the legs and thighs, the whole body
 swells, there is pain in the bones, and oppression about  the
 chest.  In the second stage, the patient loses  the  use  of  his
 limbs, general emaciation follows with a tendency to faint
 on the slightest exertion.  He dies exhausted by some effort,
 or of dropsy. 
                  cachexia apricana.                111

   It arises from want of proper nutriment; occurs to sailors
 when living on salt  provisions, more so if it  has been long
 kept, by neglect of cleanliness, imperfect ventilation, cold
 damp air and want of exercise.

                     TREATMENT.
   Scarcely anv thing more  is  necessary, than the use of a
 wholesome diet, particularly vegetables.  And a navy  sur-
 geon has but little more to do than prevent the scurvy, which
 is effected by attention to cleanliness, ventilation, exercise,
 and avoiding cold.
   The articles of food to be sent out  with a ship  to prevent
 this disease, are peas, beans,  rice, sago, potatoes, sour crout,
 raisins,  currants, prunes, tea, coffee, honey, molasses, Seville
 oranges, marmalade rum, brandy, beer,.porter,  wine,  cider,
 vinegar, citric acid, the juice of limes, oranges, fresh milk,
 and the animal food must be fresh, and the water pure.   The
 use of what are called antiscorbutics will be proper to purify
 the blood, those most deserving of confidence, are lime juice,
 preserved  fruits, sugar,  infusion of malt, spruce beer,  and
 vinegar ; lime juice is a certain cure for the scrofula,  and
 where this cannot be  had pure, use  citric acid.  The sores
 must be  washed with lemon  juice, and a decoction of bark.
 The bowels  must be kept open  with mild purgatives,  acid
 warmth  upon the surface promoted  by Dover's powders,  &c.


               CACHEXIA AFRICAN A.

  This affects the negroes of the West Indies, but more par-
ticularly in the island of  Trinidad.   There is  an oppressive
weakness,  the patient becomes pale, and unable to take exer-
cise, the  feet and legs swell, there is palpitation, and occa-
sional vomiting,  the  symptoms increase in  severity,  the
stomach  rejects every kind of nourishment.
  It iscausedby fatigue-, and exposures to extremesof climate.
And is cured by change of climate, nourishing  food and the
exhibition of tonic medicines.
8* 
118
OIABEXES.
 CUTANEOUS HEMORRHEA, OR  ILffiMORRHCEA
                    PETECHIALIS.

   These spots on the skin are of a purple color, and consti-
 tute petechie and vibices, and are in the first place (he result
 of high febrile action, of a typhoid kind, and is a symptom of
 urgent danger.  In the second place, purple spots resembling
 (hose which occur in fever, are  associated  with,  or caused
 by plethora, denoting an unequal distribution of blood.   And
 in an other  instance, it is a consequence of deficient nourish-
 ment, and other debilitating causes.   And  lastly, we meet
 with cases that are wholly constitutional, in  which case  the
 livid spots will occur on the slightest occasions, and frequently
 without any obvious cause.   When the  disease ends fatally
At is by  some sudden  discharge of blood  from  an import a:  ;
 organ, (he lungs, stomach, or womb.

                     TREATMENT.
   K is not possible to lay down any definite ruleis of treat men!
 in (his complaint, and  it must  depend  much upon  judgment.
 If there  is high febrile  action and especially  if ihe disease is
 lependent on plethora, (a  full  rugged habit,) a  moderate
 bleeding will be safe and proper, aid must  be followed  bv
 cathartics of calomel, &c. and the use of proper restoratives
 afterwards.   But  when it arises from debility, or a constitu-
 tional tendency (o the complaint, r. contrary course is indicated.
 We must then cleanse  the stomach and bowels by a mild la\-
 ative, and follow  this by  tonics, as columbo,  orange  pot!,
 camomile, and (he mineral acids.  In many  im-:ances, wine
 and other .stimulants  will  greatly  facilitate  convalescence.
 'Hie recovery will be (odious,  and timuofore,  the means mix
 b * persevered in for a long lime.


                      DIABETES.

   This term is properly  applied to  cases in which the  in-
 creased  f! >w of uriii3 is permanent.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   This disease begins with lassitude, weakness, a disposition
 (o sweating on slight  exertion and  Imadache.  In km.oc  in- 
oiabetes.                    H9
stances there is  a diseased state of the  urine, a  long  time
before the patient takes notice of it.  The most that I  have
seen recorded, as having passed in twenty-four hours, is thirty-
six pints ; the average quantity is twelve or fifteen pints a
dav, the  quantity often exceeding the whole amount of food
and drink taken.'   The urine is of  a pale straw color with a
peculiar  swell, sometimes resembling sweet whey  or milk,
and has a  saccharine (like sugar) taste;  the appetite  is
usually greater  than  in  health, there  is  uneasiness in the
stomach  afier meals, with sour eructations, flatulence, and
irregular bowels ; there is also thirst, dry skin, which is rough
and parched from waflt of perspiration; the gums are swelled,
tongue white, brealh offensive,  great weakness of the loins,
emaciation, cold feet,  puk>e in the advanced  stage, quick,
feeble, irritable,  and there is every mark of general exhaus-
tion.   This  sometimes runs its course, and proves fatal in a
few weeks, but it  more commonly  lasts for years, ancl ulti-
mately wears out the  constitution.   There are  a few  cases
of recovery recorded.
   Of its  causes but little or nothing is known.

                     TREATMENT.
   The practice in (his as in most  other diseases, is almost
empirical, and the physician knows it;  ancl if he does not tell
'he patient all that he can do, and direct him to manage it
himself,  he is not an honest man, and might as well take the
money without  the shade of an equivalent,  as to take it feu
his attendance.  This 1 know is taking high grounds, but I
will extract the  treatment verbatim et literatim from one of
the most popular works  now in use.   [See Gregory, vol.
ii. p. 402.]   " Astringent  remedies were early resorted to.
more particularly lime water, alum whey, kino, and catechu.
On the supposition of diabetes  being mainly a disease of de-
bility,  bark  chalybeates, and  (he mineral acids,  have been
extensively used.  In 1776, Dr. Rollo suggested the employ-
ment of animal diet, and experience has shown that it possesses
an undoubted power of diminishing the quantity of urine.   It
will be found, however, in practice  that this plan of treatment
can never be rigidly enforced.  Blood-letting has been tried
by some  practitioners, ancl has  proved  serviceable in one  or
two cases, but it cannot be recommended for general adoption.
Cupping from the  loins has been practiced with the view of
diminishing  the morbid excitement«rf the kidney.   Opium is 
120                     DROPSY.

the latest  and now most esteemed remedy ;  but upon this,
and upon all other remedies for the cure of diabetes, one re-
mark may suffice.   Many drugs exert  a certain power over
the disease which after a time fails.   A blister to the loins
will  occasionally check in a remarkable manner the inordin-
ate secretion  of  urine.  Uva  ursi, (which see,) alum, and
opium will do the same in other cases ; but  the relief they
afford is temporary, and when the influence of the drug goes
off we are still as far removed as ever from the cure  of the
complaint."
   For further on the  treatment, see receipts for the cure of
diabetes.
                     CHAPTER II.

                       DROPSY.

  Ascites, dropsy within the belly; this is readily known by
an abatement of appetite, scanty  urine, thirst,  shortness of
breath, fever, general lassitude, with swelling and fluctuation
of the belly.   This is sometimes mistaken for pregnancy, if
there is any doubts, a few weeks will of course develope the
true state of the case.

                       CAUSES.
  All the forms of dropsy may arise from the following causes ;
•excessive drinking, poor diet,  protracted intermittents, schir-
rous tumors of the abdominal viscera, violent inflammations,
and whatever  may occasion  too free a secretion of the action
of the absorbent vessels.

                     TREATMENT.
  The treatment must of course vary to the circumstances in
this as in other diseases.  When the  affection depends upon
organic disease of the viscera it is beyond the reach of art.
If there is internal  pain,  fever  and emaciations, it will  be
difficult if not impossible to  cure.   Brisk  purges of calomel,
fifteen to twenty-five grains, with jalap, twenty  to thirty
grains, or calomel twenty grains,  gamboge  six  grains, must
be given, and  others of a similar kind.  Where  there is high
vascular action it will  be proper in the first place  to bleed ; 
DRCPSY.
121
 liese may be followed by an anodyne, or opiate.  Jalap will
be found the best and safest form of physic, and must be given
in large doses every day or two, and we may expect benefit
from any kind that brings away unusual quantities of water ;
such cathartics  are called hydragogue.,  Elaterium  is much
given of late years,  some it kills and some it cures ;  it must
be given with care, from half a grain to a grain made in pill,
and one taken every  four hours until it operates;  if it ope-
rates with a vengeance, as it  frequently does, puking  and
purging, and  producing dizziness of the head, give vinegar
or tartaric acid, or lemon juice, this will destroy the strength
of the medicine.   At die same time we must use diuretic
medicines, dissolve cream of tartar in water  and  use it for
■common drink,  squills, syrup of squills, strong solution of
nitre, table-spoonful once an  hour ;  or  spirits of nitre  tea-
spoonful once an hour; or spirits of nitre, paregoric, and balsam
copaiba in equal quantities, give a tea-spoonful once in two
hours.   In cases where there  is  constant  looseness of  the
bowels,  these  must be used, joined with opiates, and the  ac-
tive physic neglected ;  in such  case, a dose of rhubarb  will
be highly beneficial.  Salts, small doses of calomel, the tinc-
ture of digitalis in the usual dose, juniper berries in  gin,  and
syrup or tea of ginger in small closes, or two grains emetic tartar
every three hours, may  also be tried.   When the  strength is
much exhausted the patient must be  supported  by tonics,  and
a light but nourishing diet.
   Bandages  around  the parts  will  always be serviceable.
When the accumulation of water becomes so great as to
interfere with breathing, tapping (see  paracentesis abdomi-
nis,) must be resorted to.   This operation  will afford relief
if nothing more.
  Hydrothorax ; dropsy of the chest.  This is diflicult of
detection;  it has besides those common to dropsv, local symp-
toms, such as  difficulty  of breathing, aggravated by exertion
or lying  down, a sense of weight and oppression at the pit of
the stomach,  starting from  sleep, cough,  livid color of the
lips, palpitation and irregularity of the pulse, and in the latter
stages the expectoration  is frequently tinged with blood.
  This  is incurable, and all that the friends can do is to keep
the patient comfortable,  give occasional doses  of physic,  and
relieve the pain by opiates.   The doctor will tell you he can
cure it,  and will stick by till the disease goes off', and the pa-
iwht with it. 
122
DROPSY.
   HYDROPERicAitniuM ; water in the purse, or membrane,
which encloses the heart, it is generally connected with hy-
drothorax.   In this and hydrothorax, the means on which we
are to place any reliance at all are diuretics ;  begin with digi-
talis, three drachms of  the infusion  three times a day,  and
increasing it to six drachms, and it may be united with infu-
sion of pepper, or acetate of potash, nitre, cinnamon water,
&c.   Tapping the chest  [paracentesis thoracis] is recom-
mended as  a last resort.
   Anasarca,  general  dropsy, or  dropsy  of the  cellular
membrane.   The  most prominent symptom  is,  cedematus
swelling ancl pitting of  the  skin upon pressure ; it usually
commences in the feet and legs, which gradually extends over
the whole body, the skin is parched and dry ;  in severe cases
the skin gives way and serum oozes through  the pores of the
skin.  Erysipelas and gangrene are apt to follow in bad hab-
its of body.

                     TREATMENT.
  Where it occurs  suddenly from  cold, or the use of spirits,
bleeding will be proper, and this must be  followed by purga-
tives, as recommended  in the  other forms  of dropsy, with
saline ancl  antimonial medicines,  nitre,  acetate  of  potash,
solution of antimony and diuretics,  and relaxants, squills and
digitalis.   These  will not be of much service unless aided by
copiousdilutions.   Therefore liquids must be allowed, and such
as promote a discharge by  urine must be enjoined.
  But if the system is weak, and the dropsy  appears to have
risen from debility, the system  must be supported, in which
case recourse must be had to the use of tonics, camphor, bit-
ters, peruvian bark, quinine, &c.   Scarifications  with a
lancet let out the  water and afford  relief, the only clanger is
from the scarification producing inflammation and mortifica-
tion.  Blisters and issues are recommended,  but they are not
advisable, for the same reasons.   Laced stockings or bandage.-*
may be of some s< rvice. 
SCALD  HEAD.
ISO-
                   CHAPTER III.

 CHRONIC DISEASES  OF THE SKIN,  CHRONIC
             CUTANEOUS DISEASES.

   BLOTCHED, OR PIMPLED FACE.  [ACNE.]

   This is common to ycung people of both sexes ; it is char-
acterised by pimples on the  forehead and chin, and frequently
upon the breast and shoulders.   Itiirst  appears  like little
worms in the skin, but it is  nothing more than  the sebaceous
[fat like] matter obstructed in its  passage through the skin,
in consequence of which  it accumulates, hardens, distends
the pore which  contains it,  and produces inflammation and
abscess.

                    TREATMENT.
   Frequent bathing, rubbing the parts with warm soap suds
frequently, and forcing out the "worms," as they are commonly
called, will in most cases suffice.   But sometimes it is con-
nectel with disorder of the stomach, and an emetic or cathar-
tic should therefore be given in the first place, calomel should
be joined with whatever cathartic  is given.  And the sores
should be washed with lead water, or a solution of sugar of
lead, or white vitriol, or corrosive sublimate,  and anointml
with mercurial ointment, or unguentum or yellow ointment,
(unguentum, nitritis hydrarggri,) several times a day.
   In addition to this, if the tubercles terminate in suppuration
spreading some disiance round, with considerable matter, and
a dark blue color of the skin, which is painful  to  touch  ;
poultices, fomentations, puncturing (he tumor, and pressing
out the  matter,  following this with  the above- lotions  and
ointments,  with  occasional doses of gentle physic, ancl the
taking of twenty drops  elixir vitriol thrice a day,  constitutes
the principal treatment.


         SCALD  HEAD; TINEA CAPITIS.

   This is known by the falling off of the hair, owing to too
great excrement of the vessels of the scalp, which produces, 
i24
ITCH.
besides the above,  clusters of minute, oozing,  red  pimples,
dispersed over the scalp.   This in the first place is nothing
more than a scurfy reddened appearance of the scalp.

                    TREATMENT.
  If there  is matter formed, it must be pressed out and the
head washed clean (if much hair it must be shaved off,) with
castile soap suds, or solutioh  of blue vitriol; this  must be
repeated every morning until  the pustules cease to form.—
Other lotions,  as the white vitriol, lunar caustic, and  corro-
sive sublimate, will be equally efficacious;  the strength of
these must be  regulated by the feelings of the patient.   This
may always be cured without the application of a cap  tarred
upon the inside,  which is drawn off, after two or three days,
pulling the hair out by the root.  There are many ointments
recommended  that are valuable, as of white and red precip-
itate, sulphur ointment, sulphur and  tar, mercurial, of nitrous
acid, sugar of  lead  and opium, hellebore, mustard, pepper,
rue, &c.   This complaint is spread among children by sleep-
ing together, using the same  comb,  or by their heads coming
in contact in any way.


                  ITCH, OR PSORA.

   This arises from insects   (animalcula,)  which  are fir>t
produced by uncleanliness, and is then propagated by conta-
gion.   These  insects insinuate themselves beneath the skin
and produce small vesicles.
   To all insects sulphur is a complete poison, and if the use
of sulphur ointment  is persevered in, perhaps there is no case
but what it will cure.   Take hogs  lard four parts and  melt
it, add to the melted lard one part of sulphur ;  this should be
applied five or six nights in  succession.  It will be well to
take internally sulphur, or some other gentle laxative, at the
same time.   Unguentum, yellow  ointment, red and white
precipitate, &c.  (which  see)  will generally effect a cure, if
persevered in  for two or three weeks.   There are also many
lotions  recommended, as corrosive sublimate one drachm,
rain water one pint, or sulphuret of potash one ounce to a
pint of water, or castile soap (wo ounce, high wines one pint.
The parls affected  are to be  bathed with the  one  used,  by
means of a sponge  or cloth ;  these  are  also  very  useful iu 
LEPROSY.
125
mother eruptions, not attended with inflammation.   Any lotion
similar to the above may be used ; the object in all prescrip-
tions  for  the itch is to kill the insects.


                      LEPROSY.

   This appears in irregular patches, about the size of a half
crown, covered with small shining scales, encrcled by a dry,
red and slightly elevated border,  it occurs at all periods of
life and under every variety of circumstance.
   The treatment in this disease has been attended with little,
if any success.   Dulcamara (which see) is the only remedy
that has appeared to be attended with any permanent benefit.
The various mineral waters have been celebrated in the cure
of lepra,  and certainly are worthy of trial.  Warm bathing
is also recommended, and the  same  ointments and lotions
directed for the itch are also directed in this disease.
   In  Cayenne, a surgeon was entrusted by the  French gov-
ernment  with a number of these patients every year, with a
view  to discover a cure, but every plan has proved unavail-
ing.   The leprosy of Lombardy,  (pelagra) commences with
duskv red  spots on the back of the hands and  feet, attended
with  pricking and itching; small tubercles arise, then skin
becomes  drv, scaly and divided by furrows or cracks,  it is
treated as the above.
   Psoriasis differs from lepra in the irregularity of its patch-
es, and their being frequently accompanied with  cracks or
figures of the skin ;  citrine  ointment, and the use of sulphur
internally, sometimes is of advantage!, but it generally  con-
tinues through life.
   Prurigo is a papular  chronic disease, characterised by
excessive itching ; this differs from the itch in  its never ad-
vancing to vesicles, nor differing in color  from the surround-
ing skin.   It. affects  the whole  body  in  some  cases.  Old
persons are most frequently affected, and with  them it proves
so formidable as to interrupt every enjoyment of life.   In the
treatment,  cleanliness and the  warm bath are the most  impor-
tant remedies.   Purgatives must not  be omitted, and lotions
and ointments recommended for  itch  are  equally  successful
here.  It is in fact a variety of itch.
   Rixg  worms are cured by mild washes of zinc, mercury, 
126                   SQUINTING.
 sugar of lead, &c, with the use of the  yellow ointments, a
 vegetable diet and occasional laxatives.
   Rupia generally  appears in weak, or  scrofulous habits,
 long excited by intemperance  and irregularities, or it  may
 follow small pox and measles.   It first  appears on the  legs
 gradually extending  over  the whole  body.   The  treatment
 consists in change of air, the internal use of sarsaparilla, cin-
 chona bark, £c joined with chastity, and temperance.
   " The scabies of Illinois is most frequent in the winter
 and nearly  disappears in  the  summer,  it is  attended  with
 itching  and pimples filled with a transparent fluid.   The
 itching is relieved by exposures to the air.   Sulphuric and
 mercurial ointments, lotions,  &c, as recommended in com-
 mon itch is the cure  for this.
   Dandriff.  This should be  early attended to,  as  it is
 frequently the cause of scald  head.  It is  easily cured by
 cutting the hair short and  keeping  the head clean, ancl bath-
 ing it with twelve grains acetate of zinc, dissolved in a pint
 of proof spirits and a quart of water; this maybe applied by
 means of a soft sponge; and the use of sulphurous, mercurial,
 &e. ointments, to destroy the insects that produce  it.
   All cutaneous eruptions are treated on a similar plan.


                    CHAPTER  IV.

          SQUINTING, OR  STRABISMUS,

   Is produced by debility  of one eve.  When  the defect in
confined  to one eye,  stretch a  piece of gauze  or green silk
on whale bone, and cover  the well eye with it two or three
 hours at a time, thus the other will  become strengthened by-
 use.  The child  should be approached, and  its playthings
 placed on that side;which  will cause  it to turn  the eve strait,
the eyes must be kept from strong light,  and (hey should not
learn to read when young.  Where  it arises  from  organic
defect, all remedies are useless.
                  <

           NIG lit MARE,  OR INCUBUS,

   Arises from fullness of the vessels.   All causes that pro- 
THE VENEREAL DISEASE.
\r>
duec fullness must be avoided, as sendentary habits, coslive-
ness,  corpulence,  full  eating,  late  suppers,  anxiety,  and
excessive application to study.   The bowels  must be kept
regular, the palient if full must be bled, and he must sleep
with his head high, and  lay upon his side ; with  whatever
cathartic is used, give magnesia, or salts of tartar three ktu-
ples.   If the patient is weak give bark,  &c.


             HICCUP, OR  SINGULTUS.

   This is a spasm of the diaphragm, produced by  various
can*.-*, and cured  by taking a little cold water, or vinegar,
or lemon juice, or by exciting surprise or affright in any wa\.
If these do not succeed, try opium, mush, ether, assafmtiua,
\;c, and if all these fail, give  chalk, or charcoal,  or ammo-
nia, or soda, or pearlash in small closes, for it arises propablv
iron acidity of (he stomach.


                    HEART  BURN.

   This mav be produced by  various cause:-,  and  is often  a
symptom of  indigestion,. and generally arises from simihu-
cau.se>;  and must be treated by  first removing the uneasiness
with half a tea-spoonful of salt of tarlar, or  table-spoonful of
magnesia, in mint  water, tea, new milk, or any thing c m-
vcivont; or by  chewing a cru-t of bread, or taking a .vni-.ll
■."  ntitv of chalk, charcoal, or liquorice, ball.  To curMhe.
 ' ocase,  L'ive  an emetic-, and afterwards (en gra'v- of th ■
rasf of iron, three times a da;,  for some  weeks, keeping the
bowels re^i.hir by gentle laxatives, and o blister shouiia  fa
app!i<-.l n\r-r (he pit of the Momacm


             'I HE VENEREAL DISEASE

   Jscuivw species,  the one, a local  affection, termea go-
norrhoea or (:'•■!>;  the other, a constitutional  complaint, ca!1' d
••>;■_>i.i!>:. or pox. 
128
GONORRHOEA, OR CLAP.
             GONORRHOEA,  OR CLAP.

                     SYMPTOMS.
  A tingling sensation at the extremity of the part, which
swells,  looks red  and inflamed, followed by  a  discharge
of matter which is first of a whitish appearance, but soon turns
to a  yellow or  green color, with scalding pain in making
water, and involuntary and  painful erections.  As  the  in-
flammation increases, the testicles become affected,  swellings
take place in the groins similar to buboes ; the foreskin can-
not  be drawn back,*  or,  being back, it cannot be  drawr.
forward.f  When  all these symptoms are  present, the clap
may  be said  to be actively engaged  in the work of punish-
ment, and the patient finds himself fairly seated on the sfool
of repentance.

                     TREATMENT.
  There are two  kinds of this affection, the mild and  the
virulent.   The first may be cured by southing mucilaginous
drinks, such as  flaxseed tea,  barley water, mucilages ofgum
arabic, &c.   For the second, if there  be much pain and in-
flammation in the parts, lose some blood, take a dose of sails.
and  apply a bread  and milk poultice to the  part,  and after-
wards prevent  costiveness  bv  small and  repeated doses ot
cream of tartar ; or instead of the poultice, it may  be  soaked
every hour in  warm milk and water, or soap suds which
should often be  injected under the skin in order to cleanse out
the matter, the  acrimony  of  which might otherwise produce
mortification.   At  the same  time a  little of  the  followiaw
injection should be thrown  up the urethra with a common
syringe  six or eight times a  day,  immediately after making
water, viz : one scruple of white vitriol, and one of sugar of
lead, are  to  be mixed with half a pint of water, or of the
mucilage of gum  arabic,  and after  standing  ten or fifteen
minutes, the  clear liquor  may be strained off.  When there
is much inflammation, an injection of sweet  oil may be used
first.  If the groins and testicles should  become swelled and
inflamed, and phymosis or paraphymosis take place, thev arc
then to  be suspended in a bag or bandage  and all  'he parts
-----                                               *
  * Phymosis.   t Paraphymosis. 
SVPHILtS.
120
kept constantly moistened with lead water, (see dispensatory)
or with cold vinegar and water, and often renewed.  In the
mean time ten or fifteen drops of balsam copaivir tnixed with
the same quantity of sweet spirits of nitre, may be taken two
or three times a day; if a painful  incurvation (chordee) of
the part should occur, take a dose  of  laudanum on going to
bed, and rub on a quantity of unguentum hydrargyri. mercu-
rial  ointment, night and  morning.   Linen cloths soaked in
laudanum, or cold water, may be applied ;  and if a hemorr-
hage or flow of blood from the urethra supervene, it may be
checked by immersing the part often with lead water, or cold
vinegar and water, and in all cases the patient ought to make
use of very low diet, and remain perfectly quiet.


                 SYPHILIS, OR  POX.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   Chancres and buboes are among the first symptoms of this
dreadful malady,  which, if not checked, goes on to cause an
ulcerated throat, nodes, and destruction of the nose and  pal-
are.   The  voice is lost, the hair falls off, foul spreading ulcers
show themselves all  over the body, the stench of  which is
insupportable, .and before he dies the miserable v ictiin become s
a loathsome mass of corruption.
   A chancre at first resembles a pimple, with a little  pit or
depression  containing matter, which soon becomes an  ulcer,
with an irregular  thickened edge, covered with a tough, ash-
colored matter, the basis of which is hard and surrounded bv
inflammation.   It is  generally found on the foreskin.
   A bubo  is an enlargement of the gland in the groin fcegin-
mng in a hard  lump, not bigger  than a bean,  and incnvMui;
to the size  of a hen\ ei^s.
   A node  is a hard tumor formed on a bone.

                    TREATMENT.
   So/.ie of the  preparations of mercury must he taken until
the system is fully charged with the  medicine, which mav
be known by a soreness of the mouth  ancl gums.   Calomel,
the blue pill,and  unguentum hydrargyri, are the preparations
of mercury most  generally  used.   The  two first  are  used
internally,  the last, externally.   Three or four grains « !  cai-
■omel, or one blue pill, may be taken night and morning ; < r 
J30
GLEET.
 the system may be charged by rubbing the groins twice a day
 with mercurial  ointment, at  the same time calomel  ma;, be
 taken by the mouth.   When the mouth  becomes sore, omit
 (he mercury and lake a tea-spoonful  of sulphur in milk or
 flaxseed tea, night and morning for a few days; after which
 the mercury is to be resumed and continued in the same wa^
 for ten or twelve days after the total disappearance of all the
 .symptoms.  In  scrofulous and debilitated  habits, the nitric
 acid is better  than mercury; ten  or twelve  drops, diluted
 with water to a convenient sourness, may be  taken three-
 times a day until the gums begin to be sore ; alternate them
 for a few days with a decoction of guaiacum and sarsaparilla,
 after which resume the acid,  and continue it in the same wav
 until the disease is cured.  As for the chancres, touch them
 with lunar  caustic, and then apply  a piece of rag to them
 smeared with  precipitate ointment.   If they arc situated  un-
 der the foreskin and it cannot be drawn back,  Ike foreskin
 must be slit up.  If there is a bubo, apply thirty leeches, and
 after they are taken off, caver it with several blisters, one
 after another ;  if this does not prevent its increasing, and the
 formation of matter is inevitable, then apply bread and milk,
 or flaxseed poultices, and as soon as a fluctuation  of matter
 can  be felt,  open it with a lancet.   The patient should be
 kept still, the  bowels  open  by some  gentle phvsic: and in
 full  habits,'the diet should be light  and cooling.  Tie parts
 must be kept clean by washing with milk and water or soap
 suds; and in order to prevent the disease, after a suspicious
 connection, the  urine is to be discharged, and  a wash of di-
 lute-el  spirits,  or strong soap i-uds .should  be  immediately.
 and thoroughly  used.   The  sure method,  however, of pre-
 venting the disease, is to avoid the cause : for how ucvu  a
.man walk upon <\»alsandhi? fee! not be burned?''   Solomon.


                        GLEET.

   Is the weeping of a thin giau-y fluid, like the wime of an
 egg, from the  urethra, and  is cam eel by a long cvuiiuued
 clap.

                     TREATMENT.
   It is very difficult to get lid of, and frequently defiescverv
 i fort made for that purpose.   It must be aUempieri, however, 
OF CONTAGION.
131
by the daily use of the cold bath, and thiity drops of the mu-
riated tincture of iron (see dispensatory) may be taken three
limes a day, for months together, in a glass of the cold infu-
sion of peruvian bark ;  or balsam copaivac, in doses of twenty
or thirty drops, three times a day, a decoction of bearberry,
(arbutus uva ursi, see disp.)  may be used with  advantage.
In the mean  time dissolve twenty  grains of alum  in half a
pint of water, and let some of this be injected up the urethra
two or three times a day.
   In everv stage, and particularly in the last mentioned, take
tme ounce of cubebs,  same of sulphate of iron, '(copperas)
and put them into a quart of gin,  and drink several times a
da. of it, using morning and evening salts and cream of tartar
mixed together, in a dose of half a table-spoonful.   The effect
is so sudden that the  patient  will imagine himself well in
tmr;v-six hours,  but  he must continue it for a week or two,
mkmg a mercurial pill occasionally to eradicate it completely.
                    CHAPTER V.

                  OF CONTAGION.
 eontagio, from contango ; to meet or touch each other.

  This is  divieed into common and specific contagion.—
Tho:e d'seases which arise sometimes from contagion, and
sometimes from the operation of other causes, are said to arise
cun common contagion, e»f (his kind are catarrh, cynanche,
mumps, e.-ysi; ebi>, opthalmia, tv; im.-, and scarlatina.  Those
 vhich cannot be pro: I need  by any other way than by conta-
gion, are said to arise from specific contagion ;  of thin  kind
are  small pox,  measles, the plague,  hydrophobia  and syphi-
lis.   The principle of contagion  is,  tho.>e morbid or putrid
dfluvia that arise; from decayed  vegetable a.id  animal sub-
stances, and from a person  laboring under disease.
  The principal circumstances v/'ich ope rat ■  to develipe  it
.«ru, ill ventila'ed  apartments,  want of cleanliness, trouble,
previous weakness, excessive faf'gue, unwholesome: or scanty
diet and a peculiar state of the atmosphere.
  There is much controversy  among medical men with re-
gard to the mode in which contagion produces its effects  upon
the system ;  but the fact is,  that no one knows, and  after
                            9 
 132                OF CONTAGION,.

 you havn pored over volumes on this subject, you will know
 no more about it  than when you first learned the. deffinition
 of the  word;  nevertheless, you will known just  as  much
 about it as any of t1 em.   Diseases w ich arise frcrn conta-
 gion, are most ant to be of the low typhoid farm.
   There are a few conjectures regarding the manner in which
 their influence is  exerted on  the animal economy,  which it
 will be proper to notice.   " Great attention r as been paid bv
 Dr. Hogarth and others, to determine the distance  to which
 the noxious effluvia extends, and at which they operate in
 exciting disease.  T; ere is reason to believe that this varies
 in different cases,  and that the plague, typhus, and small pox,
 have in this respect their several  laws.   The subject, how-
 ever, does not appear to have  been yet investigated  wif
 sufficient accuracy to enable us  to lay down any established
 points of doctrine with regard  to it.  It is not exactly known
 how far the sphere of contagious influence is affected by ven-
 tilation.   In the case of continued fever, we are warranto
 in saying that, a free circulation of a pure and cool air renders
 the contagious particles comparatively inert, and that concen-
 tration is nearly if not altogether indispensable to the dctivi'v
 of contagion."
   Thus with great pretensions in the onset to to1! much, and
 the concluding assurance that they know nothing to  tell; at-
 thors have written volumes which might be quoted, and :>r.
 little to  the instruction of any  one, as t e above.
   It is supposed that the means of prevention a.e, to~decom-
pose it, or render it inert, by scm't ring the concentrated parti-
cles.   The  latter  of which must be effected  by  thorough
ventilation, and the former by fumigation,' winch is considered
by people of sense as rather a doubtful remedy.  They are
prepared in the following manner :  to make nitric acid  gass
add some  salt pmro (nitre)  to a little hi a'mi sulphuric acid,
 in glass or earthen cups, at the  distance  of twenty  or thirty
feet anart; or to make muriatic acid fumes, moisten  common
 salt with sulphuric acid, (oil  vitriol,) in  :he same  manner.
 Sulphur  burnt  aliects the breathing  and injures  the patient.
 To make oxvmuriatic or c' li>rine, mix powdered manganese
 and common salt, half ounce each., add a tea-spoonful of watvr
 and half a tea-.-monful  s,:p  uricac/d, from time to time, and
 you w 11 have a constant -upplc  of the gas.5. 
OEKHRAL TREATMENT OF AU FEYBR8.      l$4
                       FOMITES.

   Bodies that, receive, or to which contagious parti dies aOactj
themselves, are called fomites.   In those they often remain
a very long period of time,  and subsequently renew the dis-
ease with all its former, and frequently with increased viru-
lence.  The walls and  wainscoting of the  room, beds and
furniture, and uu  clothes of the patient are those which gen-
erally retain the contagious particles, and aro more dangerous
than the body of the patioul, or even than the dissection of
lad body.  The poison of contagion is not so apt to  affect
thos-o who are constantly exposed to it, as those who are not.
   The rules of prevention are to remove  from the source of
contagion, observe tho strictest cleanliness, occupy the upper
stories of the building, letting the air freely circulate, fumi-
gation as before  mentioned, and tho washing of the furniture
and clot ies, and exposing them to the free air.  Camphorated
spirits and the various aroinaLics about the room and the. body
of tho patient, ara  also recommonded.


GCN2HAL  TREATMENT OF ALL FEYERS/"sANU
               OTHER COMPLAINTS.

  RtnLB 1st.   In  fevers and every complaint, whatever it
nay ba called, if you  find  the pulse quick, hard, full, and
strong, the headaehe,  tongue foul, skin hot, or those marks
winch denote  it of an inflammatory nature, remember the
plan h; to roduce it by bleeding, purging,  low diet, dri;;king
plentifully of cold  water and  lerno.uadu,  rust, &c.
  Rule 2d.   If on the  contrary, thenul.se  be small, soft,
feeble, and intermitti.ig,  the tongue dark, and great, dobilil;.
or weakness is  evident, reverse the whole plan ; the diet
must be generous  and  nourishing ;  the  bowels opened with
gentle laxatives, and the strength supported by bark, quinine,
wine, and oth^r tonics of various  kinds.  It is  necessary,
howovor, to distinguish the weakness hnre meant, from thai
state of debility w  uch  arises from excessive  action, from the
stalling up of the vessels, and which requires the lancet,  in
that state which requires tonics, the pulse is small, soft, some-
times like a thread, and quick.   In the other, which require*
                            9* 
134                 OF THE PULSE.
 the lancet, the pulse is slower and full, giving considerable
 resistance to the pressure of the finger.
   Rule 3d.  If in addition  to the symptoms mentioned  in
 tho first part of the second rule, the tongue should be covered
 with a black coat, foul dark looking sores form about tlio
 gums and insides of the cheeks, the breath be offensive, &e.
 tho same class of medicines is  to be vigorously employed,
 and a free use of acids and other antiseptic articles must also
 be adopted.
   Rule 4th.   Severe local pains, as in the head, side, &c
 require the use of the lancet, purging, and blisters to the part.
   Rule 5th.   Incessant and earnest entreaties on the part
 of the sick, for, or longing after, any particular article of diet,
 if steadily persovered in, may be safely indulged,  whether
 the use of  it agrees or not with our pre-conceived  ideas on
 (ha subject.
   Rule 6.   In all fevers, when the pulse is quick full and
strong, the skin burning to the touch, and  there is no perspi-
ration, dash cold water over  the head  and shoulders of the
patient, wipe him dry and put him to bed.   If in consequence
of this, a chill should bo experienced, and  the  pulse sink.
giro warm  wine, &c, and omit the water for  the future.
But if a pleasant glow over the whole frame should  follow
tho affusion, and tho patient feel relieved  by it,  repeat it  as
often as may be necessary.
   Rule 7.   Observo carefully  tho effects  of  the  variowR
articles of food, as well as physic, upon your own body, ar.d
choose those which experience proves to agree best wi -1\ yow.
Itis a vulgar but a true  saying, that " what is  one  inan^s
meat is another's poison," and every man who thinks, for him-
self may knoiv his own constitution  much better  than  any
doctor can guess it for him.
  Rule 8.   Keep a sick  room always well ventilated.—
Plenty of fresh air is an important remedy in all diseases.
It is not meant by  this that the patient should be exposed  to
a direct current of air, which should always be  avoided by
well or sick.
                  OF THE  PULSE.

  Tan pulse is nothing mor® than tho beating of an artery.
Every time the heart contracts, a portion of blood is tbrced 
or the pulse.                  135
 into the arteries, which dilate  and swell to let it pass, and
 then immediately regain their former size, until by a second
 stroke of the same organ,  a fresh column of blood is pushed
 through them, when a similar action is repeated.   This swel-
 ling and contracting constitutes the pulse, and consec[uentl>
 it may  be found  in every part of the body where the arterie§
 run near enough to the surface to be felt.   Physicians gen-
 erally feel for it  at the  wrist,  because it is more  convenient.
   The strength  and velocity  of the pulse vary much in dif-
 ferent persons, even in a state of perfect health.   It is much
 quicker in  children than  in  adults; and  in old  persons  it
 grows  more slow  and feeble.   The pulse  is increased by
 running, walking, riding and  jumping ;  by eating, drinking,
 singing, speaking, and  by joy,  anger, &c.   It is diminished
 by fear, want of nourishment, melancholy, and by whatever
 tends to debilitate the system.
   A full tense  and strong pulse, is when the artery swells
 boldy under the  finger, and resists its pressure more or less;
 if in addition to this the pulsation be very rapid, it is called
 epiick, full and strong ;  if slow, the contrary.   A hard corded
 pulse is when the artery feels like the string of a violin, or a
 piece of tightened  cat-gut, giving considerable resistance  to
 the pressure of the finger.   The soft and intermitting pulsei
 are easily known by ti.eir  names.
   In feeling the  pulse,  three or  four fingers should be laid on
 it at once.  The most  convenient spot to do this, as already
 mentioned,  is the wrist, but it can be readily felt in the tem-
 ple, just before and close to the  ear ; in the bond  of the arm ;
at the under part of the lower end of the thigh  among the
hamstrings, and on the  top of the foot.   There are two kinds
of blood vessels in the human  body, arteries and veins.  The
arteries carry the blood from  the heart to the extremeties  of
the body, where they are  connected with the veins, which
bring it  back again.   An  artery pulsates or beats; a vein
does not.
   In all complaints, and especially fevers and  bowel  com-
plaints,  the  importance of clothing  the patient  in  flannel
cannot be too strictly enjoined.   Flannel worn next  the skin
serves as a constant  stimulous, and keeps up the circulation
upon the surface, and thereby  diverts the circulation, and re-
lieves the oppression of the internal parts. 
 
                      l»AIiT II.

 DISEASES OF WOMEN AND CHILDREN.


                      CHAPTER I.

   The importance of this subject must be obvious to the most
 superficial observer; especially important, is toe study of the
 preservation of health to females, because on them the affections
 and passions of body and mind operate with threefold force; and
 thenatural construction of their systems, and constitution of ha-
 bits, being complex and del icate,renders them more susceptible
 of disease than male--;  and those diseases  peculiar to them
 are of such a nature!, that they insinuate themselves into the
 constitution unobserved by those who are unacquainted with
 the subject of health, entwining themselves insidiously around
 the pillars of health ancl life, until  they encircle the whole,
 and the fiend, the  sister, the mother, and wife, are hurried
 ■ o a premature grave.
   And aside from the above, it is important that they should
 oiake this part of the work their particular study, for to them
 is entrusted the care of the health, and  first principles of the
 education of children,  and consequently the country's future
 hopes.  It is presumed that in  this enlightened age of the
 world, there are but few, if any  women, who have the im-
mortal honor of being  mothers, that are ro unnatural  as to
force their tender infant> into the arms of a  stranger to be
reared, when it  is  possible to bring them up at their own
breads.
  And further, I urge the necessity  of mothers rearing their
own children, from the  premises of its being, not only natural,
but conducive to the health of the mother as well as the child;
 upon the ground of the almost impossibility of employing any,
but the ignorant, and those of the very lowest order of society,
to undertake the task ; thus thuse instructions and  icoral
precepts are not given, when tho heart  is most likely to re-
ceive and  retain  them, which is  so import antral ih;s  period,
»nd which a child is sure to receive from a tender parent.
  With respect to  lh<i young ladies,  the general habits of 
138
PERIODICAL COURSES.
    some are much to be regreted.  Impressed with the mistaken
    idea, that slender and delicate forms are essential to beauty,
    they destroy the tone of the'stomach, and produce a withered,
    ghastly paleness, by drinking vinegar ; prevent the healthy
    action of the lungs, by compressing the  ribs  with corsets
    and tight lacing ;  and by the  use of  light  dresses in cold
    weather, they bring on incurable consumptions.   The  fact
    is, that beauty is not the work of art, but the gift of nature ;
    and  even those to  whom  nature has not  been lavish  in her
    bounty, will find that habits of exercise, cleanliness, temper-
    ance, cheerfulness, and  modesty, are the best cosmetics, and
    will render  their persons much more agreeable than many of
    them whom they now  endeavor to  imitate.   Among these
    cosmetical  beautifiers,  there is none  more important than
    exercise ; it is this, indeed, that gives beauty to the female
    form, and strength to I er  constitution; that imparts to her
    cheek its loveliest colors; to her eye, its most  bewitching
    brightness ;  and alike qualifies the mind for thought, and the
    heart for love.  But  how different is the female  who leads
    an inactive  and  sedentary life !  This habit of idleness, too
    generally looked on as  proof of a fine modern ladv, seldom
    fails to relax the system, to retard the circulation, vitiate the
    blood, and obstruct the secretions.   Hence, that chalky pale-
    ness of the face, that  faintness of the eyes, indigestion, flatu-
    lence, weak nerves, low spirits, and irregularities of nature.
      Yes, many a girl by constant muffling and housing herself,
    by dreading that the sun should  ever kiss her cheek,  or the
    morning breeze  disturb  her ruffles,  by much indulgence  in
    bed, and other imprudencies, renders herself so exceedingly
»    pale, and delicate, and puny, that her appearance is better
    fitted to damp love than to excite it.


     PERIODICAL COURSES,  OR MENSTRUATION.

      The commencement  and  regular  continuance of  this  is
    absolutely essential to the health of females; and though not
    a disease, yet it  lays the foundation of most complaints pecul-
    iar to females.   And  when from anv cause they  do not com*'
    on at all, the person is  always  sickly, and generally  dies in
    a few years.  The courses in this country generally come  on
    about the fourteenth year  of age, sometimes not  sooner than
    the seventeenth or eighteenth;  they are preceded by  uneasy 
PERIODICAL courses.
139
feelings, pain in the loins, with alteration in the appearance
of the countenance.   It  recurs once  in about  four  weeks,  .
when the patient is in health and does not nurse, and contin-
ues above thirty years in this climate.
   The first deviation from a natural course  tl at  I  shall
notice, is where it is altogether wanting, e>r unusually trifling
in quantity.  When it dues not appear nor yield to the  com-
mon treatment, hereafter  described, it  must be ascertained if
there is not a  mechanical obstruction, which  is  seimetimes
the case,  the  operation is attended with no  danger,  nor as
much  pain as blood  letting, (see surgery.)
   The treatment for obstructions arising from other causes
must be regulated   by  the  particular circumstances.  The
warm  bath, sea-bathing, or a course of Harrowgate, or  other
mineral water, when practicable,  will generally prove bene-
ficial.   It is proper  in the first  place  to give a  cathartic of
calomel and rheubarb, and then to give the preparation of
steel, take iron rust and peruvian bark, equal quantities, of
this take a tea-spoonful thrice a day, mixed  with  any  thing
convenient; or take of the tincture of iron fifteen drops thrice
a day,  in water or tea.  The diet must be nutritious and easy
of digestion ; the patient must be warmly clothed, and the
bowels must be kept regular in every variety  of this  com-
plaint.  Riding on horse back, electricity, or change of climate,
aid in  producing the desired effect.
   The next is painful menstruation  ; this is attended with
excruciating pains in the loins, lasting two or three  days,
the disc1 arge is generally scanty, the pains bear down vio-
lently and are often  accompanied with spasms, or colic, head-
ache, and  occasionally with  vomiting.   Some days before
?he expected period, the  patient should take three or four
bilious pills, and even night the warm bath, or setting over
the steam  of hot water, should be resorted to, and exposures to
cold must be carefully avoided.   When the pain begins, (he
patient should  drink freely of saffron  or tansy tea, together
with warm  applications to the lower part of the abdomen, and
seeing the feet in warm water;  if the  pain is very severe, a
dose of half tea-spoonful paregoric, or thirty drops  laudanum,
may be given;  tincture of valerian, sweet  spirits of nitre,
Sec. joined with these  when  there is colic or spasms of t! e
stomach or bowels.
  But  the most certain way to procure permanent relief,  is,
in addition to the warm applications, to bleed moderately, and 
  140               periodical courses.

  give a smart dose of physic ;  a part of which dose should be
  aloes and calomel, but other physic will  answer ;  after this
,  has operated the anodyne, as above, or opiates must be given.
  After t^ie patient has recovered from this, in order to prevent
  it at any future period, she must take during the interval, of
  the preparations of steel, muriatic tincture of iron, &c. (which*
  soe) in their usual doses thrice a day, with other tonic, med-
  icines.
    With regard to an immoderate flow, every woman knows
  what its proper quantity and duration should be, with respect
  to herself—but not with respect to  another;  f>r what is to
  one wojnan a proper quantity, might be to another  an immo-
  derate flow, according to the difference in  the constitution and
  temperament.   It is too frequently supposed that the flooding
  arises from  mere  debility, and under that belief  they take
  cordial and  stimulating medicines;  but most  generally thi*
  is not the case, and by such  improper treatment, the flow iw
  increased, and the habit rendered feverish
    In every  case where the system is feverish, especially in
  plethoric and  full  habits, the  antiphlogistic {dan must  be
  adopted, such as bleeding, co ding drinks of nitre, or cream of
  tartar, a carlhartic of salts, rest, and low diet.
    When the hemorrhage or flow is sudden and profuse, any
  clothing which  interrupts the  free  circulation  of (he  blood,
  should be instantly removed, and the patient placed .in a re-
  cumbent posture.   The drinks should be  as cold  as possible,
  and cloths dipped in cold vineuar and water, or  in a  decoction
  of oak, or peruvian  bark, adding a  little brandy, should  be
  frequently applied to the loins  and abdomen.   If these  means
  should not be sufficient to  stop it, dissolve about  three drachma
  of powdered alum in a pint of (he decoction of bark, and use
  some of it for injection.   The  following astringent medicine
  may also be taken in-ernally,  viz:
   Take of sugar of lead and  ipecacuanha, each six grains,
  opium, one  grain.
   Mix it' up with  syrup  or molasses, divide into four pills,
  and  take one every three  hours as long as mav be necessary.
  To confirm  a cure and  prevent a relapse, the body  should be
  strengthened by cold bathing, proper exercise, mineral waters,
  a nourishing diet, such as light broths, port wine in modera-
  tion, and au easy cheerful mind. 
CHLOROSIS.
in
            FLUOR ALBUS^ OH WHITES.

   A milk diet, change of air, sponging with cold water every
 \.f\ >ming, attention to cleanliness, and  proper exercise-,  are-
 often sufficient to effect a cure.  However, in addition to
 this plan,  when the  disease arises from debility, salts of  tar-
 tar, or lime water,  in the common  dose (see dispensatory)
 may be given to correct the acrimony of the humours; or the
 balsom capaivas may be used for the same purpose, and at the
 same time, iron rust (corbonate of iron, see disp.) should b«
 taken three times a day to strengthen the system, or the tincture
 of the  muriate of iron (see disp.) in doses of ten to fifteen
 drops, will have the  same effect.  To restore tone to the parts,
 it will  be necessary  three or four times a day to inject a little
• of the following  mixture, by means  of a syringe,  viz :  Rub
 together one drachm of white vitriol and ten grains of sugar
 of had, and dissolve in a pint  of water.   Or one  drachm of
 powdered alum may be dissolved in one pint «f the decoction
 of white oak bark, to be used in the same way.  In the mean
 time, one drachm of kino, one of peruvian  bark, one scruplu
 of grated nutmeg, and half a drachm of powdered alum, are
 to be mixed  with syrup or molasses, and divided  into about
 thirty six  pills, of which two e>r throe  may be taken at once*
 two or three times a day,  and washed down with a glass of
 good port  wine.


        CHLOROSIS, OR  GREEN  SICKNESS.

   The  most important feature of this complaint is a chronic
 obstruction of the course of nature, in consequence of which,
 the skin loses its natural  mixture of red and white, and be-
 comes pale and sallow ;  the eyes are pearly and appear sunk
 in their orbits,  with  a dark circle beneath them;  the  lips  lose
 their colour, ancl there is a degree of dropsical puifine.-s  over
 the whede  body.   The eyelids  are swelled in the  morning:
 there is pain and a  sense  of weight in  the loins, sale,  and
 legs; languor, aversion to all kinds of motion  or exercise ;
 (he least exertion occasions fatigu-,  palpitation or fainting;
 indigestion and costiveness  pre\aii,  the patient is very ner-
 vous and hysterical,  and there  is generally but little appttii.*
 for any  thing else except lime, chalk, &c. 
142                hysterical fits.
                     TREATMENT.
   After cleansing the stomach by a gentle emetic, pour fifteen
drops of the tincture of muriate of iron into  a glass of cold
water, or  into a decoction of peruvian bark.   Drink this two
or three times a day an hour befe>re eating, or two hours after.
Or chalybeate powders of peruvian hark and  iron rust mixed
together in equal  quantities, may be taken in the  de>se of a
teaspoonful, in port wine, or molasses, three times a day.
   In many cases of green  sickness, attended  with symptoms
of approaching consumption, the tincture of iodine in the dose
often drops, in a glass of sugared  water, three times a dav,
has effectually removed the complaint in the course of five or
six weeks.
                   TURN OF LIFE.

   It is generally between the forty-fifth and fiftieth year (hat
menstruation ceases, and if care is not taken  at  this critical
period, it often  happens that  chronic, and sometimes fatal
complaints arise.  It seldom stops all at once, but gradually
ceases, being irregular both as to time and quantity.  In those
plethoric  habits, all  malt and spirituous liquors, wine, and
animal food, ought, for a time, to be excluded from their diet.
Regular exercise should be taken, and  the body constantly
kept open by the tincture of senna, epsom salts, or any other
rhilel laxative medicine.
   If giddiness, and occasional pains  in the head  affect the
patient, leeches  to the temple will be found very beneficial;
and if ulcers should break out on any part of the body, thev
ought by no means to be healed up, unless a drain  by  means
of a seton or issue,  be established in some other part.


       HYSTERICAL  FITS.   (HYSTERIA.)

   Because it happens to be known that they are  not imme-
diately dangerous, or from some other  strange infatuation,
these  fits are treated  by many as a matter of no consequence,
and even as though the patient herself might  prevent them.
Now  it is just as well known, that fits of the ague and fever are
not immediately dangerous; and  it is equally certain that the
former is no more under the control of the patient's will, than 
HYSTERICAL  FITS.
143
the latter.   Long continued  agues end  in chronic inflamma-
tions of the liver ancl spleen,  finally producing  death—and
hysteric fits are equally fatal after a few years, terminating in
epilepsy.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   In a fit of hysterics the patient is seized with an oppression
af tho breast, difficult  breathing, with a sense of something
like a ball ascending into the throat.  There is loss of speech,
violent convulsive  motions, such  as writhing of the body to
and fro, involuntary screams, frequent  laughing  and crying,
distressing hiccup,  and many  other wild irregular  actions ;
after which there is general soreness over (he body, the spirit*
are low, the feet cold, the urine clear ancl limpid, ancl in  great
quantity.   In fainting, (he pulse and breathing  arc entirely
stopped ; in hysterics, they are both perceivable.

                        CAUSES.
   A nervous, irritable  frame of body, distresses of mi ml,
weakness,  inactivity, late hours, and heated rooms, combined
with irregularities of nature, are the  causes that generally
bring on hysterics ;  it  is more  immediately, however,  occa-
sioned by  the latter cause,  inasmuch as the fit most commonly
civmes on  at the particular time when they should be regular.

                     TREATMENT.
   1 1 young and plethoric habits, blood  may  be taken during
H?o fit;  but in chlicate  constitutions, it is not fo be recom-
mended.    The best  way of throwing off the  fit, if the patient
««n swallow, is give an  emetic ; and after it operates,  a pill
■ >•  opium,  or a dose of laudanum and ether, should be give in
aider  to .settle the stomach, and  prevent a recurrence of tho
«:.:.sms.  If tho emetic does not operate as pin sic, a cafliartic
may be givea in the course of a few hours, and after i's ope-
ration, the system  sheiuld  be  strengthened  by  taking   . rnc
kind of tonic ir."dicinp,  such as valerian, or peruvian  bark,
columbo, iron, or steel rust, <r the tincture of the muriate of
iron, (see disp.)   While the fit  is on,  (he feet s-hould I e put
in  warm water,  singed  feathers, camphorated spirits,  harts-
horn, &ci  should  be  applied to the face and nostrils until the
Mi.e'Mit can  swallow, and a teaspoonful of ether  ar.d lauda-
num, or a tincture of a>safoetida, or a pill of the same, h. then
Y:,ey proper to be given before taking the emetic.  C'.sb .v*. 
144
PREGNANCY.
of gruel,  adding  a teaspoonful  or  two  of laudanum, cold
water sprinkled on the face, and eool air in the room are like-
wise beneficial.



                     CHAPTER  II.

                    PREGNANCY.

  This is  attended in civilized society with many disagreea-
ble sensations, and often produces diseases which require.^-
tention.    But women who bear  children enjoy more cer'tn^
health, than those who do not.  Immediately after conception*
the  courses  almost invariably cease ; the countenance chan-
ges, and many woman becomo irritable, possessing a disposi-
tion of mind that renders them easily ruffled,  and induces a
strong propensity to be indulged  in  humours, diet, &c. that
on other occasions they arc exempt from.
  Sickness at the stomach, dizziness of the beau, fair.'rest,
heart burn,  and oppression, with disturbed  sleep, and fright-
ful dreams are present m an early period of most cases.  As
the  period advances uneasiness  is felt  about the  breast and
abdomen,  with pain striking down,  and (ho abdomen is pre-
c.ep'ibly enlarged, at the end of tho fourth month, and quick-
ening soon becomes sensible, which  is at first with many af-
t-ended with various nervous affections.  Soon after this (he
countenance becomes  more natural and sickness a::d ft.iill-
ness disappears, and  the patient eujovs  toLriabie  health.
Others again suffer  severely from various  uceases which  I
now proceed to describe.
  Sickncs:;, when it does not materially impair the health,
is favourable, because it prevents the formation of too much
blood in the first months which is one of  the chief causes of
abortion.  But if there  is efforts to von,it, with emaciation,
and debility, inducing nervous complaints, the patient must
be bled, and take a dose of physic, or a  light emetic, and use
a light and nourishing diet, and the means recommended for
heart burn ; which most commonly  original s from (he sane
causes that produce sickness and vomiting; if there i> a cough
and raising of phlegm, an  emetic is host,  paving attention to
(he bowels, but if there is sour tastn in (he mouth, lime water,
chalk or magnesia, or small doses of soda mus'  be taken.   The 
p.\naxAxcy.
116
stomach must not be over loaded, and food tho! docs not sei
easy upon the stomach, must bo avoided,  and if tho weman
is of a full habit she must be bled.
   Unnatural cravings : Xhese should always be  indulged
when liiev are for any article of diet.   It is not in the natum
of things f-r the longing or fears of the  me.-jier to  have any
influence over the child.
   The breasts, from  their great sympathy with tho womb,
often become swelled  and  painful.  In general all that is
renuired is to keep the breasts quite loose, and covered with
«jit flannel or fur.  If tho pain  is much, warm olive oil should
be rubbed on them, and the covering of flannel or fur must be
reap^jed, and if there is marks of general  fulness the patient
most be bled and take  a dose of sans.   IT the breasts suppu-
rate a free outlet for the matter must be made and the strength
supported by bark  and  wine.
   Palpitation of the heart, is  a most  disagreeable feeling,
and wh-ue it attends the whole period, it  must  be treated as
other nervous symptoms in  this state ;  but when occur.ng :ii
the latter months  it is  the  eflect of disordered stomach, and
can be relieved only by emetic*;, laxatives and a spare diet.
   Hysterical and fainting fits, are apt  to occur  about the
fourth month, and  though alarming in  their appearance, ;ae
seldom attended with danger.   Opiates always  afford Relief';
but a cathartic, invigorating diet, exercise in  the  open air,
Sic  must bo given as  soon as the immediate syrnptuns  are
allayed in order to produce permanent  relief.  To assist the
opium in the first symptoms, give preparations of camphor and
tincture of valarian.   Spiritous and fermented  liquors  are
hurtful in every stage of pregnancy.
   Bearing down; If there is heavy  bearing  down, cccr -
sioning dillicultv of uric, and  a constant  call  to stot.ls, th«
■r.tieat must take  her  bed, and lay with  the hips  elevated,
and keep the bowels regular bv gentle laxatives; growth and
me natural rising of (he part, will in a week or two have ..n
effectual, and the only cure.
   O r/i\;- w•:.;; and pii':3: women  are  too apt  to  d'sr'g.ud
costiveuess, and it becomes (he cause of  many painful  and
hazard >os consequences.  Thev  should have a passage, every
twen'v tour hours and they mav kee;> themselves regular by
the u  .«of a considerable proportion of vegetables in the.r diol,
and liking daily a laxative pill, or am. gentle physic.  In the
latter months so much  mor  blroel  being necessap ,; -he  fin ti 
146                   PREGNANCY.

is drained of all its thin part, hence the hardened state of the
evacuations, and the costive state of the bowels.  When the
woman has went some days without a passage, in addition to
taking a dose of physic, clysters must be administered.  When
therels a looseness of the bowels,  a dose of rhubarb must be
taken before any thing is given to  check it, as  it arises from
matter in the bowels that wants removing.
  Piles during pregnancy  cannot be completely cured but
tho pain must be allayed by occasional blood letting and open
state  of the belly.   If there  is much  swelling, astringent
applications as solution of sugar of lead, ointment of powdered
o-alls, &c. will be useful,  if there isthrobing pain with fever-
ish symptoms, leeches should be applied  to the part, and the
patient should set over warm water, or apply warm fomenta-
tions to encourage the bleeding.   Sulphur mixed  with equal
parts of cream tartar, is useful in every case of piles.  Oint-
ment made of powdered opium and  fresh butter will be useful.
These remarks are applicable only to piles during pregnancy,
for further, see Heme>rrhois.
  Swellings of the legs and feet: this occurs toward evening
iu ordinary cases, and js caused by the increased part pressing
upon the vessels and preventing the return of the  fluids to
the heart.  But when  it extends above the  knees, and dees
not subside  upon going to bed, it  demands attention.   The
woman must keep from standing on, or letting her legs hang
down, use a spare diet, and keep the bowels natural.  When
the symptoms are urgent,  bleeding and active purgatives are
indicated.  Where it appears to arise from weakness, tonit>
a«d a  more generous diet must be allowed.  I  have  seen
several cases where the swelling extended to  tho body and in
appearance was truly alarming, but which  subsided immedi-
ately  after delivery,  (tho only permanant cure.)
   Pains-in the back,  belly, and. loins;  arises  from  various
(.coses, as the change  of the situation of the womb and ii,;
pressure on the neighbouring parts.   When  they are slight,
attention to diet, and gentle laxatives are all that is necessary,
where they are very violent, small bleeding, and cathartics
followed bv an  opiate  will be necessary.   Coughs and diffi-
cult breathing are relieved principally by small bleedings aiul
saline  cathartics-.
   Cramps:  these cannot be entirely relieved until after de-
livery.  The means to palliate thorn  are rubbing them  with
fanuel, or tlosh brush, or  ihe application of laudanum, or 
PREGNANCY.
117
opodeldoc, ether  or camphorated spirits to the part affected.
Where the patient is of a full habit, bleeding will be proper ;
where the bowels are loose opiates may be given.
   Jaundice : This attends the latter months of pregnancy in
some instances, characterized by violent pain in the side, and
excessive sinckness and retching, and a deep yellow color of
the skin.   An emetic of epicack, and bleeding when  the pain
is severe, warm fomentations to the pained part, and doses of
opium, followed  by laxatives to counteract the effects of the
opium, are the proper means to be employed.
   Colic pawis, if attended with costiveness, are readily re-
lieved bv phvsic.  But if the bowels are in a proper state,
colic pains are readilv  relieved by opium, or laudanum ancl a
proper attention to diet.   It will perhaps  be  as well in all
cases to take a cathartic of salts or pills first, and follow this
with tnV«'7>piate.
   Difficult of urine :  this proceeds from the pressure of the
womb, and therefore cannot be entirely removed  until birth
takes place.   But to give  relief as cases occur, the  patient
must lay down upon the bed with  the hips elevated, and use
a pan.  A roller  should be fastened around the abdoman so
as to afford gentle support to the part which by pressing down
produces the  difficulty.
   Convulsions, to prevent  which  ; if the woman has violent
pain in the head, cramps  in the stomach, deadly sickness,
and swelling  of the face  and upper parts of the body, there
must be a large quantity of blood drawn from a vein, and a
cathartic given.  If  the fit  takes place, the whole body and
limbs are violently agitated, the face is livid, the tongue found
betwixt the teeth, and  bloody froth works out at the  moutli,
and the patient is insensible during the fit ; which  lasts from
ten, to sixty  minutes.   In  every case  something  should  I ••
put betwixt the jaws to keep the tongue from being  hurt.
The patient must now  be bled  unusually large, and if labour
comes on  as  is freejuently the case that must be attended to,
and as soon as  the patient can swallow, she  must take pre-
parations of camphor, castor, valerian, &e. but opium  will
be injurious.   Cathartics must be  given, 10 grains calomel,
12 grains of jollop, or rhubarb, &c. The only way to distin-
guish this from hysteric fits is  that, in  the latter  the  patient
can be roused up and made sufficiently  sensible to take me-
dic rie, but not so in convulsions.
   Flotving during pregnancy ;  if this is slight and  not at-
                            10 
148
PREGNANCY.
tended with  pain  or  fever, all  that is  necessary  is for the
patient to go to bed, and  keep quiet.  But if there is flush-
ings of the face, heat of the hands, thirst, and pains of the back
followed  with a considerable  discharge of  blood, the child
will most probably be lost;  to prevent which the patient
must  be confined to bed,  excluded from company, kept cool
and quiet, and her drinks must be cold.   She must be bled,
ancl take  a large dose of opium or laudanum, which must be
followed  in a few hours by a cooling purgative.
   Abortion or miscarriage, is the  birth of the fmtus at any
period when it cannot live; which must be before the seventh
month.   The  symptoms  differ in different  individuals, but
those  most common are a cessation of the breeding symptoms,
with a sense of weight and coldness in the lower part of the
belly, pains in the  back and loins, bearing down with regular
intermissions,  and  discharge of blood.   Whenever any of
these  symptoms arise, every exciting cause must be avoided,
such as walking, dancing, all kinds  of exertions, colic pains,
looseness of the bowels, passion, surprise, heated rooms, tight
lacing, 8zc.   A woman that has once miscarried is liable to
again ; the periods at which it  is most likely to take place
are between the fourth and fifth, and at the end of the seventh
months, but may happen  at any other period.
   The|e  is one species of abortion which is  almost as apt to
occasion the death  of the mother  as the child, that is where it
is  brought on by artificial means ; and if the monster escapes
with life, she is  morally guilty of the blood of her own off-
spring, and if detected, a subject of the states prison.
   When there is an appearance of blood  which threatens mis-
carriage,  the patient should be put to bed  and kept cool and
quiet, and if  of a full habit, or has symptoms  of  fever, she
ought to  be bleed a half a pint, or take large doses of opium.
If  there are no regular bearing down pains, nor large clots of
blood be  expelled,  miscarriage may  be prevented.  But if the
above symptoms are present it cannot be avoided.   When all
has come away opiates may be  given to allay the pain  and
moderate flowing,  and a  roller  or  towel should  be passed
moderately around  the lower part of belly.  If this happens
in the early months tho patient should remain in bed a  few
davs, and on the second or third  day she should begin to take
tonics as bark, quinine,  vitriolic acid,  &c.   After miscar-
riage in the latter months the treatment  must be the  same as
after  mature delivery.  When a woman has once miscarried 
LABCR.
149
she should be particularly cautious;  at the period of her
former misfortune.
                        LABOR.

   Ix the earliest ages of the world this subject received the
 attention of persons, who made pretensions  to ability in as-
 sisting nature in her efforts, and they had their patrons.
   Such are the apprehension of women under these circum-
 stances, and so acute is the pain in the final termination, that
 thev willingly submit to any treatment  from which the pre-
 tender promises relief.   It was this that caused women, who
 made it their business to attend in  such cases, to multiply
 their medicines and means of treatment, knowing their em-
 ployment depended  more on  pretensiens,  than  any  actual
 service they could render, and as the whole was a process of
 nature, it was certain and become apparent, that serious  in-
jury resulted from the  over officiousness of these old hags,
 and  called  loudly for reform; not ttj teach how and what  to
 do, but to teach when and what not to do, and that nature in
 ninety and nine cases out of a huudred is the only necessary
 accoucher.
   But no sooner had physicians undertaken this reform than
 finding it to be a source  of immense gain, they multiplied the
 names of diseases peculiar to this state, and couched them  in
 terms unintelligible  to  all  but themselves, and established
 arbitrarv divisions of labor, covering all with technical terms
 and  ambiguous phraseology; teaching that it was essential
 to understand theM* in order to  practice successfidly, and  in
doctor style, thus making the h\< evil worse than the first.
   Because they have labored to, and in a great measure have
succeeded,  in making people believe, that in every caxcn phy-
sician is necessary, and so far docs tin's now exert its influ-
ence, that in the  absence of the doctor it is frequently the
case, that a beardless student fills his  place, who is  less ac-
quainted with the business than any woman  in attendance.
   That, for attending  such caves the  physician  cannot  be
conscious of having rendered an equivalent for the money he
 has received, is not the greatest objection to the employment
of male-midwives; but it is forcing a barrier that should not
be approached, and entering upon premises too hallowed for
the even ceremonious intrusion  of the most refined of the
                          10* 
150
LABOR.
  faculty.   There are but few cases occurring in which assist-
  ance is requisite, ancl not one in ten thousand, but what the
  husband  or any careful  woman,  (whose business  decencv
  tells us it properly is,) may manage with perfect safety both
  to mother and child, by attending to the directions  given in
  the  following section, or  by doing what nuturally  suggests
  itself to be done.
    All are  ready to  admit  that  it  is  indelicate,  that  it
  shocks the modesty of the woman, and even causes  unpleas-
  ant sensations to the  husband, to  employ a male midwife:
  belive  me then, when I tell you  as an  honest man that it is
  all a farce ;  may we not then anticipate  a  speedy reform in
  this branch of medical speculation ?  I have attended many
  cases where I found the attendants alarmed, and  some in
  tears, from supposing that the woman should have had help
  sooner ; fearing the worst consequences from the delay; but,
  admitting that " the doctor  knew best," they would calmlv
  wait for hours when in natures own time all ended  well.—
  Ancl 1  pledge myself as a physician, that all honest doctors
  will  tell you, that labor is the work of nature, and she gen-
  erally accomplishes it best when left to herself.
   Natural labor generally happens in about two hundred and
 seventy-three days : if a woman is suddenly taken with severe
  pain  near the end of her reckoning, she has reason to appre-
 hend the commencement of sickness, especially if thev go off ancl
 recur again at intervals, producing shews occasionally followed
 by cold fits, with frequent occasion to get up.  These by degrees
  increase occurring at regular intervals of tenor fifteen minutes,
  leaving the patient quite easy when they go off.   But there are
  instances in which a woman would be very liable te) be de-
 ceived, and  remain in anxiety  for several davs ; thev are-
 spurious pains,  happening most commonly  toward evening,
 being very troublesome during the night.   Thev arc trilling:
  :ind irregular, anel produce no se-nsible  effects upon the part.
  (Jul the circumstance  which  chiefly distinguishes them,  is
  that they become  loss frequent and'lighter  on getting out of
  bed and changing the posture.   If in this  state the bowels are
  cos: o-e, give a cathartic,  and  after it  has  operated, give
, an opiate.  Or, if the patient is of. a plethoric habit, bleed a
  low ounces ancl give a  dose of laudanum.   After the regular
  steps have proceeded for some tirrlt, the pains come  on "with
  rveot regularity,•every five or six  minutes, and all is grad-
  ual)  brought forward, and the membranes mav be felt gath-
  ering oke a small bladder  filled with water, which  subsides. 
LABOR.
151
as the pain goes off, but increases when  it returns, and it is
from the rapid or slow increase of these  membranes that we
judge of the continuance of the sickness.   After a time these
give way, and a quantity of water escapes; but if this docs
not  happen until they are nearly without they should be rup-
tured bv pressing the linger against them during a pain.
   After this,  labor proceeds  more rapidly, and  is general!;,
completed in a short time; though occasionally it is protrac-
ted  for manv hours.  The woman is  generally  alarmed in
the  commencement, but this must not be  indulged in ; two or
three cheerful friends should be present  to inspire her with
spirits and courage, these  are  all the assistants that are ne-
cessa; \.  The patient must be kept cool ancl quiet, but not
confined to anv one posture, and she must not be interfere*!
with.  This frequent examination is  of  no possible use, but
injurious to the patient.   When every thing continues regu-
lar,  no  medicine is  necessary ;  unless there has been a cos-
tive state of the bowels, in which case it  will be proper to
give a dose of salts or oil, or an injection.
   Heating drinks must  never be given in the beginning-.
Vomiting is rather  of advantage than otherwise, but if exces-
sive, the patient may drink of strong tea,  and take a  few
drops of hartshorn ; if this does not give relief, a small bleed-
ing  or small doses of opium, given occasionally, will be effec-
tual.  The woman must be permitted to walk about if she
has  an  inclination to, as long as she is able ;  fits of shivering
are apt to supervene, and if the  patient  has  before been in
reasonable health, thev  are favorable, ancl all must be trusted
mainly to the  management of  nature, ancl the  patient kept
composed.
   The woman must not be allowed  to make violent efforts,
towards the conclusion, as time is  necessary in order to a safe;
termination.   The child must not be removed until it breathes
freely, or the  cord  cease;s to beat;  the  string must be  tied
about three inches  from the child, so firm  as not to admit of
blood escaping from the child, it will be safe to tie (he severed
end also.   It will generally be easy to ascertain  if there are
twins, by feeiing the motion of the- abdomen, and  by the re-
currence of hard and regular pains.
   In fifteen or twenty minutes after (he birth of the child, an
attempt must  be made  to get away  the  afl< r-burthe-n, (pla
centa,)  by gently pulling  upon the  cord,  and if it does not
come away soon, the right hand  must be passed, guided by 
152
LABOR.
the cord, to the after-birth, and gentle pressure made upon it,
at the same time pulling the cord gently with the other hand
in different directions.  A few minutes will generally  be
sufficient; there must  be no pressure made upon  the abdo-
men ; there  will  generally be  sufficient pain without any
efforts of the woman ;  blowing  upen the hands,  holding salt
in the hands, &c, is all a fudge.  After putting dry cloths
to the patient, she must be got quietly in bed.  This is  all
(hat is to be done in ordinary cases, taking care however, that
nothing is hurried, and the pulling at the cord be not violent,
for it might be broken, or even the womb dragged down and
materially injured.  If the patient has become exhausted by
trifling, and aggravating pains, or if the pains suddenly abate
and the patient becomes cold and is exhausted, give  tansey,
black pepper, or ginger tea.  But nothing  of a heating na-
ture must be given after the child is born; for it will tend to
produce flowing, and  endanger  the life of the woman.  Ar-
dent spirits is most dangerous, and yet most  used.
   Smut rye (secale cornutum,  or ergot, of the doctors,) is
used to hurry on labor.  It may be used when from examin-
ation we know that labor is pretty well advanced, and when
the pains are trifling, or have greatly subsided, and the woman
is faint and exhausted.  Take a (able-spoonful or two of the-
spurrs and steep them in a half  a pint of boiling water, and
give a table-spoonful once in ten minutes until  it  increases
(he pains, then desist; and if the efforts of the system again
flag, repeat as before.
   A little cold water  should be given to the child, and a tea-
spoonful of castor oil;  if this is done, the child will  be almost
sure to escape the  yellow gum and sore moutli, which proves;
so very troublesome.
   By attending to the above  directions,  all  ordinary cases
will terminate with perfect safety.  In laying down  the above
brief rules, I have studied not to use an expression  or convey
an idea that would be  indelicate, or that was not proper, and
necessary for every person (o understand.   To do  this there
are manv divisions, expressions, directions  and instruments
described by physicians, which I did not deem proper to men-
tion hero; and which if forgotten,  or even  never known,
would be better for the world.   The celebrated Dr. Burns
says,  " I  do  solemnly declare  that during thirty-five years
practice, in which time 1 havehad many thousand cases, I have
not used instruments twenty times." 
             INFLAMMATION OF THE UTERUS.          153

   (N. B.   For further particulars on this, see the authors
 system of midwifery designed for the  use of female practi-
 tioners.)
   Where nature is left  to herself and (he patient kept cool,
 and a towel pined  snugly  around the abdomen,  we have but
 little to fear from flowing; but if it does arise, the giving
 of large doses of opium  and small closes of sugar of lead, the
 hips of the  patient considerably higher than her body,  and
 laying cloths wrung, out of cold water, so dry as not to wet
 the patient, on the bowels, is all that can be  relied  on ; but
 they must not be continued until they produce shivering.



                    CHAPTER  III.

 INFLAMMATION OF THE UTERUS, OR WOMB.
                    (HYSTERITIS.)

                      SYMPTOMS.
   It begins with  a painful  sensation of the part, about fhe
 second or third day after delivery, which  gradually increases
 in violence  without any kind of intermission.   The  patient
 experiences great soreness ancl pain from  pressure, and there
 is soon  a great increase of heat over the whole  body,  with
 pains in the head   and back, extending into the groins,  and
 attended with chills, thirst, nausea and vomiting.   The tongue
 is white  and dry,  the secretion  of  milk  is interrupted, the
 lochia or shows are diminished,  the urine high colored  and
 scanty,  (he  body is costive, and the pulse hard, full and fre-
 quent.  It is very  dangerous complaint, and must be attended
 to immediately ; but most of all, the causes that give rise to
 it should be  avoided.

                       CAUSES.
  It is caused by  injuries during natural  labors, as well as
 by the improper use; of instruments in laborious eases ; by the
 officiousness of the midwife  in hurrying  the labors, and  by
exposure to  cold.

                    TREATMENT.
  Unless the patient should be  in a state1, of great weakness,
 it will be proper to bleed ; and the  administration of calomel 
154
INFLAMMATION OF THE UTERUS.
in this complaint is very important; ten or fifteen grains of
calomel, well mixed in a table-spoonful of caster oil, will be
a proper dose.  A blister should be applied to the abdomen,
over the pain ; emollient or mild clysters may be used, and
cold water gently thrown into the uterus.  In other respects,
the puerperal fever%uist be treated on general principles the
same as any other ft?i%r ; Dover's powders (see disp.) should
be given once in tw"o or three hours, with cooling doses of
nitre or cream of tartar between,  in order to reduce the gen-
eral fever, and bring out  a moisture  on the skin.  When
physic has not been given, and a diarrhoea or looseness with
the other  febrile symptoms, comes on,  it is an  unfavorable
sign, and  she must  not be deceived by it  and think  that
physic is not necessary, for it is now indispensably necessary,
and a dose of calolmel and rheubarb at this time must not be
neglected. If the pain abate, and there is a bloody discharge,
the patient is then likely to recover, and her strength is to
be supported by mild nourishment; but all kinds of cordials
and stimulating drinks must be  avoided.
   Prolapsus of the iderus is  known  bv a relaxation and
falling down of the womb, so that it descends to the external
parts.   It may be occasioned by any course  which weakens
the general health ; by diarrhoea, fluor albus, active purges,
external injuries, &c,  but most  generally it is caused by
straining and mismanagement in child birth,  or by a standing
posture after  delivery, where the uterus is very heavy.  If
it happen soon  after  pregnancy, constant rest in a recumbent
posture on a hard bed, with astringent injections at (he same
time, will cure it in  seven or eight weeks if the patient can
only muster resolution,  patience,  and  perseverance  enough
to give it a fair trial.  After pushing it back to  its place, it
may be  kept there  by the above means and  by external
sponging  with  cold  spring water three  or four times a day.
Colcl glysters will also be beneficial, and if the patient will not
keep her bed, the use of a  pessary will perhaps  be indispen-
sable.   It should not be above  two inches and a half  in di-
ameter, and  occasionally should  be removed and washed.
Pregnancy often cures this complaint, for, after the fourth
month the womb rises above the pelvis and thus  prevents the
possibility of its occurrence.  Inversion of the womb is when
it is turned inside out;  retrovcrsim, when it  is turned  either
backward or forward.   In both  cases,  it only  needs to  be
replaced, and  the same treatment is then to be pursued as
that recommended in prolapsus. 
DISEASES OF CHILDREN.
155
           DISEASE  OF  THE BREASTS.

   If any hardness or painful swelling should be felt in either
of them, a cooling diet and some gentle physic will be advi-
sable, and the patient should remain in heel, as the weight of
the breasts in any other  position would increase the inflam-
mation.  A large warm bread  and milk poultice with the
addition of sweet oil or unsalted butter ;  and the infant should
either be applied, or the breast should be drawn by artificial
means.   It is found that warm poultices will not  cause them
to suppurate unless the formation of matter has already begun,
and when that is the case,  the  sooner it is brought to a ter-
mination, and the matter discharged,  the better.   When
nursing occasions  pain merely from the nipples being sore
and tender, they may be washed with brandy and water, or
a weak  solution of alum,  in rose  water ; and an artificial
nipple, with a prepared  cows teat to tie over it,  so that the
child may suck through  it, will save a  great deal of pain to
the mother.
                    CHAPTER  IV.

             DISEASES OF  CHILDREN.

   Infant nursing.  To set a child  upright before the end
of the month  is hurtful,  it should be  laid on a thin mattrass,
which may be held on the lap at any time, in order that the
child may always lie straight, and only sit up as the mattrass
is  slanted.  The: elothing should be very light, and rubbing
its legs and whole  body with a warm  hand or flannel, will
take off the scurf, make  the blood  circulate, and strengthen
its limbs.   To prevent the legs from  being cramped and the
toes from turning inwards, its legs  should  be kept loose-, the
position often changed, and kept as little in the arms as pos-
sible.   Want of exercise is the  cause of rickets, large heads,
and weak joints; by sfow degrees, therefore, the infant should
be accustomed to exercise, both within doors and in the opem
air.  He should he washed  with warm water at  first, and
making it colder by degrees, he  will finally like to be washed 
156
DISEASES  OF CHILDREN.
with cold water.   And after he is  a month old if he has no
cough, fever, nor eruption, he may gradually be accustomed
to the cool, and then to the cold bath, as it comes from the
fountain.  This will render him hardy.   In drying and rub-
bing the body the utmost gentleness should be used, especially
about the head and bowels, squeezing the head or combing it
roughlv,  may cause dreadful diseases, and even the loss of rea-
son.   Bandages round the head must not be used.  Caps may
be worn until the hair is sufficiently grown, but no longer.  Pins
ought never to be used in achilds clothes ; every string should
be so loose as to admit of two fingers between it and the part
where it  is fixed, and in dressing, the most  tender delibera-
tion should be observed.
   Infants cannot sleep too long, and to awaken them with a
noise or in a very impetuous manner, is extremely improper,
and suddenly exposing  them to a glaring light, lays a sure
foundation for weak eyes.   Let him have his regular sleep in
the forenoon and afternoon, and it will then be easy to keep
him brisk all the evening until the  family are going to rest;
undressing and bathing will then dispose him for sleep and
quietness during the night.  He should never take any spirits,
nor drops to make him  sleep, milk, water,  whey, or thin
gruel, is  the only proper drink for little ones even when they
can run about, and the more simple their diet can be, the more
they will thrive.
   The bodily habits of boys and girls ought in every respectx
to be the  same.  It is too much the case, that parents, being
anxious to accomplish their girls, imagine that they must  be
kept under a certain restraint.   Boys are not laced, but poor
girls are  compressed tight enough to suffocate them, in order
to give them an elegant shape ; the contrary effect, however,
is always produced, for  it is the same way of making children
round shouldered and deformed.
   The yellow gum, is known by a yellow tinge of the skin,
with languor, and a tendency to sleep.  To cure  it, give a
teaspoonful or more of castor oil to clear the intestines, and if
this should not be sufficient, an emetic of about eight drops of
antimonial wine  is to be given  in a teaspoonful of water ; and
in eight or ten hours afterwards,  half a grain  of calomel, or
four grains of rhubarb,  should  be administered.   Vomiting,
when it is bilious, may be  obviated  by giving one  grain of
calomel in sugar, followed by  a teaspoonful of castor oil the 
                DISEASES OF CHILDREN.              157

next morning, and a small blister may be applied to the sto-
mach.
  Hiccups, generally arise from a sour stomach and may be
cured by giving  eight grains of prepared chalk mixed with
two grains of rhubarb in a little gruel.
  Griping and flatulency, are known by  continual crying,
restlessness, and drawing up the  legs.  When attended by
diarrhaw and green stools, it is generally relieved by giving
a few grains of rhubarb and  magnesia ;  but if the pains are
very great, take' of prepared chalk, one  scruple, tincture of
caraway seeds, three drachms, compound spirit of lavender,
one drachm, peppermint  water, two ounces,  laud inum, five
or six drops, mix together and give two teaspoonfuls immedi-
ately, and as soon as the  pain ceases, a cathartic of castor oil
will be proper.   The  above mentioned  absorbent  mixture
mav afterwards  be continued occasionally  in smaller doses,
omitting the laudanum.
  Diarrheea, if the stools are green, this  will he relieved by
a brisk purgative of one or two grains of calomel combined
with four or five of rhubarb, according to the age of the child,
and after its operation,  the absorbent mixture may be given.
If the stools are  very frequent, slimy, or  tinged  with  blood,
it will then be proper  to give five grains  of rhubarb every
four or six hours, and let the food be beef tea, sago, isinglass
in milk, or calf's-foot jelly.  The body should be wrapped in
warm flannel, and a small blister may also be applied to the
belly.
  Cutaneous eruptions.  All that can be done to advantage
is to keep the bowels open, and to guard against cold wnich
might drive the eruption  inwardly and occasion internal in-
flammation.   If there should be any sickness and vomiting,
give the absorbent mixture.     ^
  The thrush makes its appearance by little ulcerations in
the  mouth, tongue, &e-. of a white color,  and sometimes of a
yellow appearance.  It is owing to acidity  or sourness of the
stomach, ancl nothing is better at first, than to give an emetic,
and then a little magnesia and rhubarb, with weak chicken
broth as drink.   The absorbent mixture will also be proper,
and if there  is no  looseness, give a grain or two of calomel
with three or four of rhubarb; the mouth  and throat  in the
mean time should be cleansed by gargles,  such  as sage tea
sweetened with honey, alum water, or borax.   The syrup of
black currants may be given to children in the  thrush in the 
158
DISEASES  OF CHILDREN.
dose of a teaspoonful at a time ; it is made by dissolving 24
ounces of double refined sugar in one pint of the strained juice,
and boiling down to a syrup.
   Falling down of the fundament, happens  frequently to
children who cry much, or  have had  a diarrhsea, or from
straining on going to stool.  If the child be costive, give mild
clysters, and if the gut be swelled  or inflamed, foment with
warm  milk, or decoction of oak bark,  or wash frequently
with cold water.  The parts are to be replaced by the finger,
and supported by a truss, or  bandage.    The internal use of
tonics will also be proper.
   Dentition, or  cutting teeth.  Leeches, or blisters, may-
be applied behind  the ears.   The gums  ought to be divided
crosswise by a lancet, or sharp knife, and any person  can do
it as well as a doctor. Instead of giving opium, laudanum, or
paregoric, it  is bettet to administer calomel in  small doses,
for this will  promote absorption.   The bowels, if costive,
should be kept regular by gentle physic,  as oil,  rhubarb, &c.
and if there is losseness,  it should not be checked.   Instead
of any  thing hard, let the child nibble at a piece of wax can-
dle.
   Convulsions.   Children are liable to convulsions from
teething, wearing tight  clothes, small  pox,  measles,  &c.
Bathing in warm water, with a mild clyster, will soon  relieve
them;  and to make  the fit still shorter, cold water mav  be
poured over the face and neck while the rest of the body is
in the warm bath.
   The rickets.   This disorder affects the bones of children,
and is generally caused by improper nursing.   It usuallv  ap-
pears about the eighth or ninth months, ancl continues to the
sixth or  seventh  year.   The  head  becomes  large, and  the
bones continue separate  for a long time  ;  the countenance is
full and florid ;  the joints knotty and  distorted ; the belly
swells, and there is finally a cough and disordor of the lungs.
The understanding is generally more forward than common.
In this disease cold sea bathing is of great importance, after
which  the child  should be  rubbed and placed between two
blankets to encourage perspiration.  The back should be well
rubbed with opodeldoc, or good old rum every night.  A few
grains  of ipecac,  or calomel  may  be   given  occasionally.
Mineral water is beneficial, and so is a decoction of peruvian
bark with red wine, used  with moderation.   Exercise in a
dry clear air should  be encouraged; the diet should be light 
HYDROCEPHALUS.
159
 and well seasoned ; and so far as it can be done without caus-
 ing pain, the limbs should be kept in a proper situation by
 the use of some kind of bandage or instrument.
   Inward fits.   The infant appears as if asleep, the eyelids,.
 however, are not quite closed, but  frequently twinkle  and
 show the whites turned upwards;  the mouth, sometimes has
 the appearance of a  laugh or smile; the breath is either
 quick, or stops for a time ; the eyelids and lips are pale and
 dark alternately.  The infant startles on the least noise, and
 sighs deeplv, or breaks wind.  This relieves him for a little,
 but he soon relapses into a close.  Whenever these symptoms
 are noticed, the child  may be awakened, and its back  and
 belly should be  well rubbed before the fire until wind escapes ;
 at die same time two drops of the oil of  anise or caraway
 may be given in some  kind  of drink; and as soon after as
 possible a purgative of castor oil, or  a grain or two of calo-
 mel with two or three  of rhubarb is to be given to empty the
 bowels of whatever crude matter may have occasioned the
 disorder.
   Distortion of the spine.  In this affection, an ounce of
 prevention  is worth more than all the cure that  has ever been
 discovered.  The child's back bone should be frequently and
 closely examined, and  on the slightest appearance of any de-
 formity, it is to be washed with  brandy night' and  morning,
 and the child kept in  a straight posture  both sleeping  and
 waking, cold bathing is also good.


 HYDROCEPHALUS, OR  WATER IN THE BRAIN.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   Tin* affection of the brain occurs most frequently in  chil-
dren'between three and six  years of age.   The beginning or
first stage of the disease is marked  by the same  symptoms
of fever as  children Ireouently have  from  teething, or from
worms, or a foul stomach,  or from disordered stute  of the
bowels ; such as loss of appetite, thirst, quick pulse, hot skin,
disturbed sleep,  melancholy, uneasiness, sie:kness  at the sto-
mach, and sometimes vomiting.  The child is unwilling to
be moved ;  the bowels  are costive ; the symptoms arc worse
towards evening, and  better in the morning.   The second
stage at length sets in with pain in the head, which is known
by the child throwing up  his hands to his  head and tossing 
160                HYDROCEPHALUS.
 them about.   It is also attended with  screaming, impatience
 of light  and noise, and a redness of the corner and inside of
 the eyelids. The pupil or sight of the  eye is contracted, that
 is, smaller than usual; the pain in  the head sometimes ex-
 tends to the arm  and leg of one side.   In the third stage the
 pulse becomes slow  and intermitting ;  the pupil of the eye is
 dilated, that is, larger than  what is natural, and it  will not
 contract on the approach of a lighted candle ;  the screaming
 fits are more  frequent, with moaning;  vomiting  will  often
 take place on being raised up ; the child becomes stupid, takes
 no notice of any thing, and  frequently  dies in this stage.  In
 the fourth stage, if life still continues, the pulse becomes quick
 again but very feeble ; the patient is no longer able to swol-
 low, lies  perfectly insensible, and the stools  and urine are
 passed  involuntarily.   Subsultus  tendinum  or twitching of
 the tendons, is now to be  observed, and very often  one eye,
 or the whole of one side is perfectly paralytic or palsied.

                         CAUSLiS.
   Those of a scrofulous habit of body are naturally predis-
 posed to it;  and  hence it is that children sometimes inherit
 a predisposition to it from their parents.  Others,  however,
 are liable to  it from  falls, blows on the head, or from any
 cause that produces  irritation of the brain.   It is  generally
 supposed that the serum or watery fluid is effused on the  brain
 as a consequence of the inflammatory action existing there in
 first and second stages of the disease.

                     TREATMENT.
   In the first  stage,  the patient  is sometimes cured ; in the
second, very  seldom ;  in the third, almost never; in the
 fourth, never.  Unless, therefore, it  he attended to in the
 very beginning, medicine  is of little  avail, and the patient
 will generally die in about three weeks.  The inflammation
 is to be subdued by bleeding, leeches or cupping to the  head
 and temples, and  a blister on the back of  the neck.   The
 bowels must be thoroughly cleansed by some active cathartic,
 as calomel and jalap.   Plyalism, or sore mouth, should then
 be attempted by giving a grain or two  of calomel, once in an
 hour or two until the gums  begin to be sore, and the bowels
 are to be  kept open  by  giving other physic if  necessarv.
 Digitalis or foxglove may be given  during  the fever in the
common dose for children (see dispensatory)  in order to lessen 
INFLAMMATION OF  THE  TRAHEA.         161
the arterial  action.   After reducing the  inflammation, the
warm bath and diaphoretic medicines are proper. If the com-
plaint should thus be happily arrested, the strength must be
restored by nourishing food, and tonic medicines; taking care
to keep the head cool, the bowels in good order, and a seton,
or issue, should now be applied and continued for some time
to the back of the neck.
  INFLAMMATION OF THE TRACHEA, HIVES,
               RATTLES,  OR CROUP.

   Croup is an inflammation of the trachea or lower  part
of the windpipe, and  is mostly prevalent among children.
They are mostly liable to it between the first and third year
of life, though sometimes it is met with later.

                      SYMPTOMS.
   Inflammatory croup is often preceded by the symptoms of a
common catarrh, or cold; but some times it comes on without
am previous indisposition.  The child is attacked with fever
and a very singular cough.   It is easily distinguished by that
crowing or croacking  noise which in this disease always ac-
companies the act of coughing. The pulse is hard and quick;
the child is  restless and uneasy ; and yet he will frequently
be seen taking food and running about while the disease is
making rapid progress.  The cough  ancl wheezing steadily
continue to  increase,  the breathing becomes more diflicult,
and if left to itself,  the patient will die from suffocation within
the short time of three or four days.  To give an idea of the
danger of this complaint, it is proper to remark that if nothing
b^donc to arrest it within the first twelve hours, it is gene-
rally beyond the reach of medicine.

                       CAUSES.    ✓
   Cold, and exposure to  a damp atmosphere", are most com-
monly the exciting causes : but those who have once had an at-
tack of the croup <ife more liable to have it  again than  those
who have never had it; ancl in such constitutions a  common
cold will often be attended by croupy symptoms until the thir-
teenth or fourteenth year of life.   In its most malignant form
this disease is by  some considered contagious or catching. 
162        INFLAMMATION OF  THE  TRACHEA.
  Author and  practitioners,  however, are not agreed on this
  point—and who shall decide when docters disagree.

                      TREATMENT.
    A small bleeding must be immediately  resorted to;  an
  emetic should then be given, and  the bleeding promptly  re-
  peated as often as the symptoms require it.   It is generally
  the case however that one bleeding from  the arm is sufficient;
  and  as soon as the emetic  has  operated, leeches, or a  large
  blister to  the throat must not be  forgotten.   Nausea or sick-
  ness at the stomach must be kept up, but not so much as to
  induce any further  vomiting; and for this purpose the  solu-
  tion  of emetic tartar  in  small doses  is  proper ;  or ipecac,
  squills, or seneka snake root (see disp. for these  articles,)
  may be used for the same purpose ; and if  the emetic  does
  not operate as physic, the bowels are then to be moved by a
  dose of some gentle carthartic.   The tincture or decoction of
  digitalis (fox-glove) in  small doses once in  an hour or two,
  has a great effect in lessening the force  of the  blood in the
  arteries.   Calomel  in very large doses  is  said to perform
  wonders.   Dr. Ewell speaks of it in the most exalted terms,
  and I trust I  shall need no apology for introducing the  testi-
  mony of his own words:—
    "  The most speedy and efficacious of  all remedies, in this
  alarming disease, which has come under my notice  is calo-
  mel  in very large doses.   For  this valuable remedy,  I  ac-
  knowledge myself indebted to my excellent and very learned
  friend, Professor Davidge of Baltimore.  From him I have
  been emboldened to use  it in desperate  cases, in doses from
  thirty to  sixty grains, to children.  On   my own  daughter,
  only  four years old, and apparently in the very act of suffoca-
  tion, I used it in the dose of at least sixty grains.   The cure
,•  was  almost instantaneous.   Among other instances of cure
  as suprising, was one in the  infant of my  amiable friend,
  Mrs. Chalmers, lady of the Rev. Mr. Chalmers,  of Wash-
  ington.   The dose  was  forty grains.  The cure was so im-
  mediate, that the joyed parent insisted I would instruct her in
  the remedy, for fear, on the next attack,il  might  not  be in
  the way to prescribe.   On  learning I  had given her infant,
  not more than between three and four years  old, forty grains
  of calomel, she was excessively frightened, and exclaimed,
  " you have killed my child !" and indeed she  would hardly
  bo persuaded for some  time, thpugh her eyes told her the 
BOTANIC PRACTICE.
163
contrary, that I had not killed her child. So powerful is the
effect of this medicine, that it suddenly removes the  disease
without having recourse to other means.  It acts on the sto-
mach, bowels ancl skin.   In cases not very alarming, I  have
given calomel in smaller doses, conjoined with ipecacuanha,
with good effect."  When the disease is removed, tonic or
strengthening medicines are  proper to be  given, such  as
quinine, peruvian bark, columbo, gentian, ice.  (see  dispen-
satory.)   There is another species of croup of a chronic or
lingering nature, which  is not attended with  fever, and chil-
dren are sometimes troubled with  it for years, and then out-
grow it.   In the beginning, the warm bath may be used, fol-
lowed by a glyster, or a dose of gentle physic ; and if this
does not have the desired effect,  an emetic should then be
given, and after its operation, a dose of laudanum.   To pre-
vent its return, the general system ought to be strengthened
by the cold bath, change of air, a flannel shirt, and gentle ex-
ercise.
   ,    BOTANIC  PRACTICE OF  MEDICINE.

   As the symptoms and causes of every disease are descri-
bed in part I., it is therefore unnecessary to repeat them in
this place,  for  you can turn to them at once by refering to
the index.
   All the medicines mentioned here, and  their proper do-
ses, may be found in the dispensatory of American botanic
remedies.
                AGUE AND  FEVER.

  In this complaint  the stomach and  bowels are generally
out of order, therefore, when the cold fit comes on, or before,
drink freely of warm boneset tea, made strong, until it pro-
duces puking, and operates downwards.  Or a dose of blood-
root, or lobelia, or  mandrake  physic,* or castor oil mixed
with rhubarb or jalap root, may be taken for the same pur-
pose.  .After  this, take a dose o^powdered jenson root, every

  * Mandrake roots, two parts; dwarf older root?, one part; boil down and
make common sized pills; dose, from two to four.
                           11 
1G4
BOTANIC PRACTICE.
 morning before eating, and during the day take the dogwood
 bark, (cornus Florida,)  in. its proper dose, or any°other
 strengthening remedy mentioned in the dispensatory.   If you
 should find the fits coming on again, discontinue "what vou
 are taking until it is  all  over, and as soon as the.cold stage
 begins to lay its icy hands upon you, just put your feet and
 legs into water as hot as you can bear it, and drink  down
 cold water until you  begin to puke with a vengeance, which
 will be in a very  short time ; then go to  bed ancl sweat as
 much as you please, and recommence taking the dogwood.
   An Indian cure for the ague, is to put three hens eggs into
 a pint of vinegar, and after  the  shell is dissolved, the eo-gs
 are  to be taken  out whole, and half a gill  of this vinegar fs a
 dose, three times a day.
   Another cure, is to mix equal parts of  pulverized  cinna-
 mon, rhubarb, sulphur, and cream  of tartar.  A tea-spoonful
 of,this, mixed with molasses, should be taken twice  a dav.
 If the fits are still  obstinate,  then, a syrup made of snake
 root, ginseng, wormwood, colts foot, cahosh  root, tansy and
 hysop, adding spirits and molasses, is to be taken before the
 cold fit;  and another  syrup of coolwort, maiden-hair,  chick-
 en-grass, and bull-rush, is to  be taken after it.          *


       BILIOUS, OR REMITTANT  FEVER,

  Is of the same nature (see  page 16,) as  tie ague and fever,
but as the remission between the fits is so  short, there is not
so good a chance to strengthen up the system, for it will not
do to give tonics when the fever is on. "Therefore, you must
try to make  the  remissions longer, ancl so turn it "into the
ague and fever ; and in order to do this, if the stomach ancl
bowels have  been well cleansed  by a puke and physic, give
a decoction of pleurisy root, as directed in the dispensatory
and also small doses of lobelia to sicken the stomach a little'
this will  produce a copious perspiration or sweat, and vou
may then take tonics  to strengthen the system,  the same as
for ague  and finer.   And during the fever, one  fourth of a
tea-spoonful of pulverized mandrake and blood root may be
swallowed every three or four hours, or less if it pukes;  and
and some gentle physic emght' to be taken as often  as once in
two  or three days.   But the best way of treating this, or anv
other fever,  is to throw it off in the very beginning by takino- 
BOTANIC  PRACTICE.
165
a smart dose of mandrake physic, and then a sweat, and af-
terwards something to strengthen the system.  You may take
a sweat by using the pleurisy root,  or by bathing the whole
body in warm  water, in which hemlock boughs have been
boiled ; or by sitting over  the steam of the same, drinking
warm peppermint or pennyroyal tea, at the same  time ; or,
if not able to sit up, beech  blocks boiled in the same mayr be
put to the  patient in bed, and some  kind of drafts  applied to
his feet.
                  YELLOW FEVER.

   The nature of this fever is very much the same as bilious
 remittent fever, and  it differs from it only  in  being much
 more violent.  And after all that is said about  it, the same
 treatment is proper.


              INFLAMMATORY FEVER.

  ^This is to be treated in the same way for  the purpose of
 throwing off the fe *er; but the patient is more like to require
 bleeding and blistering, in order  to prevent the inflammation
 from settling on the brain, or other part of the body; for in
 this complaint, (as you will  see by the symptoms, page 25,)
 the fever runs high, and is very dangerous.


          SIMPLE  CONTINUED FEVER.

  There is nothing  about this, in the commencement, that
is different from any of the above mentioned fevers ;  neither
can any physician determine  at that time, whether it  will be
the ague, the bilious,  the yellow, the  inflammatory,  or the
simple  continued  fever.  Endeavor to throw it off as you
would the ague, or the bilious fever,  and afterwards, if you
do not succeed in throwing it off suddenly, give cooling drinks
and nauseating doses  of lobelia, blood root, or bonesef, when
the fever is on, with  drafts to the feet, and gentle  doses of
physic;  and when the fever is off, give  tonics; and if he is
like  to sink from weakness, give  wine  or brandy until he
recovers.
                         IU 
166
BOTANIC PRACTICE.
   NERVOUS, PUTRID, OR TYPHUS  FEVER.

  Endeavor to throw it off by giving an emetic of boneset
tea, with a tea-spoonful of ipecac ;  and physic, if necessary,
with" a dose of rhubarb or castor oil.   But be very careful
not to weaken the system much, for a man is more likely to
die from weakness in this  fever than in  any other.  After
the physic has operated, give a table-spoonful of yeast every
hour or two, and persevere in the use of it, for this is a noble
medicine in typhus fever.   As soon as the fever begins to
abate, keep up the strength by giving wine  and dogwood
bark together.
  (The treatment of this fever in part I. chapter 5, is prin-
cipally with American remedies.)


  TYPHUS SYNCOPALIS,  AND THE PLAGUE,

  Are of the same nature as common typhus, (see the symp-
toms, pages 31 and 32.)   The principal difference is, that
they  are both more violent in their symptoms, and more daY-
gerous in their termination.


  SMALL POX, MODIFIED SMALL POX, AND
                 CHICKEN POX.

  The treatment of  these  in part  1st, is principally  with
American remedies.   See the index.
                    MEASLES.

  See the  treatment at page 40.  Instead of giving  the
" Dover's powders or small closes of antimony,"  a decoction
of pleurisy root may be given, or any other sweating medi-
cine described in the botanic dispensatory, may be used.


                SCARLET  FEVER.

  See the treatment at page 43.   Instead of calomel, lot the 
BOTANIC PRACTICE.
1G7
 " brisk cathartic medicine"' be a dose of mandrake physic ;
 and instead of the " weak solution of tartrite of antimony,"
 give small doses of pulverized blood root,  once an  hour or
 two, as the  stomach can bear it without puking, or a few
 drops of the tincture of lobelia will answer for the  same pur-
 pose.  In the commencement, when emetics are used, give
 fifteen or twenty grains of pulverized blood root, with bone-
 set tea, instead of tartar emetic, and lessen the  dose for chil-
 dren.  When it is " found necessary to support the patient,"
 a decoction of dogwood  bark  may be used, and the quiniia-
 can be omitted.  In the dropsy attending this fever, a decoc-
 tion  of burdock and dwarf elder roots may be used instead et
 squills and digitalis, if it should be more convenient.


                    CONSUMPTION.

    For the cough.   Take any quantity of pulverised crawley
 root, and add to it one fourth as much of skunk  cabbage root,
 one fourth of wild turnip, and one fourth of elecampane.  Put
 die whole into a tea-cup,  and mix it up  with West. India
 molasses.  Take a large tea-spoonful of  this  three or  four
 times a day ; and between the times of taking the above mix-
 ture, if you find that a coughing spell is coming on,  take a
 little e)f the  pulverized leaf of lobelia on the point of your
 penknife, and drop  it into a spexmful of water, drink it down,
 and you will soon be able to raise without coughing.
   For the fever.   Drink half a tea-cupful of nanny bush
 tea three- or four times a day.
   For the pain in the side.   Take a heaping tea-spoonful
 of pulverized jenson root,  drop  it into  half a  tea-cupful of
 bone.set tea, stir it round, and drink it clown.  Do  this ever.
 morning as soon as you rise, and  be out of your bed  bv (he
 time that the birds wake up.   After taking the  jenson in this
 way for a week, discontinue for a few da\s, and then recom-
 mence it again.  A  glass of lime water  maybe- used occa-
 sionally.
   For costiveness.   Take some water  in  your mouth, and
 swallow down  two tea-spoonfuls of whole, mustard seed twice
 « day, and you will soon be relieved  of that difficulty.   As
 you probably have a good appetite, vou may eat  whatever
you please, provided that you find it agrees with  the stomach.
  A faithful attention  to the directions  has  cured  scat* J 
168
BOTANIC PRACTICE.
 consumptions, and there is no question but that it may cure
 many others, that have any stamina  of a constitution left, if
 they will take the trouble to give it a fair trial.
   After the cough and pain in  the side are well abated, a
 beer made in the following manner, may be used to advant-
 age, viz : pour  six  pails of boiling  hot water  jnto half a
 bushel of barley malt,  and let it stand six hours, then drain
 off and add to the water  half a bushel of white pine bark,
 one  pound of spignard  root, one pound, root and top, of sani-
 cle or black snake root, one pound of jenson root, and one of
 piunkium, roots and tops.  Then boil the whole together until
 the water is half gone, strain it into a new keg, add one pound
 of honey, with yeast and emptyings,  let it foment,  and then
 bottle it  up.  A gill of this may be taken four times a day,
 gradually increasing the dose.


                       DROPSY.

   Two or three pills of the mandrake physic must be  ad-
 ministered, and after they have operated, two pounds of the
 fresh roots of dwarf  elder, or half a pound of the dry roots,
 are to be boiled in three gallons  of water down  to a quart ;
 strain out the liquor, and when  about blood warm drink the
 whole of it in the course an hour or  two;  and it will carry
 the water out of the body at no small rate.   One pill of the
 physic is then to be taken every other night for  a fortnight,
 unless the patient should  be very weak, and at the end of
 that  time, or before, if necessary, a course of tonic medecine
 must be adopted to strengthen the system, and give tone to
 the vessels ; and for  this purpose, pulverized dogwood bark
 in port wine three times a day, a tea-spoonful or more of the
bark to a glass of wine, is a noble tonic.   To prevent cos-
 tiveness, take two tea-spoonfuls or more of whole mustard
 seed night and morning in a little water, or the same quan-
tity of finely powdered charcoal mixed up with cream or
 molasses.  But if a relax should come on,  then drink a de-
coction of either black  or red oak bark, or of the blackberry
root boiled in milk.

                CHOLERA MORBUS.

  To stop the puking,  burn a new cork to a coal, pulverize 
BOTANIC  PRACTICE.
169
it fine, mix with brandy, and give a tea-spoonful every (en
or fifteen minutes.  In the mean time a strong decoction of
tansy is to be applied warm to the bowels, emmollient clys-
ters of starch, flaxseed, or slippery elm tea may be use  1; but
as soon as the stomach is settled, a smart dose of physic should
be taken ;  if you should puke it up, then settle the stomach
again with burnt cork and  brandy,  or weak chicken broth,
or wet a lump of sugar  with a few drops of cinnamon oil,
mash and rub it well to cut the oil, then add a little brandy
and water ; drink a tea-spoonful of this, and try the physic
again.  After getting the physic down, take another tea-
spoonful of the cork, or cinnamon mixture,  in order to keep
it down.  After the  operation of the physic,  if the purging
should still continue, drink a tea made of the common black-
berry root, or of red  or black oak bark.


                   DYSENTERY.

   Take a handful of pie-plant  roots, make a decoction, and
drink half a tea-cupful  every hour until it operates as physic.
This will generally be sufficient, but if not, then  take two
handfuls of blackberry  roots, boil them in three pints of milk
or water down to a quart, and give a tea-cupful every two
or three hours.


                  BILIOUS  COLIC.

   Give a spoonful of sweet oil every hour, and in  the mean
time take the fresh green leaves  of tobacco, stew  them in
vinegar, and apply them to the  bowels.  It  will  probably
occasion nausea at the  stomach, vomiting and great depres-
sion  of strength ;  the patient, however, will be relicveel, and
the leaves may  then  be taken off;  and if the action  e>f  the
tobacco leaves externally, and  sweet oil internally, does not
produce an evacuation of the bowels, a dose of castor oil and
rhubarb should be given,  and after its operation, let a jelly of
arrow root be used for diet.   (See this article in the dispen-
satory. )

               VENEREAL DISEASE.

  Take one pound of the bark of the root of sumach, or shoe- 
170
BOTANIC  PRACTICE.
 make as it is generally called,  one pound of the inner bark
 of pine, and one of swamp elm, boil them in one gallon of wa-
 ter down to three quarts, and drink half a pint three times a
 day ; and if costiveness be produced^ a dose of salts may be
 taken occasionally.   If there be ulcers, they are to be wash-
 ed with the decoction made  warm, the patient at the same
 time must abstain from all kinds of stimulants,  and the good
 effects will appear in a very short time.  This remedy is one
 of the best mercies to offending  man, and  instances can
 be produced of the effects of it,  which would stagger credu-
 lity.  Mercury and nitric  acid have failed,  but diis has never
 been known to fail when properly applied.


                        PILES.

   Make an ointment of strammonium leaves, or of celandine,
 and apply to the part morning and evening, (see  dispensato-
 ry.)  If they are blind piles,  a little linen lint, smeared with
 the ointment, may be put  up, and drink tar water  twice a
 day, and the essence of fir  e\ery night on going to bed.


 SPITTING BLOOD, NOSE  BLEED, AND BLEED-
               ING FROM WOUNDS.

   Either of these complaints or accidents may be cured at
once with the plant called  crane's bill.   It is an Indian rem-
dy, and was obtained of the Indians by Mr. David Cooper,
of Woodbury.
   For spitting blood, make an infusion of the plant in water,
and by drinking of  it frequently, it will stop  in a very few
minutes.  In all other cases of external wounds or bleeding,
wash the roots, pound them in  a morter, and  apply, to the
part immediately.   It acts  like  a charm,  and  ought to be
transplanted into every garden,  that it may be at  hand when
 wanted.   It is  excellent for  checking  immoderate courses,
for curing  whites, gleets,  and  obstinate diarrhoea.   A tea-
spoonful of the powdered  root  may  be taken  three or four
times a day, or  a decoction of it in milk, may be used as a
common drink. 
BOTANIC PRACTICE.
171
                    RHEUMATISM.

   Take the ripe berries of skoke or pokeweed, and fill a jug
Avith them; then pour on  them as  much spirits as the jug
will hold.   Whon the strength of the berries is extracted it
is fit for use.   The  liquor is called  pokeweed  bounce; a
wine-glassful three times a day is the  proper dose.


                     JAUNDICE.

   Give a'thorough  dose of mandrake physic.   Then take
jenson root, prickly ash bark, sarsaparilla and burdock roots,
horse radish, and red cherry bark, make a decoction by boil-
ing them together, strain off the liquor, add an equal quantity
of rum, or enough  to keep  it from souring, and take a wine-
glassful three  times  a day, an hour before  eating.  In the
mean time the eighth part of a tea-spoonful, or less if it pukes,
of pulverized blood root,  should be taken night and morning
for a week; discontinue  a few  days, and  then commence
taking it again, and so continue until cured.


                       WORMS.

   Take the top of the herb called wormwood, dry and pul-
verize it, then give a little of the powder, say one eighth of
tea-spoonful, mixed up with molasses, and in one hour after-
wards give? a dose  of  mandrake physic.   Oi, make a tea of
the bark of the pride of China, and take as much  of it during
the day as the child  can be;ar  without vomiting or purging,
and the next morning give a cfose of oil, or senna, or man-
drake physic.  Or, give one or two tea-spoonfuls of oak of
Jerusalem seeds in molasses or honey, twie e a day, and e-on-
tinue it for several days;  then give some kind of physic.


                    KING'S EVIL.

  Take the root and branch of the plant called  king's evil
weed, make a poultice of it by pounding it in a mortar, and 
172
BOTANIC PRACTICE.
then apply it to the swelling.  If it be an open sore, make a
salve by steeping the plant  in a mixture of sweet  oil and
mutton tallow, strain it, and if necessary to make it harder,.
add beeswax and  rosin.  Wash the sore with a decoction off
the plant, and apply the salve.


t  SUPPRESSION AND DIFFICULTY OF URINE.

   When it  is caused  by blisters,  or cantharides taken in-
ternally, give a glyster of slippery elm tea, and make a strong
decoction of pumpkin seed in hot water, and drink of it as
much as you can, the more the better.   Or, barley water, flax-
seed tea, or a decoction of marsh-mallows,  or of parsley roots,
or of water-melon seeds, will answer.
   When it is caused  by the gravel or stone in the bladder,
(which is known  by pain in the loins, sickness at the stom-
ach, and bloody urine,) then make an infusion of wild carrot
seed, sweetened with honey, and use  it for a drink.   In the
mean time, a glass of onion top juice  should be taken every
night.  Or,  let  an ounce of wild  parsley  seed remain in a
pint of white wine for twelve days ;  drink a glass one hour
before breakfast, and use agrimony for a common tea.   Or,
steep a large handful of gravel weed in hot water; one gill
is a dose, every half hour, until the gravel begins to come
away.


                      ASTHMA.

   Make a tincture of lobelia by putting the herb into spirits.
and  take enough to nauseate the stomach as often as may be
necessary.  (See lobelia, in the dispensatory.)


                      DIABETES.

   Let the patient use animal food ;  keep an issue or blister
running opposite the kidneys, ancl keep the bowels open with
rhubarb.  At the same time, take pulverized  dogwood bark
(camus florida,)  and bearberry  leaves, (uva ursi,) of each
twenty grains, and half a grain of opium ;  mix them together
for a close, and use the same three times a day with lime water. 
BOTANIC practice.                H3
 Or, put four ounces of spruce gum into two quarts of brandy,
 and use a wine-glassful three times a day.


                       CANCERS.

   Take  the heads of red clover when full grown and boil
 them in a iron pot of water until the strength is out; then
 strain and boil down  to the consistency of tar.  Use  half a
 gill of this and add to it a heaped tea-spoonful of the pulver-
 ized seeds of lobelia,  and the same  quantity  of pulverized
 cayenne pepper.   Stir these together, ancl the plaster is fit
 for use, which is to be spread larger than the sore, on a piece
 of soft leather.   When the cancer has absorbed one plaster
 put on another, and so continue till the sore is cured.   Once
 a dav, wet the cancer with a decoction of the  green  leaves
 of poison  hemlock, (cicuta,)  and in  the  mean time, make
 two quarts of syrup of the following articles, viz :  red  clover
 heads, bittersweet and yellow dock roots,  of each four oun-
 ces ; red clover roots and  carrots, of each six ounces, and
 sarsaparilla roots, one pound.   Drink half a gill three times
 a day.


                   ITCH  OINTMENT.

   Take one gallon of alcohol, one pound of gum myrrh pound-
ed fine, and one ounce of cayenne pepper,  (the common red
pepper will answer.)   Put  the alcohol into a jug that will
hold about two gallons, add  the myrrh and  pepper  to it, and
shake or stir them well together.   The put a kettle of water
over the fire and set the jug upright in it, with the cork o' i.
In this situation let the water, boil,  and the  alcohol, a1 out
half an hour.   Then take  the jug out, and  when it becomes
cool and settled, strain it off from  the myrrh and pepper, and
add to  the alcohol as much spirits of  turpentine as there is
now of the alcohol after being boiled.   Mix it well  by shak-
ing, and it is ready for use, te> be put on night  and  morning,
always shaking the phial before using it.   This cures when
nothing else will, and there  is no  danger of taking cold. 
174
BOTANIC PRACTICE.
                    FEVER SORE.

   Wash and syringe the sore in a decoction of shrub maple.
Then make a strong decoction of blue flag root and shrub maple
together; strain, and simmer down to a salve, adding beeswax
and honey, and mix it well before it gets cold.   Apply this to
the sore, and drink freely of tar-water.


                    TOOTH ACHE.

   Hold a  little of the tincture  of lobelia  in  the mouth, or
chew one leaf of the same.  Or put a piece of white  vitriol
into the hollow tooth.


                WHITE SWELLING.

   Dissolve half an ounce of sal ammoniac (hydrochlorate
of ammonia,) in a quart of sharp vinegar  boiling hot,  and
bathe the swelling with it, as hot as the patient can bear it,
for half an hour.  Then with a long  bandage, wet with  the
same, commence winding  the part affected from above down-
wards, as tight as will be convenient to the patient, and keep
winding it  until you get six or eight inches belowT the joint,
then pin the bandage tight, and bathe or wet it again, and as
the swelling decreases,  tighten the bandage, and so continue
wetting and tightening until the swelling is all reduced.   To
prevent a return of  the swelling,  take a phial  half full of
sweet oil, and  fill up the rest  of it with liquid hartshorn,  put
in the cork  immediately, and mix  by shaking;  rub some of
it on (he part a few times  in the day, and drink freely of sul-
phur or mineral water, in order to  cleanse the blood,  and
strengthen the system.
   Note.   Sugar of lead, or acetate of lead, is not a safe  ap-
plication to the swelling, for it is frequently absorbed into the
system, and produces incurable paralysis  or  palsy of  the
limbs.


                    SALT RHEUM.

   Endeavor to persuade your hands to lie  still,  for thev
never can be cured unless  they do.   If there should be much 
BOTANIC  PRACTICE.
175
fever and swelling, take a dose of salts every few days ;  and
twice a day, use the following ointment, viz : make a strong
decoction of the bark of the root of river willow, skunk cab-
bage, and blue flag roots ; then strain, add a portion of lard
to it, and boil down  until the water  is all evaporated,  and
when cold, it is ready for use.


               BITE OF  A MAD DOG.

   The following cuie is recommended by Dr. Mead ;  and
though in the space of thirty years he had used it a thousand
times, he never knew it to fail.   Take ash-colored ground
liverwort, cleaned, dried, and powdered, half an ounce ; of
black pepper powdered, a quarter  of an ounce.   Mix these
well together, and divide the powder into four doses ; one of
which must be taken every  morning fasting, for four morn-
ings successively, in half an English pint of cow's milk warm.
After these four doses are taken, the patient must go into the
cold bath or a cold spring or river, every morning fasting, for
a month ; he must be dipped all over,  but not stay  in (with
his head above water) longer than half a minute, if the water
be very cold.  After this he must go in three times a week
for a fortnight longer.  The person must  be bled  before he
begins to use the medicine.
   In East Indian the following cure is said to be  infallible  :
Take native and iactitious  cinnabar, of each  twenty four
grains, musk sixteen  grains.   Let these be made  into a fine
powder, and taken in a glass of arrack or brandy.   When a
person is bit perhaps the safer way will be instantly to cord
the limb above the wound, and cut out the fiesh of the bitten
part without waiting  a moment.  Then put on salt and vine-
gar ; afterwards  dress with  red precipitate  ointment;  and
immediately commence taking Dr. Mead's remedy.  Or take
every 2 hours a table spoonful of pulverized red duckweed.
This is reported, by a committee of the legislature of Penn-
sylvania, to be a certain cure.
         BITE OF THE  RATTLESNAKE.

  Instantly suck the  poison out of the wound with  the
mouth, or cut it out, or both ; then pound tobacco and honey 
176
BOTANIC PRACTICE.
 together so as to make a poultice, which apply to the wound,
 and  change it  every two hours.   Or a poultice made of
 quick  lime, oil  and  honey, may be  applied—Or the  fresh
juice of plantain.
   Note.  Let the lips be greased with sweet oil,  and then if
 there be no chops or wounds on them, there is no danger in
 sucking the pioson out, for the Indians always do it.
   Note.  A wine glassful of the juice of the plant called
 squirrelear has cured those who were so far gone as to be in-
 capable of speaking.


           STRENGTHENING  PLASTER.

   Take a pound of pitch, which is extracted from pine knots
 by boiling;  melt it in an  iron vessel;  add rum, and  cider
 emptyings, of each, one gill; boil down slowly until the wa-
 tery  parts are evaporated ; then pour it into cold water, and
 as soon as may be, commence pulling  it,  and dipping the
 plaster and your hands likewise, into the spirits, until it be-
comes  white, and begins to stick to your hands ;  it is then
 ready for use.


               BURNS AND SCALDS.

   Apply  sweet  oil immediately;  then  take  equal parts of
fresh linseed oil and lime water, shake them  well  together in
u bottle, and use it for an ointment two or three times a day.


          PILLS FOR THE HEADACHE.

   Take of poplar bark made fine ; bugle, and thoroughwort,
equal parts ; and put in half as much wormwood  as there is
of thoroughwort.  Pour boiling water to these in an earthern
 vessel or iron kettle.  Boil them till the strength is out, then
 strain off the tea from the  herbs, and  boil it clown to nearlv
the thickness of molasses.  To a pint  of this, add  one gill of
 molasses, and eight ounces of rhubarb, pounded fine and sifted
 through a  fine sive.  Next add one ounce of cayenne pepper,
 made fine  and sifted ; one  ounce of ginger, one ounce slip-
 pery elm bark made fine and sifted, and one ounce of golden 
BOTANIC  PRACTICE.               177
seal, or bitter root.  If the above articles do not make it thick
enough to work into pills, add  as much wheat flour as may
be necessary.   These pills should be  taken in the  morning
before breakfast, from five to nine every other morning.  They
cause an easy and useful operation, from eight to twenty four
hours after thev are taken.  They are remarkable good in
cases of costiveness, indigestion, cold stomach, headache, and
dizziness.  They are good in various kinds  of female com-
plaints, and may be taken  with safety  in all situations in
which men or women may be in.


             VEGETABLE  CORDIALS.

   When a person is troubled  with a relax in the bowels,
and wishes to take some kind of agreeable medicine lor it, let
him make a strong tea  of red raspberry leaves, and add, to
one quart of this tea, two ounces of peachmeats made fine ;
half an ounce of gum myrrh pounded fine;  four ounces ©f
loa'p sugar, and one gill of  cogniac brandy.   Bottle it, and
shake the bottle when you drink.   Take a wine glassful two
or three times a day.
   If a cordial  is needed to  relieve costiveness, make a
strong tea of poplar bark made  fine, and thoroughwort, equal
parts.  Add five  ounces loaf  sugar,  and one gill  of gin.
When the stomach is cold, acid to each junk bottle one  or two
teaspoonfuls of American cayenne pepper.


    SORE MOUTH FROM  TAKING  MERCURY.

   Take the inner bark of the  root of sumach or shoemake,
make a tea and wash or gargle  the mouth  with it—ancl take
sulphur and cream of tartar, a teaspoonful of each mixed with
cream or molasses, two  or three times a week.


                A  SOUR STOMACH,

   May  be cured by taking  lime water.   It is made  in this
manner:—First pour a  small quantity of boiling water upon
half a pound of  quick lime, let it  slack, ancl  then add two
gallons of boiling water  ; stir it now and then until cold, and 
178
BOTANIC PRACTICE.
after it settles, pour off the clear liquor and keep it in bottles
close stopped.   One gill of this with half as much new milk «
may be taken once or twice a day.


                 MORTIFICATION.

  Make a poultice of yeast and pulverized charcoal, and ap-
ply to the part; or bathe it in white lie  brine;  or, put on a
poultice  made by pounding the inner bark  of  black alder,
(Alnus nigra,) and drink a tea of the same.


                     SORE EYES.

  Make a decoction of fresh wild turnip or of lobelia, strain
through a fine cloth, and use it for  a wash.   Or dissolve
twelve grains of white vitriol, and sixteen of sugar of lead in
half a pint of water ;  or instead of the  water, in 3 gills of
milk, and use the whey.


  v                 DYSPEPSIA.

  If the stomach and bowels are out of order, they should first
be cleaned by a dose of phvsic.  Then make a strong decoc-
tion of Sampson snake reiot, in a teapot or earthen vessel, and
take half a teacupful 3 times a day.    It has the singular pro-
}>erty of strengthening the nervous system without producing
any inflammation.  In cold phlegmatic  habits,  a handful of
the root may be infused in a bottle of spirits,  and a wine
glassful, diluted with water, taken 3 times a day.   In either
method,  the effect of it in a  few weeks, will  be  astonishing.
Costiveness may be cured and prevented by taking a spoonful
of whole mustard seed twice a day.


            FLUOR ALBUS, OR  WHITES.

   Every night take one  or two  grains  of  the  powdered
leaves of cicula, (poison hemlock,) gradually increasing the
dose  until it'either  occasions some  giddiness,  sickness, or
trembling, or acts as physic the morning after  the close. Then 
               AMERICAN BOTANIC RUMEOII^.          lVu

   discontinue a few days; and in the mean time, while taking
•  the cicuta, and afterwards, boil a handful of comliey root in
   milk, and  take a teacupful three times  a day until the  flux
   becomes less acriel, then make a tea of those roots which ara
   good for immoderate courses, such as crane's bill, beth root,
   and rose willow, (see dispensatory.)  For oiher female irre-
   gularities and iveakness, make use of some of the following
   articles, viz:  Asarum, celandine, bearberry,  wild  turnip,
   elecampane, feverfew, wintergreen, spurred  rye, blue cohosh,
   ground pine maiden hair, wormwood, mountain tea, &c.  (w.
   these articles in the dispensatory.)
coo
                DISPENSATORY

                           OF

        AMERICAN BOTANIC REMEDIES.

   It is a common, and true saying, that every country con-
tains Ihe best cures for its  own  diseases.  No other part of
the globe can afford stronger proof of the (ruth of this remark,
than this very  country  of  North America,  the paradi.se of
freedom, in which  we dwell.  Instead of sending our ships to
for -;gn  climes  after  costly unnatural  medicines,  why is it
that we do not open our eyes on the vegetable kingdom around
us, and  accept  at  our own  doors,  without money or price,
those natural remedies which (he God of nature has planted
for us, as being more congenial to our constitutions ?  What,
then,  is the use in the name of common sense, of importing
Peruvian bark  (for instance) from South America, when  ihe
common dogwood  (cornus florida,) of our own country, pro-
duces the same effect ?  Or of sending to Europe for Spanish
flies, whan the American potatoe fly  (which may be collected
in large  quantities,) is far superior, and will  draw a blister
without  producing  strangury which  the Spanish fly ie ycry
apt to do !

   Angelica.   This is well  known.  It  grows in marshy
woods and  hedges, flowering in  Juno and  July, and is fre-
quently  cultivated  in our gardens.   The root of angelica u'
                           12 
ISO         AMERICAN BOTANIC REMEDIES.
strengthening and aromatic ; it is good for colic arising from
wind in the stomach and bowels, and is very beneficial in the
ague and  fever, and typhus fever.   One or two teaspoonfuls
of the powdered root is a dose.   Or it may be used in a de-
coction, and dogwood berries  or bark may be boiled with it.
One gill is a dose 3 or 4 times a day.
  Alum  root.   (Heuchera  Americana.)   The root is  a
powerful astringent, and much better than Gum Kino, which
is brought from Africa. It is used in Hemorrhage from weak-
ness,  such as flooding, whites, gleet, &c.  It is good for the
gravel, and is used as a gargle for sore mouths.   It is  proper
to be put into spirits, or instead of that, the powder or tea may
be given.   The Indians apply it to wounds, ulcers, and can--
cers.
  Black  Alder.   (Alnus Nigra.)   Growrs in moist places,
and  frequently sends up  several slender stalks to the  height
of ten feet; it bears a red berry.   It is  tonic and antiseptic,
and is therefore good to stop mortification.  For this purpose,
drink a decoction or tea of the inner bark, and make a poul-
tice of the same and apply externally.
  It is sometimes called Virginia Winterberrv.
  Agrimony.  Grows two or three feet high, in hedges,
&c.   It blossoms  in July on long spikes which are yellow,
and the seeds of it in the  fall of the year are remarkable for
sticking to the clothes.   Some people call it cuckold.   In
the form of tea it is a good drink in fevers.  The juice of this
plant, sweetened with honey,  is an excellent  medicine in the
jaundice, scurvy, and diarrhaea. A wine glassful  of the juice,
3 times a clay, is a proper dose.
  The herb is applied externally to fresh wounds.
   Avens  root.   (Geum  Urbanum.) .Grows a foot high
near fences, blossoms  in July, white or yellowish, and smells
very much like cloves.   Two handfuls of the root to a quart
of spirits will make a tincture which is  an excellent renu <iv
in all cases where  tonics  are  necessary.  There is another
kind, the  Water Avens, the blossoms of which  are purplish
and appear in May, but its properties are much the same as
preceding.  A decoction of ;, is good for sore throats.   I: is
also used as a substitute for ea and coffee.
   Asarum, or Suv^-v ■'*■"■ abacca.  Grows in low grounds;
has but twQ leaves rWng, from the  root, the  flowers are  • ur- 
             AMERICAN  BOTANIC  REMEDIES.         181

pie and bell shaped, ancl  proceed from between the leaves.
It has a nauseous bitter taste.  From a half to a table spoon-
ful of the powdered  root operate upwards and  downwards.
Steeped in boiling water, a table spoonful is given every half
hour for the hooping-cough.  In the  dose of a teacupful  lJ
times a dav, it promotes the menses, or courses.
   Arrowroot.   (Maranta  Arundinacea.)    Is cultivated ;•<
the United States, and those who do not cultivate  it will find
that  it is for sale at almost  every  Druggist store.   A  table
spoonful makes a pint of the finest  jelly in nature, and is the
most nutritious and harmless food  that can be  for sick per-
sons, especially in bowel complaints.
   To make the jelly, add as"much cold  water to a table-
spoonful as will make it into a thin paste ; then pour on boil-
ing water, stirring it at the sametime, till it becomes a clear
jellv:  nutmeg and sugar, with a little wine or  lemon juice,
may then be  added.  But for children, it  is better to give it
with new milk.
   Thorn Apple.   (Datura Stramonium.^   It  is also called
James Thorn-weed, French Apple,  Stinck-weed, &c.   It
grows to the height of 2 or 3 feet, flowers in July and Au-
gust, the apple or pod is large, egg-shaped, ancl covered with
sharp thorns.   It has a very disagreeable smell.   It is used
internally  for Apoplexy, Epilepsy,  Mania,  Chronic, Rheu-
matism, and  diflicult menstruation,  in the form  of extract,
which is made by exposing the juice  of the plant to the heat
of the sun, or, boil the plant in water four hours,  strain off'
the  liquor, rummer  down to a syrup without taking  off the
scum, then pour it  into  an earthen vessel, which  is now to
be kept in a warm oven until  it becomes thick.   The dose is
one  or two grains once a  day, increasing very gradually.  It
is a  very  active medicine, and  when taken  internally, must
be used'w-ith the greatest caution.   Externally, it is used on
fresh wound*, bruises, scalds,  burns,  piles,  ulcers, and can-
cers, in the form of ointment,  which is made  by simmering
slowly the frodi leaves bruised in  hog's lard, with  about one
eighth part of beeswax,  for one hour, and then  straining it
through a coarse cloth.
        i
   Celandine.  [Cholidonium.]   Grows by running brooks,
ah >ut2 feot high ; the stalks have  larger joints, than are com-
 mon with other  plants,  and are  very easily broken.   It is
 generally well known.   Twenty  or thirty drops of the juice,
                           12*
fp  h 
/
    \Q2          AMERICAN BOTANIC  REMEDIES.

    or half a teaspoonful of the -powdered root, in new milk, morn-
    ing and evening, is a cure for the dropsy, green sickness, and
    cutaneous eruptions.  The juice rubbed on warts, rings, and
    tetter worms, completely removes them.  Made into an oint-
    ment or plaster, it is a good application for piles, and effectu-
    ally cures the Kings evil.
      Bearberry.  [Arbutus Uva  Ursi.]  Is a low ever-green
    shrub, also called Whortleberry, and wild  cranberry.   It re-
    lieves the stone, gravel, gonorrhoea, the courses, and also ca-
    tarrhs and consumptions.  Make a tea of the  leaves, a hand-
    ful to a pint of water, and take half a pint two or three times a
    day.
      Five fingers,  or  Cinquefoil.    (Potentilla  Reptans.)
    /Creeps on  the ground with long slender tendrils like straw-
    berries.  The leaves are of  five parts, with indented edges ;
    the  flowers  are  yellow;  and  the  r.nt has  a  dark brown
    color, long and fibrous.  It is a very  good tonic and astrin-
*   gent.  It relieves  urinary complaints, fluxes, sexual weak-
    ness, ague, and epilepsy. It  is sometimes used instead of tea.
      Beech Drops.   (Orobanche Virginiana.)  Cancer-root,
    or broom-rape.   It growTs  under  beech trees six or  eight
    inches high, brittle, of a brown  color, but r."> leaves ; the root
    bulbous.  It is disagreeably bitter, tonic and astringent. The
    fresh bruised root externally applied, is celebrated l'or curing
    the cancer,  ulcers, and St. Anta >m as fire.  Internally, it is
    good for convulsions,  and  aft  ; pny>ic has  been taken.fr
    dysentary and diarrhaoa.
       Crawly,  or Fever ro:7.   Is generally found in the neigh-
    borhood of beech drops.  It has no leaves; comes up with a
    single stalk about, a foot high,  with numerous pods around it
    (hat hang downwards, containing,  when ripe,  an extremely
    fine seed.   The appearance of the root  is a curiosity  ;  it is
    brittle, not so large as a quill, and appears in strata or Livers
    like hands and fingers on  the  b>p of each other, forming a
    bunch or cluster.   The powdered root mixed with molasses
    adding a little skunk cabbage and  wild turnip root, will cure
    a cough when  nothing else will  doit.   After mixing up a
    teacupful, take a teaspoonful 3  or 4 limes a dav.

       Comfrey.   (Consolida.)   Boiled in milk, is excellent in
     tho  dysentary, bowel complaints, immoderate courses, and
     lb; or albus.  it is beneficiul  in the  clap, and in  all other'cases 
AMERICAN  BOTANIC  REMEDIES.          183
attended with burning heat in making water.   A poultice of
the pounded root is good for wounds and inflammatory swell-
ings.
   Blood root.  (Sanguinaria Canadensis.)  It is also called
red root, puccoon, indian paint, turmeric, ancl is generally
well known.  The powdered root, from 20 to 30 grains, is a
powerful emetic.  In smaller doses, for ulcerous sore throats,
croup, and hives, it is equal to the seneka snake root;  and
one or two grains every 2 or 3 hours is an excellent diapho-
retic in colds, pleurises, &c.
   Wild  turnip,  [Arum  Tryphyllum,]  Indian  turnip,
 3 farch turnip, Dragon root, Wake robin, or Cuckoo paint.
By some of these names it is well known to every one.  Its
virtues are destroyed by drying, and by too much pounding.
To use it as medicine, it should be scraped, and mixed with
something oily,  sweet, or mucilaginous.   It is useful to old
people, in cases  of asthma, coughs, &c.  It is good for won en
who are not regular, and a decoction of the root is used for
eye water.
   Dandelion.   [Leontodon Taraxacum.]   A decoction of
dandelions will correct an  unhealthy stale of the stomach and
liver, and procure an appetite.
   It is diuretic, and very beneficial in the jaundice.
   Blackberry.  The berry when ripe is known  to be pleasant
and wholesome,  and two  handfuls of the roots in 3  pints of
milk or water boiled down to a quart, in the dose of a teacup-
ful every 2 or 3 hours, has often cured  diarrhsea  and dysen-
tary, when the apothecary's medicine had failed.
   F-lcampane.   [Inula Helenium.]  In (he form of strong
tea made by boiling it is good for hoarseness, coughs, stoppage
of urine, or of the courses ;  it is used for spitting blood, to
destory worms, and to fasten loose teeth.                -^
   Fever-few, Feather-few.   [Pyrethrum Parthcnum.]   Is
an aromatic tonic.  A decoction of the  herb, in  hysterics,
and other female complaints, may be used to advantage.
   Wintergreen.  [GaultheriaProcumbens.]  Mountain-tea,
deerberry, partridgeberry, grouseberry, teaberry, ground-
holly, ground-ivy, spicebcrry, are different names for the
same thing.   It  is useful in  spasmodic  asthma, in  urinary,
and in  female weaknesses.  It relieves  cramp from wind in 
IS4          AMERICAN  BOTANIC REMEDIES.

the stomach,  and the juice boiled with sweet oil, wax, and
turpentine, makes a salve, which is used to heal wounds.
   Indian Tobacco.   (Lobelia Inflata.)   Is generally  well
known.  It rises up one  or two feet with branched stems,
and the flowers, of a pale blue color, appear in July and Au-
gust.   The capsules or pods, are inflated, and  filled  with
small seeds.  It is a very powerful emetic, and must be used
with caution.  One fourth of a tea-spoonful of the powdered
leaves generally  act as a  puke and physic  A little on the
point of a  penknife  dropped  into a spoonful of water and
swallowed will relieve the  asthma, and other coughs.  The
tincture of the leaves in  spirits may  be taken for  the same
purpose,  in the dose of a  few drops,  increasing to a tea-
spoonful or more, according to the effects it produces.  The
following quotation is from the Rev. Dr.  M.  Cutler,  (see
Coxe's dispensatory, page 400,)  " I had a tincture made of
(he fresh plant, (Indian tobacco,)  and took care  to have the
spirit fully saturated, which,  I think, is  important.  In a
paroxysm (of the asthma)  which perhaps, was as severe as
I ever experienced, the difficulty of breathing extreme, and
after it had continued for  a  considerable time, I took a table-
spoonful.   In three or four minutes my breathing was as free
as it ever was, but I felt  no nausea  at the stomach.  In ten
minutes I took another spoonful, which occasioned sickness.
After ten minutes I took the third, which produced  sensible
effects upon the coats of the stomach, and  a very little mod-
erate puking, ancl a kind  of prickly sensation  through the
whole system, even to the extremities of the fingers and  toes.
The  urinary passage was  perceptibly affected by  producing a
smarting sensation in passing urine, which was probably pro-
voked by stimulus upon  the bladder.  But all  these sensa-
tions very soon subsided,  and a vigor seemed to  be  restored
to the constitution, which I had not experienced for years."
It is  generally, however, very dangerous to take as much of
it at once as Dr. Cutler did, ancl he afterwards says himself,
that  " some4 patients  have been severely puked  with only a
tea-spoonful."
   Burdock.  (Arctium Lappa.]  Operates gently on the
bowels, sweetens the blood, promotes sweat and urine, and
is used in rheumatic scorbutic, and venereal diseases.  Dose,
of the juice, a wine-glassful;  of the  decoction,  half a  pint,
three times a day.
I 
AMERICAN  BOTANIC REMEDIES.
185
    Thoroughwort,  [Eupatorium  Perforatum,]  boneset,
cross wort, thoroughsiem, or Indian sage, is a plant so gen-
erally known  as to need  no description.  A wine-glassful
every two hours, of the warm decoction,  is beneficial  in fe-
vers by exciting a copious perspiration.   In larger doses it
proves emetic, and in this way it is an excellent remedy for
the ague, to be given when the fit is coming  on.   When ta-
ken cold, in small doses, it is very strengthening to the stom-
ach, and the flowers, especially, are as good a tonic bitter as
camomile flowers.
   Queen of the meadow, (eupatorium purpureum.)   Is also
called trumpet weed, gravel weed.  It grows in hegdes, and
on the sides of meadows, about four feet high ; the stalk is
reddish ; the flowers is purple ;  the leaves are long,  spear
shaped, and opposite each other.   A  large  handful  of  the
roots boiled in  three pints of water down to a  quart, and
given in doses of a tea-cupful every two  hours, is an excel-
lent remedy in the gravel, bloody urine, and suppressions of
urine; it strengthens the urinary organs,  and carries off the
water in dropsy.
  Pleurisy root,  (Asclepias decumbens.)    White root,
flux root, wind roct, butterfly weed, harvest flower, decum- \
bent, swallow wort.  It is a beautiful plan% growing two
or three  feet  high  under fences, and  on  upland pastures.—
The flowers are of a bright orange color,  and appear in July
and August.   These are  succeeded by  long  slender pods \
with a delicate kind of  silk attached to them.   The  root is
spindle or carrot shaped, of a light brownish color outside,
and white within.   No medicine is better than this in pro-
ducing general and plentiful perspiration without heating the
body, and from this it derives its well merited fame in curing  \
pleurisy, inflammation of the lungs, liver ancl dysentery ;  but
in these acute diseases,  the stomach and  bowels should first
be cleansed  by a smart dose  of physic, or emetic.  A  hand-
ful of the root is then  to be steeped  in  a quart  of boiling   \
Water, and a tea-cupful given every two or throe hours.
  fkueetflag, (Aeorus calamus.)  Myrtle flag, sivect cal-
amus., sweet  myrtle grass.   The root may be grated into
water, and given to children  for flatulent  colics, when there
is no fevt-r.   It may also be  used as an ingredient with dog-
wood, che.-ry bark, &c.  to prevent the ague  in low marshy
situations.
f 
186         AMERICAN BOTANIC REMEDIES.
     Broad leaved laurel, [Kalmia  Latifolia.]   Grows seven
   or eight feet high, in swamps and moist rocky pastures.   The
 .  blossoms are white, and tinged with red.   An ointment made
   by simmering the leaves in lard is good for the scald head,
   obstinate sores, and  has often cured the itch.  There is an-
   other species, called narrow leave  or-dwarf laurel.  Both
   kinds are poisonous.
     Cicuta,  or  poison  hemlock, [Conium  Maculatum.]—
   Grows from three to six feet high, in moist and shady places,
   resembling parsly, but  (he root resembles the  carrot.   The
   stalk is round, smooth,  hollow,  and marked  with reddish or
   brown spots.   The under  side of  the leaf is whitish green,
   the upper side dark green.  The  flowers are  white,  heart
   shaped, and consist of five  leaves.   The seed is greenish, flat
   on one side, convex on the other,  and the  convex side is
   marked with five furrows.   The smell of the plant resembles
   the, urine of a cat.  The furrows on the convex side of the
   seed, the spots on the stalk, and  the peculiar smell of the
   plant, taken together, will  distinguish it from all other plants
   that resemble it.   It is  of a narcotic nature, and when taken
   in an over dose, is a deadly poison,   it is used in fluxes,
   epilepsy, chronic rheumatism, jaundice, venereal complaints,
   cutaneous affections, rickets, swelled testicles, cancer, scro-
   fulous affections, &c.   The close is from one to three grains
   a day of the leaves, gradually  increasing, until  it  produces
   giddiness.   The leaves should  be  collected  in June,  dried
   quickly before a fire on tin plates, and kept in  well stopped
   phials, secluded from the light.
     Jenson,  gention, gension,   or  American  gentian.   It
   grows on  the side of  roads and  in waste pastures, two  or
   three feet high.   The stem is strong and erect, ancl the leaves
   are s*pear-shaped, somewhat like common milkweed.   But
\  /he leaf surrounds the stalk like thoroughwort,  and at the
 V junction of the leaf with the stalk, on the upper side, yellow
 * flowers appear which terminate in bitter berries, containing
   the seed.   Itis better than imported gentian j.  not only is ic
   a tonic, but it corrects  unhealthy secretions, and  produces
   that healing eflect on the lungs and liver  which  no other
   medicine can do.
     Dwarf elder.   This plant dies every vear, and rises afresh
   in the spring with a four square, rough prickly s<alk, three
   or four feet high.  The flowers are white with a dash of pur-
ft
/ 
AMERICAN  BOTANIC REMEDIES.
187
 pie, standing in umbels on the top of the stalk, and termina-
 ting  in reddish or dark colored berries.  The root creepi
 under the upper crust of the ground, as large as the finger,
 r.nd springs up again in different  places.   It colors the hair
 black ;  is a powerful diuretic-, and has acquired great fame
 in curing  the dropsy.   It is used in decoction.

    Sampson snake root.   Grows from  one to  two or three
 feet high ;  the leaves are dark green, and very smooth on the
 under side.   It blossoms about the last of August or first of  /£
 September, bearing circular, pale blue flowers, on the top of /
 the stalk.   The roots are fibrous, of an agreeable taste, run-
 ning near the surface, from which in  the fall red sprouts are
 found shooting up to form other stalks.   It is used in debili-
 ty of the nervous system, a wine-glassful of the  tincture, or
 more of the decoction, three times a dav.  *—---—■._

   Dogwood, or boxwood,  [Cornus Florida.]  Grows fif-
 teen or twenty feet high, bearing large white flowers, and is
 well  known.   It is a powerful tonic, and  is  equal  to  the
 peruvian bark.   The bark is  used for the ague, either  in!
 substance,  [pulverized,] tincture, or  decoction;  and  tl
 Indians make use of the  flowers for the same purpose.

   Rose willow.   Grows on tho banks of brooks or rivers, or"J
 borders of meadows, about the  size of an apple tree,  with a
 bunch in the top resembling a bunch of roses ;  gray colored
 bark outside, red within.   A large handful of the bark boil-
 ed in three pints of water down to a quart, is used for the
 gleet, whites, immoderate  flowing of the  menses, and cula-
 uoou.s eruptions.                     .,,  -----
   Oak,  [Q'lc-rcus.]   Either hi rick or red oak bark is t->nir,
 r^fringenf, and powerfully  antiseptic.   It is good in all cases
 where peruvian bark is good, and  may be used in decoction
 internally and externally.
   Mallows.   Grows in almost every door yard.  There are
 two kinds, but  the properties  of both  are the  same1.  It is
 mueolaginous, and useful in dysenteries, g.av< l/stranguary,
 and scalding of urine.
   Mustard.   The pulverized seeds are a diffusible stimulus.
 When taken whole, in the dose; of a tabiu-spoonful or more,
 t!!ey produce a gentle  evae uation,  without weakening \\.*
stomach and bowel-. 
138         AMERICAN BOTANIC REMEDIES.
   Tobacco, [Nicotiana Tobacum,] is emetic, cathartic, su-
dorific, diuretic, expectorant, narcotic,  and antispasmodic.
Two or three spoonsful of tobacco infusion mixed with half
a pint of gruel, and used as injection,  will  afford relief in
violent colics when the bowels cannot be moved by any other
physic.
   Fox glove, [Digitalis Purpurea.]  Is but little known
except by physicians, and yet it grows very common among
us.  It rises to the height of two or more feet, and its leaves
are large, egg-shaped, notched like a saw, and covered with
hairs.  The blossoms are of a beautiful purple color,  hang-
ing downwards in a row along one side, which are  compar-
ed with the fingers of a glove, and in the inside are elegantly
mottled with spots like little eyes.  When taken in large do-
ses, digitalis produces vomiting, purging, dimness of  sight,
vertigo, delirium, hiccough, convulsions, collapse,  and death.
Cordials  and stimulants are the  best antidotes.  As a  medi-
cine, it diminishes the frequency of the  pulse, lessens  the
irritability of the system,  increases the discharge by urine,
and the action of absorbents.  In small doses, therefore, it is
good for inflammatory complaints.   Externally, it has been
applied to scrofulous tumors.   The powdered leaf may  be
given internally, one grain  twice a day, gradually  increasing
until it produces some effect,  and then stop.   Or a decoction
may be used about as strong as  common tea, in the close  of a
tea-spoonful every two  or  three  hours.   It is cultivated in
tome of our gardens.
   Camomile.  A warm decoction of  the flowers  in large
quantities will act as emetic; in small doses, taken cold, it
i» an excellent tonic to strengthen the stomach.
   Deadly nightshade, [Atropa  Belladonna.]   Grows two
or three  feet  high among rubbish, and uncultivated places.
The berries  are  very plump and round, first green, then
changing to red, and when  ripe, of a shining black.   This
poisonous plant has performed great cures in palsy, epilepsy,
jaundice, dropsy, ancl cancer.   A  half a grain of the powder-
ed root or leaves, is  sufficient  to begin  with.   Or,  infuse
twenty grains in a pint of boiling water;  strain it  when cool,
and one or two table-spoonfuls once a day is a dose.   But
if any unusual symptoms take place, then stop for some days,
and afterwards try it again in smaller doses.  The leaves are
applied externally to the cancerous tumors and ulcers. 
AMERICAN  BOTANIC  REMEDIES.          189
   Bittersweet.   Grows in hedges, ancl  climbs  upon other
hushes with winding wootlv stalks.  The flowers are in clus-
ters of a blue purple color, appearing  in June and July, and
always turning against the sun.   The berries are red.  It
operates by sweat, urine, ancl stool, and is good  in acute
rheumatism, jaundice, scurvy, obstructions of the menses, and
cutaneous disorders.  A tea-cupful of the tea may be taken
twice a day.   Or steep four ounces of the twigs in a pint of
wine; dose, a wine-glassful.   The leaves boiled in vinegar,
adding a little flaxseed,  make a good poultice for hard swel-
lings.   An open  cancer has been cured by applying the juice
ami leaves.
   Colts Fan!,  [Asarum Canadense.]  Is generally known.
Boiling injures  it.  Better put it  inspirits.  A strong tea,
made by steeping, brings  out a moisture  on the skin,  and
strengthens the stomach.
   Mandrake, or May apple, [Podophyllum Peltatum,] needs
no description.   It is an  excellent purgative in  doses  from
ten to thirty grains.  Or double that  quantity infused  in a
gill of water.   Or  equal  quantities of the  mandrake juice
and molasses may be mixed, and a table-spoonful  taken every
hour or two until it operates.   The Indians gather  the  root
in autumn when the leaves turn yellow, dry it in the shade,
and pulverize it for use.
   Pie Plant,  Rheubarb,  the root,  [Radix Rhei.]   It  is
generally cultivated in our gardens for the sake of the stalks,
which are made into excellent pies;  the root, however,  is
the same  kind of rhubarb as that which  is imported from
Asia.   Small doses of rhubarb, from  six to ten grains, are
astringent and strengthening to  the stomach.  In larger clo-
ses, from a scruple  to half a dram, it  is  first purgative,  and
tie n astringent.  It is therefore  an excellent  medicine for
diarrhoea and dyse'iitcry, because it evacuates any acrid mat-
ter that may  be offending the bowels, before  it acls as an
astringent.
   American  Ipecac, or Indian physic, [Spiraea Trifoleata.]
Grows about two  or three feet high, in low woods and mead-
ows, and is very common  in all  parts of  the country.   It  is
equal to foreign ipecac.   Thirl v or forty  grains  e>f the  pul-
verized root act as emetic ; in the dose of live  or six grains
every two hours,  it acts as a sudorific.   Or  a handful of the
* 
190          AMERICAN BOTANIC REMEDIES.
fresh root may  be infused in a pint of boiling water,  and a
small tea-cupful taken every fifteen or twenty minutes until
it produces vomiting.
   Wormwood, [Artimisia Absinthium,] Is also well known.
A handful to a quart of boiling water, in the dose of a tea-
cupful, or a tea-spoonful of the powdered leaves three times a
day, is excellent for wejrms, hysterics, weakness of the stom-
ach, difficult menstruation, intermittents, jaundice, and dropsy.
Externally as a poultice, it is good for bruises, &c.
   Tansy, [Tanacetum Vulgare.]   Relieves hysterical af-
fections.   A wine-glassful of  tansy juice will throw  off an
ague fit if taken a few minutes before the attack.
   Skunk Cabbage, (Symplocarpus Fostida,)  is expectorant,
and antispasmodic.  The root and seeds are excellent  in the
asthma, and also for the colic and griping of the bowels.
  Nanny Berry Bush.  Grows ten or twelve feet high by
the side  of rivers, lakes or ponds.  The berries hang  in
bunches,  about the size of a white bean, containing a kind of
stone, and when ripe they are black,  of a sweetish taste, and
are good  to eat.   In the hectic fever  attending complaints of
die lungs and breast,  a tea made of the bark is more effectual
as a febrifuge than any thing else.
  Sanicle,  Black  Snake Root,  (Sanicula Marilandica,)
It is a cordial, stimulating and diaphoretic medicine,  and is
used in complaints of debility to renovate ancl strengthen the
system.   It is generally found in meack>ws, bears a number
of burs on the top, the root is dark colored and has an agree-,
able strong small.
  Nunk  Root, Piunkwm.   It grows by the  side of streams,
six or eight inches high ; the leaf is  round, with notches on
the edge  ; the color of  the root is purple, tie smell agreea-
ble.   It  is used  in consumptive' coughs;  to  stop blood, and
to heal fresh wounds.
  Poplar, (Liriodendrum Tulipifera.)   Poplar  bark is  a
very strong, bitter, tonic, and  aromatic.   It is used  in the
ague ; in dysentery after  the bowels are cleansed by physic ;
and finally in all  cases of debility, it  has the   same effect as
peruvian park.
   Slippery elm, (Ulmus  Americana.)  By infusing tho bark
in water  it produces a nourishing jelly, which is capable of
# 
              AMERICAN nOTANVC  . EMEDIES.          IUI

 supporting life without any other food.  It is beneficial in fe-
 vers ;  and Dr. Grant, who acquired great celebrity in (he
 cure  of dysentery, has declared t'at he is indebted for that
 reputation to the use of this mucilaginous jelly.   Externally
 applied, it prevents mortification ; and  as an emollient poul-
 tice for swellings, it is better than either bread and milk, or
 flaxseed. ^-#^_———*■**■***" ""
   Sumach,  or Shoemake, (Rhus  Capallinum.)   It is well
 known.  An infus'on or tea of the  seeds, sweetened with
 honey, makes a good gargle for sore throat and for cleansing
 the mouth in typhus fever.  The inner bark of the root in
 decoction, externally as a wash, or taken internally, is one of
 the most powerful  vegetable antiseptics which our country
 produces.  It is frequently used in hectic,  scrofulous,  and
 venereal complaints.
   Pokeweed,  (Phytolacca Decandra.)   It is very  active,
 and operates as emetic and cathartic.   If an ounce of the root
 kj steeped in a pint of wine, two table-spoonfuls will operate
 well as a puke.  In smaller doses it is an excellent remedy
 for the rheumatism, and it cures the venereal disease without
 mercury.  A decoction of too  loaves is used  externally for
 the piles, and an ointment made by simmering a  handful of
 die ro.-'t or leaves in a pint of  lard, adding a little beeswax,
 i« applied to  cancers and ulcers.
   Horse  radish.   [Cochlearia  Armoracea.]   Is an anti-
 scorbutic and stimulating medicine.   It may  be  taken c-ithei
 in substance  or infused in wine, for the scurvv,dropsv, palsv,
 chronic, rheumatism, Lr.   An  infusion of horse  radish  in
 milk is the best cosmetic f>r (ho ladies, and steeped iu vim ■
 g/ir, it  removes frochlos from (he face.
   Prid*.  of  China.  [Molia  Azcdarach.]    ! i  is elegant
 tree has emigrated to the United States, and is m-w become
naturalized by cultivation.   It  is an anthelmintic or \ v-;. ii-
fuge.   (That i-,  good  to  destroy  \vnnii\)   Alweit  four
ounces of the hirl; of li-sh  root  is boiled in 3 pints of wain
down to a quart, and a half or a whole wb'.« gla^  ;! is givcu
 to children evevy ,1  or 3 hours until it operates as p!.v.■'...
   America.-i  se.ina.   [Cassia  Marilandica.]   Grows w-II
in this  country, is very easily raised from the seeds, and ought
to be cultivated in  every gajdeu.  It  is  well known as a
physic  for children ; a handful of llio loaves to a pint of hot 
192
AMERICAN  BOTANIC  REMEDIES.
water, and a teacupful or less, every hour or two till it ope-
rates.
   Oak of Jerusalem, or  Wormseed.   [Chenopodium An-
thelmenticum.]   This is also  a vermifuge or anthelmintic
medicine.  A table spoonful of the juice of the plant expressed
or squeezed out, is a dose.   The seed may be boiled in milk,
give a wine glassful.   Or one or two teaspoonfuls of the seed
itself may be mixed  with  molasses or honey,  and given to a
child 2 or 3 years old on an empty stomach, twice a day, and
continued  several days.
   King^s evil  weed.  Grows  in the woods, some like a
plantain, but the leaves are smaller, spotted green and white,
and a single stalk runs up from the middle of the plant six or
eight inches high, bearing on the top a small round bud.   It
is considered an  infallible cure for king's evil.   Make a
poultice of the whole plant, and apply it  to the swelling, and
use a tea of the  same  for constant drink.
   Gravel weed.   Grows an dry land where wintergreen is
found.   The stalk rises not much from the ground, but runs
along and  takes new root.   The leaf is oval, of a pale green,
(hick and  rough,  but  not hairy, as wide as a  spoonbowl but
not so  long, and bears a small  white blossc.m.   It  grows in
little, beds or mats like camomile, with  the leaves  thick to-
gether, almost one an the top of the other.  It is injure, u bv
boiling.   An infusion of the leaves-and vines in hot water is
said to be  an effectual cure for  gravel in  the kidney, or stone
in the bladder.   The use of it must be  continued  for son,.«
time.
   Wild Parsley.   [Petrosellinum.]   Grows in mead aw?
and among  rocks near the sea, five  or six feet high,  with a
firm stem, long thick root, strong smell,  and acrid taste.   It
flowers in July and has a kidney  shaped seed which is a
powerful diuretic.  A small handful of the seeds boiled in a
quart of water,  and sweetened  with honey, in  doses of a tea-
cupful every hour or  two,  is a  very good remedy in suppres-
sion of wind, or gravel complaints.
   Yellow Dock.  Is very effectual  in cleansing the blood of
humors. . An  open cancer  has been  cured by applying the
narrowed  leaved dock as a fomentation and poultice, and bv
drinking each day from a pint to a quart, of the docoction. 
AMERICAN  BOTANIC REMEDIES.          193
   Sarsaparilla.   [Smilax Sarsaparilla.]   Has long been
 used in the treatment of venereal complaints.  It is also used
 in scrofula, rheumatism,  and cufaneous disorders, [that is,
 disorders of the skin.]   If used in decoction, a large handful
 of the root may be boiled away one third in a quart of water.
 Or two drachms of the  powder, or one of the extract, may he
 given 3 or 4 times a day.
   Sassafras.  [Laurus Sassafras.]   It is an  aromatic  or
 pleasant tonic.  A tea of the  bark  or  flowers purifies  the
 blood, and the pith of the small twigs in water forms a jelly
 or mucilage which  is good for sore eyes,  and with  nutmeg
 and sugar, it makes a palatable diet  in  the  dysentery, &c.
 Sassafras,  prickly-ash,  dogwood  and  American  gentian,
 make as powerful and  as pleasant a bitter  as the foreign
 gentian columbo, peruvian bark,  cloves and cinnamon that
 we buy at the druggist store.
   Brae Flag.   [Iris Pseudacorus.]   Grows by the brink of
 rivers, in  swamps,  and meadows;  blossoms in July, blue
 flowers, variegated with white, yellow and purple.   A tea-
 spoonful of the juice diluted with water is an active cathartic,
 and the decoction for constant drink, is used in venereal com-
 plaints.
   River Willow.   An ointment  to  cure  the salt rheum i*.
 maue from the bark of  this root, blue flag, and skunk cab-
 bage roots.

   Rattlesnakes Plantain. Grows in almost every meadow.
 Tho  leaf  is  more notched, and smaller than the eon;men
 plantain, and the root  has a  hot peppery taste.   A poultief
 of the fresh  pounded leaves is  celebrated for curiiv the bite
 of a rattlesnake.                            '

   Noble Liverwort.   Grows throe or four inches from (he
ground with a roundish, three eorneied, and dark brown leaf
 A decoction of this herb has  been  highly  recommended for
curing consumption.
  Ladies'1  slipper.  Is well known.   A decoction of  the
 root, is lebrifugo, and a  fine regulating  medicine  in  f. male
 complaints.

  Lungwort.  [Lichen.]   Is a  thin shell or  skin re f ir
 bling the lungs, which  grows on the  bark of the while cak 
194
AMERICAN  BOTANIC  REMEDIES.
tree.   A handful to a quart of boiling water may be used  a*
a common drink for consumption and hooping cough.
   Tag alder.   The bark of the roots boiled in cider is the
best thing to cleanse  the blood in  the spring of the year.
Take a teacupful every hour or two until it operates as physic.
   Squirrel  ear, or edge leaf  It never grows higher than
two or three  feet; the leaves are transverse  and alternate ;
the edge of the leaf, instead of the surface, is presented to the
sun, and its color and shape, although larger,  very  much re-
sembles the ear of a squirrel.
   Beth root.  [Trillium Rhumboydum. J  Grows about afoot
high, three oval leaves at the top of  the stalk,  and one flower
of a purple color, bell-shaped, which produces a small berry,
containing the seed.   The root is brown, bulbous and full of
small fibres.  It is tonic, astringent, and antiseptic.  A tea-
spoonful of the powdered root three or four times a day, is
used in spitting bbod, immoderate courses, and bloody  urine.
A poultice of the root is applied to putrid ulcer?, and to stop
mortification.
   Blue cohosh.   [Caulophyllum Thalictroides.]   Is an ex-
cellent remedy in rheumatism, dropsy, and obstruction of (he
menses or courses.  A handful of (he  root to a quart of boil-
ing water—drink a teacupful 3 or 4  times a day.  Or put the
same quantity in a quart of spirits, and take a  winoglasi.ai 2
or 3 times a day.
   Ground  Pine.   [Arthctica.]    Grows  in  stony  land.*,
about six inches Ugh, semis out many small branches, wit:.;
small narrow grayish  leaves,  somewhat  hairy; flowers of a
pale color,  growing from (ho  joint  of the  stalk among tl;
leaves, terminating in small round husks.   It  is used for the
same purposes as floe cohosh.   Steep a handful of the leaves
and flowers  in a pint of wine, and take a wine glassful 2 cr
3 times a day.
   Maiden hair.  [Asplenium Trichomanes.]  Grows seven
or eight inches high, the stalks are  small,  smooth, and of a
dark purplo colour, the leaves are  very fine, soft, and spotted
underneath,  and  it  flowers from  May to October.  It is a
good  medicine for irregulariliosof the female system, and also
for disorders of the  brcas*, coughs, hoarseness, &c.  Pour a
quart of boiling  water on a handful  of the dry hero, sweeten
with honey,  and  take a teaoupful every hour or two. 
                  AMERICAN BOTANIC KF.JUEDIES.          195

       Butternut tree, or  while walnut.   [Inglans Cinerea.]
     For diarrluea, dvseiuery, apd costiveness, it is about the best
     physic that grows.   The bark of the root should  be collected
     in May or June ; after  cleaning, cutting, ancl bruising, should
     have eight times its weight of water added  to it;  it should
     then be  boiled to one half, strained through thick cloth, and
     afterwards  evaporated  to the consistence of thick  honey, at
     such a distance from  the fire  that it shall not be burnt in the
     least.   It may then be  dried in a warm oven till  it will pill;
     take from three to five ^lills the size of a pea.
       V(dcri::n.   [Valeriana Officinalis.]   Grows  abundantly
     near the Ohio river, two or three feet high, the leaves are in
     pairs, large, hair-,  and  of a eluskv green  color.   The flowers
     stand in largo tufts  on the top of the branches, of a pale whit-
    ish-red color.  The  root  consists of a number of slender fibres,
    matted together, and attached to one head;  it has  a  brown
    col ,r, and  strong unpleasant smell.   Valerian  root has long
    been recommends 1  by the most learned physicians as a medi-
    cine of great use in debilities of the nervous system, especially
    in hysterics and  hypochondriases.   Boiling injures  it.   The
    common close is from a  scruple to a drachm in powder.
      Spikenird. spignard, or spignet.   [Aralia Racemosa.]
    A pint of tho berries to a quart of spirits, in the dose  of a
    wine glassful, is a  speed)' cure fur the gout in  the stomach.
    The root boded in  wine or water relieves (he strangury, and
    pains of the stomach ; and a poultice of the fresh root is a fine
    application  to wounds and ulcers.
      Polatoe flies.  [Lytla Viltafa.]  Thev feed on  the vine
  4 of tho sweet potato:-, and  also on (hat of the Irish potatoe ;
   make their apoearance the last of July or first of August; are
   equal to tho Spanish flics in raising a blister, and may be eol-
   Jecta.d in groat abundance, morning and evening, by shaking
   them  from the leaves into a vcs-l cf hot wafer,  and  afler-
•   wards drying thern in the sun.   They are (lien (o  he pulver-
   ized,  and mixed as directed,  (see blistering plaster, disp.)
   Every family ought (o collect them.
     Peach twee.  [Amydalus Porsirn.]  Both the leaves and
   flowers are excellent phvsic,  arid can easily  be  gathered  by
   every family.  A teaspoonful of a  strong infusion  with boil-
   ing water, sweetened, and taken every  hour or two, will
   operate mildly on the bowels, without griping as. senna does.
                              13 
  196          AMERICAN  BOTANIC REMEDIES.

  Grown persons may take from a gill to half a pint once in 2
  or 3 hours.
/   Milkweed.  [Vincetoxicum.]   It is sometimes called silk-  '
/  weed, and is  well known.  A decoction of the root, in doses
  of a gill or more 3  or 4  times a  day,  has  the  reputation of
  being an effectual cure for the dropsy, and beneficial in gravel,  >
l  scrofula, and  rheumatism.
    Indigo  weed, or ivild  indigo.   [Sophora Tinctoria.]
  Grows abunbantly two or three feet high on the road sides,
  and in  the woods.   It is  perennial,  (lasting the year round,)
  the leaves are small, ternate, (three leaflets on  a  leafstalk,)
  inversely heart shaped, and sessile,  (sitting on the stem.)  In
  July and August the flowers  appear on its branches,  butter-
  fly-shaped, and yellow or golden colored ;  the vessels con-
  taining the seed are inflated ;  the  root  has a dark  brown
  color, woody, rough, and irregular ;  the  taste is similar to
  that of ipecac, unpleasant and nauseous.  A pale blue color
  is made from the  leaves  and branches as a substitute for in-
  digo.   A  decoction of the root in large closes,  is a powerful
  emetic and cathartic, in small doses, as a wine glassful, it is
  laxative,  cooling,  ancl good in fevers.   Made into an oint-
  ment,  it is applied to sore nipples and  ulcers of the breast.
     Hops.   [Humulus Lupulus.]   Contain an  aromatic, an
  astringent,  a tonic, and a  narcotic principle,   The  first
  three are  obtained by infusion (steeping)  in  water.  The
  second and third arc also obtained by decoction, (boiling,) out
  the first, or aromatic principle,  is then destroyed or driven off,
  and the fourth or narcotic principle, is not obtained by stcep-
' ing or boiling.  As alcohol or spirits  extracts all its virtues
  together,  it is better, perhaps, either to take tho  tincture, from
  a half to  a .whole drachm once or twice  a day, or tho  sub-
  stance itself, in  powder, in  tho  dose of three  grains.   It is
  given  as  an  anodyne  in rheumatism and  gout;  a pillow oi
  hops is u.-'.'d to procure  sleep ; and an ointment of the same
   ha ■ relieved  the violont  pain of cancer when all other appli-
   cations were ineffectual.
      Crane's bill.    [Geranium Maculatum.]   This valuable
   plant grows  five or six  inches high in meadows and  woods;
   has long  slender ;:talks, with seven long narrow leaves at a
  joint.   The  root is generally crooked and  knotted, blackish
   on the outsido and reddish; has-a rough  taste, with an aro- 
             AMERICAN  BOTANIC  REMEDIES.          197

matic flavor.   It is a powerful styptic, and has even stopped
the bleeding from a wounded artery, by pounding the roots in
a little cold water, and applying it to the part.   It is also an
Indian remedy for  the lues venerea, and  boiled in milk, it is
excellent in the cholera morbus.
   Red chickweed, or red pimpernel.  [Annagallis Phenicea.]
Is cultivated in many gardens, and grows spontaneously near
Baltimore.  In the dose of table spoonful of the pulverized
leaves, it is celebrated for the cure of hydrophobia.
   Ergot, smut rye, or spurred rye.   [Secale Cornutum.]
In lingering labors, when there is no impediment but weak-
ness, ergot may be given to bring on effectual  pains in the
dose of five, ten, or fifteen grains of the powdered spur.   Or,
boil  gently thirty  grains of the powder  in  half a  paint of
water, and give one third of it every 20 minutes until pains
commence, but no  longer.   Flooding has been checked, and
suppression of the courses has also been removed, by the use
of it.
   Charcoal of wood.  [Carbo  Ligni.]  In fifteen or sixteen
cases of obstinate constipation  of  the bowels, Dr. Daniel of
Georgia, administered 3 table  spoonfuls of pulverized char-
coal  every half hour, and in  about 17 hours the bowels were
freely evacuated.  It is  slow, but  sure.  A table  spoonful
two or three times a day will remove costiveness.  In smaller
doses, it corrects a bad breath, and prevents putrid belchings
of wind from the stomach.   After pulverizing, it ought to be
heated red hot in a covered vessel,  until  there is no flame on
it, then cool gradually, take  off the upper layer of the pow-
der, and bottle up the remainder for use.  This makes it-pure,
but if may be used without the ceremony of burning it over.
It is  a powerful antiseptic, and is used as a poultice to stop
mortification.
   American Hellebore.  [Veratium Viride.]   Has the same
effect as the white hellebore (veratum  album,) that comes
from Germany and Switzerland.   It frequently grows with
skunk cabbage, is  sometimes called itch-weed, and is well
known.
   The whole plant is poisonous.   Half  a  grain of the pul-
verized bark of the root (increasing daily as the patient can
bear it) is beneficial in  mania, epilepsy, king's evil,  &c. and
a decoction of the  root, or an ointment of the  same, is used
                           13* 
    198          AMERICAN BOTANIC  REMEDIES.

    externally to  cure the itch, and other cutaneous affections--
I   The decoction is made  by  boiling  a handful of the  bruised
I   root in a quart of water to a pint and a half, and then strained.
 )  Use it as a wash twice  a  day.  The ointment is made by
    simmering the root slowly in hog's  lard.  Mr. J.  Moor's
    preparation of hellebore cures the gout and rheumatism al-
    most infallibly ;  and there  is no doubt but (hat the American
    hellebore may do the same, (see tincture_ii£^e]lebof,e.
      Peppermint.   [Mentha Piperita.]  Is a diffusible stimu-
    lant, good in  flatulent colics, hysterics,  and vomiting.  In
    cholera.morbus, peppermint steeped in spirits,  and the herb
    applied hot to the stomach  and bowels, will slop the  puking,
    so that physic can be kept on the stomach.
      Straivberry.   [Fragaria.]  Strawberries are cooling and
    laxative, beneficial  in the scurvy, and a certain  prevention of
    the gravel.  Young strawberry leaves, dried  in the shade,
    make excellent tea.
      Whitepoppy.  [Papaver Somniferum.]  The milky juice-
    that exudes from the poppy, by drying away in the sun,  be-
    comes  pure opium.  A decoction  of the plant, especially of
    the capsules or heads, boiled down  to an extract, has  the pro-
    perties of opium, though it is not so powerful.   The opium
    used in America  is  imported from Turkey where the  poppies
    are cultivated for that purpose, as they might be in this coun-
    try.   A strong decoction of dried poppy  heads, adding half
    the quantity of sugar or honey, and  then simmered slowly for
    an hour, is an excellent anodyne for coughs, and breast com-
    plaints, in the dose of a table spoonful.
      Sweet fern.   [Polypodium, or Comptonia Arplenifolia.
    Grows in woods  and stony places, flowers from June to Oc-
    tober, and is well known.  It is a powerful medicine to expel
    the  tape worm, in the dose of a pint a day of the decoction,
    or one or two teaspoonfuls  of the powder : to be followed on
    the fifth day  by  a  dose  of some kind of physic.  It is also
    good in chronic  rheumatism, and a  wash of it is considered
    beneficial in  St.  Anthony's fire, and  other  cutaneous effec-
    tions.
      Meadow saffron.  [Colchicum  Autumnale.]  Is of a pur-
    gative, emetie", diuretic, and  anodyne nature.   The  bulb of
    the root, and  the seeds,are  used in gout, rheumatism,  asthma,
    and dropsy.   Colcnicum root is distinguished by a small pro- 
              AMERICAN  BOTANIC  REMEDIES.          199

jection like a nail  or peg  on one  side at  the bottom  part of
the bulb, which makes it  totally different from every other
bulbous  root.   In July it is to  be dug, sliced, and  dried for
use, (see wine of colchicum.)
   Prickly Ash, (Aralia Spinosa.)  A  watery infusion  of
the inner bark is a good sudorific (sweating) medicine, and
removes the  pains of  chronic rheumatism.   The berries,
which are sometimes called Indian cloves,  are used  in the
form of  tincture (with spirits) for the tooth-ache.
   Witch Hazel, (Hamamelis  Virginiana.)  The habits  of
this well known shrub are very singular ;  it blossoms in the
fall after its leaves are destroyed by frost, and the fruit, thus
exposed to the severity of winter,  is not injured at all, and
does not ripen until autumn the next year, when it flowers
again; and then, ripe fruit and blossoms will  be found on
the same tree.  The twigs and flowers in decoction  are es-
teemed a valuable tonic, the virtues of which are similar to
those of good  wine.  Externally applied, the bark is seda-
tive, (soothing,) and discutient,  (scattering or driying.)   A
poultice  of the inner bark is good for inflamed eyes, and the
Indians make use  of it to remove painful  tumors,  and other
external inflammations.
   In collecting and preserving  vegetables, it is proper to ob-
serve, that roots should  be gathered  before the sap rises  in
the spring, or after it returns, in autumn, and taken from the
driest  land where  they grow.   In washing, let  them remain
in the water as short a time as possible, or, dry them with-
out washing,  and  e lean with  a brush afterwards.   Those
which lose their virtue by drying,  may be kept in dry sand.
Leaves and flowers should he gathered in dry weather, after
the dew  is off, and while they are in full vigor.   They nun
be tied in small bundles  and hung  up  to dry, but the  better
way  is to dry  them quicker, by the gentle heat of a stove, or
fire-place.   Seeds and fruits are generally to  be gathered
when ripe ; sprouts,  before the buds  open ; stalks,  in au-
tumn, and barks, in spring and autumn. 
 
•
PART III.
               DISPENSATORY.

                    A TABLE OF

        WEIGHTS  AND MEASURES,

               USED BY APOTHECARIES.

  The pound (lb.).......contains twelve ounces,   oz.
  The ounce...................eight drachms,   dr.
  The drachm..................three scruples,   scr.
  The scruple..................twenty grains,   gr.
  Bv  the above signs, the several weights are denoted ;
  And the  following are the measures or signs  by which
apothecaries express the quantity of liquids; employing the
measures which are derived from the wine gallon.
  The gallon contains........eight pints,           pts.
  The pint.................sixteen fliuicl ounces,   f. oz.
  The fluid ounce............eight fluid drachms,   f. dr.
  The fluid drachm...........sixty minims, (drops) m.
  The medicines marked thus * will be described in the dis-
pensatory of American botanic remedies.

        CLASSIFICATION  OF MEDICINES.
                 GENERAL  STIMULANTS.
Diffusible.          Narcotics.         Tonics.
Stimulants.         Antispasmejdics.    Astringents.

                  LOCAL  STIMULANTS.
Emetics.           Diuretics.          Sialogogues.
Cathartics.          Diaphoretics.       Errhines.
Emmenagogues.     Expectorants.      Epispastics.

                 CHEMICAL REMEDIES.
Escharotics.   Antacids.     Lithontriptics. Rcfrigerents.

                MECHANICAL  REMEDIES.
Diluents.      Demulcents.  Emmollients.   Anthelmintics. 
202
NARCOTICS.
   These appear to be all the classes necessary ; therefore all
 the medicines in use belong properly to one of these classes ;
 and if there are any substances that it will be of particular to
 consider together, they will be spoken of separate from any
 classical arrangement.


                     NARCOTICS.

   Narcotics are substances which diminish  the actions and
 powers of the system without occasioning any sensible evac-
 uation.  In a moderate dose they increase the force and fre-
 quency of the pulse,  promotes  secretions, give  vigor to the
 body, inducing hilarity or intoxication.   After sometime, the
 pulse not only  returns to the natural standard, but becomes
 more slow and soft, pain and inordinate motion  are alleviated;
 there is general langor, the mind is placid and inactive, and
 this state soon terminates in sleep, which is generally followed
 by temporary debility, sickness, tremors and  anxiety.   And
 when a large dose  has been given, the consequences are deli-
 rium, paralysis} convulsions, coma and death.
  Alcohol, spirit of wine, is obtained by submitting vinous or
 fermented liquor to distilation.  It is  colorless and  lighter
 than water, its  specific gravity  to that  of  water is as 800 to
 1000.   Alcohol is seldom used in  its pure state, except as
 an application to burns,  local inflammations  not  connected
 with increased action, it is applied to  relieve pains, to bleed-
 ing wounds  to  restrain  hemorrhage, and diluted  (spiritpus
 liquors)  it is employed as a general stimulant; ancl its se-
condary effects is that of a narcotic, producing  beastlv stupor,
 universal tremors, and if long continued, though diluted, pro-
duce hypochondriasis, dyspepsia,  inflammation of  the  liver,
gout, red face, &c. palsy and death.

         ETHER.   (SULPIH/RIC ETHER.)

  This is obtained by exposing a mixture of  sulphuric acid
alcohol in equal weights to a heat sufficient to produce ebul-
lition: the ether is the product of the action of the acid on
the alcohol: it distils over, and is purified by a second distil-
lation.   Sulphuric ether  is  colorless, highly odorous and
pungent, much  lighter than alcohol, and soon  evaporates  in
common temperatures.   Its  operation  is in  every  respect 
NARCOTICS.
203
  similar to that of alcohol but quicker and more powerful, but
  less permanent.   It produces cold on evaporation, and  is an
  excellent application to burns, relieves pains when externally
  applied; it is given in typhus fever as  a  stimulant,  and in
  other forms of fever to relieve nausea, and from its narcotic
  properties  it is valuable in all cases attended with spasmodic
  action ; it  frequently affords sudden relief  in asthma and dif-
  ficult  breathing.   Its usual  dose  is a tea-spoonful,  (one
  drachm.)


  CAMPHOR.  C AMPHORA.  LAURUS CAMPHOR A.

    This is  not the produce of one vegetable exclusively but
  is contained in many plants of the aromatic kind, as pepper-
  mint, thyme, sago, &c.   For commerce it  is obtained from a
  species of the laurel, a native of Japan and Sumatra.   The
  camphor is obtained from every part of the tree by cutting it
  fine  ancl putting it into a still, and  after boiling forty-eight
  hours the gum is formed upon the straw with which the head
  of the still  was filled ; this is impure and undergoes another
  sublimation with an addition of one twentieth part ejuick-lime,
  and forms in  concavo, convex cakes upon  the surface of the
  head of the still; the  vessels  used  in this  last  process  are
  generally glass.   It is stimulant and narcotic, its usual dose
  is from five to ten grains, but it should be given in small and
  frequently  repeated do-es.   When given in too  large dose,
  opium is the antidote.   Camphor is  externally applied as an
 anodyne  in rheumatism, muscular  pains and as  a disentient
 in bruis"-.   It is dissolved by alcohol, or common spirits, by
 vinegar, and by (he  oils, ancl may  be diffused in water bv
 triturating it with sugar, mucilage,  or almonds.   With  opi-
 um, it is a useful local application in tooth-acho.


   WHITE POPPY.  PAPAVER SOMMFERUM.

   The white poppy is a native- of the warmer regions of the
 world, it also  grows in  colder climates without any dimuni-
 tion of its poweis.  The .large capsule affords a milky juice,
 which by exposure to the sun cone rets, of a brown color, ancl
 is called opium.  Tho juice of the leaves and  stalks is nar-
 cotic, but inferior in  strength to opium.   It may be obtained
from the poppy of this country of full narcotic power.  Opi- 
204
NARCOTICS.
urn is usually imported from Syria and India.   It is obtained
by making a longitudinal incision  in the capsule, (when  it
has nearly attained maturity,) taking care that it does not
penetrate into the cavity of the capsule.   This is done in the
evening, the milky juice exudes, and adheres to the sides of
the incision, this is collected  in the morning, and permitted
to dry in the sun.   The  best is the Turkey opium, this comes
in flat rounded masses, soft and tenacious,  of a  dark reddish
brown color, having a strong odor, and  a bitter acrid taste.
If hard, brittle, and of a  gray  color,  with black spots and no
resinous lustre it is of inferior  quality.
   Opium is partly dissolved in water, more in  alcohol, and
completely in a mixture of alcohol and water,  (diluted alco-
hol, common ardent  spirits.)   Excessive  heat impairs the
narcotic powers of opium.   Vinegar impairs its active qual-
ities although it dissolves  it.   The process by which mor-
phine  was first obtained was  by digesting  eight ounces of
opium by gentle heat in successive portions of distilled water,
until it become entirely colorless ; on evaporating this liquid,
an extract is  obtained, which  is turbid if diffused in water,
but transparent  by heat  or  an additional  quantity of water.
Upon adding a large quantity of ammonia, a greyish substance
is precipitated  in  form of irregular  transparent crystals.
These crystals are  morphine,  but not perfectly pure, when
pure it is perfectly colorless.   To render it perfectly pure it
must be repeatedly washed with alcohol  until it becomes
nearly colorless, it then  forms in pure crystalline prisms.
   The effects of opium on the  system are a powerful narcotic.
In small dose, one grain, it acts as a stimulus and raises the
action of the pulse, and some degree of exhilaration, and even
intoxication and delirium, if the dose has been large enough,
this is of short duration and is usually followed by a degree
of drowsiness, lassitude, pain if present is less felt, and this
diminished, sensibility terminates in sleep ;  this is followed
in those unaccustomed to  its  use, by slight nausea or  head-
ache, costiveness ancl impaired digestion.
   From a  large dose> these effects are produced  in  a more
marked degree, and if the  dose has been very largo  the con-
sequences are delirium,  stupor, flushing of the countenance,
slow and stertorous breathing, anoppressd pulse*, convulsions
and death.  The indications which opium are capable of ful-
filing are, supporting the actions of the system, allaying pain
and irritation, relieving spasmodic action, inducing sleep, and 
NARCOTICS.
205
checking morbidly increased evacuations.   It is given  both
internally and applied  externally with equal sucevss in re-
lieving pain, and spasmodic action ;  and perhaps the place of
opium could not  be supplied  by any  other medicine in the
world.  By the long continued use  of opium the digestive
organs, and whole system is impaired.
  The dose  is very various, according to the intention  with
which it is administered ; but  the usual dose is from one to
three grains, but to relieve pain it often requires to be given
in larger doses, repeated  every hour.   Twenty-five  drops of
the tincture are equal to a grain.


HENBANE.   HYOSCIAMUS.  NIGER.   (BLACK.)

  The whole of this plant is narcotic.   The leaves only are
employed, they afford a juice which is inspissated (dried away)
and kept in the shops  for sale.   The leaves  also yield  their
active matter to diluted alcohol: the active principle of this
plant is said to be of an alkaline nature.  This operates more
like opium than any other medicine.   In a dose that proves
fatal its operation soon terminates in coma with remarkable
dilatation of the pupil, enlargement of the sight of  the eye,
distortion of the countenance,  a  weak tremulous pulse, and
eruption  of petechia?.   Its effects like  those of other vegeta-
ble pou-ms, are counteracted by  an emetic and drinking vin-
egar, bleeding, &c.  Its dose is from one to two grains of the
inspissated juice, and  requires to be gradually increased;  a
dose of the: tincture of black henbane  is from twenty-five to
forty drops.
Deadly Nightshade.           Atropa  Belladonna.*
Conium Maculatum.          Cicuta,  Hemlock.*
Thorn Apple.                Datura  Strammonium.*
  Leopards bane.  Arnica Montana.   In  large  doses  they
produce vomiting and purging;  the flowers are used in sub-
stance in dose of five grains for amaurosis, paralysis, convul-
sive disorders,  gout and  rheumatism.   The root has  been
used as a substitute for peruvian bark.

          VOMICA  NUT.   MX  VOMICA.

  The kernel of the fruit is  powerfully narcotic,  it is in-
tensely bitter, has little or no smell, and  is so hard  that  it 
206
ANTISPASMODICS.
 cannot be reduced to powder by beating, but has to be filed
 down.   This is  frequently given  as a  poison to  dogs and
 other animals.   It occasions anxiety, paralysis of the hinder
 parts,  convulsions and death.   This has not been much used.
 the dose is five grains twice a day in palsy, mania, epilepsy.
 hysterics, dysentary and intermittent fever.


                 ANTISPASMODICS.

   The difference say  the doctors, in kind of action  between
 narcotics and antispasmodics is not easy to define.   The ef-
 fects they produce are similar,  they  are capable of  exciting
 the actions of the system, ancl  are often equally powerful in
 allaying pain.  All the difference probably is that anarcotic
 produces sleep and allays pain  and irritability at the  same
 time.  Whereas, a medicine may allay  pain and spasmodic
 action, and not produce sleep, then it would  be antispasmodic.
 Musk.                      Assafoetida.
 Castor.                     Galbanum.
 Empyreumatic.  Animal Oil.  Sagapenum.
 Succinic Oil.               Valerian.
 Bittumen Petroleum.       Crocus Sativus. (Saffron.)
 Carbonas Ammonia.         Cajuput Oil.

            Narcotics used as  Antispasmodic.
                Ether, Camphor, Opium.

             Tonics used as Antispasmodic.

 Cuprum, Zincum,  Hvdrargvrus, Cinchona, Musk,  Moshus
                      Moschiferus.

  The animal which  affords musk is a native of the east of
 Asia.   The musk is a peculiar  secretion deposited in a small
 sack, near the navel of the male.   It is generally brought in
its natural receptacle,  covered  externally with  coarse  hair,
the musk is  in grains, unctuous, black, and  of a strong smell
and bitter taste.   Water by infusion extracts some of its ac-
tive principle ; but alcohol is  its proper menstrum.
  This is administered in many  spasmodic diseases, especially
hysteric, epilepsy,  and singultus, ancl in  diseases of debility
also.   It is given in  typhus to  relieve siibsultus tendinum, 
ANTISPASMODIC.                 207
  &c, in other diseases to allay any spasmodic action, vomit-
  ing, &c. x.c.
    It is upon the whole a medicine I think of doubtful efficacy,
  and from its high price  is not  likely to  be much  used,   lis
  dose is from 6 to 20 grains, repeated every five hours.


               CASTOR.  CASTOREUM.

    The beaver,  a native of the north of Europe,  Asia and-
 America, is the animal that affords castor.  It is contained in
 membraneous  cells  near the extremity  of the rectum.  It is
 that contained within the bag and not (he membrane  itself
 that is  used.   The best is brought from Russia.   The active
 matter  is dissolved by proof spirit, and partly by  water, the
 tincture with alcohol is best, it  is used in the  cases for whiclv
 musk is, in  dose of from 10 to 29 grains, or from one to two
 urachms of the tincture.  It is a remedy of  but little or no
 power,  I  have  frequently given it in double the above  quanti-
 ties without any sensible effect.


          E&PYREUMATIC  ANIMAL OIL.

   The fresh rfioos of animals when exposed  to heat in c'.nse
 vessels  affird  this oil.   This is at first  a  (hick consistence,
 black color  and foeted smell, but by repeated  distil hit ion he-
 comes thinner,  and transparent, but remains Acted.  Its dose
 10 or 15 drops.  It is of no consequence, but to make show
 and keep  u]) mystery the doctors u.se it.   This the ignorant
 suppose to ho fat taken from (he  dead.
   Bitumenpru'ra'eaiu exists as a natural production,  it is cf
 no medical consequence.
   Assifctida is a gum-resin, obtained by making.incisions
 into the roots of the plant, the juice being inspissated (dried)
 by the exposure to the sun.   It is in small masses, yellow on
 (he surface,  white within, of an extremely Acted  smell, and
 bitter, subaend  tasto.
   This  is used as antispasmodic in all spasmodic diseases; in
amenorrhoea, hysferia, dy.-pepsia, &c.  Its dose is  from  5 (o
 10 grains of the gum, which  must be  repeated, it is likewise
given in form of clyster diffused in water.   It is given also a« 
208
TONICS.
a remedy against worms, and some times used as a plaster.
All its virtues are yielded to spirits.
  Gdlbanum is a gum the product of a plant, which is a na-
tive of Syria and the Cape of Good Hope.  Alcohol dissolves
it.  Its  d»se is 10 grains, but it is most commonly used ex-
ternally  as a discutient to tumors, or to promote suppuration.
   Valerian.  The root is the part of this plant used in me-
dicine.  It consists of slender fibres twisted and attached to
one head of a light brown color, having a strong and un-
pleasant smell, and a warm bitter taste.   Its active matter is
dissolved equally by water and alcohol.  Its dose is from one
scruple  to one drachm, but it is generally used in infusion : it
is not of much consequence.
  Cajuput  oil.   This is  obtained by distillation  from the
leaves and fruit, the odor, and use, is similar to that of cam-
phor.   It is of a green yellowish color.   The dose is from 3
to 4 drops.       •
  Emetics are the most effectual of all antispasmodics.


                       TONICS.

  By tonics are  understood those substances, the operation of
which is to give  strength to the system.
  The principal medicines used as tonics are,

              From the Mineral kingdom.
Argentum,                  Bismuthum,
Hydrargyrum,               Barytes,
Ferrum,                    Calx,
Zincum,                    Acidum Nitricum,
Arsenicum,                 Hyper-Oxymurias Potassa,
Cuprum.'

             From the  Vegetable kingdom.
Cinclrona,                  Laurus Cinnramonum,
Arisiolochia,                Laurus Cassia,
Contrayerva,                Canella Alba,
Croton  Eleutheria,           Myristica Mascliata,
Cuspam  Febrifuga,          Carophyllus,
Swietenia,                  Capsicum Annuum, 
TONICS.                     209
Columbo,                   Piper Nigrum,
Quassia,                    Mvrtus Pimenta,
Gentiana,                   Zingiber,
Anthemis Nibilis,*          Zedoaria,
Citrus Aarantium,           Rcpcns,
Citrus Meclica,              Carum Carui,
Acorus Calamus,*           Coriandrum Sativum,
Mentha Piperita,*           Anisum.

                SILVER  ARGENTUM.
   Silver is readily oxidated and dissolved by those acids that
yield oxygen readily, particularly nitric acid.   When dis-
solved in nitric acid, and evaporated the residuum is the ni-
trate (tunor caustic)  of silver.   This is too powerful a tonic
to be much used as such, its dose is a quarter of a grain, and
it must always be dissolved m distilled water.
   Mercury or Quicksilver.   Hydrargyrum.   Argentum
Vivum.   This has been placed  generally under the head of
sialogogues, but salivation is a secondary effect and not essen-
tial in any disease.   Its tonic power is its primary operation,
it is the most general  stimulent in  use pervading every part
of the system.  This metal remains fluid at all natural tem-
peratures, with the exception of the intense cold that  some-
times prevails in very northern regions.  It is about 13 times
heavier to. n water, and boils at a  temperature of 600°, and
suder.s oxidation with agitated  at natural temperature.
   Mercury is variously  prepared for medical purpose.  I shall
only mention those in common use.  Corrosive sublimate of
mercury is prepared by taking of jure quicksilver two pounds  ;
sulphuric  acid  thirty ounces ;  dried muriate  of soda four
pounds:  boil tiie mercury with the acid  in a glass vessel un-
til the sulphate is left dry.  Pub (his when cold with the soda
in  no earthen ware mortar, then sublime it  in a glass vessel,
increasing the heat gradually, disc  1-16 of a grain.
   Calomel.  Suhmuriate of mercury : take of corrosive sub-
limal; (oxymuriate) of mercury one pound: purified mer-
curv, nine ounces, rub th am together until the globuls  disap-
pear then sublime three times, taking n out and reducing it
to  powder every time—dose 10 to 20 giains.
  To purify mercury tak^ . iv pounds, iron filings one pound,
rub thcin together and distill the mercury in an iron retort.
  red  Vrccipitalz.  Nitric   oxide  of  mercury.   Take 
210                     TONICS.
 three pounds of purified mercury, nitric acid one pound and a
 half, distilled water one quart, boil in a glass vessel until the
 mercury is dissolved.   Then evaporate the solution drv,wilh
 a gentle heat, grind this to powder, then put it  into a glass
 cucurbit and cover it, place  the vessel intoa sand bath, heat
 it gradually until the matter is converted into red scales.
    White precipitate  of mercury.   Take of oxymuriate of
 mercury half a pound, muriate of ammonia four ounces, solu-
 tion of subcarbonale of potass half a pint, distilled w*ter four
 pints.  Dissolve the muriate of  ammonia  in  the. distilled
 water, then put in tho oxymuriate of mercury, then acid  the
 solution of  the subcarbonato  of potash, wash the precipitate
 powder until it becomes tasteless then dry it.
   There are many more preparations of mercury similarly
 prepared, used principally  as external application in form of
 ointments and lotions.  The corrosive sublimate, and calomel
 are the only preparations much used internally.  The corro-
 sive, or oxymuriate of mercury should seldom  be given,'and
 never in larger elosc than one sixteenth of a grain.  Calomel
 or  the mild muriate is safe in dose of 10 to 20 grains ; but
 what ever  form  of mercury is used,  it should  be  combine.}
 with  or followed  by other evacuants.
   The ointments &c. will  be spoken of in their proper place.


                    IRON FEERUM.

   Numerous preparations of this metal are medicinally em-
 ployed.  The filings are given in dose of from a scruple (e) a
 drachm.  Their activity depends on the oxidation they suffer
 in (he stomach.
   Rust of iron.   Subcnrbonate, ferri  rubigo, is the metal
 rusled or oxidated, by  the  action of air and wafer, it is more
 active than  the saline preparations, and not so irritating, the
 dose is from 5 to 20 grains, besides its use as an invaluable
 tonic, it has been used as a remedy  in cancerous ulceration,
 administered in its usual dose, ancl sprinkled  on the sore.
   Tincture of iron.   Muriate of iron employed under the
 form of tincture is prepared by dissolving the oxde of iron,
 half a pound, muriatic acid three pounds, alcohol three pints,
 mix the acid and  iron in a glass vessel, and shake it  occasion-
ally  during three days, when it  has settled,  pour  off the 
TONICS.
211
 the liquor, evaporate slowly to one pint, and  to this  liquor
 add the alcohol, dose 10 to 15 drops.
   Copperas.  Sulphate of iron.   Green vitriol.   It is ob-
 tained in various wavs; it is obtained pure by dissolving iron
 in sulphuric acid (oil of vitriol,) and water, and evaporating
 the solution: dose from  one to five grains.
   Tartrate of potash and iron is prepared by rubbing one part
 of iron filings, and two  parts of supertartrate of potash, expo-
 sing the mixture to the  action of the air, and again subjecting
 it to the action of wrater to render the oxidation, and combina-
 tion more complete.   This is  a mild preparation and may be
 given as a tonic to the extent of 10 or 15 grains as a dose.
   Wine of iron.   Digest  iron filings in white wine, dose one
 drachm.
  The  mineral  Chalybeate  waters  is another form  under
 which iron  is frequently and  successfully given.  The iron
 is generally dissolved in them by  carbonic acid.   There are
 other preparations used, but these  are the principal,  and per-
 haps not surpassed by any  other known.
   Zinc.   Zincum.  This in  its metalic state exerts  no ac-
 tion on the system :  it  is therefore employed under various
 forms  of  preparation, which in general possesse a tonic and
 astringent power.
   White oxide of zinc is  obtained by the combustion of the
 metal and has been employed  as an antispasmodic, and tonic
 in the dose  oi live grains, but  it is  not very active.
  Tutia is an impure oxide of zinc.   Calamine stone (lapis
 calaminaris) is a carbonate of zinc ;  it is dusted on  slight
excoriations, an 1 it forms the basis of common cerate.
   Wk'u  vitriol.  Sulphate of zm-, is made by cutting into
 small  pieces three ounces of zinc, pour upon it five ounces of
sulphuric  acid, twenty  of water,  when  the effervescence is
finished, digest tho mixture on hot  sand, strain through  paper,
 and evaporate.   This is chiefly found native'; it operates al-
 most instantly as an emetic in dose of 10 to 15 grains, ancl is
 perfectly sa'i-.  Employed  internally in close  of two  grains it
 is a tonie;, it is externally used as a styptic, to stop bleeding,
 and as an astringent in any case where they are required.
  Copper.   Cuprum.   This  is exnunely noxious to life.
Its most important compound is,
                           14 
212
VEGETABLE TONICS.
   Blue vitriol.   Sulphate of copper is generally obtained by
evaporating mineral waters that contain  it, or by calcining
the sulphuret of copper, and exposing it in a humid state  to
the air.
   It is chiefly used as a styptic, and escharotic, internally it
operates in very small doses as a powerful emetic: it is too
dangerous for internal use.
   o
   Verdigris.  Subacetatc  of copper is made by covering
copper plates with the husksof grapes after the juice is pressed
out.   The crust which  forms is scraped off and beat into
masses and dried, it is of a bright green color.   This is prin-
cipally used immediate as an escharotic.
   Arsenic.  This  is found sometimes native, or in a slate of
oxide, but more generally combined with sulphur  forming the
ores named Orpiment and Realgar.
   This  is of the most virulent of the mineral poisons.  Yet it
has been frequently employed in medicine, and has afforded
all the powers of the most quick and effectual tonics.  It has
been used in agues, hydrophobia, painful nervous affection?:,
lepra, &c.  (see liquor arsenicalis.)   The powder  used exter-
nally as an escharotic in scirrhus and cancer.
   Lime.   Calx.   This is a well known production, and ike
principal use made  of it medicinally, u the preparation called
lime water ;  which see.
   Aqua (water) Fortis (strong.)  Nitric acid.   This is
obtained by  decomposing  nitrate of potash by sulphuric acid,
assisted by  heat.  The sulphuric acid combines with the pot-
ash, and the acid of the nitre distils over in the state of nitrous
acid,  this exposed to gentle heat is converted into nitric acid,
that is, it becomes a little stronger.
   This  is an invaluable tonic, and in almost all cases where
salivation by  mercury is necessary, this  will be found  to su-
persodo its use: dose, from 10 to 20 drops in swoeter.ed water,
every two hours gradually increased.


                VEGETABLE TONICS.

   Peruvian bark.  Cinchona.  This is the bark of the tree
 dried in the sun.   The pale bark is bitter and slightly astrin-
 gent, its flavor is aromatic with a degree of mustiness.   The 
VEGETABLE TONICS.
213
 red bark  is of the circhona, oblongifolia, which  grows on
 the Andes.  Its taste and smell are similar to  those  of the
 pale, but rather stronger.
   The yellow is more bitter, with scarcely any astringency.
 Tho active principle is partly extracted by cold  walor, much
 more by hot water and entirely by alcohol.
   Tins is used in all cases in which tonics are required, ami
 especially in the intermissions of all fevers.   Its dose is half
 a drachm, or more if it will sit easy on the stomach.   If it
 loos not agree with the stomach, a smaller dose must be tried
 or  some aromatic, or a  few drops of laudanum may be com-
 bined  with it.
   The powder is the most effectual, it may  be given in spirits,
 wine, milk, water, &c.  The decoction is the next best form,
 and mav be given  in ck>se of a large table spoonful once an
 hour.   The cold infusion  is too weak, the spiritous tincture
 onnot be used to advantage on  account of the spirits, but ir,
 occasionally used as a stomachic.  A decoction of the bark is
 also used for injections, and applied as fermentations to ulcere
 >t the  sprinkled on the surface.
   Quinine.   Sulphate  ofqtiUnkne.  This is obtained in th -
 following manner, boil  repeatedly the yellow bark in w t, r
 acidulated with sulphuric acid.   The coloring matter in sepa-
 rated by adding quick lime to the liquor, wash the precipitate
 m cold water, and submit  this to the action of alcohol 3C de-
 crees,  then evaporate, and boil the residue in diluted sulphu-
 ric acid ;  on cooling, crystals of pure sulphate of quinine arc
 obtained.
   This is the active principal of the bark: dose from 1  to 5
 grains.   It is a sure cure for ague, and perfectly safe  if pre-
ceded by an emetic.
   Cusporia febrifuga,  is  a  bark imported  from the West
 Indies,  ft has been recommended as a substitute for  peruvian
 jark, but it is now  principally used to counteract  putre fac-
tion, and in diarrhea, ane! chronic dysentery, its dose is from
 ton to twenty grains of the powder.
   Columbo.  This is the root of (ho plant, generally b-orgl,'
from Ceylon, Africa, and Mozambique.   It is  cut  in round
 'bin pieces, of a light yellow color, has a faint aromatic smell,
 and a bitter taste.  It yields its  bitterness to water: proof
 spirit is  its proper menstruum.   This is  a valuable tonic,   ,
 especially  in affections  of the  stomach.   It dose  is half a
                           14* 
214
TONICS.
 drachm of the powder once in three hours.   It may be usetl
 in tincture or infusion, or combined with other bitters.
  Gentian.  The root is a tonic bitter, and is used in almost all
 stomachic  bitters.   Its  dose in  powder  is half a drachm.
 Chamomile* is a good tonic, given generally with other bit-
 ters.
V The following and  many others are employed principally
 oh account of their aromatic qualities, to  cover the  taste  of
Other medicines and as a grateful stimulant to the stomach.
   Orange.  Citrus Aurantium.  The leaves, flowers, dis-
 tilled water and essential oil of the  flowers,  the juice and
 outer rind of the fruit, ancl the unripe fruit, are used.
   The juice is  a grateful acid liquor.   The outer rind  of the
 fruit is a pleasant aromatic bitter.   The juice is of considera-
 ble use in  febrile or  inflammatory distempers,  for allaying.
 heat and quenching thirst, and is  likewise of use  in scurvv.
 The rind is an excellent stomachic, it is given infused with
 other tonics : dose, at discretion.
   Lemon.   Citrus Medico.   The juice and outer rind  of
 the fruit, and the volatile oil of the outer rind, are used. The
.peel is similar to that of orange.
   Cinnamon,  is the interior bark of the branches of the tree.
 Tliat which is  thin and rolled up (convoluted) is strongest.
 It is  one of the most pleasant of the aromatics.  It is employed
 with other  tonics, and alone in the form of watery infusion
 as a moderate cordial.
   Cassia is similar to cinnamon, but not so good a tonic, it
 breaks short, and is much thicker than cinnamon.
   White  Canclla.  Canclla Alba.   This is the inner bark
of tho branches of the tree.   It is  in quills or flat pieces, of a
 light yellowish  gray color.   Its aromatic quality is extract-
 ed by alcohol ancl partly by water.   It is used  with  othei
 tonics, and to cover the  taste of aloes.
   Nutmegs and Mace.  Myristica Moschata.   Nutmeg is
 used in medicine as an aromaiic.   It is the seed or kernel oi
 the fruit; mace is the inner covering or that which immedi-
 ately surrounds the nutmeg, it  is used for the same purpose
 as the. nutmeg.

   Cloves arc the production of a tree, native in the Molucca 
ASTRINGENTS.
2M
islands, but cultivated in other parts of India.   They are the
most stimulating of the aromatics, and are used in combina-
tion with other bitters.  The oil is used with the same  inten-
tion.
   The Peppers have all a similar operation,  differing only
in strength.  Cayenne pepper is the fruit of a plant.   Black
pepper is the unripe fruit of the plant  dried in the sun.  Cu-
bebs are the dried fruit of  the  tree;  (hey  are all powerful
stimulants ; ancl the latter is given in  close of three drachms
in the  course of the day, for gonorrhea.
   Ginger.   Zingiber, is  the  root of the  plant, ancl is  a
grateful aromatic.
   Cardamom.  Amomun Cardamomum.  The seeds arc;
a pleasant aromatic and are frequently combined with  bitters
and purgatives to obviate flatulence.
   Anise;  the seeds have an  aromatic odor ancl a  warm
and sweet taste.   They are used chiefly in flatulency ;  either
the seeds in infusion, or a few drops of the  oil  on sugar may
be taken.
                   ASTRINGENTS.

   Astringents are such substances as applied to the animal
 body produce contraction and condensation in the soft solids,
 and thereby increase their density and cohesion.  (They cor-
 rugate, or pucker the part to which they are applied.)
   Oil of Vitriol. Sulphuric Acid. It is formed by reducing
 sulphur to powder and mixing it with one  eighth of its weight
 of nitre.   The mixture is laid on a hollow stone in a large'
 lead vessel containing  a quantity of water, it must  be kept
closed, only occasionally opened to admit the air.  This must
 be set on the fire, and the sulphur mixture added a little at a
 time.  When the wa(er has  become  quite mum-,  remove  it
and evaporate in leaden vessels, and afterwards boil in a glass
 retort.
  This acid is employed as a refrigerant, but principally as
 an astringent.  It is 'used to  check'the fleiw of blood, 'and
 profuse sweating, &c.   It must always be  diluted  with wa-
ter, its dose is from  ten to twenty drops.  I( is also ah excel-
lent tonic. 
216                  ASTRINGENTS.
   Alum.  This is compound of argillaceous earth  and sul-
phuric acid, the acid being in excess, it also contains a little
potash.   It is found  native, exuding from slate rocks.   Its
dose is from five to ten grains, and given to check dysentery.
profuse bleeding,  &c. &c.
   Quick lime.   Calx Viva.  The water is employed as an
astringent, in  dose of one or two pints in the course of the
day.
   Iron is employed as an astringent; the sulphate  and mu-
riate of iron are the preparations used;  dose from  three  to
ten grains.
   Zinc is used as an astringent, the sulphate has been em-
ployed in dysentery,  and immediate discharges of blood with
good success,  in  dose of from  one to  three grains.   Two
grains dissolved in an ounce of water makes the common as-
tringent lotion, which is good to apply to all  bleeding surfa-
ces, and as an injection  in gonorrhea, and gleet.  The  ace-
tate  is also used  as  an astringent, prepared by  adding a
solution of sugar of lead to a solution of sulphate of zinc, a
decomposition takes place, and a sulphate of lead is thrown
to the bottom, and the  acetate  of  zinc remains dissolved.
This is used for the same purposes  as a solution of the sul-
phate.
   Blue Vitriol.   Sulphate of copper is used in dose of one
to three grains, or in solution aloner or with alum, in the same
manner as last mentioned.
   Lead.   Plumbum.  The effects of lead and its  prepara-
tions on the body are, emaciation, violent colics, paralysis,
tremors, and contractions of the limbs.  The poisoning from
lead is generally  accidental,  cither  from liquors being im-
pregnated with it, or being kept in vessels lined with it, or to
which lead has been criminally  added to correct  its aciditv.
Or among manufacturers who work among lead, as painters
and plumbers.
   Litharge is a subcarbonate of lead.   Ceruse is the white
oxide of lead.   These will be  directed  in  the formation of
plasters.
   Sugar of Lead.   Acetate of lead.   Saccharum  Saturni,
is a most valuable astringent, and  may  be given in dose of
one to three grains, but there must not  be more than two or 
EMETICS.
217
three doses given before it must be physiced. off, to prevent
its injuring the system.   It is used  in  solution as an astrin-
gent.
   It is supposed that astringency in vegetables resides in, or
is what is called tannin.
   Galls are found on the branches of a species of the oak,
their production is occasioned by the bark being pierced  by
an insect.   The juice exudes and  hardens.   The best galls
are heavy, knotted, and of a blue color.   They are almost
entirely soluble in water.  The infusion reddens the vegeta-
ble colors from the action of the garlic acid.   These are sel-
dom internally administered. Jn decoction, and the powder
in ointments, they are used as the other  astringents externally.
   Rose Water, is an infusion of the leaves; acidulated, it is
a pleasant astringent gargle.
   Catechu.   This is an extract prepared from the  wood.
It is of a yellow or brown color, has  a bitter and astringent
taste ; its qualities vary very much.   It is an astringent  in
common use; it yields nearly all of  its virtues to water ;
dose, ten to twenty grains, frequently  repeated.
   Kino.   The history  of this  is obscure, it  is however a
vegetable  production ; it is of a reddish  browm color, with a
resinous lustre, is  very brittle,  feels  gritty and  has a  bitter
taste.   Put a tea-spoonful  into a  tea-cupful of warm water
and  give a tea-spoonful every thirty minutes,  in  flowing and
other bleeding from internal parts.
   Red Saunders.   Santalum  llubrum.  The wood is of a
deep reel color.  This is now used only to give color to tinc-
tures.
   Cranes bill.  Geranium  Maculalum.   Is a powerful and
safe astringent.


                       EMETICS.

  Emetics are those medicines which  excite vomiting,  in-
dependent of any  effect arising from  llie  mere quantity of
matter introduced into the stomach, and which have this effect
in every individual and in all states of the stomach. The stom-
ach remains for some time undisturbed after  an emetic lias
been given.
      -                                         it 
218
EMETICS.
   The first symptoms are  uneasy sensation, nausea, pale-
countenance, the pulse is feeble,  quick, and irregular, and
there is a feeling of cold; but when the vomiting commen-
ces the face is flushed and a  perspiration generally covers the
whole body.   The vomiting generally recurs twice or thrice
and then subsides, the sickness  going off gradually.   In the
operation, the natural motion of the stomach is inverted, and
the surrounding  parts contract and the contents of the stom-
ach are discharged upward.
   Antimony.   This is a metal which  under various forms
of preparation furnishes some of the most powerful emetics.
cathartics, diaphoretics and  expectorants.
   Tartar Emetic.   Antimonium Tartarizatum.  Tartras
Antimonii et Potass®.   This is obtained by taking the pow-
dered metal one  part, sulphuric acid two parts, boil them dry
in an open vessel, stirring the mixture with an iron spatula,
wash it with water and  dry the residuum.   Add to this an
equal weight of  supertartrate of potash dissolved in  water,
boil in an iron vessel, strain, and set by tocrystalize.   This
is an active emetic, and mav be given in doses of fronrjfive to
ten grains  dissolved  in half a pint  warm water.   It  is also
used in small doses as a sudorific.
   Wine of antimony is a solution of emetic tartar and  potash
in white  wine, or rather  this is a substitute for the wine for-
merly used ; dose, tea-spoonful once in  twenty minutes until
it operates.   These are the most valuable preparations of this
mineral.
   To give the tartar emetic it  will be  a safe way to  put a
quarter of a tea-spoonful  into a half pint of warm water, then
give a wine-glassful  every  fifteen minutes until it begins to
operate.
   Sulphate of Zinc has  already been mentioned as a power-
ful emetic : dose live to  ten grains  in half pint warm wTater.
   Sulphate of Copper, operates as an emetic almost as soon
as it reaches the stomach, and without producing much nau-
sea.  Its operation is apt to be violent:  dose  from  one to
two grains.
   Ammonia, operates as an emetic in  close of a tea-spoonful
or two being given in a cup of cold water.
   Hydro Sulphuret of Ammonia. This is obtained by pas-
sing a current of sulphuretted hydrogen  gas through a solution 
cathartics.
219
of ammonia in water.  This is  given in small doses in dia-
betes; in large dose, it is a powerful emetic: dose five to fif-
teen drops.   To have an emetic effect, half a tea-spoonful in
water.
  Ipecac.   Collicoeea Ipecacuanha.  The  root is  the part
of the plant used,  its active matter is completely extracted
bv proof spirit.  Emeten is the active principle and operates
as an emetic  in close of half a grain.   Ipecac in the pulveri-
zed  root is the mildest and most effectual emetic in use : dose
from one to three tea-spoonfuls in a tea-cupful of hot water.
It is frequently given to nauseate the stomach, to  abate the
circulation, and to promote perspiration in  dose  of three or
four grains once in two hours.   The infusion in white wine-
acts as an emetic in dose of an  ounce.  This is the best ve-
getable  medicine in the materia medica.
  Squills.   Scilla Maritima.   This is the root of a plant or
onion, which grows on the sandy shores of Spain and Italy.
Its active matter is extracted bv water, alcohol, and vinegar:
vinegar is best.   The vinegar of sepiills operates as  an emet-
ic in dose of two or three drachms; but this is generally used
for purposes which are afterwards to be noticed.
   Camomile.   Anthemis Nobilis, a strong infusion taken in
large quantities excites  vomiting, and is generally  taken to
assist the operation of other pukes.
   Lobelia Inflata.  Indian Tobacco,* is a valuable emetic.
            CATHARTICS  OR PHYSICS.

   Cathartics are those medicines which increase or quick-
en theevacautions from the intestines, bv stimulating them so
as to increase the natural peristaltic motion of the bowels.
   Mild Cathartics or Laxatives.   Manna, is usually ob-
tained from a species of the ash tree,  it has a sweet taste and
is soluble in water and alcohol.  The dose is  from one U>
two ounces, but it is so mild that it is generally mixed with
senna or some other physic.
   Purging Cassia.   Cassia Fistula.  The pulp of the fruit
is employed mostly with senna.
   Tamarind.  The  pulp, seeds, and  small fibres mixed
with sugar to preserve it, are the tamarinds of the shop ;  dose 
2ao
purgatives.
from one to two ounces.   It is also refrigerant in form of in-
fusion.
   Castor Oil Plant.   Ricinus Communis.  PalmaChristi.*
the oil of the seeds is an invaluable laxative : dose one ounce.
   Sulphur, is found in nature nearly pure ; dose two or three
drachms.
   Magnesia.  Carbonas Magnesia.  This is an earth, and
when found is combined  with acid.  It is a mild  laxative,
and an absorbent.
                    PURGATIVES.

  Senna.  The dried leaves are of a yellowish green color,
have a faint smell, and a bitter taste.   It is usually given in
the  form of the watery  infusion, two drachms being infused
in six ounces of hot water, a little ginger or a few coriander
seeds should be added.
  Rhubarb.   Rheum Palmatum.*  Dose as a cathartic, one
scruple.   It is used as  a tonic with other bitters in the dose
of a few grains.   It is in  this respect particularly useful  in
female weakness.
  Jalap.  Convolvus Jalap.  The root is  the part of  the
plant used.  This is an active purgative ; proof spirits  ex-
tracts or dissolves its active matter ; it is employed alone or
combined with other physics.  Its medium dose  is half a
drachm.
  Black Hellebore.   The root of this  plant  is a powerful
cathartic in a dose of two or three grains.  It is seldom used.
  Wild  Cucumber.   Momordica  Elatcrium.   Elaterium is
the  dried fecula of the juice of the fruit.  It is a violent  ca-
thartic in the dose of from one to three  grains.  It is given
as a hydragogue  in dropsy.   Its operation may be checked
by a solution of tartaric acid, or by taking vinegar.
  Aloes.  Aloes Soeotorine and  Barbadocs.   Aloes is a
concrete resinous juice.  There  are several  varieties  met
with in the shops.  The Soeotorine, brought from the  Afri-
can Island of Socotora.   The taste of all the aloes is intensely
bitter ;  its active matter is dissolved by diluted alcohol and
by boiling water ; dose from five to fifteen grains.   It is par-
ticularly useful in hypo (hypochondriasis) and jaundice.   It 
PURGATIVES.
221
 is often combined with other medicines, which will bo after-
 wards spoken of.
   Scammony,  is obtained  by  collecting the milky juice of
 tho roots and permitting it  to  inspisate in the sun and  air.
 It is in small fragments, of a blackish gray color, having lit-
 tle smell,  and a bitter subacrid  taste.  It is what is named
 gum resin, and  is dissolved by proof spirits  : dose from five
 to ten grains.   It is usually combined with the super-tartrate
 of potash, aloes, and other cathartics.
   Gamboge.   This gum resin is obtained by exudation from
 incisions in the  branches and trunk of the tree, and is after-
 Lorwards dried away (inspisated.)  This is a very active ca-
 thartic, liable in large doses to  puke :  dose as cathartic, from
 two to six grains.   It is generally combined with other ca-
 thartics,  is  used to expel the tape-worm,  and  as a hydra-
 gogue cathartic  in dropsy.
   Calomel.   Sub-murias Hydrargyri.   Nearly all the  pre-
 parations of  mercury have  a purgative power.   Calomel is
 that most commonly  used.   Its dose is from  ten  to twenty-
 five grains for an adult; it is more speedy and certain  when
 combined  with  jalap, or rhubarb,  or castor oil.  Calomel
 promotes the operation of other cathartics without increasing
 irritation, or rendering the operation violent.   It operates
 directly on the liver,  and on the glandular system generally,
 producing  salivation.
  Epsom Salts.  Sulphate of Magnesia.  This is generally
 (obtained from the water remaining after the crystalization of
 common salt from sea water: dose from one;   to two ounces,
 dissolved in warm water.
   Glauber Salts.   Sulphate of Soda.   This is one of the
 saline purgatives in common use  ; dose one  ounce dissolved
 in water.
  Cream of Tartar.  Super-tartrate of Potash.   This  salt
 is deposited from wine, in the progress of the slow fermenta-
tion which it suffers when kept.   This is a pleasant and mild
purgative : dose, half an ounce.   If makes a grateful bever-
age, dissolved in water, but i(  must not be long  continued,
 as its acid will injure the stomach.
  Rochelle Salt.  This is one of the saline cathartics : dose
 one ounce dissolved in warm water. 
222
EMMENAGOGUES.
   Phosphate of Soda : dose one ounce dissolved in warm
water, or soup without salt.
   Muriate of Soda.  Common salt.
   Venice Turpentine.   This is employed as  a cathartic in
form of enema,  (injection,) mixed with yolk of egg and wa-
ter :  quantity, half an ounce.
   Mandrake*
   Croton Oil.   This is obtained from the seeds of the plant
called croton tiglium.   The  oil now used is of a pale reddish-
brown color, with a faint odor,  and possessing a hot acrid
taste.  This is a powerful cathartic.   Observe these direc-
tions and it will prove as safe as butternut pills ; do riot give
it  unless a brisk operation is desired, or other physics have
been given without  effect:  dose,  make one drop  into a pill
with crumb  of bread, or drop it on loaf sugar,  give this,  and
repeat every ten minutes until it begins to operate.  After it
is  taken wash the mouth with milk, or some mucilage.


                 EMMENAGOGUES,

   Are those medicines which are capable of promoting the
menstrual discharge.
   Assafetida.  All the foeted gums have been supposed to
have the power of operating peculiarly on the uterine system.
Assafetida is given  in dose of ten or fifteen grains daily, con-
tinued for some time.   Galvanum may  be  given  in  similar
dose ;  these are given  more especially  when hysterics are
present.
   Iron.   The  carbonate of  iron is given in dose  of 5 to 10
grains. The muriated tincture, 10 to 15 drops thrice a day in
water, or some aromatic tea.
   The chalybeate waters are the best forms for administering
iron.
   Calomel is used  in dose of one grain a day, alono, or com-
bined with other emmenogogues.
   Aloes, in pills or iincture is used as an emmenagogue, as
also combined with  rhubarb, calomel, iron, &c.
   Rhubarb is used, generally combined with aloes, either in
fijls or tincture.  The tincture is taken in dose 6f a drachm
flight and morning, 
DIURETICS.
22^
    Mustard seed is taken in dose of half a table spoonful once
 a day, not bruised.  Rue made into tea is sometimes used, as
 is also  Tansy.
    Savin and oil of savin, are recommended.   They have
 been supposed capable of producing abortion, but they have
 but little oi one etfect on the system.
    Seneka Snake root, is an efficacious emmenagogue.  The
 best mode  of giving it is to simmer an ounce of the bruised
 root in a pint  of wafer, until the quantity is  reduced one
 third, a wine glass full may be taken thrice a day.
    Smut Rye.   Ergot.  Secale Carnutum.  This is recom-
 mended as an emmenogogue, but it  dose not possess the
 power of increasing the discharge  from the womb.


                      DIURETICS.

  Br diuretics are meant those medicines which increase the
 discharge of urine.
   Potash.  Potassa.   This alkali either pure or in the state
 of subcarbocate•, operates as a  diuretic, and if continued lorn*
 it renders the urine alkaline.   When employed its dose is 2S
 or 30 grains dissolved  in  a large quantity of water.   The
 proportions of potash are used a great deal in dropsy.
   Sal Diureticus. Acetate of Potash: this in dropsy is given
 in dose  of half a drachm dissolved in water, being repeated
 every two hours until it operates.
   Cream of Tarhr.  As a diuretic, half an ounce dissolved
 in  half a pint of  water, may be  taken in the course of the:
 day.

   Nitre.   Nitrate of Potash.   This is a refrigerant and diu-
 retic, and is used  in dropsies, and all eases of difficulty of
 urine : dose: from 5 to 20 grains thrice a day, with  the "free
 use of mucilaginous drinks.
   Spirit of Nitre, is nitric acid and alcohol in  certain pro-
 portions:  dose, a  teaspoonful in col 1 water, once in  an hour
 or1 two.   It  is refrigerant and diuretic.
   Squill.    A  a eliuretic, squill is  always given  iu substance
ei'Ker the  recent or tho dried root.   The close is from two t) 
224                    DIURETICS.
five grains, gradually increased.  If the dose is too large it
will excite  nausea.  The squill will  be more  effectual if
«tven a with small dose of calomel, or the mercurial pill.  It
may be taken  morning and evning.
   Fox glove.   Digitalis Pupurea.*  This is more powerful
than most any other diuretic in evacuating the water in dropsy.
In dropsy of the chest it is the most certain means of evacu-
ating the water that we possess.  It frequently requires to be
exhibited several days before it promotes the flow of urine ;
dose of the powdered leaves, one grain twice a day ;  of the in-
fusion, half an ounce; of the tincture, 10 to 15 drops.  It must
not be continued but for a few days at a time. If taken in too
large doses,  give warm spiritous cordials, ether, ammonia, or
vinegar.
   Tobacco.   Infuse in a pint of water,an ounce of  tho crie-i
leaves; give ten drops and gradually increase to a  hundred, ii
it does not have effect before.
   Broom-corn tops, boiled in water, and the water  drank,
proves a free diuretic.
   Juniper Berries, given in infusion prove  diuretic.   It is
this diuretic property retained  in spirits that renders Gin so
valuable a diuretic in dropsy.
   Balsam of Copaiba.  This  is a resinous juice procured by
exudation from incisions evade  in (he trunk of the tree.  It
increases the urinary discharge, in dose of 20 or thirty drops.
In larger doses it is liable to produce inflammation of the uri-
nary organs.   It may be made into pills with crumb of bread,
or dropped on sugar.   Canadian Balsam is  used f >r the
same purpose ami in the same  quantity.
   Oil of Turecciine is givon  as the  above in dose of five io
ten drops.
   Spariish Fly.   Cantharid.es.  This insect is found adhe-
ring to the leaves of certain plants in Spain and Italy.  Thev
are killed by exposing thorn to the vapor of vinegar, and then
dried in the sun.   Their  acrid matter is  extracted both
by water  and  alcohol.   They  inflame  and  blister  the skin.
They are more commonly used internally in  cases of inabili-
ty to retain  the urine, closo of the tincture, fifteen to twenty
drops, (see  tincture.)
   Win'ergreen in  infusion,  or tea, is  powerfully  diuretic. 
DIAPHORETICS.
225
and should always be drank to assist other diuretics. Pump-
kin seed tea is also an active diuretic.
                    DIAPHORETICS.

    Diaphoretics  are those medicines which increase the
 natural exhalation by the skin ;  that is, they produce perspi-
 ration, or sweating.
    Subcarbonate of Ammonia.  This is used either in the
 solid or liquid (aqua ammonia) form,close ten to fifteen grains
 of the salt, half a drachm, or nearly half a teaspoonful of the
 water.
    Sal Ammoniac.  Muriate of Ammonia.   The ammonia
 which is its base, is obtained by distillation from the urine, or
 hones of aminals, or by maceration from the soot of coal.   It
 is applied  externally as a discutient to indolent tumors.   Its
 dose as a diaphoretic is one drachm, dissolved in cold water.
 All of the preparations of ammonia are said to be diaphoretic,
 but they are very doubtful remedies.
    Calomel,  in  small  doses,  or combined  with  opium, or
 guaiac, has a diaphoretic power.
  Antimony. A sympathy seems to exist between the stomach
 and surface of the body,  and thence the employment of nau-
 seating medicinos to promote sweat.  Fur this purpose the
 different preparations of antimony are  given:  tartar emetic,
 one to three grains an hour, or aj solution in dose of a tea
 sooonful once an hour until it produces perspiration.  They
 should he assisted  by drinking freely of warn; teas.  They
 may be combined with opium, ipee;ac, &c.
   Opiueii, in a largo doso assisted  by  warm drinks, excites
 profuse sweating:  it  is not safe  given  alone, combined
 with ipecac  and camphor, or with antimony, or in the form
 of Dover's powders (which see) it is safe  and  effectual.
   Camphor, dose from five to fifteen grains.  It will be more
 effectual if combinod with opium, nitre, calomel, &c.
   Gj/'iicu.n.   The wood  of the tree, and  a  resinous sul>-
 stance obtained  by incisions in the  trunk are the  parts used.
 The wood is steeped in water  and drank, a quart  in (lie
 course of the day.  Tho gum may be taken in  dose of 6 to 10
grams.  These are  also  used  to assist the operation of mer- 
22G
expectorants.
cury in the veneffcal complaint.  The gum is frequently given
in tincture : dose, a teaspoonful in some kind of tea, or muc-
liage.
   Sassafras, Sage, Boneset, and White  Root, in strong tea
or decoction are used as diaphoretics, and especially to assist
the operation of other sudorifics.


                  EXPECTORANTS.

   Expectorants are  those medicines  which facilitate or
promote the rejection of mucous, spittle, or other fluids from
the throat, the lungs and trachea.
   Antimony is in  use as an expectorant, tartarized antimony
is the preparation most commnoly used :  dose 1 to 2 grains
once in an hour or two, this gives relief in hooping cough,
asthsma,  and catarrh.   It is  frequently combined  with other
expectorants.
   Ipecacuaaha, is similar to antimony in its operation ; dose
twTo to four grains.  It is  also combined with  antimony,.
squills, ancl other expectorants.
   Foxglove,  is employed with advantage in difficulty of
breathing,'asthma, catarrh, &c.  It diminishes the accumu-
lation of fluid, and  assists in removing that which is accumu-
lated.  The dose must be small, one grain of the dried leaves,
or twenty drops of the tincture, or half an ounce of the infusion
twicea day,  will be sufficient.
   Tobacco is well known as an expectorant, and  having be-
come an article of diet, it is difficult  to tell the  exact dose,
say two or throe grains  of the watery extract ; it is similar
to foxglove and nearly as poisonous.
   Squill.  This is one  of the principal expectorants in colds,
and all affections attended with cough or dmieult breathing.
It is used under the form of vinegar, or syrup of squills ; doso
of the vinegar, a teaspoonful ; of the  syrup two teaspoonfuls
every two hours.
    Garlic is  similar to squills  in its effects, and may be pre-
pared and given in the same way, or it may be given in sub-
stance, in powder or pills, half a teaspoonful.
   Senvka, or Rattlesnake root.   This root is in articulated
shoots, of grayish  color; its taste is bitter and pungent.  Its 
SIALAGOGUES.
221
active matter is extracted principally by water, ancl complete-
ly by alcohol.  This is a valuable expectorant, but must not
be used if there is high inflammation; dose, in substance from
ten to twenty grains, but it is  generally used in decoction,
boil half an ounce in a pint of water and give a tablespoonful
every third hour.
   Ammoniac Gum.   This is the gum of the tree ; dose ten
to twenty  grains.  It is  generally combined with squill and
liquorice.
   Myrrh is the produce of Arabia, ancl  is the gum-resin of a
jdant.   It  is in  small pieces of a reddish-brown color, and
warm bitter taste. Alcohol dissolves it. Its close is from 10 to
20 grains,  but it is too stimulating to be  used much as an ex-
pectorant.
   Peruvian Balsam.   Dose from five to fifteen grains.   Its
tincture is  applied to foul  ulcers.
   Balsam of Tolu, is employed in tincture or syrup princi-
i ally on account of its flavor.
   Benzoin and Benzoic acid, are of no value as medicines.
   Balsam of Gilead is seldom obtained pure  in  this coun-
try,  and therefore but little used.  It is similar to the other
terpentines.


                   SIALAGOGUES.

   Scalagogces are those medicines which increase the spit-
tle or salivary discharge.   This may  be affected by mastica-
tion  (chewing)  of substances ;  or by the taking of certain
medicines,  that excite tho action of the vesseds which secrete
the sal^a.   They are of but  precious litlle  importance,
but the Doctors use  them, and we must mention them.
  Mercury.  The  various preparations of mercury produce
salivation ;  calomel is most commonly used.  Salivation ef-
fected by mercury is attended with pain-,  heat in  the  mouth,
with swelling and ulceration of  the gums, the swelling  fre-
quently extending  over   the throat  and faoe.   These  are
checked, by gentle purgatives, opium, blisters to the throat,
free exposure to e:ool air  and frequently  washing the mouth
with a solution of borax, alum, or sage tea sweetened with
hone}'.
                           15 
 vZO        EPISPASTICS  AND  RUBEFACIENTS.

   Pellitory.   The root  is used, its taste is hot and acrid.
 It yields its active principle to alcohol: it excites profuse sali-
 vation.   It is used in tooth ache and  sometimes chewed in
 palsy of the muscles  of the throat.
   Horse Radish* excites when chewed, a sense of heat,
 and a discharge of saliva.
   Mazereon, when the bark is chewed, excites a salivary
discharge.   This is said to have effected cures in palsy of the
muscles of the throat.
   Ginger, Pepper,  Mint, Tobacco, Lobelia, fyc,  are sia-
lagogue, and frequently employed in tooth ache.
       ERRHINES,  OR STERNUTATORIES.

   These are substances which Occasion a discharge from tlie
nostrils.   Any substance in  fine powder snuffed up the nos-
trils has this effect, and it is more or less in proportion to the
acrid or stimulating nature of the substance used.  They are
used  in  colds,  headache, inflammation   of the eye, and
pain in the ear.   They are of but little, if any  consequence
The principal errhine in use is tobacco, and snuff.  The others
are generally combined in what is  called Cephalic  snu*'
(which see.)
BLISTERS.   EPISPASTICS and  RUBEFACIENTS.

  Epispastics  and Rubefacients differ only in the degree of
their operation,  they are therefore properly of one class. Th*
term epispastic  in the dispensatory  is applicable to blisters
only, but it is sometimes applied to any  artificial  issue,  se-
tons, &c.
  By the increased action they excite, they act as stimulants, '
and also as evacuants in consequence of the fluid  witch thev
cause to be poured out.

  Spanish Fly.  Cantharidcs.  Lytta Vesicatoria.  This
is the substance now almost exclusively employed  to raise a
blister, as it is certain in its o| t ration, and not" liable to Pro-
duce deej) ulceration.   The can iharieles being finely powder-
ed aremixedw ith lard and wax. or rosin, so as to form a plas-
ter of a proper  consistence,  which  is applied  to  the  part, 
ESCHAROTICS.                  £99
 spread on firm cloth, thin leather, or  brown paper of a con-
 venient size, and kept on until a  complete blister is raised,
 which generally takes from  six to twelve Injurs.   To hurry
 the operation in apoplexy, ancl typhoid symptoms, it is some-
 times combined with mustard, pilch  burgundy, turpentine,
 Sec  Spanish  Flies are apt to absorbed and produce dilfi-
 culty of urine,  where we have reason to apprehend this, diu-
 retics must be given while the blister is drawing.
   After a blister has  been raised,  it my be kept running by
 irritating, dressing, or issue  may be formed  by orange peas,
 er beans,  fixed  to the  inflamed surface  by means of a slip  of
 adhesive plaster.
   Potatoe Fly.*
   Mustard.   Sinapis.   The  flour of mustard seed mixed
 with vinegar and bread, or flour, makes what is named Sina-
 pism.  This aets as a powerful rubefacient, and where a blis-
 ter cannot be used it is a goad substitute.
   Garlic, Onion,  Horse radish.  Bruised and  applied  t»
 the feet and hands are excellent rubefacients.
   Euphorbia and Burgundy Pitch.  (Pix Burgundica.)
 iVlixed one part of euphorbia to ten of the pitch, or twelve
 parts of litharge plaster, forms an  excellent rubefacient.
   Ammonia, dissolved  in water (Aqua Ammonia or Harts-
horn) applied to the skin is rubefacient, the common  furai  is
 volatile linment, which  see.
   Aqua For'tis. Nitric  Acid.  This is  a powerful rubefacient,
 it is used  in complaints where  a counter excitement is quick-
 ly required.  The acid should be diluted with hut water,
 with this the surface is  to be rubbed,  and as  soon  as pain  is
prodiiceel wash the part immediately with a  solution of salt  of
 tartar previously prepared.


                   ESCHAROTICS.

   Are substances which eat away, destroy, erode, or dissolve
 the animal solids.  They are employed principally  to remove
 •xcrcsconces, to make an ulcer, or to  change an ulcer into a
 simple sore.
   The aerids though powerfully escharotic, are seldom used,
on account of their fluid  state.
                           15* 
230                    ANTACIDS.
  Alum, when dried or burnt, is used in fmjfc powder to check
the growth of proud flesh,  (fungous,) and rubbed with a lit-
tle  sugar, is used to take specks off' from the eye.
  Potash, in its solid  state is powerfully eschaiotic, this i*
called Causticum Commune Acerrimum.  This is made in-
to paste and applied to form an ulcer, or to open a tumor.  It
is attended with severe pain and burning heat,  after  it is re-
moved, apply a poultice.   Potash  is the best  application to
the  bite of a mad dog, after incision.
  Lunar Caustic.   This is  the caustic in common  use.  It
is made by dissolving silver in nitric acid, and evaporating the
solution to dryness,  melting the mass, by gentle heat and run-
ning it into moulds.   A little of it may be dissolved in  water
and applied, or the point of the pencil  wet, touched to the
part.  It is used for the same purpose as potash.
  Blue  Vitriol.   Sulphate  of Copper.  This  is  a   mild
escharotic.  Its solution in  water is frequently  used  to wash
the  surface of sores, to change their condition.   It is also
used in ointment, to rmove specks on the eye, ancl the powder,.
or a pencil of it, is applied to destroy fungous that arises on
the  lids of the  eyes in inflammation of that organ. •  *
  Verdigrise.  This is generally made into ointment with*
lard and applied to sores.
  Corrosive Sublimate.   This in water,  in the proportion
of one. grain to the gill, is  applied  to ulcers,   especially  to*
venerial ulcers, to itch, and other cutaneous eruptions.
  Red Precipitate, and White Arsenic, are well known as
caustics.   The leaves of savin in  powdor,  or  made  into  an
ointment,  are frequently applied to old ulcers.
                     ANTACIDS.

  These are the remedies which neutralize or destroy acid-
ity (sourness) in the stomach, by combining with the acid.
  Potash.   The method of obtaining this is well  known..
Dissolve an ounce of potash  in ten pounds of water,  in cases
of sour stomach, take a gill or two occasionally.
  Soda.  This is obtained from a vegetable 6<owing on tho
sea shore, it is prepared in the same manner  i s potash, and 
LITHONTRIPTICS.
231
is similar in medicinal properties; five or ten grains, or dis-
solve in water and take as directed in potash.
  Ammonia.  The solution of ammonia in water, (aqua am-
monia, spirits of hartshorn,) is some times used as an antacid
to relieve pain in tho stomach: dose  twenty or  thirty drops
in a spoonful of water.
  Lime.   Calx.   Under the form of lime water, (aqua cal-
cis) is used as an antacid, in dose of four or five ounces.   It
is the best antacid for sour  stomach in use.
  White  Chalk.  Creta Alba.  This is a carbonate of lime
found abundantly in  nature.  When  levigated and washed it
is called prepared chalk : dose from one to four tea-spoonfuls
mixed with any thing convenient.   Crabs Claivs, are merely
chalk, with a little gelatin  : dose, same as chalk.
  Magne iiy is used as an antacid, it is given in the dose of a
scruple, or half a table-spoonful.   Magnesia mixes  with the
acid in the stomach  and forms a purging salts,  it must not
therefore be used where a diarrhea is wished to be checked.
       ,          LITHONTRIPTICS.

   Are the medicines supposed to have the power of dissolv-
 mg urinary calculi,  (gravel or stone in the bladder.)
   Modern chemistry has shown that stones  in the bladder
 are of different qualities, and therefore what will dissolve one
 will not dissolve another.  One is found to consist of a pecul-
 iar acid, in this instance alkalies are the proper remedies, and
 are sometimes effectual; and again they are founel to consist
 of different chemical constitutions, which are easily dissolved
 by the acids.   Now, it is asserted that the alkalies, and acids
 are given internally  in such quantities that they impregnate
 the urine not only  so much  as to dissolve; the stone in the
 bladder, but as when applied, to destroy a stone that has been
 taken from the bladder.   Considering the importance of this
 subject, knowing the extreme suffering of the person laboring
 under this complaint, and (he danger attending an operation,
 I hope I shall hazard nothing  in suggesting the propriety of
 injecting through a hollow bougie into the bladder, a solution
 of the medicine ;  being at first weak, and increased in strength
as the coats of the bladder will  bear it.   It must be obvious
to every one that to take medicines internally, with a view of 
232                 REFRIGERENTS.
 reaching the bladder in sufficient quantity to effect the above,
 is attended, to say the best of it, with but distant hope.   This
 experience proves.
   Potash in solution is given in a dose of fifteen or twenty
 drops morning and evening, in water, increased gradually as
 the stomach can bear it, drinking freely of mucilages.  The
 other preparations of potash are used in their common doses.
   Soda, and its various preparations are also used as lithon-
 triptics.
   Lime water,  in the quantity of a quart or two  may  be
 used daily.
   Magnesia, in its pure state, in dose of a scruple, or half a
 drachm may be given twice a day.
   Acids are employed when the above means fail.  Almost
 all the acids have been employed.  Much relief has been ob-
 tained from the vegetable  acids, particularly the citric acid  ;
 and the muriatic acid has  been used with advantage, and the
 other acids also : dose from twenty  to  forty  drops  thrice a
 day, given in a cup of water:


          REFRIGERENTS.   (TO  COOL.)

   Refrigerents are  such medicines as diminish the force
 of the circulation and reduce the heat of the body  without
 occassioning any diminution of sensibility or nervous energy.
 They are used by the doctors  in fevers &c.  but they are of
 but little use.
   All Acids are refrigerants, but the vegetable acids are the
 most so.  The citric is the most employed ; they form the
juice of the orange and lemon.  Lemonjuice  may be consid-
ered as the most valuable, and indeed the principal refrigerant.
 In the hot stage  of fever  lemon juice largely diluted  with
water and sweetened with sugar is a grateful beverage.  Or
 the fruit sliced may be added to any diluent.   A preparation
which is much used, named the saline mixture, is prepared
bv adding soda or carbonate of potash and sugar to the juice,
but the potash neutralizes  the acid and renders it less effica-
cious.
   The juice of the orange, tamarinds in water, the various
sorrels, and vinegar are used for the same  purposes, and
may be drank» occasionally through the day. 
demulcents.                   233
   Cream of Tartar, in solution ;  a large quantity in water
sweetened with  sugar, and flavored with the rind of lemon,
is a pleasant cooling beverage.   Its only disadvantage is its
being liable to prove purgative.
  Nitre.   Salt Petre.  (Salts of Nitre.)   Nitrate of Pot-
ash.   This is used by physicians in all cases where there is
fever: dose, from five to fifteen grains every two hours.
  Spirits of Nitre, is also given as a refrigerant, but brandy
is just as proper as spirits of nitre, and that I presume no per-
son of common sense would give in fever.
  Borax, in solution, is  used as a cooling garffle for  the
mouth.                                    &  6
                       DILUENTS,

    Are substances which increase the fluidity of the blood ■
 all watery liquors are diluents.   They are given in inflam-
 matory diseases, to quench thirst, dilute the blood and urine,
 and to promote the fluid secretions.


                    DEMULCENTS,

    Are used to prevent acrid matter from acting upon  the
 sensible parts of the body.                      °
    Gum Arabic, is in common use as a demulcent; it is al-
 lowed to dissolve slowly in the mouth, or a solution in water
 is drank occasionally in catarrh, difficulty of urine,  &c.
   Tragacanth, this gum has virtues similar to gum Arabic ;
 and is good m making pills, troches, &c.
   Flaxseed, by infusion yields a  large quantity of mucilage:
 this is in common  use as a demulcent.
   Marsh Mallow, yields a mucilage from every part, by in-
 fusion or decoction, as does  also the common mallow.
   Liquorice, both the root and the inspissated juice, (liquor-
 ice ball,)  are used as demulcents in infusion alone, or com-
 bined with other mucilages.
   Sarsaparilla, is always  given in decoction or infusion,
frequently combined with other demulcents.
  Sago, is obtained from the pith of the plant, it dissolves 
234
EMMOLIENTS.
 when boiled in milk or water, and with  a little sugar forms
 an excellent demulcent in diarrhea, and with sugar and wine,
 a nutritious article of diet.
   Arrow, the root freed from its outer skin is grated down
 in water, which is poured off several times, allowing the fe-
 cula to remain.   It is white and in fine grains.   It is used in
 diarrhea and dysentery, and as diet for the sick.
   Starch, is the fecula'of wheat.  This is used as a demul-
 cent, and an article of diet for those who are recovering from
 sickness; and starch is frequently used in injections.
   Iceland Liverwort.   Lichen  Islandicus.   This is mace-
 rated for a while in cold water, then  a  decoction  is made,
 which is both demulcent and nutritious.
   Horn,  (Hartshorn  Shavings,)  is freed  from  its outer cov-
 ering, and the white part is rasped down for use.  By decoc-
 tion in water they afford an excellent jelly, to which must be
 added a little  sugar and wine.   It is used as those  before
 named.
   Isinglass, is obtained from several kinds of fish,  w^hich is
 boiled and used as the above.
   Olive Oil.   This is obtained from the'fruit by expression.
 It is employed as a demulcent,  in catarrh and some other
 complaints, and to sheath the stomach against acrid substan-
 ces that have been  taken into the stomach : dose,  as large
 quantities as the stomach can bear.  It is also applied as an
 emmolient externally, and is sometimes given  as an anthel-
 mintic.
   Spermaceti, is a fatty matter obtained  from  the head of a
 species of the whale.   It is  a  mild demulcent,  and is given
 in catarrh and gonorrhea, mixed with sugar, or  diffused in
 water by the medium of the white of an egg.   It is used in
 ointments also.
   Wax.   Cera.   Bee's Wax.  To  make it white, melt the
 wax and cast into thin cakes, expose  them to light, air, and
clamp or wet, and it will  become white.  It is used  princi-
pally  in ointments and plasters to give them consistence.
                 EMMOLL1ENTS.

These are such medicines as  diminish the force of colic- 
ANTHELMINTICS.
235
sion in the particles of the solid matter of the body, rendering
them more lax and flexible.
  Heat and Moisture conjoined, is the principal emmol-
ient.   Water alone, or with different kinds of herbs, poulti-
ces, oils, or fatty  substances, of which  hogs  lard  (axunge
porcina) is the principal, are the common emmolients.
                   ANTHELMINTICS,

    Are remedies which expel worms from the intestines.
    Several preparations of Mercury  are  employed.   The
 black sulphuret, made by mixing quick silver and  sulphur
 together in equal parts, is given in the dose of two or three
 grains.
    Calomel is the most used of any preparation of mercury,
 and it  has beside  its anthelmintic  powers  the  property of
 evacuating the intestines, thereby forcing them away.   It is
 given alone in a dose of two to  five  grains to children and
 from ten to fifteen to adults.
   Iron. Ferrum.   The filings are given in a dose of one or
 two drachms; and the rust is  given  to the  extent of three
 or four drachms every day.
   Tin, in filings or powder is occasionally  used as an anthel-
 mintic.
    Olive Oil, or any expressed oil is  recommended in doses
 as large as the stomach can bear, taken every morning.
   Oil of Turpentine.   This essential oil is an anthelmintic
 of great power.   It is  the only remedy on  which  we can
 place dependence-  in cases of the tape worm.  It renerallv
 produces purging, and by which the worm is expelled :  dose,
 two ounces, if it does not operate in two hours, repeat it.   It
 must be taken in some mucilage.  It kills  the worm.   Tur-
 pentine- is also used in injection incases of worms in the low-
 er part of the  bowels.
   Cowitch.   Doliehos Pruriens.  The clown or  fur  that
 covers the  oun-r part of the pod, in which the bean is con-
 tained, is scraped off ancl used  as an anthelmintic.   It must
 be mixed up with syrup or molasses :  dose, from one fourth
to half a tea-spoonful of the hairs or spicula.   After this has
been given an hour, give a smart dose of physic  to carry h 
236
CONSERVES.
off.  It operates by irritation on the worms, it  is perfectly
safe, and more used now than any other vermifuge.
   Worm Seed, the dose is half a drachm, followed by a brisk
cathartic.
   Indian Pink.   Spigelia Marilandica.  This  is a native
of Virginia and Maryland:  dose from half a drachm to two
drachms to an adult.  As it has but a weak cathartic power
it is common to follow it  with  senna or other physic.   It is
always steeped in water, and the infusion is given.
   Cabbage Tree.   The bark of the  tree is the part used.  It
is given under the form of infusion, an ounce being boiled in
two pounds of water; one ounce is given every  minute un-
til it operates as  physic.   It is  a medicine  of considerable
power.
   Gamboge.  This is given a dose from five  to  twenty
grains.
  Pride of China.  Melia.   This is an anthelmintic  of
considerable power.  It generally produces dizziness of the
head.   The bark of the root is the part used : dose, put four
ounces of the bark  into a  quart of water, and boil down to a
pint;  give a wine glassful once an hour until four are taken.
If it produces disagreeable effects, discontinue.
             EXTRACTION  OF PULPS.

  Those fruits which afford a pulp, if they are unripe, or
ripe and  dried, boil with a little water until they are soft;
the  pulp  through a hair-sieve, and boil it with a gentle heat
in an earthen vessel,  stirring it frequently that it  may  not
burn, uotil it is of the consistence of honey, or set the vessel
in another of water, which is to be  kept boiling.
                     CONSERVES.

   These are  compositions of fresh vegetable  matter with
sugar.
   Conserve of Orange Peel.   Take of fresh orange peel,
rasped fine, add while beating, three times its weight of sugar.
   Conserve of Roses.  Take the  petals not fully  blown, 
emulsions and mixtures.
237
 (remove the keels)  one pound, refined (loaf) sugar  three
 pounds, bruise the petals in a  stone mortar, then adding the
 sugar beat again until they form an  uniform  mass.   In the
 same manner all  conserves are prepared.   They are of but
 little consequence,  being generally  to give  consistence to
 pills, &c.


               INSPISSATED  JUICES.

   The juice expressed from vegetables, generally holds dis-
 solved the principles in which the medicinal  powers of the
 plant reside, with a large proportion of water, being liable to
 decompositions.   The process employed, is to obtain the ac-
 tive matter in a more concentrated state.  These preparations
 are called inspissated juices, formerly extracts.  But many
 cases will not  admit of this operation as volatile part is al-
 ways dissipated, and this frequently contains the medicinal
 virtues of the plant.
   General Rule.   The  fresh leaves are to be bruised, and
 being inclosed in  an hempen bag, are to be pressed strongly,
 that they may  give out their juice, which is to be reduced by
 evaporation in open vessels, heated by boiling water, satura-
 ted with muriate of soda, (common salt,)  to the consistence
 of honey.   The mass, after it  has  cooled, is  to be kept in.
 glazed earthen vessels,  and moistened with alcohol.


           FIXED OR EXPRESSED OILS.

   Oil of Almonds.  Take of fresh almonds, any quantity,
 bruise them in a stone mortar, put  them in a hemp bag, and
 express the oil by means of a press, without heat.
   Castor Oil.  Oleum Ricini.  Bruise the  seeds and  ex-
press the oil without heat.  In same manner are all the fixed
oils to be obtained.


           EMULSIONS  AND MIXTURES.

  Emulsions  are preparations in which  the expressed oil
of the seeds or kernels from which they are made, is diffused 
238
INFUSIONS.
through water by the medium  of the sugar, mucilage, and
fecula which the seeds contain.
   Arabic emulsion.   Take of mucilage of gum Arabic, two
ounces ;  almonds, one ounce ; refined sugar, an ounce and a
half, water,  two pounds.   Macerate  (soak) the almonds in
warm water and peel  them, then beat them in a stone mor-
tar, first with the sugar,  next with  the mucilage, then add
the water gradually, and strain the mixture.
   Camphor emulsion.  Take of camphor one scruple;  al-
monds, sugar, of each half an ounce ; water, a pound and a
half.   Beat  the almonds in a stone mortar, with the camphor
and sugar previously well rubbed together, then pour the wa-
ter on gradually and strain.
   In a similar manner any emulsion may be prepared.   They
are generally prepared extemporaneous, and may be given
in a dose of  an ounce or two.
                     INFUSIONS.

  Infusion is a term denoting a watery preparation of vege-
table matter.  By  infusion in this work I mean simply steep-
ing the vegetable, in  water heated, before  applied, after the
manner of steeping common table tea.
  Infusion of Chamomile.   Take of camomile flowers two
drachms, water one pound, steep for a few  hours and strain.
   Infusion of Senna.   Take of senna leaves an ounce and
a half, with or without ginger, half an ounce ; boiling water
one pint, macerate, or steep in  a closed vessel for an hour.
In like manner is prepared infusions of columbo, peruvian
bark, cinnamon, &c.   The dose is generally as much as the
stomach can bear, unless otherwise directed.
  Mucilages, are solutions of gummy matter in water, this
is either of the gums themselves, or vegetables containing
gummy matter is macerated in water.   The  water  usee!
should be hot.  They aiv use as vehicles for other medicines,
to suspend  powders in liquors, to diffuse oils or resinous mat-
ter  in water, to give  tenacity to  pills, and are given in  large
quantities to sheathe  the stomach and bowels against acrimo-
nious humors, &c. 
mineral waters.
23S
                   DECOCTIONS.

  By decoction I mean the boiling of the planis, or substance
used, in water.
  Decoction of Peruvian  Bark.   Take an  ounce  of th*
powdered bark and boil in a pint of water ten or fifteen min-
utes :  strain while warm.  In this manner prepare any de-
coction, and where much strength of the vegetable is desired
in little quantity of water, boil it away.as much  as in wished.
But the active matter is  liable to be impaired by long boiling.,
                 VOLATILE  OILS.

  Rule :  A sufficient quantity of water is  to be thrown on
the substance to be acted on,  so  as  to prevent the volatile
spirit from living  off during distillation.   After  maceration.
for a proper length of time/distill, and separate the oil from
the water; as if may be lighter than  the water and swim on
the surface, or  heavier and sink to  the bottom.  According
to this method are prepared oil of Anise, Wormweed,, Pen-
nyroyal, Lavender, Peppermint,  Origanum,  Rosemary,
Sassafras, Spearmint, fyc. fyc.
                MINERAL WATERS.

  Saline Mineral waters are  usually aperient, and  much
more so than might be supposed from the  extent of their sa-
line impregnation.   Thev are general used in diseases whers
it is of advantage to strengthen the digestive organs, or where
advnnta"-e is desired from moderate and continued evacuations.
Hence, die benefit derived from them in  indigestion, chloro-
sis scrofula, o.c. &c.  Sea water is a.saline mineral water.
  Chalybeate Mineral  Walers owe their medicinal proper-
tics to  an impregnation of Iron.  They act as tonics increas-
ing the strength of the system, raising the ■force of the evacu-
ation, giving tone to  the digestine organs, augmenting mus-
cular vigor, and promoting the exentiors.   ri he are employ-
ed in almost all cases of chronic debility.
  Sulphureous Mineral Walers.  Tic se owe their powcrs-
to an impregnation of sulphureted hydrogen, and are readily 
240
the gasses.
known by  their sulphurous smell.   They  are employed in
diseases affecting the skin, trie digestive organs, tyc, as the
above.
   Carbonated  Mineral  Waters.   These contain carbonic
acid gas, they sparkle when drawn from the spring, and have
a taste pungent, and acidulous, which they lose when exposed
to the air.  They are grateful from their pungency, sit light
on  the stomach, and  in large dose produce exhilaration of
spirits ;  and  are resorted  to for  relief in all  chronic com-
plaints, being similar to the other waters in medicinal pro-
perties.


                     THE GASES,

   Have been employed in medical practice, they are of but
little consequence.
   Electricity possesses stimulating power, but is very pro-
perly laid aside  by  men of sense, as being more an instrument
uf amusement, than a means of medical efficacy. 
RECEIPTS.                        241
  RECEIPTS  FOR COMPOUNDING  MEDICINES.


   A table of medicines for family use,  with their doses and
qualities.
   MEDICINES.
 Solution of Arsenic,
 Wine of Antimony,
 — as a diaphoretic,
 Alum,
 Aloes,
 Balsam Copaiva,
 Balsam Turlington,
 Bitters,
 Peruvian bark,
 Calomel,
 Camphor,
 Cream of Tartar,
 Sai:sfie vol. alkali li-
  quor,
 Gorrosive sublimate,
 Columbo,
 Prepared chalk,
 ©amomile flowers,
 Castile .soap,
 Castor oil,
 Elixir \i.riol,
 Ether,
 Ginger,
 Gamboge,
 Gum Arabic,
 Spirit, Hartshorn,
 Honey,
ipecacuanha,
Jalap,
 Lunar caustic,
 Laudanum,
6fagn< - 3,
Manna,
Nitre,
Nitric acid,
Olive oil,
Opium,
Simple ointment,
Goulard's cerate,
 Mercurial ouilmcnt,
Basilican ointment,
Paregoric elixir,
Pink root,
P.'Wdcred rhubarb,
Rjst of steel.
Rid ;:r«icipitaUv
   DOSE FOR ADULT.
 five to twelve drops,
 three to four tea-spooufula,
 twenty to sixty drops,
 five to fifteen grains,
 five to twenty grains,
 twenty to eighty drops,
   do.       do.
 one to three drachms,
 a table-spoonful,
 eight to twenty-five grains,
 four to twenty grains,
 one to two table-spoonfuls,
 half a tea-spoonful

 one sixteenth of a grain.
 ten to sixty grains,
 twenty-five to fifty grains,
 table-spoonfi.1 decoction,
 twenty to forty grains,
 table-spoonful
 fifteen to twenty-five drachms
 from haif to a tea-spoonful,
[live to twenty-fi»e grains,
 six to twelve grains,
 table-.=po»nful, solution,
 half to a tea-spoonful,
itwo tea-spoonfuls,
 fifteen to twenty-five grains,
 fifteen to thirty grains,
 one sixth to one third grain,
 twenty to sixty drops
 one tea-spoonful,
 one to t«*o ounces,
 ten to thirty grains.
 ten to thirty drops,
 halftea-sponnfui,
 one to three  ;:r.iins,
 to sores,
  do.
  do.
 used extfirjKill/,
 on'! toth;»-   <> spoonfuls,
j-frnng defection,
jifteen U\ <i!iv j rains.
;five to tv  - mv-fivegrains,
|in ointment,
   QUALITIES.
'Tonic.
[Emetic.
| Diaphoretic.
Astringent.
Cathartic.
Corroborant.
   Do.
Stomachic.
Tonic & antiseptic.
Active physic.
Stimulant.
Cooling aperient.
Stimulant.

Anti-venereal.
Somachic & tonic.
Absorbent.
Stom. & anti-septic.
Attendant & detergent
Purgative.
Tonic.
Stimulant.
Aromatic.
Purgative.
Obtunding, mucilage.
Stimulant.
Pectoral.
Finelic.
Cathartic.
Stimulant.
Anodyne.
Absorbent.
Mild laxative.
Febrifuge & diurelie.
Tonic & antiscorbutic,
I  oosening.
Anodyne & antiseptic.
Cooling & healing.
  do.      do.
Discutient.
Digestive.
Anodyne & pectoral.
Vermifuge, wurn, n«.
(V.tn .-tic.
''  or :r
L.-< i;arrt C. 
242                       receipts.
   MEDICINES.
 Sugar of lead,
 Spanish flics,
 Suits,
 Salt of tartar,
 Spirits of turpentine,
 Vol. salt, of ammonia
 Crude,
 Senna,
 Spirits of lavender,
 Hour of sulphur,
 Tumarinds,
 Tartar emetic,
 Tincture of iron,
 ----bark,
----rhubard,
----fox glove,
----cantharides,
----columbo,
----myrrh,
 S White vitriol,
 \ As a tonic,
Blue vitriol,
Virginia snake rooot,
  DOSE FOR ADULT.
one to six grains,
externally, tinct. drops 2 to 12.
four to six druchms,
ten  to thirty grains,
twenty drops, to tea-spoonful,
five to twenty grains,
externally,
strong infusion,
thirty to sixty droos,
two to eight drachms,
as much as you please,
three to ten grains,
eight to sixteen drops,
two to six drachms,
one to two ounces,
ten to sixty drops,
ten to fifteen drops^
one to four drachms,
twenty drops,
five to fifteen grains,
two to five grains,
externally,
ten to twenty grains,
   QUALITIES.
Astringent 6c tonic.
Blistering, diuretic,
Cathartic.
Absorb. & febrifuge.
Stimulant.
  do.
Discutient, scattering
Physic.
Cordial.
Aperient.
Cooling »lc laxative.
Emetic.
Tonic.
  do.
Cathartic &, etoi.ichi
Diuretic.
Stimulant.
Tonic.
Detergent.
Emetic.
Tonic.
Escharotic.
Stimulant & stomachi.
  IV. D.—A  drachm of any substance that is near the weight of water,
will fill a common ten-spoon level full.  Four tea spoonfuls (four drachms.)
make a table-spoonful (or one half  of an ounce,); two table-spoonsful  am
ounce, and so on.   On the same principle one third of a tea-spoonful will  me
one scruple, or twenty grains in weight.

   The doses mentioned  in this hook are generally  intended
for adults.

    Children.of  14 years  may take  two-thirls ofado-e.
7 do	.i	one-halt'	ii
5 do	"	one-third	u
.'* do	"	one-fourth	u
l'S months	•'	one-li!":h	u
14 do	i.	one-eighth	11
7 do	u	one-twelfth	i.
2 do	u	one-iilieenth	k>
1 do	k	one-twentieth	"
rider do	(4	one-twenly-fourth "	
                            PILLS.

   1. Cathartic, or bilious pills.  Take of aloes two ounces ;
calomel, two drachms;  gamboge,  one  drachm ;  castile, or
bar  soap,  half an  ounce ;  water,  or niol:is*es, a sufficient
quantity.   Pulverize and sift (:   aloes  and gamboge,  then
'V3  \<Z
\% 
RECEIPTS.
243
  mix the ingredients,  by pounding them together, to a proper
  consistence.   Make them into common sized pills, and  tak«
  3 or 4 for a dose.   A piece of crape stretched on a stick bent
  so as to form a circle makes a convenient sieve.
    2.  Another kind of bilious pills is made thus : Take one
  part of aloes, one part of gamboge, and  two parts  of jalap,
  adding a little soap ; and mix with molasses, as usual.
    3.  Laxative pills.  Take ten  grains of pulverized cinna-
  mon ;  one drachm of aloes ;  one  drachm of castile soap, add
  one or two drops of molasses, and make into S2 pills.  Dose
  2 at bed time.
    4. Pills  of aloes and  assafcetida.  Take equal parts of
  pulverized aloes, assafetida, and soap. Add a sufficient quan-
  tity of the mucilage of gum  arabic, or molasses, make them
  into common sized pills, and  take them one  or two twice a
 day for dyspepsia and costiveness.
   5. Anti-hysteric pUls.   Take equal parts of pulverized
 assafetida, galbanum, and myrrh ; add a little of the tincture
 of assafetida, beat them into  a mass with molasses or syrup
 make  into pills, arid take one, two, or three, every night or
 oflener.                                             °
   6. Hull's colic pills.  Take of cinnamon, cloves, mace
 myrrh, saffron, ginger and castile soap, of each one drachm '•
 soeotorine, aloes, one drachm; and  essence  of peppermint
 sufficient to moisten it.   Make common sized pills, and take
 them till they operate.
   7.  Dr. Fuller's anti-relax pills.   Take ten grains of pul-
 verized opium ; twenty of ipecac, and twenty of calomel •
 add inohisses until it will pill,  and make it into  160 pills'
 Dose, for children, one  pill every  hour or oftener, until the
 relax is checked.
  8. Mercurial, or blue pills.   Take of purified mercury or
quicksilver half an ounce;  confection of roses (honey will
answer)  half an ounce ; powdered liquorice, two drachms
or 1-4 of an  ounce.   Rub  the mercury with  the confection
untd the globules disappear; then a.ld  the liquorice, beat into
a mass, and  divide  immediately into two hundred and forty
pills, of the common  size. Take one, night and morning until
the gums begin to grow sore.
  9.  Half  grain  pills of  calomel,  or alterative pills.
 Take twenty-five grains of calomel j starch or  magnesia the
                          16 
244                    RECEIPTS.
same quantity ; mucilage of gum arabic, a sufficient quantity;
mix, and divide into fifty pills.   Dose, two at night to  pro-
duce an alteration in the system ; increase to three or four to
produce ptyalism, or sore mouth.
   10.  Strengthening female pills.  Take carbonate of iron
(rust of iron) one ounce ; castile soap, and pulverized gum
myrrh, of ea;li  two drachms.  Beat  them into a mass with
molasses or syrup, make common sized pills, and take 2 or 3
twice a day.
                      POWDERS.

   11. Picra, (Hiera Picra.)  Take of aloes one pound;
ginger, half a  pound ;  winter bark, one fourtli of a pound.
Pulverize each ingredient separately, then mix them togeth-
er, and one ounce  of the  mixture may be  put to a  pint of
spirits.  Dose,  a table spoonful.   Good laxative physic.
   12. Gum powder.   Take  pulverized  gum tragacanth,
gum arabic, and starch, of each one ounce and a  half; loaf
sugar three ounces.  Grind to a powder.   Good in coughs,
hectic, stoppage of urine, old fluxes, &c.   Dose, a leaspoon-
ful or more.
   13. Sweating powder, or  Dovers powder.  Take ipc-
«ac, and dry opiums, of each, one  part;  sulphate  of potash
eight part,  grind the sulphate of potash and opium together,
sift, and then add  the'ipecac-.  ])ose from  o t.> 20  grains,
once in 2 hours, as the  stomach  will hear it without puking-
This is a powerful sudorific, ancl  is good in all cayes where
sweatng is  ncccssarv.
   14. At omaHe powder.  T:.kc  equal  pp.r's of cinnamon,
cardamon.seeds, and finger, rub  them together ir i mortar
to a fine powder, and keep it in a well stopped oo;;J«..  This
makes an agreeahle medicine, and  may ho taken, to warm the
stomach, or used to cover ;!ic had taste of o'.iojr medicines.
Dose, from ten  grains to a scruple, or more.
   15. Snuff powder.   Take of  (he leaves cf nr rabacca,
three parls  ; the leaves of marjoram and ll >we;\: of  ivender,
of each one cart.   Pulvrrt; e them together.   Th;.  kind  oi'
snuff is excel!-'it. in obuiu .to headaches, and •„*<■'■ > for nllamed
eyes that resist other modes  of cure.   Five or •  x grains 
RECEIPTS.
245
taken at night will produce powerful sneezing the next day.
Avoid taking cold.
   16.  Compound poaeder of chalk.  Take four ounces of
chalk ;  half a drachm of nutmeg ; and a drachm  and half of
cinnamon.   Pulverize, and mix.  For weakness  and acidity
in stomach and bowels.   Dose half a teaspoonful.  By add-
ing 4 scruples of pulverized opium to every six ounces and a
half of the above powder, you will have what  is called  the
compound powder of chalk with opium, which is still more
effectual than the preceding powder in  restraining diarrhaea.
One fourth of a teaspoonful, or less, will probably be suffici-
ent, once an hour or two.                                '
   17.  Compound powder of Kino.  Take fifteen drachms
of kino ; half an ounce of cinnamon ; and one drachm of opU
urn. Pulverize separately,  and  mix.  It is an excellent ano-
dyne and astringent.   To check profuse evacutions of any
kind—in small doses.
   IS.  Compound saline powder.  Take table salt, (muri-
ate of soda,) epsom salt,  'sulphate of magnesia,) of each,
four parts ; sulphate of potash, three parts.  Drv  with a gen-
tle  heat, re.Iuoo thorn to  powder separately, then mix, and
l:-'rj it in a wall cokxl phial.  Good in costiveness—Dose,
a teaspoonful in half a pint  of water before breakfast.'


                      PLASTERS.

   19.  C\mmonplaster, or Diachylon.  Take three quarts
of sw.m;.: oil, (olive oil}) I sv  » pounds and a half of litharge rer
duced to line powder, and two quarts or more of water. Boil
tlrem toipM.ier over a  gentle fire, continually stirring it, and
as the water co-anorotes, hot water must b.: added, from time
to time, so as constantly  to keep about  2 quarts of water in
(he vessel.   The use (>f the water  ;s t > prevent  tho  plaster
from/burning.   Tin; addition  of cotd water af'er  \\v plaster
becomes h >f, would cjomu a d tn^t'roiis explosion, and  if tho
phc-'er be exJ.  ; nely  hot, the  same would also take place by
adding hoi  water,  It  is %»!■■]•  tli.r 'fore to tomovc it from  the
fire, and iet it.  coal a  little,  before adding the water.   After
boiling  it about  three hours,  ;;  j til: of the. plaster muv'be
taken ou!;u;d pui into cow! wan r to try if it he of a  proper corjr
iistence ;  wWm that is ihcca. a, tho whole may  be suiiered
                          io* 
245
RECEIPTS,
to.cool gradually. Press out the water with the hands. Tm>
plaster is frequently applied to excoriations of the  skin and
slight flesh wounds, but its principal use is to serve  as a basis
for other plasters.
  20.  Strengthening plaster. Take twenty four parts of the
common or diachylon plaster ; six parts of burgundy pitch;
three parts of yellow  wax ;  three parts  of sweet  oil; and
eight parts of red «tyd of iron.  Grind the red oxyd of iron.
with the oil, and then add to it the  other ingredients, previ-
ously melted.
  21.  Adhesive plaster, or  Sticking plaster.  Take five
parts of common plaster, and one part of burgundy  pitch.
Melt them together,  and  the plaster is  made.  Another
method of making it, is to take two parts, or half a  pound, of
common plaster ; and one part, or a quarter  of a  pound, of
burgundy pitch.  Melt them together as  before.   This is a
very important plaster ;  it is used instead of the  surgeon's
needle for dressing flesh wounds.
  22.  Anodyne plaster.  Melt an ounce of adhesive plaster,
and when it is cooling, mix with it a drachm of powderevl
opium, and the same quantity of camphor previously rubbed
up with a little sweet oil.  This plaster generally gives ease
in acute pains, especially of the nervous kind.
  23.  Blistering plaster.   Take equal  weights of mutton
met, yellow wax,  burgundy pitch, and  Spanish flies, (can-
tharides.)  Or the American potatoe fly may  be used.   Mix
the flies, reduced to fine  powder,  with the other ingredients,
previously melted and  removed  from  the  tire.  Another
janethod, is to take six ounces Venice turpentine; two ounces
of yellow wax ; one ounce of pulverized mustard,  and three
ounces of pulverized  flies.   M It the wax,  and while it is
warm add  the turpentine, taking  care not to ev-.porate it by
too much heat. After the turpentine and wax arc sufficiently
mixed, sprinkle  in the powders, continually stirring until it
becomes cold.
   24. Gum plaster.  Take of common plaster rour pounds;
gum ammomuc and galbanum, strained, of each half a pound.
Melt  them together, and  add,  of Venice turpentine, six
ounces.   This plaster is  used for discussing or driving away
indolent tumors.
   25. Stomach plaster.   Take  of  gum plaster,  an  ounce
and a half; pulverized pepper, one ounce.  M< It the plaster, 
RECEIPTS.
247
«nd mix with it the oil; then sprinkle in the pepper, stir it
well, and the plaster is made.  Spread an ounce  or two of
this upon soft leather, and apply to the stomach.


    CERATES,  LINIMENTS  AND OINTMENTS.

   •26. Simple cerate, or salve.   Take six parts of olive oil;
three parts of white wax, and one part of spermaceti.   Melt
 them together.  This is used for dressing sores, ulcers, &c.
   27. Goulard's cerate.  Take of water of acetated litharge,
two ounces and a half;  yellow wax,  four ounces; olive oil
nine ounces ; camphor,  half a drachm.   Rub the camphor
with a'little of the oil.   Melt the wax with  the  remaining
oil,  and as soon as the mixture begins to thicken, pour in by
degrees the water of acetated litharge, and stir constantly until
it be cold ; then mix in the camphor previously rubbed with
oil.   The recommendation of Mr. Goulard has given fame to
this  cerate.   It is applied for the purpose of abating  the in-
flammation of swellings, and is a good application for cleans-
ing and healing unhealthy sores and ulcers.
   28. Simple liniment.   Take of olive oil four parts; white
wax, one part.  Melt the wax in the oil by applying gentle
heat, and then shake the mixture continually until it hardens.
This may be used for softening the skin, healing chops,  &c.
   29. Lime water  liniment.   Take equal  parts of  lime
water and olive, or flaxseed oil.   Mix by shaking in a phial.
It is a good application to scalds and burns—spread it on the
part with a feather.
   30.  Liniment of camphor, or Camphorated  oil.   Dis-
solve half an ounce of camphor in two ounces of sweet oil.
   31.  Volatile liniment.  Mix equal parts of aqua ammo-
nia and sweet oil in  a phial—shake them together, and keep
the phial well corked.
   32.  Turpentine liniment.  Take eight ounces of land ;
pine-resin five ounces ; yellow wax, two ounces.   Melt, stir
them together, and then  add half a  pint of oil of turpentine.
Either of the three  last mentioned  liniments may be rubbed
on parts  affected  with rheumatism, sprains,  numbness,  or
palsy.
   33.  Ointment  of nitrous  acid.   Gradually add  six 
248                    RECEIPTS.

drachms of nilrdus acid to a pound of  melted lard, and dili-
gently beat  the  mixture  as  it cools.   In affections of the
skin,  this is a good substitute for  the  ointment of nitrate of
mercury.
  34.  Turner's healing cerate.  Take half a pound of cala-
mine, (lapis  calaminaris;)  half a  pound of yellow (bees')
wax ; and one pint of olive or sweet oil. Melt the wax with
the oil; and  as soon as the mixture,  exposed to the air, be-
gins to thicken, mix  it with the calamine, and stir the  cerate
until it  be cold.   It  is applied to any kind of healthy ulcers,
or cutaneous excoriations, (where the  skin is rubbed off,) in
order  to assist in forming new skin.
  35.  Ointment of white hellebore.   Take of white helle-
bore,  one  ounce ; hog's lard, four ounces ;  essence oMemon,
half a scruple.   Mix, and make them into an ointment.  For
cutaneous diseases.
  36.  Strong wnguentum, or mercurial ointment.  Take
purified mercury or quicksilver three parts ; lard, three parts;
suet, one  part.   Grind the mercury in  small parcels with a
sufficient quantity of thick Venice turpentine, or with melted
adhesive plaster/  until the globules disappear, then add the
lard and suet.
  37.  Mild  unguentum.,  Mix one part of strong unguen-
tum with  two parts of  lard.   These two ointments are appli-
ed to  the skin in order to introduce mercurv  into the system
instead  of taking it internally, and also to cure the itch, and
other  eruptions.
  38.  Citric, citrine, or yellow  ointment.   (Unguentum
Hydrargyri  nitratis.)   Take purified  mercury by weight,
one pint; nitric acid, two parts ; olive oil, nine parts ; lard,
three  parts.  Dissolve the mercury in the  acid, and to that
add the oil  and  lard  previously  melted  together, and just
beginning to  grow stiff. Stir them briskly together in a glass
mortar, so as to form an ointment.
  29.  Milder yellow ointment, is made in the  same way
with three times  the quantity of oil and lard.  Yellow oint-
ment  has  (he very best effect in all inflammations of the eyes,
with disorders of the scalp or face ; in herpes, tinea capitis,
and other obstinate cutaneous affections.

  * Haifa drachm of carbonate of Magnesia, with an ounce or two of lard tr»
one pound of mercury, may  be used by those of who prefer it,  iustead of the
pkotcr or turpentine. 
RECEIPTS.
249
   10. Red precipitate ointment.   Mix one part of red pre-
 cipitate with eight parts of lard.   This is used for the same
 purpose as mercurial ointment.
   41. Tar ointment.   Melt two parts of yellow wax with
 five parts  of tar, and strain  through linen.  Used in tinea
 capitis, ancl other affections of the skin.
   42. Sulphur ointment.   Mix one part of sulphur with
 four parts of lard,  and  to  every pound of this  mixture add
 half a drachm of lavender oil, or oil of lemons.  Certain cure
 for the itch, safer than mercury.
   43. Basiticon ointment.  Rosin and beeswax, each, one
 pound; lard, one pound and a half.  Melt them together  by
 a slow fire, and strain the  mixture while hot.   Used  to pro-
 mote the suppuration, or discharge of matter, of open sores.


                    TINCTURES.

   44. Tincture of opium, or laudanum.  Add two  ounces
 of dry opium pulverized, to one quart of proof spirit.  Let it
 stand seven days, frequently shaking, and then strain.  Com-
 mon dose, from 15 to 25 drops.
   45. Paregoric.  Take opium, and flowers of Benzoin, of
 each, half a drachm ; camphor,  two scruples ;  oil  of anise,
 sixty drops ;  proof spirit, one  quart.   Mix  together, let it
 stand (digest) ten  days, and strain.  A little sugar  and  li-
 quorice may also be added with the other ingredients. Dose,
 the same as laudanum,, or more.
   46. Tincture of aloes.  Mix half an ounce of 'powdered
 soeotorine aloes, and an ounce  and  a  half of liquorice ball,
 with four ounces of alcohol, and one pound of water.  Digest
 seven days.  Drastic cathartic—Dose, from a teaspoonful to
an ounce.
  47.  Tincture of rhubarb.   Rhubarb  root  sliced,  two
ounces ; cardamom seeds, bruised one ounce and a half; saf-
fron, two drachms ;  proof spirit, one quart.  Digest 14 days,
and strain.   Laxative—Dose,  from a tea to a table spoonful.
  48.  Tincture of myrrh.  Add three ounces of pulverized
gum myrrh to twenty  ounces of alcohol,  and ten ounces of
water.  Digest seven dav s, and strain through  paper.  Ex-
ternally, for chansing  foul ulcers—internally, in female ob- 
250
RECEIPTS.
structions.   Dose, from  15 to 40 drops.   (Any tincture may
be used without straining.)
  49.  Tincture of assafoedita.   Take four ounces of assa-
foedita ; one quart of alcohol, and half a pint of water.  Tri-
turate or grind  the assafoedita with the water ;  then add the
alcohol, digest  ten days, and strain.   This may be given in-
stead of assafoedita itself—Dose, from ten  to sixty drops.
  50.  Tincture of camphor, or camphorated spirits. Add
one, two, or three ounces of camphor to one pound or pint of
alcohol.   Used externally  in rheumatic pains, numbness, &c.
  51.  Tincture of kino.  Add  two ounces of powdered
gum kino to a pint and a half of proof spirits.   Digest seven
days, and strain—Astringent—in  fluxes.   Dose, 10 to  50
drops.
  52.  Compound tincture of peruvian bark.  Two ounces
of peruvian bark ; an ounce ancl a half of orange peel;  three
drachms Virginia snake root, bruised ; one  drachm saffron  ;
two scruples cochineal;  a  pint and a half  proof spirits.  Mix
them, digest ten days and strain.  Dose, two or three drachms
(teaspoonfuls) to strengthen the stomach.   For curing inter-
mittents (agues) increase the dose.
  53.  Compound tincture of cinnamon, or aromatic tinc-
ture.  Cinnamon, bruised,  six  drachms ;  lesser cardamon
seeds without  the  capsules,  one drachm;  long pepper and
ginger in  powder, of each two  drachms  ;  proof spirit, one
quart.   Mix, digest  seven days, and strain.  Stimulating,
and carminative.   Good to settle the stomach—Dose, one to
two teaspoonfuls in wine or water.
  54.  Tincture of gum myrrh and pepper.  Cayenne pep-
per and gum myrrh,  of  each, one ounce  ;  proof spirit, one
quart.   Digest ten days,  and strain.  Powerful stimulant
—may  be used in low typhus.   Dose, from 20 to 30 drops.
  55.  Tincture of guaiac, or guaiacum.   Add one pound
of gum guaiac to  two pints  and a half of  alcohol.   Let it
stand and digest ten days.   Stimulant, and  sudorific—Good
in rheumatism, gout, &c.  Dose half  an  ounce (tablespoon-
ful) with  2  ounces of water.   It  is also good in painful and
obstructed courses, and for  this, an ounce of carbonate of soda,
and 4 or 5 ounces of allspice may be added.  Dose, a tea-
spoonful in wine before eating.   Discontinue during the time
of being regular—begin  again immediately after. 
RECEIPTS.
251
   56. Tincture of black  Hellebore.   Four  ounces black
 hellebore root; half a drachm pulverized cochineal; two
 pints and a half proof spirits.   Digest  seven days.   Dose, a
 tea-spoonful twice a day in warm water.  In sanguine con-
 stitutions, where chalybeates are hurtful, it excites the proper
 evacuations of women, and removes the ill consequences of
 their suppression.
   57. Tincture of Colchicum.   Colchicum root, two oun-
 ces ;  proof spirits, four  ounces.   Used in gout.  Dose, a
 table-spoonful.
   58. Tincture of the muriate of iron.   Take carbonate
 (rust) of iron half a pound  ; muriatic acid, one pint; alcohol
 three pints.   Pour the acid on the iron in a glass vessel; stir
 it frequently  for three days;  set  it by for the dregs to sub-
 side ;  then pour off the clear liquor, and when cold, add the
 alcohol.   Excellent chalybeate, in female debilities.  Dose,
 ten or twenty drops twice  a day.
   59. Elixir of Vitriol.  Gradually  mix three ounces of
 >ulphuric acid (oil of vitriol) with one pint of the  aromatic
 tincture.   After settling, filter through paper in a glass fun-
 nel.   Good tonic for the stomach.   Dose, ten or fifteen drops.
   60. Tincture,  or  essence  of peppermint.   Add  two
 drachms oil of peppermint to one  pint of alcohol.  Cordial,
 and stimulating, twenty to thirty drops.
   61. Spirit of mindererus.   Take carbonate of ammonia,
 any quantity, and pour vinegar on it until  the effervescence
 ceases.  Promotes perspiration and urine.  Dose,  a table-
 spoonful in a cup of warm  gruel every hour, in bed, until it
 has the effect.
   62. Tincture of American  hellebore.  Take American
hellebore (itchweed,) bruised,  eight ounces ; diluted alcohol
or proof spirits,  two pints  and  a half.   Digest for ten days,
ami filter.   For jjout, rheumatism, &c.   Begin  with a few
drops, and increase as the stomach will bear it.
                       SYRUPS.

  63. Simple syrup.   Mix fifteen parts of sugar with eight
parts of water.   Dissolve by gentle heat,  boil a  little and
% 
252
RECEIPTS.
 remove the scum.  Used to cover  the taste of other medi-
 cines, or for making pills.
  -64. Syrup of vinegar.  Boil seven  parts of sugar with
 five parts of purified vinegar.   This is a  pleasant syrup, and
 on  account of its cheapness is often  preferred to lemon svrup.
   65. Orange syrup.   Fresh outer rind of Seville orangey,
 three ounces; boiling water one  pound and a half; refined
 sugar, three pounds.  Macerate or  steep the rind in tire wa-
 ter for twelve hours ;  then, after  straining, add the sugar in
 powder, and apply gentle heat, so as to form a svrup.
  66. Lemon syrup.   Take of  juice of lemons,  strained,
 three parts;  sugar, five parts.   Dissolve  the sugar in the
juice  so as to make a syrup.  All these are pleasant, cooling
 syrups, for quenching thirst,  abating heat, &c. and may be
 used  in fevers.
  67. Syrup of colchicum or meadow saffron.  Take fresh
 meadow saffron cut in slices,  one ounce; purified  vinegar.
 one pint;  sugar twrenty-six ounces.  Let the colchicum re-
 main  in the vinegar for  two days, occasionally shaking the
 vessel; then strain the infusion with gentle expression.   To
 the strained infusion add the sugar;  and  boil a little so as to
 form a syrup.   This is  the best  preparation  of colchicum.
 May  be used in gout, rheumatism, dropsy, &c.  Dose, from
 a drachm  to an ounce, or more.
  68. Syrup of sarsaparilla.  Take of sarsaparilla, sliced,
 two pounds;  roses, senna, anise,  and liquorice stick, sliced,
 of each two ounces ; warm water twelve pints.   Infuse the
 sarsaparilla in the water for twenty-four hours ; then boil for
 a quarter  of an hour, and strain by strong compression ;  boil
 the sarsaparilla again  in ten pints of water till the  half of it
 is evaporated ; then strain, mix the  two liquors, and add the
 other ingredients.   Then boil the whole  until  half is evapo-
 rated, strain and add honey and sugar, of each, two  pounds.
 Good in cases of debility.
  69. Syrup of  roses.   Fresh petals of the damask rose,
 one part;  boiling  water, four  parts; double  refined sugar,
 three parts.  Macerate  the roses  in the water for the night ;
 then strain, add the sugar, ancl boil to a syrup.  An agreea-
 ble and mild purgative for children in the dose of half a spoon-
 ful, or more.   It  may also be given to adults for costiveness.
* 
RECEIPTS.

                         WINES.

    70.  Wine of colchicum, or meadow saffron.  Fresh col-
 chicum root two ounces ; Spanish white  wine two pounds.
 Infuse for ten days ;  filter, and add rectified spirits  of wine
 two ounces.  Used in gout, twenty drops at night.
    71.  Wine of colchicum seeds.  Infuse (wo ounces of tie
 seeds in one pound or pint of Spanish white wine for ten days.
 Dose,  from one to three drachms, (table spoonfuls)  twice" a
 day. in rheumatism.
    72.  Wine of antimony, or antimonial  tvine.  Emetic
 tartar, two scruples; boiling,  distilled water, four  ounces;
 wine, six ounces.   Dissolve the emetic tartar in the boiling
 water, and then add the wine.   Emetic—dose from three to
 four drachms.
    73.  Wine of ipecacuanha.   Take of the root of ipecac,
 bruised, two ounces ; Spanish white  wine,  two pints.  Di-
 gest for ten days, and strain.   A mild and safe emetic—com-
 mon dose, one ounce, (two table-spoonfuls.)
   71.  Wine of aloes, or aloetic wine.   Four ounces of soe-
 otorine aloes; two ounces of canella  alba;  four  pounds of
 Spanish white wine.   Powder  the aloes and canella alba
 separately; then mix, and pour on the wine.  Digest four-
 teen days with frequent agitation, and filter or strain.   Ca-
 thartic—dose from one to two ounces.   In smaller doses, it
 obviates costiveness and occasions a lax habit of much longer
 continuance than common cathartics.
   75.  Wine  of rhubarb.  Rhubarb,  two ounces; canella
 alba, one drachm ; diluted alcohol or  proof  spirits two oun-
 ces;  Spanish  white wine, fifteen  ounces.   Macerate  seven
 days, and strain.   This is a fine laxative;  it  evacuates the
 ofTending matter, and  also strengthens the .stomach and how-
 els.   Dose, from one half, to three or four spoonfuls, or more.
   7G.  Compound wine of gentian.   Gentian root, half an
 ounce;  peruvian bark, one  ounce; orange  peel dried, two
 drachms ; canella alba, one drachm ;  diluted alcohol, or spir-
 its, four ounces; Spanish white wine, two pounds and a half.
 First pour  the spirit on flic root  and bark, cut and bruised,
and after twenty-four hours add the wine; then macerate for
• 
254
RECEIPTS.
6even days, and strain.   This makes a good stomach bitter.
Dose, a wine-glassful three times a day.
                MIXTURES, SOLUTIONS, &c.

       77. Cathartic mixture.   Glauber,  or  epsom salts, one
     ounce and a half; lemon juice or sharp vinegar, one ounce ;
     water, half a pint, and sweeten with sugar.  This is a cool-
     ing physic.
       78. Febrifuge mixture.   Salts of nitre, two  drachms;
     lemon juice  or vinegar, one ounce ; water, half a pint, and
     sweeten with sugar.   Good to  reduce  fever—dose, a tea-
     spoonful or more every hour or two.
       79. Anodyne sudorific, or  sweating drops.   Add ten
     drops of laudanum and twenty of antimonial wine, to a cup
     of sweetened tea.
       80 Saturated solution of arsenic.   Take of arsenic in
     powder, one drachm ;  water, half a pint:  boil it for half an
     hour in a Florence flask or tin sauce-pan ;  let it stand to sub-
     side, and when cold, filter it through paper.  To two ounces
     of this solution add half an ounce of spirit of lavender—dose,  1
     from five, to twelve drops, two or three  times a days.   It is
     a powerful tonic—may be used in ague, and all cases of de-
     bility.
       X81 Solution of sal  ammoniac.  Dissolve half an ounce
     of sal ammoniac in one pint and a half of cold water, and then /j
     add half a pint of vinegar.  Used as a wash for external in- '
/    flammations.
       82  Gravel mixture.   Mix two parts  of quick lime, with
     one of pot-ashes ; and suffer them to stand until the lixivium
     be formed, which must be  carefully filtered through paper,
     before it be used.  If the solution does  not happen readily,
     a small quantity of water may be added to the mixture.   This
     is a powerful medicine for the gravel.  Commence   with
     small doses (a few drops)  mixed  with mucilage of gum
     arabic, increase as the stomach will bear, and continue it for
     a long time.
       83  Astringent gargle for sore mouth.  Half a pint of
     oak bark tea ; one ounce of honey,  and half  a drachm  of
     alum ; mix them.
                P 
RECEIPTS.
255
   84. Itch lotion.   Corrosive  sublimate, one drachm ; sal
 ammoniac, two drachms ; water, one pint and a half.   Dis-
 solve them, and  use for a wash.
   85. Stimulating glyster.  Common salt, and brown su-
 gar, of each one ounce;  olive  or  castor oil, two ounces;
 warm water half a pint, mix them.
   86. Emollient glyster.  Take flaxseed tea, and milk,  of
 each six ounces, mix them.
   87. Another.  Take warm water, half a pint; molasses
 ounces, mix them.
   88. Another.  Sweet oil, and brown sugar, of each, two
 ounces, mix them.   If one drachm or tea-spoonful of lauda-
 num be added to either of the emollient glysters, it forms the
 anodyne glyster.
   89. Tar water.   Pour a  gallon of water on two pounds
 of tar, and stir them strongly together with a wooden rod ;
 when they ha*e  stood to settle  two or three days, pour off
 the water for use.   It raises the pulse, increases the secre-
 tions, and is gently laxative,—dose, a gill, or more, three  or
 four times a day, on  an empty stomach.
   90.  Styptic water.  Blue vitriol and alum, of  each, one
 ounce and a half; water, one pint,—dissolve by boiling, then
 filter the liquor,  and  add a drachm of the oil of vitriol.  Us-
 ed to stop bleeding at the nose, and  other hemorrhages, by
 wetting a rag with it, and applying to the part.


                   PROMISCUOUS.

  91.  Fomentation  of popies.   Bruise four ounces of dried
poppy heads, and then boil them in six pints of water, until
a quart only remains.   This is to be applied to inflamed parts,
where there is much  pain.
  92.  Cooling lothn.   Dissolve  an ounce  of muriate of
ammonia in f>ur ounces  of common vinegar, and add ten
ounces of water ; to be applied  with  or  without  a cloth,  to
 inflamed surfaces.
  93.  Liniment for scalds and burns.  Take of linseed or
olive oil, lime water, each equal parts, or three ounces ; mix
by shaking them  together.  This is an excellent  application
to burns in any stage. 
256
RECEIPTS.
  94.  Cataplasm, or poultice for  ulcers.  Boil fresh car-
rots until they can be  beaten up  into a smooth pulp.   This
cataplasm is efficacious in cancers, as well as other ulcers.
  95.  Lotion for old xdcers.  Mix two drachms of muriat-
ic acid (spirit of salt,)  with a pint of water.  This cleanses
and heals the ulcers.
  96.  Charcoal poultice.  To half  a pound  of yeast, add
two  ounces of fresh  burnt  charcoal, finely powdered ancl
sifted.   Mix the wh >Ie  well together  and apply it  to foul
ulcers and venereal  sores.
  97.  Cure for corns.   Rub together in a mortar two oun-
ces of powder of  savin leave.-, ; half an  ounce of verdigris,
and half an ounce of red percipitate.  Put some of this pow-
der in a rag and apply it to the corn at bed time.
  98.  To  stop  bleeding after  extracting teeth.  Take  a
small cork, wet a dossil of lint in a solution of sugar of lead,
nut it on the end of the cork, and push the cork into the place
from  which the tooth was  taken, pressing it in firmly and
keeping it there until  the bleeding has ceased.
   99.  Eye waters, orcoilyria.   Take of extract of lead ten
drops,  rose water six ounces ;  mix and wash the eyes night
and morning.  Or, take of opium ten  grains, camphor six
grains,  hoi log water  twelve  ounces;  rub the opium and
camphor with the boiling water, ai.d strain,  and wash the
eves freopamtly.
   100. Or, take of white vitriol, half  a drachm; spirits of
camphor, one drac! m; warm water, two ounces;  rose water
four ounces : dissolve the vitriol in  the wa;er, and add spirit
of camp or,  and rose water.  This is useful in chronic in-
flammation of the eves, generally called weak eyes.
   101. Dr. 'JadclifVe's cough mixture.  Mix together four
drachms of syrup of - quills ; four drachms of paregoric ;  and
the same of s\ rup of poppies.  Take a tea-spoonful in warm
water or lea, as occasion may require.
   102.  ! or common use.   Oil  cf almonds, six drachms;
milk of almonds, five ounce;;  rose water,  or any svrup ;
gum arabic,  and  loaf sugar, each two drachms ; mixed well
together, a ;d two table-spoonful:  may be taken  four  times a
day.
   i0.'   K r diarrhea or looseness.   Take of powdered rhiw 
RECEIPTS.                    257
barb, ten grains; powdered chalk, with opium, one scruple;
make into four papers, take one night and morning.
   104. If the diarrhea is obstinate!, take bark  in powder,
two ounces ; powder of chalk with opium,  fifteen grains :
take this quantity four times  a day.  First a cathartic must
be given of fifteen grains rhubarb.
   105. Cure for piles.   Take  of galls,  in powders, two
drachms ; hogs lard, one ounce ;  make into an ointment, to
be applied bv means of lint:  take at the same time, quassia,
raspings, two drachms; boiling water, one pint: let it remain
three hours, strain and add aromatic confection, one drachm ;
ginger  in powder two scruples : take  of this,  two table-
>poonfuls twice a day.  This has  done wonders in this com-
plaint.
   106. Remedy for gout.   Take of  rhubarb  powdered,
crum guaiac,  nitre, flowers of sulphur,  each one  ounce, mo-
!r>:'es one pound ;  mix well together, take one tea-spoonful
twice a day.
   107.  Govt cordial.   Take of cardamom seeds,  husked
and  bruise.i ; caraway seeds,  bruised, each  two ounces ;
meadow saffron, half an ounce ; Turkey rhubarb, thinly sli-
ted, one ounce ; gentian root, three fourths of an ounce, in-
fuse in a quart bottle of good brandy, one week ; take a ta-
Mo-spuouiu! with the same quantity of water, every third
day.
   108.  We.\." pi':s.   Calomel, one ounce ;  sugar, two oun-
ces ; starch, one ounce ;  mucilage of gum tiagacanlh, a suf-
iici'jm quantity to mai.o two  hundred and forty-eight pills :
do*e, from one to two, twice  a day.
   109.  iliop:r'spilh.   Copperas, (.sulphate  of iron, sal
R.artis)  two  ouocs; pulverised alo:■-;, canella, cch one
pound; mucil; ^e of gum trrgacanth, and tinctuie  of aloes, of
c.a.hasuflica  i.; quantity; make eighteen pills of cachdracbm,
pui. for'; in u hox :  one morning and evening.
   i 10.  Lc\'-: V/'hdJ'a, a anti-bilious pills.  Gamboge, throe
pounds; ah.  , two pounds ;  cast-le soap,  one  p >und  ; salts
of nitre (s It po'/'\) half a pound ; extract  of c >w- ar.snip,
half a p.,und, luat iu a mars with a .sufficient <pi.oitity  of
spirits or !--ohis-.. ■.
   1!!.  Lce\j N- j-LrndanbHovspills.  Pulvori. e ' aloes,
twelve ounc^ ;  pui xriaed sca.'..mony,  sir. ounces ;  aulver- 
258
RECEIPTS.
ized gamboge, four ounces ; jalap, three ounces;  calomel,
five ounces ;  castile  soap, one ounce ;  syrup of buck-thorn,
one ounce ; mucilage qf gum Arabic, seven ounces ; mix
and make every two drachms into twenty-four pills.
   112,  Lip salve.   Melt together two ounces of white wax :
three ounces of spermaceti;  seven ounces oil of almonds, one
drachm of balsam of Peru, and one ounce of alkanet root, put
in  a linen  bag ; pour the salve in  boxes or  gallipots and
coxer with bladder or white leather.
   113.  Basilicon ointment. Take of yellow rosin, bees wax,
«ach one pound ; olive oil, one pint; melt the rosin and wax
with a gentle heat, then add the oil, strain while hot.  This is
used for all kinds of  sores, and a large plaster laid over the
breast will drive the  milk away.
   114.  Opodeldoc.  Camphor, one ounce ;  oil of rosemary,
one ounce; castile soap, two ounces;  high  w ines, (alcohol)
half a pint.
   115.  Steer's opodeldoc.   Castile soap,  three  pounds;
Uigh wines, three gallons; camphor,  twelve ounces ; oil of
rosemary three ounces :  oil of  origanum,  six ounces ; aqua
ammonia, two pounds.   Let it stand in a well  stopped  ves-
sel, exposed to moderate heat a day  or two.  This is made
solid or liquid by increasing or lessening the quantity of soap.
   116.  Hill's balsam of honey. Balsam tolu one pouid ;
honey one pound; S. V. R. ^iiis is the doctors' sign for rec-
tified spirit of wine, alco! ol, or simply high  wines,) one gal-
lon :  used in coughs and colds.
   in.  Balsam of horehov.nd.  Horehound, liquorice root,
each three and a h. If pounds ; water,  sufficient quantity to
strain six pints, in which steep, and to the liquor when strained,
add twelve pints i f brand) ; camphor, one ounce and a half;
opium,  flowers of bcnzion,  each one ounce ; honey three
pounds and a half.
   118.  Batcman's pectoral drops.  Castor,  two ounces;
opium, oil of anise, each one ounce;  camphor, eight ounces;
proof spirit, ten pints, and pulverized valerian and cochineal,
one ounce ; digest for ten days and strain.
   119.  Swinton's daffy.   Jalap root,  five  pounds; senna
leaves, seven pounds; anise seeds, fourteen pounds ; cara-
way seeds, four pounds ; brandy two gallons; alcohol, twen-
iv-six gallons; water, twenty-four gallons ;  let it stand  in a 
RECEIPTS.
259
 well stopped vessel three weeks, strain, then add molasses,
 twenty-eight pounds :  dose,  one to four table spoonsful.—
 This is an excellent remedy in flatulent colic.  It  may be
 made in small quantities, observing the proportions.   Coch-
 ineal sufficient to color.
    120.  Squire's elixir.  Opium, four ounces;  camphor, one
 ounce ;  cochineal, one  ounce ; oil foeniculi, two drachms;
 tincture of snake root,  one pint; anise seeds,  four  pounds,
 steeped  in two gallons of water ; musk, six ounces ; alcohol
  wo pints.
    121.  Black drop.    Half pound of opium; three pints
 good vinegar; one and a half ounces of nutmegs ; and half
 an ounce of saffron; boil them to a proper  thickness,  add a
 quarter of a  pound of sugar, and two spoonsful of yeast, set
 near the fire for a week, strain, and bottle it up, adding a lit-
 tle sugar to each bottle.
   122.  Godfrey's cordial.   Dissolve half an ounce of opi-
 um ;  one drachm (tea-spoonful) oil of sassafras, in two oun-
 «;«* of high wines; now mix four  pounds  of  molasses with
 one gallon of boiling water, and when cold mix both together.
 This is used to soothe the pains of children,  and for three
 shillings may be made, what will  cost  at the shop ten  or
 twelve dollar.?.
   123. Black pectoral lozenges.   Extract  of tiquorice;
 gum arabic, each  four ounces;  white sugar,  eight ounces:
 beat them all to powder,  and make into a mass with water,
 so as to form lozenges.   They are to  soften acrimonious  hu-
 mors, ancl may be taken at pleasure.
   124. Oxjmel of squills.   Take of clarified honey, three
 pounds ;  vinegar of squills, two pints; boil in a glazed ves-
 sel with a slow fire, to the thickness of a syrup.   This is of
 great use  in  all coughs: dose, two tea-spoonfuls  in  tea or
 water,—large dose will puke.
   12-3. Vinegar of'sauills.   Squills, one pound; vinegar,
 six pints ; spirits half a pint  : macerate the squills with the
vinegar, exposed to gentle heat for twenty-four hour.-, strain
and add the spirit.
   126. Beef tea.   Cut a pound of  lean beef in pieces, then
put it into a gallon of water, with the  under crust of broad,
and a small  portion of salt, boil down  to two quarts, and
17 
260                    RECEIPTS.
strain.  Or, cut a piece of lean beef fine and pour on boiling
water.
   127. Seidlitzpoivders.   Take of Rochelle salt, one dram ;
carbonate of soda, twenty-five grains ;  tartaric  acid, twenty
grains ; dissolve tie two first in a tumbler of water, then add
the latter, and swallow in a  hurry.
   12S. Soda poivders.   Soda half a drachm, in blue paper;
tartaric acid, twenty-five grains, in white paper, (nearly half
a tea-spoonful each,) dissolve in separate tumblers, half full of
water, sweetened,  pour  together and  drink immediately :
cooling in summer.
   <129.  Tooth powder.  Finely powdered charcoal makes
the best tooth powder.
   130. British o'l.   Oil of turpentine, eight ounces;  "ar-
badoes tar, four ounces ;  oil  of rosemary, four drachms.
   131. Pomatum.   One pound and a  ! aif leef marrow ;
cinnamon, one ounce and a half; white bee., w ., one pound ;
essence of bergamont, essence of lemon, of erch one ounce
and a half; oil of lavender, oil origanum, each  ur drachms.
   132. Styptic tine!are.   Copperas,  fnvh, one drachm,;
proof spirit and decoction of oak hark, each one pound.   This
is used to stop blood.
   133. Sponge tents.   Dip sponge  in inched  wax,  and
squeeze in a press while warm,  when cold,  cut into the r -
quired form.   Used to dilate fistulous ulcers.
   13-1. Emctin.   Toot of ipaoae, cue  orrce ; sulphmia
ether two ounces.  Let  the powder be macerated with a
gentle heat, for some : ours,  in a distilling appartus  ; let the
portion which remains be triturated and boiled "n four ounces
of alcohol, having  been previously macerated in it, let the
liquor filter, and let the remainder ho treated with fresh por-
tions of alcohol, as long as it  takes up any ;hingfrom the root:
mix aii the solutions, and evaporate to dryness:  macerate this
in cold water, (di-< o.-.! v :4er,) filter and evaporate to dry-
ness.  This extract is c  ein, the active matter cf ipecac.
   135. Eladlc gum &,  ugic.  Cat; '.t ;!:; •. e!   i eatcclly  in
a solution of elastic ".a: n  or Indian ii.'.'sr, inctiir or nap-
tha, until a rumcien! thickness of gum is deposited upon the
catgut.
   136.  El :stic gum  talhc'crs.   A  bougie, made of f-r.c
ca'gat, y.rs ihiaaly coated  wiih  wax,  bent to the prose" 
                             RECEIPTS.                     261

       curve, is dipped repeatedly in etheral solution of elastic gum,
       until a sudicient thickness of gum is deposited upon the bougie
       it is then dried perfectly in a warm room or stove ;  and  fi-
       nally boiled in water to melt out the wax and allow the cat-
       gut to  be withdrawn.
          137. Goulard's lotion.   Bitter almonds, one ounce ;  su-
       gar, two ounces; distilled water, two pounds; grind together,
       strain, and add corrosive  sublimate two scruples, previously
       ground with a wine-glassful of highwines.   Used as a wash
       in the  itch, and other eruptions of the skin.
          133. Issue peas.   Bees wax, one pound; iris florentine,
       two ounces ; vermilion, four ounces ;  Venice turpentine suf-
       ficient to mix : make into common sized peas.
          139. Tasteless ague drops.   White arsenic, one grain ;
       vvuter  one ounce; dissolve : dose, half a tea-spoonful night
       and morning, sure cure for the ague.
          140. Metals,  in general, will  unite  wiii each other  by
       fusion  or  amalgamation,  and acquire new  properties.  For
       instance, brass is a compound of copper and zinc, and differ
       in color from both.
          141. Misaic gild.  Melt* together equal parts of copper
r      and zinc,  at the low^t temperature that will fuse the copper ;
       stir them well to produce an intimate mixture  of the metals,
       and add bv degress small quantities of zinc, the alloy is first
       yello-y like bra .y on  adding more zinc it  becomes  purple,
       and lastly perfectly white.  The whole  quantity of zinc
       should exceed that of the copper.
          142. Queen's .ac'aJ.  Molt together four and a half pounds
       of tin,  half a pound of bhanuih, half a pound of antimony, and
       half a v emd of lead ;  this will make tea-pots,  ancl other ves-
       sel;;, which will imitate silver, and retain their brilliancy to
       tho last.
          143. Pel tombac.   Put into a crocihle  five and a  half
       poirds of  '■ m? or, when  m.'bed ail  half a pound of zinc;
       these will form an alloy of a reddish  color, possessing  more
       lustre  than cot/per, and greater durability.
          M \. Comwrn pewter.   Melt in a ormible seven pounds
       of tin,  arc) when fused throw in one pound of  lead, six oun-
       ces of copper, and two ounces of zinc.
          145. The bes' prwlt.r, consists of one hundred ['arts of tin,
       and seventeen of regulus of antimony.
                                  17' 
26*2
RECEIPTS.
    146. Common solder.  Put into a crucible two pound*
 of lead, ancl when melted, throw in one pound of tin:  this.
 alloy is well known by the name of solder.   It is used to join
 leaden pipes, and when  heated by  a hot iron, and applied to
 tinned iron, with powdered rosin, it acts as a cement or bol-
 der.
    147.  Hard solder.   Melt together two pounds of copper.
 and one pound of tin.
    148.  Soft solder.   Melt together two pounds of tin, and
 one of lead.
    149.  Printer's types.  Put into a crucible ten pounds of
 lead, and when it is in a state of fusion, throw in two pounds
 of antimony;  these metals, in such proportions, form the al-
loy of which common  printing types are  made.   The  anti-
 mony gives a hardness to the  lead,  without which the tvpe
 would speedily be rendered useless in a printing press.  Dif-
 ferent proportions of lead, copper, brass, and antimony, fre-
 quently constitute this metal.   Every artist has his own pro-
 portions, so that  the  same composition cannot be obtained
from  different founderies; each  boasts of  the superiority of
his own mixtures.
   !50. Small types,  and  stereotype plates.  Melt  rose
pounds of lead, and throw into the crucible two pounds of
antimony, and one pound of bismuth ; these metals will com-
bine,  forming an alloy of a peculiar quality.  This quality is
expansion as it cools, it  is therefore well >uited for  the  for-
mation of small printing types ; particularly when many are
cast together to fern stereotype plates, as  the  whole of the
mould is accurately filled with the alloy ; consequently there
can be no blemish in the letters.   If a metal or alloy liable
to contract in cooling were to  be used, the  effect  would of
course be very different.   Proprietors of dillercnt founder'**
-;dopt dilleient compositions.
   151.  Mode of  casting.   For stereotype plates, plaster of
paris, of the consistence of a batter-pudding before baking, i*
[toured over the letter press page, ;.nd worked into the inn r-
stices of the types with a brush ; it is then collected from  the
sides by a slip of iron or wood, so as to l'->  smooth and com-
pact.   In about two minutes  the wh de  is hardened  into a
solid cake ;  this is now put upon a rack in  an oven,  where
it undergoes great  heat,  so as to  drive off superfluous mois-
ture   When read; for use, these moulds, according to their 
RECEIPTS.                    263
 Size, are placed in flat cast iron pots, and are covered over
 by another piece of cast iron  perforated at each end, to admit
 the metalic composition.   The pots are now fasted to a crane
 which carries it steadily to the metalic bath, or melting pot,
 where they are immersed and kept for a  considerable time,
 until all the crevices and pores of the  mould are completely
 filled.  When this is completed  the  pots are elevated from
 the bath, bv working the crane, ancl are placed over a water
 trough to cool gradually ; when  cold, the whole is turned
 out of the pots, and the plaster being separated by hammering
 and washing,  the plates are ready for  use, having received
 the most exact and perfect impression.
    152.  Metalic injections.   Melt together equal  parts of
 bismuth, lead, and tin, with a sufficient quantity of quicksil-
 ver ; tliis with the further addition of mercury is used to in-
 ject the vessels in  many anatomical preparations,  also for
 taking casts of many cavaties of the body, as of the ear.   The
'animal substance is destroyed by a solution of potash, and the
 metalic will be perfect.
    153.  For cushions of electrical machinery.   Melt in a
 crucible two drachms of zinc, and one of tin:  when fused,
 pour them into a  cold crucible, containing five  drachms of
 mercury ; these will form an alloy  (amalgam)  which is to
 be rubbed on the  cushions that press the cylinder of an elec-
 trical machine.  First rub the cushion with tallow and bees
 wax.
    154.  To plate looking-glass.   On  tin-foil, fitly disposed
 on a flat tahle, mercury is to  be  poured,  and gently rubed
 with a hair's foot;  it soon unites with the tin, which as the
 workmen say is quickened.  A  plate  of glass is then cau-
 tiously to be slid upon  the tin-leaf, in such a manner as to
 sweep off the redundant mercury, which has not mixed with
 the tin, leaden weights arc then  to be  placed on  the glass,
 and in a little time the quick-silvered tin-foil  adheres to  the
 glass, and the weights may be removed, two ounces of mer-
 cury will cover three square i'ci't.
   155. Liquid foil for silvering glass globes.   Melt  to-
 gether one  ounce  of clean lead, and one  ounce  of fine
 tin, in a clean  iron ladle, then add one ounce of bismuth;
 skim off the dross, remove the  ladle from  the fire, and before
 it  sets, add ten  ounces of  quicksilver; now  stir  the whole
 carefully together,  taking care not to breath  over it,  pour 
264
RECEIPTS.
this through an earthen pipe into the glass globe, which turn
repeatedly  round until it is silvered all over, if any remain
let it run out.
  156.  Another.  One part of mercurv, one of tin ; or two
parts of mercury, one of tin, one of lead, and one of bismuih,
melted together and used as the above.
  157.  Brass.  Put four and a half pounds of copper into
a crucible, expose it to heat in a furnace, and when perfectly
fused add one and a half pounds of zinc.  The  metals will
combine, and form the alloy, called  brass.
  158.  Pinchbeck.   Put five ounces of pure copper  into a
crucible, when it is melted add one ounce of zinc.  These
metals form an alloy similar to jeweler's gold ;  pour it  into a
mould of any shape : this is used in jewelry.
  159.  Bronze.   Melt in a crucible seven pounds of copper,
throw into  it three pounds of  zinc, and two pounds of tin,
these combine and form bronze, which has  been generally
used in the formation of busts, medals, and statues.
  160.  Imitation of platina.  Melt together eight ounces
of brass and five ounces of spelter.
  161.  Gilding metal.  Melt together four parts of copper,
one of brass, ancl four ounces of tin to every pound of copper.
  162.  A good dipping metal, may be made of one pound
of copper to five ounces of spelter, the copper must be  tough
cake,  and not tile.
  163.  Imitation of silver.   When copper is melted with
tin, about three fourths of an ounce  of tin to a pound of cop-
per, will make a pale metal which  will ring  very near to
silver.
  164.  Solder, for steel joints.  Take of fine silver nineteen
pennyweights, copper one do., and brass two do., melt  under
a coat of charcoal dust.  This is the best solder for steel.
  165.  Brass solder for iron.   Melt  thin pieces of brass
between the pieces that are to be joined ;  if the work is ve-
ry fine,  covin- it with pulverized borax, that it may incorpo-
rate with the brass; then expose to the fire without touching
the  coals, and heat until the brass is seen to  run.
  166.  Silver solder for jewelers.   Melt together nineteen
pennyweights of fine  silver, copper one  pennyweight, and
brass ten pennyweights. 
RECEIPTS.
265
   167. Silver solder for plating.   Melt ten pennyweights
of brass, and one ounce of pure silver together.
   168. Gold solder.  Melt together  of pure gold twelve
penny weights, pure silver two penny weights, and copper
four penny weights.
   169. Ring gold.  Molt  together Spanish copper six pen-
ny weights and twelve grains, tine silver three  penny weights
and sixteen grains, to one ounce  five penny weights of gold
 coin.   This alloy will sell for 3 pounds sterling, per ounce.
   170. Another.  Melt together eight ounces and a half of
Spanish copper, ten pennyweights of fine silver, to one ounce
of geld.  This is worth forty  shillings per ounce.
   171. Imitation of gold.   Me ll together  three ounces and
a half copper, one ounce  and a half of  brass, ancl  fifteen
grains of pure tin.
   172. To gild glass and porcelain.   Drinking, and other
glasses may be gilt by adhesive varnish,  or by heat.  The
varnish is prepared by  dissolving in  boiled  1 nseed  oil an
equal weight of copal or amber;  this to be diluted by a pro-
per quantity of oil of turpentine, so as to be applied as thin
as possible to the parts of the  vessel to be gilt.  When this
is done, which will be in about twenty-four hours, the glass
is to be placed in a stove till it is so  warm as almost to burn
the fingers when  handled.   At this temperature the varnish
will become adhesive, and a piece of leaf gold applied in the
usual way  will immediately stick; sweep off the superfluous
portions of leaf, and when quite  cold it may  be burnished,
interpose a piece  of thin paper between the gold and the bur-
nisher.
   173.  Another.   When the varnish is not  good, the gold
washes off*after a while, on  thisaccount it is sometimes burn-
ed in.   For this purpose, grind some gold powder with bor-
ax, and in this slate  apple to  the surface of  the glass by a
camels hair pencil; when quite dry, the glass is  put into a
stove heated to about the temperature of an annealing oven,
the  gum burns off (the varnish first  spoken of being applied
as directed  in 173,) and the  borax hyi vitrifving cements  the
gold with great firmness to the glass.'f after  which it may be
burnished.   The gilding upon porcelain is  in the like man-
ner fixed by heat  and the use  of borax.  It may be brought 
266
RECEIPTS.
to a low red  heat.  Porcelain and other wares may be pla-
tanized, silvered, tinned, and bronzed in a similar manner.
   174.  To gild leather.   The  leather must first be dusted
over with very finely powdered resin, or mastich gum.  The
iron tools  or stamps are now  arranged on  a rack  before a
clear fire, so  as to be well heated, without becoming red hot.
Each tool or  stamp must be tried as to its heat, by imprinting
it on the raw side of a piece of waste leather ;  a little  prac-
tice will enable the workman to judge of the ! eat.   The tool
is now to be  pressed downwards on the gold leaf, which will
be indented and show the figure imprinted upon  it.  The
letters or stamps are to be used in succession, taking care to
keep the work in straight lines.  By this operation the resin
is matted and the gold adheres to the leather ;  the superflu-
ous gold may be rubbed off by a cloth, which must be slightly
greasy to save the gold w7iped off.   When  these clothes are
saturated they are sold  to the refiners who burn  them and
recover the gold : these are sometimes worth twenty  or thirty
shillings.
   175.  To gild writings, drawings, fyc. on paper or parch-
ment.   Mix  a little  size  with the  ink,  and the  letters are
written  as usual ; wrhen they are dry, a slight degree of  stick-
iness is  produced by breathing on them, upon which gold leaf
is immediately applied, and by a little pressure may be made
to adhere, the superfluous gold may be wiped off.
   176.  To gild silk, satin,  ivory, fyc. by hydrogen  gass.
Immerse a piece of white silk,  satin,  or ivory in a solution
of nitro-muriate of gold, in the proportion of one part of the
nitro-muriate, to three of  distilled  water.   Whilst  it is still
wet immerse it into ajar of hydrogen gas, it will soon be covered
with a coat of gold.   Flowers and other ornaments may be
made on silk, &c. by means of a fine camel hair pencil, ancl
held over a vessel from which hydrogen gass  escapes, and
the flowers will soon shine with metalic briliancy.  In this
manner silks, &c. may be  gilt at a most insignificant expense,
and the flowers will remain permanent.
   177.   To dissolve gold in  aqua regia.   Take two parts
of aqua fortis, one part of muriatic  acid, make the gold fine,
put it into a sufficient  quantity, expose to a moderate degree
of heat. During the solution an effervesscnce takes place, and
it acquires a  beautiful yellow color,  which increases  till it has
a golden, or even an orange color.   When the menstruum is 
                        RECEIPTS.                     l()"i

 saturated it is transparent.  For use, to  this must be added
 three parts of distilled water, (or rain water received from the
 clouds in a clean vessel will answer.)
    178.  To procure hydrogen gas.  Fit a cork to the mouth
 of any glass vessel, through the cork put a glass tube, or to-
 bacco pipe ;  in the vessel half filled with water, put iron fil-
 ings, or small nails, to this add one third part of oil of vitriol,
 (sulphuric acid,)  a small quantity  at a time ;  and then stop
 the vessel with the cork before mentioned, the silk or any
 other subject of experiment may be put in another vessel stop-
 ped, only to admit the projecting end of the tube  so that the
 glass mav  pass into the jar  containing the silk.  Care must be
 taken to keep children from these, as they would be injured
 by taking any of the substances used in these experiments.
    179.  To gild  copper,  <S,-c. by  amalgam.  Immerse a    >
 bright, clean piece of  copper, in a diluted solution of  nitrate
 e.f mercurv.  Now spread the amalgam of gold, rather  thinly,
 over the coat of mercurv just given to the copper.  Place the
 pieces in a clean oven  or furnace where there is no smoke.
 If the heat is  more than  660  degrees, the mercury will be
 volatilized, and the copper will be beautifully gilt.   Where
 much gilding  is done the ovens are so contrived that the mer-
 cury is again condensed, and saved for further  use.
   180.  To gild steel.   Pour, ethereal solution  of gold into
 a wine glass,  and  dip the blade of a new penknife, lancet, or
 razor, into it, withdraw the instrument and allow the ether
 to evaporate.   Or a clean rag, or dry sponge may be  dipped
 in the solution and the blade moistened therewith.  In either
 case  it will be found to  be coveted with a  beautiful  coat
 of gold.  It is the  best way to moisten the sponge or  rag,
 ancl  not have  the solution in a glass, for it  evaporates speedi-
 ly if in an open vessel: keep the preparation in well stopped
 phial.   This is the process by which swords and other cut-
 lery are ornamented.
   181. Gold powder for gilding.   Put into an  earthen
 mortar some gold leaf, with a little honey or thick gum  wa-
 ter, and grind  the mixture  until the gold is reduced to  extre-
 mely minute particles.  When this is done a little warm wa-
 ter, will wash  out  the bonny or gum, leaving the gold behind
 in a pulverulent state.
   182.  To cover  bars <f copper, <$*c. with gold, so as to
be rolled out into sheets.   Take pieces of copper or brass, of 
268
RECEIPTS.
convenient  size, clean them from impurity, make their sur-
face level, and  prepare plates  of pure gold, or gold mixed
with a portion of alloy, of the same size of the other metal,
and of suitable  thickness.   Place the gold, upon  the other
plate, and hammer and compress them both together, so that
they may have their surfaces as near equal to each other as
possible.  Then bind them together  with wire.   Mix silver
filings with  borax, and lay them upon the edge of the plate of
gold, and next to  the  other metal.   Now  place them on a
fire, in  a stove or  furnace, and let them remain  until the sil-
ver ancl borax melt.   By this process the ingot is plated with
gold, and prepared ready for rolling into sheets.
   1S3.  Grecian gilding.  Equal parts of sal ammoniac  and
corrosive sublimate,  are dissolved in spirit of nitre, ancl a so-
lution of gold  made with  this  menstruum.   The  silver is
brushed over with it, which is turned black, but on exposure
to a red heat it assumes the color of gold.
   1S4.  To make  amalgam of gold.   A quantity of quick-
silver is put into a  crucible, or iron ladle, which'is lined with
clay, and exposed  to heat until it begins to smoke.  The gold
previously graunlated, ancl heated red hot, must be added to
the quicksilver, and  stirred about with  an iron rod  till it is
perfectly dissolved. If there is any superfluous mercury it may
be separated by passing it through clean soft  leather ;  and the
remaining amalgam will have  the consistence of butter,  and
contain  about three parts of mercury to one of gold.
   185.  To gild by  amalgamation.   The metal  must  be
cleaned by  boiling it in a very weak solution of nitric acid.
Dissolve quicksilver in a botth- containing aqua fortis, leave
it in the open air during the solution, so that the noxious  va-
por escapes  info the air.  Pour  a little into a basin, and with
a brush  dipped (herein, pass over the surface to be gilt, it  im-
mediately becomes white.   This is called quicking.  Now
apply a portion of the amalgam upon one part of the metal,
and spread over the surface by means of a stiff brush.
   This  is now  put into a pan and exposed  to a gentle heat.
When hot, it must be  taken out and worked about with a paint-
er's brush  to prevent  its being  uneven, and this is  repeated
until the  mercury is  disipaled, the gold remaining attached
to the surface.  This  surface is well cleaned  by a wire brush.
   186.  To silver by heat.  Dissolve an ounce of pure sil-
ver in aqua fortis, and precipitate it  with  common salt; te 
RECEIPTS.                    260
which add 1-2 lb. of sal ammoniac, sandiver, and white vit-
riol, and  1-4 oz. corrosive sublimate.   This is to be ground
into a paste upon  a fine stone, tl)e substance to be silvered
must be rubbed  over with  a  sufficient quantity of the  paste.
and exposed to proper  heat.  When  the  silver runs it is
taken from the fire and clipped into a weak solution of  spirit
of salt (muriatic acid) to clean it.
   187. To silver in the cold ivay.   Dissolve pure silver in
aqua fortis, and  precipitate the silver by adding common salt;
make this precipitate into a paste, by adding  a little more
salt and cream of tartar.   This is to be rubbed on the surface
with a cork or sponge.
   188. To plate iron.   Place slips of thin solder between
the  iron ancl silver, with a  little flux, ancl secure together
by binding wire.  It is then  placed in a clear  fire, and con-
tinued in it till  the  solder melts,  it is then taken out, ancl on
cooling is found  to adhere firmly.
   189. To tin copper and brass. Boil together six pounds
of cream of tartar ;  four gallons  of water; eight pounds of
grain tin,  or tin  shavings. After these have  boiled for a time,
the substance to be  tinned is put in, ancl the boiling continued
and the tin adheres to the copper, or brass.
   lH'i. To tin iron and other vessels.  The iron must be
steeped in acid materials, and then scoured and clipped in
melted tin, having  been first rubbed  over with a solution of
sal ammoniac.   The tin  surface  is kept  from coloring by
covering it with a coat of fat.  Copper vessels must be well
cleaned,  and a sufficient quantity of tin is put therein, with
sal ammoniac ; and brought into fusion, and  the vessel  moved
about.
   191.  To prepare,  the silver tree.   Pour into a glass  de-
canter four drachms of nitrate of silver, dissolved in a  pound
or more of distilled water, and set the vessel where  it may
not be disturbed.  Now pour in  lour drachms of mercury, in
a short time the-silver will be precipitated in the most beauti-
ful arborescent  form, resembling re.d  vegetation.   This is
termed the Arbor Diana.
   192.  Metalic watering, or for blanc moire.   This is em-
ployed to cover ornamental cabinet  work, dressing  boxes,
telescopes, opera glasses, &c.   Sulphuric,  or any acid is to
be diluted with from  seven to nine parts of  water, then dip  a 
270
RECEIPTS.
sponge or rag into it, and wash with it the surface of a sheet
of tin.  This will speedily exhibit an appearance of crystali-
zation, which is the moire.  When the moire has been form-
ed, the plate is to be varnished and polished, the varnish be-
ing tinted with any glaring color, and thus  the red, green,
yellow, and pearl colored moires are manufactured.
   193.  To flower silks, fyc. with silver.   Dissolve nitrate
of silver in distilled water, draw flowers, or any other figures
upon silk, or ribands, ancl the silk moisted with water, be ex-
posed to  the action of hydrogen gass,  (as directed  in  gilding
with gold,)  the silver will be revived, and the figures will be
firmly fixed, and shine with metalic brilliancy.
   194.  Welding steel, iron, and cast-steel.   Melt borax in
an earthen vessel,  and add one tenth as much sal ammoniac,
pounded  fine.  When  well mixed pour it  out on an iron
plate, and as soon as it is qpld, pulverize and  mix it with an
equal quantity of unslaked lime.  Heat  the  metal red hot,
then strew the powder over it, the pieces of metal are again
to be put in the fire, and raised to a heat, considerable lower
than the  usual welding one, when it is to be withdrawn and
well beaten by a hammer, till the surfaces are perfectly united.
   195.  Case hardening, is a superficial conversion  of iron
into steel by cementation.  It is performed on small pieces of
iron, enclosed in an iron box  containing burnt leather, any
phlogistic  substance, and  exposing them  for some time to a
red heat.   Iron thus treated is susceptible of the finest polish.
   196.  English cast-steel is prepared by, breaking to pieces
blistered steel, and then melting it in a crucible with a flux
composed  of carbonaceous and verifiable ingredients.  The
vitrifiable  ingredients is used only in as much as itis a fusible
body, which flows  over the surface of the metal in the cruci-
bles, and prevents  the  access of the air.  Broken glass will
answer for this purpose.  When  thoroughly  fused  it is cast
into  ingots which by gently heating, and carefully hammering
are tilled  into bars.  The steel  becomes more brittle, and
more highly carbonized in  proportion to the  carbon,  coal or
chalk used.
   197.  To make  edge-tools from  cast-iron.   Pour  the
melted steel on a piece of wrought iron, previously brought to
a welding heat, and placed in the centre of a mould : cover
the iron entirely, and then forge  into the shape required.
   198.  To color steel blue.  Polish the steel finely, then ex- 
RECEIPTS.
271
  pasj to an uniform degree of heat.  There are 3 ways :  1st.
  By a llama producing no soot, as spirit of wine.  2d. By a
  hot plate of iron.  And 3rdly. By wood ashes.   Wood ashes
  for fine work bears the preference.  The work must be covered
  over with ashes and watched, when the color is sufficiently
  heightened, the color is  perfect.
     199. To give a drying  quality to poppy oil.   Into  3
  poinds pure water put 1 oz. of  wfiite vitriol, and mix  the
  whole  with two pounds of oil of  pinks, or of poppies.  Ex-
  pose in a firm earthen vessel, to a sufficient heat to produce
  simmering.   When one half of the water is evaporated, pour
  the whole  in a jar and leave it until the oil becomes clear.
  Decant the clearest part by means of  a glass  funnel.  Stop
  the funnel witn a cork,  and  when the oil has risen  to the top
  of the water, take  out the cork and supply its place with the
  linger,  and be  careful to let only the water escape by your
  linger:  retaining the oil.
    200.  To give a drying quality to fat oils.  Take nut,
  or linseed  oil 8 lbs ;  white  lead  slightly calcined ; yellow
  acetate  of lead ; calcined white vitiriol, each 1  oz.  ; litharge
  12 oz.: one head  of garlic.  Pulverize the dry substances,
  •.rid mix them with the  garlic and oil,  over a fire capable of
  keeping the oil in  a slight sfate of ebuliton, continue it until
  fho oil ceases to throw up ;cum, and the head of the garlic is
  brown.
    Take  from the fire, and let it settle, when the oil become?!
  (dear, pour it o.f carefully into large mouthed bottles :  it will
 clarify itself in time and  improve in quality.
   201.  For coarse painting.   Limbed ml may  be used,
 but fir iine and delicate painting nut, or poppy  nil will be re-
 quired.
   202.  Aanlher.   Take of nut oil 2 lbs. ; common wafer 3
 lb*. ; white vuriol  2 oz.  Mix  and sin ..it to  -1 g!it  boiPug
 till little remains, separate die oil  from ih.o  water as bcii re
 directed  : if will  soon hemmc clear.
   20J. Ri'Mnous  dr;p.ng oil.   If the  paint is destined for
 external  articles, take 10 lbs. of drying mil  oil ;  (if ;". r in-
 terned, 10 lbs. drying linseed oil;)  r< >on '.' les. ;  turpentine
 6 oz.  Cause the resin  to dissolved tho oil by a gentle heat ;
 when dis; dvedadd the turpentine, pour oil' from the sediment,
and preserve in wide mouthed bottles, o  met always be uted
 fresh. 
S72
RECEIPTS.
  204.  Fat copal varish.  Take picked copal,  16 oun€es,
prepared linseed oil, or oil of poppies, 8 ounces, spirit of tur-
pentine  10 ounces.   Liquify the copal over a common fire,
then add the oil, in a state of ebullition ; when these are in-
corporated, take the vessel from the  fire, and when the heat
has partly subsided, add the turpentine warm. Strain through
cloth, and put into a bottle.
  C<•■';.  Varnish for watch cases in imitation of tortoise
shell.   Copal of an  amber  color 6  oz.;  Venice turpentine
1 1-2 oz.; prepared linseed oil 24 oz. ; essence  of turpen-
tine  6 oz.  In a vessel liquify the copal, make the oil hot and
add it, then the Venice  turpentine  heat, and lastly the es-
sence.
  206.  Colorless copal varnish.   Take  of such copal as
moistens by letting of rosemary drop upon it.  Reduce them
to powder, and sift through a  fine hair sieve.   Put it into a
glass, on the bottom of which it must lie more than  a finger's
breadth thick ; pour upon it essence of rosemary to a similar
height;  stir  the whole  until the copal is dissolved into a
viscous  fluid.   Let  it stand for.two  hours, and  then pour
gently on it two or  three drops of alcohol, which  distribute
over the oily mass, by inclining the  bottle  in difieia-nt direc-
tions with a very gentle motion.    Repeat this  ly little and
little, till the vandish is of a proper degree  of fluidity. When
it ha> stood a few days decant  off.  This may be applied to
pas;o board, wood ancl metals, and on paintings, the beauty of
which it greatly heightens.
   207.   Gold colored varnish.   Copal in  powder  1  oz. ;
essential oil of lavender  2 oz. ; essence of turpentine 5 oz.
Put the essential oil in a vessel upon  a sand bath, heated by
a moderate fire.   Add to the oil  while v< ry warm, and  at
several  times the copal powder, stirring the mixture with a
white-wood stick.   V/hen the  copal has disappeared, and  at
three limes the', essence nearly  boding, and keep stirring the
mixture.   The result is a varnish of a gold color.
   208.  Car,..c.horuh d . ^aslic  varnish for ponitlr.^s.   Take
of mastic, cleaned and washed  12 oz. ;  pure terpentine 1 1-2
oz.  ; cam. her 1-2 oz. ; white ghes, pounded, 5 o::. ; essence
of uirpcmin;:  36 oz.  P.  luce the mastic to fine powder, mix
this powder  w.ih the glass ooan-ely pounded, put them all,
  r     the camphor and turpentine, together in a sler! neck-
 ed  m'.ss vessel, prepare a  while-wood  stick to  stir it with. 
RECEIPTS.
271
Set this vessel into another filled with water, whirh must be
made to boil for tw^ or three hours.   When the solution ap-
pears to be sufficiently extended add the turpentine and cam-
phor, the  next day it must be drawn off and filtered through
cotton.
   209. Shaw's mastic varnish for painting.  Bruise may-
tic with a muller on a painter's stone, which will detect the
soft; parts, or tears, which are to be rejected, and 6  oz. of the
remainder put into a clean bottle with  14 oz. of good spirit*
of turpentine, (twice distilled if vou  can get it.)  Dissolve
the gum by shaking the bottle in  your hand for half an hour
without heat; then strain through a piece of calico, and place
it in a well-corked bottle where the light of the sun can strike
it, for two or three  weeks, which will cause a mucilaginous
precipitate,  leaving the remainder as transparent as water,
which may. then bj decanted into another  bottle and put by
for use.   If found on trial  to be too thickj thin it with tur-
pentine.
   210. To make painter's cream.   Take of very clear nut
oik 3 ounces ;  mastic in teors, pulverized, 1-2 oz.; acetate
of lead, in powder, 1-3 of an ounce.   Dissolve the mastic in
oil, over a gentle fire ; pour the mixture on to the a.cetafo of
lead in a marble mortar; stir with a weoden  pestio, adding
water in small quantities, until the matter appears like cream,
aad refuses to admit more water.
   211.  Sandaric vanuch.  Gum sandaric 8 oz.;  pounded
mastic, 2 oz. ; clear turpentine, 4  oz. ;  pounded gl  ss 4 oz.;
alcohol 32 oz.   Mix and dissolve as before.
   '.'12.  Compound sandarac varnish.  Powdered copal of
an amber  color, once liqeified, 3 oz. ; gum sandarac, 6 oz.  ;
mastic cleansed, 3 <>/..  : <dear turpentine, 2 1-2 oz.  ; pound-
ed glass, 4 oz. ;  m  re alcohol, c2  oz.   Mix, and pursue the
same method as above.  This is a durable varnisli  for furni-
ture.
   213.  IVaz varnish far fir aiture.   Moll over a moderate
fire,  in a very clean ve sol, Iwo ounces of whin- or yellow
wax ;  and when liquefied, add four ounces of g > 0  essence
cf turpentine.   SOr'h, v.holc "nl.il it  is entirely   ol, and
the result  wfll be a i. nd of pomade, fit fir waxing  furndure.
   21'.  To  racke tirner\ rarnish fr  loxicoi l.  dV.hc
seed  km, a mo ;  gum sandarac, 2  <,::.; gum elen i,  I 1-2 oz.; 
274
RECEIPTS.
 Venice turpentine, 2 oz.;  pounded glass 5 oz.; pure aleo-
 hoi, 24 oz.   (For a mode of bleaching seed or shell lac for
varnishes, see " Bleaching,")
   115.  Gallipot varnish.  Take of gallipot or white incense,
 12 oz. ;  white glass pounded, 5  oz. ;  Venice turpentine, 2
ounces ;  essence of turpentine, 32  ounces.   Make the var-
 nish after the white incense has been pounded with the glass.
   216. Lacquer for brass.  Take of seed lac,  six ounces :
 amber or copal, ground on porphyry, two ounces ;  dragon's
 blood, forty  grains ; extract of red sandal  wood obtained Ly
 water, thirty grains;  oriental saffron, thirty grains;  pounded
glass, four  ounces;  very pure alcohol,  forty  ounces.   To
apply this varnish  to articles of brass, expose them to a gen-
tle heat, and then dip them into the varnish.   Two or three
coatings may  thus be given  if necessary.  The varnish is
 durable, and has a beautiful color.
   217. To prepare water proof boots.   Take three ounces
of spermaceti, and melt it  in an  earthen  over  a slow  fire;
add thereto  six drachms of India rubber,  cut into slice?, and
after it dissolves add of tallow, eight ounces ;  hogs lard, tw©
ounces ;  amber varnish, four ounces ; mix, and it will be fit
for use immediately.
  218. To make  leather and other articles  water proof
Dissolve one pound of India rubber, cut into bits, the smaller
the better, in two  gallons of  pure spirits of  turpentine, In-
putting them together into a  tin vessel that will hold four
gallons.  This vessel is to be immersed in cold water con-
tained in a boiler,  to which fire is to be applied so as to make
the water boil, occasionally supplying what is lost by evap-
oration, until the India rubber is  dissolved.  Fifteen pounds
of pure bees wax  are now to he  dissolved in 1; u gallons cf
pure spirits of turpentine,  to which add two  pounds of bur-
gundv pitc!  , and one pound of gum frankincerse.   It  is to
be dissolved  in the; same  way as the  India rubber.   Then
mix  the Iwo solutions, a.nd when  cold,  add one gallon of co-
pal varnish, and ten gallons of lime  water, one gallon at a
time, stirring it well up for six or eight hours in succession,
and repeating, when any is taken out.  If it is wanted black.
mix  two pounds of lampblack with two ga:i ais of  spirits of
turpentine,  (deducting the two gallons from the quantity pre-
viously employed,)  and add it  before putting  in  the  lime 
RECEIPTS.                    275
 vvnier.   To use it, lay it on with a painter's brush and rub
 it in.
   219.  To make black ja mi n.  Take of boiled oil, one gal-
 lon ;  umber, eight ounces; asphaltum, three ounces; oil of
 turpentine, enough to reduce it to a proper thinness.
   220.  To make blacking.   Ivory black and molasses, of
 each  twelve ounces;  spermaceti oil, four  ounces;  white
 wine vinegar, four pints.
   221.  To make Bailey's composition for blacking cakes.
 (4urn tragacanth, one ounce ; neat's foot oil, superfine ivoiy
 black, deep blue, prepared from iron  and copper,  each two
 ounces ; brown sugar ear.dv, river water, each four ounces  :
 mix them well, and evaporate the water, and form your cakes.
   222.  To make-blacking balls for shoes.  Mutton suet,
 fe i.r ounces ; beeswax, one ounce ; sweet oil,  one ounce ;
 sugar candy, and gum arabic, one drachm each, in fine pow-
 der ;  melt together over a gentle fire,  and add thereto about
 a spoonful of turpentine, and  lampblack sufficient to give it
 a good black color ;  while hot enough to run, make it into a
 hall  by  pouring it  into a  tin mould ; or let  it  stand, and
 mould it by the hand.
   223.  To make liquid japan blacking.   Three ounces of
 ivory black: two of sugar ; one of sulphuric acid; one of
 muriatic acid ;  and one table-spoonful of sweet oil ancl lemea
 acid,  and one pint of vinegar.  First mix the ivory black and
 sweet oil together,  then the lemon and sugar, with a litt!"
 vinegar, to qualify the blacking, then acid  the  sulphuric and
 ; oiriatic acids,  and mix them all well together.
  2 24.  A cheap method.   Ivory black, two ounces ; brown
 sugar, one and  a half ounces; sweet oil, half a table-spoon-
 ful :  mix them  well, and then  gradually add half  a pint of
 small beer.
  225.  To make turpentine varnish.   Mix  one gallon of
oil of turpentine wnii five pounds of powdered  resin ;  put it
 in a tin can on  a stove, boil for half an hour, and when eold
 it is fit for use.
  226.  To make  varnishes for violins, Src.  To a gallon
 of rectified spirit of wine, add  six  ounces of gum sandarac,
 i hree ounces of gum  mastic, and  half a pint of  turpentine
 varnish ; put the whole into a tin can, which keep in a warm
"1 
276                    RECEIPTS.
place, frequently shaking it, for twelve days, until it is dis-
solved ; then strain, and keep for use.
   227.  To varnish glass.  Pulverize  a quantity of gum
adragant, and let it dissolve for twenty-four hours in the white
of eggs well beat up, then rub it gently on the glass with a
brush.
   228.  To make white copal varnish.   On sixteen ounces
of melted copal, pour four, six or eight ounces of linseed oil
boiled, and free from grease ; when well mixed by repeated
stirrings, and after they are  pretty cool, pour  in sixteen oun-
ces of the essence of Venice  turpentine, and strain  through a
cloth.  Amber varnish is made in the same way.
   229.  To make black copal varnish.   Lampblack, made
of burnt vine twigs,  black of peach stones ;  the  lampblack
must be carefully washed  and afterwards dried.
   230.  To make yellow copal  varnish.   Yellow oxide of
lead of Naples  and Montpellier,  both reduced to impalpable
powder.   These yellows are hurt by the contact cf iron and
steel; in mixing them up, therefore, use a horn spatula, and
a glass mortar and pestle.
   231.  To make blue copal  varnish.   Indigo,  Prussian
blue, blue  verditer, and ultra marine.   All  these  must li-
very much divided.
   232.  To make India  rubber varnish.   Dissolve India
rubber, cut small, in five times it weight of rectified essential
oil of turpentine, by keeping them some days  together ; then
boil one ounce  of this solution in eight ounces of drying lin-
seed oil for a few minutes;  strain the solution and vise  i;
warm.
   233.  To make economical  white house  paint.   Skin.
milk, two quarts ;  fresh slacked  lime, eight ounces; linseed
oil, six ounces;  white burgundy pitch, two ounces ;  Spanish
white, three pounds; slack the lime with water, mix it with
one fourth of the milk, and expose to the air.  The oil in
wnicn the pitch has been  previously dissolved, is then to be
■Mided, a little at a time : then the rest of the milk, and after-
wards the  Spanish white.   This quantity is sufficient for
nventy-seven square yards,  two  coats,  and the expense not
more than ten pence.
   234.  To make cheap beautiful green paint.   The  cost
of tins paint is less than one  fourth of oil color, and the beau- 
RECEIPTS.
277
?y far superior.  Take four  pounds Roman vitriol, and pour
on it a tea-kettle full of boiling water,  when dissolved add
two  pounds of pearlash, and stir the mixture well with a
stick, until the effervescence ceases ; then add a quarter of
a pound of pulverized yellow arsenic, and stir the whole to-
gether.   Lay it on with a paint brush, and  if the wall lias
not teen painted before, two or even three coats  will he re-
quisite.  To paint a common sized room with this color will
not cost more than five or six  dollars.  If you wish a pea-greon
put in less, if an apple-green, more of the yellow  arsenic.
   235.  To make a  composition for rendering  canvas,
linen, and cloth, durable, pliable, and water proof  First,
to take  out the stiffenimr, wash it with  hot water, dry it, rub
it with  the hand, stretch tight on a frame,  ancl let the first
coat be made thus : take eight quarts  of boiled linseed oik
half an  ounce of burnt umber, a quarter of an ounce each of
sugar of lead, white vitriol, and white lead,  grind all fine,
except the white lead, with  a little of the oil on a stone and
muller ; then mix all the ingredients with the oil, and add
three ounces of lampblack, deprived of its grease  by stirring
in a broad iron vessel over a slow fire.  For the second coat,
take  the same ingredients as before except the white load ; it
will  set in a few hours according to the weather,  with a dry
paint brush, work it hard with the grain of the cloth or can-
vas in order to  make the nap lie smooth.   For the third coat
to make it a jet black,  take three gallons of boiled linseed
oil, an ounce of burnt umber, half an ounce sugar of lead, a
quarter  of an ounce each of  white vitriol and  verdigris, and
half an  ounce of Prussian blue ; grind all fine, and add four
ounces of lampblack deprived of its grease as before.  Lav
it on ay you would paint.
  236.   To make it green.   Yellow ochre,  four ounces ;
Prussian blue, three-fourths  of an ounce ; white lead, three
ounces; white  vitriol, half  an  ounce ; sugar of  lead, one-
fourth of an ounce ; good boiled linseed oil enough  to make
it thin so as to go through the canvas.
  237.  To make  it yellow.   Yellow ochre, four ounces ;
burnt umber, one-fourth of an ounce ; white lead, aix or sev-
en ounces; white vitriol, one-fourth of an ounce ; sugar of
lead, one-fourth of an ounce  ; boiled linseed oil, as in green.
  238.  To make it red.  M/d  had, four ounces,  verndl
18* 
278                     RECEIPTS.

ion, two ounces; white vitriol, one-fourth of an ounce ;  sir-
car of lead, one-fourth of an ounce; oil, as before.
  239.  To make it white.  White lead, four pounds ; spir-
its of turpentine, one-fourth of a pint:  white vitriol, half an
ounce ;  sugar of lead, half an ounce ;  boiled  oil, enough to
make it thin.  The same preparation may be  used  for wooe
or iron, only  reducing the oil about three quarts out of eight.
  240.  To prepare substitute for  cochineal.   The insects
of the feverfew,  or motherwort, contain a  coloring  matter
which is equal to cochineal; but if they are  bruised in de-
itching them from the  plant, the coloring  matter  is lo>o
Therefore, inclose the stalks in a case  nearly  air tight, and
heat it in an  oven, which will suffocate the insects.   Six;.» n
pounds of the stalk;; will  yield above a drachm of the dried.
insects.
  241.  To  clean pictures.   Take of the  oldest ley, tvv
quarts ; Genoa soap rasped fine, one-fourth of a pound ; spir-
it of wine, one pint; boil all together, strain through a cloth,
and let it cool: dip a  brush  in this composition and rub the
picture all over ; after drying, repeat, and dry again.   The:.
dip  a  little cotton in nut oil,  and  pass  it over  the picture.
When perfectly dry, rub  it well with a  warm cloth, and  it
will appear of a beautiful freshness.
  2 12.  To dye cottc.i and linen  blue.  Tins is done wi. 1
a solution of  one part  of indigo, ore: part of green sulphme of
iron,  (copperas,) and two parts of quick lime.
  243.  Tod-vca  silk shawl scarlet.    First dissolve two
ounces of white soap iu boiling water ; rub the shawl in this,
repeat in a second or third water, until it is  clean, and after-
wards rinse it out  in  warm water ;  then  dissolve  half an
ounce of the best Spanish ann.ifto  in hot water: pour tins
solution into  a pan of warm water, handle the shawl  throng.
it for  a quarter  of  an  hour, then la.ke  it out and rinse k in
elean water.   Then dissolve a piece of alum of the  size of a
horse bean in warm water, and let the  shawl remain iu  ii
half an hour  ; take it  out and  rinse in clear  water.   Then
boil one fourth of an ounce of cochineal  for twenty  minutes,
dip it out of the copper into a  pan, and let the shawl remain
in this from  twenty minutes to half an hour, which will make
it a full blood red.  Then take out the shawl, and add  to the
liquor in the pan a quart more of that out of the copper, ane 
RECEIPTS.
279
 about half a small wine-glassful of the solution of tin ;  win u
 cold, rinse it lightlv out in spring water.
   214.  To dye silk lilac.   For every pound of silk,  take
 one pound aud a half of archil, mix it well with the liquor ;
 make it boil a quarter of an hour, dip the silk quickly, then
 let it cool, and wash it in river water.  It will be a fine vio-
 let, or like color.
   245.  To dye  silk stockings, fyc.  Wash the stockings
 clean in soap and water, and rinse in  hot water; in the mean
 time pour three table spoonsful of purple archil  into a wash
 basin half full of hot water;  put the stockings  in  thisy and
 when of the shade called half violet or lilac, take  th*m out
 and slightly rinse  them  in  cold  water.  When dry, hang
 them up in a close room in which sulphur is burnt, and when
 they are evenly bleached to a  flesh color shade, take them
 from the sulphuring room and finish by rubbing the right side
 with a clean flannel.  Satins and silks are done in  the same
 way.
   246.   To obtain a dyeing matter from polatoe tops.
 Cut off the tops when in flower,  and extract the  juice by
 bruising ancl pressing it.  Linen or woolen immersed in this
 liquor forty-eight hours, will take a brilliant, solid, and per-
 manent yellow color.   If the cloth be afterwards plunged in
 a blue dye, it will acquire a beautiful permanent green color.
   247.   To turn red hair black.  Take a pint of the liquor
 of pickled herrings, half a pound of lampblack, and  two oun-
 ces of iron.   Mix, and boil  them for  twenty minutes,  then
 strain, and rub the liquid well into the roots of the hair.
   248.  To dye while  gloves purple.   Boil four ounces of
 logwood and two ounces of roche  alum in three pints of soft
 water till half wasted.   Strain, and let the liquor cool, then
 rub the  gloves over with a brush dipped  in the solution, and
 when dry repeat it.  Twice  is sufficient unless  the color is
 to be verv dark ; when dry,  rub off  the  loose  dye with  a
 coarse cloth; then beat up the white  of an egg, and  with a
 sponge,  rub it over the leather.  The dye will stain the hands,
 but wetting them with vinegar before they are washed, will
 take it off.
   249.  To dye gloves resembling Limerick.   Steep saf-
 fron in boiling soft water  for about twenty-four hours;  then
having slightly sewed  up the tops of  the gloves to prevent 
280
RECEIPTS.
the dye staining the inside, wet them over with a sponge or
soft brush clipped in the liquid.
   250.  To stain beach wood a mahogany color.  Break
two ounces of dragon's blood in pieces, and put into a quart
of rectified  spirit of wine ; let the bottle stand  in a warm
place, and shake it frequently.  When dissolved, it is fit for
USe.
   251.   Another method.   Boil  one pound of logwood in
four quarts of water, and  add a double  handful  of walnut-
peeling.  Boil it up again, take out the  chips, add a pint of
the best vinegar, and it will be fit for use.
   252.  To stain paper yellow.   Infuse an ounce of pow-
dered turmeric root in a pint of spirit of wine.  This, and the
following colors are to be spread  even on the paper with a
broad brush dipped in the tincture.
   253.  To stain paper crimson.   Infuse India lake for some
days in spirit of wine, and then pour off the tincture from the
dregs.
   254.  To stain paper green.  Verdigris dissolved in vin-
egar, will do it.
   To stain paper orange.  First stain the paper yellow
with turmeric, then dissolve half an ounce of pearlash in a
quart of water, filter the solution, and apply  with  a brush.
   To stain paper purple.  Use a tincture of logwood.
   255.  Hare's method of bleaching shell lac.  Dissolve in
an iron kettle one  part of  pearlash in  about eight parts of
water, add one  part of shell or seed lac, and 1 cat the whole
to boiling.   When the lac  is dissolved, cool the solution and
impregnate it with chlorine, till the lac  is all precipitated.
   256.  To clean black veils.  Pass them through a liquor
of bullock's gall ancl wafer, rinse  in cold water ; then take a
small piece of glue, pour boiling water on  it, and pass the
veil through  it ; clap if, and frame it to dry.
   257.  To clean  white  satin and flowered silks.   Pass
them through a solution of fine hard soap, blood warm, draw-
ing them through the hand.  Rinse in lukewarm water, dry,
and finish by pinning out.  Brush the  flossy or bright  side
with a clean clothes brush, the way of ■the  nap ; then dip  n
spot _o into a size, made by boiling isinglass in  water, and
brush ancl dry near a fire.   Silks are  treated  in  the same
way, but not brushed. 
RECEIPTS.                    281
   258. To clean colored silks of all kinds.   Put soft soap
into boiling water, and beat it info a strong lather.   At blood
heat put in the article, and if strong,  it may be rubbed as in
washing;  rinse quickly in warm water, and for bright yel-
lows, crimsons, maroons, and scarlets, add oil of vitriol to
another water, so as to give it a sourish taste; but for oranges,
fawns,  browns, cr their shades, use no acid.  For bright
scarlet, use a solution of tin.  Gently squeeze, roll in a course
sheet,  and wring it.   Hang  it in a warm room to,dry,  and
finish  by  calendering.  For pinks,  rose colors,  and  their
shades, instead of oil  of vitriol or solution of  tin, use lemon
juice  or vinegar.  For blues, purples, and their shades,  add
a  small quantity of  pearlash :  it  will  restore the  colors.
Wash the  articles like a linen garment, but instead of wring-
ing, gently squeeze and sheet them.  When dry, finish with
fine gum water, or dissolved  isinglass,  to which  add some
pearlash,  rubbed  on the wrong side ; then pin them out.
   259. To scour  clothes, coats, pelisses, fyc.  If a black,
blue,  or brown coat,  dry two ounces of fuller's earth, and
pour on it sufficient boiling water to  dissolve  it, and plaster
with it the spot  of grease ;  take a penny worth of bullock's
gall, mix  with it half a pint  of stale urine ; and a little boil-
ing water ;  with a hard brush dipped  in  this liquor, brush
spotted places.  Then dip the coat in  a  bucket  of cold spring
water.  When nearly dry, lay the nap right, and pass a drop
of oil of olives over the brush to finish it. If the color isgrav,
drab, brown, or maroon, cut yellow soap into  thin slices and
pour water upon  it to moisten  it.   Rub  the greasy  and dirtv
spots of the coat.  Let it dry a little, and then brush it with
warm  water,  repealing, if necessary,  as at  first, and uso
water a little hotter ;  rinse several times in warm water and
onish as before.
   2G0. To revive faded black  cloth.   Having cleaned  it
well, dip it in warm water and squeeze it dry.   In the mean
time, let 2 or 3 ounces  of logwood be boiled half an hour in
a copper vessel.  Put the cloth into the  logwood liquor and
noil it  half an  hour ; then take it out,  and after adding a small
piece of green copperas, put it in, and boil another half hour.
Hang it in the air for  an hour or two, then rinse it in two or
three  cold waters; dry it, and brush with a soft brush, over
 vhich a drop or two of sweet oil has  been rubbed.
   261. To take  iron  moulds out of linen.   Hold the  iron 
282
RECEIPTS.
mould on the cover of a tankard of boiling water, and rub on
the spot a little salt and juice of sorrel;  then wash it in lve.
   262. To remove  spots of grease from cloth.  Apply a
solution  of potash ;  but use it  week, so  as not to injure the
cloth.   White paint or wrax may be taken out by spirits of
turpentine  or sulphuric ether.
   263.  To take  mildew out  of linen.  Rub it well with
soap ;  then scrape some chalk,  and rub that also in the linen,
lay it on the grass, and as it dries, wet it a little—twice doing
will bring it out.
   261. To take  out spots of ink.   As soon as the accident
happens, wet the  place with juice of sorrel or lemon, or with
vinegar,  and the best hard white soap.
   265. To clean all sorts of metal.  Scrape  a little kernel
^r rotten stone—mix half a pint of refined neat's foot oil with
half a gill of spirits of turpentine  ; wet a woolen rag there-
with,  clip it into the scraped  stone, and rub the metal well.
Wipe it off with a soft cloth, polish with dry leather, and use
more of the itone.
   266. To take stains out of mahogany.  Mix 6 ounces of
spirit of salt, (muriatic acid,) ancl 1-2 an ounce of rock salt
of lemons (powdered) together.  Drop a little on  the stain,
and rub it with a  cork till it disappears.   AVash off with cold
water.
   267. To clean gloves  without wetting.   Brush them
with a mixture of dried  fulling earth and  powdered alum ;
sweep  it off, sprinkle with  dry  bran and whiting, and dust
them  well.  If thev are  much soiled, take out  the grease
first with crumbs of toasted bread and powder  of burnt bone.
   268. To take out writing.   If recently written, wet the
paper repeatedly with oxvmuriatic acid, and afterwards with
lime water.  If the ink has been long written,  wet first with
sulphuret of ammonia, and then with the acid and lime water
as before.
   269. To make a fin and water proof cement.   To half
a pint of vinegar add the same quantity of milk ; separate the
curd,  and mix the whey  with the whites of five eggs; beat
it well together, and sift into  it  a  sufficient quantity of quick
lime to make a thick paste.  Broken  vessels, mended with
this cement, never afterwards separate ; for it  resists the  ac-
tion of both fire and water. 
RECEIPTS.
283    •
   2^0.  To brew ale or strong beer in small families.   A
 bushel ancl three quarters of ground  malt  will make  18 gal-
 lons.  The water, heated to  155 or  160 degrees Fahrenheit,
 should be  poured on the malt  as  quickly as possible ;  mix
 well by  active stirring;  cover the vessel close one hour, in
 cold weather,  an hour  and a half.   If bard water be used,
 boil, and let the temperature fall  to 155 or 168; but rain
 water mav be added to the malt as soon as  it arrives to 155
 degrees.   While this is  going on,  infuse 2 pounds of hops in
 as much boiling  water  as will  cover them, for two hours ;
 squeeze  out the  liquor,  and cover close ;  then boil the  hops
 ten minutes in twice  as much water as  there is of the first
 liquor ;  strain, and when cold, and  after  the wort has fallen
 to 70 degrees, add both the hops liquors to the wort;  stir  in
 a pint of good thick yeast, cover it, keep it in a place of the
 temperature of 65  degrees, until fermented ; then draw  off
 into a clean cask previously rinsed  with  boiling water.  It
 must not be bunged tight until two days after the slow fer-
 mentation has ceased.
   271.  Ch cap beer. Pour ten gallons of boiling water upon
 one  peck of malt in a tub; stir it well, let it stand about half
 an hour, and then draw  off the wort;  pour ten gallons more
 of boiling water upon the malt, let it stand another half hour,
 stirring occasionally, then draw it off and put it with the form-
 er wort; add  to this 4 ounces of hops, boil it well, strain the
 hops from it, and when about milk warm put in yeast to make
 it ferment:  when  the  fermentation is nearly over, put the
 liquor into a cask, and as soon as the fermentation has perfect-
 ly subsided, bung it close clown—the beer is  then lit for use.
   272.   To r.iake beer and ale from pea shells  instead  of
 malt.  Fill a  boiler with the green  shells of peas ;  pour  on
 water till it rises half  an inch  above the shells, and simmer
 for three hours, strain off tin; liquor, and  add a strong decoc-
 tion of wood sage or hops, so  as to  render it pleasantly bitter;
 then ferment in the usual manner.   By boiling a  fresh quan-
 tity ofsh lis in the decoc:! ion before it becomes (old, the liquor
 when fermented will be  as strong as ale.
  273.  To fine beer.  It will generally become fine by keep-
 ing,  or it litrfmed thus :—Boil an  ounce of isinglass in three
quarts of beer  until  dissolved ;  when cold, put into the cask,
and stir it well with a stick.  Tap it soon, for the isinglass is
apt to make it flat as well as fine. 
284                   RECEIPTS.
t

  274.  To restore a barrel of stale or sour beer.  Put a
quarter of a pound of good hops, and two pounds  of sound
chalk into the bung hole ;  stop it close, and in a few days it
will draw perfectly fresh.  Or, a small teaspoonful  of super-
carbonate of soda may be mixed with every  quart as  it is
drank.
  275.  Torestore a barrel ropy of beer.   Mixa handful of
bean flour with a handful  of salt, and stir  it in at the bung-
hole.  Or powder half an  ounce of alum very fine, and mix
with a handful of baen flour.
  276.  To make spruce  '>eer.  Pour 8 gallons of boiling
water into a beer barrel containing 8 gallons  more of cold
water ;  then add  16 pounds of molasses, with  a few  table
spoonfuls of the essence of spruce, stirring the whole well  to-
gether ;  add half a pint of yeast and keep  it in a temperate
situation, with the bung-hole open for two days till the fer-
mentation be abated ; then put in the bung, and bottle off  the
beer.   11 is fit to drink in a day or two.
  277.  To make red currant wine.   Take soft cold water,
11  gallons;  red currants, 8 gallons; raspberries, 1 quart.
Ferment.  Mix raw sugar, 20 pounds ;  beet  root  sliced 2
pounds ; red tartar in powder, 3 ounces ; one powdered nut-
meg,  and one gallon of brandy.  This will make 18 gollons
of wine.
  278.  To  make compound wine.   An excellent family
wine  may be made of equal  parts of red, white, and  black
currants, ripe cherries and   raspberries, well  bruised, and
mixed with soft water, 1 pounds of fruit to a gallon of water.
When strained and pressed, three pounds of moist sugar  are
to be  added to each gallon  of liquid.  After standing open for
three days, during  which it is to be stirred frequently,  put it
into a barrel, and leave it  for a*.fortnight to work ;  then  add
a ninth  part of brandy, and bung it down.   In a few months
it will be a most excellent wine.
   279.  Imitation of port wine.   Take six gallons of good
cider ;  1 1-2 gallons of port wine ;  1  1-2 gallons of the juice
of elder berries ; three  quarts  of brandy ; 1  1-2  ounces of
cochineal.   This will make 9 1-2 gallons of wine.  Pulver-
ize the  cochineal, put it with the brandy in a stone bottle, let
it remain a for!night, shaking it twice every day.   Then  put
five gallons of the cider into a  nine gallon cask, adding to it
the elder juice and port wine, and then the brandy and cochi- 
RECEIPTS.
285
neal.   Rinse out the brandy bottle with the other gallon  of
-aider, pour it into the cask, bung it close, and in six weeks it
will be ready for bottling.
  280.  To make American  honey wine.   Put a quantity
of comb, from which honey has been drained, into a tub, and
add a barrel of cider from the  press; stir, and leave for one
night  ; then strain, and  add honey until the liquor will bear
an egg ;  put it into a barrel, and after fermentation commen-
ces, keep the barrel full for 3  or 4  days, that the froth may
work out of the bung-hole.  As the fermentation moderates,
put the bung in loosely, lest stopping it tight might cause the
cask  to burst.   At the end of  5 or 6 weeks, draw the liquor
off into a tub, and  put the whites of eight eggs, well beaten
up, and a pint of clean  sand,  into it:  then add a gallon  of
cider  spirit, and after mixing  the whole  together, return  it
into the cask or barrel, and bung it down tight.  In the month
of April following, draw it off into kegs for use.   It is equal
to almost any foreign wine.
  2S1.  Grape  wine.    To every gallon of ripe grapes put a
gallon of soil water, bruise the grapes, let  them stand a week
without stirring ; then draw the liquor off, and to every gallon
of wine put 3 pounds  of lump sugar ;  put the whole into a
cask or barrel, but do not stop it until  it has done  hissing,
then bung  it close, and' in six  months it  will be fit for bot-
tling.   A better wine,  though smaller in quantity, is made
by  leaving  out  the water and diminishing the quantity  of
sugar.
  282.  To detect sugar of lead, corrosive sublimate, and
antimony,  in wines.   Put a few drops of sulphuric acid
(oil of vitriol) into a glass of wine,  and if it contain lead,  or
corrosive sublimate, a white precipitate or settling, will fall
to the bottom.   If  it contain  antimony, the settling will  be
blackish.
  283.  To make  British  brandy.   To thirty  gallons  of
clean  rectified whiskey, put half a pound of spirits of nitro ;
half a pound of  cassia buds ground; half a pound of bitter
almond meal, (mix the  cassia  and almond meal  together be-
fore they are put to the spirit;) one ounce of sliced orris root,
and 15 or 20 prune stones pounded.   Stir the  whole well to-
gether two or three times a day, for  three days or more : let
(hem  settle, then pour in one gallon of the best wine vinegar; 
286
RECEIPTS.
and to every four gallons of this mixture, add one gallon of for-
eign brandy.
  284.  To obtain rum from molasses.   Mix two or three
gallons of water with one gallon of molasses, or in that pro-
portion, and  add yeast in the  proportion of half a gallon to
every 100 gallons of the mixture.   Once or twice a day stir
in the head as it rises, and in three or four days add two gal-
lons more of water to every gallon of molasses originally used,
and the same quantity of yeast as at first.  Four,  five, or six
days after this, a portion of yeast isaddedas before, and about
an ounce of jalap root powdered ;   (or in winter one ounce
and a half;)  the fermentation then proceeds with great vio-
lence, and in three or four days  the wash is fit for the still :
one hundred gallons of this wash will yield twenty-two gallons
of rum from one fo ten over proof.
  285.  To rectify whiskey into Holland gin.  To every
20 gallons of proof spirit add 3 pounds of juniper berries, and
2'ounces of oil juniper ; distill with a slow fire until the feints
begin to  rise, then change the receiving can ; this produces
the  best Rotterdam gin.
  286.  To obtain sugar from beet root.   Pound the beets
in a wooden trough  with wooden stampers ;  press out the
juice ;  simmer it in a polished copper kettle, and take off the
scum as it rises.  To 100 quarts of the juice add two ounces
of slacked lime, diluted so as to have the appearance of milk,
and continue the boiling till the juice is thickened to the half
of it.   Then strain through  a  woolen cloth, simmer down to
the consistence of syrup, put it into glass, stone, or wooden
vessels, and place near a moderate  fire ; cnstals of sugar will
soon appear, and the mucilaginous juice may be expressed,
or squeezed out.
  287.  To make  Usquebaugh.  Take of best  brandy, 1
gallon ; raisins, stoned,  1 pound ; cinnamon, cloves, nutmeg,
and cardamom?, of each 1  ounce,  crushed  in a mortar;  saf-
fron, 1-2 an  ounce;   rind of one orange, and brown sugar
candy, 1 pound.  Shake these well every day, for at least 14
days, and (hen fine it for use.
  288.  To preserve meat,  or smoked hams.  Dip a brush
into pyroligneous acid, (acid of smoke,)  brush  them over
with it, and (hey are secure from all danger.
  289.  Acid of ants.   Take of  ants, one  pound ; boiling
water,  four pounds.  Infuse for three hours, press out the 
RECEIPTS.
2S7
 liquor and strain.  This  is an  excellent stimulant,  and is
 used as a lotion in impotence.
   290. Honey water for the hair.  Take of honey 4 pounds;
 very dry sand 2 pounds.   Mix, and put into a vessel that will
 hold five times as much ;  distill with gentle heat, and a yel-
 lowish acid water will come over. This acid greatly encour-
 ages the growth of hair.
   291. Portable lemonade.  Take of tartaric  acid  1-2 a«
 ounce ; loaf  sugar three  ounces; essence of lemon,  half a
 drachm.  Powder the  tartaric acid and the sugar wry fine
 in a marble or glass mortar, (never use a metal one,) mix
 them together, add  the essence  of lemon, a few drops at a
 time, stirring the mixture after each addition, till the whole
 is added and  thoroughly  mixed; then divide into 12 equal
 parts,  ancl wrap each  part in a  piece of white  paper.   One
 of the  papers, dissolved in  a glass of cold water, makes a fine
 lemonade, the cost of which is one penny.
   232. Substitute for tea.   In Germany the  leaves and
 flowers of t-trawberries are  substituted  for green tea.   The
 vonngest and cleanest leaves are tobe selected,and thoroughly
 did' d,  in the  shade.   Then make it exactly in the same man-
 ner as China green  tea, and it is hardly possible to discover
 the difference.
   293. Substitute for coffee.   The yellow beet root, when
 sliced  and drie I in a kiln, and  especially if ground  with a
 omall quantity of Turkey, or West  India coffee, will furnish
 an excellent substitute  for either. It requires much less sugar
 ihan foreign  codec,  and  is  somewhat stronger.  The beet
should not be stripped of its leaves, for this injures the growth
 of the plant, and alters the quality of the juice.
   294. C<a;\ze milk.  Boil a spoonful of ground coffee in a
pintofnnlh. a quarter of an hour ; then  put into  it a shaving
or two of  isinglas*, and (dear it;  ht. it  boil a few minutes,
and set it on the side of the fire  to fine. Sweeten with sugar,
rind it makes  a fine  breakfast lor those  of spare habits ;;:,d
whose  lungs are affected.
  295. To remove freckles from  the face and improve
the complexion.  Put  half a pound  of castile soap, scraped
 very fine,  into a gallon of boiling water.   Stir  it well  lor
 sometime, and letk stand  till cold.   Add a quart of rectified
spirit, and half an ounce of oil of rosemary ;  stir them  again.
In Italy this is put an in phials and called tincture pearls. 
288
RECEIPTS.
   296.  To make the teeth white.   Mix honey with finely
pulverized charcoal.
   297.  To clean the teeth.  Take one pound of soft water ;
two ounces of the juice of lemons ; burnt alum and common
salt, of each six grains ; mix, boil  them a minute in a cup,
then strain and bottle for use ; dip a small bit of sponge in it,
and rub the teeth once a week.
   298.  To prevent the tooth ache.   Use the flowers of sul-
phur as a tooth powder after dinner, and every night on going
to bed ; this  is an excellent  preservative  of the  teeth, and
make a practice of washing behind the ears with cold water
every morning.          .                        ~~        i
   209.  To perfume clothes. Takes cloves, cedar, and rhu-   f
barb, of each, one ounce ;  pulverize, and sprinkle them in  a
box or chest, where they will create a most beautiful scent,
and preserve the apparel against moths.
   300.  The best rouge for the face.   Take fine pomatum
without scent, in which there is a proportion of white wax,
and mix carmine with it until it acquires a proper tint;  then
with a little cotton, pass it over the face until color is clearly
diffused, void ef grease.   This will be found to  imitate per-
fectly the natural color of the complexion without injuring the
skin.
   301.  A zvash for sun burnt faces  and hands.   To  each
half pound of ox gall, add rocbe alum, 1-2  a drachm ;  rock
salt, two drachms ; sugar candy, half an  ounce ;  borax,  1
drachm ; and camphor half a drachm.   Mix, and shake  well
for 15 minutes ; then  shake it frequently every day for 15
days,or until  the gall is transparent, and filter through paper.
   302.  To make Windsor soap.   Melt  hard  curd soap,
and scent with oil of caraway and essence of bergamot.
   303.  Shining black ink.   Take 8 ounces of the best blue
gall nuts ;  four ounces of copperas ;  (green vitriol, Roman
vitriol, or  sulphate of iron ;) ancl 2 ounces of clear gum ara-
bic.   Pulverize  in an iron mortar, put it into a stone bottle,
and add three pints of clear rain water; shake it 3 or 4 times
a day for  seven  days ; then drain it  off gently into another
stone bottle, which place in an airy situation to prevent it from
becoming foul or mothery.
   304.  To make rod ink.  Infuse  Brazil wood raspings in
clear vinegar for two  or three days ; then boil over a gentle
4k   • 
RECEIPTS.                    089
;ire, and filter while  hot  through paper laid  in an earthen
ware cullender.   Put it again  over the fire, and dissolve in
it, first half an ounce of gum arabic, and afterwards, of alum
ancl white  sugar, each half an ounce.   Be  careful that the
Brazil wood be not adulterated with Brazilettoor Campeachy
wood.
   305.  Green writing ink.   Take an ounce of  verdigris,
powder it,  put it in a quart of  vinegar, and  in two or three
days strain off the liquid,  to every pint of  which, add  fwe
drachms of gum arabic,  and two drachms of white sugar.
   306.  Good common  printing ink.   Take  16 ounces of
varnish ; 4 ounces of oil, well boiled ; 4 ounces of fine lamp-
black ;  2 ounces of fine  Prussian blue,  and one ounce of fine
indigo.   Boil one hour.
   307.  Best printing ink.   In a secured iron pot, (fire out-
side when possible,) boil 12 gallons of nut oil; stir with an
iron ladle,  long  handle; while boiling, put an iron cover
partly over, set the  vapor on fire by lighted paper, often ap-
plied, keep it well stirring, and on (he fire one hour at least,
(or till the oily particles are burnt,) then add  one pound of
onions cut  in pieces, and a few crusts of bread, to get out the
residue  of  oil ; also 16 ounces of varnish ;  titree  ounces of
fi nc lamp-black,  and half an ounces of ground  indigo.   Boil
well one hour.
                                                     *
   308.  Printers' red ink.  Soft varnish and vermilion with
whites of eggs, not very thick.   Common varnish, red lead,
and orange.
   309.  Perpetual ink for inscriptions on  tomb stones,
 .xarblt, 8fC   Melt three  parts of pitch, and mix it with one
part of lamb-plack.   Fill the letters with this ink in a melted
state—it will endure as  long as the .stone itself.
   310.  Substitute for  Indian Ink.   Boil  the cuttings  of
glove leather  in water till  it forms a size, which when cool,
becomes of the consistence of jelly ; then take some of the
fine lamp-black which b? obtained by holding  an earthen plate
over the flame of a candle, and mix a litilo of  the size with
it  while the plate is still warm.  This re quires no grinding,
and is as good as the best Indian ink ;  it is of the same color,
works  as freely with the pencil, and is  as perfectly transpa-
rent.
   311.  Indelible ink for marking linen.  Take a drachm of 
290                   RECEIPTS.

nitrate of silver, (lunar caustic,) dissolve it in a glass  mor-
tar in double its weight of pure water, and  add ten drops of
nitric acid ;  this is the ink.   In another glass vessel dissolve
a drachm of salt of tartar in one and a half ounces of water ;
this is the liquid with which the linen is wet previously to
the application of the ink.
   312.  To  convert sheep  skins irdo leather.   Sheepskins
for gloves, book covers, pocket books, &c.  and which whea
dyed, are converted into  mock morocco, are dressed as fol-
lows : they are first to be soaked in water and handled, to
separate  all  impurities, which are to  be scraped off.  Then
bang them up in a close warm room to putrefy, so as to loos-
en the wool, &c.  which is to  be removed  with the knife.
Then steep them in milk of lime for a month or  six weeks,
lo harden and thicken.  When taken out,, smooth the flesh.
side with a sharp knife, and steep them in a bath of bran ano
water until they become thinner in  their substance.  Now
immerse  the skin in a solution cf alum and common salt in
water, in the proportion of one hundred and twenty  skins to
three  pounds of alum, and  five pounds of salt, and frequently
agitate them in order to render them firm and tough.  Thei.
from this bath remove them to another composed of bran arc!
water, and let them remain until quite pliant by slight ler-
mentation.   Then to give the upper surface a  gloss,  tread
ih£m  in a wooden tub with a solution of yolks of eggs in wa-
ter, previously well beaten up,  until the solution  becomes
transparent,  \\ hich is proof that the skins have absorbed the
glazing matter.  1 hey are now converted  into  leather, and
are to be drained from moisture, hung upon hooks in a wart
apartment to dry, and smoothed over with warm hand-iron*
   313.  To prepare sheep leather for various elegant  pur-
poses by dyeing.  The skins, wi en taken from  the  ilrm
bath,  are immersed in one  composed of dog and pigeon dung,
dissolved by agitation in water ; let them remain  until tin
lime is separated,  and the  skins have attained the  state ef
soft pliable pe t.
   314.  To  dye this pelt red, wash and sew them into bugs
stuffed with clippings and  shavings of leather, immense  the an
with the grain side  outwards, in a bath  of  alum and cochi-
neal,  of the temperature of one hundred and seventy to one
hunched  and eighty degrees, and agitate them until  thev are
sufficiently dyed.  Then transfer each bag to a sumach  bath, 
RECEIPTS.                     291
 nhere they receive consistency and tenacity ;  and from this
 bath plunge them into a saffron one to improve the color.
   315. To dye these skins black, the washed pell is fir? t im-
 mersed in the  sumach bath, and  then rubbed  over on the
 grained side, with a stiff brush dipped into a. solution of ace-
 tate of iron.   To give these  prepared  skins the gra u and
 polish of morocco, they are first oiled, ancl ti en rubbed on a
 dim board by a convex piece of solid glass, to which  a han-
 dle is attached.  The leather being now rendered more com-
 pact, it is then rubbed or pressed hard with a sharply  remov-
 ed boxwood instrument, shaped like the glass one just des-
 cribed.  Lamb and kid skins are dressed, tanned,  and dyed
 in a similar manner.
   316. To dye  morrocco and sheep  leather.   To dye it
 blue.  Steep the  leather one day in urine  and  indigo, and
 then boil with alum.   Or wash the skins in a decoction ef
 elder berries, and wring them out; then  boil elder  berries
 with alum water, wet too skins in it once or twice, dry them
 and they will be very blue.
   317. To dye it red.   Wash the  skins, and  lay them two
 hours in galls ;  then wring them out, dip them  in a liquor
 made with  ligustrum, alum  and verdigris, in water; and
 lastly,  in a dye made of Brazil wood boiled with 1 y.  •
   318. To dye it purple.   Wet the skins with a solution#f
 oehe alum in warm water, and when dry, after rubbing thera
 with the hand, with a decoction of logwood in cold water.
   To dye  it green.   Smear the skin  with tap-green' ami
 dum water boiled.
   319.  To dye it yellow.  Smear the skins with aloes and
 linseed oil dissolved and strained.
   To dye it orange  color.   For light  orange,  smear with
fustic berries boiled in alum water; for  a deep orange, with
turmeric.
  320.  To preserve plants from frost.  Before the  plant
has been exposed to the tsun or thawed, after a night's  frost,
sprinkle it  well with spring water,  in which sal ammoniac,
or cuiomon salt has been dissolved.
  321.  To preserve fruit  trees in  blossom from  frost.
Surround the trunk of the tree with a wisp of straw or hemp,
on' end of which, with a stone tied to it, is to be sunk in a
vessel of spring water at a little distance from the tree : one
                          19 
292
RECEIPTS.
 vessel will conveniently serve two  trees ; or the cord  may
 be lengthened so as  to surround  several before its end is
 plunged into the water.  The vessel should be placed in an
 open situation, out of the reach of any shade, so that the frost
 may produce all its effects on the water by means of the cord
 communicating with  it.
   322.  To remove  the mildew on wheat.   A solution  of
 common salt in water, a pound  to a gallon, is an excellent
 remedy.  With a pail of the mixture in one  hand,  and a
 brush in the other hand, sprinkle it over the field, repeating
 three or four days, and the mildew will soon disappear.
   323.  Uses  to which frozen potatoes may be  applied.
 Frozen potatoes, when three times distilled, produce a spirit
 from hydrometer proof to ten per cent, over proof; therefore
 a principal purpose and use  to which they may be turned, is
 the making of alcohol.
   324. To destroy the fly on turnips.   As the turnips come
 up, sow recently slacked lime upon them.  It is an infallible
 protection.
   325. Remedy against the bite of the  turnip fly.  Soak
 the seed in train oil before it is sown.
   326. To preserve eggs.  Apply with a brush a  solution
 of gum arabic,  or immerse the eggs in it; dry them, and
 pack them in dry charcoal dust.
   327.  A  substitute for milk and  cream.   Beat  up  the
 whole of a fresh egg in  a basin,  and then pour boiling. tea
 over it gradually, to prevent its curdling.   It is diflicult from
 the taste to distinguish it from rich cream.
   328.  The best way to preserve butter.  Take two parts
of the best common salt, one part of sugar, and one  of salt-
petre ; beat,them  up  and blend  the  whole together.  Mix
one ounce of this with every sixteen ounces of butter, and it
will keep good three years, with a rich marrowy consistence,
and fine color, but it ought to stand three or four weeks  be-
fore  it is used.
  389.  To cure musty grain.   Immerse it in boiling water,
and let it remain until the water  becomes cold.
  330.  To remove flies rooms.  Take half a tea-sp»onful of
bhick pepper in the powder, one tea-spoonful of brown sugar,
and a table-spoonful of cream ; mix them well together, place
it in the room on plate, and the flies will  soon disappear. 
RECEIPTS.                    29 i
    331.  To make excellent bread.   Steam off the water from
  three pounds of pared boiled  potatoes, and leave them afew ""
  minutes over  the fire ; then  mash  them fine and  mix them
  while hot with seven pounds of good flour,  adding a spoon-
  ful or more of salt.   Put a quart of water milk warm, wiO;
  three large spoonsfuls of yeast, gradually to the potatoes and
  flour, and after working it well, let it remain four hours he-
  fore baking.
    332.  To manufacture glass.  Glass is made by melting
  silex with a flux of some alkaline substance, or with a me-
  talic oxide.   The, silex may be  either  sand,  flint, or spar.
  The alkaline substance may be either soda, pearlash, sea-salt,
  wood-ash, red lead, borax, arsenic, or nitre ; but a number of
  them is generally used together;  or the  oxide,  when that is
  used, may be litharge   The  materials must first be reduced
  to powders in  mo-aars or  horse mills.  After sifting out the
  coarse parts, t.   woper  proportions of  silex and  flux are
  mixed together,  a.'d kept in the caleining  furnace at a mod-
  erate heat for live  or six hours, frequently stirring it,  and
  taking off the scum, ".until the materials are melted.  Whea
  taken out, the  matter is called frit.  To  convert the frit into
 glass, it is then pounded  and  vitrified in the melting pots of
 the glass furnace.
   333.  Materials for the best looking-glass plates.  Whi;,j
 sand cleansed, sixty pounds; purified pearlash, thirty pounds,
 nitre, fifteen pounds; borax,  one pound ; arsenic,  half a
 pound.
   334. For making common or green windotv  gla^s.
 Cheapestkind of white sand, one hundred and twenty pounds;
 wnpurified pearlash,  thirty pounds ;  wood-ashes, well burnt
 and sifted, sixty pounds ;  common salt, twenty pounds; ar-
 senic, five pounds.
   335.  To preserve milk.  Draw tho milk from  the  cow
 into bottles, and as they are filled, cork them and fasten the
 corks.  Spread straw on the bottom of a kettle or boiler, oh
 which place the bottles with straw between them.  Fill'thc
 boiler with cold water, heat it, and as soon as  it begins to
 boil, take off the boiler, and  cool gradually.  When cohi,
 pack  the  bottles away with straw in  a cool place.   It  will
keep eighteen months or longer, as sweet as when first milked
from the cow.
  336.   To cure smoky  chimneys.   The common causes
                           19* 
294
RECEIPTS.
are that the wind is too much let in above, or the smoke strfled
below, or there is too little room in the vent.   The best
method of cure is to carry from the air, a pipe under the floor,
and opening under the fire ;  or, when higher objects are the
cause, to fix a moveable cowl at the top of the chimney.
   337.  To avoid  injury from bees.   If  a wasp or bee k
swallowed, drink a tea-spoonful of common salt dissolved in
water.  It kills the insect, and  cures  the sting.   Salt is the
best cure for external stings.  If bees  swarm upon the head,
smoke tobacco and hold  an empty hive over the he; d,'and
they will enter .it.                      s
   338.   To reiise water in all situations.   It is done in the
simplest manner, by  the mere use of an iron rod, forced into
the earth by a windlass.   In a few day-, or less, a spring of
pure water will be found.   Tin pipes  m|y then be put down
the aperture, and it preserves a  fine strea'te which  sometimes
rises from four to five feet high.     •    7
   339.  To bring horses out of a stabla  Throw the har-
ness or saddles to  which (Key may hare been accustomed.
over the backs of the horses  in this pr^lcament, and they
will come out of the  stable as tractably as  e.sual.
   340.  Curious mode of silvering ivory.   Immerse a small
slip of ivory in a weak solution of nitrate  of silver, (lunar
caustic,) and let it remain till it takes a deep yellow color ;
then take it out, immerse it in a tumbler of clear wafer, and
expos.; it in the water, to the rays of the sum  In about three
hours the ivory becomes black,  but \<o being rubbed,.it soon
changes to a brilliant silver.
   341.  Paste for sharpening razorst  Take one ounce of
pulverized oxide of tin, ancl mix with  it a sufficient quantity
i»f the saturated solution of oxalic acid to form a paste.  Rub
it over the strap, and when dry, a little water may be added.
It  gives a fine edge to a razor.
   342.  To  escape the effects of lightning.  Those wh»
take shelter under a tree during a thunder storm expose them-
selves to a double danger ; first, because their clothes being
thus kept dry, their  bodies are  more  liable to be struck by
the lightn ng ; and secondly, because a tree serves to attract
and conduct the lightning, which in  passing  to the ground,
shivers the trunks and branches, and  kills every  thing that
is  near.  As metals  of all  kinds have  a  strong  attraction
for lightning, it is dangerous to sit or stand near them at suet 
RECEIPTS.
295
 times, ancl when in the house, avoid the window, door, or
 walls, during a thunder storm.   The  nearer  a person  is to
 the middle of a room, the better.
   343. To remedy the effects of dram-drhiking.  Who-
 ever makes the attempt to abandon spirit drinking, will find
 from time to time, a rankling in  the stomach, with a sensa-
 tion of sinking, coldness, and an inexpressible anxiety.   This
 may be robeved  by •a'Ong often a cupful of an  infusion of
 clove, made by sleeping an ounce in a pint of boiling water
 for six boors, ancl then  straining off the liquor.
   34 I. The air  baili.   Tho air bath is beneficial to all per-
 sons,  but especially to children.   Dr. Franklin  informs  ua
 that everv morning at day-break, he got out of bed and pas-
 sed half an  hour, in his chamber wdhout any (dothes; and
 this,  e adds, seemed rather id  asant than otherwise.
   345.   V bolts in horses.   Take of Ires-wax, mutton tal-
 low, a : ■ ' ed'sugar, each  >'<fn.t mine •/, put it  ;nto one quart
 of new    d'.  and  warm  a  ad it  is ■   bed ; then put it into
 a hot      A give it i ..*•  o "  - c.e ./  . v;.c. hoguis to harden.
 Abo;    .  > lours  aft >.r. • '■      .•  e      ahpb.>:u will be dis-
chart.  ui great nun.-.             ,;   ,' wax having from
one t     . or tight, of   -   -•          •■ ■,.on.e by the head,
but m    a them  by th
   34''  To dyp, a siP                  Take about a table-
spoon.'   >f  cud-r. :r,                    •. (q, pour boiling
water  •  >n it.  &.'■<■                 i'-w minutes, then put
in th •   :: an-1 turn i                   :.,.'  when the color
is f a1    ; > tgb,  tan
equtre a more
 violet i.r crimson cl                      -v., of purple ar-
 chil to s > ne warn: w                      . doors.   To fin-
 ish it, 0  must be ir a • >'
   347. To dyf'f:atit"i                  ..   Verdigris and
 vcrdiler, each one one                   .e ,ont;  mix them
 well, and  dip tho feaihe               .  ,pg heen first soaked
in hot water, into the .
   3Ji.  Blue for the  s-<       (       ;  d rise, each  one
ounce; and a piece uf nl >.   ■■'■ osue ■ i\>. ha .el nut;  put them
into gum water (solution .a'<_tuiti aia  <• or  Iragneanth,)  and
dip the materials int.. it  hot, hang the n  tt[i lo dry, and clap
them well that thc;y ma. open,  and by  changing the colors
they may* be dycx\ of any color. 
296                    RECEIPTS.
                   v ■
   349.  Red  do.   One ounce of Brazil wood in powder ;
haif an ounce of alum ; a quarter of an ounce of vermilion ;
and a pint of vinegar ; boil them up to a moderate thickness,
soak the feathers or bristles in hot water, and then dip them
in the mixture.
   350.  To stain oak  a mahogany  color.  Boil together
Brazil wood and Roman alumn, and  before it is applied to
the wood a little potash is to be added *.o it.
   351.  A suitable varnish for wood thus tinged, may be
made by dissolving amber in oil of turpentine, mixed with a
small portion of linseed oil.
   352.  To stain musical instruments crimson.  Boil one
pound of ground Brazil wood in three  quarts of water for an
hour ; strain it and  add half an ounce of cochineal.; boil it
again for half an hour gently, and it will be fit for use.
   353.  Purple for the same.   Boil a pound cf chip logwood
in three quarts of water for an hour, then add four ounces of
pearl-ash and two ounces of indigo pounded.
   354.   To extract grease spots from silks  and  colored
muslins.  Scrape French chalk, put it on the grease spot,
and hold it near the fire or over a warm iron, or water-plate,
filled with boiling water.  The grease will melt,  and  the
chalk absorb it, brush or rub off the chalk and repeat if ne-
cessary.
   355.  To lake stains out of silk.  Mix together in a phial
two ounces of essence of lemon ; one ounce oil of turpentine.
Hub the spots on the silk gently with a linen vag dipped in
this composition.
   356.  To  take spots of paint from  cloth, apply spirits of
turpentine with a sponge, let it be some hours, then rub it.
This  if possible should be done before  the paint is dry,
   357.  White mead wine.  Take seventeen gallons of cold
soft water, white currants six  quarts,  ferment.  Mix honey
thirty pounds, white tartar in fine powder ihree ounces.   Add
balm and  sweet brier,  each two handsiul, white brandy one
gallon, press out eighteen gallons.
   358.  Red mead or metheglin ivinc.  Cold soft water sev-
enteen gallons, red currants six quarts, black currants two
quarts,  ferment.   Mix twenty-five pounds of honey, beet
root  sliced one pound, red tartar in fine piv\vder four ounces,
add cinnamon in fine powder two ounces, bfandy one gallon.
i 
RECEIPTS.
291
     359.Cider  wine.  Take  soft water,  cold, four  gallons;
   cider, fifteen gallons;  honey, twelve pounds; tartar in pow-
   der  two ounces;  ferment.   Mix ginger, six ounces; sage
   and  mint, two handsful.   Add brandy one gallon.  This will
   make eighteen gallons good wine.
    ^ 360. Excellent ginger wine. Put into a boiler ten gallons
   A wtiter, ancl fifteen pounds of lump sugar; the whites of six
   or eight eggs, well beaten and strained;  mix all well togeth-
   er while cold.  When it  boils skim it well,  put in a  half a
   pound of common white ginger, and boil it twenty minutes.
 v  Have  ready the rinds of seven  lemons,  cut  very thin, ancl
   pour the hot liquor on  them ;  when cool put it into your cask,
   with two spoonsful of yeast;  put a quart of the warm liquor,
  on two ounces isinglass shavings, shake it well, then put it
  in the barrel.  Next day stop the barrel up, and in  three
  weeks  bottle it,  and in two or three months you will  have
  a most delicious liquor.
    361.  To restore sour ivines.   Take calcined gypsum, in
 powder, one ounce;  cream of tartar in  powder; two ounces;
 mix them in a quart of brandy and pour them into the  cask,'
 put in also a few sticks of cinnamon, and  stir the wine with-
 out disturbing the  loos.  Bung up the cash the next clay.
    362.  Hard pomatum.  Thirty pounds suet; one and a
 half pounds of white wax ; six ounces essence of bergamot;
 four ounces lemon ; one ounce of lavender; four drachms of
 oil of rosemary ;  and two drachms of essence  of ambergris.
 Melt.and strain the suet, and  when nearly cold add tho per-
 fumes, stirring it well,  when properly mixed pour it into tin
 moulds.
   SG3.  Cepludic, or headache snuff.   Powdered asarum ;
 powdeied dock-leal, small quantity ; Scotch snuff, very  fine,
 as much as you please.
   364.  To tan without bark or minered astringents.  Put
 the hides into a preparation of bran and  water  for two days.
 Then put them in the liquor,  made of seventeen gallons of
 water, half a pound of Aleppo galls, five pound of tormentil,
 or septfoil root, and one and a half  ounces of Bengal catechu.
 The galls &c. arc  to be finely  powdered and boiled in  tho
 water some time,  and  when cool  the skins are to be put in,
and handled  frequently  during  the first  two or three days,
afterwards to remain three  days,  then to be handled three
times more in one day; and finally to remain  undisturbed 
298                    RECEIPT*.
twenty-five days when the process will  be completed.   Th.-.-
saving will be fifty per cent, in money and two  or  three
months in time, and the leather will be  better than if tanned
in the usual way.
  365.  To iveld tortoise shell.   Provide a'pair of pincers,
the tongs of which  will reach'four inches beyond the pivot.
Now file the shell clean to a lap joint, carefully observing that
there be no grease about it.  Wet the joint with water, apply
the pincers hot, following them with  water, and  the shell will
appear, as if it were orignally the same  piece.
  366.  To make c"me,d for medals.   Take of gum mastic,
10 grains ;  rectified spirit of wine twenty drachms ; strong
isinglass glue, made with brandy, ancl 10 grains gum ammo-
niac.   Dissolve altogether and keep it stop;  I in a phial.
Wnen  intended to be used, set it in warm wan  .
  367. To make isinglass give.   Dissolve is::  !,:vs in water
by boiling, strain  through coarse cloth, evapm,  • it to Mich a
consistence, that being cold the glne will be ;>  ; and dry.
  368. This is greatly improved ; bv  add:>-■ 'Tandy after
straining, and (hen evaporate as above.
  369. Mahogany cd cred  c "nient.  Miif (ogCdWx >vooz.
of beeswax, and  half  an <•■     of Indian             nail
quantity  of yellow ocher to ■   •_<■  t1o pr •• y r e..
  370. To make  red s^ak     :-'!X.   -'no;          well
powdered, two ounces  ; r  -,    a o.t vcr a                nice.
Mix them well together and        or n                 .hen
the ingredients  are  thorough   voorno                 .vax
into sticks.  The sticks p\a--:, >■•  rubber --\             >ths
to make  them smooth.   And  .:•• irml                 ased
or lessened in quantity, as y.   ■    t it  '
   371. Black sealing wax.  P-...-d                 :t;r!g
the best ivory black, for vermilion.
   372. Green.   Proceed  as re •/>, n-              ordi-
gris, or if the color  is required to  be vi  e               1 or
crystals of verdigris.
   373. Blue.  Proceed as  in red, using s;nc           ;der-
ed, or  verditer.
   374. Velkav.   As  the red, on  su'jstilu             t, or
turpeth mineral.
   375.  To clean gold lire.  Rub  it with a s           pped
in roche alum burnt, and si fled to a very tin. 
RECEIPTS.
299
   376.  To obtain  the fragrant essences from the fresh
 vinds of citrons,  oranges, fyc.  Procure as many fresh cit-
 rons as is  required.   Clean  all specks from  the outer rind,
 break off a piece of loaf sugar and rub the citron on it till the
 yellow rind is completely absorded.   The sugar impregnated
 with the essence is from time to time to be cut away, and put
 in an earthen dish.  The  whole being thus taken off, the
 sugared essence is to "be  closely pressed, and  put by in pots,
 where it is to be squeezed down bard, ancl covered over with
 a bladder and tied tightly up.  It is at any time fit for use,
 and will keep for many years.
   377.  To preserve phosphorus.   Keep it  in places where
 neither light nor heat has access.
   378.  To  make gun powder.  Pulverize  separately  5
 drachms of saltpetre, and 1  of sulphur, 1 of newly  burnt
 charcoal ;  mix them together with a little water in a mortar,
 so as to make the compound into a dough,  winch must  be
 rolled  out into round  pieces the   thickness of  a pin be-
 tween two boards.   Lay a  few of these  together  and cut
 them with a knife into small grains, which are to be placed
 on a sheet of  paper, in  a place  to dry.  While  working, it
 must be prevented  from sticking, by using of the compound
 powder that has not been wet.
   379.  .4 mode  of preparing paper  ivhich  slall  resist
 moisture.   Plunge  unsized paper, once or twice into a solu-
 tion of masfic, in oil of turpentine, ancl dry by a gentle heat.
 This has all the properties of writing paper, and may be used
 for that  purpose.  This  particularly useful where paper is
 liable to be exposed  to wet or damp, as it resist the clieefs of
 both, and is not injured by mouldiness, nor likely to be destroy-
 by mice or insects.
   380. To render paper fire proof.   Whether the paper  be
 plain, written, printed on, or even marbled, siained or  paint-
 ed for hangings, dip  it in a strong solution of alum water, and
 then  thoroughly dry if.   In  this slate  it will be  fire  proof.
 This xv i 11 be readily known by holding a slip over the blaze
of a candle.  Some  paper requires to imbibe more of the so-
 lution than by a single immersion, in which case  the dipping
and drying must be repeated  till  it  becomes felly saturated.
Neither the color nor quality of the  paper will be in the least
affected by this process, but  on the contrary  will be im-
proved. 
300                    RECEIPTS.
      381.  Shrewsbury cake.  Sift  1 pound  of sugar, some
    pounded cinnamon, and nutmeg grated,  into 3  pounds of
    flour.  Add a little rose water to three eggs well beaten, mix
    them with the  flour, then pour in  as much butter melted as
    will make it a good thickness to roll out.
      382.  Jumbles.   One and a half pound  of flour ;  one
    pound of sugar ; threefourths of a pound of butter ; four yolks
    and 2 whites of eggs, with a wdne  glass of rose water,  roll
    them thick with fine powdered sugar, and bake on tins.
      383.  Savoy biscuit.   Take of sugar about the weight of
    twelve eggs, of flour the weight of 7 eggs, beat the white,
    and yellow of twelve eggs separately; grate in the rind of  1
    lemon, after being in the oven a few minutes, grate on some
    sugar.
      384.  Almond cake.  Take one pound of almonds blanched
    and.  beaten,  ten eggs well beaten, one pound of sugar, and
    one fourth of a pound of flour.
      385.  Pound cake ginger bread.  Take 6 eggs; 1 pound
    sugar; one pint of molasses, a full tea cup of ginger, a  tea
    spoonful of pearl-ash dissolved,  a  little mace,  nutmeg, one
    pound of fresh butter creamed, mix these well together, and
    then beat in 2 pounds of flour.
      386.  Ginger cake.   Flour three pounds ; one pound of
    sugar; one pound of butter ; two ounces of giager,  a little
    nutmeg, a pint of molasses, a gill  of cream, make them warm,
    and mix them well together, ancl bake in a slack oven.
      387. Sugar cake.  Take one*pound of flour, threefourths
    of a pound of sugar, a half a pound of butter, 5 eggs.  Mix
    and  drop them on tin, and put sugar sanded on them just as
.*   you put  them in the oven, or frost them.
      388.  Cupcake.  Three cups of sugar, one cup of butter,
    two teaspoonfuls of pearl ash, three  eggs, 5 cups of flour, all
    beaten together with as much spice as you please.
      389.  Cider' cake.   Flour two  pounds, sugar 1   pound,
    butter half a pound, cider one pint,  cloves and cinnamon as
    much as you please, two teaspoonfuls of pearl ash, with or
    without  fruit.
      390.  Whip. Take two cups of cream, one of white wine,
    grate in the skin of a lemon, svveenten to your taste, the whites
    of 3 eggs, then whip it  with a whisk, take off the froth, and
    pour it into your jelly glasses. 
RECEIPTS.                    301
   391. To make venison paste.   You must bone your ven-
 ison and season it with two  ounces pepper, 1 nutmeg mixed
 with salt, then mince  three pounds  beef  suet^  put it in the
 pan ; bake with moderate and even fire six hours.
   392. To dress  a turtle.   Take a turtle of eight pounds,
 cut off the head, cut it open, scald the fins and calipee, (un-
 der shell,) skin them ; then take out the guts, cut them open
 and cleanse  them well;  take care not to break the  gall.
 Take for the soup  the  guts, with   a knuckle of veal, some
 sweet herbs, onions and cayenne pepper.   Season the rest of
 the meat with the same seasoning, which put in the upper
 shell with some balls of other meat, and calipee, and bake it.
 When it is baked,  take the yolks of three eggs, to a turtle of
 eight pounds, beat them well, pour  in a little  wine, take some
 of the  soup,  and brew  it together,  throw in a lump of butter
 rolled in flour, and put it into the calipash  (upper shell) and
 and calipee.
   493. A good gravy for  any use.  Burn one ounce of
 butter in a pan, at such a distance  from the fire, that as you
 strew in the flower, it  may brown, but not blacken,-put to it
 two pounds of coarse lean beef, 1 quart of water, half a pint
 wine, 3 anchovies, two eschalots, some whole pepper, cloves
 and mace, three or four mushrooms, or picked walnut,  let it
 stew for an  hour, then strain, it will keep some time, and is
 fit for any savory dish.
   394.  Wedding cake.   Take flour, butter, sugar, and rai-
 sins, of each, 3 pounds ; mace, cinnamon, and nutmegs, of
 each, one ounce ;  two dozen of eggs, six pounds of currants,
 and half a pint of brandy.  Beat  the  butter to cream, and
 then beat the sugar into the butter ; add the froth of the yolks
 of the eggs after being beaten, and then the froth of the whites;
 nfix fruit, spice, and flour  together, and add them  in with
 beating.   Five or  six hours baking will answer for a large
 loaf.
   395.  Election cake.  Take five pounds of flour, 2 pounds
 of sugar, threefourths of butter, five eggs, yeast, one pint, of
 milk, and spice, as you please.
  396.  Federal cake,  or bachelor's loaf.   In a plateful of
 flour put a piece of butter not larger than a walnut,  2 eggs,
 and a spoonful of yeast; mix it either with milk or water, as
you please ;  make  a very stiff batter, and put it to rise in the
same dish you bake it in. 
302
RECEIPTS.
       397.  Oyster pie.   Put 100 oysters, clean from the shell,
    into a kettle with their own liquor to plump them ;  then sea-
    son them in a dish with 12 cloves, and three blades of mace
    pounded fine, ancl pepper to your taste ;  (hen lay crust round
    the edge of your dish, take the yolks of four eggs boiled hard,
    with a handful of grated bread, sprinkle this over the top with
    a few pieces of butter ; fill the dish nearly full, and  cover the
    pie over with a puff paste.
       398.  A  cure for sore backs of horses.  Dissolve half an
    ounce of blue vitriol in a pint of water, and wret the injured
    parts with  it four or five times a day.
       499.  An infedlible lotion for blows, bruises, and sprains,
\^,m hcrses.   Dissolve one ounce of camphor in eight ounces
^o-©f alcohol,  (hen add one ounce of spirit of sal ammoniac, half
    an  ouneeofoil of origqnum,  and one  large cable spoonful of
*    laudanum.   Rub it in well with the hand for  full  a quarter
    of an hour  every time it is used, which must be four times a
    day.  You will be astonished at its efficacy when you try it.
       400.  A composition to render, tuoodjire proof.  Dissolve
    some moist gravelly earth, "which has been previously  well
    washed  and cleared from any heterwgeneous matter, in a so-
    lution of caustic alkali.  This mixture,  wdien spread uoon
    wood, forms a vitreous coat, and is proof against fire and wa-
    ter.  The  cost of this, process is very insignificant, compared
    with its great utility, being about thirty-eight cents  for every
    hundred square feet.
       401.  Foundered feet.  The hoof will appear smaller than
    the round  one.   The horse just touches the ground with the
    toe of the  foundered foot on account of the pain, and stands
    in such  a  tottering way that you may  shove him over with
    your hand.  Take off the shoe, bleed freely from  the thigh
    vein, and  purge  two or  three times.   Keep  the hair close
    trimmed, and the parts clean.
       402.  Hoof bound.   Cut  down  several times from  the
    coronent down to the  toe all round the hoof, and fill the cuts
    with tallow and soap mixed.  Take off the shoes  and turn
    .•him into a  wet meadow7 where his feet will be kept moist.
       403.  Lam pas,  or lumpers.  This  is  a  swelling of the
    first bar of the upper palate.   Rub the swelling two or three
    times a  day with  half an ounce of alum, and the same quantity
    of double  refined sugar mixed with a little honey. 
                  PRICES OF MEDICINES.              303

   404.  Instantaneous light homes.  Make a strong solu-
 tion of gum tragacanth, by infusion in warm water, until it is
 dissolved.   Split up some slips of pine wood for mad lies, dip
 them in  spirits of  turpentine, and  let them  dvv.   Carefully
 rub two  grains of chlorate or oxvmuriale of potash into a fine
 powder,  add to it one grain  of the  flour  of sulphur, and mix
 them accurately in a very gentle manner.  Then dip the ends
 of the matches into the solution of gum, and before they are
 dry, dip  them into the powder.  A little vermdion is some-
 times  added for tlie sake of the color.  A small quantity of
 sand, asbeslos, or dry linen lint, is  to be put into a sin it phial
 or bottle, and a few drops of sulphuric acid, (oil of vitriol,)
 added to it.   Plunge the coated end of the match into the ,
 phial, withdraw it instantly, and it will take fire.   The cost
 of these matches is very trifling.
   405.   Or,  oxymuriate of potash nine grains, sugar three
 grains, flour of sulphur two grains, vermilion one rain, flour
 two grains, highwines sufficient to 4brm a paste,  t4ie wood
 must first remain a while in strong camphorated spirts, then
 permitted to dry, after which coat the ends w  h the above
 paste.
  406.  To make exhilerating gas.   (Nitrous oxide gas.)
 Introduce into a glass retort some  pure nitrate of ammonia,
 and set it upon a sand bath, or apply the heat of an  Argand's
 lamp, or  set it upon a  hot stone ; the salt will soon liquify,
and wh'ii it begins to boil gats will  be  evolved.  Increase the
heat gradually until the body and neck of the retort arc filled
with a milky  white vapor, in this  state the temperature of
the  fused nitrate is between 240  and 4S0 degree.
A TABLE OF  THE PRICES OF  THE PRINCIPAL
                     MEDICINES.

   These prices are  liable to vary a little, in duferent years,
as well as the prices of other articles of commerce ;  but this
will never be more than a few  cents on the pouud.   It will
be expected of course,  that you  will have to pay a little more
ta proportion by the ounce, than by the pound.
   N.  B.   Wdieu you buy your medicine, get the druggist to
weigh out, and put in a separate paper, a dose of each  kind,
keep this to  look at as a guide in dealing out the same medi- 
304              PRICES OF MEDICINES.
cine, and you  can not make a  mistake, being sure  to  have
the name written on each paper.
Medicine. first	cost per lb.	sale per lb. sale	per oz.
	$ els.	$ cts.	8 cts.
Aloes,	19	38	6
Orange Peel,	15	23	3
Sal Ammoniac,	44	75	6
Arsenic,	34	50	6
Tartaric Acid,	1,00	1,50	13
Gum Arabic,	50	81	6
Annatto,	31	50	4
Assafoetida,	44	75	6
Gum Ammoniac,	62	1,13	9
Aqua Ammonia,	14	50 bottle,	6
Rose Water,	22	38	4
Alum,	6	13	2
Alcohol, per gallon,	63	1,13	
Nitric Acid,	31	50	G
Sulphuric Acid,	9	25	4
Muriatic Acid,	20	38	4
Carbonate of Ammonia,	56	75	9
Anise Seed,	19	38	4
Arrow Root,	31	62	6
Oxalic Acid,	1,50	2,50	4S0
Pyroligneus Acid,	31	62	6
Borax,	25	38	6
Armenian Bole,	56	SS	6
AYinter Bark,	25	38	4
Oxide of Bismuth,	2,50	3,25	25
Balsam Copaiva,	so	50	6
Balsam Tolu,	2.25	3.00	25
Stoughton Bitters, per dot.	2.25	3,00 sing.	pap. 31
Balsam of Fir,	1,50	2,25	18
Cinnamon,	30	50	6
Chammomile,	3S	75	6
Camphor Gum,	60	1,00	9
Copal Gum,	26	34	4
Peruvian Bark,	38	64	6
Lunar Caustic, per ounce,	1,06	do. 1,50 per.	dr. 2S,
Common Caustic, do.	10		12
Cream of Tartar,	25	50	6
Prepared Chalk,	12	25	3
Copperas,	5	8	
Corrosive Sublimate,	1,18	1,75	18
Bottle Corks, gross,	56	1,00	8
Phial, do. do.	*S	3T	3
 
PRICES  OF MEDICINES.              305
    Medicine.         first c<

 Cowhage,
 Colomel,
 Cloves,
 Columbo Root,
 Cantharides, ■
 Coriander Seed,
 Colycynth,
 Colchicum,
 Diachylon White,
 Ether,
 Carbonate of Iron,
 Fosgates Anodyne,
 Liquorice Ball,
 i\ut Galls,
 Gum Guaiac.
 Gum Gamboge,
 Gum Elastic,
 Gum Shell Lac,
 Gentian Root,
 White Hellebore, pulverized,
 Isinglass,
 Pulverized Ipecac,
 Iodine, per oz.
 Jalap, pulverized,
 Juniper Berries,
 Gum Kino,
 Liquorice Stick,
 Litharge,
 Sugar of Lead,
 Myrrh,
 Magnesia,
 Manna,
 Mace,
 Musk, per oz.
 Nutmegs,
 Spirits of Nitre, per bottle,
 S;dts of Nitre,
 Nux Vomica,
 Opium,          from 4,75 to
Opodeldoc, liquid, per doz. hot.
 Opodeldoc, common,  do.
British Oil, per doz. phials,
Harlem Oil,  do. do.
Oil Peppermint,
  " Anise,
per lb. sale per lb. sale per oz.
$ cts.	$ cts.	.4 Ct8.
1,50	2,25	25
1,00	1,50	13
81	1,00	9
50	88	6
1,75	2,50	19
	3,00	38
1,00	1,50	13
l',00	1,75	13
31	50	6
67	1,00	6
28		6
25		38
21	50	6
39	75	9
25	50	6
2,00	3,00	25
62	1,00	9
25	44	5
13	34	4
75	1,00	13
1,25	2,00	18
2,25	2,75	25
62		do. 1,50
75	1,25	13
9	18 ,	4
1,38	2,25	o
8	20	4
15	25	
31	50	6
50	1,00	13
40	1,00	6
81	1,13	i->
2,25	3,00	25
1.50	2,00	',^',75
1,50	2,00	L'S
20	50	6
13	25	4
25	50	6
6,00	6,50 to 9,00 fiS	
1,75		each bot.^38
1,25		each do. 25
1,00	each phial 18	
75		do. do. 18
1,50	2,00	25
4,00	5,00	50
 
306              PRICES OF MEDICINES.
Medicine.	first cost per lb.	sale per lb. sale per oz.	
	$ cts.	$ cts.	$ cts.
Oil of Almonds,	1,00	1,50	25
" Bergamont,	4,50	6,00	50
" Carui.	1,50	2,50	25
" Cloves per oz.	56		56
" Cinnamon	4,00	' 5,50	50
" Juniper	1,25	2,00	18
" Orange,	3,50	4,50	LIS
" Origanum,	1,25	2,00	13
" Hemlock,	1,25	2,00	13
" Lemon,	4,50	5,00	50
" Penn,!' , d,	2,00	3,25	37
" Rosemary,	1,25	2.50	25
" Sassafras,	1,25	2,25	25
tl Wormseed,	2,25	3,00	3;
" Winnie..!),	4,00	5,00	58
" Castor, per gall.	1,75	2,25	6
" Sweet, in bottles,	2,75 pe	r doz. each	botile CS
" Lamp, per gallon,	82	per	gall. 100
" Cedar,	1,50	2,50	25
" Womo. i I,	3.75	4,50	:e
" Tansy,	3,00	4,00	'<jt
" Sprtirmint,	1,00	2,U0	13
Cayenne Pe r,	47	75	t
Sulphate of «;,isb,	22	44	a
Pink Root,	15	32	
Phials, \>: r gr' .<,	3,00	4,32 do.	each,3
Quinine, pe. ;.	2,25	uj. 3,50	3.5U
Quicksilver,	75	1,00	tii
Rhubarb, pulverised,	57	1,00	13
Red Precipit; ;e,	1,00	1,50	13
Senna,	31	63	6
Squills,	18	36	6*
Seneka Siade. iioot,	38	50	6
Sal Seda, .	15	37	6
Sup. Carb. e'.vda,	58	1,00	I'S
Sponge,	58	1,00	9
Sulphur,	7	13	3
Epsom Sal's,	7	from 13 to 2.i	) 6
Glauber Salts,	3	6	3
Salts of Tan o,	18	25	6
Tartar En otic,	69	1,13	13
Spirits of Turpentine,	gal. 48	63	a
Valerian,	from 41 to 50	89	r" 6
Vitriol, Blue,	15	25	3
Vitriol, White,	12	32	3
 
          history;

svsirroMS, causes, and treatment
               OF- THE

    ASIATIC CHOLERA.
                   ------0000------


                       HISTORY.

   In 1S17 this horrible  pestilence broke out in Ilindostonon
 she continent of Asia,and has almost eonstantly raged in some
 part of the globe ever sinee.  It is by some supposed to hav«
 be^n, at that, time, a new disease,—but although it had  no"
 spread so  extensively, and for years in  succession, previous
 to that period, it  is yet certain that in 1790, 1787,  1783,
 1732,  1780,  1750, 1741,  1730, 1696,  1G76, 1669,  1629,
 1600,  and als > at  other times, in diiforent places, the terribly
 ravages of a complaint;  die symptoms of which were almoi-f
 '.•xactly similar to those of the present cholera, aresat this day
 recorded on the pages of history.  The  first appearance oi
 tha cholera in  18 i7, was on the  13th of August in (be city of
 Jessore, hi Ilindoston ;  and, in two months from its first in-
 vavon, it destriyed imre than  ten  thousand persons  m  that
 e;:y.   During the same  year it extended in almost every di-
 rection, to the dis'j nee  of two hundred and iiffy miles,  and
 swept off not less than 600,000  inhabitants.
   In 1818, its ravages were greater than they hive ever beea
since  in the course of  one year ;  and extended from  the
 < [uator to the twenty-eight, deejt e of noriii latiiede,— spread
•ver an exteti! of thirty degrees of longitude, \a\d vi: .led  146
cities or villages.
  In 1819, it extended over about 40 degrees of lat tudo, 60
«f longitude, and visited  64 cities: in Bombay, 150,(00 died;
At Malacca, 400;  m Sumi at Bankok, 40,000 ; in the  life
of France, from 10 to 20.000 ;  but wan not  so violent  this
 ♦ ear as during  the two years previous.
  In  1820, it ran.d in  Sumatra,  the Philippine Islands,
                          20 
308                ASIATIC CHOLERA.
Canton, and  many other  cities  of  China.   Although  there
were only 42 cities attacked this  year by cholera, yet its
baneful breyfh was dill used  over 50 degrees of latitude, and
60 of longitude.
   In 1821, it reached Bassora and Bagdad on the Persian
Gulf.  In Bassora, 18,000 died  in 11 days. At Shilaz 6,000
died.  It appeared  at Borneo on the  eastern  coast, ancl'the
Island of Java lost 102,000  inhabitants.  It covered a  space
this year of 43 degrees of  latitude, and  70 of longitude.
   In 1822,  it progressed  towards  Europe on the western
eoast to Aleppo, and at Tunis 4,800 died.   But  it was not
so extensive  and  fatal this year  as before, extending only  to
10 degrees of latitude in Persia,  S\ria, and Mesopotamia,—
and about the same space  in the  Chinese Empire.
   In 1823, besides many other places both where  it had, and
had  not appeared before, it extended north to the  frontiers  of
Europe, to Astroean and Orenbourg.
■   In 1324 the march of the cholera seemed nearly to be ar-
rested.  It prevailed some, however, in the Birman Empire,
Hindoston, China,  and Syria, ancl those of the most wealthy
and elevated  (hisses were  its principal victims.
   In 1825, it began again to be more  violent,  breaking out
and reappearing in  different parts of Asia, in Jessore, Cal-
cutta, Beinres, Arracan,  Birman  Empire,  and  also  inthw'
ftorth of China, and Chinese Tartary.
   In  1826, the cholera continued  to  progress towards the
north in extern Asia—passed the great wall of China, visited
the city  of -vukuchoton, and penetrated from Kiachta to thw
centre of Asiatic Russia.   Western Asia, however, was thi&
year omobMelv exempted, and fewer cities infected than  in
amy year since 1817.
   In  1827, on one sicle  at the north, it reached  the higL
grounds  near the  Ilimmaleh mountains, and on the other, it
opened a new route towards Europe from Lahore to Casghar,
and the city of Cabul—from this place it travelled with th«
r.-irav.iM- in  1828 and 182:),  and  Persia on the west, ami
Russia on (he north were then visited.
   In 182 8, it was principally confined  to British India, but
continued its march towards  the north, and  from Lahore
where  it destroyed 30,000  inhabitants in 1827, it extended
»h;s yenr to the neighboring  towns.
   In 1820, it reappeared in Persia and other places,—crossed
irver mc  Ural mountains  separating Asia from Europe, attd 
                    ASIATIC CHOLERA.                309

 appeared in the city of Orenbourg ; extended to Rasufina, GO
 miles west of that place, and spreading,  by  the middle of
 November, over  200 miles square ;  but the cold weathor
 soon arrested its progress.
   In  1830, the cholera spread over various provinces around
 the Caspian sea.  The citv Tifiis was reduced by death and
 flight  from 30,000 to 8,000.
   It reappeared at Astracban, ancl visiting Taritsin, Saraton,
 Kien, ancl Samarov, it proceeded along  the  Volga-river to
 Novgarod ; and from thence, appearing at Kasan ancl Kostro-
 ma, it reached the city of Moscow on the 15th of September,
 wdien it subsided at (he clo.se of the year.
   In the spring of 1S31 it reappeared in  Europe, extending
 lo Archangel on the north, visiting St. Petersburg  on the 26tk
 of June, and spreading, at the south and west, to  unfortunate
 Poland, and along the coast of the Baltt;;.   Twenty thousand
 pilgrims at Mecca perished  of the cholera.  In  Hungary it
 prevailad extensively.  In Turkey, Austria, Prussia, and the
 Netherlands,  the cities of Constantinople, Vienna, Berlin,and
 Hamburg, were visited by the common scourge ;  and on the
 26th or October it crossed over to England, first appearing at
 Sunderland, next at New  Castle, Gateshead, and finally ia
 Scotland,  (Dec.  17th,) at Haddington, on the river Tyne.
   In 1832, (Jan. 27th,)  it  appeared in Edmburg ancl places
 adjacent:  shortly after, in the city of London ; and,  on the
 2-b.h of March, it extended  to France, and desolated the city
 of Paris.   Soon after this it broke out in Dublin and other
 towns in Ireland.  On the 8th of June  it appeared at Quebca
 in North  America;   in less than  one week  afterwards,  at
 Montreal; the \,^\ week in June,  at New York ; on the 3d
 of July,  at Albany;  5th,  at Detroit ;  17(h, at Buffalo; and
 *oon  alier, at other places on the Grand Canal.  About the
 middle of the month, it prevailed in New Jersey—reached
 Philadelphia, and on the 24th, extended to Norfolk and Ports-
 ii juth, in Virginia.   It appeared in  Rhode Island the first of
 August; on the 15th in Boston ;  and about the same time,
 in Baltimore and  Edenton. At this time", more (ban 50towns
 in the  United  States had been visited by the cholera. Deaths
 by  cholera at  Sing Sing  up to August  13th  were 89.  Ia
 Montreal, up  lo the  28th,  the deaths were 2,000.   At this
 lime it prevailed in Utica, in Madison co., Buffalo, Washing-
ton,  Pottsville, Reading, &c.   It was abating in  New-York
oe the  21st, but increasing on the 19th Sept.
                           20* 
310
ASIATIC CHOLERA'.
  Deaths in Quebec by cholera from June 8th, to Sept. 2no>
were 2218.   On the approach of cold weather, it gradual!?
disappeared—by (be 9th of Oct. it was fast declining in Can-
ada, extinct at Washington, and, by the first of Nov. nearly
so in New York.   But it still existed in Kentucky and Mis-
sissippi ;  and in New Orleans there were not enough of the
living to  bury the dead,—from 2  to 300 died in  a day, and
their bodies were sunk in the river.  'J he deaths in X. York
this year from cholera, were 3515.
 In 1833, Feb.  19th, the cholera was again, at Louisiana, but
princ pally  among the  blacks.  From  that to the 24th  of
March, it  bad broken out in Tennessee, was raging at M-i-
lanzes, at Cuba, ancl 5,0u0 had d:ed at Havanna.  April
30th,  it was still prevailing in New Orleans ;  May 19th, oh
the Great  Miami; and, during the mouth of June, still at
New Orleans, Tampico, in Virginia,  Kentucky,  Pennsyl-
vania, Ohio,  Maryland, Alabama, Arkansas,  Illmoise, Indi-
ana, and  Tennessee.   It is still progressing, and will proba-
bly find its way into every state, county, 'and town in  the
Union.   In Kentocky, almost every county in the slate ha-i
been overrun with the pestilence ; in Hemingsburgh, one in
every II  has died of the cholera.   A like mortalii\  in New
York would carry off 20,000  persons.   That citv, Imwcvs.-,
has this year  been, and is, up to this date (July 15th)  urn
ftiiall healthy c                         '


      THE  SYMPTOMS OF  THE CHOLERA,

  Have  been nearly the same m all countries.  Some have
experienced ptcmonit >r\ symptoms fur sever.d  hours, or days,
such as diarrhea, nausea, and  si ght vomiting ;  others hav«
been prostrated  at once,  as if  b\ a blew ;  these become sud-
denly cold, the  pulse ceases, and they expire in a short time.
In all countries, the following have been the principal svn.u-
toms.
  Diarrhea,  slight cramps, nausea, pain,  heat, or sensa ef
weigh! at the pit of the stomach, are the warning symptoms.
Then come on sinking of the circulation, coldness of the skin,
vomiting and purging of a starchy matter ; severe  cramps
which begin in  the fingers and toes, and approach  the trunk!
Great oppression of (he  stomach ;  internal heat ;  and (hirst
for cold water, though rejected as soon &s swallowed. Whs*
• 
                    ASIATIC  CHOLERA.                311

the first warnings are given by nervous agitation, and cramps,
beginning at the tips of the fingers and toes, rapidly approach-
ing the body—then, there  is hardly an interval—Vomiting
and purging  came  on ; the features become sharp and con-
tracted ; there is an expression of wildness and terror on the
countenance, as  (hough the unhappy  victim were conscious
that the hand of death is upon him—collapse conies on ; the
eye sinks ; the extremities, and soon the whole body assume*
a leaden or  blue color;  the tongue  is moist;  the  skin  i«
damp, and deadly cold; with complete prostration of strength;
anguish and  agitation ;  suppression  of the eyes, which are
fixed in a vacant stare, sunk  in their orbits, ancl surrounded
by dark  circles.   The tragic scene soon (doses;  he becomes
comatose, and finally, dies quietly,  after a few  convulsive
sobs,  'hough it is impossible to determine  the moment.   The
body,  for instance, lies apparently lifeless; suddenly a  con-
vulsive shudder shakes it;  its bands are clenched, aryl if you
put your own within  (hem ancl  force them  open, they  shut
again with a spasmodic catch.
   Some die without any reaction  at all from the stage of'col-
lapse ; sometimes there is a transitory rallying of the powers
ef life just before death ; sometimes (his rallying stage  con-
tinues and becomes  a fever of same days' continuance.  Many
are cut off by this fever;  some recover from it, and are  then
out of danger.  As  a  general rule, there are but few who live
after the stage of collapse has become fairly established ;  and
of those who do, there is a still less number who recover with-
out passing the secondary fever.
  The first  case of acknowledged cholera in  England,  was
that of the  elder Sproat, at  Sunderland, aged 69.  He had
been laboring under diarrhea  a week or ten days before his
seizure.   On  Wednesday, Oct.   19th, he had  been takeu
worse : on Thursday  and Friday, he had  vomiting and prug-
ing of feculent  matter, but no symptoms of collapse.  On
Saturday  he was greatly belter, took a  mutton chop to his
dinner, ancl wenj out  to his keel  in  the afternoon.   In about
20 minutes he returned, and  was  taken very ill,  with severe
shivering*giddiness, cramp at the stomach, violent vomiting
and purging.   On Sunday  morning  be was sinking; pulse
imperceptible ; extremities cold ; skin dry ;  eyes sunk ; lips
blue ;  features shrunk ; whfspcring voice ; violent vomiting
and purging; cramp of the calves of the legs, and complete
nrostration.   In the afternoon his skin became warmer, bwt 
312
ASIATIC CHOLERA.
the other symptoms continued.  On the 24th he was quite
collapsed, with aggravation of all the symptoms, except the
▼omiting, which had entirely ceased ; stools passed  involun-
tarily.   On the following morning he  was  less collapsed;
countenance more  natural ; blueness of the  lips had disap-
peared ; the vomiting had ceased ;  but the purging still con-
tinued  less violent, and nearly imperceptible ;  extremeties
eold ; spasms of the legs continued.  Towards evening, the
purging and vomiting had emirely ceased : he become sleepy;
the other symptoms continuing.   On the morning of the 26th
he was much weaker ; pulse  scarcely perceptible; counte-
nance quite shrunk ; eyes sunk ;  lips  blue, as well  as the
lower extremities ;  the nails were livid.   He was  coma-
tose, and died at 12 at noon.
  The second case was  that of Susanna  Clark, aged  18.
The premonitory symptoms were slight, and of very short
duration.   December 5th, about 5  in the evening, she com-
plained of uneasiness and distension of the stomach and bowels;
her countenance became pallid, and  expressive of much anxi-
ety and distress.   She was attacked with vomiting and purg-
ing of bilious fluids, and with cramps.  She continued  in this
state until 8 in the evening, when bleeding was unsuccessfully
attempted.  She took brandy, and a  mixture containing laud-
anum, capsicum, and ammonia.  The vomiting ceased, she
become much better in  the night, and, on the morning of the
6th, her pulse was full and her body warm,  complaining of
little except a  pain  in  the head : but,  about midnight, the
cramps, vomiting, and  purging  returned :  she became cold,
and apparently  almost  lifeless,  though  still sensible.  Her
pulse was gone ; her eyes deeply sunk ; she remained in the
same state  through the day, until 6 at night, when she be-
came, comatose, and died at 8.


                    '  CAUSES
             Of the Cholera, and  mcthods'of
                   PREVENTION.

  1. A few of  (he medical, and many of the non-medical
ecmmirnity  believe it to be contagious, and capable  of being
communicated by actual touch.
  2. A larger class believe it is  not  contagious at all,  and 
ASIATIC CHOLERA.
SIS
 that it becomes epidemic either from some general unknown
 cause every where existing, or from the same  causes that
 produce other diseases, such as exposure to cold and moisture
 at night, and burning heat during the day ;  intemperance,
 bad food, want of cleanliness, &c.
   3. A third class believe it to be contingently  contagious,;
 that is, that it arises at first from some unknown cause com-
 bined with the common exciting causes above mentioned, and
 that in  the filthy hovels of the indigent, in the impure air of
 crowded apartments, the disease does  sometimes acquire a
 contagious character,  which it  did not at  first possess, and
 which may be prevented, or obviated, by attention to ventil-
 hition and cleanliness.
   Those who believe it to be contagious  in its  very nature,
 advance the following statements :
   1. The disease was imported into Calcutta, and other pla-
 ces in Bengal, from Jessore in 1817.
   t. It has always followed the  great traveled  routes, such
 as the large roads, navigable rivers, &c. and has been trans-
 ported  from one country to another by vessels, armies, and
 caravans.    •
   S.  The nurses and attendants in cholera hospitals have fre-
 quently been attacked with the disease.
   4. Several cities, fortresses, and private dwellings, hav*
 established rigorous sanitary measures, and the cholera ha*
 not been manifested among them.
   5.  Individuals coming from  places where the disease ra-
 ged, have sickened of the cholera in a healthy town ; and
 soon after, several of  their attendants have died of tlie same
 Jisoa-.-.
  6. The cholera was imported into Mauritius  by the To-
 paze frigate,  wdiich sailed  from  Calcutta while the disease
 was raging there.
  7. The disease was imported into Orenbourg, by cara-
 vans from central Asia.
  8. It  was brought to Dantzic, by a vessel  from  Riga, the
 captain of which died  (he dav of his arrival, and afterward*
 the  disease spread to (he town.
  9. The cholera was imported into Sunderland from Ham-
burgh, or from some of the  ports on tho continent of Europe.
  10. It was brought  into Canada by vessels and emigrants
lirorn Ireland.
  Te the 1st statement, diat the disease was imported v\U 
ST 4                ASIATIC CHOLERA.
 Calcutta, fyc. from Jessore in 1817, the anri-contagioaist*
 reply, that it has been proved to have occurred nearly at the
 same time in various  places where (here had been no imme-
 diate intercourse.
   To the 2d statement, that it has always followed the great
 traveled routes,  fyc, they reply, that if t, is were  true,  it
 might be accounted for from the fact that t' ere thev are most
 exposed to impure air, filth, intemperance,and want of food;
 but, that surgeon Mitchell, (see his report from Palmacottak,)
 says that it " made its approach by neither of the great roads,'"
 but, "spread pretty generally through the small, low, dirty
 houses,  in every direction."
   To the 3d statement, that  the  nurses and attendants in
 cholera hospitals, have frequently been edtacked with tlie
 disease, they reply, that although it is true that some of the
 attendants have  been  attacked,  yet the history of facts shows
 that they are not more liable to it than others.   Dr. Jameson
 says, that of between two hundred  ancl  fifty and thiee hun-
 dred attending physicians in Bengal, but three took  the dis-
 ease.  At Bombay none of t: e hospital attendants were at-
 tacked,  though  they   were assisting the patients dav  and
 night.  Kennedy.  " Only  one  individual out of one hun-
 dred and one  attendants,  was  attacked."   Madras report.
 " At Berhampore none of the native attendants on the cholera
 hospitals were affected."   Trans. Med. and Fhys.  Soc. of
 Calcutta.   " I have knewn the wife attend the husband, the
 husband attend the wife, parents their children, children their
 parents, and in no instance have I found the disease commu-
 nicated  to the attendants.   Dr. Laferre.  phys. at  St. Pe-
 tersburgh.   " All the attendants and all (he soldiers handled
 the sick,  and supported  (heir., heads  whilst they vomited,
 without using any precaution, and yet without being attacked
 with c' olera."  Dr.  Zudkoff, Moscow.   "■ In the marine
 hospital of St. Petersburg h, of forty-three attendants on cho-
 lera patients, not a single  one was affected; and in (he tem-
 porary hospital at the same place, of the fifty-eight attendants,
 one only was affected  with cholera, and he  often drinking
kwass, when very warm."   Amer.  Jour. Md.  Sciences,
 1832.   " Dr. Foy, at Warsaw,  and ten others  inoculated
themselves with  the blood of patients laboring under the cho-
 lera, tasted their dejections, and inhaled their breaths, with-
out receiving the disease."   Gazette Medicate, 1831.  The
 following  is  the last clause of a report to tlie  board of health 
ASIATIC CHOLERA.       •        315
in New-York, dated July 24th, 1832.   "Thfe-VncoMcal and
•ther attendants of  the hospitals, not predisposed to tho dis-
ease by their previous habits, have, also, so far as is known
tc the council,  escaped its attack.     •
   In behalf of the special Medical Council.
                     ALEX.  STEVENS, M. D. Pres.
   By order of the board of health.
                                J. MOIITON, Sec'y."
   To the  4th statement,  that cholera has not appeared in
several cities, <$-c, where sanitary (quarantine) measures
have been established, they reply,  that it is very true; but
that it is also true  that other places adjoining  those which
were attacked, have escaped, notwithstanding every j recau-
liomry measure had been omitted ;  and that in Russi.:, Aus-
tria, and Prussia, where  quarantine  regulations were early
adopted, and severely executed, the disease did  appear.
   To the  5th statement, that individuals comin f from pla-
ces where the disease raged, have sickened  oj ti;e cholera
in a healthy town, and that their attendants have scon after
died of the same disease, they reply, that such instances are
numerous; that other individuals, after coming from an un-
healthy to a healthy tftyvn, have been attacked, ancl yet none
of their attendants  were aiiected ; that t e same causes were
present in* the uninfected as in the  infected district,  which,
combined  with filt:, ill ventilated rooms, intemperance, night-
watching, anxiety, arid terror from the assurance that Asiatic
cholera yvas among them, were sufficient to produce the dia-
ffe-e.
  To the  Gth statement, that the cholera was imported into
Mauritius by the   Topaze frigate, (hey reply, that the re-
port of Dr. John Kinnis, who bad charge of a hospital  in
Mauritus at the time, says, that two cases  occurred throe
weeks before t' e arrival  of the Topa/e,  and  that when the
vessel did  arrive,  not one of the  patients sent from  it to the
hospital yvas affected with ohoiera ;  that  the cholera did nol
break out  among the aiomdants on these men, but among the
African slaves and  Indian convicts.
  To the 7th statement, that-// was imported into Oren'aourg
tiy  caravans from Asia,  they  rep!., that the last  caravan
that arrived at Orenbourg, reached  that place thirty-five days
before the first  case of cholera appeared, and that the indi-
viduals composing  it were in good health.
  To the  8th statement, that it was  LrouglU  to Danlzic by 
516         #       ASIATIC CHOLERA.
  & vessel froy* %iga, they reply, that Dr.  Dalmas, who was
  sent by the French government to Warsaw, investigated the
  subject at Riga, and reports that the cholera did not exist at
  Riga at the time the vessel sailed ;  that it did  not appear on
  board tie ship during the voyage;  that it appeared at Dant-
  zic bef.no  the arrival of the vessel; that  it broke out in tho
  town before it appeared at the port; and that the cordon san-
  itaire did not protect the neighboring places.
    To the 9th statement, that the cholera was imported into
  Sunderland from Hamburg, or from some of the ports on
  tl^e continent of Europe, they  reply,  that the  disease first
  appeared more than two miles from w! ere the vessels  were
  lying;  and that Dr. Brown,  and Dr. White, of Sunderland,
  «tate, that  the same disease prevailed  there in August, two
  months before the  arrival of those vessels.
    To the 10th statement, that the cholera tvas imported int»
  Canada by vessels and emigrants from Ireland, they re-
  ply, that the board of health  at Quebec are in possession of
  no facts  calculated to show that it  was imported ; that tlie
  most  eminent physicians and enlightened citizens oi Montreal
  are satisfied that it is sot a contagious disease, and state that
  many cases of cholera occurred  six weeks before the vessel
  and emigrants arrived.
    Of these contending parties with  respect to the contagious
  nature of cholera,  my object in presenting the arguments of
  each, pro and con, to my readers, is to enable every  man to
 judge for himself in relation to it.   Mv business  is not to de-
  cide controversies, but to give a faithful detail  of such thing*
  as have been considered as  the causes of cholera ; and we
  have  seen  that it is considered to arise from some unknown
  predisposing cause existing in the atmosphere; or from con-
  tagion,  specific  or contingent;  or  from  common exiting
  causes, as,  exposure to  sudden changes, from heat and dry-
  ness,  to cold and moisture ; from intemperance, and excesses
 of all  kinds ; from fear,  night watching*, and  mental  anxie-
  ty ; from a scanty, poor diet, ill-ventilated rooms, accumula-
  tions of filth, &c.  Or, (which  perhaps is more probable,)
 that it arises from a combination or all of the above mentioned
 causes.   Some suppose  that this unknown cause  is the  mag-
netic  influence of the earth, which they call the telluric poio-
 •r.  Mr. Loder, of Moscow, thinks tie disease is primitively
  nervous, and  depends on an electro-magnetic  cause; and
  Br. Hah no man asserts that the  cholera arises from insects, 
ASIATIC CHOLEUA.
SIT
 too small to be seen, but which attach themselves to all parte
 of the body.


 THE METHOD OF PREVENTING THE CHOLERA,

   Is to avoid the causes which produce it; ancl  these pre-
 cautions should be taken without having ones mind disturbed
 about the disease ; the less fear, the less hazard.   The Edin-
 burgh board of health say, " experience has shown, that the
 most essential precaution  for escaping the disease is sobriety;
 lhat intoxication  during  the prevalence of the epidemic  is
 almost sure to be followed by  an attack, and  that those ad-
 dicted to drinking are the  most subject to take cholera, and
 the mest likely to sink under it.   In like manner, strict at-
 tention  to personal cleanliness,  to cleanliness and ventillation
 of dwelling houses,  to warm clothing, to regularity of hours
 for sleep, to  keeping as much  as  possible within doors at
 night, ancl  to taking food before going out in the  morning,
 may be relied on  as important means of security."   All those
 means which tend to preserve general health should be pur-
 lued; all those causes which predispose to common diseases
 of our own climate  should be avoided ; and, finally, the sub-
 ject  of prevention may  be condensed into four words, tem-
 perance, cleanliness, ventilation,  and fearlessness.


         TREATMENT OF THE CHOLERA.

   Very unfortunate has it been for mankind that, in most of
 tho countries where cholera has prevailed, it has   been ex-
 pected  that some specific or universal  antidote   might  bf
 found for the  disease;—just as if the  cholera was   always of
 tho same nature,  always of the  same degree of  violence, al-
 ways affected the same organs, and always  required thr
 vime treatment.   It is  undoubtedly from  this mistaken idea,
 (hat  so many different remedies have been  proposed and ad-
 ministered, condemned and recommended.  There is hardly
 any thing in the shape  of medicines, that can be  imagined,
 which has not been  tried ; the principal remedies known, are
 bloodleting, calomel in large doses, opium in a great  vari-
ety of forms, in great and small quantities, and by injection;
•ther, camphor, musk, castor, aromatic and stimulating tiao- 
318                ASIATIC CHOLERA.

tores, essential oils, of peppermint, cloves,  and  cinnamon ;
wine, ardent spirits, external heat, warm bath,  hot  bath,
vapor  bath, cold  bath,  blistering the extremities,  heated
sand, friction with irritating rubefacients, the actual  cautery
(burning with a hot iron) applied near the spine, and to the
limbs; emetics, purgatives,  galvanism,  electricity,  animal
charcoal, colchicumin, oxygen gas, exhilarating gas,  (ndrous
oxyde  gas, j snake  root, peppers,  peruvian  bark,  cherry
lawrel,  tobacco injections,  sub-nitrate of bismuth, hyoscy-
amus, cicuta, ice,  cold water, injections of salt and soda into
the veins, &c.  ike.
   Ti e ridiculous  notion of an  indiscriminate  or exclusive
use of either of these remedies I as  been pistlv chastised by
the New-York  Cholera Bulletin in the following  sarcastic
remarks  :—" We are on debateable ground,  with a host of
champions  to encounter, arrayed in various  stj !e,  from the
armories of ancient  observation  and  modern experience.
The profession  is indeed in the field in motley garb to slaugh-
ter the monster of epidemy :  but the members of it agree  not
on the  mode of destruction, and in the  warmth of argument,
ancl lire of debate, turn many of the weapons that should be
direc  !  against the enemy towards their fellow " lilii Escu-
Iapii."   Alas!  then, for die public,  for  whom doctors and
cholera are contending ; they watch the fieiee onslaught, and
ever and anon are struck be the random blows that proceed
from the combatants.   Yes! for 'cholera kills, and doctors
slay, and every foe will have its wav!'
   L"t  us view  (he medical army !  In the foremost rank stand
the bleeders, then  advance the  calomel band,  escorted by a
troop of opium  firagers; here is a company of stimulators,
and there a tobacco brigade ; here a file of saline  aperients,
and then: again a guard of leechers and  blisterers.   The men
of friction are in the van, and the rear  is composed of the  icy
legion.   All these  characters appear  in the  force raised  to
■ubdue the ch dera, and bv such a medley is the  fell disease
of Asia assailed.   It is of course then  said by some (hat the
lancet  will ed'eet a cure, that  calomel  singly,  or combined
with opium, is  a specific ; that  stimulants will  restore  the
depressed,  or tobacco will weaken the  fiercest actum ; that
saline aperients will act successfully through the circulation,
that friction will  stay the spasm,  or  that ice will moderate
the accompanying fever.  Now however valuable all or any
•f these remedies may prove, if  accepted  exclusive of other 
ASIATIC CH0LMRA.                313
treatment in every case, they will destroy more frequently
than they can save."

            Treatment of the cholera in Asia.
   An outline of the treatment pursued by Frederick Corbyn,
Esq. (1818) in the Bengal establishment, is, to give  tyventy
grains of calomel, (in  powder, not in pills,) and to wash it
«iown wit . sixty drops of laudanum, and twenty of oil of
peppermint in two ounces of water ;  to bleed freely  in  the
f.rst stage ; to support  warmth by external heat, hot bath and
frictions ; ancl internally, by  cordials.   The success  of  this
plan was confirmed by the official reports  of Dcs.  Burrill,
Whyto, Daws, Craw,  Tod,  Richards, Longdili, tl  ! ertsou.
Cordon, Coats, Jukes,  Taylor, Ogilvy, Campbell, Mi wood,
and Wallace, physicians and surgeons.   Surgeon Campbell
gave the calomel and  laudanum every two hours, but when
the spasms and vomiting had ceased, he omitted the h.u'da-
attiii, continued the calomel,  and gave the stimulants more
Latently.
   "■  .-eon Wallace  merely altered  the  form of giving the
calomel and opiu...* as  practised by Carbyn,) by rcdddngtw*)
*t   ns of the latter with fifteen of the ibrmer, ancl mixing it
with two drachms of honey.   After this, the patient  was pu
into the hot bath, ancl small quantities of hot arrack and  wa-
ter, mixed with spices  .»nd  sugar, were  given him to drink.
The patient commonly  falls  asleep, and  in favorable casos,
Kvakes free from danger.  But if the coldness and  t-pasmt
recurred, recourse was then again  had to the hot bath,  and
opium in various forms.  Cf twenty-two cases thus treated,
twenty  recovered.
   Surgeon Mil wood, in his report, says, I will now give coy
»*:*atment (of cholera)  wiih  my  reasons  for  the add tion  1
has*' made to Mr. C .rbyn's.   There are two  great  objects
to be attained f >r the o-covery of the patient.  1st, to allay
fthe vomiting and purging; 2dly, to restore the pulse,  boat in
»..* : extr-mities, and produce sleep.   In order to el'fect these,
I  have  addsd  five  grains of antimonial powder to  the 20
grains of catamcl, and one drachm of ethereal spirits of nitre
to the 60 dr >ps of laudanum.  In the course of two hours, 1
pre 10  grains of calomel and five of ontimonial powder, witk
Lalf the  laudanum and  spirits of nitre prepared in camphor-
e'«d mixture in plaee  ef pliafl wntcr, and repeat this as it is 
320
ASIATIC CHOLERA.
required.   I have found four scruples of carbonate of mag-
nesia to be the best laxative.   It remains on the stomach and
generally  cause two or three plentiful evacuations.
   In Mauritius, Dr. Kinnis says, that "the  chief remediei
employed were blood-letting,  warm  bath, spiritous and drv
frictions, rubefacients; and internally, spirits, opium, calomel,
epsom salts &c.—but that from his experience, he is satisfied
that bleeding is injurious, that opium prevents  the  action of
other remedies by causing a torpor of t' e intestines;; that the
warm bath has the same  effect by diverting the  fluids to the
external surface,  and that friction of no description has anv
tend.-, cy to restore the natural warmth.  The only medicine
on which  he depends is calomel: "Ten grain.; cf calomel,
or when  the vomiting  was severe,  a  scruple, (20 grains,)
followed,  at the distance  of some hours, by an ounce of salts,
with, or without infusion of senna, and once or tsvice repeated,
cured almost every case.

          Treatment of the Cholera in Europe.
   According to the practice of Drs. Russell and fdrrry, a<iemi
of the British government in Russia, when  the  first stage af-
fords time for distinct treatment, the  diarrhea  is m be arrest-
ed at once by opium in small doses; astringent, leeches, if
the  patient be  plethoric; by cordials and quinine,, if there
he cold sweats; by confining to the bed and keep dig up heat;
by diet; by emetics.   Should spasms be the first and leading
symptom,  sub-nitrate of  bismuth, cupping along the spine,
cordial "and antispasmodic medicines, opium, frictions, and
dry warmth, are indicated.   But when he is suddenly seized
with vertigo, neusea, coldness, loss of pulse, blueness of the
skin, shrinking of the features, with watery discharges, and
cramps; constituting an aggravated case of the worst type—
not a moment of time should be wasted, but let him be imme-
diately placed between warm blankets, ancl two table spoon-
fuls  of common salt dissolved  in six ounces of  warm water-
be given at once to produce vomiting ; and immediately after,
or before,  a small  bleeding will be  desirable.   Then apply
dry ancl steady heat along the course of the spine and the pit
of the stomach, by a succession of heated  plates or platters ;
surround the upper and lower extremities with bags of heated
bran,, corn, ashes, or sand,  rubbing at the  same time  with a
warm hand, and  a littlo  oil to  protect the   skin.   Tb« 
ASIATIC CHOLERA.
321
hot iron may also be  applied to either  side of the spine;
and. if this, together with  the emetic, dry  heat, and  frictions,
should  rouse the nervous power, then  follow it up with cor-
dials and opiates,  external stimulants, mercurials,  ar.d mild
aromatic aperients ;  a horizontal position  must be enforced ;
and the patient's drink should be soured with nitrous acid.
Warmc baths, and all moisture applied to the skin are worse
than useless.
   An agent  of  the French  government at St.  Petersburg,
who witnessed ancl treated the disease in a hospital of 250
patients, remarks, that the same  treatment will not apply to
all cases ;  that the constitution of the patient and stage of the
disease  must be  taken into consideration ;  that external ap-
plications are more important than internal remedies ;  that as
soon as the first symptoms appear, the patient should go to
bed, cover up warm, take immediately a cup of strong coitee
without milk, with, or without sugar;  and soon  after, from
4 to 6  drops of oil  of  peppermint on sugar;  apply  to the
bowels  at the same time bags of hot oats,  ashes, or bran, un-
til a capions sweating  is produced.  If there be  headache,
with pain at the  pit of the stomach, apply a  Lrge mustard
plaster  ; if this fails,  then take a pint or mere of blood—and
this must proceed all other remedies  if the constitution be
strong and  sanguine.   The tea of melissa, and one tenth of a
gram of ipecac  every three  hours may also be given, and if
necessary, the mustard plasters may be applied over the whole
abdomen   ]f these  means do not over come the vomiting,
give a d «e <>f carbonate of soda and eiio-sachar-citri,  of each
10 grains, adding G or 8 grains of salts of tartar ;  and imme-
diately  afterwards,  take  a  teaspoonful of lemon juice and
water.  He  has often cured  the complaint by emetics and
castor oil—makes us*  of no other purgative.   If collapse
threaten, redouble the friction  over the body,—let  four per-
sons rub at once, with dry flannel powdered over with mus-
tard.  If cramps become severe, take oil of turpentine, thro*
ounces;  of oil of  tusquium, half an ounce; of oil of.-  II  llower,
three andahalfounc.es; of spirit of sal ammoniac, half an oz.
Mix, and rub wbh  it.  Be very  oa jtious in giving, opium,
as it often produces incurable congestions  of the brin without
arresting the  malady, and let calomel be rejected altogether.
He has  found the salt emetic successful in cholera : two tablt
spoonfuls of salt are  dissolved in hot water and taken  warm,
winch is soon thrown up ; then one table spoonful of the same 
322
ASIATIC CHOLERA.
is taken cold, every hour ;  afterwards, a teaspoonful at a time
until all  alarming  symptoms  have subsided.   If no bile is
thrown np with the first dose, take 6 or 8 ounces of blood, or,
if it will not run, cupping or leeches to the pit of the stomach
relieves the  burning sensation,  and  the  fatigue of  frequent
vomiting.   The patients are  not to  rise from their  beds for
the purpose of evacuation,  but to make use oi bed pans.   Ha
has sometimes been obliged to discontinue the salt, and give
bismuth, or camphor dissolved in ether adding  the mucilage
of gum arabic and sugar
   As  soon  as the cholera  assumed the character of a typhus
fever,  he applied leeches or blisters  behind the ears, to the
neck, and calf of the  leg; gave castor oil  when  necessary,
and oxygenated muriatic acid,  in closes  of half, or  even as
ounce, upon  6 ounces of a decoction  of  marsh-mallow.   In
the third  stage there is hardly any remedy  which  produces
any other ellect  than to prolong, sometimes,  the  sufierings of
tlie patient.    With respect to drink, after the salt emetic had
operated,  he  consulted the  patients' wishes: the best, how-
ever, was cold water in small quantities-, often  repealed ; or
ise, in  small pieces, swallowing some, and  melting tome in
the mouth ;  or toast water  with  a little red wine.   The diet
siiould  be ehi< ken broth with rice or sago b.died  4 or 5 hours.
m which red wine may be  added.
   Dr.  Lofevre, physician to the Critisbembassy at St. Pf tors-.
I urg, remarks, that " the epidemic cholera, upon its first in-
vasion, bufries all  attempts to  conquer it ;   but it gradually
I;wses its intensity, and  towards its decline, becomes as tracta-
ble as other disorders of the alimentary canal."   In the firt-t
stage when the pulse is full, he advocates a small bleeding in
the Horizontal posture,  *and has  known bleeding,  sweating,
calomel and opium, rhubarb and  magnesia, sub-nitrete of bii-
rauth, hot baths,  frictions,  &c, to fail :n  the commencement
of the di.ease, and  to succeed at a more,  advanced period of
it.
   The following was Dr.  Lefevre's  own mode of practice
r,hen called in at an early  period of the disorder:
   If the patient  is robust,  the pulse still 'perceptible, and the
mmm not too much reduced by  evacuat'ons, I order from 6
to 8 ounces of blood to be  drawn from the arm, the patient
being first put to bed in a recumbent posture.   The follow-
ing draught is then to be given ;  laudanum and ether, of each
V.) drops.   Strong  peppermint water, an ounce and a half. 
ASIATIC CHOLERA.
323
 If this be rejected, it should be repeated immediately ;  if the
 second be likewise  not retained, (hen a clyster of linseed tea
 with  fifty drops  of laudanum should be administered.  It
 often  happens that the patient after taking the first dose falls
 asleep, and wakes in  perfect  health.  A large  sinapism to
 the abdomen, and bottles ot hot  water to the feet, should no;
 be omitted ; if these means produce  speedy relief, an ounce
 of castor oil should be prescribed as soon as the stomach and
 bowels are quiet.
    Dr. James Johnson, physician extraordinary to the king of
 England, and editor of the Medico Cbirurgtcal Review, has
 submitted to the Westminster Medical  Society a  series of
 propositions respecting the cholera.   The following is an ab-
 stract of that part which relates to the treatment :—The prin-
 cipal object is to restore the equilibrium of the blood ;  which
 if once effected, a restoration of secretion, calorification, and
 oxygenation, follows.  To effect this object, he proposes blood-
 letting,  if the patient be  young and robust, with  a view
 of relieving the  heart ancl internal organs from the  black
 blood  in which they are droyvning, and to turn  the tide of cir-
 culation from the centre to the surface of the body.   At the
 same time, or immediately afterwards, afullvomint of infu-
 sion of mustard seed, or white  vitriol, should be given for the
 same purpose,  in  order to drive the blood  from  the internal to
 the external  parts of the body ;  that after  the operation of the
 emetic, diffosibie  stimulants, such as brandy and laudanum,
 may be  used with caution s > as not to induce subsequent in-
 flammation,  but  that calomel  alone  would  pr.bably be the
 k-bt medicine after the emetic.   lit suggests that the inhala-
 tion of oxygen  gas may be beneficial, and during the use of
 ■{c internal rem'.dks he directs that heat, friction, and  count-
 er-irritation,  he used externally, all at the same tine,  and in
 such a manner  that  the patient shall  not  bo  obliged to make
 me least exertion.   \ le believes " that the disease originates
 in causes  of whioh we are ignorant, and over which we have
 no control, and  that, in crowded, filthy,  ancl  ill ventilated
 u'aces, it takes on  an infectious diameter, tending still iurther
 to propagate and  heighten the danger of the disease."
   George  Hamilton Bell, who was deputized by the Edin-
borgh Board of Health to vis;t  the cholera in England, advo-
cates bloodletting, and relates a case  of cholera asphyxia,  in
which  it was decidedly beneficial in the stage of collapse.
   I)'.  Ogden of Sunderland, says, that the  recoveries from
                            21 
 "~"*                ASIATIC CHOLERA.

 cold blue cholera has been  a  very small  proportion to the
 deaths ;  that a great  majority of the recoveries reported was
 not attended with coldness and lividity of the  extremeties,
 great collapse, and loss  of strength ; that bleeding is some-
 times  beneficial and sometimes injurious ;  when obtained in
 the commenoement, is often beneficial, but on the whole, that
 it is a doubtful remedy.   Dry external heat, from  bricks,
 bottles, bags of sand, &c, and friction, by incessantly rubbing
 the extremities with hot dry  flannel, are  of great importance
 in restoring the circulation.  Opium sometimes relieves the
 sickness, and sometimes it does not.  Calomel generally does
 no good.   Sinapisms (mustard plasters)  are to be  applied to
 the pit of the stomach to allay the vomiting, and  to the calves
 and thighs to cure the spasms.   A mustard emetic often re-
 stores the pulse.   Camphor,  oil of peppermint, and  cajeput,
 are not as powerful stimulants as oil of turpentine.   The lat-
 ter may be given by injection, or half an ounce taken by the
 mouth.  The secondary  fever  is to be treated like any other
 fever,  by shaving the head, blisters to  the nape  of the neck,
 small doses of calomel, &c.   Great care must  be taken  to
 avoid errors in diet during convalescence.   This has arrested
 the diarrhea preceding the cholera by giving  every  3 hours
 one or two of the following pills :
   Take of opium, 16 grains ; calomel, one drachm ;  pulver-
 ized pepper, one  and a half or two drachms ; confection  of
 roses, a sufficient quantity.   Mix, and divide into sixty pills.
   Dr. James Adair Lawrie, professor of surgery, Andersoni-
 an University, and Dr. David B. White,  physician  to  the
 Gateshead  Dispensary ancl Cholera  Hospital, insist on the
 necessity of attending to  the  premonitory diarrhea.   Dr. L.
 recommends the patient to be put to bed,  kept warm, and to
 have a flannel band round his abdomen—then to  take half an
 ounce castor oil with fifteen  or twenty drops of laudanum,
 and after this  has operated, give 30 drops of laudanum, or
 one grain of opium.   Saline and drastic purgatives are for-
 bidden.  If discharges continue, repeat the  opiates  with cau-
 tion, and if 2 or 3 grains  of opium fail, open a vein  and apply
a blister  or sinapism to the abdomen.  If these means  fail,
and collapse threaten, give a mustard emetic, and after its
operation, 20  grains of calomel, and as much laudanum  or
vpium, as the patient will bear.  Mucilaginous and opiate
injections are also to be used.
  Dr. White remarks, that in some cases, not diarrhea^ but 
ASIATIC CHOLERA.
M!>
  obstinate costi\*eness prevails for a time, and the disease then
  suddenly appears.   For this costiveness he advises a pill of
  scammony, jalap, calomel and aloes ; also to wash  and rub
  the body with warm water and coarse cloths at night, taking
  a pill of 6 grains  calomel and one of opium,—and in the
  morning a dose  of castor oil and laudanum, or half a drachm
  of rhubarb with 8 grains of ginger root, to be repeated if
  necessary.   In the acutestage,Dr. LaWrie gives a mustard
  or salt emetic, and then  opens  a vein.  He is in  favor of
  bleeding, the earlier the better.  It is more safe in the robust,
  and probably more  safe after collapse then when it is on the
  point of being established; and more safe in moderate cases,
  than  in  those which are  severe.   He adds, likewise, that
  bleeding sometimes does harm when it is difficult to explain
  the reason.   These are Dr. Lawrie's notions.   After bleed-
  ing he gives a large dose of calomel  and opium, with stimu-
  lants, both externally and internally.
    Dr. White thinks bloodletting has been too much recom-
 mended.  It is not proper unless the pulse rises during the
 operation.   He  recommends cold water and brandy—speaks
 well of cupping, large  injections  of yvarm water, external
 warmth, and frictions for the spasms ; but has found nothing
 but disappointment  from giving stimulants.
    In  the stage  of  collapse,  Dr.  Lawrie gives an emetic as
 before—takes a few ounces of blood while  the pulse can be
 felt in the brachial  artery—then warm injections of beef tea
 witii  brandy and  laudanum—counter-irritation—diffusible
 stimulants—cold  drink,  and  arrow  root  or beef tea given
 often,  and in small quantities—applies external warm by heat-
 ing the room, by tin cases containing  hot water shaped to
 apply  to any part of the body.   Mr.  Bradly moistened bran
 in  a tub with boiling water, adding spirits of turpentine,
 spread it  in a bag large enough to cover the whole body, and
 applied it, but not  too hot, from neck  to feet.   When tho
 perspiration is profuse and cold, it  should be wiped off with
 dry hot towels, and  camphorated or ammoniated oils should
 be  long and diligently rubbed  on those parts where irritants
 are not applied.  Along with these stimulants, he would give
 calomel in moderate  doses, and   recommend galvanism—
 *>xygen gas produced but little benefit—injections of spirit*
of turpentine and mustard,  were  apt  to  induce irritation of
die rectum and  bloody stools.  He tried tho tobacco injec-
tion, but found it injurious.
                           21* 
126                ASIATIC CHOLERA.
   Ia this stage  (collapse,) Dr. White  says, "I have found
thesimplest, the  most successful treatment:—the calomel and
opium, carbonate of ammonia, warm injections, cordials, fric-
tion where necessary, and  warmth of a dry kind ;  worsted
stockings filled with hot sand is  admirably adopted for this
purpose.   To allay this vomiting, as in the former instance,
effervescent draught, »^c., should  be used.   A most salutary
an,d speedy application, is by laying over the stomach pledgets
of linen, dipped  in boiling water.
   In regard to bleeding,  Dr. Kirk of Greenock, speaks thus:
   " We are told, 'take away a portion of the circulation, and
you relieve it of a part of its load, and give nature freer play;
we unload the system, and induce the surcharged vessels to
put on a new and livelier action.'    Now, a return to heahhy
Circulation will  not result from abstracting, or adding, a por-
tion of the circulating mass.  The cessation of arterial  action
is  not dependent on the state of the fluids, but on determinate
derangement in  the sensorial power ; the result of a morbid
poison, by which the machinery of the circulation has been
impaired in its healthy action, I speak of the stage of collapse
or the  period which immediately  precedes  it.   In that stage,
I can see no  advantage to  result from  withdrawing a small
portion of blood ;  and in 99 cases  out of a hundred, a small
portion can only be withdrawn.   The sensorial derangement
will not be relieved by the evacuation, and the system, already
depressed by  excessive  discharges of  the most  debilitating
kind, will  be plunged still deeper into that fatal weakness
which is  the principal characteristic  of this disease.  The
evacuations of advanced cholera, are not the discharges of
alwine matters, or of the ordinary fluids of the bowels.  They
are largely composed of the serous and saline  parts  of the
blood ; and consequently produce a destruction of the strength
a.i swift as it is complete,
   I entertain the highest respect for some of the eminent sup-
porters of bleeding ;  but, after conscientious attention to tiie
subject, and  watching  the  pnmiiec in  various hands, I feel
myself bound to declare my conviction.   When was  it pro-
posed (ill  the present day, to relieve a condition of the extre-
mes! depression, and if no arter al excitement, by the abstrac-
tion of the principal  vital fluid ?   The blood is unnaturally
thickened, to be  sure, grumous, and  probably  carbonized;
but will the  removing  of a  small column of venous blood
change the condition  of  the rost  cf the sanguineous fluid, or, 
ASIATIC  CHOLERA.
32 "J
 give energy to those nerves which, under a poisoned influ-
 ence, have ceased to  perforin  their important functions, oi
 giving life, action, and energy, to the whole system ?
   I grant  most freely that in the first ancl second premonitory
 stages, bleeding may do good ;  for then the arterial system is
 in a state of excitement, ancl the poison has not fixed its deadly
 fangs on the powers of life  itself.   But then,  even, I would
 be cautions.   A depressing influence is in the constitution,
 which may everv hour develope itself as most deadly in  its
 power and tendencies.   Let  there  be withdrawn  only so
 much as to diminish somewhat the energy of the circulation;
 but do not trench on the power of life.   Ever recollect that
 a poison is within which  nature is  struggling to oppose,  and
 by instituting  increased action, seeks  to free itself from her
 insalubrious oppressor.  Xor is this the language of theory
 only.  I have seen many attempts at bleeding in collapse, but
 never to any other purpose but  apparent harm ; and in nume-
 rous instances  of the last stage  of the premonitory symptoms,
 I have thought collapse induced by injudicious bleeding."
   Dr. Kirk then proceeds, in a masterly manner, to a further
 examination of the common  remedies.  He concludes that the
 mustard emetic is bad  practice  ; that where emetics are pro-
 per, common salt and  water, or  copious draughts  of warm
 water, are better; but in the advanced stages of cholera he
 doubts their propriety.   He speaks well of calomel, but cau-
 tions us against the indiscriminate use of opium—that although
 we are not to forget "  how useful it may be from its soothing
 and  astringent  qualities in moderating  the  discharges," yet
 we must "also remember, that more than half the deaths of
 cholera are in its final congestive fever, and that the principal
 symptom of that congestive  fever is congestion of the head ;
 and  consequently that  the accumulated  effects  of  a narcotic
 stimulant  is much to be  dreaded  and avoided."   He is op-
 posed to the use of brandy ; reminds us that cholera dissetions
 demonstrate the existence of high inflammation of the gastric
 organs; that this inflammation  of these organs forbids a vio-
 lent  stimulant, but, at the same time, will not bear such free
 bleeding as inflammation of other organs.   " I make  this re-
 mark, because  it  may be urged, why do you give us so many
cautions about  bloodletting,  when you acknowledge with the
same breath, that it is a disease of inflammation ?   I  answer
to this, that it is only so in its early stages..  Pass the bourne
 of the second premonitory stage, and the evil is consummated. 
328
ASIATIC CHCLERA.
 When 1 think a strong cordial indicated, I am in the habit of
 preferring the pure wines, the  irritation to  -the inflamed tis-
 sues, from their use, being less to be dreaded than the sharp
 and naked points of alcohol."  He recommends tobacco in-
 iections, energetic perseverance in the use of dry heat, fric-
 tion, and counter-irritation by the actual cautery, or by rais-
 ing a blister with a cloth wrung out of boiling water, or infu-
 sion of flies in vinegar.
   Mr. John  Fyfe of Newcastle, (says  Dr.  Kirk,)  who at-
 tended 579 cases of cholera, relies very  much on stimulating
 injections, which  generally produce a salutry reaction.  If
 there was watery diarrhea, he arrested it at once by opium,
 «nd in  19 cases  out of 20, convalescence followed.  But if
 the disease was advanced, he  gave repeated doses of calomel:
 moderated the discharges by opium, and softened the pulse by
 bleeding,  if necessary.   If it  proceeds to vomiting,  purging,
 and cramp, he prescribes a mustard emetic,  copious draughts
 of warm water, friction, and the proper regulation of heat. If
 the pulse is  firm, blood  is taken.   Calomel ancl opium are
 then used, and diluents allowed. In collapse he forbids large
 opiates and bleeding ; but throws into the intestines 3 pounds
 of hot water, 6 ounces of brandy, ancl 2 drachms of laudanum.
 He  frequently withdraws these  injections  by a tube—they
 come off cold—and repeats with  hot water alone,  or adds
 laudanum if the stomach continues irritable.   In this stage he
 uses brandy liberally.  He treats the reactive or secondary
 fever with laxatives,  leeches to the  head, sinapisms to the
 neck, and pit of the stomach.

      Treatment in Canada and the United  States.
  In a letter from Dr. Caldwell of Montreal, June 24, 1832,
 to Dr. McNaughton of Albany,  be says, " I  would  strongly
 impress it on your mind, that  1 have derived more advantage
 from what may  be called  the premonitory  treatment,  than
 from that  during the actual  attack.  Cholera is invariably
 preceded by symptoms of  gastric derangement, such as  con-
 striction or obstruction of the  prsecordia,  or a sense of corru-
 gation  of the upper orifice of the  stomach,  loss of  appetite,
 white furred  tongue, nausea,  slight diarrhea, thrilling sensa-
 tions of heat  through the  bowels and different parts  of the
body.  The moment these symptoms showed themselves I di-
rected the patients instantly to send to me, and gave them from 
ASIATIC CHOLERA.                329
 gr. X to XV of hydrag. cum. creta, according to the age and
 strength of the patient, and  in two hours followed it by tart.
 potassa dr. 11, in a little warm veal or chicken broth, and re-
 peated it every second hour until it operated freely. Nothing
 seemed to allay the gastric  irritation so well  as the soluble
 tartar.  In many instances it seemed to act as a charm, and
 1 do  not kn^w a single instance of any one who went through
 the influence of this treatment that was subsequently attacked
 with cholera.  In some instances it was necessary probably
 to repeat it once or twice; ancl where  the tongue was much
 loaded, I added two or three grains of the submuriate to it."
   Dr. Nelson, member of the  Medical Board  and Commis-
 sioner of Health of Montreal, gives the following treatment
 as the most successful :
   As relates to the stomach, there  are two distinct stages.
 The  first is the vomiting, the second is  the stage of collapse,
 or sinking, when  all vomiting shall have  ceased.  Now, to
 stop  the vomiting, we must paralyze  the stomach ;  but in
 doing this we must not overdo the  thing, lest when we re-
 quire the energies  of  the stomach  in the second stage,  we
 find them irrecoverably lost in collapse.   This is the first and
 greatest secret in prescribing for a cholera patient: in the first
 stage, sedative treatment is essential ;  while in the second,
 tho very  opposite, that of excitation.  First, then, to arrest
 the vomiting, let the remedy be a sedative, and not a stimu-
 lant ; give one grain  of solid opium,  it must be swallowed
 dry ;  if that  be rejected, give a second,  and so on to a third ;
 it will rarely happen, if the patient be kept perfectly^ still,
 that a fourth dose will be required.   Then give nothing else
 till vomiting shall have  ceased  for several hours,  ancl keep
 the patient in the most quiescent state possible.   During this
 time  he suffers intolerable thirst; but this he must bear  with,
 for drink will be returned almost before it reach  the stomach,
 and will cause another convulsion, each ofwhiih hurries him
 to his end with a tenfold degree of velocity.   Bear in mind,
 that one grain of opium is  as effectual in  arresting the irrita-
 bility of the stomach,  as ten grains, while the latter doso
 would not only do  the same, but also paralyze the stomach
 beyond recovery.   At the same time in order to prevent, or
 obviate, coldness,  blueness, and spasms,  dry the surface  of
 the body by  napkins, and then still furtber'dry it by rubbing
 the body all over  with powdered chalk, heated.  If chalk
atnnot be had, the best substitute is flour, but in heating, it 
330
ASIATIC CHOLERA.
 must not  be suffered to grow brown.  By fomentation* and
 moist heat, we should be  undoing with  one hand what we
 are attempting to do with the other.   Second stage.—All is
 now queit, and now is time to giyre stimulents.  Small doses
 of warm brandy, warm punch, ether or  ammonia;  but be
 careful to choose such as are  palatable to the patient.  The
 mustard emetic is not to be used ; calomel is not recommend-
 ed ;  the idea of bleeding in cholera has its origin based on a
 hydraulic  theory which is totally inadmisible in  this disease,
 and he has seen its warmest supporters abandon it.
  Dr. A.  Brigham says that almost every remedy which had
 been tried elsewhere, has been resorted to at New-York, but
 that they have all failed in severe cases.   That the most suc-
 cessful treatment  at that place consists  chiefly in external
 applications of cayenne pepper, mustard cataplasms, frictions,
 &c, giving but little, and in  the stage of collapse no medi-
 cine  by the mouth.   One pound of strong unguentum, eight
 ounces pulverized camphor, and four ounces of cayenne pep-
 per were mixed, and rubbed over the body and limbs, in  this
 stage, which often produced salivation in six or eight hours.
 When it did so, the  patients were considered safe.  The con-
 secutive fever was then met by local bleeding, blistering,  &c.
  Dr. William Channing, of New-York, believes camphor
 in .small doses  to be a specific for the cholera.  He states
that of 250 patients  attacked by the cholera, and treated ex-
clusively with camphor, only five  have died.   From one to
three drops of unmixed spirits of camphor are to be given in
a little water every  hour or two, and every other medicine,
 especially opium, is to  be withheld.
  From the experiments of Dr. O'Shaugnessy, it appears that
the blood of cholera patients has lost a great proportion of its
natural saline  ingredients, and that these same  ingredients,
are present in  the evacutions.  This  discovery gave rise to
the idea that  the evacutions  upward and downwards, are,
in reality  the serum of blood, which might be replaced bv
 injecting into the vtjins an artificial  serum containing  the
same ingredients as  that which is lost.  On this interesting-
subject, the following extract from the  communications of
Dr. Lewins to the  secretary  of the central board of health,
England, will show the effect cf this practice, and the meth-
od of performing the operation.
  " Sir,—I conceive it to  be my duty to let you know,  for
the information of the central board of health, that the great 
ASIATIC CHOLERA.
33?
desideratum of restoring the natural current in the veins and
arteros, of improving the color of the blood, and recovering
the functions of the lungs in cholera  asphyxia,  may be  ac-
complished by  injecting a weak saline solution into the vt ns
of the patient.   To Dr. Thomas Latta, of this place, is due
the merit of first having recourse to  this practice.   He  has
(ned it in six cases, three of which 1 have seen  and assisted
to treat.  The  most wonderful and  satisfactory effect is the
immediate consequence of this  injection.  To produce  the
effect referred  to, a large quantity must be  injected—from
five to  ten pounds in an adult—and repeated at longer or
shorter intervals, as tlie state of tj.e  pulse,  and other symp-
toms, may indicate.   Whenever the  pulse fads,  more fluid
o :ght to be thrown in,  to produce an effect upon it, without
regard to quantity.  In one of the cases  I have referred to,
one hundred and twenty ounces were injected at once,  and
repeated to the amount of three  hundred ancl thirty ounces,
in twelve hours.   In another three hundred and  seventy-si\
were thrown into the veins, between Sunday, at  11 o'clock,
A. M., and this day  (Tuesday) at  4 P. M,  that is, in the
course of fifty-hours,  upwards of thirty-one pounds.   The
solution (hat was used consisted of two drachms of muriate of
soda, (common salt,) and two scruples of carbonate of soda,
to sixty ounces of water.   It was at the temperature of one
hundred and eight or one hundred and ten degrees.  The ap-
pelates employed in injecting was merely one of Kohl's com-
mon syringes, (the fluid  being put into a vessel  rather deep
and narrow,; with a small pipe fitted, that it might easily be
introduced into an incision in the veins of the usu.il  size that
is  made in bleeding.   It may however, be well to  keep in
mind, that, in (he event of the operation being frequently re-
peated, it may  he advisable to inject by different veins."
   " Sir,—I did mvself the  honor to  address a letter to you
lately, on the effects of injecting a saline solution  into  the
veins of a patient laboring under cholera.   We have not fre-
quent opportunities of trying this, which  I denominate admi-
rable remedy, as the disease  is decidedly less frequent here ;
but I have seen it employed in two other cases, in the course
of the last tyvo days,  wiih the same  excellent ellect.  Sixty
ounces are generally thrown in at once,  and repeated at th«-
end of three or  four  hours.   In a case to-day, where I saw
fifty-eight ounces injected, (being the third time of  perform-
ing the operation,) the patient's pulse, at the commencement 
332
ASIATIC CHOLERA.
was one hundred and eighty,  very small and very  feeble.
She was excessively restless, with a feeling of great weak-
ness and tormenting  thirst.  Before twelve ounces were in-
jected, the pulse began to improve ;  it became  fuller and
slower, and it continued to improve, until, after  fifty-eight
ounces had been injected, it was down to one hundred and
ten.  Before I  left the patient,  her condition was altogether
amazingly amended.  There was a fine glow, and a slight
perspiration on  her face ; the veins on the back of her head
were well filled ; the restlessness was removed,  the feeling
of excessive  weakness gone, and the thirst ceased.   Tho
pulse was under one hundred,  free,  full and soft.   Verily,
sir, this is an astonishing method of medication, and I predict
will lead to  wonderful  changes and improvements  in the
practice of medicine."   Those  who  inject, must " beware
of allowing  air to get into the  vein.  The tubes, of course
must be filled with fluid,  as well as the pipe in the vein, bo-
fore commencing, and considerably more fluid than it is in-
tended to use,  ought to  be in  the vessel from which it is
pumped."
   The  following treatment  (which accords with  my own
view of the subject,) is from Dr. Edward .Tegart, inspector
general of the army  hospitals near  Calcutta, detailing  his
own case and euro v—
   " On Wednesday,  July 18,   1832, I  was seized with a
slight diarrhea which continued, and on the next day, increas-
ed.  The watery discharges passed without pain, so that I was
thrown off my guard as to the nature of the complaint.  To-
wards evening of the second day  I became restless and fe-
verish ; at  midnight my  pulse  was quick and very  weak;
spasms in my legs and  arms caused me to think for the first
time, that 1 was laboring under  spasmodic cholera.  On ex-
amining the copious Sowings from the bowels, I found them
to consist of a limpid fluid resembling chicken broth or bar-
ley.  This is now considered to  be the serous  part of Oie
blood.   When this escapes, only tho thick particles remain in
tho blood vessels, which soon become  stagnant,  and  cause
death.   This was nearly the case with me, as the pulse had
become almost  imperceptible,  and the  dark streaks  in  Oae
lines of tho veins, with the color of the skin, denoted that the
state of collapse was fast approaching.   The question then
was, can a new action be produced in the intestinal  canal ?
Yes, I  said, it is possible, and I  will try that remedy which 1 
ASIATIC CHOLERA.
383
have so strongly recommended to others in this disease.   I
look three drops of croton oil on a little sugar, and confidently
waited the effects.   The following took place in succession :
in ten minutes the stomach was discharged of  an immense
quantity of indigested food.   The liver, which had been dis-
tended to a most painful degree with bile, poured its contents
into the  intestines, the gruelly  discharge from  the howeL
was now succeeded by copious evacuations of bile and offen-
sive matter;  the cramp ceased, and the  pulse rose ;  all these
favorable occurrences took place in less than an  hour after'
taking the croton oil, and I pronounced myself out of danger.
This is  my case ; ancl I hope and trust  it may  prove an im-
portant  one to the public,  as it may lead to a more successful
mode of treatment than  has been hitherto  employed  in this.
fatal disease.   I do not, however, recommend  it to any ex-
cept in the early stage of the  disease."
  The following table exhibits the proportion  of deaths,  to
the population, in  some of the large cities of  Europe  and
America, up to the  19th of April, 1832 :—
	Population.	Deaths.	
Moscow,	350,000	4,690 equal to 1	in 74
Petersburgh,	360,000	4,757 1	I 74
Vienna,	300,000	11,896	I 25
Berlin,	340,000	1,401	I 242
Hamburgh,	100,000	446	I 201
Prague,	97,000	1,335	1 72
Bre>Iaw,	78,000	670	1 116
Konigsburgh,	70,000	1,318	53
Magdeburgh,	36,000	316	104
Braum,	33,000	601 1	54
Stettin,	24,000	250 1	1 96
Halle,	28,000	152 1	184
Bliberg,	22,000	253	77
London,	1,500,000	1,223	1 1,228
Edinburgh,	150,000	72	1 2,033
Glasgow,	180,000	395	1 455
Paisley,	60,000	201	291
Hungary,	8,750,000	188,000	46
Paris,	800,000	20,000 1	40
Montreal,	25,000	1,250 1	20
Quebec,	22,000	1,790 1	12
New-York,	200,000	2,000 1	100
Albany,	24,000	311	L 77
 
534
ASIATIC CHOLERA.
  Although the population of Quebec and Montreal had been
much increased by the arrival of emigrants, yet it is a well
established fact, that the disease has been full as malignant
on this continent as in  any part of the world,  and even a
greater number of those attacked, have died in this country,
than in India.   The jews have wonderfully escaped the cho-
lera.  At Posen,  which contained 6,000 jews when  the
cholera raged there, only 37 died of the disease.   At Berlin,
only six jews had the disease during the two first months the
cholera  prevailed  there.  This was undoubtedly  owing to
their well known sobriety, regularity and prudence.   Usu-
ally, the most cases of cholera occur on Tuesday, and  the
least on Sunday.   This  probably arises from the excesses
committed on Sunday.
  At Berlin, the cases  for the first  seven weeks of cholera
c ccurred on the following days :—
                    Cases.       Cured.      Dead.
     Sundays,           195         57         148
     Mondays,          245         60         151
     Tuesdays,         272         72         153
     Wednesdays,       260         58         142
     Thursdays,        252         80         184
     Fridays,           225         63         143
     Saturdays,         258 >       55         136
  Quebec.—Cases of cholera in the two  hospitals  from 8
o'clock A.  M.  on the 8th, to 8 o'clock A. M.  on the 21st:—
     u     #^     >     n     a        o     -
CO      (T> w      dj
t/3 O
         c- ST     »      £L     p 3             -■

         w 3      3      S      S-             op
           o             r*

 8th     none      3    none   none       2      1
 9th       1       13    none   none       6      8
10th       8       10    none   none       11     7
11th       7       13    none   none       11     9
12th       9       27    none   none       13    23
13th     23       77    9      none        10    60
14th     60       48    8      none       41    67
15th     67       68    17       2        37.   96
16th     96       98    31       3        36   155
17th     155       47    62       5        37   160 
ASIATIC CHOLERA.
lSth	160	46	57	2	23	181
19th	181	66	46	12	32	199
50th	199	60	41	20	40	100
21st	199	37	46	6	32	198
     Total          609                          507
  On the 7 th day after the appearance of the cholera at Qoe-
bee,  143 died of the disease ;  and on that and the succeding
fwe days, the deaths from cholera amounted to 711, being an
average for the six days of 118 deaths per day.   From the
commencement of the disease to the 6th of August, a period
of fifty-eight days, the number of deaths from cholera at
Quebec amounted to 1790.—Neilson's Gazette.
  At Montreal, the disease raged with  great violence, as
will  be seen from the following statement of the cases and
deaths, from the commencement of the disease, to the  13th
of July, inclusive :
          daily cases,  daily burial
June  10th to 15th
      16,        381        86
      17,        474       102
      lb.        261       128
      19,        338       149
     20,        165        94
     21,          15        76
      12.        209        52
     23,         83        31
     24,         51        21
     25,         44        33
     26,         27     ♦  23
     27,         21        25
     9Q,         22        20
     '*          37        21
     30,         52        22
 July  1,          23        17
      2,           13        20
      3,          11        14
      4,         25        17
      5,          22        12
      6,         19         9
      7,          13          i
      8,          U        11
      9.          10         9
otal cases.	death,
1328	175
1709	261
2183	363
2444	491
2781	640
2946	734
3097	810
3206	862
3289	893
3340	914
3384	947
3411	976
3432	995
3454	1016
3491	1037
3523	1059
3546	1066
3559	1076
3570	1110
3593	1127
3615	1140
3634	1144
3647	1153
3661	11C4
3671	in;
 
336
ASIATIC CHOLERA.
3678	1184
3692	1190
3707	1200
3716	1210
      10,          7         6
      11,         14        10
      12,         15        10
      13,          9        10
  The progress of the cholera in the city of New-York from
July 4th, 1823,  to August 18th,  inclusive, may be seen by
the following table :—
            Cases.  Deaths.            Cases.  Deaths.
  July  4,      7      4         28,   145      G8
        5,     18      12         29,   122      39
        6,    24      15         30,   103      39
        7,    85      25         31,   121      48
        8,    42      21   August,  1,    92      41
        9,    105      28           2,     81      34
      10,    109      44           3,     90      24
      11,    129      50           4,     88     30
      12,    119      51           5,     96     29
      13,    101     49           6,    101     37
      14,    115     66           7,     89      32
      15,    133     74           8,     82     21
      16,    163     94           9,     73     28
      17,    146     60         10,     97     26
      18,    138     72         11,     76     33
      19,   202     82         12,     67     23
      20,   226    100         13,    104     22
      21,   311    104         14,     42      15
      22,   241     91         15,     75     26
      23,   231     83         16,     79     26
      24,   296     96         17,     43     21
      25,    157     61         18,     76     19
      26,   141     55              ---.   ---
      27,    122     46     Total    5323   2057
  The following table shows the number of cholera cases,
and deaths, in Philadelphia and Liberties, from the 27th of
July,  1832, to the 17th of August.
            Cases.  Deaths.
Julv 27,	2	2
28,	6	4
29,	6	1
30,	15	7
31,	19	9
August 1,	21	8
o "1	40	15
	Cases.	Deaths.
3,	35	14
4,	45	13
5,	65	26
6,	176	71
7,	136	73
8,	114	46
»,	154	56
 
ASIATIC CHOLERA.
337
10,	142
11,	126
12,	110
13,	130
14,	111
15,	73	23
16,	94	30
17,	90	36
                       39
                       33
                       31
                       49
                       37        Total,   1610     615
  How painfully humbling to the  philanthropist to hear the
repeated declaration that the poor and  unfortunate  are  the
exclusive victims of this " pestilence that  walketh in dark-
ness, and destruction that wasteth at noonday,"—as if Heav-
' n had waged an exterminating warfare against the children
alone of squalid poverty,  or t! at wealth  or self-created great-
ness were a shield against the arrows of death : but,
  It comes ! it comes!  from every  trembling tongue,
    One low and universal murmur stealeth ;
  By dawn of day each journal is o'crhung
    With starting eyes to read what it  revealetb,
  \nd all aghast, ejaculate one word—
  The  cholera—no other sound is heard !

  Had death, upon his ghastly  horse reveal'd,
    From his throat-rattling trump  a summons sounded,
  Not more appallingly its blast had pe.l'd
     Upon the nation's  ear;—awe struck, astounded,
  Men strive in vain their secret fears  to smother,
  And gaie in-blank dismay on one another.

  Now are all cares absorb'd in that of health .
    Ilush'd is the song, the dance, the  voice of gladness.
  While thousands in the selfishness of wealth,
    With looks of confidence, but hearts of sadness,
  Dream they can purchase safety for  their livo>.
  Hy nostrums, drugs, and quack preventatives.

  Tho wretch who might have died in  squalid want,
    Unseen, unmourn'd by our hard-hearted blindness,
  Wringing from fear what pity would  not grant,
    Becomes the sudden  object of our kindness,
  Now that his betters be  may  implicate,
  ^>d spread infection to the rich and  great.

  Yet Mi4I will wealth presumptuously  cry, 
338                 ASIATIC cholera.
   " What though the hand be thus outstretched ;
It will not reach the lordly and the high,
   But only strike the lowly and the wretched,
Tush ! what have we to quail at ? Let us fold
Our arms, and trust to luxury and to gold."

They do belie (bee, honest Pestilence !
   Thou'rt brave, magnanimous, not mean and dast-ud ;
Thou'lt not assert thy dread omnipotence
   In mastering those already overmaster'd
By want and wo—trampling the trampled  crowd,
To spare the unsparing, and  preserve the  proud.

Usurpers of the people's rights ! prepare
   For  death by quick atonement.  Strong-hearted
Oppressors of tlie poor ! in time beware !
   When the destroying angel's  shaft is d arte*
'Twill smite the star on titled bosoms set,
T.he mitre pierce, transfix the coronet.

Take moral physic, pomp! not drugs  and  oil,
   And learn, to broad philanthropy a stranger,
That every son of poverty and toil
   With whom thou sharesftnow an equal danger,,
Should as a brother share, in  happier  hours,
The blessings which our common Father showers !

O  thou reforming cholera !  thou'rt sent
   INot  as a scourge alone, but as a teacher,
That (hey who shall sirvivc to mark th' event
   Of thy dread summon!?, thou death-dealing preacher i
By piety and love of kind may best
Koquite the love that snatch'd them from tl.e peu:\
                                         .V.  Y.  Atlas. 
THE ANATOMY OF THE HUMAN BODY.

  The constituent parts of the human, or any animal body,
are, briefly, solids and fluids.   The solids consist  of fibres,
membranes, arteries,  veins, lympheducts, nerves, glands, ex-
e.etorv vessels, muscles,  tendons,  ligaments, cartihiges and
bones, to which may  be added the hair and nails.
   Fibres,  appear to be simple threads of the minutest blood
vessels, or nerves, or both.
   Membranes, are cornpages of fibres  loosely expanded  to
rover or line the  different parts of the body.
   Arteries, are tubes that arise  from  the ventricles of the
heart,  and  thence dividing into branches  distribute the blood
to every part of the body.
   Veins, are tubes which collect,  and return the blood from
tlie extremities of the arteries to  the heart.
   Lymphedacts, are fine pellucid tubes to carry lymph from
all parts, especially tlie glands, which they discharge into the
larger  veins, and into the vessels  called vasa leclea.
   Xerves,  are  fhssicula,  (bundles,)  of cylindrical  fibres
watch arise from  the diherent parts of the  brain, (medulla
oblongata,  and medulla spinalis,) and terminate  in  all the
sensitive parts, they are the immediate organs of all sensation.
   A gland secretory, is composed of an artery, vein, lymph-
auc, excretory d%ict, and nerve.  The use of glands is to se-
crete fluids  from the blood for diverse uses.
   Excretory vessels, are either tubes from glands to convey
ih'j secreted fluids to their respective places, or vessels from
the small guts, to carry chyle (the milky juice of the aliment)
to the  blood vessels.
   Muscles, are distinct portions of f.esb,  which  by contract-
ing themselves, perform the various motions of the body.
   Tendons, (the  cords)  appear  to be  the same fibres  of
which  the muscles are compos d, but more closely connected,
that they may possess less space in a  limb, and be inserted iu
less space in a bone.
                            22 
340                    ANATOMY.
   Ligaments, are bodies  of fibres closelj  united, either te
bind down the tendons, or give origin  to the muscles, or tie
together such bones as have  motion.
   Cartilages, are hard elastic bodies, smooth and insensible,
their use is to cover the ends of the bones that have motion
to prevent their attrition, (wearing,) &c.
   Bones, are firm parts to sustain and give shape to the body.
   The fluids, are the blood, the lymph, a  tasteless erysta-
line liquid absorbed from the surface of all the internal parts;
and emptied by (he lymphatic  vessels into the thoracic duct ;
and chyle the milk like liquid,  separated from the food in the
stomach and bowels,  (called chyme.)   The chyle is carried
into the thoracic duct, thence  to the heart, and is there con-
verted into blood.
   There are many other fluids, named as they differ in consis-
tence, or as  the parts  are various from which they are deri-
ved, they are the tears,  the urine, the ropy  matter from the
eyelids, the mucous from  (he mucous membranes, perspira-
tion, the synovial  fluid contained within the joints, &c. &c.
   The examination of brute animals, &c. in order to illustrate
more clearly the  structure and  functions  of man, is called
GOMPARATIUE ANATOMY.

   Anatomy  is divided into nine parts.
     Osteology, or doctrine of the Bones,
     Syndesmology,             Ligaments,
     Myology,                  Muscles,
     Bursalogy,                 Burse Mucose,
     Angiology,                 Vessels,   ,
     Neurology,                Nerves,
     Adenology,                 Glands,
     Splanchnology,             Viscera,
     Hygrology,                Fluids.

                   OF  THE  BONES.
   The bones are composed of animal earth and gluten, which
nupport and  form the stature of the body, defend its viscera
traugive adhesion to its muscles,  (pronouncedmussles.)   The
catwcance is compact  in the  bodies of the long bones;  spongy
m. iue ends,  and reticular, or cancellated, (spongy,) in all the
swyatios mat have marrow.  The long and irregular shaped 
ANATOMY.                    341
 bones are divided into a body and extremeties; and flat bones
 into body and margins.
    Bones are named,  some from their situation, others from
 their figures, some from their use, &c.   Processes and ca?e
 ties are also named from their figure, use, &c.
    When the bones are deprived of their soft parts and hung
 together by wire, the whole is termed an artificial skeleton :
 when they are  kept together  by  means of their ligaments, it
 is  called a natural .skeleton.
    The whole number af bones in the human body are two
 hundred and forty eight.   These vary sometimes in num-
 ber,  as there are more or less, very small and unimportant
 bones found about the joints of the  thumb and great toe, eight
 of these are reckoned in the above enumeration'; they arecall-
 ed sesamoid bones.

         OF THE  FORMATION OF  BONES.
   Ossification,  or the formation of bone,  is a specific action
 of small arteries, by which bony (ossific) matter is separated
 from the blood,  and deposited  where it is required.
   The first thing observable, where bone is to be formed, is a
 transparent jelly, which becomes  gradually firmer, and  is
 formed into cartilage.  The  cartilage increases to a certain
 size, and then as ossification increases, and advances^ the car-
 tilage vanishes.   The  cartilage is gradually taken away by
 the absorbents, and the bony matter is deposited  in its place.
 The growth of bone is  extremely  rapid  in ,the child  before
 birth, slower after birth, and is not completed in the human
 body till about the twentieth year.  Ossification  in the flat
 bones, always begins from the central point, and sends out
 the bony fibres, until they meet with those from other points,
 or the edges of the adjoining bone.
   In  long bones a central ring is formed in the  body of the
 bone, and afterwards in the heads.   The central ring  of the
 body sends its long fibres towards the head and extremities of
 the bones.  The head and extremeties at length come,so near
 the body as to be separated only by a cartilage, which be-
comes gradually thinner  until  the twentieth year.   Ossifica-
tion begins in the centre of all the round bones.
   The bones of the child are very imperfect.   Tho extre-
meties and processes are almost all connected to the body of
the  bone  by cartilage.   Tlcsse portions  are called epiphyses.
                          23* 
342
ANATOMY.
The cranium is connected  together by one firm, and ahnosi
cartilaginous membrane.  On the anterior part of the head,
 (cranium,)  between the bone of the forehead, and bones oi
the side of the head, is a membranous space, called the anterior
frontanel, and  a similar, but a  smaller one, on  the  back of
the head, termed the posterior frontanel.
   The t.e'eth are partly formed, and are placed in a double
r-jw, one of which is shed in early life.   All the cavities an
much  more shallow than in the adult,  and many of the Hat
bones are in two or more pieces, and the bones  of the back
and neck have their processes united to them by cartilage.

SUTURES AND BONES OF  THE  ADULT, CRA-
                 NIUM,  OR  SKULL.
   On viewing the superior  ancl external part of the cranium,
several lines are discovered runningacross the head, separating
t!u bones of which it is composed :  they come together with
rough edges, like saw teeth (called zigzag,)  these lines are
called  sutures.   Those that follow have proper names, and
others  that occur derive (heir names from the bones they sur-
round.
   Coronal suture, extends from one temple across over the
head to the other temple ; it unites the frontal bone  to the two
parietal bones.
   Occipital, or lambdoidal suture, comes from behind one
 ear upwards across to the other, it unites the occipital bone !■*
 die two parietal bones.
   Sagittal suture, extends upon the crown  from the back  '
 suture (lambdoidal) to the  front suture, (coronal) uniting the
 two parietal bones together.
   Squamous, or spurious sutures, are one on each side of
 the skull extending from the temple backward like  an arch,
 uniting the temporal bones  to the lower side of the parietal.
    Transverse suture, runs across the face through the bot-
 toms of the orbits of the eyes.
   There are  also observable several prominences upon the
 upper part of the skull, one immediately over each eye  in
 the frontal bone, one on each side of the bead, In the parietal
 bones, and one at the lower, and back part of the head in the
 occipital bone.   These are the points at which the formation
 of ben? was begun. 
ANATOMY.                   343
   On the internal surface the sutures are seen in the form of
 lines, not dovetailed, and there are a number of grooves upon
 the upper and internal part of the cranium, in arborescent
 form ; they are made by the spinous arteries of the dura mater.
   The bones forming the upper part of the skull, have an ex-
 ternal and  internal  table that are of a compact structure, be-
 tween which is a spongy substance called "the Meditulli,  or
 diploe.
   The internal surface of the basis of the cranium is divided
 into eight depressions adapted to (he lobes of .the brain.  The
 two first are  immediately over the orbits of the eyes, and are
 separated by  an eminence above  the root of the nose called
 crista galli.  On each side of this eminence is a number of
 boles, which  make the bones appear like honeycomb, through
 these pass  the olfactory nerves, they are called foramina cri-
 hrosa.
   Forward of the crista galli, is a small hole called the  fora-
 men cecum,; and back of the crista galli, are two round holes
 near each other, going to the bottom of each orbit;  through
 these pass  the optic nerves, they'are called foramina optica.
 Beyond  these, is a small cavity,  which  will admit the end of
 the  finger,  surrounded by four" clinoid  processes, the cavity
 is called the sella turcica, (Turkish raddle,) ancl contains the
 pituitary planch
   Under each anterior process,  is the foramen lacerum or-
 bitale eapcrius, through  which the third, fourth, first branch
 of the fifth, and the  sixth pair of nerves  ancl  the opthalmu
 artery pass.   Proceeding backwards, there is a round,then an
 oval hole, the first is the foramen rotundum through which
 the  second  branch of the  fifth pair of nerves passes, the other
 the  foramen ovale,  for the  passage of the third branch of the
 fifth pair of nerves.   Near  the forauien ovale is the foramen
 spinosum, through  which the spinous artery of the dura ma-
 ter enters.
   Between the foramen  ovale and the posterior clinoid  pro-
 cess, on  each side of the  sella' turcica, there is  a rugged ap-
 perature, the cor olid canal, which is  partly  filled up with
 cartilage, and is for the entrance of the corotid artery  and the
 exit of the great intercostal nerve.
  A projection of bone next presents itself, it is  called the
petrous portion  of the temporal bone, and has an oval open-
 jn<r,  through which  the nerve for the organ of bearing,  and
 the facial  nerve,  enter.  Below this is an irregular  oval 
344
ANATOMY.
opening, formed by the junction of the of the occipital with
the temporal bone, this is called foramen lacerum in basi
cranii, through the anterior part  passes the eighth  pair of
nerves, and the posterior part transmits, the blood from the
lateral sinus of the dura mater, into the jugular vein.
  Backwards from this proceeds the cuneiform process of the
occipital bone, which  is hollowed for the  reception of the
medulla oblongata.  Through this is  a  large opening called
the foramen magnum occipitale, through  this  passes the
spinal  marrow, the vertebral arteries, the  accessory nerves'
of Willis ;  and a process of the second  vertebra of the
neck lies in its anterior part.  Between this  and the foramen
lacerum in basi cranii, is the foramen  condyloideum ante-
rius,  which gives passage  to  the  lingual, or nerves of the
tongue.
   Beyond the  great occipital  foramen is a crucial eminence,
to which processes of  the dura mater are attached, the hori-
zontal eminence separates  the two superior occipital cavities
from the two inferior.

       FRONTAL BONE,  OR, OS FRONTIS.
   Makes the upper and fore part of the head, its lower parts
compose the orbits of the eyes.  It is uneven upon the inside,
which uneaveness  helps to keep the  brain steady, and from
its middle externally,  goes  a  process to which is joined the
bones of the nose.  On this bone, just above the os ethmoides,
is a small hole through which runs a vein into the longitudi-
nal sinus, and on the upper edge of each orbit, a small  notch
through which nerves  ancl  an  artery passs to the forehead ;  it
has also a small hole  near the os planum, through which
passes a branch of the  fifth pair of nerves.   In the substance
of this bone near the nose  are two, some  times five, sinuses
fcavaties) which  open into the nose.   These sinuses, and in-
ternal uneaveness of this bone render it somewhat dangerous
to apply  the trephine  on the  middle and lower part of the
forehead.   This bone  is in two parts, in the  young child.

   PARIETAL BONES, OR OSSA PARIETALIA.
   These are two bones which compose the  upper and lateral
 (side) parts of the skull.   On the inside they are remarkably
 imprinted by the arteries of the dura mater.
i 
ANATOMY.
345
                 OS ETHMOID  BONE.
    This is a small bone about two inches in circumference
  seated in the fore part and basis of the skull, and is almost
  surrounded by the as frontis.   It is full of holes like a sieve,
  through these holes the olfactory nerves pass to the nose.  In
  its middle arises the  process called  crista galli, ancl on  the
  opposite side a thin one that in part divides the nostrils.

                    OS  SPHENOID.
    This is tho most difficult bone to describe, that is in the hu-
  man body, and there can  be but little or no idea formed of it
  without seeing it separated from the other bones of the skull.
  It is situated in the basis of the cranium, extending under-
  neath from one temple across  to the other.   It is generally
  compared to a hat  with its wings extended.  Its principal
  cavity is the sella turcica, and many of the foramina  before
  mentioned, are ia this bone.  This bone is connected with all
  the bones of the craninum, with the frontal, the two parietal,
 the ethmoid, and the two temporal by harmony, (he occipi(al
 by synostosis;  to the two cheek bones, the two bones  of the
 upper jaw, and the two palate  bones by harmony, and  to the
 vomer by gomphosis.  Its use is to form the basis of the  skull,
 and to contain the middle lobes of the brain.

                  OSSA  TEMPORUM.
   These two bones are situated, one on each side of the head,
 below the  parietal bones they have each at their  back parts
 (may be felt just back of the ear,) one large spongy process,
 called  mammillaris, or mastoideus, and from the lower parts
 of each, a process which joins the  ossamalarum, named jugu-
 Jis or zygomatics.  These form the high bones of the cheeks.

                  OSSA PETROSA,
   Are by some considered as distinct, by others  as parts of
 the above bones.   They lie betwixt the above bones and the
 occipital bone.   The description will be given, when speak-
 ing of the organs of hearing.

  OS OCCIPITAL, OR THE OCCIPITAL  BONE.
   This makes all the  back part of the skull.  It is bounded
by the  sphenoidal, temporal, petrosal,  and parietal bones, it 
346                    ANATOMY.

has two small apophysis, by which  it is articulative fo the
spine, near these apophyses are two small foramina, which arc
the ninth of the skull,  through  these  pass the ninth pair of
nerves,  and  between these  is the tenth or great foramen,
through which the medulla oblongata desends into the spine.
The cervical ar(eries enter,  and  the carvical veins pass out.
  This bone is made strong, and covered well with muscles,
because we  can least defend this part,  and blows here are of
worse consequence than on  other part  of the brain, immedi-
ately underneath are mortal.
  These ten bones  compose the cranium, contain the brain.
and defend it from external injury.

              BONES OF THE  FACE.
  They are fourteen in  number.

    OSSA  NASI, OR BONES OF THE  NOSE.
  These make the upper part of the nose forming (hat kind
of arch which is fittest  to sustain such injuries as the nose is
most exposed to.

                 OSSA MALARUM,
  Compose the lower,  and  outer parts of the  orbits of the
ryes, they have each a short process which joins the processes
jugales of the temporal  bones, and aasist in forming that arch
(called jagalia) which is the  prominence of the cheeks.

                    OSS  UNGUES.
  Are seated immediately below the os front is, towards the           •
nose in the orbits of the eyes.   Between each of them, ancl
the upper jaw is  a foramen, as large as a goose quill into
which  the puncta lachrymalia lead,  to  carry  superfluous
moisture from the eyes into the nose.

  MAXILLA  SUPERIOR, OR UPPER JAW BONE.
   This bone is in two  pieces, being  divided by a suture that
is scarcely ever obliterated.   It has two processes which join
the frontal  bone, and  make part of the nose,  and  an other
which joins the cartilage, thatseparates tie nose. It makes part
of the orbits of the eyes.  Its lower  side makes, all the face
under  the cheeks,  eves, and nose  to  the mouth, and  two 
ANATOMY.
341:
  thuds of the roof of the mouth.   Below the orbits, ancl  be-
  hind the dentes mcisores are three holes, and  betwixt  the
  hack grinding teeth ancl the eyes are two great sinuses, called
  the antrum maxillare, or antrum highmori, or sinus max-
  imris pitmtanus, which open into the upper  part of the no*e
  In the lower edge are  the  sockets (alveolH for the teefli
  ^art of these cavities, next the  nose, are only  membranes
  Imposthumations sometimes happen in these  cavities.   This
  is easily cured by drawing out the last tooth  but one or tw>
  and making a perfortion through  its socket, into the antnt t
  so as to admit the free discharge of the matter.

                     OSSA PALATI,
   Are two small bones that make the back  part of the rent
  of the mouth, and a small part of the bottom of each orbit.
  Through this bone are two foramina,*which transmit arte:  r s
  end nervesto the palate.

                      OS VOMER.
   This is seated between the bones of  the  palate, and  ii«
  the spheroidal bone.   Its fore part is spongy and is continued
 to the middle cartillage of the nose.   This bone and  cat til-
 age are the septum nasi, (the separation betwixt the nostrils.*)

                   OS  SPONGIOSUM,
   fs  chiefly  the  spongy lominae  in the  nose, of the o.s eih-
 in:)ides, to which it always adheres.

  MAXILLA INFERIOR,  OR  UNDER JA'.V BONE,
   Js  articulated with loose  cartilage  to die temporal  bones,
 by two processes, named condyloides.  Near  these arise two
i more called coronals, and at  the inside of the  chin is a small
 rough process.   In the inside of this bone, under each pro-
 cess coronalis, is a large foramen, which runs under the teeth,
 and passes out near  the chin, in  this hole the vessels pass
 that belong to the teeth.  In the  upper edge  of the jaw are
 the sockets for the teeth, which  seldom  exceed sixteen  in
each jaw.
   The teeth, the four forward teeth are called incisores, the
next one on each  side canini, the rest molares;  the two lasi
of the molares are named dentes sapientiae, because they ap- 
 348                    ANATOMY.

 near about the years of discretion.  The incsores and canini
 have only one single root; the eight first of the molares, two;
 tie rest, some three, some four.
   Each of these roots has a foramen,  through which pass an
 Artery, vein,  and nerve, which  is expanded  in  a fine mem-
 brane that lines the cavity in each tooth; these  are the seat
 •jf the toothache.

         OF THE BONES OF  THE  TRUNK.
   The trunk is divided into the spine, chest, loins, and pelvis.
   Spine, the long column,  or pillar,  which  extends  in the
 posterior  part of the trunk,  from the occipital bone to the os
 i.acrum.  This is composed of twenty-four bones called ver-
 i ibra, viz.  seven of the neck, twelve of the back, and five of
 ihe loins.   Each vertebra is divided into a body and  seven
 j irocesses, one spinous, two superior  oblique, two inferior
 oblique, and two transverse processes.
   The cavaties are the spinal canal which contains the spinal
 marrow, and the  lateral foramina of the vertebra.  Each of
 (these is three bones in the child.  The' first bone of the spine
 u connected with the occipital bone by cartilage so as to ad-
 mit only of the motion backwards and forwards, as in nodding.
 'Tho second is united with the first so as to admit of a rotatory
j motion, and to the occipital bone by an intervening ligament ;
'tfiis joint of the second, vertebra,  admits  the turning of the
 head around to either side.   The bodies of the vertebra ar«
 connected with  one another by a peculiar intervertebral sub-
 stance ; and posteriorly by a yellow elastic ligament  and by
 their oblique processes.   The use is to support the  head and
 trunk, and  to contain and defend the spinal marrow.
   Cervical vertebra,  or bones  of the  neck.  The  first  i«
 ©ailed atlas, is without body, or processes, but forms an arch,
 or ring which surrounds tho dentiform process of the second
 vertebre.   It has upon  its upper  surface two  depressions,
 that receive the processes of the occipital bone.   The second
 vertrebra is termed epistropheous,  or dentatus,  from  a tooth
 bke process which is  surrounded by, and  attached to ths
 above bone, ancl  forms that joint which admits the rotation of
 the head.   The transverse processes  of the remaining verte-
 bra, have a peculiar foramen for tho passage of the vertebral
 arteries.         ,
    The Dorsal  Vertebra, have at the sides of the bodios a do- 
                        ANATOMY.                    $4$

 pression, and a superficial one in the points of the transverse
 process for the attachment of the great and little heads of the
 ribs.

    The Lumbar  Vertebra, are much larger than the dorsal
 (those of the back) and the  transverse process have no de-
 pression.

    Os Sacrum  is connected  with the last bone of the loins,
 and is  of a triangular figure, and bent forwards.   It has two
 superior oblique processes.   It has four pair of external and
 internal foramina, ancl five«iiddle canals, the canals and for-
 amina  of these bones, and two large holes between each  ver-
 tebra, contain the spinal marrow, and let the nerves pass out.
    Os  Coccygis,  or crooper bone, is joined 'superiorly to ihe
 above bone and is the last of this column of bones.

                  RIBS, OR COSTAE.
   These are twenty-four in   number, twelve on  each  side,
 the seven uppermost are called true  ribs, because their carti-
 lages reach the breast  bone,   and the five lowest are called
 false ribs.   They  stand oblique  from the back to the breast
 bone, and are semicircularly  shaped,  having a  great head
 which  is connected to the bodies of the dorsal  vertebra, a
 small neck, then a lesser head, which is joined to the trans-
 verse process of the same vertebra.   It has a longitudinal
 groove  on the under side, in which runs the intercostal artery.
 They are connected anteriorly with the sternum by means of
 cartilage.   Their  use is  to form the thorax, or chest,  and
 defend  the vital viscera,  and  gi*e adhesion to'muscles.

          STERNUM,  OR  BREAST BONE.
   This is situated in the anterior part of the thorax, betweoji
 the true ribs,  it is  shaped somewhat like a dagger, has a large
 jugular sinus at the upper and inner part, and two clavicular
 sinuses  for the attachment of the outer ends of tho collai
 bones.

         OS  INNOMINATUM. ^IP  BONE.
   In youno- persons this  is composed of three bones on each
side; 'the upper is named ilium, or haunch bone ; the lower
»nd posterior,  os ichii, being the'bone on which we sit;  and
/ 
.350
ANATOMY.
 the anterior, or  that bone which  passes acrr.ss at the lower
 part of the belly, is cailed os pubis.

              CAVITY OF THE PELVIS.
   Situated in the lower region of the trunk, in shape some-
 what like a  barber's boson.  It is composed  of four bones ;
 the os  innominata on  each  side, and the os sacrum, and os
 coccygis posteriorly.   It contains the bladder the rectum, &c.

          BONES OF THE UPPER  LIMB.
   These are the same on each side.
   Clavicle,  or collar bone, is connected at  one  end to the
 breast bone,  with a loose cartilage, ancl at the other end to
 the acromian process of the  shoulder blade.   Its chief use is
 to keep the shoulders from coming near together.
   Scapida,  or shoulder blade, is situated in the  upper ancl
 lateral part of the back; of a  triangular shape,  and has a
 spine or ridge in the  middle of the  external surface.  The
' acromion is the  anterior termination, and that which stands
 out opposite  to the ocromion, is called the coracoid process.
 Its principal cavity is the articular, or glenoid cavity, which
 receives the  head of the humerus.

      OS HUMERI,  HUMERUS OR  BRACHII,
   Is situated between the shoulder blade and forearm.   The
 head is rounded, and  is received into the joint of  the  shoul-
 der,  tlie neck  is immediately below  the  head, near the
 neck  is  the greater  tubercle,  which receives  the supra
 spinatis muscle, and near this is the lesser tubercle, wliich
 has  fixed to it  the . subscapularis muscle.   On  the lower
 end of this bone are the external and internal condyles, which
 give origin to muscles, and  near the end, posteriorly, a cavi-
 ty or fossa, which receives the olecranon, or anconoid process
 of the ulna.   It is connected at  its superior  end with the
 scapula, at its inferior, with the cubit and radius.

                  CUBIT,  OR  ULNA.
   This bone is situated upon the inside  of the  forearm to-
 ward  the little  finger.   It reaches from the humorus to the
 wrist, being  thicker above than below.   It has upon the.up-
 per end the anconoid process,  which unites with the hume-
*"  \                           \ 
ANATOMY.                   351
 rus, and makes the point of the elbow.  . This is the chief sup-
 port of the forearm.

                        RADIUS,
    Is situated on the external side of the forearm, toward tbe
 thumb ; its use is to assist in forming the forearm.   It is con-
 nected to the humerus byginglymus,  to the cubit by an in-
 terosseous ligament, ancl trocboicles;  and to the carpus (wrist)
 by arthrodia.

                CARPUS,  OR WRIST.
    The wrist is composed of eight small  bones, arranged in
 iwo rows, one of which is attached to the bones of the  fore-
 arm, the other to the body of the hand.  Names, beginning with
 the row next to the forearm, and with  the external  bone in
 each row;  os scaphoides, lunare,  cuneiforme pisiforme,  os
 trapezium, trapezoides, magnum, and unciforme.
   Metacarpus, is situated  between the  wrist  and  fingers,
 composed of five bones, one of the thumb, and four of the fin-
 £sv•>,"these form the middle part or body of the hand.
   lingers,  are situated at the inferior extremity of the met-
 acarpus ; each finger has three bones, which are called  pha-
 langes.   The thumb is composed of two  bones.

          BONES OF THE LOWER LIMB.
   Os Femoris, or thigh bone, has a round head at its upper
 "nd, which is received  into the socket (acetabulum)' of ti.;c
 os innominatum.   It has a neck upon which the head stands,
 a  large eminenence below the neck, called the great tro-
 chanter, and a little lower upon the opposite and inner side,
 another eminence,  which is the lesser trochanter, and a rough
 line on  the body of the bone,  called linea aspera.  On the
 lower end are the external and internal condyle, and between
them a deep notch, for the passage of the  great artery, vein,
and nerve of the leg.   It is connected to the acetabulum of
the os innominatum by enarthrosis, and to  the  tibia  and
patella by ginglymus.
   Tibia, or shin bone, is situated in the inside of the leg, it
has^two articular cavities in the upper head for the reception
of the condykes of the thigh bone ; it is connected at the up- 
352                    AMATOMY.
per end with the thigh bone, and knee pan by ginglymus, to
tho fibula by syneurosis, and to the astragalus by artbrodia.
   Fibula is a small bone on the outer side of the leg, it has
a head at the upper end, which joins, the tibia, and at the
lower end the malleolus externus, or  outer ankle,  At the
upper end it is connected with the tibia, and at the lower end
with the astragalus.      „
   Patella, rotula, or knee pan, is situated on the fore pert
of the knee,  in figure resembling a  heart.  Its use  is to
strengthen  the joint, and serve as  a pulley for the extensor
mussles of the tibia.
   The foot, is composed of the tar sis, situated below" the
bones of the leg, which consists of  seven bones, placed  in a
double row, in the  first row are  the astragalus, and os calcis,
in the second row, the os navieulare, oscubiforme, and three
cuneiform bones, which are placed^ near each other;  and of
the metatarsus situated between the tarsis and  toes, which
forms the back and sole of the foot;  and of the toes, the great
toe is composed  of two bones, and  each toe of  three called
phalanges.                           v
   Sesamoid bones, are situated in  the joints, under the  pha-
langes of the thumb and great toe.

                   PERIOSTEUM,
   Is a membrane which invests the external and  internal ear-
face of all the bones, except the crowns of the teeth.  It is
named,' pericranium on the cranium, perichondium where
it covers cartilages, peridesmium when it covers ligaments,
and periorbita on the orbits.  Its use is to distribute vessels
and nerves on the external ancl internal  surfaces of the bones.

        OF THE CONNEXION OF BONES.
   Connexion so as to admit of motion, is called diartliro-
sis.   So as to admit of no motion, synarthrosis  ; and when
connected by an intervening substance, the union is termed
symphysis.
   Enarthrosis, when the round head of one bone is received
into the deep cavity of another, so  as to admit of motion m
every direction.
   Arthrodia, when the round head of a bone is received into a 
                       ANATOMY.                    3J|g:

*«perftcial eavity of another, so as to admit of motion in eveiiy
direction.                                           #

   Ginglymus, when the motion is only flexioaand extensioi;
   Trochoides, when one bone rotates upon an other, as ttye
radius upon the ulna, in turning the hand.         /
   Amphiarthrosis, very obscure motion.
   Sutures, when the union is by dentiform margins.
   Harmony, connexion by rough, not dentiform, margins.
   Gomphosis, one bone fixed within another, like a nail in
a board, as the teeth in the  alveoli of the jaws.
   Synarodrosis, union by intervening cartilage.
   Syssarcosis, when a bone is connected  with another  by
means of an intervene,   muscle.
   Syneurosis,  when ? ues aro united by an intorveniBg
membrane.                                           f

   Syndesmosis, union by an intervening ligament.      J
   Synostosis, when two bones, originally separated, ice
unite d bv bonv matter.                                 I 
355
ANATOMY.
           EXPLANATION OF PLATE I.

   The skeleton of a child twehty months old, in which  ii;
 '.toaes differ in shape, (being; not so well proportioned,) from
•tIkiso of an adult.
 Fig. 1. The os frontis.
     2. Os bregmatis, or parietal bone.
  j   3. Os temporis, or temporal bone.
 7   4. Os maxilla superior, or upper jaw bone.
 /   5. Os maxilla  inferior, or lower jaw.
     6. Vertebra of the neck.
     7. Clavicle, or collar bone.
     8. Scapula, or shoulder blade.
     9. Head of the  os humerus.
    10. Body of the os  humerus.
    11. Radius ancl  ulna, or the forearm.
    12. Wrist,  which is composed of the eight bone* J the
         carpus.                                 »
    IS. Metacarpus, or bones of the  hand.
    14. Fingers, digitis, or  phalanges.
    15. Sternum, or breast bone. •
    !*>. Ribs, or costa.
   .17. Lumbar vertebra, or loins.
    18. Os innominatum, or haunch bones.
    19. Os sacrum.   Thelower part  of which is a sepa.-aU
         bone ; the  os coccygis.
   20. Os pubcs, or share bone.
    21. The head of the os fcmoris,the neck, and the eminence
         called the greater trochanter.
    22. Body of the os  femorls.
   23. Patella, or knee-pan.
   2i. Tibia, or shin bone.
   25. Fibula, or small outer bone of the leg.
    2d. The seven bones of the tarsus, which join tlie bone* of
         the leg and the metatarsal bones of the foot. 
MH
\ 
 
ANATOMY.
357
             CARTILAGES  AND LIGAMENTS.
      Every part of a bone which is articulated to another bone
    for motion, is covered or lined  with a cartilage, as  far as it
    moves upon, or is moved upon by another bone in action, the
    cartilage being smoother and softer  than bone, renders the
    motions more easy,  and prevents  the  bones wearing  each
    other in their actions.  There is a loose cartilage in  each  ar-
    ticulation  of the lower jaw on  which the condyloid process
    moves ; and in the joint of the knee are too loose, almost an-
    nular cartilages, thick at their outer edges, and thin at their
    inner ones, which  make the greatest part of the two sockets
    in this joint.
      Some of the  cartilages serve to give  shape to parts,  as
  '  those of the outer  ear, the lower part of the nose,  and the
    edges of the eye-lids.   They  support and give shape to the
    parts, without being  liable  to be broke, as they would have
    been, if formed of bone.
      Ligaments serve to  tie together such bones as have mo-
,  . .tion, and their thickness ancl  strength is proportioned  to the
//several joints, and their lengths are no more than sufficient to
    allow a proper quantity of motion.  The  ligaments surround
    the joints also, and are there called capsular, or  purse-like lig-
    aments, which contain the  mucous of the joints, and all the
    bones  and joints are furnished with ligaments which run
    round and across them, securing them effectually from sepa-
    ration or dislocation.

                          MUSCLES,
      Are the natural divisions of the flesh into distinct  and cer-
    tain portions, which constitute the moving powers, and per-
    form the several motions of the body, by contracting  them-
    selves, and thereby bringing the parts to  which they are
    fixed  nearer  together.   The immoveable, or least moved
    part, or that part nearest  the trunk of the  body,  is usu-
    ally called its  origin, and the other its insertion, but  mus-
    cles that have their two ends equally liable to be moved, may
    have either called  their origin or insertion.  The ends that
    are attached to the bones are called the  head  and tail, and
    the rest is  called the body.  Each muscle is made  up of a
    number of small fibres.
      The muscles are named  according to the arrangement of
    their fibres, or from their action, or from their origin and in-
                              23 
358
ANATOMY.
 sertion, and from their figureor situation. Thus when the fibres
 go in the same direction  it is said  to  be  a simple muscle •
 when they are in rays, a radiated muscles,  when arranged
 like the plume of a feather, a penniform muscle;  and when
 two penniform muscles are contiguous, a compound penni-
form.
   Muscles sometimes surround certain cavities of the body
 forming a thin lamina as in the intestinal canal, bladder, &c.
 Those which receive names from their origin, figure, situa-
 tion, &c, are very numerous, and unimportant in a work of
 this kind;  and I shall  therefore pass  over all except those
 shown in the plate, which will be found sufficient it is pre-
sumed, to give a perfect idea of this wonderous part of me-
chanism.   Muscles that concur in producing the same action,
are called congeres, and those that act contrary to each other
antagonistea.  They are furnished with arteries, veins, ancl
absorbants, and with nerves, 
 
Missing Pages
   359-360 
ANATOMY.
361
           EXPLANATION  OF  PLATE II.

   Fig. 1. Musculus frontalas,  or oceipito frontalis, has
 four fleshy  bellies, and arises behind each ear from the os
 occipites, and soon becoming  tendinous, passes  under the
 hairy  scalp  to the forehead, where it  becomes  broad  and
 fleshy, adhering to the skin, and is  inserted into  the upper
 part of the orbicular muscles of the eye lids, into the os frontis
 near the nose, and into the bones of the nose.  When it acts
 from the back part, it pulls the  skin of the forehead upward,
 and wrinkles it transversely, in  some persons it pulls the
 hairy scalp backward.   Wi:en the forepart of it acts, it draws
 the skin with the eye brows downward, and towards the nose
 when we frown.
   2.  Temporalis, arises  from  the  frontis, parietale, sphen-
 oides,  malae, and temporal bones; and passing under the os
jugale, is inserted externally into the coronal process of the
 lower jaw, which it pulls upward.   The motion of this mus-
 cles can be felt by placing the hand on the temple whea
 chewing.
   3.  Orbicularis, surrounds the eye-lids on the edge of the
 orbit, and is fixed  to the transverse suture at the great corner
 of the  eye, it shuts the eye-lids, as in winking.
   4.  The paroted gland with its duet, which passes through
 the buccinator musle into the mouth.
   5. Mastoideus, or Masseter, arises by strong,  tendinous,
 and fleshy fibres, which run in  different directions, from the
 upper jaw bone, and zygoma.  It is inserted into  the angle
 of the lower jaw, and pulls it upward, and a little backward
and forward.
   6. Zygomaticus, arises from the forepart of the os zygo-
ma or  malea (the prominent bone of the cheek,) it runs ob-
liquely downwards, and is inserted  into the  sphincter at tie
corner of the mouth ;  it draws  the corner of the mouth up-
ward.
   7. Eleavator labii superioris proprius,  arises from the
bone of the upper  jaw, and a small portion from the os ma-
lea, and passing down by the  side of the nose, is inserted into
the upper part of the sphincter  oris.  This raises the upper
lip, and helps to dilate the nostrils.
  8. Elevator labiorum communis, arises from a depressed
                          23* 
362                    ANATOMY.
part of the upper jaw under the middle of the orbit, and is
inserted into the sphincter oris near the corner of the mouth,
it draws the corner of the mouth upwards.
  9. Depressor labiorum communis, arises  laterally from
the  lower jaw near  the chin, and is inserted into the sphinc-
ter opposite  to tlie  former,  it pulls down the corner of the
mouth.
  10., Sphincter oris, or  orbicularis oris.   This is formed
of all the muscles that move the lips, its use is to shut the
mouth, by contracting and drawing both lips together.
  11. Depressor labii inferioris proprius, arises broad and
fleshy, intermixed with fat,  from the lower jaw  at the  chin,
runs obliquely upwards, and is inserted  into the edge of the
under lip ; pulls the under lip downwards.
  12. Buccinator, arises  tendinous and fleshy from the low-
er jaw, fleshy from  the upper jaw, and process of the sphe-
noid bone, and is inserted  into the angle of  the mouth, use,
to draw the angle of the mouth backwards and outwards, and
to press the cheeks  inward, by which the food is thrust be-
tween the teeth.
  13. Sterno-hyoidei, arises thin and fleshy, from the car-
tilaginous extremity of the first rib, the upper and inner part
of the breast  bone,  aud from the clavicle where it joins the
sternum, it pulls the os hyoides downwards.
  14. Coraco-hoideus, arises from the upper edge of the
scapula, and is inserted, tendinous, into  the basis of the os
hyoides, this draws  the os hoides downward, and a little back-
ward.
  15. Mastoideus, arises from the sternum  and clavicle,
and is inserted  into the mammillary process of the temporal
bone.   It pulls the  side of the head towards the  breast and
turns the head towards the contrary shoulder.
  16. Trapezius,  arises  from the os occipitas, from the spi-
nal process of the last vertebra of  the neck, and the ten up-
permost of the back, and  is  inserted into one  third of the
clavicle next the scapula,  and almost all the back part of the
acromion, this draws the shoulder blade directly backward.
  17. Pectoralis,  arises  from the clavicle, stermum,  and
cartilages of the ribs,  and is inserted  into the  os humerus.
The use of it is to draw the arm forward.
  18. Deltoides, arises opposite to the  insertion of the tra-
pezius, and is inserted, tendinous near the middle  of the os
humerus,  which bone it lifts directly upwards. 
ANATOMY.                    363
   Tongue.  The tongue is a  muscular body, moveable in
 «Very direction, it is divided into basis, body, sides, and apex
 or point.  It is connected with the os hyoides, bottom of the
 cavity of the mouth, and . lower jaw.   It is supplied with
 nerves from the fifth, eightji, and ninth pair, which terminate
 most abundantly in the papilla, on the sides and point of the
 tongue.   The  lingual arteries or arteries of the tongue, are
 branches of the external caroted.

                     OS HYOIDES,

   Is situated in the fauces, between the basis of  the tongue
 and larynx, its figure is semilunar, it serves for the adhesion
 of the root of the tongue, for deglutition  and for  a  point cf
 adhesion of many  muscles.
   The voluntary motions are such as proceed from an imme-
 diate exertion  of  the powers of the will.  The involuntary
 motions of muscles are performed  by organs seemingly of
 their own accord;  as the contraction and dilatation of the heart,
 arteries, intestines, &c.   The mixed motions are those which
 are in part under the control of the will, but which generally
 act without our being conscious of it, as in the muscles of
 respiration, and of the eye-lids.
   When a muscle acts it becomes shorter and thicker,  and
 its origin and insertion  are drawn towards its middle.  The
 sphincter muscles (sphincter muscles are such as surround
 orifices,  as the mouth,  anus, &c.) are always in action,  and
 so are antagonist  muscles.   When  two antagonist Muscles
 move with equal  force, the part remains at rest,  but if  one
 remains  at rest, while the other acts,  the  part is moved to-
 ward the centre of motion.
   When a muscle is  divided, it contracts.   And if stretched
 to a certain extent, it contracts, and acquires its  former di-
 mensions, as soon as the force is removed.   This  is called
vis mortua, or the tone of  the muscle.   When a muscle is
 wounded, or touched, it contracts  independent of the will;
 this  is called irritability, or vis insita.
   When a muscle is  stimulated,  through the medium of the
will, or by any foreign body, it contracts in proportion as the
stimulus applied is greater or less.  The contractions are dif-
ferent, according to the purposes to be served : thus the heart
contracts with  a jerk  ; the urinary bladder, &c. slowly  and
uniformly;  relaxation alternates with contraction.  There 
364                   ANATOMY.

are about two hundred pairs of muscles, or two hundred on
each half of the body, and eight or ten that are single, each
of them is surrounded by a  very thin  and delicate covering
of cellular membrane, which encloses it like a sheath.  The
names of all these muscles,  would be very difficult to retain ;
and there are but few physicians, if any, that even try to re-
member any, except  a few of the most important ones.
   Tendons are the white and  glistening extremeties of the
museles, and as before observed, appear to be the same fibres
of which the muscle is composed,  but more closely  united
that they may possess less space in a limb, and be inserted in
less room into a bone.

  EXTERNAL PARTS AND  COMMON INTEGU-
                       MENTS.
   The hollow on the middle of the thorax, under the breast
is called scrobicules cordis.   The  middle of the abdomen for
about three fingers breadth  above and below the  navel, is
called the umbilical region ; the middle part above this epi-
gastrium ; below the umbilical region, down to the ossa ilia
and os pubis, hypogastrum ; and on each  side of the epigas-
trium under the cartileges of the lower ribs, hypochondrium.
   Cuticle epidermis, or scarff skin, is the insensible mem-
brane which is raised by blisters in living bodies, and extends
over every part of the true skin, except where the nails are.
It defends the true  skin, and preserves it from wearing, this
grows the thicker the more  the  part is used,  as on the soles
of the feet and palms of the  hands.
   Rete Mucosum, a mucous substance disposed in a net like
form, between the epidermis ancl cutis, this gives the  differ-
ence of color in Europeans, Ethiopians, &c.
   Cutis, or true skin, a thick membrane immediately be-
neath the rete mucosum, covering the whole body, in this
membrane the nerves terminate so plentifully, for the sense
of touch,  that the finest pointed  instrument can prick  no
where, without touching some of them.
   Cellular, or adipose  membrane, is formed of small mem-
branous cells, which are generally  filled with fat.  It is situ-
ated under the cutis,  and in many of the soft parts.  Its use
is to cover and defend  the muscles, to unite the soft parts,
and to render the muscular  fibres flexible.  The cells of this
membrane communicate throughout the whole body so much
that from any one part the whole may be filled with air. 
ANATOMY.                   365
                 OF  PERSPIRATION.

   Perspiration is  a species of secretion which frees the
 blood of a quantity of aqueous fluid by the exhalent arteries
 of the skin.,
   Insensible  perspiration is constantly going on, by  which
 means the surface of  the body is  kept  smooth and moist,  it
 may be detected by placing any part of the skin near a look-
 ing-glass, which will  become  damp.   Sensible perspiration
 or sweat is observed only occasionaly.
   Ungus, or  nails, are horny lamina, to  defend the nervous
 papilce.
   Pili, or hairs, are called capilli  on the head, supercilia
 above the eyes,  cilia  on the margin of the eyelids, vibrisse
 in the nostrils, mastyx on the upper lip, barba on the lower
jaw, &c. &c.

                 OF THE  GLANDS.

   A gland is an orgajiic part of the body, composed of blood
 vessels, nerves and absorbants, and destined for the secretion
 or alteration of some peculiar fluid.   They are divided into,
   1st,  Simple glands, which are small  hollow follicles, cov-
 ered with a membrane, and having a duct through  which
 they evacuate the  liquor  contained in their cavity.   2d.
 Compound glands, consist of many simple glands, the ducts
of which are joined in  one.   3d, Conglobate, or lymphatic
glands, are those into which the lymphatic vessels enter and
from which they go out again.   4th. Conglomerate glands
are composed of a congeries of many simple glands, the exe-
cratory ducts of  which open into one common trunk.  And
some are named according to their fluid contents, as: mucous
glands; sebaceous glands; salivial  glands;  and lachrymal
glands.   The  fluids which they secrete are various  as the
saliva (spittle) secreted  by the salivary glands, especially by
the paroted, which it discharges into the mouth.  See plate 2,
figure 4.   And the tears, the  mucous as  of the throat, and
alimentry canal,  the milk, &c.  They  are numerous  in all
the soft parts of the body.

  OF THE  PARTS CONTAINED WITHIN  THE
                      CRANIUM.

  Dura mater, a thick membrane, that adheres to the inter- 
366                    ANATOMY.
 nal surface of the cranium, especially about the sutures.  It
 has a process called, falx, or falsiform process, which sepa-
 rates the brain, half to each side, (into two  hemispheres);
 the tentorium cerebelli, which separates the  upper and for-
 ward portion of the brain from the back and lower  part, and
 a septum cerebelli,  which separates the two lobes of the cere-
 bellum.   Its veins are called venous sinuses, there are twenty
 two, the principal of which are  the  superior and inferior
 longitudinal, all of them evacuate their blood  through the
foramen lacerum in basa crani, into the jugular veins.
   Membrana Arachnodiea, a delicate, and transparent mem-
 brane, situated between the dura  and pia mater, surrounding
 the brain.   Use, n6t known. ,
   Pia mater, a thin membrane, firmly united to the convol-
 utions of the cerebrum  cerebellum, modulla oblongata, and
 spinales.   Its use is to distribute  the vessels to, and contain,
 the substance of the brain.

              CEREBRUM,  OR BRAIN,

   Is that part of the brain, which possesses all the upper and
 fore part of the skull.   Its upper side  is divided into  two
 hemispheres, by the falx of the dura mater, and its lower side
 is divided into four lobes, it is separated from the cerebellum
 by a second process of the dura mater.   Its substance  is cor-
 tical and medulary, it has two anterior  or lateral ventricles,
 in each of which are several eminences, and a loose vascular
 production called the plexus choroides, and a third and fourth
 ventricle.  The digital process, pieneal gland, &c. &c. can
 only be learnt on the subject.  Its arteries are from the inter-
 nal caroteds, and vertebrals, it  has no nerves but furnishes
 nine pair.  The veins empty the  blood into the venous sinu-
 ses of the duro mater.
   Cerebellum, or  little brain, is situated under the tentori-
 um of the.dura mater in the inferior occipital depression, (in
 the lower and back part of the head,)  its vessels are in com-
 mon with the cerebrum.  The brain is the organ of all sense.
   Medulla oblongata,  is formed by the connexion  of the
 cerebrum, and cerebellum, and its  use is the same as the brain.
   Medulla spinalis, is  a continuation of the medulla oblon-
 gata, which desends through the foramen magnum, of the oc-
 cipital bone into the channel of  the spine, and descends to
 the third vertebra of the loins, in which course it sends out, be- 
ANATOMY.
367
 tween the vertebra, thirty pair of nerves.  It finally termi-
 nates in a number of nerves called cauda equina, from their
 resemblance to a horse's tail.

                  OF THE NERVES.

   Nerves are long whitish cords,  composed of bundles of
 fibres, which are the organs of sensation.  They arise, nine
 pair from the brain, and thirty pair from the spinal marrow.
 The nine pair of the brain are,  1. the olfactory; 2. the optic ;
 3. oculorum motorii;  4. the pathetic;  5. the trigemini;  6.
 the  abducent; 7.  the auditory  and facial; 8.  the parvagum
 or great sympathetic nerves; 9. the lingual pair.   The thir-
 ty pair of spinal nerves are divided into eight of cervical,
 from the neck;  twelve pair  of dorsal,  from  the  back;  five
 pair of lumbar, from the loins ; and five pair of sacral nerves,
 from the sacrum.   These are for the senses of, touch, sight,
 hearing, smelling, and taste, and for the motion of the mus-
 cles.  My limits will not admit of a description of the indi-
 vidual nerves.

     OF  THE FUNCTIONS OF THE NERVES.

   All external  applications to the  body produce changes,
 which changes are conveyed to the brain, in an unknown
 manner by means of the nerves only, and sensation is produ-
 ced  ; hence all sentient parts are supplied with nerves, even
 though they cannot be seen by  the eye.   The senses  are dis-
 tinguished into internal  and external.
   The internal senses are ideas .which the mind, or senso-
 rium commune, forms to itself,  and may be produced by the
 external senses, or they may be excited spontaneously; such
 are memory, imagination, conscience, the passions, and rea-
 soning.
   The external senses  are, smelling, seeing, hearing, taste-
 ing,  and touching.
   Smelling, this sense is produced  by the  effluvia, which
 are conveyed to the nerves that end in  the membrane which
 lines the nose.  The nerves are the olfactory, or first pair  of
 nerves, which are distributed on every  part of the pituitary
 membrane of the nose.
   Seeing, is the sensation by which we perceive' objects and
their visible qualities.   The organ of sight is the  retina, an
expansion of the optic, or second pair of nerves.  The object 
368
ANATOMY.
of sight is the rays of light which strike upon and stimulate
the retina.   Light eminates from any luminous body, with a
very rapid motion,  in  right lines which  are called rays of
light, these fall on the pellucid and convex cornea of the eye,
by which they are condensed, and pass through the  aqueous
humor, and pupil of the eye, to the crystaline lens, passing
thro' which they are condensed into a focus;  this penetrates
the vitreous humor, and strikes upon and stimulates  the reti-
na upon which they impress  the  image of the external ob-
ject, to be represented to the mind through the medium of the
optic nerves.
  Hearing, by hearing we perceive the sound of any sono-
rous body.   Sound is a tremulous motion of the air produced
by striking any sonorous body.   Sound is conveyed  through
the atmosphere, in straight lines which are called sonorous
rays.   Soft bodies diminish sound, elastic  enes increase it.
The portio mollis of the seventh pair of nerves is the organ
of hearing, which is distributed on the membranes within the
ear.   It is  performed in  the following manner, the rays of
sound arrive at the ear  which by its elasticity, and formation
concentrates them, and they pass along the external  foramen
to the  membrana tympani, which  they cause  to vibrate.
This communicates its vibrations to the small bones in the
ear, and from the  bones, it passes to what is called the fenes-
tra ovalis, this communicates its vibrations to the water con-
tained in the vestibulum and semicircular canals, and causes
gentle motion of the nerves  contained therein, which com-
municate them to the brain, where  the mind is in formed o
the presence  of sound, and judges of its difference.
   Tasting, is made by the application of substances to the
nerves of the  tongue, and inside of the mouth.
  And Feeling, by impressions made on the nerves  that are
distributed throughout the body.

               INTERNAL VISCERA,
   Of the parts contained within the Thorax, or Chest.
  Pleura, is  a fine membrane which lines the whole cavity
of the thorax, except on the diaphragm which is covered with
no other than its own proper membrance.   The  back part of
it extends over the great vessels ;  it serves to make the in-
side of the thorax smooth and equal.
   Mediastinum,  divides  the thorax lengthways, from  the 
ANATOMY.
369
hreast bone, backwards, and a little to the left side.   It is in
two layers, or  is double.   It  hinders one lobe  of the lungs
from incommoding the other,  as lying on  one side might do ;
and prevents the disordersof one lobe from affecting the other.
   The Lungs, or lights, or pulmo, or pulmonary organs.
They are composed of two lobes, one situated on each side of
the  mediastinum.  When placed together in  their  natural
position they resemble the hoof of an ox.
   Eeach lung fills completely the cavity in which it is situa-
ted. The wind pipe (bronchia) enters the lungs and is divided
into innumerable branches, which form the cells of the lungs,
into which the air enters, and the blood vessels discharge a
large quantity of lymph.  It is on the membrane of these cells
that the blood vessels of the lungs are distributed.   The use
of the air's entering the lungs is not well understood, it is un-
questionably essential to the formation, or preservation of the
blood : and it is instrumental in speech.
   The lungs of an animal before it breathes will sink in wa-
ter ;  but if inflated with air they swim in. water.
   Pericardium, or heart purse, is a  strong membrane that
covers the heart, its side next the great vessels is partly con-
nected to them, and partly to the basis of the heart.   And on
the lower side it is inseparably connected with the diaphiagm.
Its use is to inclose the hearty and keep it in its place, without
interrupting its office.

                     THE HEART.
   This is a muscle of a conic figure, with four  cavities with-
in it.  Two of these are called auricles, (deaf ears,) the other
two are called ventricles.
   The right auricle originates from  the union of the two
vena cava, ancl  consequently receives  their  blood.  The
oricles are separated from each other by a partition common
to both.   In the heart of  the  child before birth, there is an
opening though this septum, called the foramen ovale.  This
is closed after birth.  Near this  is a large valve called the
valve of  Eustachius, before this, and near the  union of the
auricle  and ventricle  is the orifice of the coronary, or proper
vein of the heart, this orifice is covered by a semilunar valve.
   The aperture between the  right auricle, and right ventri-
cle, is about an inche  in diameter, and is called  ostium veno-
sum.   From its whole margin arises a valve, which is divid- 
370
ANATOMY.
ed into three portions, it  is the valvula  tricuspides, which
prevents the blood from returning, when thrown in to the ven-
tricle.
   Theright ventricle, is  a triangular cavity, situated at the
side of the heart, and immediately beneath the auricle, re-
ceives the blood  from the  auricle,  and discharges it into the
pulmonary arteries which carry it through the  lungs.
   The left auricle, is situated on the left side  of the basis of
the heart.  It is made by  the junction of the four pulmonary
veins, which come from each lobe of the lungs, returning the
blood from them  to the heart.  This is furnished with valves
like  unto the right auricle.   These valves are so  formed as to
admit the passage of blood from the  auricle, but completely
prevent its return, when the ventricle contracts.
   The left ventricle, is situated posteriorly, and to the left
of the right ventricle.  It is conical and rather longer than the
right, ta the side of this ventricle is the mouth of the aorta (great
artery.)  The mouth of the aorta is furnished with three semi-
lunar valves  to prevent the return of the blood into the ven-
tricle.  From this artery immediately after it leaves the heart,
arises two arteries which  supply the substance of the  heart
with blood.   The great vein of the heart open into the under
side  of the right auricle.
  The vessels that supply  the heart, are generally called the
Coronary Vessels, because they, (coronate) run round the
heart.   The  heart is the great organ of circulation. 
 
Missing Pages
   371-372 
anatomy.                   373
         EXPLANATION OF PLATE III.

Fig.  1. The right ventriele distended with wax.
    2. The right auricle.
    3. The left auricle.
    4. Branches of the veins of the  right lobe of the lungs,
         those of the left being cut off.
    5. The arteries of the left lobe of the lungs.
    o. The vena cava descendens.
    7. The Aorta ascendens.
    8. The Pulmonary artery.
    9. Ductus arteriosus.
   10. The under side of a heart of a young child.
   11. The right auricle cut open.
   12. The cava desendens cut open.
   13. Tuberculum Lowri.
   14. The foramen ovale closed with its valve..
   15. The mouth of the coronary veins.
   16. The umbilical vein.
   17. Branches of the vena  porta in the liver.
   18. Ductus Venosus.
   19. Branches of the cava in the liver.
   20. Vena cava. 
374                    anatomy.
                 OF THE  VESSELS.
  Vessels are long, membranous canals, which carry blood,
lymph, or chyle.  Division, into arteries, veins, and absorb-
ents.   Situation, in every part  of the body, excepting the
nails, arachnoid membrane, and epidermis.

                OF THE  ARTERIES.
  Arteries are elastic membranous canals,  which pulsate :
they always become narrower as they proceed from the heart
towards the extremities.   Origin,,from the ventricles of the
heart; namely, the pulmonary artery from the right, and the
aorta from the left, ventricle:  so that there are only two ar-
teries,  of  which the rest  are branches.   Termination, in
veins, exhaling vessels, or  they anastomose with one another.
Composed, of three membranes, called coats ;  an external
one, a middle coat, which is muscular, and an inner  one,
which  is smooth.   Use, to convey blood from the heart to
the different parts of the body, for nutrition ;  preservation of
life; generation of heat; and the secretion of different fluids.

     OF  THE  AORTA, OR  GREAT  ARTERY.

  The aorta arises from-the left ventricle of  the heart, forms
an arch towards the dorsal vertebra, then descends through the
opening of the diaphragm into the abdomen, in which it pro-
ceeds by the left side of the spine to the last vertebra of the
lions, where it divides into the  two  iliac arteries.  In this
course it gives off, just above its origin, two coronary arteries
to the heart, and then forms an arch.
   This arch of the aorta, gives off  three branches,  which
supply the head,  neck, and arms,  with blood ;  these are,
   1st. The Arteria Innominata, (nameless  artery,)  which
divide into the right carotid and right subclavian arteries.
  2d.  The left Carotid.
  3d.  The left subclavian.
   The carotid Arteries, having emerged from the chest, run
up along the neck one  on each side of the  trachea, to the
angle of the lower jaw, where  they divide into  external arid
internal.
   The external carotid Artery, gives off eight braches to the
*eck and face, viz : 
anatomy.                    375
     1st. To the thyroid  gland, 2d. to the tongue,  3d to the
  pharynx,  4th. to the ear, 5th. to the back part of the head
  6th. to the external, and 7th. to the internal parts  about the
  upper jaw bone ;  (the latter gives one to the lower jaw bone,
  supplying the teeth and face, others to the pterygoid muscles,
  two to the temples, another which divides to the teeth and
  orbits, one to the palate, one to the sphoenoid sinus, and an-
  other to  the  cavity of  the nostrils;)  8th.  to the temples,
  which passes through the parotid gland, and sends off several
  branches to the face, forehead, ear, and temples.
    The Internal Carotid Artery  leaves the external at the
  angle of the jaw, and proceeds by. the vagum ancl  intercostal
  nerve to the carotid canal in  the petrous portion of the tem-
  poral bone, where it is shaped like the letter/, and enters the
  cranium at the side of the  sella turcica, having given off two
  very small twigs to the pituitary gland, and 3d, 4th, and 5th
  pair of nerves ;  and when it has reached the anterior  cli-
  noid process, it sends off,
    1st. The Arteria Opthalmica, which is distributed on the
  eye.
    2d. The Anterior Cerebri, which proceeds be fore the sella
 turcica, unites with its fellow, and forms the circle  of Willis,
 from which a  branch proceeds to the third ventricle, se*ptum
 lucidum and the arteria corporis callosi.
    3d.  The Media cerebri, which  runs between the anterior
 and middle lobes of the brain,  gives of the artery of the cho-
 roid plexus, and is last on the middle lohe of the brain.
   4th. The Communicans, which proceeds backwards, and
 soon inosculates with the vertebral.

   The Subclavian Artery arises  on the right side from the
 arteria innominata, and on the  left from the arch of the aorta.
 Each subslavian gives off seven branches,  viz. :
   1st.  The internal mammay, from which arises  the thy-
 mica, ca/nes phrenici, pericardiac, and phrenico pericar-
 diac.
   2d. The inferior thyroid,  from which  arises the ramus
 thyroideus, the  tracheal arteries,  the ascending  thyroid,
 and the transversalis humeri.
   3d. The  Vertebralis, which proceeds into  the vertebral
foramina, to ascend into the cavity of the cranium, where it
unites upon the  cunieform process of the occipital bone with
its fellow of the other side, and forms the Basilary Artery, 
376
anatomy.
which immediately gives off the posterior artery of the cere-
bellum ;  it then  proceeds upon the tuberculum annulare, to
give off four  branches, two to the right, and two to the left,
which constitute the anterior cerebelli, which branch to the
cura cerebelli, the cerebellum, vermis, crura cerebri, corpora
quadrigemina, pineal  gland, and -fourth ventricle ; and the
posterior cerebri, which is joined by the communicans, and
supply the thalmi nervorum  opticorum, the centrum gemi-
num,  infundibulum,  and crura  fornicis,  and the posterior
lobes of the brain, inosculating with several arteries.
  4th. The Cervicalis profunda.
  5th. The Cervicalis superficialis, both of which are dis-
tribed about the muscles of the neck.
  6th. The Intercostal superior,  which  lies between the
two upper ribs.
  7th. The Supra-scapularis, which sometimes arises from
the  thyroidea, when it is called the transvalis humeri.
  As soon as  the  subclavian has arrived in the axilla (arm-
pits), it is called  the axillary  artery, which runs into the
arm, where it is termed the Brachial.
  The axillery artery gives off,
  1st.  The four mammay arteries,  called thoracica supe-
rior ; thoracica longier, thoracica humeriana;  and thora-
cica axillaries, which supply blood to the muscles about the
breast.
  2d.  The sub-scapularis, which supplies the lower sur-
face of the scapula.
  3d. The circumflexa posterior.
  4th. Circumflexa anterior,  which ramify about the joint.
  The Brachial, or Humeral artery gives off,
  1st.  Many  lateral vessels.
  2d. Profunda humeri superior.
  3d. Profunda humeri inferior.
  4th. Ramus anastomaticvs magnus, which anastomoses
round the elbow joint.   The brachial then becomes the ulnar,
and gives off the Radial.
  The Ulnar or cubital Artery sends off,
  1st.  The recurrent branches, which  anastomose with the
ramus anastomaticus magnus.
  2d.  The Interossea  communis.  It then sends  small
branches  to the adjacent muscles, as it proceeds down  to the 
 
 
ANATOMY.
377
 wrist; just before it arrives here, it gives off the dorsalis ul-
 naris, which goes round to the back of the little finger.  At
 the wrist it gives off palmaris profunda; then forms a great
 arterial arch, called the superficial palmer arch, which sup-
 plies branches to the fingers.
   The Radial artery gives off the radial recurrent, proceeds
 to the wrist, where the pulse is felt, and gives off the super-
 ficialis voice,  and then divides into  the  dorsalis pollicis,
 radialis indie is, magna pollicis, and palmaris profunda.
   The descending aorta gives off in the breast,
   1st. The bronchial, which nourish the lungs.
   2d.  The (Esophageal, which go to the aesophagus.
   3d.  The intercostals, between the ribs.
   4th. The inferior diaphragmatic.
   II ithin the abdomen, the same artery (descending aorta)
 gives off 8 branches, viz :
   1st.  The Cceliac, from  which arise the  arteria Hepatica
 (artery of the liver,) gastrica, and splenica.
   2d. The superior mesenteric, of which the colica media,
 colicx dextra, and the ileo-colica, are branches.
   3d. The renal arteries, or emulgents, which are  short,
 and  divide into three or four branches, to the kidney.
   4th.  The spermatic arteries.
   5th.  The  inferior mesenteric, from which  arises the left
 coelic artery, and the internal hcemorrhoidal.
   6th.  The lumbar arteries, which nourish the muscles and
 vertebra of the loins.
   7th.  The middle  sacral, which is  distributed about the
 sacrum.
   The aorta then bifurcates, and becomes (he  iliac artyries.
   The iliacs soon divide into internal and external.
   Each internal iliac or hypogastric  artery, gives off five
 branches, viz :
   1st. The lateral sacral arteries.
   2d.  The  gluteal, which ramify  upon  the back of the
 haunch bone, and supply the gluteal muscles.
   3d.  The ischiatic, which turns downwards along the hips,
 and  gives off the coccygeal artery.
   4th.  The arteria pudica communis, which proceeds out
of the pelvis through the sciatic notch, returns into the pelvis,
and  runs towards the symphysis of the  pubis.
                           24 
378
ANATOMY.
  5th. The obturatory,  which passes through the oval fora-
men, and is distributed on the thick muscles in the centre of
the thigh.
  Each external iliac gives off,
  1st.  The epigastric, which is reflected from Poupart's
ligament upwards, along the abdomen.
  2d.  Circumflexa  iliaca, which runs backwards along the
crista ilii.
  The external iliac then passes under Poupart's ligament,
becomes the femoral artery, and is continued along the thigh
into the popliteal.  In this course, it gives off near the groin,
  1st.  The profunda femoris, which gives off the perfGrans
prima, secunda magna, tertia,  and quarta, which nourish
the muscles of the thigh.  The femoral artery then makes a
spiral turn round the os femoris, sending ofi* small branches,
and about two hands breadth from the  knee it gives out.
  2d.  The ramus anastomaticus magnus, which ramifies
about the knee joint.
  The femoral artery, baying reached the ham, is calbd the
popliteal,  which gives off several small  branches about the-
joint, and divides below the ham into the tibialis antica, ancl
postica.
  The tibialis  antica soon perforates tlie interosseous lini-
ment, and passes alonL»; the tibia over the bones of the uirsiis,
and then inosculates  with the  back arteries.   In this course
it gives off,
   1st.  Tne recurrent, which inosculates with the articulai
branches of the popliteal: it then sends off small brashes as
it passes down  the leg.
  2d.  The malleolar is interna, about the inner ankle.
  3d.  The mallco'.aris externa, about the outer ankle.
 s. 4th.  The tar seal, which lies upon the bones of the tarsus.
  jdjM? The. metciursd,  to tlie tendons  of the peronei mus-
cles.
   Gth.  The dorsalis externa halucis, which runs along the
metatarsal bone ■>{' the great toe.
                     ©
   The tibialis postica passes along the back part of the tibia,
goes round the ;nner  ankle, and divides at the heel  into the
two plantar arteries.  In this course it sends off,
   1st. The nutritia tibia, which gives branches to the popli-
teus, solens, and tibialis anticus,  before it enters the bone. 
ANATOMY.
379
    2d. Many small branches as it passes downwards.
    3d. Plantaris externa, which runs along the inner edge
  of the sole of the foot, and sends off four branches about the
  foot.
    4th. Plantaris externa, which forms an arch and inoscu-
  lates with the anterior tibial artery, and gives off the digital
  branches to  the toes.

                PULMONARY ARTERY.
    The pulmonary artery  arises from  the  right ventricle of   >
  the heart, and conveys the blood into the lungs, that is return-
  ed to the heart by the veins ;  not  for their nutrition,  but to
  receive from the air in the lungs a certain principle, necessary
  for the continuance of life, and which the arterial blood dis-
  tributes to every part of the body. It soon divides into a right
  and left, the  right going to the right lung and die left to the
  left lung, where they divide into  innumerable ramifications,
  and form a beautiful net work or plexus of vessels, upon the
  air vesicles, and then terminate in the pulmonary veins.

        THE ACTION  OF THE ARTERIES.
    The arteries, by the impulse of the blood from the ventrirlcs
 of the heart, are dilated and irritated, and by means of their
 muscular coat contract upon the blood, and thus propel it to
 the glands, muscles, bones, membranes, and every part of the
 body for  their nutrition and the various secretions, and then
 into the veins.  This dilatation and contraction is called the
 indse, which  is perceptible in the trunks and branches of the
 arteries, but not in the capillary vessels, except when inflam-
 mation is going  on.

                   OF THE  VEINS.
   Veins  are membraneous canals which do  not pulsate; thev
 gradually become larger as they advance towards the heart, in
 which they terminate, and bring back the blood from the ar-
 teries.  Origin, from the extremities of the  arteries by anos-
 tomosis.   Termincdion of all the veins is into the auricles of
 the heart.   Division,  into trunks, branches, ramuli,  &c.
 Situation, they run by  the sides of arteries,  but more super-
ficially.   Composed  like arteries  of three  membranes, but
which are semi-transparent and more delicate.   Valves are
24* 
380
ANATOMY.
thin semi-lunar membranous folds, which prevent the return
of the blood in the vein.
   The blood is returned from every part of the body into the
right auricle; the vena  cava superior receives  it from the
head, neck, thorax, and superior extremities ;  the vena cava
inferior from the abdomen and inferior extremities;  and the
coronary vein receives it from the  coronary  arteries of the
heart.

          THE VENA CAVA  SUPERIOR.
  This vein terminates in the superior part of the right au-
ricle, into which it evacuates the blood, from
  The right and left subclavian veins ancl the venaazygos.
  The right and left subclavian veins receive the  blood from
the head and upper extremities, in the following manner, viz:
  The veins of the fingers, called digitals, receive their blood
from the digital arteries, and empty  it into,
   1st.  The cephalic of the thumb,  which runs on the back
of the hand along the thumb, and evacuates itself into the exr
ternal radial.
  2d. The salvatella, which runs along  the  little  finger,
unites with the  former, and empties  its blood into the internal
and external cubital  veins.   At the bend of the fore-arm are
three veins called (he great cephalic, the basilic, and the me-
dian.
   The great cephalic runs along  the superior part of the
fore-arm, and receives the blood from the external radial.
  The Basilic ascends on'the under side,  and receives the
blood from the extenal and internal cubital veins, and some
branches which  accompany the brachial artery, called vence
sateUitum.
   The median is situated in the middle of the fore-arm, and
arises from the union of several branches.   These  three veins
all unite above  the bend of the arm, and form
   The brachial vein, which receives all their blood, and  is
continued into the axilla, where it is called
   The axillary vein.  This receives also the blood from the
scapula, and superior and;inferior parts of  the chest,  by the
superior and inferior thoracic vein, the vena musculariSy
and the scapularis.
   The axillary  vein that passes under the clavicle, where it 
ANATOMY.
381
is called the subclavian which unites with the external and
internal jugular veins, and the vertebral vein which brings the
blood from the vertebral sinuses;  it receives also the blood
from the mediastinal, perricardiac, diaphragmatic, thymic, in-
ternal mammary and laryngeal vein, and then unites with its
fellow, to form the vena superior, or, as it is sometimes call-
ed, vena cava descendens.
   The blood from the external ancl internal parts of the head
and face is returned in the following manner into the external
and internal jugulars, which terminate  in the subclavians :
   The frontal angular, temporal auricular, subtingal, and
occipital veins receive the blood from the parts after which
they are named;  these all converge to each side of the neck,
and form a trunk, called the external jugular vein.
   The blood from the brain cerebellum, medulla oblongata,
and membranes  of these  parts,  is received into the  lateral
sinuses, or vein of the dura mater, one of which empties  its
blood through the foramen lacerum into the internal jugular,
which descends in the neck  by  the carotid arteries, receives
the blood from the thyroideal and  internal maxillary veins,
ancl empties itself into the subclavians within the thorax.
   The vena azygos receives the*blood from the bronchial, su-
perior esophageal, vertebral and intercostal veins, and empties
it into the superior cava.

              VENA  CAVA  INFERIOR.
   The vena cava inferior is the trunk of all the  abdominal
veins ancl those of the lower extremities, from which parts the
blood is returned in the following manner :
   The veins of the toes, called the digital veins, receive the
blood from the digital arteries,  and form on the back of the
foot three branches, one on the  great toe called the cephalic,
another which runs  along the little  toe, called to the vena
saphena, and one on the back of the foot, vena dorsalis peda;
and on the sole of the foot they  evacuate themselves into the
plantar veins.
  The  three veins on the upper part  of  the foot coming to-
gether above the  ankle,  form the anterior tibial;  ancl the
plantar veins, with a branch from the calf of the leg, form the
posterior tibial; a branch also descends in the direction of the
fibula, called the peroneal vein. These three branches  unite
before the ham, into one branch, the subpopliteal vein, which 
 3S2                    ANATOMY.

 ascend through the ham, carrying all  the  blood  from the
 foot:  it then proceeds upon the anterior part of the  thigh,
 where it is termed thecruralor femoral vein, receives several
 muscular branches, and passes under Pauport's ligament into
 the cavity of the pelvis, where it is  called the external iliac*
   The arteries which are distributed about the pelvis evacu-
 ate  their blood into the external hemorrhoidal veins, the
 hypogastric veins, the internal pudendal,  the  vena magna,
 and obturatory veins, all of which unite in the pelvis and form
 the internal iliac vein.
   The external iliac vein receives the  blood from the exter-
 nal pudendal veins, and then unites with the internal iliac at
 the last vertebra of the loins, and forms the vena cava infe-
 rior, or ascendens,  which ascends on the right side of the spine,
 receiving the blood from the sacral lumbar,  right spermatic
 veins,  and the vena cava hepatica; and having arrived  at the
 diaphragm,  it passes through  the right foramen, and enters
 the right auricle of the heart, into which it evacuates all tlie
 blood from the abdominal viscera and lower extremities.

             VENA CAVA  HEPATICA.
   This vein ramifieB into the substance of  the  liver, ancl
 brings the blood into the vena cava inferior from the branches
 of the vena portee,  a great vein which carries the blood from
 the abdominal viscera into the substance of the liver.   The
 trunk of  this vein is divided into the hepatic and abdominal
 portions.   The abdominal portion  is  composed  of splenic
 mesentaric  and  internal  hemorrhoidal veins.  These  three
 venous branches carry all the blood from the stomach, spleen,
 panecreas, omentum, mesentery, gall-bladder,  and the small
 and large intestines, into the sinus of the vena portae.   The
 hepatic portion of the vena portae enters the substance of the
 liver, divides into  innumerable ramifications, which secrete
the bile, and the superfluous blood passes into corresponding
 branches  of the vena cava hepatica.

        OF THE ACTION  OF  THE VEINS.
   Veins do not pulsate; the blood which they receive from
the arteries flows through them very slowly, and is conveyed
to  the right  auricle of the heart, by the' contractility of their
 coats, the pressure of the blood from the arteries, called vw
a tergo, the contraction of the muscles, and respiration ; arid 
ANATOMY.
383
 *t is prevented from going backwards in the vein by the valves,
 ■f which there are a great number.

               OF THE ABSORBENTS
   Absorbents are very thin and pellucid vessels, which
 bring the lymph from every part of the body, the chyle from
 the intestines,  and substances applied to the surface of the
 body, and empty the whole into  the thoracic duct.   These
 absorbents are divided into lacteals and lymphatics.   In the
 intestines and mesentery, they are called Iecteals ; in every
 other part, lymphatics.   They have a branching shape, be-
 coming broader as they proceed towards their termination,
 with  numerous valves, giving them a knotted  appearance ;
 they originate from the external surface, cellular membrane,
 viscera, fyc, and  terminate in the  thoracic  duct, or subcla-
 vian veins—and are supposed to exist  in every part of the
 body.
   The lymphatic  glands  are situated every where in  the
 course of the  lymphatics, the substance of which consists of
 pellucid, strong tunics.

          PHYSIOLOGY OF ABSORPTION.
   Absorption is  the taking up of substances which are  ap-
 plied the mouths of absorbing vessels ;  thus, the chyle is ab-
 sorbed from the intestines by the  lacteals, the vapor of cells
 or cavities is absorbed by the lymphatics of those parts ;  and
 thus mercury and other substances are taken  into the system,
 when rubbed on the skin.
  The principle by  which this absorption takes place  is a
 power inherent in the mouths of absorbing vessels, dependent
 on the high degree of irritability of their internal membrane
 by which the vessels contract  and propel the fluid forwards.
 Hence the use  of  this function appears to be of the utmost
 importance, viz :  to supply the blood with chyle ; to remove
 the  superfluous vapors of circumscribed cavities ; (otherwise
dropsies would  constantly be taking place ;)  to remove the
hard and soft parts  of the body; and to convey the into system
medicines which are applied to the surface of the body.
  The lacteals, or  vena lactea,are a vast number of fine pel-
lucid tubes, beginning at the  small guts,  and thence passing
through the mesentery and mesenteric glands, they enter the
receptaculum chyli.   These  vessels take up, and carry the 
384
ANATOMY.
 chyle from the food to the following vessels, which carry it
 on to be converted into blood :
   The receptaculum chyli, is a membranous bag two thirds
 of an inch long, and one third of an inch over, situated on the
 first vertebra of the loins.  Its  superior part becomes gradu-
 ally smaller,  and is contracted into a slender pipe of  about a
 line diameter, called;
   Ductus thoracicus, or Thoracic duct, which is  derived
 from the vessels before named, and they from all those of the
 lower extremities, the lower part of the  trunk  of the body,
 the intestines, and other viscera of the abdomen and pelvis.
 It lies at first behind the aorta, but it soon  inclines to the right
 of it, in the tharox and is in front  of  the spine between the
 aorta and the vena azygos until it reaches the third or fourth
 dorsal vertebra.   It then inclines to the left, until it emerges
 from the thorax ancl has arisen above the left plura, it then
 continues to ascend nearly as high as the sixth cervcal verte-
 bra,  it then turns downward about  three  fourths of an inch,
 and terminates in the back  part of  the angle, formed by the
 union of the  left internal jugular  with the  left subclavian
 vein.  Some times  it divides and unites  again, or enters at
 two places near each other.  It  is furnished with two valves
that effectually prevents the blood from passing from the vena
 cava into it.   This receives the  fluid of the absorbents which
 iticarries to the vessels containing red blood, to  be converted
 into it, and to be appropriated to the nourishment of the body.

                 SANGUIFICATION.
   Is nothing more than  the mixing of  the chyle with the
blood, by the action of the blood vessels ; for  as it passes
from the subclavian vein, it changes its  color,  ancl when it
has reached the heart, cannot be distinguished from the mass
of circulating blood.

 OF  THE PARTS CONTAINED WITHIN THE  AE-
                DOMEN,  OR BELLY.
   Peritoneum, is a membrane that lines  the whole cavity of
 (he abdomen, being reflected over the liver, spleen, omentum,
 stomach, guts, and mesentery, and all their vessels and glands.
   Omentum, or cawl,  is a fine membrane  larcjed with fat,
 like net-work ;  it is situated on the surface  of the small in-
 testines. 
J 
< 
ANATOMY.
385
DUCTUS ALIMENTALIS, OR ALIMENTARY CA-
                         NAL.

  Rsophagus, or gullet, is the beginning of the alimentary
canal.   Its upper part is wide, spread out behind the tongue
to receive the  masticated food.  Its inner coat is smooth, be-
set with many glands which secrete  a mucilaginous matter,
to defend this  membrane and render the  descent of the  ali-
ment easy.
  Stomach, or ventricylus, is situated under the left side of
the diophragm, its left side touching the spleen, and its right
is covered, by the thin edge of the liver.  It has two orifices,
both on its tipper part;  the left through which  the aliment
passes into the stomach,  named  cardia; the right through
which it passes into the intestines, and is named pylorus, this
has a circular  valve which hinders a return  of  the aliment.
The use of the stomach is to receive  and digest the food.
  The intestinal canal is the duodenum, which begins at the
pyloris of the  stomach, and receives  the following names as
it differs in  size, appearance, situation, &c. jejunum, ileum,
colon, caecum, and rectum which  is the last part of the intes-
tinal  canal.   The stomach ancl intestines have  three coats,
an external membranous, a middle muscular, and inner mem-
branous which is beset with glands,  that separate  a mucous
similar to that of the oesopbigus.
   The mesentary is a membrane  beginning loosely upon the
loins,  and immediately  covers all the intestines.
   The liver, is the largest gland in the body ; of a dusky red
color;  situated  under  the diaphragm in the right side, its
outer side is convex, its inner side concave, backward toward
the ribs it is thick, and  thin on its fore part where it covers
the stomach and some of the intestines.   The upper side ad-
heres to the diaphragm, and is tied to it and the sternum by
a thin ligament called suspensorum,  it is also tied to the na-
val by a round ligament called teres, which is the umbilical
vein of the child, degenerated into a ligament; for the vessels,
see blood vessels.
   The gall bladder, is seated in the hollow side of the liver,
its use is to secrete and contain the bile.
   Pancreas,  or sweet-bread, is a large gland across the up-
 per and back part of the abdomen.  It secretes a juice which
 it empties through its duct; with the bile duct, into the duo-
denum, and helps to complete digestion. 
386
ANATOMY.
   The spleen, or melt,  is in the left hypochondrium (side)
immediately below the diaphragm ;  use, unknown.
   Diaphragm, or midriff, arises from three lumbal vertebra,
and one of the thorax on the right side, and on the  left, from
the superior vertebra of  the loins, and inferior of the thorax,
and is inserted into  the  lower part of the  sturnum and  the
five inferior ribs.   The middle is a flat tendon from whence
the fleshy fibres begin, and radiate towards the circumference.
When it acts alone it constricts the thorax, and pulls the ribs
downward, when it acts with the abdominal muscles it draws
the ribs nearer together; use, to separate the thorax from the
abdomen, and assist in breathing and in expelling the con-
tents of the bowels. 
 
Missing Pages
   387-388 
ANATOMY.
389
           DESCRIPTION  OF  PLATE  IV.

Pig.  1. The larynx.
     2. Internal jugular vein.
     3. Subclavian vein.
     4. Cava^'descendens.
     5. Right auricle of the heart.
     6. Right ventricle.
     7. Part of the left ventricle.
     8. Aorta ascendens.
     9. Pulmonary artery.
   10. The right lobe of the lungs, part of which is cut off
         to show the great blood vessel.
   11. Left lobe of the lungs.
   12. Diaphragm.
   13. Liver.
   14. Ligamentum rotundum, that suspends the liver from
         the navel.
     15. Gallbladder.
   16. Stomach, pressed by the liver towards the left  side.
   17. Small intestines.
   18. Spleen, or melt. 
390                    ANATOMY.
                    OF THE  EYE.

   The cavity,  (orbit) in which the eye is contained is, in
all the vacant places, filled with a loose fat, for the conven-
ience of its motions.   To keep the external part of the eve
ball, ancl internal part of the eyelids, flexible and moist,  the
eyelids are furnished with little  glandsj called the glands of
meibomius, which secrete the sebaceous matter that prevents
tlie eyelids from adhering, in consequence  of their contact
during sleep.   And the lachrymal fluid is constantly secreted
by tlie lachrymal gland, which keeps the eyeball moist, and
serves to wash away any extraneous  matter that may lodge
in the eye.
   This gland is situated in a depression, in the upper surface
of the orbit near the external margin,  it is of an irregular
oblong form, and rather flat.   From the anterior edge,  the
excretory ducts, to the  number of six or seven, pass off.—
The fluid secreted  by this gland (the tears) is transparent,
but salt to the taste.   The tears are carried from the eye bv
two small canals which commence, one on each eyelid,  dp.
posite to each other, and run within the edge of each eyelid
to the lachrymal sac, which is a large membranous canal sit-
uated in the inner corner, or canthus of the eye, next  the
nose, which sac soon contracts itself,  and is then called tho
lachrymal duct.  This duct passes immediately into the nose
by which the superfluous moisture of the  eye is discharged
into the nostrils.   The membrane that lines the inside of the
eyelids is called tunica conjunctiva.   It is thin, extremely
flexible, and sensible, and also transparent; and is reflected
over the whole anterior surface of the eye.  Its vessels do
not carry red blood in a natural state, but receive it largely
when inflamed or relaxed.   That part immediately connect-
ed with the cornea is extremely thin and delicate.

           OF  THE  BALL OF  THE EYE.

   The  tunica sclerotica, or external coat of the ball of the
eye, is composed of opaque white fibres, which forms a very
strong membrane, that  supports the  globular figure of trie
eye.   This membrane  covers so much of the anterior part of
die eye as is called the white of the eye.  Posteriorly it is con-
nected with the optic  nerve,  which enters it a little to the
axis, of the centre that  passes through the cornea, and pupil.
   The sclerotica, in a  natural state has but a few  if  any 
ANATOMY.
391
 vessels that carry red blood.  The vessels that are  seen in
 opthalmia, are in the  conjunctiva.
   The Cornea, (so called from its resemblance to horn,) is.
 tlie  transparent membrane, that begins at the edge of the scle-
 rotica, ancl covers the centre and anterior part of the ball of
 the  eye.   This is covered  by the tunica conjunctiva, which
 adheres firmly to it and can only be  separated by maceration.
 The cornea is lined internally by a  fine membrane, which is
 the  capsule of the aqueous  humor.  Its vessels do not admit
 red  blood.  It is very convex;  but this convexity  is very
 different  in different  persons.   Those in  whom it  is very
 great, are necessarily  short-sighted.
   The choroid  coat, lines the sclerotica,  it  being  a thin,
 iiexible. vascular membrane, in contact with it nearly through-
 out  its whole extent.    It is  so delicate, and full of  vessels,
 that it is considered by some anatomists, as composed  entireh-
 of vessels and nerves.  It  has three sets of arteries, which
 are  derived from the opthalmic branch of the internal caroted
 artery. ^ Its veins and nerves are also very numerous.
   The internal surface of the choroid coat is  covered with a
 ulaek paste, denominated pigmentum nigriim.   It is said that
 the color  of this pigment, has. never been changed by the or-
 dinary chemical agents, or  by heat.  When  it is washed a-
 way, the choroides beneath appears to  be villous.   As this
 extends  round  the circumference  of  the cornea, it ferms
 a ring, which is between one and two  lines broad.*  This
 constitutes the ciliary ligament, and is'generally of a gray color.
   The Iris, is united  to the circular edge  of this ligament,
 and  extends  across a portion of the cavity of the eye and
 forms a septum.   This being circumscribed  by the  ciliary
 ligament, is of necessity circular.   It  is the membrane that
 is  seen through the transparent  cornea, and which gives the
 coior to the eye.   This  differs in different  persons as  their
 eyes  are, black,  blue, &c. &c.   Through  the centre of the
 iris is a round hole, or foramen,  which is called the  pupil,
which varies in size in the  healthy subject  according to the
degree of light to which  the eye is exposed ; in the dark, or
by dosing or covering the eye, the pupil will be much en-
 larged, but soon becomes small on being exposed to the light
again, this is called dilation and contraction.   The iris being
flat or plane, and passing directly across the  eye,, and the
A line is one twelfth of an inch. 
392
ANATOMY.
cornea being convex outward,  there must he a considerable
vacuity betwixt them.  This vacuity  is called the anterior
chamber of the eye.   The iris is covered with a black pig-
ment like the choroides, upon  its posterior  surface,  this rc
called uvea.
   The ciliary body and ciliary processes.  This projection
forms a ring, and has the ciliary ligament anterior to it, its
whole back surface appears to be formed into radiated plates,
tiiis surface, or plaited membrane is called the ciliary body ;
and the plaits are called ciliary processes.   They do not extend
to tlie centre of their circle;  but include a circular aperture,
larger than the pupil and situated a little wav behind it—
This aperture is occupied by the crystaline lens, but the lens
does not unite with the ciliary processes, but is in contact.
   The retina, this is situated within the choroides,  ancl in
contact with its internal surface,  and  is the third coat of th*
eye.   This coat is the extension, co-expansion, and final ter-
mination of the optic nerve, and the immediate sea' of sight.
The retina has the appearance of mucous, and the transpa-
rency of  glass, but by particular management, when  the
retina floats in water,  the  mucus may be removed, and th&
retina will remain,  a delicate,.soft, transparent, and vascular
membrane.  This extends from its origin, at the op: ic nerve,
10 the back part of the ball of the eye, to the commencement
of the ciliary process.  It lines  the choroide coat,  v.d is in
contact with the pigmentum nigrum.

         OF THE HUB10RS OF THE EYE.

   The humors of the eye are three, viz.  the aqueous, crys-
taline, and the vitreous, they are separately invested  with a
membranous capsule, which is delicate, and transparent.
   The vitreous humor, occupies almost  all the  cavities of
the eye which is back  of the iris, and is of a spherical form,
it has a depression in its forward surface,  in which the ba$k
surface of the lens is  received.   It is covered by the retina
as far as the retina extends.
   The peculiar consistence of this body,  which resembles
melted glass, (from which  it has its  name,) is owing to its
membrane, which is a spherical sac, divided by many parti-
tions  that form very small irregular cavities, in which the
fluid is contained.  This membranous sac  is perfectly trans-
parent, but its particular structure  is not  well understood. 
ANATOMY.
393
 This humor appears necessary to give the ball of the eve the
 requisite size, for the performance of its  optical functions ;
 to keep the retina properly distended, and to retain the crys-
 taline lens (sight) at the proper focal distance from the retina.
   The crystaline lens, is a solid body ; although considered
 as one of the humours of the eyes ;  it is of a softish consis-
 tence,  like gum half dissolved, and is more firm in the cen-
 tre than about the circumference.   It is perfectly transparent
 if sound, in young and middle aged persons, but is  yellowish
 in old age.   It is convex on both  surfaces,  the anterior sur-
 face is the least convex.  The posterior surface is most con-
 vex ; and both sides are most so in young persons.  It is invested
 with a transparent membrane, to which it probably does not
 adhere, as  it is easily pressed out in the operation of extract-
 ing the cataract.  The posterior surface of its membrane, ad-
 heres firmly to the membrane that incloses the vitreous hu-
 mor, and  on its anterior surface, it is also covered by the
 membrane  of  thi vitreous humor.   No blood vessels are  t<-
 be seen in any of the humors.
  The use of the crystaline lens is to concentrate the rays of
 light, so as to form a distinct image at the bottom of the eye.
  The Aqueous (watery) humor, occupies the space  that
 is between the crystaline lens and central extremities of the
 ciliary processes and the cornea.   This space is divided by
 the iris into two chambers, which  communicate with each
 other by means ofthepupiL  The  anterior  chamber  is all
 that space  which lies between  the cornea,  or transparent
 membrane  that covers the fore part of the ball;  and the iris,
 or that partition membrane that  gives color to the eye.   The
 posterior chamber is immediately back of the iris and is much
 smaller than the anterior chamber.
  The aqueous humor is quickly renewed after it has escap-
ed in consequence of wounds or operations.   This fluid pre-
 serves the convexity of the cornea, and admits the free  mo-
 tions of the iris.

                    OF THE  EAR.

  The inner  substance of the ear is cartilage, its use  is  to
collect sounds, and direct them into the meatus auditorius,
which is the passage that leads to the drum ;  this passage  is
lined with a glandular membrane, which secretes the ceru-
men or wax of the ear for the  purpose of  defending  itself 
394
ANATOMY.
from the outer  air,  and to entangle any insect  that might
otherwise get into the ear.
  At the farther end of the passage lies the membrane of tlie
drum, which is extended or stretched upon a bony ridge al-
most circular.   This membrane does not entirely close  the
passage, but has on  one side a small aperture, called fenestra
evalis,  covered with a valve.
  In the middle of  the tympanum, or drum, is  extended a
small bone called malleus,  whose other  end is articulated to
a bone called  incus, which, by the intervention of a  verv
small bone called orbiculare, is also articulated  to a fourth
bone called stapes.  From the cavity behind the tympanum.
which is called the barrel of the ear, goes the eustachian tube,
and  ends cartilaginous behind the  palale.  This  passa«e
seems to be exactly  of the same use with the hole in the side
of the common drum, that is, to  let the  air pass  in  and  out
from the barrel of the ear to make the membrane vibrate the
better,  and perhaps  in the ear, which is closer than a com-
mon drum, io let air in or out as it alters in density; and if
any fluid should be separated in the barrel of the ear, to give
it a passage out.  When sounds are too weak, the malleus h>
moved  inwards by the trochlearis muscle, by which the tym-
panum is extended or stretched in order  that it may be more
affected by the sound.   When sounds are too strong, the mal-
leus is  moved  by the exterus tympani mussles so as  to relax
or contract the tympanum, in order that it may be less affec-
ted  by the sound, just as the pupil or sight of the eye is  con-
tracted when we have too much light, and dilated or stretch-
ed when we have too little.   There is one muscle attached
to <he stapes which is called musculus  stapedis,  and serves
to pafl tlie stapes off of the fenrstra ovalis,  which orherwist
it covers.   Besides  the. fenestra ovalis, there is another small
hole near it called rotunda,  and both of them lead to a cavity
called vestibulum, which leads into other cavities and canals,
forming the labyrinth, in  which  are spread the  auditory
nerves, to receive and convey the impulse of sounds to the
common, sensorium, the brain.

         RESPIRATION, OR  BREATHING.

  R-Bs-PfRATioN is the inspiration, or ingress, of the air into
the lungs, ancl the. expiration, or egress  of the air from the
lungs; 
ANATOMY.                    395
  The exciting cause of inspiration is the air rushing into the
lungs and irritating its nerves,  which irritation is communi-
cated to the diaphragm and intercostal muscles, and compels
them to contract.  The contraction of the intercostal muscles
and diaphragm,  and  the pressure of  the elastic air, therefore
dilate the chest.  The air being deprived of its stimulus, the
intercostal muscles and diaphragm become relaxed, the car-
tilages of the ribs  and abdominal muscles,  before expanded,
return to  their former state, ancl thus the air is expeled from
the lungs.
   The small branches of the pulmonary artery form a beau-
tiful net ivork of vessels on the internal membrane of the air
vesicles.   During expiration, the air vessels are collapsed ;
consequently the blood vessels become tortuous, and (he blood
is prevented from passing.   In inspiration then, the air vesi-
cles  being dilated, the tortuous vessels are elongated, and a
free  passage afforded to the blood ; the  very delicate coats of
these vessels are also rendered so thin as to suffer a chemical
action to take place between the air in the vesicles, and the
blood in the vessels.  This constitutes the primary use of
respiration; viz. the blood  absorbing  the oxygen  gas  from
the air, by which it  is generally believed that animal heat is
generated,  and  the nervous energy  increased  ; but this sub-
ject  is not yet determined.

                   OF  THE VOICE.

   The  voice is caused by the  sound of  the air  propelled
through  the glottis; so  that the organ of the  voice  is the
larynx and its muscles.  The shrillness and roughness of the
voice depends on the diameter of the glottis, its elasticy, mo-
bility, unci lubricity, ancl the force with which the air is ex-
pelled, thus when the diameter is increased, the voice is more
bass, and so the reverse.

                  VENTRILOQUISM.

   Consists in the motion of the uvula, epiglottis, and fauces,
by which  the sounds are modulated without  using the lips,
teeth or palate.   The mouth being nearly shut, and the voice
resounding between the larynx and cavity of the nose, the
sound is returned  as if made by some one at a distance.—
There is no other mystery about it, and any  person whose
                            25 
396
ANATOMY.
organs of speech are perfectly formed, and who will take the
trouble to practise, may become a ventriloquist.
   It is not supposed  that people in  general  are  to acquaint
 themselves with minute  anatomy,  for such  an  acquisiton,
 though deeply interesting, would perhaps be more laborious
 than useful.
   But it is supposed, that all persons of the least intelligence,
 if they had it in their power, would obtain  a knowledge of
 the general structure of the human body.
   With this in view, the preceding section  has  been writ-
 ten ;  and the author flatters himself that it will amply repay
 any one for the labor  of reading it.
   People have in  general been struck with  admiration, in
 presence of  a  person acquainted with anatomy  ;  there  is
 something so apparently mysterious in obtaining a knowledge
 of this branch of phylosophy.   Now permit me to say that
 their notions of  mystery are altogether misplaced, ancl that
 we are only to gaze with  admiration and wonder, on this
 amazing structure; in view of  that Poicer, which  has  so
 mysteriously formed the tabernacle that contains the immor-
 tal part of man.
   The day is fast passing away, in which pretensions to mys-
 tery mislead  community,  and knowledge  is confined  to the
 few.
   Where is the contemplative mind that would  not be de-
 lighted with a knowledge of the formation of bone, that would
not trace with delight the  formation and offices of the muscu-
lar and nervous systems ?   And, contemplate with pleasure
the functions of the lungs,  and other internal viscera !   And
the heart in its operations  as the source of circulation, ancl
the vascular system as completing this  wonderful  phenome-
 non, by which the body is constantly so  •• bed with a sufficient
quantity of nutriment  to repair any los- the system may have
sustained, and keep it in perfect  form ?   And  when  he has
traced this circle,  and views the  almoM   numerable parts,
 and their  perfect union with, and neve■>: r •  dependence on
 each other, we will not wonder if he exch.^s, " strange that
 a harp of thousand strings  should keep  t. /"•;/ so long."
   For here, in viewing the constituents  ••   h • animal body,
 «u ate led to  contemplate and admire  t!    ;\s;at  principles 
ANATOMY.
397
that move the system  from the minutest  embryo, by those
regular and unerring effects of nature, which operate  upon
all  living substances,  whether animal or vegetable.   The
perfect man being formed in miniature in the germ, and from
the earliest moment, the mysterious operations  commence,
immediately under the laws which regulate all the subsequent
animal evolutions, which  are governed in the human body
by that principal, which, though  under  different denomina-
tions ; by Hippocrates, physis (nature);  Aristottle, the movr
ing or generating principle ;  Boerhaave, impetum faciens ;
Van Helmont, archaea ;  others me visinsita ; vis vitea; vi-
tal  force, &c &c. is the same self existing  principle, more
generally denominated the soul   which steadily  advances
through its several grades,  until it unfolds in perfect and ra-
tional  existence, in not only involuntarily governing or con-
troling the moving principles of animal  formation, but be-
coming volition or will itself;  which thinks, matures judg-
ment, and acts, in all the future stages of increasing existence,
being inseparably united with the properties that move into
perceptible being the grand machine.
  It is now, that among those  who will exercise their own
judgments, no fabricated theory is essential to explain  the
general course of natural phenomena.
  From  first principles  reasoning,  we ascend  the rugged
steeps, and pursue the  devious windings of  nature, or trace
her mysterious rounds by which  she completes  a perfect
whole, bounded only in our researches by those events  which
must, during created time,  repose  alone in the bosom of the
great  first cause;  Nature's  Universal God. 
398
SURGERY.
   1 deem no apology necessary for presenting the first lines-
 'V the practice of surgery in this volume.
   Every person is iiable to be thrown into suffering by acci-
 dent of disease, under evtvry circumstance, and  in all situa-
 tions.
   It is well known that surgeons are not always present, nor
 easily obtained, and when present, it is not possible for them
 io do  every thing alone, that is frequently  necessary to be
 done.
   Important as it is that people should possess a knowledge
 of the art of surgery in order to render immediate  assistance
 io (hose who suffer ;  it is no less important, in order that the
 ridiculous notions and prejudices, that attend almost every
 nurse into the chamber of the sick; and direct every thing
 that is done, may be left out the door, or be entirely forgotten.
   With the knowledge that may be derived from this part of
 the work, in  a few  evenings reading,  any person mav be
 qualified to render effectual assistance  in cases of  accident,
where now they are idle spectators.
   In this work whoever takes the  pains to read, will learn,
 that blood is as  effectually staunched  by tying  a  handker-
 chief or cord loosely  round a limb, above  a wounded  and
 bleeding artery, and  twisting a stick into it, as it can be bv
tbe surgeon's tourniquet.
   And that instruments sufficient to perform  any operation,
 may be found in any tolerably well furnished house.
   And that all surgical  cases can  be described  in our own
language,  and the treatment laid down  in our own vernacu-
lar tongue ; and bones set, and operations performed by hands
that have not been dubbed  surgeon, and yet, strange  as it
may appear  to some  of the faculty, get well as soon  and as
effectually as if done under the hocas pocus, and technicality
 of their esculapian honors. 
surgery.                    899
       THE PRACTICE OF SURGERY.

                 OF  INFLAMMATION.
    Every part  of the body, except the cuticle,  hair, ancl
  nails, is liable to inflammation.  There are two species: 1st.
  phlegmon, or phlegmonous inflammation, which forms a cir-
  cumscribed swelling  or cake.   2d.  Erysipelas, or erysipe-
  latus inflammation, which affects the  small vessels on the
  surface of the body.

          Symptoms of phlegmonous inflammation.^
    When any part of  the  body becomes thus inflamed, the
  most general symptoms are pain, heat, redness and swelling,
  in the part affected.   The pain is  increased on  pressure ;
  and  if there be much inflammation, the blood becomes buffy,
  indicating a feverish state of the system.
    It always terminates either  in resolution,  effusion,  sup-
 puration, mortification, or schirrhus ;  it terminates in resoi-
  lution, when it ends  in health, and  no  other affection takes
  place ; it terminates in effusion, when any of the fluids of the
  body are effused  or thrown out of their natural vessels,  as w
 dropsy;  it terminates  in suppuration, when the part inflamed
 produces pus or matter ; it terminates in mortification, when
 the part becomes dead, and of  a livid or black color; it ter-
 minates in schirrhus, when the part becomes an indolent hard
 tumor or swelling,  without producing any matter, and end-
 ing sometimes in cancer.

                        Causes.
   Either too much  fullness and tension,  or too great debility
 and laxity of the  body, may predispose to inflammation; but
 a bad state of the  blood, poison, contagion, cold and local in-
juries, are most frequently  the exciting causes.   Sometimes
 it appears to  arise  spontaneously without any  perceptible
 cause.

                       Treatment.
  If the inflammation run high  and affect the system gener-
ally, small bleedings, cooling physic  of  epsom salts, or sul-
phur and cream of tartar, with diaphoretics, are proper;  and 
400
SURGERY.
in the commencement, in  order to subdue the inflammation
and discuss or drive away  the swelling, first apply leeches to
the part, and then linen cloths, kept constantly wet with a
solution of soft water ;  or of one scruple of  sugar of lead to
three gills of water and one of vinegar; or  of two  or  three
drachms of sal ammoniac to a pint of vinegar.   The effect of
these applications will  be  to abate the  inflammatory action,
and to stimulate the absorbent vessels to take up the extra-
vasated  fluid, and thus prevent  suppuration.  In some con-
stitutions,  however, inflammation  is best removed by warm
fomentation, such as a decoction of poppy heads, or of worm-
wood, tansy, &c.   No rule can be given to  determine this
matter,  as the greatest surgeons are frequently compelled to
change their  applications.   Use the  cold applications  first,
and if they do not seem to give relief, then try the warm.
But if none of these applications abate  the  swelling and in-
flammation, and the part seems determined to suppurate, then
apply warm emollient poultices of bread and milk, flaxseed,
or slippery elm, and renew them before  they get cold or  dry ;
these will  promote the  formation of matter, or suppuration,
nnd the  sooner it is done the sooner will the inflammation be
at an end.    The boil, tumor, abscess, or swelling, may  then
be opened  with a  knife or lancet.

        Symptoms of erysipelatus inflammation.
   'The   swelling  is  diffused,  not very  prominent,  and of  a
bright scarlet color, tinged with yellow.  Erysipelas is apt
to >.vrcad rapidly  on the body and to a great extent;  when
p:< seed  with the finger the color  leaves the skin, but  soon
returns.   The pain  is of a burning or itching kind.   Some-
times this  disease changes  its seat by leaving one part  and
attacking  another.  It may terminate  either  in resolution,
suppuration, or mortification.   When it terminates in res-
olution  the disease gradually abates, and the skin peels off in
branny  scales.  Suppuration is to be dreaded, and mortifica-
tion still more.  For the causes and treatment of erysipelas,
see page 72.

                   SUPPURATION.
   When  suppuration  proceeds too slowly,  it may be hast-
ened by hot fomentations  to the  part,  and  by taking  bark,
wine, and nourishing food. 
SURGERY.                    401
    The modern doctrine of suppuration  is, that the pus is se-
 creted'and separated from the blood in the same way as or-
 dinary secretions take place, by the operation of the arteries.
 The change is gradual, and hence, pus and coagulating lymph
 are often found blended together in the same abscess.   True
 pus is of the consistence and color of cream without smell or
 taste, and will commonly  sink in water,  but does not unite
 with it unless the water be heated.
    The sudden abatement of inflammation, with chills, sense
 of weight, and stinging pain in the part,  or a pointing out of
 the swelling, and soft  fluctuation in the centre, are proofs
 that suppuration has taken place.
    If hardness  remain after opening,  a poultice may be appli-
 ed, lint being first placed in the orifice to prevent the  growth
 of proud flesh ; and as  soon as the cake disappears the poul-
 tice should be discontinued, and the abscess treated as a com-
 mon ulcer.

                   MORTIFICATION.
    If any inflamed part have sufficient power to undergo the
 excitement, the inflammation generally ends in resolution or
 suppuration.   But when the vehemence of the inflammation
 is altogether disproportioned to the vital power of the  inflam-
 ed part, so that the vessels can no longer act at all, mortifi-
 cation necessarily takes place.

                Symptoms of mortification.
   First, there is a sudden diminution of the pain and fever ;
 secondly, a livid discoloration of the part,  which from being
 yellowish, becomes of a greenish hue; thirdly, a detachment
 of the cuticle (outer skin) under which a turbid fluid is ef-
 fused ; fourthly, the swelling, tension, and hardness subside,
 and, on touching the part, a crepitus (crackling) is percepti-
 ble, owing to the generation of air in the  cellular substance.
 While the disease is in this  stage  it is  termed gangrene.
 When the part has become quite black and  fibrous, and des-
 titute of motion, sensation,  and natural heat, the  disease is
 then denominated sphacelus.
  An unpleasant hiccough generally attends the occurrence
of gangrene  and sphacelus.   The blood coagulates  in the
large vessels leading to the mortified part, for some distance
above it, and this is the reason why  the separation of  a mor- 
402
SURGERY.
tiffed limb is seldom followed by  hemorrhage.  When any
part of the body mortifies, the constitution suffers an immedi-
ate dejection;  the countenance suddenly assumes a wild ca-
daverous look; the pulse becomes small, rapid, ancl irregular ;
with cold perspirations, diarrhea, sometimes even delirium.
   But mortification may often take place without  any pre-
ceding inflammation;  it is then occasioned either by an in-
terruption of the  circulation, long continued pressure,  long
continued cold, violent bruises, debility, &c, and sometimes
it takes place in the fingers and toes  from causes which are
not understood.
   When mortification does not produce death, the mortified
portion is surrounded  by a white line,  about which  pus is
formed, the dead part-loosens, sloughs out, and leaves a  sup-
purating ulcer.  But otherwise, the mortification rapidly ex-
tends, and death soon  follows.

               Treatment of mortification.
   As the disposition to mortification  often extends some dis-
tance from  the part already dead, a mortified  limb should
never be cut off until a stop is put to the expansion  of the
disorder, and a Inie of separation is  seen between  the dead
and  living parts.   In  the  living parts  there  is still  a high
degree of inflammation, ancl consequently the same applica-
tions and treatment  are proper for discussing tlie inflammation
now, as in any other  inflammatory sta«e;  but  the  feelings
and  comfort of the patient must determine whether those ap-
plications shall be warm or cold.   A drachm of nitric  acid
to a pint of water may be used for a  wash.   Or  a strong de-
coction of oak bark may  be used  in the same way.   Or a
poultice of yeast and bran, or of bread and milk ancl powder-
ed charcoal, is an excellent application.
   When the inflammation around the dead parts has abated,
and symptoms of debility show themselves,  the liberal use of
bark, wine,  fermented liquors, a nourishing diet, opium, and
cordials must  be  adopted.  If delirium should  occur,  give
camphor, opium, musk, or valerian, and apply a  blister to
the head.  For  the diarrhea, opium and chalk  are the best
medicines.
   When mortification happens from an  external local injury
in a sound constitution; when it  no longer spreads and the
living margin appears red, the use of the tonics, such as bark,
wine, &c,  is unnecessary and improper.  In the mortifka- 
SURGERY.
403
lion of the fingers, toes and feet, opium internally is the prin-
cipal remedy, and the external applications should  be emol-
lient and soothing.
   When a limb is so badly broken and torn to pieces, that
mortification will  certainly follow, it should be amputated
immediately in order to prevent it.

                BOILS, OR TUMORS,
   Are circumscribed, hard7iand painful inflammatory swel-
lings, of a deep red color, not generally larger than a pigeon's
egg, and seldom attended with much general fever.  It is a
species of phlegmonous inflammation, and  the proper  treat-
ment is there described.
   When boils appear on any part of the body with only  a
slight degree of pain and inflammation, and there is no pre-
ceding indisposition, we may then disperse or  discuss the
inflammation according to the method laid down ; but when
they arise from preceding indisposition  or bad habits of body,
we may be sure that it is an effort of nature to get rid of some
noxious matter, ancl their suppuration should then be promo-
ted as soon  as possible.

                    CARBUNCLE.
   A carbuncle is a malignant kind of boil.   They  are some-'
times as large as  a plate, with  a number  of small openings
on the surface, which discharge a bloody irritating matter, of
a yellow or green appearance.  It is one of the symptoms of
the plague,  and other malignant fevers, and is often attended
with great danger.   The sympathetic fever occasioned by it,
is at first of the inflammatory kind, but soon degenerates into
a typhoid  nature.  The natural tendency of carbuncle  is to
end  in mortification ;  its  progress to that state is sometimes
rapid, and sometimes slow.

                       Treatment.
  A free  opening should be made in every carbuncle.   An
emollient  poultice should then be  applied, so (hat the matter
and slough may escape, and make  room for a healthy suppu-
ration.
  An emetic or cathartic should be given to clear the stomach
and bowels, and the system is then to be strengthened by the 
404
SURGERY.
 iv; of tonics, such as bark, wine, camphor, conha.s, ;xc. and
 a nourishing diet.   To relieve pain and  irritation, opium is
 proper ;  and after <I.>u~h.ing has taken place, and the carbun-
 cle has become an ulcer, then treat it accordi: _r to the direc-
 tions for  treating ulcers.

                    BLIND BOILS.
   These generally  appear about  the shoulder blacks, back
 of the neck, the elbosvs, wrists, and hands, and about the
joints of  the lower extremities; the appetite is poor, and the
 general health is declining.

                       Treatment.
   Take  a moderate dose of calomel every evening, and  if it
 does not  operate  by morning, take a dose of rhubarb.   Con-
 tinue this course  until  the evacuations become of a greenish
or dark  color.   Then  discontinue the physic,  and make a
 liberal use of bark and wine, with a nourishing diet.   This
 will bring those livid lumps to a suppuration, and prevent the
 formation of others; every symptom of disease will  disap-
 pear ;  the pale, wan countenance, will assume  a florid and
 healthy appearance, and cheerfulness take the place of languor
 and irresolution.

                       ULCERS.
   An ulcer is an open sore.  They generally appear as the
 termination or sequal of other diseases, as  external injuries,
 inflammation, suppuration, mortification, &c.
   When an ulcer is  recent, it should be healed  as quick as
 possible ; but when it has been of long standing, or has be-
 come  habitual, especially in an old person, a blister, seton, or
 issue, should be applied to some other part of the body while
 the ulcer is  healing,  and kept open for some  time, after the
 cure is effected, as a substitute for the drain of the old ulcer.
 This precaution should not be neglected.
  Ulcers may be divided, for practical purposes, into three
kinds : healthy ulcers, irritable ulcers, and indolent ulcers.

                HEALTHY  ULCERS.
  The term healthy is applied to  those  ulcers which have a
 tendency to heal,  in distinction from those whose tendency is 
SURGERY.                    405
 to degenerate, and so become worse and more difficult to cure.
 The  matter in healthy ulcers is white, thick, and does not
 stick  to  the  surface.   The granulations,  (growth  of new
 flesh,) are small,  red,  pointed at the top, and  rise no higher
 than the surrounding flesh ; a smooth film begins to form from
 the skin at. the edges, which spreads over the whole; this is.
 the new skin which is to complete the cure.

                       Treatment.
   All that is necessary is to keep the surrounding parts clean,
 to apply soft linen lint in order to absorb the matter, and  to
 cover  this dressing with a linen rag spread with simple cerate
 or any mild ointment; this prevents  evaporation from the
 surface of the sore, which  would otherwise cause the forma-
 tion of a scab, and change the favorable condition of the ulcer.
 The dressing should be renewed every day and the Ulcer
 thoroughly  cleansed  with warm water and  Castile  soap.
 Gentle and equal  pressure may also be made,  (unless after
 trial it should prove injurious,) by winding a bandage round
 the limb, which is beneficial in keeping the dressings to their
 place,  and in the support which it gives to the museles which
 are frequently loose and flabby from the  want of  natural ex-
 ercise.
   Irritable  and indolent ulcers must become healthy before
 they can  heal.

                IRRITABLE ULCERS.
   Irritable ulcers have an undermined, jagged edge, the
 bottom has unequal lumps and hollows, there is a thin gleety
 discharge, and the surface when touched is painful and bleeds.

                       Treatment.
   The steam of warm  water, and fomentations with a decoc-
 tion of poppy heads night and morning, are proper.  The ex-
 tract of elder, stramonium,  hen-bane, or hemlock, (cicuta)
 dissolved in warm water, is an  excellent application ; and so
 are emollient poultices of ground flaxseed, under the poultice
 lay a piece of lint  or cloth dipped in opium  water, made by
 dissolving one drachm of opium in three gills of water.  Car-
rots boiled and beat to a pulp may also be applied as a poul-
tice.    Bandaging must not be used.   As soon as it assumes 
406
SURGERY.
the appearance of a healthy ulcer, it must be treated accord-
ingly.

                INDOLENT ULCERS.
   The edges of this  kind of ulcer  are thick, prominent,
smooth, and rounded ; the bottom smooth and glossy, covered
with a thin, transparent, glairy white ;  or a  tough,  thick,
white, matter, which can hardly be rubbed off.  Sometimes
these ulcers turn livid, and frequently a sloughing takes place.

                       Treatment.
   Tonics should be given internally in order  to strengthen
the system.   The external treatment  has  been to touch the
sore with lunar caustic, or to apply a solution of the same, or
diluted nitrous acid, or the ointment of the nitrate of mercury.
Or to sprinkle on red precipitate, and over it to apply lint or
salve, with a tight bandage, and night ancl morning  to bathe
with a decoction of oak bark  or walnut leaves, or in  weak
lye.  These were the best means known, until Mr. Baynton's
new and successful method of healing indolent ulcers was
laid before the public, which is to apply strips of adhesive
piaster round the limb, so as to cover the sore and  at least
one inch of the parts  both above and  below it.  The  strips
should be two or three  inches  broad, and  long  enough to  go
round the limb and  leave an end of four  inches long.   The
middle of the strip is then to be applied to the sound part of
the limb immediately opposite  to the lower part of the  ulcer,
so that the lower edge of the strip, when brought round, may
come about an inch below the edge of the  sore ; the ends are
then to be drawn over the sore as tight  as the patient can well
bear.   As many strips  are to  be applied  in this manner as
will cover the whole surface of the ulcer, and one inch  of the
limb below and above it.   A  compress of soft  cloth may be
laid over the  part, and  the limb rolled in calico bandages.
The  dressings  are then to  be  kept moist with cold spring
water, which keeps off inflammation, and enables any one to
remove the strips ancl renew them withouthurting the  patient.
By adopting this method of cure, the scar is much less,  the
ulcer less likely to break out again,  ancl the patient may walk
about and attend to his business. 
9URGERY.
407
                BURNS AND  SCALDS.
   The old practice is to plunge the part into water, and af-
 terwards frequently to wet it with a liniment composed  of
 equal parts of lime water and olive oil, or with a solution of
 sugar of lead  in water.  Or emollient poultices may be used,
 and some kind of physic given in order to  lessen the inflam-
 mation.   If mortification threatens, the system is to be  sup-
 ported by tonics, and the same external applications are pro-
 per as those  which  are recommended in  the treatment  of
 mortification.
   According  to the new practice, the part  is to be immedi-
 ately bathed in camphorated spirits, rectified spirits of wine,
 or alcohol, then to apply plasters of yellow basilicon ointment
 moistened with oil of turpentine, and spread on linen cloth,
 to remain on twenty four hours, and then to be renewed with
 as little exposure to the air as  possible.   It is therefore re-
 commended to have  plasters ready spread before removing
 the old ones, and then only take  off one piece at a time.   As
 the inflammation diminishes,  the, exciting means are to  be
 diminished, and warm spirits or  laudanum may be substituted
 for alcohol, and the plasters moistened with camphorated oil
 instead of turpentine.
   The furrows between the sloughs and lining are to be filled
 with  powdered chalk, and the growth of proud flesh (fungus)
 is to be prevented by the same application. Pain and irritation
 are to be allayed, by giving opium  internally, and if the life
 of the part be  destroyed, an emollient poultice may be applied
 until it sloughs, then proceed as in mortification.
   Stramonium ointment, or an ointment made from  indigo
 weed is a good application for burns.

                   FROZEN  LIMBS.
   The only safe  way of thawing frozen limbs is to rub them
 in snow, or in water with ice in it, until feeling and' motion
 returns.  Then continue the friction by rubbing with brandy,
 camphorated spirits, or tincture of myrrh.  Let him then  be
put into a bed  in a warm room, giving mulled wine occasion-
ally, and there let him remain till a perspiration appears, and
a perfect recovery of sensibility takes place.
   The sudden exposure  of  a frozen limb to  heat, should be
caTefully avoided; it  occasions inflammation, mortification,
and a loss of the limb, if not of life.   If the whole body is 
 408                    SURGERY.

 frozen, treat it in the same way ;  and if signs of life appear,
 apply hartshorn  to the  nose  and blow into the lungs—but
 never use tobacco injections.
   If the patient has been  imprudently  exposed  to heat, still
 persevere in  the  treatment as above directed ; and if inflam-
 mation, mortification, or ulceration takes place, you will  find
 the proper treatment under those heads.

                    CHILBLAINS.
   Chilblains are red tumors which generally appear about
 the heels,  and are caused by the sudden exposure of  the part
 when cold, to the fire, or when hot to intense cold.
   They are attended with intolerable heat, itching, pain,  and
 soreness ;  and after a while  they  burst and  form  ulcers,
 which are slaw to h^al, ancl sometimes turn black and mor-
 tify.

                       Treatment.
   When they first appear, immerse the part three times a dav
 in ice cold water,  dry  them  well after each  immersion,
and cover with  socks.   If they inflame,  wash  them with a
 solution of sugar  of lead in water,  or with diluted muriatic
acid, camphorated spirit, alum-water, spirit of turpentine, or
 balsam copaira.   If they ulcerate, apply warm vinegar, lime
 water, or quick  ley;  touch  them  occasionally with lunar
caustic, or sprinkle on red precipitate, and apply simple oint-
 ment.

                       WARTS.
   Moisten them every day with aqua  ammonia, or tincture
of cantharides.   Or wet lunar caustic and rub on the wart.
 Or frequently wash them  in a strong decoction  of oak bark,
 continue it some time, and the cure is certain.

                       CORNS.
   Discontinue the use of tight shoes, and then  spread eight
 or ten pices of  linen with some kind of soft ointment,  lay
 them over each other on the toe, with a hole cut in the middle
 to fit the corn, so that there will be no pressure on it from the
shoe or stocking.   Wear this  a few weeks, and the corn will
disappear. 
SURGERY.                    409
*         Or make a plaster of two ounces each of beesWax and gum
       ammoniac, with six drathms of verdigris ;  apply to the corn,
       and after wearing it a fortnight, the plaster may be removed if
       necessary.   Corns may be cured by rubbing them with lunar
       caustic ;  or by  drawing a blister larger than the corn, by
       which the corn is raised up with the plaster.

                     SCIRRHUS  OR CANCER.
          An indolent, hard, unequal tumor, without any discolora-
       tion of the skin, is called a scirrhus; but when itching is per-
       ceived, with a pricking or  shooting pain in the part, and a
       puckering or corrugation of the skin which changes to a leaden
       color, and adheres to the parts beneath, it.is termed a cancer.
          Before a cancer has arrived to  a very large size,  it gene-
       rally ulcerates, throwing out sloughs, and a mixture of mat-
       ter ;  leaving a large chasm, the bottom of which is uneven'
       and ragged ; the edges thick, bard, jagged and painful.  Some-
       times  it spreads  rapidly, with  alarming  bleedings, and great
       debility.  At other times it seems  to be  healing  for a while,
       but the new flesh shoots out fungus and bleeding lumps, which
       cannot be controlled.  At length other parts,  become affect-
       ed ; cough,  and difficulty of breathing come on, anddeath puts
       a  welcome end to the sufferings of the patient.

                             Treatment.
         An  operation with the knife is the most effectual  remedy—
       but even then,  it will sometimes  return, in consequence of a
       constitutional tendency, or from the whole not having been re-
       moved :  but on the  whole, the balance of evidence is in favor
       of its being successful, if performed early, and to  a proper ex-
       tent.   It is advisable in the operation, 1st.  To make the ex-
       ternal  wound sufficiently large, and in the  direction  of the
       muscles beneath.   2d. To save enough healthy skin to cover
       it.   3d. To tie every blood vessel  from which subsequent
       bleeding might be apprehended.   4th. To bring and keep the
      edges of the wound in contact with each other without having
      any dressing between.   5th.  Not  to meddle with the parts
       too soon, but to keep them in an easy and steady position for
      some days before  they are examined. Gth. To use  only mild
      and cooling applications during the cure.
         If the patient however will not consent to an operation, or
      from any  other circumstance it should be deemed  unadvisa- 
410
SURGERY.
 ble, topical application* and  internal remedies may then be
 tried.   Constant pressure on  the part, and an equal tempera-
 ture by means of a piece of rabbit's  skin with the fur inside,
 has been recommended.  The application of the-fresh bruised
 leaves of poison hemlock,  (cicuta,)  or of scraped young car-
 rots—fermenting poultice of yeast and oatmeal—finely pow-
 dered chalk, or charcoal—carbonic  acid gas confined round
 the part in a bladder—a watery solution of opium—liquid tar.
 or tar water, &c,  may be used  sometimes with advantage.
 The internal remedies which  have been  most beneficial are,
 arsenic in very small doses gradually increased ; night shade ;
 stramonium ; corrosive sublimate;  (these are all very pow-
 erful, and must be used in small doses ;) opium, and the mu-
 riate of iron.   The galium aparine ('goose grass, eleavers, or
 cleavers' bees,)  in decoction internally, and the herb applied
 as a poultice, has been said to cure cancers-.   But none  of
 these remedies can be depended on.

       GANGLION, OR WEEPING SINEW.
   It is a small hard tumor, composed of a little sac,  and con-
 taining a fluid resembling the  white of an egg.    It is usually
 moveable beneath the skin ; its growth is slow,  being seldom
 larger than a hazelnut.  It  has  generally a rounded sbapv,
 smooth and even ; seldom  inflames or suppurates, but when
 it does, it becomes an unhealthy ulcer.   They adhere bv a
 slender neck to a tendon, and are generally caused by sprains.
 or bruises.

                      Treatment.
  As good a method as any is to break them ;  draw the skin
 tight with the fingers of the left hand, then with (he palm of
 the right, strike it suddenly and  burst the sac.    The fluid is
 then absorbed, and a perfect cure follows.
  Binding a piece of lead on the ganglion with a bandage is a
good method of dispersing them.  Oil of origanum or harts-
 horn, may be rubbed on the part—or  cut them out.

  TARIX,  VARICOSE VEINS,  OR ENLARGED
                       VEINS.
  These are most apt to appear in the legs.    Slight affec-
 tions of this kind may be  cured by rolling a bandage neatly
from, the toes to the knee, so as to produce equat pressure; it 
SURGERY.
411
 should then be constantly kept moistened with cold water,
 snow, brandy or alum in vinegar.

       ANEURISM,  OR  ENLARGED  ARTERY.
    The first thing perceived is an unusual pulsating tumor,
 keoping time with tlie beat of the heart.   It is free from pain,
 the skin over it is of the natural color, disappears when pres-
 sure is made on it, but immediately reappears when the pres-
 sure is taken off.   As it continues to grow larger the pulsa-
 tion increases.
   Whenever an aneurism of a large artery bursts, and an instant
 compression of the artery between the aneurism and the heart
 is not made, instant death is the consequence.  In such cases,
 if a tourniquet should not be at hand, a handkerchief with a
 stick in  it may  be  instantly twisted  round the  limb till the
 blood slops.
    Aneurisms sometimes occur spontaneously from a diseased
 slate of the artery.  At other times  (hey are  occasioned by
 wounds, or by sudden and violent strains.

                        Treatment.
    internal aneei :sms are beyond the reach ol surgery. When
 situated externally, and the artery  is not  otherwise diseased,
 they may he cure;! by a constant compression of the tumor,
 or by taking up and tying the artery.  A soldier who had an
 aneurism of-the crural  artery  as large as a man's fist,  was
 cuu.I iu twelve months by (he constant application of ice to
 (he tumor.

        FLESHY  POLYPUS OF THE NOSE.
   ExrsA'jT;<)fN is the most effectual cure.  The operation is
 performed with polypus forceps, (he insides of wliich are'rough
 and perforate 1 by holes, in order more firmly to take  hold of
 the tumor.  In the first place, take hold of the fore part of the
 polypus with a pair of small common forceps, held in  the left
 hand, and very slowly and gradually draw forward the tumor
 so as to stretch it and render it narrower,  in order to make
 roam for  introducing the polypus forceps, with which the
 tumor is then to be grasped, as high up as possible;  twist it
 slowly round,  and at the same time  pull forward, until the
 polypus breaks.   If tlie part extracted is very narrow where
it has broken off, and the patient can breathe freelv through
                           26 
412
SURGERY.
the nose, it is  very likely that the polypus has given way at
the root:  but if it should not be all extracted, introduce the
forceps again, and take it out  by piecemeal.   If bleeding is
very profuse, inject ice cold water, or brandy into the nose—
or roll a piece  of lint round the end of a probe or wire, wet it
thoroughly with a strong solution of white vitriol, introduce it
into the nostril ancl press it  strongly against ihe part.
   It is the advice of some eminent surgeons that those which
are attended with pain in the forehead and root of the nose,
which have always been red, and continue of the same size,
which bleed spontaneously  from slight  causes, and are hard
to the touch, should  not be  meddled with—as a polypus of
that kind  is malignant, and the irritation attending  the ex-
traction of it is dangerous.

               ENCYSTED TUMORS.
   These  swellingsare composed of a cyst or bag which con-
tains  matter, and which  frequently grows to an astonishing
size.  When they first appear, discutient applications are pro-
per for the purpose of discussing the tumor, such as sal am-
moniac, &c.  If (bese should not be successful in removing it,
cutting it out is the only cure.
   To do it well, the flesh  must he separated  from the tumor
without wounding the cyst or bag ;  for if that happens the
contents will flow out, and  the cyst then  of course  will col-
lapse, which  renders the operation  more difficult.  Every
part of the cyst should be removed, otherwise the wound will
not heal in consequence of fungus granulations, or proud flesh,
arising from the diseased  part.
   After the operation, bring the edges of (he wound together
with straps of adhesive plaster, and put on a compress and
bandage.

              SARCOMATOUS TUMORS.
   These are  fleshy tumors, not contained in a perfect globu-
lar cyst, like that of the foregoing swellings.

                        reatment.
   Endeavor to stop the growth of the tumor by local bleed-
 ing witn leeches, &c, frequently repeated, and by the appli-
 cation of linen wet with sub-acetatof lead, (litharge and vine-
 gar boiled  together.)  If  the  enlargement of the  swelling 
SURGERY.                    413
 should be arrested, the next object would naturally be to pro-
 mote the absorption of it.  This is generally attempted by
 "using mercurial  frictions, blister,  nnd stimulating applica-
 tions ; but  these attempts frequency  fail,  because if you
 stimulate a tumor too much, it is apt to slough, and leave a
 bad sore : and if you do not stimulate so much, still  the irri-
 tation will sometimes renew the increased action, and the tu-
 mor then grows larger.
    For this reason, the removal of it with the knife is perhaps
 the best remedy after all, for  while it  is yet  small it may be
 taken out with perfect safety.  In (be  course of a few years,
 however, they sometimes become so large as lo weigh fifteen
 or twenty pounds,  and cutting them out then is a  dangerous
 operation.

                       RUPTURE.
   This is a protrusion of some of the intestines through the
 sides of the belly, and raising  the  skin and fat which is over
 it.  It is not in consequence of laceration or tearing;  it  is oc-
 casioned by  a relaxation of the  parts from straining.  The
 bowels are not kept in their  place  by a strong sac  or bag;
 for  the sides of the belly are made  by an overlapping  of
 the flat muscles which bend the body forward and sideways.
 In violent straining, the edges of the muscles which  overlap
 give  way from each other, and  the bowel escapes betweep
 them, carrying the lining of the belly along with it.

                       Treatment.
   Whenever it  can be done without violence, let it be re-
duced by the hand by gently pushing the gut back to its place;
then  put on a bandage to keep it there until a truss can be
had.   If a rupture cannot be reduced, it should be supported
by a bandage, and costiveness, irregularities, and all pressure
and bruises, are to be avoided.
   If heat, pain, or inflammation should come on, apply cloths
dipped in cold water, or snow, or in a solution of white vit-
riol, or sugar of lead in cold water; bleed if necessary, arA
give an injection.

         KING'S  EVIL, OR SCROPHULA.
   With respect to the local treatment of scrophulous  tumors
k is  only necessary to remark that  when  favorably situated
                          Z6* 
414
SURGERY.
they might be safely cut out like any other tumor.  But wher?
the patient is of ascrophuloushabit, inheriting thedisease from
his parent?, (which is most  generally the case,) the opera-
tion is not to be recommended;  for what advantage could
there be in removing one effect, while the cause that produced
it still remains in the system ?

                WHITE  SWELLING.
   This generally attacks the large joints, the knee, the ankle,
the elbow.  In the first stage of this affection, the appearance
of the skin is perfectly natural.   The pain is fell at one parti-
cular part of the joint, which although severe, does  not gen-
erally at first produce much enlargement.  The little hollows
>i  the joint are first affected by the swelling, which  soon he
comes stiff and crooked.
   In the next stage of the swelling, the joint has attained a
very enormous size, (he skin not much  altered, but smooth
and Shining, with a few red veins running over it.  Opening;;
then shortly make their appearance with discharges, which
sometimes deal, but soon break out again.  The health grows
poor, and  finally  hectic fever comes on.

                      Treatment.
   Keep up a continual discharge by the application of hi inters
first on one side and then on the  other.   Issues may be used,
but are not so  beneficial as blisters.  After the openings ap-
pear, it is generally necessary  to save life by taking off the
limb.

                    FEVER  SORE.
   Is the inflammation and ulceration of a bone.  In the first m
stage of the complaint, there is a dull, deep seated, aehing
pain, which* is  very distressing, and rapidly injures the general
health.   The part then begins to swell,  and  to form a hard
tumor, which  is  attended with inflammation, an increase of
heat, with redness, and great sensibility of the skin.   In this
stage, the treatment should be to  give opium<and apply blisters
and  fomentions to the part until the pain subsides,  and then
to use friction  with mercurial ointment.
   But if the disease goes on to  the second stage in which the
pain and inflammation continues severe  and  constant,  with
great constitutional irritation,  a  quick hard pulse and white 
SURGERY.
415
 tongue, the patient is then soon attacked with severe agues
 —an undulation of the tumor is perceptible ;  ulceration takes
 place, and a thin acrid matter is discharged.   The formation
 of matter is sometimes  slow, and sometimes rapid.   By ex-
 amination, a cavity will be found leading into the bone.

                       Treatment.
   If the treatment of the  first stage should fail, then lay the
 whole open by a free incision, and  after the operation, soap
 and water may first be injected into it, and afterwards, a weak
 solution of carrosive sublimate ; then by using a compress and
 bandage the  abscess will commonly heal.

              WHITLOW,  OR FELLON,
   Is a painful inflammatory affection at the end of the finger.
 There are four kinds,  distinguished by the  depth  at which
 they are situated in the finger.   The first is seated immedi-
 ately under the  outer skin, and called a run round.  The
 second is seated under the true skin, more painful than the
 first.  The third is  seated under the muscles.  The fourth
 is seated on the bone.

                       Treatment.
   Those of the first two species should be immersed in warm
 water or lye, or a soft fomentation applied, ancl repeated until
 it suppurates.  It may then be opened.
   Those  of the last two species should be laid open down  to
 the bone as soon as the second  or third day.   By neglecting
 this, the loss of the bone, or limb, will be endangered.  Lint,
 moistened  with laudanum, or spirit and water, may then be
 applied to it.

                       (EDEMA
   Is a pretertural  accumulation of a watery flnid in  the in-
 terstices of the cellular substance under the skin.   The skin
 of the  swollen  part retains its natural color,  though rather
 paler.   It feels cold, and  pressure on  the part occasions a
 pitting which remains  for  some time ; there is  uneasiness
 or a sense of weight and tightness ; when  then limb hangs
down the swelling is increased, and is decreased by an oppo-
site posture. 
416
SURGERY.
                         Causes.
   It may depend on constitutional or local debility ; contus-
 ions, sprains; long continued use of relaxing poultices and
 washes; previous inflammation of the part, &c.  It is also
 sometimes occasioned during pregnancy from  the pressure of
 the uterus on the iliwc  veins.   The proximate cause of oede-
 ma seems to be a debility or loss of tone of the  vessels, or a
 mechanical impediment (as in pregnancy)  preventing  the
 free return of the blood towards the heart.

                       Treatment.
   When occasioned by pregnancy, no cure can  be expected
 until nature effects it, by removing the cause.   When  occa-
 sioned by debility, the grand object is, to re-establish the tone
 of the vessels, ancl promoce the absorption of the extravasated
 fluid.   To accomplish this object, the limb  should be kept in
 a horizontal  position, and a rigid persevering  use of friction
 with a flesh brush, or  with  flannel fumigated  with aromatic
 vapours, should be pursued.   This will  have  a  tendency  to
 rouse the absorbents into action.  At the same time, purga-
 tives, diuretics and emetics, are to be used internally.
   If the swelling does not soften under this plan,  but becomes
 more tense and painful, mortification  must be prevented by
 making a small  puncture and  discharging the  fluid.  The
 punctures should be very small, and  carefully made, other-
 wise the irritation from  them will produce the effect intended
 (o be prevented.   Use no bandage now ; keep the part wet
 with sub-acetat of lead, or a solution of sugar of lead in water
 and  vinegar ; give cooling purgatives, salts, &c, and live on
 a spare  diet.   In cases not attended with inflammation elec-
tricity is useful.

        PHYMOSIS  AND  PARAPHYMOSIS.
   Phymosis is when  the fore skin cannot be drawn back-
 ward.
   Paraphymosis, is when the fore skin  is drawn  back, and
 cannot be drawn forward sgain.
   Paraphymosis is of almost an every day occurrence/occasion-
 ing alarm to the parents, unnecessarily if they but knew how
 little skill is requisite to set all to fights.
   I was called  to  a child, (at midnight,) not  long since, m
the above situation, I found the family in tears, the child con- 
SURGERY.
417
 vulsed, from the stricture of the fore  skin which  prevented
 entirely the passage of urine :  it was the fourth day after the
 occurrence.  I called for a bowl of cold water, ancl  bathed the
 part well in it, at the same time pressing the blood back by
 making gentle pressure  with the part between my thumb and
 finger.   In a few minutes I brought  the fore skin gradually
 forward, the little boy passed the urine,  went to sleep, and I
 went home.
   A few days  after this I saw the father of the cnild, and he
 informed  me that Dr.-------was immediately called, upon
 their discovering the difficulty with the child, and  he readily
 decided that it was broken and enquired of (he rest  of the chil-
 dren to know by what mischivous feat it had been done.  He
 finally prepared a large  poultice .and did it up, calling two or
 three times a day to direct new poultiees, over haul the dres-
 sings, interrogate the children, &c. &c.  He called the morn-
 ing after I had reduced it, and though by this his ignorance
 was informed, his obstinacy was excited and he declared  if
 they had continued the poultice until morning it would have
 got well of itself.   About the same time there was a  case in
 which one of my neighbors officiated, (for want of  a physi-
 cian) with complete success although  he had never heard of
 auch a thing before.  So you see doctors may make mistakes
 as well as other people.   If the case is natural, and does not
 amend as the child advances in life, he mu'st  be circumcised.

                       WOUNDS.
   By a wound is implied  a recent sudeen breach in the con-
 tinuity of the soft parts.
   Wounds are divided into the incised,punctured, contused
 and poisoned kinds.

   MEANS  OF STOPPING HEMORRHAGE,  OR
                     BLEEDING.
  The blood that flows from a wounded artery is  of a bright
 scarlat color, and gushes from the vessel per saltum  (un-
steady, by jerks.)   The blood from a vein  is of  a dark red
 purple color, and issues in an even stream.
  Pressure, to check the  effusion of  blood  from  an  artery,
must always be made on the side of the wound next the heart.
And as the blood of the veins runs in an opposite direction, 
418
SURGERY.
  pressure must be applied on that side of the wound in a vein,
  wliich is most remote from the heart.
    Pressure  is the most rational and e/Tectual means of stop-
  ping bleeding, and almost all the plans employed for this pur-
  pose, are  modifications of it.  The blood vessels have their
 own arteries, veins, and nerves, and are susceptible of inflam-
  mation, and  ulceration, &c, like  other parts.   And it is by
  the process of adhesive inflammation,  (the sides of the ves-
 sel growing  together,)  that a permanent check is put to he-
 morrage.  For this purpose the  sides of the artery must be
 kept in contact.
    The Tourniquet is  the instrument used by surgeons to
 compress a bleeding vessel;  but if you are present and a wound
 is  received in the  leg or arm, wliich  causes a profuse, un-
 steady flow of bright red blood,  do not wait for a  surgeon,
 but instantly tie a handkerchief, or some other bandage loosely
 around the limb above the wound, and put a stick into it and
 twist it until the blood ceases to flow, and keep it in this situ-
 ation until the bleeding vessel is tied.   If it be a vein that is
 wounded, the pressure must be made below or on the wound.
 Pressure on the wound  of an artery is seldom of any avail, it
 must therefore be made as above directed.
   The ligature is used to tie the mouth  of the bleeding ves-
 sels.   The tourniquet, &c, being  only used  as temporary
 means of suppression, until the ligature can be applied.
   Before the ligature becomes loose'the  sides of the vessels
 grow together.  This is the only sure plan for securing large
 arteries.   And this can be done when in performing an ope-
 ration a vessel is divided, and the blood stopped, after which
 the operator can procede with safety and  convenience.
   The arteries should be  tied quite  separately, without  any
 portion of the adjacent flesh.
   The method of tying is as follows :  the extremity of tbp
 vessel is first to be taken  hold of  with, forceps, hook, or a
 tenaculum, and then a cord  (ligature) of proper size is to be
 placed in a loose knot, just below whatever the vessel is held
 with, it must then be drawn tight, and tied securely.
   If the artery is large both ends must be tied, and in  such
cases, it may also be necessary to twist a bandage round the
limb on both  sides the wound.
  One end of the cord should  be cut  off,  and the other left
hanging from the wound for the purpose of withdrawing it.
Ligatures ip.rv generally be taken away in about a fortnight. 
                        SURGERY.                    419

   Compression ; simple compression, is the applying com*
 presses of lint, &c, tie  the bleeding wound  by means  of a
 bandage, so that the bleeding is mechanically stoped.
   This mode of compression, is applied to all  small vessels
 that bleed.
   Actual cautery, is the  application of a heated iron.   It
 operates by producing a srough which covers the mouth  of
 the artery.   It should never be used.
   Potential cautery, is caustic; that most commonly used is
 blue  vitriol roiled up in a piece of linen and bound upon the
 bleeding orifice, it operates similar to the hot iron, and if pos-
 sible, is much worse.
   Styptics are substances  which have the property  of con-
 tracting the vessels;  such are cold air, cold water, brandy,
 spirits in general, diluted mineral acids, solutions of alum,
 blue  vitriol, sugar of lead, &c.   These posses the power of
 stopping hemorrhages from very small vessels.

              PARTICULAR REMARKS.
   When the bleeding vessel is ossified (bony,)  or situated ir*
 a bony canal, a small dossil of lint, introduced into its orifice,
 will  stop  the blood.   When an  artery is -cut only  partlv
 through,  it bleeds more profusely than when quite divided,
 because  it cannot shrink under  the  surrounding substance,
 nor contract itself.
   When an artery is not cut entirely off a ligature must bo
 placed both above and below the orifice, and tied, and  then
 the artery must be divided.
   Extraction of foreign bodies from wounds,  is to remove
 all extraneous substances from  (he  wound before applying
 dressings.

       UNION  BY  THE  FIRST INTENTION.
   Wound3 are  healed by two processes, one in which put
 is produced, and another in which no suppuration takes place,
 the latter is termed,  union by  the first intention, or adhe-
 sive inflammation.
   This is always the desirable termination, because in this
there  is only these two  indications to be fulfilled, viz :  to
firing  the edges of the wound,  into  reciprocal  contract and
keep them so, and the other is to avert immoderate inflamma- 
420
SURGERY.
lion.   The part must be so placed and confined as to relax
the wounded integuments.
   Uniting bandage is  a  double headed roller, (a strait
bandage rolled up from each end to the middle,) having a slit
iu the middle, sufficiently large to allow one head of the rol-
ler to pass  through it.  But an ingenious person can  always
make a bandage and  apply it, as (he occasion requires, better
than they could learn it from readingchapterson the subject.
   When the wound  is deep it will be well to place smaH
longitudinal compresses beneath the bandage, at a little dis-
tance from the edge of the wound.

               ADHESIVE   PLASTER,
   Is preferable to any other method of keeping the edges of
the wound  together  in all cases, practicable ; for it must be
recollected, though stitches must some  times be used, that
they of necessity irritate and produce additional inflammation.
Adhesive plaster is applied in strips,  between every two of
which  a  space must  be left to allow  the escape of matter.
The  strips must be narrow, or a space must be cut out to al-
low the escape of matter, the  edges of the wound must  be
brought in complete contact, and the strips warmed, must be
laid across, in such a  manner as to cover as little of the wound
as may be.   The  plaster must be spread  on  linen,  or thin
leather :  see receipt for making adhesive plaster.,

                      SUTURES.
   Interrupted suture, is made by a curved needle, (though
any needle  may be used  to stitch  a wound ;)  which has a
double edge for one third of its length, and its broadest part
being broader  than the ligature.
   The lips of the wound being first brought together ;  tha
needle armed with a ligature, (made of a few threads of silk
and waxed,) is introduced into the one lip of the wound near
its edge, and is to be directed  through the  edge of the other
lip : the needle must then be cut oft',  and the ligature tied in
a hew.  These should be an inch apart, straps of plaster must
be used at (he sametime if necessary.
   Quilled sidure, so called from a quill, or something simi-
lar in form being  used in making it.  The same needle  (or
any other) is used as  for the above, but it must carry a double
ligature, have two in the eye : these are introduced through 
SURGERY.
421
 the wound at as  many places  as  is necessary, and then the
 ends  are separated, and tied on each side in  a bow, over a
 quill  or any such thing, placed along the side of the  wound.
 This  is used in very deep wounds.

 PROCESS BY  WHICH THE  WOUND  IS UNITED.
   When the  wound  is treated as above described, the ves-
 sels cease bleeding, and throw out coagulating lymph, which
 is the general  bond of union between all living parts.   But it
 is probable that in many cases where the wound is  closed be-
 fore it stops bleeding, that the blood itself is the first bond of
 union.  The  coagulating  lymph,  immediately after  aggluti-
 nating the sides of the wound  together, is filled with vessels
 which join with the vessels of either side,  which render the
 union perfect.
   If people will dress  wounds as above directed, we shall not
 see wounded limbs loaded down with rags, ancl wet in whis-
 key, and every salve that can be found daubed on  which de-
 lays for weeks and months the union of a wound, that might
 be effected in seventy two hours.

              PUNCTURED WOUNDS,
   Are dangerous on  account  of their penetrating to a con-
 siderable depth, injuring important blood vessels, nerves, &e.
 and as they frequently give rise to extensive inflammation.
 Stabs always tear, lacerate the fibres  of (he body,  ancl hence
 their slowness to  unite ancl liability to form large collections
 of matter, and many constitutional symptoms  that are not ob-
 servable in simple wounds.

                       Treatment.
   Incisions are never  to be made,  unless to remove foreign
 bodies, or to open sinuses that may  have  formed, for they
sometimes heal as readily as any others.  All that is neces-
sary ;  is to introduce a tent of lint to keep (he wound open,
and pass a probe daily through its whole brack, and  there will
be but little danger of collections of matter, or sinuses forra-


   LACERATED AND  CONTUSED  WOUNDS.
  A lacerated wound is made by tearing the parts asunder, 
422
SURGERY.
 the edges are consequently rough and jagged. The blood doe»
 not  issue profusely from lacerated  wounds, even  though a
 large vessel be ruptured.   Whole limbs have been torn from
,the body, and yet not followed by dangerous bleeding.
   Treatment, clean the wound, and bring  the parts as near
 as possible to their natural position.   The  patient must  be
 kept quiet, and  if of  a full habit, he must  be  bled, and the
 antiphlogistic treatment pursued  proportionate to the proba-
 bility, or presence of inflammation.  If there is much pain,
 and swelling of the part,  apply a warm emmolient poultice,
 and give a pill  of  opium.  If the parts mortify, and slough
 off, the treatment laid down for mortification is  proper.
   Contused  wounds are made by a  blunt instrument, which
 does not break the  skin.
   Treatment, if slight, cover'the part with linen, wet with
 vinegar, brandy, &c.  Or with mineral water made of;  sugar
 of lead one  drachm,  soft water, half a pint,  vinegar and
 spirits, of eaeh a half a gill, mix.   If the  contusion is great,
 bleeding and saline purgatives, with the above applications to
 stimulate  the absorbents will  be necessary.   If the skin and
 flesh dies, treat as directed for  lacerated wounds.

                POISONED WOUNDS.
   These are made by the stings of bees, wasps, hornets, and
 the bite of animals, vipers, snakes, &c. &c.
   Stings are to be treated by  the application of vinegar, le-
mon juice, cold water, hartshorn, oil, ancl opodeldoc.   If there
 is much swelling and pain, bleeding, salts  and spare diet will
be useful.
   Bite of the viper, the poison of the viper  is contained in a
sac at the roots of tlie fangs, or teeth of the upper jaw, and is
pressed out when it bites.   In ten or fifteen hours after the
bite, pain ancl burning is felt in the  wounded  part.  These
with swelling spread over the  limb,  and sometimes over the
whole body, attended  with dejection of spirits, small weak
pulse, headache, nausea,  and  vomiting, fixed  pain in the
breast, yellow tinge of the skin, cold sweat, ancl convulsions,
which  sometimes end  in death.

                       Treatment.
   The wound should  be  immediately  cut or burnt out, and
this naw wound  washed with soap suds, or  a  solution of caus- 
SURGERY.
425
tic alkali, and the patient may take, opium, camphor, musk>
and hartshorn.
  Bite of the rattle snake, produces sickness at the stomach,
the whole body swells, the eyes are suffused with blood, -the
pulse is strong and  agitated, the sweat is sometimes bloody,
tlie nose bleeds, and the teeth chatter;  and the sufferer utters
interrupted groans.
   Treatment, the same as for the bite of the viper, apply to
the wound a poultice  of quick lime,  with  oil.  The fresh
juice of plantain is,  by some considered as an antidote.
   For bites of mad animals, see hydrophobia, page 85,

          BLEEDING, OR VENESECTION.
   It is necessary to make pressure on the vein, betwixt L;c
place where  the puncture is to be made and the heart ; in
whatever part of the  body venesexion is to be performed :
this prevents the  return  of the blood to  the heart,  and thcs
vein consequently swells, and bleeds freely.
  The bend of the arm is the most convenient place to per-
form the operation.   A bandage must  be tied around the arm
a little above the  elbow, but not so tight as to stop the arterv
at the  wrist;  this would cut off the supply of blood.
  You must  always feel if there is  pulsation  beneath  (he
place where you design to make the puncture, and if there is
pulsation, it will be best to take an other vein, or operate on
the same, where the artery cannot be felt if practiblc ; but if
it can  be done in no other place,  be careful  and  not  cut
through the vein as the artery might be wounded.
  Select the  vein that rolls least, and  always fix it as rnucc
as you can by placing the thumb of the left hand a little be-
low the place where you intend to introduce  the lancet.
  The lancet must  be pushed into tho vein in an obliqne di-
rection;  and  when  the point is a little within the cavity  of
the vessel, bring the front edge of the lancet, obliquely for-
ward and upward, so as to render the opening sufficiently
large.   There is no particular  shape necessary, and a pen-
knife, or any  sharp pointed  instrument will  answer, though
(he lancet in common  use is most  convenient.
  When a sufficient quantity of  blood has been taken,  the
ligature is to  be removed, when the blood generally ceases
to flow, and always so when compression is made below tlie
orifice.   The arm is now to be  washed, and  the edges of thy 
424
SURGERY.
wound brought in contact,  and kept so by a 6mall comprew
of lint, or cloth, by applying a bandage round the arm in form
of a figure of eight.
   When venesection is performed in the vein (external jug-
ular,) of the neck, the pressure is made by the thumb.
   Arteriotomy is  performed in the temporal artery, and its
branches only, because the blood can be stopped by compres-
sing the artery against the temporal bone.
   Venesecion may be performed by any careful person with
perfect safety.

    ILL CONSEQUENCES FROM BLEEDING.
   EcJymosis, or thrombus, is caused by the bloods insinua-
ting itself into the adjacent cellular substance, in consequence
of the skin covering part of the orifice of the vessel.   This
blood is generally absorbed in a few days, and this should be
favored by the application of vinegar, spirits, &c.
  If inflammation arises, it must be  treated by  the  usual
antiphlogistic means. 
 
Missing Pages
   425-426 
SURGERY.
4S7
      DESCRIPTION  OF  PLATE  V.

1. Part of the b' 3ps flexor cubitii.
2. The  fascia ts linosa from that muscle,  which is lia-
     ble to be.pricked in bleeding in the basilic vein.
3. The  hume . ; artery, on each side of which is a large
     vein.
4. Vena ceph :!C-a.
6. Mediana.
6. Basilica. 
■i&i                   SURGERY.

               GUN  SHOT WOUNDS,
   Are produced by hard obtuse bodies, projected from some
species of fire-arms, and are referable to three principal cau-
ses ; 1st, the kind of body projected;  2d, the velocity of the
body ;  3d, the nature of the parts injured.
   1. Kind of body:   bullets are the most common kind of
bodies  shot into  the injured parts ; but the wound  is some-
times produced  by cannon balls, pieces  of broken shells,
and on ships by splinters of wood.   Large irregular bodies
obviously occasion more mischief, than such as are of a mcti-
erate size, and smooth  and round.  Pieces of clothes are of-
ten carried along with  the ball into the wound.
   Gun shot wounds are always attended with  contusions and
lacerations, by which some of  the fibres around the wounu
are deadened, and must tdough off, hence they seldom v.n\U.
by adhesive inflammation, or are attended with profuse bleed-
ing, unless the ruptured vessels are very large.
   2. Velocity of the  body  has considerable influence; for
when a ball has passed with little velocity the wound often
heals by the first intention ;  but not often when it has p^s.«ed
with great velocity.   At the entrance of the ball the circum-
ference is depressed, at its exit prominent.
   On account of the parts surrounding a gun sLot wound be-
ing often deadened, the extent of (he injury cannot always be
comprehended, till the  dead parts slough off.
   3. Nature of the parts injured.  When a gun shot wo-m:
only injures svft parts of  ordinary importance it is  termed
simple.
   Who;i at the same time it fractures a bone, wounds a h\. ^
urvy, nerve, or any important part it is called co:npound.
   The bail is directed  in its course by the variety of density
and power of resistance in the part receiving it.   Thus; soma
bulla are forced into the most strange courses, passing nearly
all round  the body immediately beneath (he skin.  And t:.«
sloping direction  in which  the ball sometimes strikes, occa-
sions serious injury without wounding the skin.
   Extraneous bodies are more  frequently met wiih in  gun
shot wounds than in any others ;  they are pieces of clothing,
or other substances which the ball has driven into the limb ;
the ball itself, or loose, splinters  of the bone.   These cauw
many  bad symptoms,  by irritating, exciting pain, inflamma-
tion, hemorrhage, suppuration,. &c. 
 
^——---------------          -■»
                                           1
*^
♦ • 
SURGERY.
429
  When a ball strikes a bone it produces concussion; and if
it strikes wjjth much force, tearing the limb from the body, it
affects the whole  body in  a  violent  degree, producing  de-
rangement of all the animal functions.

             Treatment of gun shot wounds.
  The first thing, if the wound is in  one of the extremities,
is to determine whether it is more advisable to amputate the
limb, or try to cure the wound.   Surgeons are too apt to de-
cide on the former.
  If a bone, at a joint, is shattered into numerous fragments,
and the soft parts are extensively contused and  torn, with
injury of large blood vessels  and the important nerves,  and
the whole limb is,cold and insensible,  it is obvious  to every
one that amputation is the only safe course to pursue.
  But this pitch of injury  is not always p;-2 ent, where am-
putation may be proper, and an opinion cannot be formed by
a consideration of the extent of the injury alone ; but the pa-
tient's constitution, the probable  accommodations,  rest, at-
tendance, pure air, &c. must be taken into tne consideration.
Not forgetting, however, that the amputation of the  limb"
will not quite cure the man, and that he may need pure air,
attendance, accommodations, nurses, &c. m ■- withstanding the
hrnb may be removed.
  Humanity dictates that in the latter instance, every other
means should  be  resorted to  before  imputation ;.as wounds  «
of the  most formidable appearance frequently end well.
  In accidents of this kind,  there are  two periods at which
amputation can be performed; the first is immediately after
the  occurrence of the injury before inftar nation arises;  and
the  second is after the inflammation and  mortification  has
been subdued.
  The wound should he dilated no more than what is ne-
cessary, to extract foreign bodies, by means ef forceps, or to
take up, and tie ruptured vessels with convenience.
  Dressing.  TBut little or no hope of union by the first inten-
tion can be entertained, in wounds of this  description.   The
dressing must be of the mildest description possible ;  a pledget
of white cerate, and  an emollient poultice are the best dres-
sings.   The parts may be fomented once or twice a day with
a decoction of poppies; thisdiminishes pain  and inflammation.
A ready exit for the matter must be maintained, the wound
kept as clean as possible, and during the inflammatory stage, 
430
SURGERY.
'  leeches, general bleeding and the whole treatment recommend-
  ed for inflammation must be observed which is about all that
  the surgeon can usefully do ;  varying his plans to the symp-
  toms as they arise, as he would in any other kind of wounds.
     After all the hue and cry about army surgeons,  and their
  superior opportunities,  ancl consequent abilities, an observer
  will find that all  their  skill is confined to the  removing of
  limbs, taking up of vessels, and simple dressing of wounds;
  unless indeed, we consider poking  and  probing, skill;  and
  unnecessary pain, and protracted suffering science.
     The above is a condensed  view of volumes on gun-shot
  wounds, written by ttiese very surgeons.

     OF  GRANULATIONS AND  CICATRIZATION.
     Granulations are  formed by an exudation of the coag-
  ulating lymph from the vessels of the wounded  or exposed sur-
  face.   Into this the old  vessels extend, and  new  ones  arc
  formed.
     Granulations have the same power to  recrete pus as the
  surface that produces them.  Ti.eir surface is very convex,
  having many points or eminences.   The smaller these points
  are, the more healthy are the granulations, and if healthy the
  color is a deep florid red.
     If the color is, livid  the granulations  are ur;h/3althy,  and
  this color  denotes that  the circulation is  languid ; position
  frequently procf.ioes this, ancl  this is the reason why sore  legs
  are so backward in. healing when the  patient  is permitted to
  stand or walk.   WJiyn granulations are healthy, ancl situated
  on a flat surface,  they rise  nearly level with the f.errounding
  skin,1 but when th.v.' grow hi-1 er-t':an the surrounding skin,
  become soft and  s >ongy, they are  unhealthy, and lose  the
  power  of finnin;.';  lew  skin,  (this is called prood flesh.) —
  Granulations  j.;.;•'. he  of t e same qualities, wbeiher they
  grow from  bone ■•;.■ '.'wm the soft parts.
     By the-format'-on wf  these granulations nature fills up deep
  wouivls t  at cannot have  t'-eir edges brought into contact.
  The sides of the -vo::ud it is true approach each other which
  in part fills th ; ce '<" of the  wound or ulcer.   As the gran-
  ulations cmlra'it and »row into,each other,  the old skin in
  part extends oyer, the , aft which had been deprLed of skin,
  and makiii{ the cluiti x (scar) much  smaller than the ori-
  ginal wound. 
SURGERY.
431
   The new skin most commonly arises from the adjacent old
skin;  but new skin will form on any part of the surface of a
wound, however remote from the old skin.

                      TETANUS.
                                     i
   The surgical treatment of tetanus is attended with but lit-
tle if any more success that the medical treatment, but when
it arises from a wound, it should be enlarged with the knife,
and treated with caustic, or the use of the cautery may be tri-
ed.   But if it arises from extensive wounds in a joint of one
of the extremities, the immediate removal of the limb offers
the only security for life,

             INJURIES OF THE HEAD.
   As the integuments of the head have some connection with
the Internal parts, by means of vessels, injuries of the scalp are
not free from danger.   And if abscesses result fr©m contusions
of the head, the  matter should  be let out as soon as its exis-
tence is ascertained;  and the opening should be made in the
most depending part, that  the matter  may  be completely
evacuated, otherwise it  might extend between the integu-
ments and  bone and cause serious results.  In  some instances
contusions  occasion' a collection of blood beneath the expan-
sion of the  muscles.   Mild purges, and lot ons of vinegar and
sal ammoniac, spirits, &c, commonly occasion the absorption
of the effused fluid.
   Cuts of  tire integuments of the head, are simpleWounds.
The hair should  be shaved off, and  the. lips  of the wound
confined together by strips of adhesive  plaster, and in every
respect treated  like  any simple wound, unless the integuu
ments become affected with an erysipelatous  inflammation,
this is particularly common in persons fond of the bottle, ond
in bilious habits.   Bleeding, saline purges, and a wash made
ef sugar of lead  will  generally effect a cure.
   Fractures of the cranium ;  when the breach is very fine
it is termed a  fissure, when wide and  open  it is named  a
fracture;  when it happens at some distance from the spot
which receives the blow, itis called a counter fissure   The
same violence which breaks the cranium may  occasion a con-
cussion of  the brain,   an extravasation of the  blood  beneath
the cranium, and a subsequent inflammation of thebraine and
its membranes.
                           27*
i 
i%£                    SURGERY,
   In treating a fracture of the skull the principal object is to
 cuard against inflammation of the brain;  if this threatens to
 <ako place, and we are sure that it is caused by the inequal-
 ities of the fracture, pressing on the brain, we are then war-
 ranted in removing the fractured part  with a trephine;  but
 otherwise, all that we can do is to bleed the patient  freely
 and repeatedly from the temporal artery  and the arm,  and
 prescribe saline purgatives and a low diet.   The antiphlo-
 gistic regimen should  be  continued at least a month, for in-
 flammation of the brain is very apt  to come  on even  when
 ihe patient considers himself out of danger.

 PRESSURE ON THE  BRAIN  FROM EXTRAVA-
                SATION  OF BLOOD.
   After having  been stunned by a  blow on the head  the
 patient sometimes recovers very soon, and sometimes remains
 senseless.  We may know with certainty that extravasation
 of blood on the brain has taken place,  if the patient soor. re-
 covers his senses,.and then afterwards gradually relapses into
 a drowsy condition attended with the following  symptoms,
 viz: the eyes half open,  the  pupil dilated and insensible to
 the approach of light;  regularity and slowness of the pulse ;
 with difficult and  noisy breathing.  These symptoms  show
 ;he necessity of trephining, the. patient immediately.   If any
 marks or bruises are visible, apply the trephine to that part
 of the head;  but if none  exist, the  operation must yet be
 performed.
   Pressure on the brain  from matter produces the same sort
 of symptoms as have just been described ; but the patient
 must have betrayed signs of inflammation in the bead pre-
 vious to their occurrence, and immediately over it there is
 generally a  puffy circumscribed tumor'of the scalp,  and a
 separation of tlie integuments from the skull under the tumor.
 The trephine must be applied to give vent, to the matter.

                   CONCUSSION.
   When the brain is violently shaken, the effect is termed
concussion.   The patient is stunned,  and insensible, his ex-
tremities are frequently cold, pulse  slow and intermitting.
These  (unless so violent  as to produce death,)  soon go off
and sickness and other symptoms take place, which are soon
followed by inflammation of the brain.. 
SURGERY.                   433
    The patient must first be treated with something to revive
 him, and then he must be bled largely, his head must be blus-
 tered, and the whole antiphlogistic treatment must be rigor-
 ously pursued.

           OPERATION  OF TREPHINING.
    Every person should  be acquainted with the  manner of
 performing  this operation, that he may be able  to  render
 assistance when present,"for the urgency of the case frequent-
 ly demands  immediate operation, ancl it is not often that more
 than one surgeon can be easily obtained.
    This operation  is performed for the purpose of removing
 a portion of the skull, for  the  sake of elevating that part oi"
 the bone that produces dangerous pressure on the brain, or to
 give vent to the matter or  blood that has collected beneath
 the bone.  The operation must always be attempted in a sit-
 uation where a complete circle of bone can be taken out, and
 if any of the vessels which lie in the grooves of the bones
 should be wounded a small plug of lint will stop the hemorr-
 hage.  If the bone  is not sufficiently exposed by  a wound,
 the hair must  be shaved off ancl a crucial  incision  made ;
 shaped like  the letter T or V.   None of the scalp should ever
 be removed.
   The incision must be made down to the bone at once. The
 impression of a vessel, or a suture,  may be easily  discrimin-
 ated from a  fracture or fissure, by a knowledge of the situa-
 tion of the former, and by the undetached state of the peri-
 cranium in the latter, and by the edge of the fracture  being
 always rough.
   The trephine should never  be applied on the  depressed
 portion of bone, but on the solid bone, in a situation most fa-
 vorable for the introduction of the eleVator  beneath the de-
 pressed bone for  the purpose of raising it.   After the scalp
 has been divided, all loose splinters of bone must be removed
 and if the depressed pieces  causing the symptoms  are  loose,
 they should also be removed.
  The surgeon first makes  a small  hole with  a perforator,
 in which the  centre line of the  trephine is to  be fixed.   The
 crown of the  trephine is then to be turned alternately in one
direction and then in the other.  As soon as  the teeth of the
 instrument have made a groove sufficiently deep to keep the
trephine steady the centre-pin must be taken out lest it should 
434
SURGERY.
penetrate through the. bone and injure the dura mater.  Th«
saw must be occasionally removed and the bone dust brushed
away.  When the saw is pretty well adyanced, the operation
must be conducted with caution, and  the operator must fre-
quently examine with a pin or the point of a quill, to ascer-
tain if any pai;t  is  sawn through.  And when any  part  is
through, the pressure of the instrument is to be inclined  to
the parts that are not through, and it is better to use a little
force in getting: out the circle than to run the risk of wound-
ing the dura mater  by sawing too deep.  And the operation
must be  performed in as  many places as  is necessary, the
patient, if the  operation is necessary is in a situation that ren-
ders him insensible to to the pain of the operation.
   When the circle  is removed the elevator is introduced and
so conducted as to raise the bone that presses upon the  brain;
the scalp is then  to  be laid down in its natural position, and
dressed very lightly with a pledget of any simple ointment.

                    OF  SPRAINS.
  Plunge the part sprained  into very cold water, and hold
it there as long at a time as you can bear it, for several hours,
then rub it well  with camphorated  spirits.   If  the accident
has happened to a joint, as in the ankle, ancl it remains weak,
pour cold water on  it from a  teakettle, held  at a distance,
several times in the day.

                 , DISLOCATIONS.
  When a bone is moved out of its proper place,  it  is said
t© be dislocated,  or out of joint.  Any  person of common
sense ancl resolution, who is present when a dislocation hap-
pens, may render more service  to the patient at the time,
than the most expert surgeon can,  after the inflammation and
swelling have  come on, which are sure to take place more or
less by losing time.
  A recent dislocation may generally be reduced merely by
extending the limb, and the force employed must be sufficient
to stretch the  muscles which move  the joint.   When tha
bone has been out of its place for any length of time, and a
swelling and inflammation have  come on, bleed the patient,
and after fomenting the part, apply soft poultices with  vine-
gar before attempting to reduce it.  After bringing the bone
i 
SURGERY.
4SS
 to its place, lay on cloths dipped in vinegar or camphorated
 spirits, and keep the limb perfectly easy.

      DISLOCATION OF THE  LOWER JAW.
   This accident, which is occasioned by blows, or yawning,
 is known  by an inability to shut  the mouth, ancl  the projec-
 tion of the chin.  To reduce it, seat  the  patient in a  chair
 with his  head  supported against  the breast of an assistant
 who stands behind him.  Your thumbs being covered with
 leather, are then to be pushed between the jaws, as far back
 as  possible, while wiih the fingers  outside,  you  grasp the
 bone which is to be pressed downwards, at the same time that
 the  chin  is raised.-  The bone will then  be  found moving.
 The next thing to be done, which is all that is necessary, is
 merely to push back the chin  ; but when you do this, slip
 your thumbs between the jaws ancl cheeks, or else they will
 be bitten  by the sudden snap of the teeth as they Come to-
 gether.   The jaws should  be kept closed  by a bandage for a
 few days, and the patient live upon broih or soup.

           DISLOCATION OF  THE NECK.
   Whoever will take the trouble to examine the human
 skeleton will see at once that it is much more easy to dislo-
 cate or put a bone of the neck  out of joint, than  to break it.
 It may be  dislocated by falls, or violent blows.  The person
 is deprived of all sense ancl  motion, his neck swells, his coun-
 tenance appears bloated, his chin lies upon his breast, andhis
 face is generally turned  to one side. If no  assistance is given,
 the patient soon dies, which makes the people believe that his
 neck was broken.  But most generally, it is only partly dis-
 located, and may easily be brought to  its  place by any reso-
 lute person. First, lay the  patient  on his back on the ground;
 then, without losing  any time,  place yourself behind him so
 as to be able to lay hold of bis head with both hands,' and
 place your knees firmly  against his shoulders; in this  pos-
 ture pull the head towards  you  with considerable  force, gen-
 tly twisting it at the  same  time, if the face be turned to one
 side, until you perceive  that the joints are  replaced, which is
 known by the  noise which  the  bones make in slipping in, by
the patient's beginning to breathe, and by (he head continuing
m the natural posture.    Women have performed  this opera- 
436
BfcTRGERY.
tion.   After setting the neck let the patient be bled, and kept
quiet for some days until the parts have recovered their tone.

       DISLOCATION OF THE  SHOULDER.
   Dislocations of the  shoulder are the most common of all
accidents of the kind.   It  is very easily known by  the de-
formity of the joint, and the head of the bone being found in
some unnatural position.  To reduce  it, seat the pa(ient in a
chair, place one  hand on the prominent part of the shoulder
blade, just above the spot where the head of the bone  should
be, while with the other you grasp the arm above the elbow
and pull it outward.  Another method is to seize the elbow
of the dislocated  arm with the right  hand, keeping it bent,
and gently moving it from the body; then with the left hand,
a large ball of yarn  is to be crowded as far towards the arm-
pit as possible ;  the  arm  is then  used as a lever, and the ball
of yarn becomes a bait ancl roller, over which the head of th«
bone is to be guided to its socket.

        DISLOCATION OF  THE  ELBOW.
   If the patient has fallen on his hands, or holds his arm bent
at the elbow without being able  to straighten  it, it is disloca-
ted backwards.   Seat him in a chair, let one person grasp the
arm near the shoulder, and another the wrist, and forcibly
extend it, while you interlock the Angers of both hands just
above the elbow ancl pull it backwards.  The elbow is some-
times dislocated laterally or sideways.  To  reduce it, maka
extension by pulling at the wrist, while some one secures th*
arm above, then push the bone into its place, either inwards
or outwards as may be required.  After setting a dislocated
elbow, the  joint is to be kept at  perfect rest for  five or six
days, and then move it gently.  If inflammation come on.
bleed freely, purge,  &c.  &c.

 DISLOCATION  OF  THE  WRIST, FINGERS, &c.
   Dislocations of the wrist, fingers, and thumb, are readiir
perceived  on examination;  they ate all  to be  reduced by
forcibly extending the lower extremity of the part, and push-
ing the bones into their place.  If necessary, small bands may
be secured  to the fingers by a narrow bandage, to facilitate
the extension.   These  accidents should be attended to witb-
* 
SURGERY.
43T
 out delay, for if neglected for a short time, they cannot be
 remedied.

 DISLOCATION OF  THE HIP JOINT, OR THIGH.
    The bone  of  the thigh  may  be  dislocated  in  different
 ways ;  but they require the same  treatment, with but little
 variation, which will readily be suggested by the circum-
 stances of the case.  If dislocated downwards, the leg will h>%
 lengthened an  inch and  a half; the knees will be forcibly
 separated from each other, and the foot turned outwards.
   Lay  the patient on his opposite side, with the knee bent so
 that it may form a right  angle with the  body.   Then placn
 your right  band on the outside of his knee, and your left hand
 on the inside of the thigh as high up as possible.   Now with
 the left hand, raise the head of the bone from its new bed,
 and with the right hand, carry it to its socket.   In doing this^,
 the  thigh is used as  a lever,  the right hand the  power, and
 the left hand the fulcrum, bail, or  opposing power.

           DISLOCATION OF  THE FOOT.
   This seldom happens; but if it  should take place, let one
 person hold the leg,  and another  draw the foot, .while you
 push the bone  in the contrary way to  that in which it \va*
 forced out.   The part is then to be covered with conmresse*
 dipped in lead water, and a splint applied on each side ofth*
 lag, reaching below the foot.

        FRACTURES, OR BROKEN BONES.
   All that art  can do towards the cure of a broken bone, ia
 to lay it perfectly straight,  ancl  keep  it quiet.   Nature does
 the rest.  Very tight bandages are injurious; but as soma
 method must be taken to keep the  limb steady, and the bon«
 to its place,  two or  more splints  of leather  or  pasteboard,
 moistened before they are applied,  will assume the shape of
 the limb, and assisted by a slight bandage, will be sufficient
 If wood splints are used, care should be taken  to prevent irri-
 tation from them, by interposing some soft substance between
 them and  the limb.   The  splints  should be  as  long as the
 limb, with  boles cut  for  the  ankle, if the  leg be fractured.
In fractures of the ribs, where a bandage is not  alone suffi-
cient, a strap of adhesive plaster will  assist in  keeping th* 
438
SURGERY.
parts  in  place  the  patient should keep himself quite  easy,
avoiding any thing  which may occasion sneezing, laughing,
coughing, &c.               •
  The best external applications for a fracture is a mixture
of vinegar and  water, with which the bandages should fre-
quendy be wet, especially if pain and inflammation come on.
  It is generally proper to bleed immediately after a fracture,
and if the patient be  young,  of a full habit, or has, at the
same  time received any bruise or contusion, or the ribs are
broken, bleeding is  then absolutely necessary.
  If any of the large  bones which support the body are bro-
ken, the patient must keep his bed for several weeks,  but it
is not  necessary that he should lie all that time on his  back.
After the second week he may be gently raised up and sup-
ported for a while by a chair and pillow.  Bu  in raising him
up, and laying him  down, he must make no exertion himself,
otherwise (he action of the muscles may pull  the bones out of
place.   The patient at the same time must be kept dry  and
clean; by neglecting this he often so galled and excoriated as to
be obliged to keep changing his position.  The best  situation is
to keep the limb a little bent.   This is the posture  into which
every animal puts itself when it goes to rest, and in which
fewest muscles are  upon the  stretch.  It  is  easily clone by
putting the patient on his side, or by  making the bed so as to
favor this position of the limb.
  When a limb is  broken, it is generally known  by the dis-
tortion or deformity of the part, or if it be a h g, by his not
being able to stand  on it.  But when a fracture is not manifest
from   the  appearance,  pass  the fingers  along  the   sus-
pected bone, and whenever any  unusual pain occurs, or any
unnatural irregularity appears, endeavor to make one part of
the bone rub against the  other, and  you will feel a grating,
or crepitus, as the surgeons term it.  You will also be assist-
ed in forming a judgment by examining the same bone of the
other arm or leg, and comparing the two ; and if you are still
uncertain,  (which can hardly  be the case if the limb is bro-
ken,)  no harm can  arise from proceeding with it in the same
manner as if you were certain that the limb was broken.

   FRACTURE OF  THE  BONE OF THE  NOSE.
   Any smooth article that will pass into the nostril should be
immediately introduced with one hand, to raise the depressed 
                        SURGERY.                    439

 portions to their proper  level, while the other  is employed
 on the outside in moulding them into the natural shape.  If
 pain ancl inflammation come on, bleed, take physic, and live
 on a low diet.

    FRACTURE OF THE  LOWER JAW BONE.
   This may be known  by' pressing with one hand on the
 front teeth of that side where the fracture is supposed to be,
 while at the  same time, the other hand is applied to the  basis
 of the bone near  the angle f then by making  alternate  pres-
 sure with each hand, the bone will  be felt to move,  or  even
 a crepitus or grating  may be distinguished.  But when the
 bones are displaced, the  fracture  is  known by the external
 appearance—the mouth  is open and  drawn to one side, and
 tlie shape of the jaw distorted.
   It is to be  remedied by keeping the lower jaw firmly press-,
 ed against the upper one, by means of a bandage passed under
 the chin and over the bead.   If it is broken near the angle,
 or that part nearest the ear,  place a cushion or roll of linen
 in the hollow behind it,  over which  the bandage must pass,
 so as to make it  push  that part of the bone forward.   The
 parts are to be  confined  in this way for  twenty  days, during
 which time, all the nourishment that is taken, should be suck-
 ed between the teeth.   If in  consequence of the blow, a tooth
 is loosened, do not mdddle with it, for if let alone, it will grow
 fast again.

 FRACTURE OF THE CLAVICLE,  OR  COLLAR
                        BONE.
   This accident is a very common occurrence, and is known
at once  by pressing the finger along it, and by (he swelling,
&c.   To reduce it, seat the patient in a chair, bring the  shirt
down off the shoulders, and place a stout compress of linen
made,in the shapeof a wedge, under his arm, the thick end of
which should press against the  arm-pit.   His arm, bent to a
right angle at the elbow, is  now to  be brought clown to hi*
side,  and secured in that  position  by a long bandage, which
passes over the arm of the affected side and round (he body.
The fore arm is to be supported across the breast by  a sling.
U  takes from  four to five  weeks for the bones to re-unite. 
440
SURGERY.
            FRACTURE OF  THE AR.Al"
   Seat the patient on a chair, or the side of a bed, let one
assistant  hold the sound arm,  while another grasps the wrist
of the broken one and steadily extends it  in an opposite di-
rection, bending the fore  arm a little to  serve as a lever.
You can now place the bones in their proper situation.   Two
splints of shingle or stout pasteboard, long enough to reach
from below the shoulder to near the elbow, must then  be well
covered with tow or cotton, and  laid along each side of  the
arm, ancl kept in that position by a  bandage.   The fore arm
is to be supported in a sling.  Two  smaller  splints may for
better security be laid  between the first ones,  that,  is one on
top, and the other underneath the arm, to  be secured by  the
bandage in the same way as the others.            •

        FRACTURE OF THE  FORE ARM.
   It  is to be reduced precisely in the same way as the pre-
ceding, excepting the mode of keeping the upper portion of it
uteady, which is clone by grasping the arm above the elbuv?-.
When the splints and bandage are  applied, support it in *
•ling.

          FRACTURES  OF THE WRIST.
   This accident seldom takes place ;)but  when it does,  the
injury  is generally so great as to require amputation.   If tht
aand can be saved, lay it on a splint well covered with toWj
extending beyond the  fingers ; place another splint opposite
to  it, lined with the same soft material, and secure them by r.
bandage.  Carry the hand  in a  sling.   When the bones of
the hand are broken, fill*the palm  with  soft compresses or
tow,  and then lay a splint  on  it,  long enough to extend
from the elbow to beyond the ends of the fingers, to be secured
by a bandage as usual.   When a finger is broken, extend  the
end of it until it becomes straight, place the fractured portion
in  its place, and then apply two small pasteboard splints, ui:<.
below  and the other above, to be secured by a narrow band-
age.  The  top splint should extend from  the end of the finger
ever the back of the hand.

            FRACTURE OF  THE RIBS.
   When after a fall or blow, the patient complains of a prick- 
SURGERY.                    441
 mg in his side, we may suspect a rib is broken.   It is ascer-
 tained by placing  the tips of two or three fingers on the spot
 where the pain  is, and desiring the patient to cough, when
 the grating sensation will be felt.   All that can be done is to
 pass a broad bandage  round the chest, so tight as to prevent
 the motion of the ribs in breathing, and to observe a low diet.

        FRACTURE OF  THE THIGH BONE.
   Let the bones be brought to their place by extension in the
 common way ; and then, as the patient lies on his back, the
 whole limb should be  turned outwards  so  as to rest on the
 great trochanter of (he thigh, and  (he patient's whole both"
 should be inclined to the same side ; the leg and foot, lying
 on their outside, and supported by smooth pillows, should  be
 rather higher than the thigh.  One very broad  splint, hollow-
 ed'out and well covered with wool or tow,  should be placed
 under the thigh on the outside to extend to the  knee or below
 it; another splint somewhat shorter, should extend from the
 groin below, the knee on (he inside, or rather in this posture
 on the upper side ; (he ba;a!age should be of the eigbteen-tail
 kind, and when  the bone is  set, and the thigh well placed  on
 the pillow, it should not be  moved  again until the bones are*
 united.   The eighteen-tail  bandage is made and applied in
 the following  manner :—A  strip of cloth  as long as the splint
 and  as wide as  the  hand,  is  the first part of it; then sew
 other strips or tails," across  it like cross pieces, and the band-
 age is made.  When the splints are'lo be applied, the band-
 age mu?t  be ready and laid under (he  limb with (he  long
 strip in the direction of the splints ;  (hen as  the splints are
 appplied bring up the tails of the bandage from  each side, lap-
 ping the ends over each other until you come to the last winch
 may be sov/cd or fastened with a pin.   Two other spiints'are
 sometimes used ; one above, and one below the limb.
   Tho ingenious Dr. Hartsborne has invented an apparatus
 tor reducing a fractured thigh, which leaves a straight  limb
 without lameness  or deformity ; and  any man of common
 sense can  apply  it as well  as  a surgeon.  It consists of two
 splints mane  of half or three quarter  inch  well seasoned
stuff,  eight or ten inches wide,  one of which should  reach
from a little abov&the hip, to fifteen or sixteen  inches beyond
the foot, while the other extends the same  length from the
jjroin,.   The upper end of the innersplint is hollowed  out and 
442                     SURGERY.
 well padded or stuffed.   Their lower ends are held togelher
 by a cross piece, having two tenons, which enter two \ertical
 mortices,  one  in each splint, ancl  secured there by pins.  In
 the centre of this cross piece (which should be very solid) is
 a female screw.   Immediately above the vertical  mortices,
 are two horizontal ones of considerable length, in which slide
 the tenons of a second cross piece, to, the  upper side of wliich
 is fastened a foot block,  shaped like the sole of a shoe,  while
 in the other is a round  hole for the reception of the head of
 the male  screw, which  passes through the  female one just'
 noticed.   On  the top of this cross piece, to which  the foot
 block is attached,  are two pins,  which fall into grooves at
 the head of the screw, thereby firmly connecting them.   The
 foot block  as before observed, is shaped like the sole of a shoe.
 Near the toe.  is a slit, through which  passes a strap ancl buc-
'kle.  Near  the heel are a couple of straps,  with two rings,
 arranged  precisely like those of a  skate, of which, in fact, the
 whole  foot block is an exact resemblance.   A long  male
 screw,  of wood or other material, completes the  ap| aratus.
    To apply  it, put a slipper on the foot  of the  broken  limb,
 and lay (lie apparatus over  the leg.   By  turning the screw,
 the foot block will  be forced up  to the  foot in  (he  slipper,
 which is to be firmly strapped to it, as boys fasten iheir ^kates.
 By turning the screw the contrary way, (he padded  extremity
 of the inner  splint presses against the groin, and the foot is
 gradually  drawn down,  until the  broken  Jimb becon.es  of its
 natural length and appearance, when any projection or little
 inequality that may remain, can be felt and reduced by  a gen-
 tle pressure  of the hand.
   The  great advantages of this apparatus are the  ease with
 which  it  is applied, and the certainly with  which  it  acts.
 The foot  once secured  to, the bloc':,  in  a  way that every
 school  boy understands, nothing more  is required than to
 turn the screw until tho broken   limb is  found to  be of the
 same length as the  sound one.   Fractured  tlvghs ancl legs
 generally  re-unite in six or  eight weeks; in old men, how-
 ever, they  require three or four months.  In a fracture of
 the thigh or leg, the patient should always, if possible, be laid
 on a mattrass or hard bed, supported by boards instead  of the
 sacking,  which, from its.elasticity and  the yielding of the
 eords, is apt to derange the position of the body. 
SURGERY.
443
FRACTURE  OF THE KNEE-PAN, OR  PATELLA.
  This accident is  easily ascertained by examination.  It
may be broken in any direction, but is more generally frac-
tured across, or transversely.  It is reduced  by bringing the
fragments together, ancl  keeping them in that position by a
long bandage passed  carefully round the leg, from the ankle
to the knee, then pressing the upper fragment  down so as to
meet its fellow, (the  leg being extended) and placing a thick
compress of linen about it, over which the bandage is to ha
continued.
   The extended limb is now to be laid on a broad splint, ex-
tending from the buttock to the  head,  thickly covered with
tow to fill up the inequalities of the leg.  For additional se-
curity, two strips of muslin may be nailed to  the middle of
(he splint, and one on each side, and passed  about  thu joint,
the one below, the other above, so as to form a figure eight.
In twenty or thirty days the limb should be moved a little to
prevent stiffness.
  If  the fracture is through its length, bring the pcrnts  to-
gether, place a  compress on each side, and keep them lageth-
er with a bandage, leaving the limb extended, and at rest.

             FRACTURE -OF  THE  LEG.
  From the thinness of the parts covering the  principal bone
of the leg, it is easy to ascertain if it is broken ohl-'quely.
If, however, the fracture be directly across,  no displacement
will occur, but the pain,  swelling, and the grating sensation,
will sufficiently decide the nature of the accident.
  If the fracture is oblique, let two assistants  extend t1 e limb,
while the broken parts are placed by the hand  in their nat-
ural position. Two splints, that reach from a little above the
knee  to nine or ten inches below the foot, having near the
upper end of each four holes, and  a vertical  mortice near
the lower end,  into which is fitted a cross piece, are now to
be applied as follows.  Lay two pieces  of tape  about a foot
long,  on each side of (he leg, just below the knee joint, and
secure them there  by several turns of a bandage ; passs a
silk handkerchief round the ankle, cross it on the instep, and
tie it  under the sole of the foot.   The  two splints are now
placed one  on each side of the leg, the four  ends of t: e pie-
ces  of tape passed through the four holes and  firmly tied, and
4be cross pieces placed in the mortice.  By tying the ends of 
444                    8URGEEY.
the handkerchief to this cross piece, the business is finished.
If the fracture is  across, and no displacement exists, apply
two splints of stout pasteboard, reaching from the heel to the
knee, and well covered with low, one on each side of the leg,
securing them by a bandage passing round the limb, and out-
side the splints.
  In cases of oblique fractures of the leg close  to the knee,
Hartshorn's apparatus for fractured thighs should be applied,
as already directed.

  FRACTURES  OF THE  BONES  OF THE FOOT.
  The bones of the feet are  sometimes, though rarely, broken.
It is known by a  crack at the  moment of the accident, a
difficulty in standing, by the  swelling,  and  by  the grating
noise  on moving the foot.   To reduce it, take a long band-
age, lay the end  of it on the top of the foot, carry it, over the
toes under the soie,  and then by several turns  secure it in thai
position.  The foot being extended as much  as possible car-
rv the bandage along the back of the  leg above the  knee,
where it is to be secured by several  turns, and then brought
down on the front of tho leg, to which it is secured by circu-
lar tarns.   In this way the  broken pieces will be kept in con-
tact, and   >  the. course of a month or six  weeks will h»
united.

                   AMPUTATION.  '
  It is altogether a mistaken notion that no  man can ampu-
tate, unless  he has gone through a regular course of surgical
studies.    Every one  knows  perfectly well that accidents
happen  frequently  in  places and under circumstances where
it is.not possible to get a surgeon, and in which immediate
operation is the only means of saving life.
   Any man of common dexterity and firmness of nerve, can
cut oft" a limb, as safely as a surgeon.
  If the proper  amputating instruments are not to be had ;
Take the handkerchief ancl stick as  a substitute for the tour-
nequet; a carving or other  large knife,  with a smooth, sharp,
and straight blade,  in place  of the amputating knife; a pen-
knife  for the scalpel and catling  knife, a carpenter's tenon
saw,  for the bone saw;  a slip of leather or linen (retractor)
three inch.es wide and two  or three feet long, slit up its mid-
dle half the length, a dozen  ligatures  about six or nine in- 
SO..GERY.
445
 ches long, each made of three  or four threads of liilkOr fine
 twine, and waxed ;  a hook with sharp  point as a substitute
 for the tenaculum ;  a pair of slender pincers, for the forceps ;
 several narrow strips of sticking plaster, about half an inch
 wide and eight or ten inches long ; dry lint;  a piece of linen
 large enough to cover the end of the slump, spread with sim-
 ple ointment or lard ; a bandage of the width of your hand
 three or four yards  long;  sponges, and warm  water,  and a
 ii.'ied determination  to do what you tinder take.

           AMPUTATION OF  THE  ARM.
   The p:itient  may take sixty or eighty drops of laudanum
 if he has a mind to.  He must then be seated on a firm (able or
 chest, of  a convenient height so that some one can support
 hi:u by clasping him round (ho body.   Tie (he handkerchief
■ loosely round the arm as high up as can be, (hen pass a short
 stick beneath the knot, and twist it after the pulse is no long-
 i ; to be felt  at  the  wrist.   Your instruments should be laid
 regularly on a tahle, within reach of your hand.
   Let on°. support the lower end ef the  arm, and at the same
 time aueiher draw .;p the skin,  l.'ow with the large knife
 make one  cut straight around the limb  through  tl.e skin and
 fat only.   Then wb.h the small knife separate as much of the
 i-dcin from  th°: flesh above (he cut as will form a  flap lo cover
 •the face of the stum;-, (urn this back, and let it be held by an
 aaaii-dac.  With the large knifo make a  second incision round
 the arm and  down to the bone, as close as you can to the skin
 vou have turned back, taking care;  not  to cut it.  Now pass
 the arm  through the slit piece  of linen, (retrac'or,) and  let
 the edges  pa.ss into  the ha.t  incision  down to the bone, and
 draw the ends so as  to keep (lie. flush up from the teeth of the
 saw ; the bone must now be sawed through, as near the re-
 tractor as can be conveniently.
   With the  hooks, or pincers you must  now seize and tie up
 every vessel  that bleeds, the larger first and  the smaller next,
 until they are all secured.   When this is done relax the stick
 a- little, if  a  vessel starts secure it as before.   The wound
 must now  be gently  cleansed with a sponge and warm water,
 and the stick relaxed.  If no  vessel bleeds, break off any
 slivers of bone that may be on  the end of (he bone, bring the
 fop over the end of  the stump, draw its edges together, and
 secure, them  with  the  straps of adhesive plaster, leaving tbe
                           38 
446
SURGERY.
ligatures hanging out at the angles, lay the linen spread with
ointment or lard over these, and over the whole a pledget of
lint, and secure all by the bandage, put the patient to bed and
fay the stump on a pillow.
   The handkerchief and stick must be left  loose around the
limb, so if any bleeding happens, the attendant may tighten it
in an instant; when it must be undone, the bleeding  vessel
secured, and then done up as before.
   Sometimes the  ends of the  arteries cannot be got hold of,
or they are  diseased and  give away under the hook or pin-
cers ; sometimes  they are turned to bone.   In all of these
cases pass a needle with a ligature round the  artery, so that
when tied it will  include a portion  of flesh, along with the
artery.  If the weather is warm the bandage may be taken
off in three days, if cool, not sooner  then five or six ; they
must be soaked well with warm water and taken off with the
greatest care.  Clean dressings must then  be applied,  and
changed every two days.  The ligatures come away in twelve
or fourteen days, and if every thing goes on well, it will be
healed in three or four weeks.
   The thigh is amputated in  the same manner, and in either
case if the operator chooses, he may so direct the knife as to
cut obliquely upwards, that when the limb is removed the
wound will  be hollowing upwards ;  like a funnel.  Opera-
ting as low down as the case will admit.

       AMPUTATION  BELOW  THE KNEE.
   In the leg (he operation should be  made three  or four in-
ches, at  least, below the knee  pan.
   The tourniquet, or the handkerchief and stick must be ap-
plied two thirds of the way down the thigh.  The leg should
be properly held,  and the integuments drnwn  up,  while the
mrgeun with one  quick stroke  of (he knife  must divide the
*svi*i completely round the limb, cutting in such a  direction
nktt the knife will pass straight across the fore part of the leg,
Unit  rather lower on the calf of the leg, as the flap to cover
i»»e stump must mostly  be taken from the calf of the leg.
   The next thing is  to detach and turn back what skin ap-
i»c«»n> necessary to cover  the stump,  this the assistant must
uuI<S back while the operator divides the muscle down to the
trtrtse.  The next  thing is to pass a sharp knife between the
iwv bones,  and divide the ligament, &c, between them. 
SURGERY.
447
 Every part being  divided except  the  bones,  a  piece  of
 linen slit in three strips at one end are to be passed, the mid-
 dle tail between the bones, the other two, one on each side -of
 the bones, and all drawn gently upwards  so as to hold the
 flesh out of the way of the saw.  The bones must then be
 sawed through, being careful to have the limb  held steady,
 and not to sliver the ends of the bone.
   The vessels must he secured, (they are seldom more than
 three here,)  and the integuments brought over the bone, ar.d
 the dressings conducted as directed in amputation of the arm.
    The amputation of the fore arm is performed in  a similar
 manner, except this, that the incision must go straight round
 the arm, for all the bones of the arm are sufficiently surround-
 ed with flesh to form the necessary flaps.  The  compression
 of the artery must be made above the elbow joint.

  AMPUTATION  OF THE FINGERS AND TOES.
   A small semilunar incision must be made on the back of
 the finger  or toe to  be removed.  The wound must extend
 across the lower part of the joint; the lower or most convex
 part must be half an inch below the joint, and with a gentle
 curve towards each point or end of the incision terminating at
 the joint:  thus ).   Next the skin in front of the joint is to
 be divided and the two ends of this incision must meet those
 of that.
   Now bend the joint, and open the capsular ligament, and
 then divide the ligaments on the sides of the joint; the finger
 may now be dislocated, and any parts cut that remain undi-
 vided.  If the arteries bleed much they must be tied.  The
 flap must  be brought over the end of the stump, and straps of
adhesive plaster,  and the other dressings recommended ia.
 amputation of the arm must be applied here.

                     HARE LIP.
   This is generally a malformation  from the time of birth,
but in a few instances it is  the consequence of wounds.  If
 there is two fisures the intervening substance must be preserved.
The operation may be performed  at any age, it is exceeding
simple and may be  performed by almost any one, who wal
follow the directions hereafter given.
   The object  is to  make the wound smooth, and the edges
even as possible, that they may come together forming a nar-
                          3'8* 
443
SURGERY.
row straight line, in order that they may unite by adhesive
Scissors are not so  good as the knife  to cut the  margins, as
they bruise the fibres which they divide.
   The best plan is  to place any thing flat,  as a spatula, or a
piece of wood or pasteboard, underneath the lip, and then to
cut away the  edges of  the fissure with a sharp knife, or to
hold it with a pair of forceps, in such a manner that as much as
is  to be removed  may be situated at one side <jf the forceps,
>o that it can be cut away with one sweep of (he knife.
   This is to  bo done to both sides and the incisions must
meet at an angle above, thus  y^.
   The lips of the wound  must now be brought in complete
contact, and two silver  pins with steel points are introduced
through the edges of the wound; and a piece of thread is wound
round the ends of the pins, separately, from one side to the
other, crossing on the  top  in form of tho figure 8, this keeps
the edges of the wound in  even opposition.   The pins should
nevi-'r be introduced deeper then two thirds through the sub-
stance of the lip.  The pins may usually be removed in about
six days, tho part being afterward  supported by adhesive plan-
ter.

                     CATARACT.
   A cataract is an opacity of the crystalline lens, by which
the ravs of light are prevented from passing  to the retina.
   This speck  on, or opacity of the lens originates-and augu-
ments gradually,  for the most part.  Sometimes however  ii
is  sudden in its appearance, and rapid in its progress.
   The first observable effect is  a  mist before the eyes, gradual-
ly increasing in density so as to render things quite invisible
The opacity   when viewed  externally always  seems the
greatest in the middle.   But the  opacity is .seldom or neve:
so great as to exclude entirely the rays of I ght.
   When the lens is harder than in (he natural stale it is call-
ed a hard ovfirm cataract, when the substance of (he lens  is
converted into a whitish fluid it  is denominated a milky or
fiuid catai'act, when it  is of about the consistence of jelly  il
is  termed a soft or  caseous cataract.   When an opacity of
the capsule of the lens  takes place after an operation, it  is
called (he secondary membranous cataract.
   Causes.  Exposures to strong fires,external violence, and
inflammations of the eye produce it;  but it more commonly 
                        SURGERY.                    449

 arises spontaneously, though some children are born with this
 kind of blindness, in this case it is termed congenital cata-
 ract.
    Treatment.   Internal medicines have  liule or no effect in
 (his complaint.  The application of one or two drops of ether
 to the eye has had a good effect in some  instances, but they
 are generally cured  by removing the opake  lens, from  (lie
 axis of vision by means of a needle, called couching;  or by
 extracting (he lens from the eye, through a semicircular in-
 cision made at the lower part of the cornea.

            OPERATION OF COUCHING.
    If a  curved needle,is used, it is to be  held with the con-
 vexity of its curvature forward, its point backward, ancl its
 handle parallel  to  the patient's temple.  The patient must
 turn the eye towards  the nose, and the surgeon must keep it
 steady in this position with the  thumb and fingers of,the  left
 hand, being careful not to make  much.pressure on the eye, he
 is then to introduce the needle boldly through the opaque scle-
 rotica, not less than (wo lines back of (he  transparent cornea
 in  order to avoid the ciliary process.   The extremity  of the
 instrument is now to be guided  over the opaque lens, which
 is  now to be pressed a little downward with the convex  flat
 surface of the end of the needle, by which room is made to
 pass the instrument in front of the diseased lens ancl the mem-
 brane that  incloses it.
   Care must be taken to have a mark on the handle of  the
 needle, so as to know which way the point is inclined, and it
 must be kept turned back from  the iris.   The needle will
 now be plainly seen through (he pupil, and its point must be
 pushed as far as the inner edge of the  lens, then the operator
 is to incline the handle of the instrument towards himself, by
 which the point will be directed  through the capsule into the
 substance of the lens, and  on  moving  the needle downward
 and backward  the  membrane will be torn, and  conveyed
 with the lens deeply into the vitreous humor, where they are
 soon taken  away by the absorbents.
  When the cataract is fluid or milky, as soon as the cap-
 sule is pierced, it  flows out, so that the iris and instrument
 are concealed from view,  the object now  is  to lacerate the
capsule as much as possible.  The whole  will be very soon 
450
SURGERY.
absorbed after the operation and the eye left in a transparent
state.
  If the cataract is soft, not milky, and lighter than the vitre-
ous humor, so that it rises again  after depression, (he opera-
tor  must  be content, with tearing it as much  as  possible,
leaving the rest to absorption.
  If it is a secondary membranous one, the point  of  the
needle must  be  turned carefully towards  the iris,  and  the
membrane broken as much as is practicable, it will  be taken
away by  the  absorbent vessels.   In all cases where the lens
cannot be depressed below the  axis of vision, if the operator
choose,  he may push as much as is convenient, through  the
pupil into the anterior chamber  of the eye,  as it appears to
be sooner absorbed here than in the posterior.
  A straight needle is preferred by some operators of the first
respectability.

       EXTRACTION  OF THE  CATARACT.
  The knife should be straight,  sharp throughout its  whole
length upon the lower edge, and the upper edge thin,  but
only sharp for about one eighth of  an  inch from the  point.
The knife should be so constructed as to increase gradually
in thickness from the point to the handle by which means the
aqueous  humor will be prevented from escaping before  the
knife is cut out downwards, for if the aqueous humor escapes
prematurely the iris falls forward beneath the edge of the knife.
  The patient is to be seated in a low chair, and not in  too
strong a light as this will make the pupil contract too much.
The sound eye must be covered ; and this must be  observed
in couching.   The upper eye lid  is to be raised with the fore
finger, and pressed against the  upper edge of the orbit,  the
operator  should be seated, resting his foot on a stool, in order
that his knee may be raised high enough to support the elbow.
The knife is to be held like a writing pen, and ihe little finger
of the hand is to rest steadily on the out side of the cheek.
  When the eye is  still,  and so turned towards the outer
angle that the inner and inferior part of the cornea  can be
distinctly seen, the  operator  is to plunge  the knife into the
upper and outer part of this tunic, at the distance of a quarter
of a line from the sclerotica, and a little above the transverse
diameter of the cornea.
  If there is pressure made to  keep the eye steady, it must 
SURGERY.
451
 be during the above part of the operation, and the gentlest
 possible that will keep it fixed.   The broad part of the blade
 is between  the cornea and iris and its lower edge  below the
 pupil, so that the iris is not in much danger of being wounded,
 all pressure must now be taken off of the eye, but the lids
 must be kept open.   The blade is now to  be pressed slowly
 downward  till it has cut its way  out, and divided a little
 more than half of the circle of the cornea.
   The next thing is  to divide the anterior layer of the cap-
 sule of the  crystalline lens in order to allow the  lens itself to
 escape.  The division of the capsule may be made by the knife,
 or a needle made for the purpose, by passing it through the
 pupil.   The exit of the lens generally follows the  division of
 its capsule  very  readily, on very gentle pressure being made
 on the eye.
   When the capsule itself is  deprived of its natural transpa-
 rency, a very small pair of forceps  is used  for extracting it.

                       RANULA.
   This  is  an inflammatory  or  indolent tumor,  under the
 tongue.  These tumors are  of various  sizes and  degrees of
 consistence, in some instances the contents resemble the saliva,
 in others, the glairy matter found in the cells of swelled joints,
 sometimes a fatty matter is found in  them, and very  frequently
 the ducts of the glands  (the seat of this complaint) are filled
 with a stony matter.  They are caused by cold, inflammation,
 violent fits of the  tooth-ache, &c.
   These tumors  impede  the  action  of the tongue,  render
 mastification difficult, and the patient in speaking, croaks like
 a frog.
   Treatment, consists in laying the sack completely open
 and pressing out  the matter, and if it is of a bony consistence,
every particle must be removed by means of a small pair of
 forceps.  If the contents are found upon opening to be a fatty
 consistence, it  must be drawed forward with a hook and the
 whole  sack dissected out.  In either case  if there is much
bleeding, a dossil  of lint pressed into the wound will generally
stop it; but if it  does not, the patient must wash  the mouth
frequently with brandy, or  cold  water, reapplying the lint
immediately after using the brandy or water. 
452
SURGERY.
TAPPING FOR  THE  DROPSY,  OR  PARACEfr
                TESIS ABDOMINIS.
  This operation is performed for the purposo of discharging
the fluid collected in the belly, in dropsical cases.
  The proper instrument is a tracar with a canula (a tube)
through which the  fluid can readily escape.   But a common
thumb lancet will answer every purpose lo  make the punc-
ture with,  and a catheter immediately introduced into the
wound will permit the water to pass off, and answer in place
of the canula.
  The instrument must be introduced about three inches be-
low the navel,  inclining to neither side.   As soon as the in-
strument meets with no further resistance, it  is not to be push-
ed more deeply, but withdrawn, and the water allowed to
escape through  the canula, or if a lancet lias been used, the
catheter must be introduced.
  This is (he simplest of surgical operations, if performed in
the situation above directed ; there being nothing more (ha;-
a very thin tendinous part to penetrate.
   In  consequence  of the sudden  removal of (he pressure of
(he fluid on (he internal parts, patients are very apt to swoon.
and become affected with unpleasant and dangerous symptoms,
unless the abdomen  is compressed by a bandage passed round it,
which must be gradually tightened as the water is discharged,
after which a roller, or bandage over a flannel compress must
be applied in rather a tight manner.  This operation  may
prolong life and suffering, but I doubt its ever having effected
a cure.

THE  SAME  OPERATION IN  THE  THORAX OR
                       CHEST.
   This is performed for the purpose of giving vent to air.
water, matter,  or blood, by the pressure of which the func-
tions  of the lungs are dangerously obstructed.   When the
eavity of the chest is filled with water, the disease is termed
hydrops pectoris, when with matter or pus,  empyma.  It is
not an easy  matter  to  determine the necessity of this opera-
tion,  but if performed by a skilful band  it  is not dangerous,
and if you have experienced difficulty of breathing, the undu-
lation of fluid  upon moving in bed,  the ribs  of the affected
side becoming more arched  than natural, the face bloated,
sometimes the side and arm also, especially  if rigors follow a 
Surgery.
45J
high degree of inflammation of the lungs or pleura, and these
rigours are followed by the above described symptoms, and an
experienced surgeon deems it proper, let him cut a wound
about three inches in length through, the  integuments  being
first drawn to one side, then caliously through the flesh, and
lastly a small puncture through the skin that lines the inside of
the chest.  Making him be careful to pass the knife  neartheup-
ner edge of the lowest of the ribs betwixt  which lie operates,
he may avoid wounding the artery that lies  in a groove on
the lower side of the upper (and each)  rib.  After the matter
has escaped the integuments must be permitted to come back
to their natural po.-dtion  by which the orifice through the flesh
"into the thorax will be completely closed by the integuments;
as the  drawing of the integuments  to one  side in  the first in-
stance, will cause jho holes lo come in disopposition when the
jategments resume'rhelr natural situation.

                  ' TONGUE TIED.
   In infancy, the frrenum or string of the tongue may  some-
times extend too far forward, to the very exUeme  point of
the tongue, or it may not be of sufficient length to allow the
tongue to be raised from the  bottom of the  mouth.   In the
natural state, there is about a quarter of an  inch from  the
point backward,  which remains free, and unconnected with
the fraenum.   When this part is completely tied down so that
the child cannot suck, the frasnum may be divided ; but iw
no other case  is it ever necessary.  The prevalent notion
that every new-born child must undergo this  operation, is ns>
less ridiculous t dan dangerous; for it is very important that
the  lingual arteries, and particularly^ two veins, which are
known by their blue color, should be avoided.  When thes«
are wounded, they bleed so freely that infants have frequent-
ly died from  loss of blood.   When  the  operation become*
actually necessary,  the best instrument for performing it i*
a pair of sharp scissors  with  blunt  points.   But if a child
can suck, there is no danger but that it will talk fast enougk
at a proper age.

           DISEASE  OF THE TONGUE.
   Ulcers on the tongue are sometimes produced by the sharp
rough edge of a tooth.   File off the projection or roughnt?!
if the tooth be sound, and if carious, extract it. 
451                    SURGERY.
  Hardened swellings, or scirrhous tubercles on the tongue,
ending sometimes in  malignant cancerous  ulcers,  may be
treated like  other cancerous affections; a gentle course of
mercury will sometimes remove them; but cutting them out
with the knife when they first appear,  is the best  way of
treating them.  Other kinds of ulcers on the tongue may be
oured by  other means.
  Some ulcers which  are painful  and malignant, and sur-
rounded by inflammatory hardness, may be  cured by taking
opium, and gradually  increasing the dose.   Sometimes they
are cured by the long continued use of tartar emetic in small
doses, gradually increased.   The repeated application o f
leeches under the tongue has also effected a cure.  Unhealthy
ulcers on the tongue and tonsils may be caused  by violent
salivations.   When  that is  the  case, the  mercury must be
discontinued, and the mouth frequently washed with a solu-
tion of alum,  or a decoction of crane's bill root in water, and
small doses of sulphur and cream of tartar, should be taken
internally as often as two or three  times a week.

  DISEASES OF THE  TONSILS AND UVULA.
  The tonsils are liable to inflame, and where the swelling
thus produced occasions difficult breathing ancl swallowing,
it should be attended to immediately by scarifying the tonsils
with a lancet, and promoting the bleeding by  the use of warm
gargles.  When the tonsil becomes enlarged without being
inflamed, a portion of  it may be safely cut off with a pair of
scissors constructed  with short blades and king handles.
  When  the uvula becomes relaxed and unnaturally length-
ened, so as to interrupt swallowing and occasion uneasiness
in the throat, the superfluous part of it should be removed.
A slight relaxation,  however, may be generally cured by as-
tringent gargles, as infusion of roses, alum, tincture of bark,
            WOUNDS OF THE NECK.
  When  nothing  is injured  but the  skin  and muscles, a
wound of  the neck requires  no different  treatment from a
similar wound in any other situation ; but it  sometimes hap-
pens that those who attempt to commit suicide are desperate
enough to  cut deeper, by which the external maxillary, lin-.
gual, and  thyroideal  arties, are generally wounded ;  but it 
SURGERY.
455
is common for suicides to make their incision too high to en-
danger the main trunk of the corotid artery.   The only way
of saving life is to take up (he wounded artery and tie it on
each side of the wound.   A wound of the corotid artery is
apt to prove fatal before assistance can be obtained, and the
only alternative is instantly to tie the artery both below and
above the  wound.  But in passing the ligature around the
artery, remember that the eighth pair of nerves lies close to
it, in the same sheath of cellular substance.   If you include
this nerve in the ligature and tie it with  the artery,  instant
death is the consequence.  It lies on the outside of the artery,
between it and the jugular vain.   Mr. Abernethy's method
of tying the artery, is to make an  incision on that side of it
which is next to  the trochea, where no  important parts can
be injured, and where the finger can be introduced under the
artery so as to compress it; he there passes an aneurism
needle threaded with  a ligature behind the artery, and brings
up the eye part as close as possible to that edge of the artery
which is next to the internal jugular vein.   In this way there
is no risk of wounding the  jugular vein, nor of tying the
eighth pair of nerves.

WOUNDS OF  THE TRACHEA  OR  WIND  PIPE.
  When the upper part of the trachea is wounded and only
the fore part of it is cut through, it will generally do well by
proper treatment, notwithstanding its dangerous appearance.
  By bringing the patient's  chin downward and forward to
the sternum or breast bone,  and keeping the head constantly
in this posture by the support cf pillows, bandages, or any
other means, the  edges of the wound in the trachea may be
placed in contact and kept there until  they have grown to-
gether.   Stitches, in this case are not necessary, and as the
irritation from them would aggravate the cough and inflame
the wound, they are not to be used.
  When the trachea is completely cut off, and other parts are
not injured so as to render it immediately fatal, the bleeding
vessels are first to be  tied, and the two ends of the trachea
are then to be brought  into contact: and in order to  keep
them so, a suture now becomes necessary; but the needle
should not be introduced through the lining of the trcchea,
one stich is enough, and the chin must then be kept forward
as before directed, until the two ends of the trachea  have 
456
SURGERY.
grown together.   In order to guard against inflammation of
the part, antiphlogistic measure are also to be adopted.

         WOUNDS OF THE (ESOPHAGUS.
   The oesophagus is  the tube that carries the  food into the
stomach, and it is situated behind the trachea, it i* evident
that it cannot be injured with a cutting  instrument without
cutting off the whole of the trachea.  A total division of the
oesophagus must always be fatal from the injury of so many
nerves and  blood  vessels.   It  is stated, I owever,  by the
French surgeons, that  cases have been cured in which half,
or even  two-thirds of the tube were cut off.  Punctured
wounds of the oesophagus from stabs, may possibly not injure
the trachea, arteries, and nerves, in which case  t ey will not
be so dangerous, arid adhesive plaster to the external wound,
injecting nourishment and medicine into the stomach through
a tube  introduced down the  passage, is all that  can be done.

    FOREIGN BODIES IN  THE (ESOPHAGUS.
   Foreign  bodies are more apt to lodge in the upper or low-
er part of the  throat than in the middle of it.   When they
are low down or when they  fill up the  whole cavity, it is
generally necessary to force them  into  the stomach; but if
not, the substance may be extracted  with a  pair of curved
forceps, or witii a piece of wire doubled and twisted in such
a manner that the  bent end forms a noose of the shape of a
hook.  Or it may be extracted with a probang.  A probang
is made  by  fastening  a  bunch  of  thread, doubled so as to
make an immense number  of nooses, to the end of a long
piece of flexible whalebone.   By  introducing  this into tlie
throat, little bodies may become entangled in the nooses and
extracted when other means fail.  Or a piece of rag or sponge
may bo fastened to the whalebone  or stick,  and introduced
below  the substance as before.  When foreign  bodies in the
cesophagus can neither be extracted nor pushed downwards,
(he patient is either suffocated by compression of the trochea,
or inflammation, ancl sloughing takes place producing death,
or after exciting suppuration they  become loose and are ei-
ther thrown up or  carried into the stomach.   Sometimes for-
eign bodies, such as needles, &c,  after  making their way
through  the oesophagus, travel  a great way about the body, 
SURQEF.T.
457
and finally make their appearance at the surface, behind the
ears, the shoulders, feet, &c
   The  operation of cutting open the oesophagus (which is
called cesaphngotamy,) was successfully performed on a cow
by Dr. Blood of Worcester, Mass. from which we infer that
it may safely be clone on human  subjects when the probam
cannot remove  the obstruction.   Great improvements in sur-
gery are almost  constantly taking place ; and operations which
were once  considered beyond the  power of man,  are now
common occurrences.

                   TRACHEOTOMY.
   This is the operation of cutting into the trachea or wind-
pipe, for the purpose of introducing air to inflate the lungs in
cases of suffocation or drowning;  or in order to make an ar-
tificial opening  through which breathing may  be  carried on
when the natural passage for the air through the mouth and
nose is obstructed so as to endanger suffocation ; or in ercic v
to extract foreign bodies from the trachea.  When a foreign
substance has fallen into  the windpipe,  and the person is in
danger of suffocation, the trachea must he cut open, and the:
substance extracted, in order to save life.   The operation  h
q':ite simple ancl free from danger.  The integuments  are to
be divided with a scalpel or sharp knife, beginning die wound
just below the  inferior lobes of the thyroid gland, and ending-
it at a little distance above the sternum or breast bone..  The
sterno-thyroidci muscles are then to be pushed a little towards
the side of the neck, ancl a longitudinal (lengthwise) wound
oi the necessary size is then to be made  in the front of the
trachea.   The  knife must not be carried either to the  right
left hand, or in crdei' lo avoid all risk of injuring the large blood.
vessels.

                     WRY NECK.
   In this affection the  head is drawn towards one of the
shoulders, and the face is generally  turned towards the oppo-
site side.  TI13 head finally becomes immoveable and inca-
pable of being placed in its  proper position.   It is commonly
owing to a defect or want of action in the muscles that move
tlie head.   It may be occasioned by burns, &c. or attended
with a hardness and painful contraction of the muscles on one
side of the neck.  Sometimes a wry neck is caused by para- 
458
surgery.
lysis or palsy of the muscles on one side of the neck.   When
this is the case, electricity  will be likely to cure it.   When
the wry neck is caused by  a contraction of the sterno-cleido-
mastoideus muscle, the operation of dividing the  Contracted
muscular  fibres may be performed.   In other cases, campho-
rated mercurial frictions  till salivation takes place ; electri-
city;  stimulating  embrocations; the  shower bath; blisters,
issues, &c, and  opium  taken internally, are  the common
remedies,  which should be assisted  by mechanical contrivan-
ces for gradually  bringing the  head  into a straight position.

              RETENTION OF  URINE.
   This may be caused by  weakness or paralysis of the blad-
der ;  by a spasmodic closure of the  neck of the bladder;  or
by some obstruction in the  passage.
   When caused by paralysis or palsy of the bladder, the pas-
sage for the urine is open,  but the bladder has lost its natural
power of contracting, so  as to throw  off the  urine.   In this
case,  fifteen or twenty drops of the tincture of Spanish flies
should be  taken once a day in order to stimulate the bladder
to perform its  office ; a blister may  be applied to the sacrum,
or perineum, ancl cold applications  to the hypogastric region
are proper.  If these means fail, use the catheter in a stand-
ing posture, and  assist the action of  the  bladder  by gentle
pressure externally.
   Retention of urine from  inflammation and spasmodic con-
traction of the neck of the bladder, or urethra, may be caused
by strictures, violent gonorrhoeas, stone in the bladder, very
bad piles, fistula  in ano, the absorption of cantharides (Span-
ish flies) from  blisters, or  by taking too  large doses of the
tincture of cantharides.  The most powerful means  for re-
lieving it  are copious bleedings,  leeches to the perineum, or
vicinity of the os pubis, opium by the mouth, and in clysten^
warm bath, warm fomentations, a solution of salts of nitrOTi
eold water, taken in small doses, and frequently repeated, or
a  decoction of pumpkin seeds, may be taken in larger doses.
When these have been tried without  success, the urine must
be drawn off  with the catheter without  any further  delay.
This may be done either in a standing, or lying down pos-
ture.   The most important caution is never to force forward
the instrument when it is stopped by any abstacle, but with-
draw the  catheter a little,  and then push it gently onward m 
SURGERY.
4.W
 a different position, or if this does not answer, the fore finger
 of the left hand may be introduced into  the  rectum for  the
 purpose of supporting the membranous  part of the urethra,
 and guiding the extremity of the catheter.   When  no kind
 of catheter can be introduced, not even  a small one  made of
 india rubber, and all other means fail, the operation of punc-
 turing the bladder must  then  be performed, and should  not
 be delayed over forty-eight hours from the first.  The blad-
 der is  generally  punctured  either above the os pubis,  or
 through the rectum.

  L1THOMY, OR OPERATION FOR THE STONE.
   When a stone in the bladder is large, or irregular in its
 figure,  it occasions various complaints ;  an uneasiness is felt
 at the extremity of the urinary passage,  a sense of weight in
 tlie perineum, especially if the patient rides on horse back or
 sets much  upon a stool  or hard  chair ,  there is frequent in-
 clination to make water  and  go to stool,  the evacuation is at-
 tended  with pain, the water contains a good deal of mucous,
 and sometimes blood, and earthy particles, when the patient
 has taken exercise, and  there is  frequently numbness in i\w
 thighs.
   There is a disease of the prostrate gland (this gland is so
 situated, in the perineum, that it is generally set upon when
 riding on horse back, or upon leaning forward in a chair,)
 attended with symptoms analagous to the above, but with this
 difference  that the motion of a horse  or coach does not in-
 crease the pain of the diseased gland, while it does to an in-
 tolerable degree in cases of stone.
   But the surgeon never forms a decisive opinion in this ca»»
 until he has introduced a metalic instrument into the bladder
 and actually touched the stone itself.   The patient must not
 submit to the operation because" a stone has  been felt in th*
 bladder, but because it  is now  felt, when the operation is
 about to be  performed.
   Did people but  know  the  little pain,  and  the much lew
danger attendant  on this operation, thousands of sufferers
would be restored  to almost instant health, and hundreds of
valuable lives would be  prolonged, by the patient placing
himself on a firm table and resigning himself to the handsel"
the operator, and the event of the 
460
SUKGERY.
                     OPERATION.
   After the  patient is  seated  as above  two  garters, each
about two yards long are to be doubled and placed by means
of a noose around the patients wrists.   The patient must now
take hold of the outsme  of the foot with his hands in such a
manner that the fingers are applied to the soles.  The garter
must now be carried round the  ankles, t! e foot and hand in
such a manner as to tie  them securely together.
   Tie staff,  which is nothing more  than a director with a
groove for guiding a cutting  instrument into t! e bladder, h
now to be introduced.    It should be more curved  than the
common catheter, that it may be plainly felt in the perineum.
   The person who  holds the staff must make  its convexity
prominent in the  perineum by  keeping tho handle inclined
towards the  patients abdomen;  and Lt ivccj: turn the groove
a little toward the left side.
   The wound should commence over the membranous part
of the  urethra, at  the place where  the operator means  to
make the first cut into the groove of the staff;  and the incis-
ion is to extend about three inches downward a little to the left
of pe.dneum.   This incision is to b^ made  through the ii.tegu-
nieni.;, the next is to be made through the muscles (tran-wersa-
les pereaei,)  and membrane of the urethra, so that t! e groov*
and edges of the staff can be  felt with the finger.   The ope-
rator i>- ;iow to divide t.'is urethra with the knife as far cs
possible along the groove of Hi e staff totcards thebludder :
when this is done but little remains  to be accomplished by
the knife, (gorget.)
   The beak of the gorget must  be accurately adapted to the
groove of t!:e staff, in  which it is to slide  during the remain-
der of the operation.   The boak of the gorget  being now
placed in the groove of the suaT, the  operator is now to take
ioldof the handle of the st;-.ff with the left hand,  while with
the right he holds the gorget carefully in the'groove of the start',
he must now bring  forward  the handle of the staff so as to
elevate its extremity in  the bladder, and push the gorget on-
ward to the bladder, the utmost caution  being observed tw
keep the back of the knife in the groove of the staff.  If this
done there can be no other parts cut but those designed to be.
   The gorget must be withdrawn, (some withdraw the stall'
and leave tlie gorget in  for a guide to other instruments,) and
a proper pair of forceps introduced into the bladder, and the 
SURGERY.
461
stone taken hold of with the blades of the forceps.   But the
operator must not open the instrument  as soon as it is in the
bladder, he must first use the forceps as a probe to ascertain
the situation of the stone, this being felt, he is to direct the in-
strument in such a manner as his knowledge of the situation
of the stone will suggest, and opening them, is to lay hold of
the stone, taking care not to break it unless it is too large to
be extracted  through the  wound, and even then it will be
better to enlarge the wound.
   When the  operator has taken out all  the pieces he can dis-
cover with the forceps, be  should introduce his finger to feel
whether any  fragments  yet remain.   If  there do remain
fragments, and they  are small, the best plan is to inject luke-
warm water into the wound with moderate force for the pur-
pose of washing them out.
   The wound is now to be brought together and dressed after
the common manner of dressing incised wounds.
   The inflammation must be watched, and on the  least oc-
currence of tenderness of  the  abdomen,  copious  bleedings
must be practised  notwithstanding the pulse may be feeble,
for this  symptom attends all inflammations within  the abdo-
men.  The bowels must be opened with ceo.tor oil,  leeches
may be applied to the abdomen, together with the warm bath,
blisters  and emollient clysters.
   There are  several other  methods of operating for the stone,
each of which ha-:,  or has had its advocates.  But I antici-
pate the day  when this, the most useful of all surgical opera-
tions, will be performed with as little  pain, and clanger, as
the operation of venesection is.
   Were I to  submit to an  operation for the  stone, I would
direct my  operator to provide an instrument  so constructed
that by  means of a spring  it would  preserve the dilation of
the rectum.  And then with a proper knife, or trocar, intro-
duced through a canula, he should pierce through  the thin
coats of the rectum  and bladder, and extract  the stone  by
means of  forceps introduced through the wound thus made.
I would not fear the  formation of a fistulous passage through
which the water would ever  after pass, for a similar opera-
tion  is frequently performed to empty  the bladder of water,
and no such inconvenience is ever the  result.
   And I apprehend,  that by laying upon the belly for a few
days by which position the  natural  passage of the  water is
favored, that the wound will be healed, and the aggregate
                           29 
462
SURGERY.
suffering of the operation "will not be as  much as attends the
extraction of a tooth, and the danger nothing.

                  OF  THE  TEETH.
   There is no subject  within the scope of surgical scienec
that so much interests the great mass of community, in the
United States, as the preservation of the human teeth.
   And none it is believed, that is easier to obtain a knowl-
edge of, and which can be managed with greater ease  and
safety  by  every person, than the  art  of  preserving  the
teeth.

        Formation of the permanent set of teeth.
   The time required for the complete formation ancl devei-
opement of the permanent set of teeth is usually about twenty
vears from  birth.   The  permanent teeth  are larger and differ
in figure from those which are first  formed, and  are twelve
more in number, being sixteen in each jaw, these beginning
generally with the front  teeth, are succeeded by one another
as the jaw advances in growth, the last one on  each side ap-
pearing about the twentieth year.
   The  teeth are divided into four classes, viz. incisores, cus-
pidati,  bicuspides and molares.   There  are in each jaw in
front, four of the first kind; one next to  these,  on each side,
that are of the second class ;  two on each side, of the third
elass ;  ancl  three  on each  side, of  the fourth class.  These
permanent teeth, are at birth contained in membraneous sacs;
the teeth being then of a jelly-like substance, and are attach-
ed to the membranes which contain the first or temporary teeth.
At the  age  cf six or seven the permanent teeth growing frohj
beneath, the  first teeth  are pushed  from their sockets and
cast off.
   A tooth is composed of two substances, bone, and enamel.
This enamel is the outer covering of that part  of the  tooth
""■hich is not covered  by the gums;  the rest of the tooth is
»joue.   The bone of the tooth is formed  from the pulp, ancl
tots enamel from the investing membrane.  This membrane
»>xtetes a fluid, from  which a very  white soft substance is
»rt posited upon the bony  part of the crown of the tooth.   This
ex utst  is of a consistence not harder than chalk, but after-
wards seems  to undergo a process similar to crystalization.
ibis chalky substance f.vhich forms the  enamel is no longer 
SURGERY.
463
 deposited after the tooth has protruded through the enamel.
 When the enamel is perfectly formed, it is hard  enough to
 strike fire with steel.   The dental arteries are those which
 carry blood to the teeth ; they  are branches of the internal
 maxillary artery, which arises from the internal carotid.  It
 sends off numerous branches to the parts belonging  to both
 jaws, and to  the teeth of the upper jaw.   It then  gives  off
 one branch to the lower jaw called the inferior maxillary, or
 dental artery.   This enters the posterior (backside)maxillary
 foramen  (hole) of the jaw bone, passes through the maxillary
 canal and gives off branches to the fangs of each tooth, and
 also supplies the substance of the bone with blood.
    The fifth pair of nerves divides into three branches, which
 go to the eye, and the upper and lower jaw.
    Branches from the superior maxillary nerve,  (upper jaw
 ner^e) enter  the canal under the orbit,  and  form  the infra
 orbiter.   At  the  posterior  part, small filaments of  nerves,
 accompanied  by arteries, enter the upper  jaw bone by the
 foramina (holes)  which lead to the molares, (double tee'th or
 grinders,) and other branches go to the other teeth in the up-
 per jaw.
   The inferior maxillary nerve (lower  jaw nerve) passes
 through the foramen ovale (oval hole) of the sphenoid bone,
 and is distributed to the muscles of the lower jaw; this nerve
 sends off a large branch to  the  tongue, which produces the
 taste, and then  enters the maxillary canal of the lower jaw,
 passes through the bone under the alveoli and gives off branch-
 es wliich entering the fangs, ramify upon the membrane with-
 in the cavities of the  teeth;  it passes out  at the  anterior
 maxillary foramen and is spent about the  chin and lip.
   During the  formation of tlie second set  of  teeth, the fangs
 of the first or temporary teeth are dissolved  and taken up by
 the absorbent vessels.
   That species of articulation by which the  teeth are fixed
 in their sockets,  is called gomphosis ; that is, like  a nail in
 a board.  They are fastened there by a strong membranous
 covering  called periosteum, which is extended over the
fa ngs, and which also lines the socket.  There is every rea-
j*m to believe that the blood imparts nourishment to  the teeth
tlae same as it does to other bones.   It is observed  that the
teeth of old people gradually lose that whiteness which is
natural to them in the time of youth.   This is owing to a loss
 of those blood vessels which carry blood to the teeth, in con-
                           29* 
^64                    SURGERY.
sequence of a deposit of bony matter  in their cavities.   On
the same principle, when a tooth has once been  completely
loosened by accident or otherwise, and remains in the sock-
et, it will  become of a  darker color, on account of the loss of
its nourishment from the destruction of its blood vessels.
  The teeth, like other bones, are liable to inflammation,
which occasions a  morbid or unhealthy enlargement called
exostosis.   The chemical constituents  of the teeth may be
understood from what follows :—
  One hundred grains of the enamel of human teeth, care-
fully rasped, and decomposed by a chemical process, have
been found to consist of the following substances:
             Phosphate of lime              78 grains
             Carbonate of lime                6   "
             Water of composition and loss   16  "
                                            100
  One hundred grains of the  bone or  roots of teeth consist-
ed of
              Phosphate of lime              58 grains
              Carbonate of lime                4  "
              Gelatine                       28  "
              Water of composition and loss   10  "
                                            100

           SHEDDING OF THE  TEETH.
   The temporary teeth are only proportioned to the size of
 the mouth during childhood, and would therefore be too small
 and too few in number for the mature state of the body.
   As the pulps of the new teeth are placed behind  the tem-
 porary ones, it is evident that as they increase in size they
• will require an increase of room, to obtain which they must
 come forward so as to form a larger circle.  This effort first
 produces a pressure against the bony  partition between the
 temporary and permanent teeth, which causes an absorption
 of those parts upon which the pressure acts,  and as the new
 teeth continue to grow longer, the  fore part of  the socket is .
 taken up by the absorbents  and  carried  out of the system.
 This absorbing process is what gives the fangs of the shedding
 teeth the appearance of being broken, though when compar-
 ed with a fracture, there will be found to be  an essential dif- 
SURGERY.
400
  ference.  From the appearance of the temporary teeth after
  the fangs are absorbed, some people are apt to imagine that
  they have no fangs, and that they are pushed out by the per-
  manent teeth.  Now that this is a mistaken fdea, will appear
  plain by observing the state of the two sets of teeth.   The
  temporary are finally  fixed in their sockets, whilst the  new
  teeth, during their  growth, are contained in cavities larger
  than themselves, and can only make such pressure as their
  gradual increase will permit.  Hence, if the absorption of
  the old teeth be retarded, or the formation of the new ones
  take  place too quickly, the latter will take an improper di-
  rection when they come through the gums, and form partially
  a second row of teeth from the temporary ones still  remain-
  ing.   And further, if the old teeth were crowded out by the
  new, we should always find those teeth about to be displaced,
  forced  out of the line of the others, which never takes  place.
    Children begin to shed their teeth between the  sixth  and
  seventh year.    Those of the permanent teeth which ap-
  pear first, are the anterior molares.   Soon after the appear-
 ance of these, the two  temporary central  incisores of the
 under jaw are shed, and the permanent central incisors ap-
 pear in their place, one coming a little before the other.  In
 about two or three  months, the same teeth of the upper jaw
 come away, and are succeeded by permanent ones.
   In about three or four months more, the lateral incisores
 of the lower jaw are shed, and succeeded by permanent teeth
 of tlie same name.   The corresponding  lateral incisores of
 the upper jaw are the next that drop out, and the permanent
 ones appear shortly afterwards.   In about six or eight months
 more, the temporary molares begin to loosen; they generally
 come out before the cuspidati,  the long fangs of which take
 a much longer time to be absorbed.
  The first bicuspides take the places of  the first  molares,
 and about the time they appear,  the second temporary  mo-
 lares and the temporary  cuspidati become loose,  and after
 being shed, are succeeded by the permanent cuspidati, and the
 second bicuspides.

       IRREGULARITIES  OF THE  TEETH.
  In shedding the teeth it is seldom the case that the fang
of the temporary tooth is so much absorbed that the child  can
remove  it himself before the permanent tooth is ready to pass 
466
SURGERY.
through, in consequence of which,  the  new tooth takes an
improper direction, and generally comes through on the in-
side.  On removing the temporary teeth to give room for the
permanent ones, it is also sometimes found that, from seme
deficiency in the absorbing vessels, no absorption of the fangs
has taken  place—another cause producing irregularity of the
teeth arises from the space occupied by the temporary teeth
being too small for the permanent ones.   In this case, the ir-
regularity occasions great deformity in the appearance of the
mouth.
   The jaw of a child forms nearly the half of a  circle, while
that of an adult forms the half of an ellipsis, which is caused
by an elongation or lengthening of the jaw, which begins to
take place at about three years of age, and continues until
the eighteenth or twentieth  year, at which time the third
molares or dens sapientia (teeth  of wisdom) make their ap-
pearance.
   It is frequently necessary that nature should be assisted in
throwing out the temporary teeth ; and if this be done at the
proper time, the teeth will always take  a regular position.
But removing a tooth too early is more injurious than leav-
ing it too long.  A knowledge of the time when  a tooth ought
to be shed, (by referring  to the regular  progress in the ap-
pearance of the teeth, already described,) any improper ope-
ration of this kind will  be prevented.  But  the temporary
teeth are not always loose at the time they ought to be re-
moved ;  for sometimes  the  new tooth  passes through the
gum behind them, and they remain to all appearance firm in
the jaw.

  DISEASES ATTENDING  DENTITION OR THE
               CUTTING OF  TEETH.
   The excitement produced by the passage of the  teeth
through the gums in infancy, frequently occasions  the most
alarming  constitutional symptoms which sometimes terminate
in death.
   The mode in which the teeth pass through the gums is not
generally rightly understood; the common  opinion is,  that
as the teeth advance in growth,  they find their way through
the gums by their own mechanical pressure.   But this is not
true.  By the natural pressure from the growth of the tooth,
the investing membrane and gum, immediately over the tooth, 
                        SURGERY.                    46'

 are not cut through,  but  absorbed.  When the absorption-
 takes place  early, the child suffers no  inconvenience, tho
 teeth advance without any trouble, ancl are frequently dis
 covered with surprise.   But when the growth of the teeth ii
 too rapid for the absorption of the gums, dentition is often at-
 tended with much pain and derangement of the system.
    In all cases of indisposition arising from teething, the lanc-
 ing of the gums ought never to be neglected.   As soon as
 the gum is  lanced,  the tooth  obtains an increase  of  room
 the pressure is immediately taken off from the  socket, and
 the cause of irritation removed.  No injury to the tootii can
 possibly occur from the operation, and the escape of the blood
 is always beneficial  by  unloading the vessels, and thereby
 diminishing the inflammation.  The most convenient  instru-
 ment is a round edged gum lancet, but a common sharp pen-
 knife will answer the purpose.   The incision should be made
 quite down to the tooth, or else the membrane may be still
 left stretched over it, and  no other benefit will be derived
 from the operation than that which proceeds from  the bleed-
 ing.

       CARIES, OR DECAY OF THE  TEETH.
   It is most generally the  effect of external causes.
   An artery, vein and nerve  enter the cavity  of  the tooth,
 by a small orifice  at the extremity of the root, which nour-
 ish and give sensation to the tooth.   These vessels are liable
 to be inflamed by  all the causes that produce inflammation in
 other  parts; especially  by cold,  and an imprudent  use of
 mercury.   Inflammation always swells the part, and the de-
 gree  of pain is proportionate to the  resistance offered to the
 inflamed, by the surrounding parts.   Thus it is that the acute
 pain of toothache is produced by the swelling of the vessels
 and nerve, which  fill the cavity,  and come  in contact with
 the solid and unelastic tooth.   All external  irritants induce
 caries of the teeth, especially the lodgement of food between
 them.
  The caries extends toward the cavity of the tooth, till the
 membrane and its  vessels  and nerve, (vulgarly called the
 marrer,) are exposed to the action of external air, and mat-.
 ter, by which toothache is produced when the affection com-
 mences externally.
  The greatest care  should be  observed when taking medi-
cines, to keep it from the teeth, and to wash the mouth well, 
463
SURGERY.
   During the formation of the second set of teeth the great-
est attention should be paid to them, so as to keep them from
pressing too much upon  each other, and they  must also be
kept from coming in contact with any diseased tooth.   Should
a decayed tooth come- in contact with a  sound one,  it must
be extracted, or the decayed  part filed away.   The stumps
of teeth should always  be extracted, because they cause tec
other teeth to decay,  occasion gum-boils,  render the breath
offensive, and injure the general health.

            DISEASES OF THE  GUMS.
  .The gums,  in a healthy state, are of a red color, firmly
attached to the  necks of the teeth, passing between them,
extending upon the enamel,  and possessing but little sensi-
bility.  When diseased, and from accumulations about them
they become so sensible that the least pressure occasions pain.
   Scurvy in the gums proceeds  from unclean  teeth.   The
disorder is marked by the gums becoming redder than usual,
spongy, and bleeding from the slightest touch.   If gum boils
form they must be opened with a lancet as  soon as the swell-
ing, soft feeling and throbbing indicate that matter is formed,
but if the tooth is loose it must be extracted, ancl indeed ex-
traction of the offending tooth is the only sure remedy for
these boils.

                    TOOTHACHE.
   This is the  effect of caries, by which, in general, a part
of the crown of the tooth is removed and  the nerve is exposed
to the air and every species of matter taken into the mouth.
All the membranes and contiguous parts become affected in
the progress of the disease, sometimes terminating in suppu-
ration, and occasionally in a loss of some part  of the bone.
There  is such  a  remarkable  sympathy existing between the
•teeth, that frequently the patient cannot determine which is
the affected tooth; tlie  pain  frequently  extends to  the  ear,
ind  the fits are so frequent and violent that the person is un-
able to pursue his usual avocations.
   There is another disease which is generally  supposed to
have its seat in the teeth ; which is an affection of the nerves,
called tic douloureux,  which see.
   Great caution must  be used before extracting a tooth to
 ascertain the right tooth. 
SURGERY.
469
   The teeth may be examined by striking them with the end
of some instrument, or by picking the hollow part.
   Wearing of the  teeth is the natural effect of mastication,
by which the teeth become tender, for a time, but they soon
become insensible,  the vessels filling the  cavity with bony
matter.  Fractures of the teeth generally occur from injuries,
from blows, &c.  The practice  must be regulated  by the
extent of the injury.  If the fracture is confined to a point of
the tooth, nothing  is neccessary but to  remove the unequal
surface with a fine  file.  But  if the cavity of the tooth is en-
tirely exposed, the remainder of the crown should be removed
and an artificial tooth  engrafted.
   When a tooth is completely knocked out  and  not broken,
nor the socket injured, it should be immediatelv replaced, and
secured by threads around the adjoining  teetii.   But if the
soekets are  injured, entire removal is the only cure.

         EFFECTS  OF DISEASED TEETH.
   The teeth when affected  often communicate diseases to
the contiguous parts, especially to the gums immediately sur-
rounding the tooth; epulis, or  gum-boil arises from this cause,
the inflammation extending to the vessels, the circulation be-
comes impeded and matter is formed within the alveolar cav-
 ity (socket.) The disease/ifneglectedjfrequently.extendsdeep
 into the jaw bone, and a part of it suppurates and exfoliation
takes place.
  . Before  exfoliation  is  accomplished a constant uneasiness
prevails, and a continual discharge in the mouth  rakes place.
The matter thus formed, and  that which  is  constantly form-
ing in carious teeth, being swelled with the saliva, produce
difficulty of breathing,  pain in  the breast, dyspepsia, &c, and
iu two several  instances, I have known it to produce linger-
ing, but unavoidable  death.   Where these  boils form, thev
should be opened freely as soon  as matter is  formed, and if
they do not  heal readily the  tooth producing the mischief must
be  extracted:  if exfoliation  has taken place, the teeth con-
cerned must be extracted, and the pieces of  bone removed as
Carly as is practicable.

                        TARTAR.
  An earthy substance  held  in  solution  by the saliva, and
deposited upon the  teeth.   This tartar is small insects or ani-
•• 
470                    SURGERY.
 malcula.   This is  very injurious  to a  healthy state  of the
 mouth, or durability of the teeth.  This, after accumulating
 about the teeth, finds way under the gums, producing diseases
 of them, causing absorption of the  alveolar  processes,  by
 which the teeth  lose support,  and at  length by accident a
 large piece of tartar is broken off,  and  the tooth deprived of
 its artificial support, becomes loose, or even drops out.

   CLEANING  SCALING, OR REMOVING  THE
           TARTAR FROM  THE TEETH.
   This is generally termed scaling, and  is nothing more than
 removing the incrustations of the tartar, by means of a  proper
 instrument.  Every particle should be removed from the  in-
 side, between the teeth, from  the  indentures on the grinding
 surfaces, and from the outside :  and care must be taken not
 to injure the enamel or the gums.  If this be observed there
 can no pernicious consequences result from scaling.
   When tartar begins to form about the  teeth the mouth
should be frequently washed, especially after eating  or sleep-
 ing, for the preservation of the teeth consists more  in  clean-
 ing them than in all dental operations put together.
   Separating  the teeth  especially those in front,  is of the
 greatest utility, for every one knows that (hose persons,  whose
teeth are wide apart and kept clean, never complain of the
tooth-ache.   This is to be accomplished by filing, with a very
 fine fiie, the portions of teeth that are in  contact.
   Filling or stopping the teeth with pure  gold foil,  before
they are too much decayed, will save thousands of teeth which
would otherwise have to be extracted.
   In stopping a tooth, the cavity should  be cleaned of all ex-
traneous matter, as well as every particle of the decayed por-
tion and wiped out perfectly dry, then a piece of silver or gold
foil, is to be introduced, and carefully and firmly pressed in,
so as completely to  fill up the cavity ;  the superfluous parts
 arc then to be cut away, so as to allow the mouth to be  closed
without pressing upon it, the surface of the stopping  is then to
be polished.

         EXTRACTION  OF  THE   TEETH.
  This is  an  operation  frequently  performed by persons
wholly unacquainted with surgery, and  I have known many
such persons to  perform the operation completely too, and any 
SURGERY.
471
 person by  attending to the following directions will  be as
 well qualified to extract teeth, as the best surgeon in the union
 is.
   Select your instrument with  a claw  proportioned to the
 size of the  tooth, tor if it be  too large there will be danger of
 breaking away a portion of  the alveolar process;  ancl if too
 small it will be likely to break  off the  tooth  and leave the
 fangs remaining in the socket.
   Before the instrument is applied, the gum should be com-
 pletely separated from the neck  of the tooth with  a suitable
 lancet or sharp knife.
   The point of the claw should  be placed as  far as possible
 on the neck of the tooth, even quite down to  the jaw  bone,
 and the  fulcrum (covered  with a handkerchief or  cloth) be
 fixed a little below it on the  opposite side, resting against the
 gum.   The power is now to be steadily applied to the handle
 of the key until the tooth is moved, keeping the eye fixed on
 the tooth, in order  to change  the instrument to the opposite,
 or make any other  alteration that may be necessary.
   The attachment  to the jaw should be gradually overcome,
 not with a sudden and violent turn of the instrument as  is the
 practice of some.   After the tooth is fairly started, the hand
 must be gradually raised, at the same time turning the instru-
 ment, so as to draw the tooth as  nearly perpendicular as pos-
 sible.
   Sometimes the teeth are quite loose, and patient is led to
 believe,  the operation may be performed without difficulty or
 pain.  But this in  general they will find to be  a mistake.
   If the tooth is broken loose, but hangs by a portion of flesh,
 or a sliver  of the  bone, the operation will now be finished
 most conveniently with a pair  of forceps,  by taking hold of,
 and  raising the tooth strait  from  the socket, and dividing
 carefully whatever confines it to the gums.  The gums, after
 the tooih is removed, are to be gently pressed into the wound
 from each side.   Cold water is the  best thing  to take in the
 mouth after the extraction of a tooth, this will stop the bleed-
 ing, and prevent the liability of taking cold.
   The teeth may be turned either out or in ;  but it will be
 found most convenient to turn  the double  teeth in ; and the
single  or forward teeth out. 
473
SURGERY.
          SETTING  ARTIFICIAL  TEETH.
   If a front tooth is to be supplied, and still remains fn the
socket,  it must  be filed so a.* to leave it level with the
rest.  The natural cavity in the fang is then to be made of a
suitable size and depth.
   A similar hold is then to be drilled in the artificial crown,
and a pivot of the toughest wood inserted, so fixed as to enter
each cavity without much force where it will soon swell and
make the tooth permanent.  This pivot can be renewed when
necessary.
   In cases where no fang (root) remains, the crown may be"
so fitted as to set easy on the gums, ancl if there be more than
one, they should be neatly and firmly connected ; and at each
side  adjoining the standing teeth,  a clasp, or spring of pure
gold should be permanently fastened, the ends of which should
extend partially around the  permanent teeth, and if necessary
a small  hole may be drilled tluough each end of these clasps,
and a ligature of silk, or India grass passed through  them
and round the teeth and  secured by  a  knot on the Inside,
which can be renewed as occasion requires. 
A
GLO  SSARY
OR
              MEDICAL DICTIONARY;

   Containing an explanation of all the difficult terms used in
this work ;  together with the definition of most of the hard
words that occur in medical science.
■0000-
          ,   A
Abdomen, the belly.
Abortion, miscarriage.
Abscess, a tumor or swelling
   containing matter.
Absorbents, medicines to cor-
   rect acidity and  absorb or
   dry  superfluous moisture :
-   also  the  small,  delicate,
   transparent vessels  which
   take up substances from the
   surface of the body, or from
   any  cavity and carry it to
   the blood.
Abdominal, pertaining to the
   belly.
Abalienatio, abaliention, de-
   cay of the body or mind.
Abducent, the name of some
   muscles  that draw  parts
   back in an opposite  direc-
   tion to others.
Abductor, that which  draws
   from, or separates one mem-
   ber of the  body from anoth-
   er, as tlie
 Abductor indicismunus mus-
   cle,  draws the fore-finger
   from the rest  towards  the
   thumb.
 Ablution, to wash off.
 Abrasion,  to rub or tear of]'.
 Abc-ccdeniia, decayed parts of'
   the body.
 Abscision, the cutting  away
   of a part, with an edged in-
   strument.
 Absorption, the taking up  of
   substances applied  to the
   mouths  of  the absorbing
   vessels.
 Abstemious, temperate.
 Abstraction, to draw away.
 Accelerate, to hasten.
 Accession,  commencement;
   the accession of fever is the
   commencement of it.
Accretion,  nutrition, growth.
   The growing  together  ©f
   parts naturally separated, as
   the fingers and toes.
 Acescent, sour. 
474
GLOSSARY,  OR
Acetabulum,  from  acetum,
  vinegar:  because it resem-
  bles the cup in which vine-
  gar was held for the use of
  the table.  It is the cup-like
  cavity of  the  os innomina-
  tum, which receives the head
  of the tnigh bane.
Acetic acid, vinegar.
Acetate,  The union of acetic
  acid with any salifiable base;
  thus, the acetate  of  lead
  (sugar of lead) is made by
  combining lead with acetic
  acid, or vinegar; acetate of
  zinc,  by  combining  zinc
  with vinegar;  acetate  of
  potassa, by  combining  po-
  tassa with vinegar.
Acetum, vinegar.
Acetum  colchici,  vinegar of
  colchicum, or meadow  saf-
  fron.
Acetuni  scilla',  vinegar  of
  squills.
Achillis  tendo,  tendon of A-
  chilles. The tendon or cord
  of the  heel,  connected with
  the gastrocnemii  muscles.
  Because, as  fable  reports,
  Thetis, the mother of  Ac-
  hilles, held him by that part
   when  she dipped him in the
   river Styx, to make him in-
   vulnerable.
 Acid, sour.  The  principal
   acids are made by the union
   of oxygen or  hydrogen gas
   with  an acidifiable  base :
   thus, the sulphuric acid (oil
   of  vitricil)  is made by the
   union of sulphur with oxy-
   gen gas.
Acidifiable, capable of being
  converted into an acid by
  uniting with an  acidifying
  principle, as with  oxygen
  or hydrogen.
Acidity, sourness.
Acidulous, slightly sour.
Acoustic, relating to the ear,
  or to sound.  Or that which
  is used to restore the sense
  of hearing.
Acrimony, a  quality  in  sub-
  stances by  which they irri-
  tate, corrode, or dissolve.
Acromion, a process or protu-
  berance of the.scapula  or
  shoulder blade.
Adducens, (from ad, and du-
  co, to draw,) those muscles
  which draw the parts to-
  gether  to wliich they are
  connected.
Adductor, a  drawer  or  con-
  tractor.  The same as ad-
  ducens.
Adeniform, glandiform, or re-
  or resembling a gland.
Adenology, the doctrine of the
. glands.
Adeps, fat.
Adhesion, the  growing  to-
  gether of parts.
Adhesive, having the property
  of sticking.
Adipocire, a fat like substance
  formed bv the spontaneous
  conversion of animal  mat-
  ter.
Adipose, fatty.
Adipose membrane,  the  fat
   collected in the cells of the
   cellular membrane.
Adjuvantia, whatever assists 
MEDICAL  DICTIONARY.
475
   in preventing or curing dis-
   eases.
 Adnata tunica, a membrane
   of the eye.
 Adventitious, used in medi-
   cine in opposition  to the
   term hereditary: a disease
   which  is  not hereditary  is
   adventitious.
 Adynamia,  defect  of  vital
   power.
 jEther, a supposed fine subtile
   fluid.  Also a volatile liquor
   obtained by distilling' a mix-
   ture of alcohol with a con-
   centrated acid.
 JEthiops mineral, the black
   sulphuret of mercury.
 Aetiology, the doctrine of the
   causes of diseases.
 Affusion,pouring a fluid  upon
   something.
 Agenesia, impotency in man.
 Agglutination,  the adhesive
   union or sticking together of
   substances.
 Agrypnia,     watchfulness,
   sleeplessness.
 Ague cake,  a hard tumor of
   the spleen, caused by inter-
   mittent fevers. .
Aia, the wing of a bird. Also,
   the armpit.
Aia auris, the upper part of
   the external ear.
Ala nasi, the cartilage of the {
   nose which forms the outer
   part of the  nostril.
Ahaformis,   resembling  a
   wing.
Alaris, formed like a  wing ;
   as, musculus  alaris  exter-
   nus,  means  the  external
   wing-like muscle.
 Albuginea,  a  membrane  of
   the eye, and of the testicle.
 Albumen, in medicine,  it is
   coagulable   lymph.   The
   white of the eye contains it
   in abundance.
 Albumen ovi, the white of an
   peer
 Albus,  white, it is applied  to
   many parts from their white
   color, as linea alba.
 Aliment, nourishment.*
 Alimentary canal, a name for
   all those passages which the
   food  passes  through, from
   the mouth to the anus.
 Alimentary duct, the alimen-
   tarv  canal.   The thoracic:
   duct  is sometimes so called.
 Alkali,   a  substance  which
   combines wijth acids so as
   to  neutralize their activity,
   and produce  salts.   Potash,
   soda,   magnesia,  &c,  are
   alkalies.
 Alkalescent,  having the pro-
   perties of alkali.
 Alkohol, or alcohol, distilled
   and rectified spirits.  It was
   first obtained from the juice
   of  the grape, and  called
   spirit of wine; but the same
   thing is now extracted from
   grain, molasses, and sugar
   cane.    It  constitutes  the
   basis  of the spiritous liquors
   called brandy, rum, gin,
   whiskey, &c.
Almonds of the ears or throat,
   a popular name for the ton-
   sils. 
476
GLOSSARY,  OR
Aloetic, is applied to any me- j
  dicine in which aloes is the
  chief ingredient.
Alterative   medicines,  are I
  those  remedies  which are J
  given with a view to re-es- j
  tablish the healthy functions
  of  the  animal economy, j
  without producing any sen-
  sible  evacuations.    Some
  preparation of mercury, as,
  calomel in very small doses,
  is the alterative most gene-;
  ralfy  used.   There  is no
  question but that it does fre-
  quently produce, in this way
  a salutary alteration in the
  secretions of the body ; but
  the manner in which  this
  alteration is  effected is no j
  better known  to physicians
  than to others.
Alveolus,  a small cavity, the |
  socket, of a tooth.
Alvus, the stomach and bow- j
  els.
Alvine, relating to the bowels, i
Amalgam,  a substance  pro-'
  duced  by mixing  mercury
  with metal.
Amaurosis,  a  paralytic dis-
  ease  of  the  eye  attended
  with partial or total loss of
  sight.
Aynenorrhcea,  obstruction  of
   the menses  from   other
   caus?s than pregnancy and
   old age.
 Amentia, weakness  of intel-
   lect.
 Ammonia, so called because
   it is obtained from from sal
   ammoniac, which received
  its name from being dug out
  of the earth near the temple
  of Jupiter Amnion.
Ammonia gas, is an elastic,
  invisible,  alkaline air, of a
  pungent  smell,  and  acid
  taste; combined with water,
  it forms aqua ammonia,  or
  liquid hartshorn.
Amnion,  the internal mem-
  brane surrounding  the fce-
  tus.
Amnesia, forgetfulness.
Ana, in medical prescriptions.
  it means u of each."   It is
  generally  abbreviated thus.
  " aa."
Antcslhesia, loss of the sense
  of toned).
Analepiis,  a  recovering  of
  strength after sickness.
Ancdepiic,that which recovers
  the strength which has been
  lost by  sickness.
Analysis, the resolving of any
  substance into  its primary,
  or constituent parts, by che-
  mical action.
Anamnesis, memory.
Anamnestic,       whatever
  strengthens the memory.
Anaphrodisia, impotence.
Anasarca, a species of dropsy
  from a general accumula-
  tion of lymph in the cellu-
  lar system.
Anastomosis,  the  communi-
  cation  of vessels  with one
  another.
Anchylosis, a stiff joint.
Ancon, the  elbow.
Anconoid,  belonging to  the
   elbow* 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
477
 Androgynus, an hermaphro-
   dite.
 Anemia, flatulence.
 Angina, sore throat.
 Anima, a soul; the principle
   of life in the body.
 Animi deliquium, fainting.
 Annular, ring-like.
 Anodyne, a medicine which
   eases pain  and  procures
   sleep.
 Anorexia,  want of  appetite
   without loathing of food.
 Anosmia, a lo;;s of the sense
   of smelling.
 Antacid, that which  destroys
   acidity or sourness.
 Antagonist, aenked  to those
   muscles  which have oppo-
   site  functions;  flexor and
   extensor muscles are antag-
   onists to  each other ;  the
   flexor muscle of a limb con-
  tracts it,the extensor stretch-
  es it out.
 Anterior; before.
 Anthelmintic, whatever  de-
   strnys worms.
 Anaiomy, a dissection or cut-
   ting up;  the science which
  explain;; the structure, situ-
  ation, and uses, of the parts
  of an organized body.
 Antihelix, the inner circle of
  the external ear.
 Antihysteric,  that which  re-
  lieves hysterics.
 Antimonial, a composition in
  which antimony is the chief
  ingredient.
Antinephritic, a remedy  for
  kidney complaints.
Antiscorbutic,  a  remedy for
   the scurvy.
Antiseptic, good against mor-
   tification.
Antispasmodic, having  the
   power of allaying spasm.
Anus, the rectum or funda-
   ment ; the lower extremity
   of the great intestine.
Aorta, the great artery of the
   body, which arises from the
   left ventricle of the  heart,
   forms  a curvature  in the
   chest, and descends into the
   abdomen.
Apex, the extremity of a part;
   as, the apex of the tongue,
   or nose.
Aphorda, a suppression of the
   voice.
Aphorism, a short maxim.
Aphtha,  tore  mouth;  the
  "thrush.
Aponsvrosis, a tendinous ex-
   pansion.
Apophysis, a process, projec-
   tion,  or protuberance of a
   bone beyond a plain surface.
Apyrexia, without fever ; the
  intermission of feverish heat.
Aqua, water.
Aqua ammonia, water of am-
   monia, hartshorn.
Aqua fortis,  strong  waiter,
   nitric acid.
Aqueous, watery.
Aqueous humor,  the Watery
   fluid which fills both cham-
   bers of the eye.
Arachnoid, web-like.
Arachnoid membrane, a thin
   membrane of the brain be-
   tween the dura and pia ma-
30 
47S
GLOSSARY, OR
   tar.   Also the tunic of the
   crystalline lens and vitreous
   humor of the eye.
Ardent, burning hot.   Appli-
   ed to fevers, alcohol, &c.
Ardor, a burning heat.
Ardor febrdis, feverish heat.
Ardor urince, scalding of the
   urine.
Argcl, crude tartar, as taken
   from the inside of wine ves-
   sels.
Argentum,  silver.
Argenti nitras,  or  argentum
   nitratum,  nitrate  of silver,
   or lunar caustic.
ArgiUa, white clay.
Argillaceous, of the nature of
   argilla.
Aromatic, that which  has an
   agreeable pungent taste, as
   cinnamon, &c.
Arleriotomy, the operation of
   opening an artery.
Arthritic, pertaining  to  the
   gout.
Arthritis, the gout.
Arthrodia,  that connexion of
   bones in which the head of
   one bone is received into the
   superficial cavity of anoth-
   er, so as to admit of motion
   in everv direction.
Ar'^e'cilcc,  the  connexion
   i bones \k.\\\ each other.
Arytenoid,  funnel shaped.
Asbestos,  a fibrous flexible
   mineral, resisting, to a great
   degree,  the action of fire.
Ascites, dropsy of the belly.
Asper,  rough.    Applied to
   mose parts which arc rough,
   i»a,linea aspera.
Asphyxia, the state of the bo-
   dy, during life, in which the
   pulsation of  the heart and
   arteries cannot  be perceiv-
   ed.
Asthenia, extreme debility.
Asthenology, the doctrine of
   diseases arising from debil-
   itv.
Astringent,  or  adstringent,
   that which contracts  the fi-
   bres of the body.
Atlas,  the  name of the first
   vertebra of the neck,  which
   sustain the head.
Atony, weakness.
Atonic, having  a  diminution
   of strength.
Atrophy, nervous consump-
   tion.
Atte?iwan?5possessing the pow-
   er of making t! e blood thin.
Attollens, signifies to lift tn\
   It is applied  to some mus-
   cles the office of which is to
   lift up the parts to which
   they are attached.
Auditory, belonging to the cr-
   gan of healing.
Aura,  any  subtile vapor or
   exhalation.
Auris, the ear.
Auricle, a little ear.
Aurum, gold.
-''.villa, the arm-pit.
Axillary, belonging  to  tl.u
   arm-pit.
Ax:s* the second  vertebra o«.
   the neck, called also denta-
   tus.
Axungia, hogs lard.
Azygos, single, without ale I- 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
479
  low.   Applied to  single
  bones, veins, muscles, &c.
Antiphlogistic, counteracting
  inflammation.
Adult, of full age.

             B
Bacca, a berry.
Balsami  oleum,  balsam  of
  Gilead.
Bark, is used by  way of emi-
  nence to signify  Peruvian
  bark.
Barometer, an instrument to
  v determine the weight of the
  air.
Bath, when a  pleasant glow
  succeeds the use of the tem-
  perate or  cold bath,  it is
  beneficial; if chilliness and
  headache, it  is  injurious.
Benzoic acid, flowers of ben-
  zoin.
Bibulous, attracting moisture.
Biceps, two heads.   Applied
  to such mrfscles as have two
  distinct origins or heads.
Bicuspidatus,   having  two
  •points.
Biscuspis, the  name of those
  teeth  which have double
  points.
Biennial, of two years dura-
  tion.
Bifidus, forked.
Bifurcate, to divide into two
  branches.
Bile or gall, a  fluid secreted
  by the liver  into  the gall
  bladder,  and  thence  dis-
  charged into  the intestines,
  for the purpose of promoting
  digestion.
Biliary, belonging to the bile.
Bilious, applied to those  dis-
  eases yvhich arise from too
  copious a secretion of bile.
Bistoury, any small knife for
  surgical purposes.
Bisulphate, a sulphate with
  an  additional quantity of
  sulphuric acid.
Bombic acid, acid of the silk
  worm.
Bougie, a long slender instru-
  ment made  of wax, or of
  gum elastic, introduced in-
  to a passage to keep it open
  or to enlarge it.        ^
Brachial,  belonging  to  the
  arm.
Breindy,  a spirituous 'liquor
  distilled from wine.
Bucca, the cheek.
Buccinator muscle, the mus-
  cle of the cheek which acts
  in blowing the trumpet.
Bolus, a  form of medicine in
  in a mass larger than pills.
Bulbous, of a bulb like shape,
  as the root of garlic or on-
  ion.
Bursa, a bag.
Bursa mucosa, a mucous bag,
  containing a kind of mucous
  fat,  to lubricate  tendons,
  muscles, ancl  bones, in or-
  der to render their motions
  easy.
  Cachexia, a bad habit of bo-^
    dy, known by a depraved
    or vitiated state of the sol-
    ids and fluids.
  Caecum, (from caecus, blind;
30* 
180                  GLOSSARY, OK
   - o called from its being per-
   orated at one  end only.)
   The  blind  gut.  The first
   portion of the  large intes-
    ;nes, placed  in the  right
    lac  region, about four fin-
   gers  breadth in length.  It
   a in  this intestine, that the
   ileum terminates by a valve
   called the valve of the coe-
   cum.
Calcareous, partaking of the
   n xture of lime.
(^aleium, the metalic basis of
   lime.
Calculus, gravel or stone in
   the kidney or bladder.
Calculous, stony or gravelly.
CaJ'ous, hard or firm.
!°~.' tharides, Spanish flies.
•'"a; illary, fine, bar-like.
{'citric, the principle of beat.
Cat. ine teeth,  the four eye
  teeth are so called from their
   a semblance to those of the
  c g.
Capsule  of the  joints, or
  capsular ligament, a mem-
  br.meous  covering which
  oneloses  the  joints like  a
  bag.
Car ious,   rotten.    Applied
  principally to the bones and
  teeth.
Carminatives,  medicines for
  dispelling wind.
Cataplasm, a plaster.
Cardia, the heart.
Carditis, inflammation of the
   heart.
Catharsis, purgation of the
   excrements or humors,  ei-
   ther medically or naturally.
 Cathartic,   a  purge;   thaf
   which purges.
 Catholicon, a universal med-
   icine.
 Catheter, a  pipe to  draw off
   urine.
 Caustics,   burning  applica-
   tions.
 Cautery, the act  of burning
   with a caustic, or hot iron.
 Cutaneous, belonging  to the
   skin.
 Characteristic,  a mark, sign,
   token.
 Charcoal,  a  coal  made by
   burning wood under turf or
   otherwise.
 Chronic, slow, lingering ;  in.
   opposition to acute.
 Chyle, a milky  fluid, separa-
   ted from the aliment in the
   intestines, mixing with, and
   forming blood.
 Circulation, the motion of the
   blood which is propelled bv
   the heart  through the  arte-
   ries,  and  returned by the
   veins.
 Coagulum, a curd.
 Comatose, inclined to sleep.
 Compress, several  folds of a
   linen rag.
 Concave, hollowed out likeju
   bowl.
 Confluent„ running together
 Constipation,   obstruction,
  costiveness.
Contagion, infectious matter.
Contusion, a bruise.
Convalescence,  a state of re-
  covery from sickness.
Convex, opposite taconcave; 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
*f>-
    rising, like the surface of a
    globe.
 'Convulsion, a fit, a spasmod-
    ic contraction of the mus-
    cles.
 Cephale, the head.
 Cephalic,  pertaining  to  the
    head.
 Cerate, a composition of wax,
    oil, or lard, with or without
    other ingredients.
 Cerumen, the wax of the ear.
 Cervical,   belonging  to   the
    neck.
 Cervix, the neck.
 Chalybeate, of, or relating to
    iron.   A term given to any
    composition in  which iron
    is an ingredient.
 Chemosis,   inflammation   of
    tlie eye.
 Chirurgery, surgery.
 Chirurgical, surgical.
 Chlorate, a compound of chlo-
   ric  acid  with  a salifiable
   base.
 Chondros, or chondrus, a car-
   tilage.
 Chondrology, a discourse on
   the  cartilages.
 Chorea, St. Vitus's dance.
 Ckylopoietic, any thing con-
   nected with the formation
   of chyle.
 Chyme, the ingested mass of
   food  that passes  from  the
   stomach into the duodenum,
   and from  which  the chyle
   is prepared in the small in-
   testines by  the  admixture
   of the bile,  &c.
Vilia, the eyelids,  or eyelash-
  es.
 Ciliar, or  ciliary,  belonging
   to the eyelids or eyelashes.
 Cinchona, peruvian bark.
 Cceliac, belonging to  the hel-

 Collapse, a wasting or shrink-
  ingof the body or of strength
 Colliquative,  any  excessive
   evacuation  which  melt*
   clown,  as  it  were,  the
   strength of the body; hence^
   colliquative  sweats,  colli-
   tive diarrhea, &c.
 Collyrium, an eye water.
 Colon, the greater portion of
   the large intestine.
 Coma, a morbid  inclination
   to sleep; lethargic drowsi-
   ness.
 Compressor, that which pres-
   ses  together.   Applied  to
   those muscles which press
   together the parts on which
   they act.
 Concretion, the growing to-
   gether of parts which in a
   natural state are separate.
 Concussion, (from concutio,
   to shake together,)  concus-
   sion of the brain.
 Condyle, a round eminence
  of a  bone  in any of the
  joints.
 Confection, any thing made
  up with sugar.
 Congestion, a collection  oi
  blood or other fluid ; thus
  we say a congestion of blood
  jn the vessels, when they
  are over distended,  and the
  motion is slow.
Conglobate,  ball  or bunck-
  like. 
482
GLOSSARY, OR
Conglobate gland, is a gland
  formed of  a  contortion of
  lymphatic vessels,  connect-
  ed  together   by  cellular
  structure, having neither a
  cavity nor any excretory
  duct.                  j
Conglomerate,  heaped   to-
  gether.
Conglomerate gland, consists
  of a number of small glom-
  erate glands, the excretory
  ducts  of which all  unite in-
  to one common duct.
Constrictor, a name  given to
  those muscles which  con-
  tract any opening of the bo-
  dy.
Contraction, the act  of draw-
  ing together.
    on
t ontra-ijidication,  a symp-
  tom  attending  a   disease
  which forbids the  use of a
  remedy which would other-
  wise  be  employed ; for in-
  stance, bark  and acids are
  usually given in putrid fe-
  vers ; but if  there be diffi-
  culty of breathing or inflam-
  mation of any viscus, they
  are  contra-indications  to
  their use.
Cornea, the  sclerotic mem-
  brane of the eye is so called
  because  it is of a horny con-
  sistence.
CoronaZ,belonging to a crown
  or garland.
Coronoid, like a crow's beak.
Corpus, the body.
Corrosive, having the proper-
  ty of eating or corroding.
Corrugator, the name of mus-
  cles, the office of which in
  to wrinkle or corrugate the
  part on which they act.
Cortex, the bark of any thing.
Cortical,  belonging  to  the
  bark.
Coryza,  an  increased dis-
  charge of mucus from the
  nose.
Cosmetic,  that  which  im-
  proves the complexion.
Costa, a rib.
Costal is, belonging to a rib.
Couching, the operation  of
  removing the  opaque Jens
  out of the eye by means cf
  a  needle constructed  for
  that purpose.
Crepitus,  a   puff, or little
  noise.
Creta, chalk.
Cibriform, perforated like a
  sieve.
Cricoid, ring-like.
Cricoid cartilage, a round-
  like cartilage of the larynx.
Crico,  names  compounded
  with this word  belong to
.  muscles which are attached
  to the cricoid cartilage.
Corroborants,  tonics    or
  strengthening medicines.
Crisis,  a  certain period in a
  disease at which there hap-
  pens a decisive  alteration,
  either for better or worse.
Critical, decisive  or impor-
  tant.
Crista,  any thing  which has
  the appearance of a crest,
  like the  comb on  the head
  of a cock.
Crucial, cross-like. 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.              483
 'Crucible,  a chemical vessel
   made mostly of earth to bear
   the greatest heat.
 Crudity, rawness,indigestion.
 CruO.r,  the red  coagulable
   part of the blood.
 Cms, the  leg.  The  root or
   origin of some parts of the
   body from their resemblance
   to  a leg or root.
 Crura, the plural of crus.
 Crural,  belonging to the leg
   or  lower extremity.
 Crystalline, crystal-like.
 Cubit, the fore arm ;  that part
   between  the  elbow  and
   wrist.
 Cubital, belonging to the fore
   arm.
 Cuboid,  shaped like  a  cube.
 Cuneiform, wedge-like.
 Cynancke, sore throat.
 Cystic, belonging to the uri-
   tfary or gall bladder.
 Cystitis, inflammation  of the
   bladder.
Cyslotomia, the operation of
   cutting the bladder.
 Debility, weakness.
 Deciduous, falling off.
 Decoction, a  preparation  by
   boiling.
 Decumbent, inclining down-
   wards.
 Decomposition,  the separa-
   tion of the component parts
   or principle of bodies from
   each other.
Decussate, to cross each oth-
   er.
Deglutition, swallowing.
Deleterious, pois
dead-
 Deliquescent, having the pro-
   perty of attracting moisture
   from the atmosphere.
 Deliquiufn, a fainting.
 Delirium, lightheadedness.
 Deltoid, shaped like the Greek
   letter delta
 Demulcent, softening sheath-
   ing.
 Dens, a tooth.
 Dentition, teething.
 Denude, to make bare.
 Deobstruent, that  which re-
   moves obstructions.
 Dephlogislicalcd, deprived of
   the inflammable principle.
 Depression,  when the bones
   of the f.kull are forced in-
   wards  by  a fracture,  they
   are said to be depressed.
 Depressor, that which depres-
   ses.  Applied to a muscle
   which depresses the part on
   which it acts.
 Dessiccative, an application
   to dry up the humors and
   moisture  running  from a
   wound or ulcer.
 Desquamation,  scaling off.
 Detergent, cleansing.
 Diaphoretic, promoting  per-
   spiration.
 Diastasis, a separation of the
   ends of the bones.
 Diastole,  the  dilatation  or
   beating of the heart and ar-
   teries.
Diathesis, any particular state
   of the body ; thus, in in-
   flammatory  fever, there is 
484
GLOSSARY, OR
  an inflammatory  diathesis,
  &c.
Dietetic, relating  to  diet or
  regimen.
Digestive, that which pro-
  motes  the  suppuration of
  wounds or ulcers, as, warm
  poultices, &c.
Diluents, substances to dilute
  or make thin.
Diploe, the spongy part in the
  middle of the skull  bone.
Discutient, a repelling medi-
  cine.
Dispensatory,  a book which
  treats of the composition of
  medicines.
Dislocation, a joint put out of
  place.
Disposition, tendency.
Diuretic,  promoting  the dis-
  charge of urine.
Drastics,  active  or  strong
  purges.
Duodenum,  the first portion
  of the small intestines.
Dura mater, the  membrane
  which surrounds the brain,
  and  adheres strongly to the
  internal surface of  the cra-
  nium.
Dyspeptic, belonging to bad
  digestion.
Dysphonia,    difficulty   of
  speakh* .
Dysphagia, uifficulty of swal-
   lowing.
Dispncea, difficulty of breath-
   ing.
Dysuria, difficulty of urine.

             E
Ecchymosis,  extravasation.
  A black and blue swelling,
  either from a bruise or spon-
  taneous  extravasation of
  blood.
Effervescence, the agitation
  which  is produced by mix-
  ing those substances which
  cause the evolution of a gas.
Efflorescence, a  morbid red-
  ness of the skin.
Effluvia, exhalation.
Effusion, means  the escape
  of any  fluid out of the ves-
  sel or viscus naturally  con-
  taining it, and its lodgment
  in another  cavity, in the
  cellular substance, or in the
  substance of parts.
Elastic, springy.
Electricity.    " A property
  which  certain  bodies  pos-
  sess when rubbed,  heated,
  or otherwise excited, where-
  by they attract remote bo-
  dies, and frequently  emit
  sparks, or streams of light.
If a piece of sealing-wax and
  of dry warm flannel be rub-
  bed  against each other, they
  become capable of attract-
  ing and repelling  light bo-
  dies.  A  dry  and  warm
  sheet of writing paper, rub-
  bed  with India rubber, or  a
  tube of glass rubbed  upon
  silk, exhibits the same phe-
  nomena.  In  these  cases,
  the  bodies are  said to be
  electrically  excited;  and
  when  in a dark room, they
   always appear  luminous.
   If two pitch-balls be  elec-
   trified  by  touching  them 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
485
    with the sealing wax, or
    with the flannel, they repel
    each other;  but if one pitch
    ball be  electrified  hy the
    wax, and the other by the
    flannel,  they  attract each
    other.  The  same  applies
    to  the  glass and silk;  it
    shows a difference in the
    electricities of the different
    bodies,  and the experiment
    leads to the conclusion, that
    bodies similarly electrified
    repel each other ; but  that
    when dissimilarly electrifi-
    ed, they attract each other.
    The term  electrical repul-
 sion is here used merely to de-
 note  the  appearance  of the
 phenomenon,  the  separation
 being probably  referrible to
 the  new  attractive  power
 which  they  acquire,  when
 electrified,  for  the  air  and
 other surrounding bodies.  If
 one ball be electrified by seal-
 ing wax  rubbed  by flannel,
 and another  by  silk  rubbed
 with glass, those balls will re-
 pel each other; which proves
 that the electricity of the  silk
 is the same as that of the seal-
 ing wax.  But if  one ball be
 be  electrified  by the sealing
 wax  and  the other  by  the
 glass,  they then attract each
 other, showing  that they  are
 oppositely electrified.
  These experiments are most
 conveniently performed with
a large downy  feather,  sus-
 pended  by a silken thread.  If
an excited glass tube be brought
 near it, it will be receive and
 retain its electricity ;  it  will
 be first attracted and then re-
 pelled ;  and upon re-exciting
 the tube and again approach-
 ing it, it will not again be at-
 tracted, but retain  its state cf
 repulsion; but upon approach-
 ing it  yvith  excited  sealing
 wax, it will  instantly  be at-
 tracted, and remain in contact
 with the  wax  till it  has ac-
 quired its electricity, when it
 will be repelled, and in  that
 state of repulsion it will be at-
 tracted by the glass.  In these
 experiments,   care  must be
 taken that the feather remains
 freely suspended in  the  air,
 and touches  nothing capable
 of carrying off its electricity.
   The  terms   vitreous  and
 resinous electricity were  ap-
 plied to these two phenomena;
 but Franklin, observing,  that
 the same  electricity  was  not
 inherent  in  the same body,
 but that  glass  sometimes ex-
 hibited the same phenomena
 as wax, and vice versa, adopt-
 ed another term, and instead
 of regarding the phenomena
 as dependent upon two elec-
 tric fluids, referred them to tho
 presence of one fluid, in excess
 in some cases, and in deficien-
cy  in others.    To represent
these states, he used the terms
plus and minus,  positive  and
negative.  When glass is rub-
bed  with  silk,  a portion of
electricity leaves the silk,  and
enters the  glass ;  it becomes 
436
GLOSSARY,  OR
positive, therefore,  and  the
silk negative ; but when seal-
ing-wax is rubbed with flan-
nel,  the wax loses, and the
flannel  gains;  the  former,
therefore, is negative, ancl the
latter positive.
  All bodies in  natnre  are
thus  regarded  as  containing
the electric fluid, and when its
equilibrium is disturbed, they
exhibit the  phenomena just
described.    The  substances
enumerated in the following
table  become positively elec-
trified when rubbed with those
which follow them in the list;
but with those which precede
them  they become negatively
electrical.
Cat's skin,,     Paper,
Polished glass,  Silk,
Woolen cloth,   Gum lac,
Feathers,       Rough glass.
  When an insulated plate of
zinc  is  brought into contact
with  one of copper or silver,
it is found,  after removal, to
be  positively electrical,  and
(he silver or copper is left in
the opposite state.
   The  most oxidisable metal
is always positive, in relation
to the least oxidisable metal,
which  is  negative,  and  the
more opposite the metals in
these respects the greater the
electrical excitation ;  and  if
tlie metals be  placed in the
following order, each will be-
come positive by the  contact
of that which precedes it, and
negative by the contact of that
 wliich follows  it ;  and  the
 greatest effect will result from
 the contact of the most distant
 metals :
 Platinum,  Mercury,  Tin.
 Gold,      Copper,   Lead.
 Silver,    Iron,     Zinc.
   If the  nerve  of a recently
 killed  frog  be attached  to a
! silver  probe,  and a piece of
 zinc be brought into the con-
 tact of the muscular parts if
 the animal,  violent  convul-
 sions are produced every time
 the metals thus connected are
 made  to touch  each other.
 Exactly the same effect is pro-
j duced by an electric spark, or
| the discharge of a very nnall
' Leyden-phial.
   If a piece of zinc be placed
 upon  the tongue,  ancl a piece
 of silver  under if,  a peculiar
 sensation will be perceived
 every time the two metals are
 made to  touch.
    In these  cases the chemical
 properties  of the metals are
 observed to be  affected.   If a
 silver  and  zinc wire  be  put
 into a wine glass full of dilute
 sulphuric acid, the zinc wire
 will only evolve gas ; but up-
 on bringing the two wires in
 contact with each other,  the
 silver will also copiously  pro-
 duce air  bubbles.
    If a number of alternations
 be made of copper and silver
 leaf, zinc leaf, ancl (bin paper,
 the electricity excited by the
 contact  of the metals will be 
MEDICAL  DICTIONARY.
487
 rendered evident to the com-
 mon, electrometer.
   If the same arrangement be
 made with the paper moistened
 With brine, or a weak acid, it
 will  be  found, on  bringing a
 wire communicating with the
 last copper plate into contact
 with the first zincjplate, that a
 spark is perceptible,  and also
 a slight shock,  provided  the
 number of alternations  be suf-
 ficiently  numerous.  This is
 the voltaic apparatus  or bat-
 tery.   Several modes of  con-
 structing this apparatus of have
 been adopted, with a view to
 render it more convenient or
 active.   Sometimes   double
 plates of copper and  zinc sol-
 dered together, are cemented
 into wooden troughs in regu-
 lar order, the intervening cells
 being filled with water, or sa-
 line,  or acid solutions.
   Another form  consists  in
 arranging a row   of glasses,
 containing  dilute  sulphuric
 acid in each of which is placed
 a wire, or plate of silver, or
 copper, and one of zinc, not
 touching  each other,  but so
 connected by metallic  wires,
 that  the zinc of the  first cup
 may  communicate with  the
 copper of  the second;  the
 zinc  of the second with  the
 copper of the third ;  and so
 on throughout the series.
  The effects of electricity are
 exhibited  on  a  magnificent
scale  in  the  thunder storm,
which results from the accu-
mulation of electricity in  the
clouds, as  was first experi-
mentally demonstrated by Dr.
Franklin, who also first show-
ed the advantage  of pointed
conductors, as safe-guards to
buildings.   In these cases the
the  conducting  rod  or  rods
should be of copper, or iron,
and from half to three-fourths
of an inch  diameter.  Its up-
per  end should be elevated
three or  four feet  above the
hightc-t part of the building,
ancl  all the metallic parts of
the roof should  be connected
with the rod, wliich  should be
perfectly continuous through-
out,  and  passing  clown  the
side  of the building,  penetrate
several feet below its founda-
tion,  so as always  to  be im-
mersed in a moist  stratum of
of soil,  or if possible,   into
water.
   During a thunder  storm the
safest situation is in the  mid-
dle of a  room, at a distance
from the chimney, and stand-
ing .upon a woolen rug, which
is a non-conductor.  Blankets
and  feathers  being  non-con-
ductors,  a bed is a place of
comparative  safety,  provided
the bell-wires are not (oo near,
which are almost always mel-
ted in houses struck  by light-
ning.   When out of doors, it
is dangerous  to  take shelter
under trees ;  the safest situa-
tion is within  some  yards of
them, and upon the dryest spot
that can be selected. 
488
GLOSSARY, OR
   When  the sound  instantly
suceceds the flash, the persons
who witness the circumstance
are  in  some  danger;  when
the interval is  a quarter of  a
minute, they are secure.
   The discharge of electricity
in a thunder storm is some-
times  only  from cloud to
cloud;  sometimes  from  the
earth to the clouds; ancl some-
times from the clouds to the
earth ;  as one  or the  other
happens to be positive or nega-
tive."
Electuary,  see confection.
Elevator, the name of a mus-
   cle the office of which is to
   lift up the part to wliich it
   is attached. Also, the name
   of a surgical instrument.
Emetic, that which  excites
   vomiting.
Emmenagogue, that  which
   promotes the monthly evac-
   uations.
Emollient, softening.
Empiric, one  who practises
   the healing  art upon  expe-
   rience, ancl not theory.
   This is the true meaning of
the word ; but it is now appli-
ed in a very opposite sense, to
those who  deviate from  the
line of conduct pursued by sci-
entific and regular practition-
ers,  and  vend  nostrums, or
sound their own praise in the
public papers.
Empyreuma,  a peculiar  and
   offensive smell that distilled
   waters ancl other substances
   receive from being exposed
   to heat in closed vessels.
Empyreumatic,  of  a  burnt
   smell; thus empyreumatic
   oils are those distilled with
   a great heat and impregna-
   ed with a smell of the fire.
Emulgent, the artery ancl vein
   which go  from the  aorta
   ancl vena cava  to  the kid-
   neys are so called.
Emaciation, wasting of flesh.
Enamel, the outside covering
   of the teeth.
Endemic,  a disease  peculiar
   to a certain district.
Enervate, to weaken.
Emulsion, a soft and  some-
   what  oily medicine resem-
   bling  milk.   An imperfect
   combination of oil and wa-
   ter, by the intervention of
   some  other substance capa-
   ble of combining with both
   these  substances.
Emunctory,that which drains
   off; the excretory ducts of
   of the body are so termed  :
   thus the exhaling arteries
   of  the skin  constitute the
   great   emunctory  of  the
   body.
Enarthrosis,  the  ball  and
   socket joint;  a moveable
   connexion  of  bones,  in
   which the round head of one
   is received into the deeper
   cavity of another, so as to
   admit of motion in every
   direction.
Enema, a clyster.
Ensiform.  shaped  like   a
   sword. 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.              48$
 Enteritis, inflammation of the
    intestines.
 Entero, names compounded
    with this  word  belong  to
    things which resemble an
    intestine.
 Epigastrium, the part imme-
    diately over the stomach.
 Epiglottis,  the  cartilage  at
    the root of the tongue that
    falls upon the glottis or up-
    per  opening  of the  wind-
    pipe or  trachea. While the
    back of the tongue is drawn
    backwards in swallowing,
   the  epiglottis  is  put over
   the  opening,  shutting the
   passage, in order to prevent
   food or drink from passing
   down the windpipe.
 Epidemic, any disease  that
   attacks many people at the
   yirae season, and  in the
   same place.
 Epidermis,  the  cuticle  or
   scarf-skin.
 Epiploon, see omentum.
 Ej>ispastic, a blister;  having
   the qualities of a blister.
 Epistaxis,  bieoding  at the
   nose  with  pain  or fullness
   of the head.
 Epsom, the mme of a village
 •  in Surrey,  about  eighteen
   miles  from London,  near
   which there  is a mineral
   spring called Epsom water.
Epsom  salts,   sulphate of
   magnesia.  It was former-
   ly obtained by boiling down
  the mineral water  found in
  the vicinity  of Epsom in
    Surrey.   It  is at  present
    prepared from sea water.
 Epulatic,  that which pro-
    motes the formation of skin.
 Errhine,  that  which  excites.
    sneezing.
 Eructation, belching.
 Equilibrium, equal wight.
 Eruption, a discoloration, or
    spots on the skin ;  as the
    eruption  of  small  pox,
    measles,  nettlerash,  itch,
    &c
 Erythema,     inflammatory
    blush.   A morbid  redness
    of the skin, as observed up-
    on the cheeks of hectic pa-
    tients.
 Eschar, the portion of flesh
    that  is destroyed by the ap-
    plication of a caustic,  and
    which sloughs away.
 Escharotic,  caustic,   corro-
   sive.
! Esculent,   eatable,  irood  for
   food.
 Etherial,  a term applied to
   any highly rectified esssen-
   tail oil or spirit.
 Ethmoid,  sieve-like.
 Eupeptic, that which is easy
   of digestion.
 Exacerbation, the increase of
   any disease.
 Exanthemata, all diseases be-
   ginning  with fever and fol-
   lowed by an eruption on the
   skin.
 Excitability,  that  conditions
   of living  bodies wherein
   they can be made to exhib-
   it the functions  and phe-
   nomena,  which distinguish 
490
GLOSSARY, OR
  them from inanimate mat-
  ter.   Or, it may be said to
  be the capacity of organiz-
  ed beings to  be  affected by
  various agents called excit-
  ing powers.
Exciting, that which has the
  power of  impressing   the
  solids, so as to alter their
  action,  and  thus  produce
  disease.
Excoriation,  an abrasion or
  loss  of skin.
Excrement, the alvine foeces.
Excretion,  the separation of
  those fluids from the body,
  that  are supposed to be use-
  less, as the urine,  perspira-
  tion, and alvine fcec
  the body, or some diseased
v  part of the body itself,—as
  the teeth, the cataract.
Extract, that which is obtain-
  ed  by boiling down  a de-
  coction, or  by evaporating
  inspissated juices.
Extravasation, a (erm  appli-
  ed  by  surgeons  to  fluids,
  which are out of their pro-
  per vessels.
Fascia, a bundle.
Fauces, a cavity behind  the
  tongue, palatine arch, uvu-
  la, ancl  tousils ; from which
  the pharynx and larynx pro-
  ceed.
Exfoliation, the separation of Febres, fevers.
  a dead  piece of bone from
  from the living.-
Exostosis, a morbid enlarge-1
  ment,  or  hard tumor of  a i
  bone.
Expectorant, that which pro- i
  motes the  expectoration or
  discharge  of  mucus from
  the lungs.
Exhibit, to  administer.
Extremities,  the arms  and
Febrifuge,  that  which  pos-
  sesses the property of abat-
  ing the violence of any fe-
  ver.
Femoral,  belonging  to   the
  thigh.
Femur, the thigh.
Fenestra,  i window, entry,
  or hole.
Fibre, a very simple filament.
  It is owing to the difference
  legs.                      i in the nature ancl arrangements
Expiration, that part of res-  of the fibres tbdt the structure
  piration  or   breathing  in ! of the several parts of animals
  which the air  is thrust out  and  vegetables diller,  hence
  from  the lungs.           j the barks, woods, leaves, &c,
Extensor, that which stretch-1 of vegetables, and th.e cellular
  es out.  Applied to  those  structure,  membranes,  mus-
  muscles which perform that | cles, vessels, nerves, and, in
  office.                    | short, every part of the body,
Extirpation, cutting out.     has its fibres variously consti-
Extraction, the taking of ex-1 tuted and arranged,  so as to
  traneous substances out of I form these different parts. 
MEDICAL  DICTIONARY.
491
 Fibula, tho smallest  bone of
   the leg.  It is situated on
   the outer side of the tibia,
   and forms at its  lower end,
   the outer ankle.
 Filament, in anatomy, it is
   applied to  a small  thread-
   like portion adhering to any
   part,  and frequently  syno-
   nymous with  fibre.
 Filtration, an  operation by
   means of means of which a
   fluid is  mechanically sepa-
   rated  from consistent  parti-
   cles merely mixed  with it.
   It does not differ from strain-
   ing.
   An apparatus fitted up for
 this purpose is called a  filter.
 The form  of this  is various,
 according  to  the intention of
 the  operator.  A  piece of tow,
 or wool, or cotton, suffed into
 the  pipe of a funnel, will pre-
 vent the  passage  of grosser
 particles,  and by that means
 render the fluid clearer which
 comes through.
   Sponge is stiil more effect-
 ual. A strip.of linen rag wet-
 ted and  hung over the side of
 a vessel containing a fluid, in
 such a manner as that one end
 of the rag  may  be immersed
 in the fluid, and the other end
 remain  without, below the
 surface, will act  as a syphon, j
 and ca.ry over the clearer por-1
 tion.   Linen  or  woolen sadis'
 may either be  fastened over |
 the  mouths of proper vessels,
 or fixed to a  frame,  like  a
sieve, for the purpose of filter-
ing.  All these are more com-
monly  used  by  cooks  and
apothecaries  than by philoso-
phical chemists, who, for the
most part, use the paper called
cap paper, made up without
size.
   As the filtration  of consid-
erable quantities of fluid could
not be effected  at  once with-
out breaking the filter of pa-
per, it is found requisite to use
a linen cloth, upon which the
paper  is applied and support-
ed.
   Some fluids, as  turbid  wa-
ter, may be purified by filter-
ing  through sand.   A large
earthen funnel, or stone bottle
with the bottom  beaten out,
may  have  its  neck  loosely
stopped  with  small  stones,
over w'lich smaller  may  be
placed, supporting  layers of
gravel increasing  in fineness,
and lastly covered to the depth
of a few inches with fine sand
all thoroughly  cleansed   by
washing.   This apparatus is
superior  to a filtering stone, as
it  will cleanse Water in large
quantities, ancl may readily be
renewed when  the passage is
obstructed, by taking out  and
washing the  upper  stratum of
sand.
   A filter for corrosive liquors
may be  constructed on  the
same principles, of broken and
pounded  glass.
Fimbria, a fringe.   In anato-
   my it .is applied  to curled 
492
GLOSSARY,  CR
  curled  membranous  pro-
  ductions.
Fissure, that species of frac-
  ture in which  the bone is
  slit, but not completely di-
  vided.  Also,  a deep and
  long depression in part.
Fistula, a  terra  in surgery,
  applied to a long and sinous
  ulcer  that has a  narrow
  opening, and which some-
  thing leads to a larger cavi-
  ty, and has no disposition to
  heal.
Ficsh, the muscles of animals;
  a common name for alt the
  soft parts  of an animal.   It
  >-. also applied to loaves,
  fruit, &c, which have the
  appearance or  consistence
  of flesh.
Flexor,  the name of several
  muscles, tho office of which
  is to  bend the  parts iuto
  which they are inserted.
Fkxuous, full of turnings and
  windings, a stem is so nam-
  ed which is zigzag, forming
  singles alternately from right
  to I a-ft and from bfi to right.
Flax, a dysentery.  It is also
  used to  • denote any  sub-
  stance or mixture added to
  assist the fusion of metals.
Fluxion, a term mostly appli-
  ed by chemists, to signify
  (be  change  of metals,  or
  other bodies, from the solid
  into the fluid state, by ap-
  plication of h eat.
Fadys, tee  child is so called
  iVotri the  fifth month till its'
   birth.  Previous to the fifth
  month it is called embryo.
Follicle, a small bag; applied
  to glands.
Fomentation, a sort of par-
  tial  bathing, applying hut
  flannels to any part, clipped
  in  medicated  decoctions,
  whereby  steams  are com-
  municated to the parts, their
  vessels *tre relaxed,ancl their .
  morbid  action  sometimes
  removed.
Font an el fontanel! a, or fans
  pulsatilis,  the  space  be-
  tween  the bones of the head,
  from  birth  until the third
  year of life.   The  larger
  space is in the fore  part of
  the bead, between the fron-
  tal and parietal bones ; the
  lesser  opaac is between tho
  parietal and occipital bones.
Foramen, a little opening.
Fomiies, a term  mostly ap-
   plied to  substances imbued
   with contagion.
Formula, a little form of pre-
   scriptions, such  as physi-
   cians direct in  extempora-
   neous  practice,  in distinc-
   tion from the greater forms
   in pharmaeopins, &c.
Fossa, a little depression or
   sinus.
Fraclure, a broken  bone.
Frenulum,   the   catai.eous
   folds under the apex or era!
   of the tongue, that connect
   tongue to the infra-lingual
   cavity.  It  is sometimes, in
   infancy, so short  as to pre-
   vent the child from sucking, 
MEDICAL  DICTIONARY.
493
   when it is necessary to cut
   it in order  to open  more
   room for the motion of the
   tongue.
 Frons, the  front part of the
   head, forehead.
 Fulcrum, a prop or support.
 Fuller's earth, an earth found
   in large  beds in  Bucking-
   1     l
   hamshire ancl Surrey, com-
   posed  of silica,  alumine,
   magnesia, lime, muriate of
   soda, a trace of potassa, ancl
   oxide of iron.
 Culmination, detonation.  A
   quick and lively explosion
   of bodies,  such  as takes
   place with fulminating gold,
   fulminating powder, and in
   the combustion of a  mix-
   lure of inflammable gas and
   vital air.
 Fumigation,  the application
   of fume to destroy conta-
   gions, miasmata or eiiluvia.
   The  most  efficacious sub-
stance for this purpose is chlo- i
 rine  ; next to it the vapor of I
nitric acid ;  and lastly, that of
the muriatic acid.  The fumes l
of heated  vinegar,  burning
sulphur, or the smoke of  ex-
ploded gun powder, are not to
be depended on for  counter-
acting contagion.  The air of
dissecting  rooms  should be
nightly fumigated  with chlo-
rine,  whereby   their  atmos-
phere wound be more whole-
some and agreeable during the
day.
Fetid, of an offensive smell.
Farinaceous, meally.
 First passages,  stomach and
   bowels.
 Flatulent, windy.
 Friction, the act of rubbing.
 Fungus, proud flesh.
 Funiculus, a little cord.
 Funis, a rope or cord.
 Furfur, bran. Also a disease
   of the skin in  which the
   cuticle keeps falling off in
   small scales like bran.
 Furfuraceous, bran-like.  A
   term  applied  to the bran-
   like sediment  occasionally
   deposited in the  ur.ne.
 Furor, fury, rage.
 Furunculus, a boil.
 Fusibility, capability of beir^
   me I ted ..u:
 Fusiform,  spindle-shaped or
   tapering.

             Ci
 Galaclirrhea, an  excess  or
   overflowing of the milk.
 Gall, the bile.
 Gall-bladder, an oblong mem-
   braneous receptacle, situa-
   ted undertlie liver, to which
   it is  attached in the right
   hypochondrium.
   It is composed of three mem-
 branes,  a common, a fibrous,
 and a villous membrane.   Its
 use is to retain the bile which
 regurgitates from the hepatic
 duct> there to become thicker,
 more acrid, and bitter, and to
 send, it  through the  cystic
 duct, which proceeds from its
 neck into the ductus commu-
nis choledochus, to be. sent on
to. the duodenum.
31 
494                  GLOSSARY,  OR
 Gall-stones,   hard  concrete
   bodies formed in the gall
   bladder of animals.
 Gangrene, the first state of
   mortification.
 Galvanism.    " A  professor
   of anatomy,  in the univer-
   sity  of  Bologna,  named
   Galvani, was one day ma-
   king experiments  on elec-
   tricity in his elaboratory :
   near   the   machine  were
   some frogs  that  had been
   flayed,  the  limbs of which
   became  convulsed  every
   time  a  spark was  drawn
   from  the apparatus.
   Galvani,  surprised at this
phenomenon,  made it  a sub-
ject of investigation, and dis-
covered that  metals,  applied
to the nerves and muscles  of
these    animals,   occasioned
powerful and sudden contrac-
tions, when disposed in a cer-
tain  manner.   He  gave  the
name of animal electricity to
this order of new phenomena,
from the analogy that he con-
sidered existing between these
effects and  those produced  by
electricity.
   The name animal electrici-
ty has been superseded, not-
withstanding the great analo-
gy that  exisls between  the ef-
fects of electricity  and  (hose
of Galvanism, in favor of the
katter term  ; which is not only
more  applicable to  the gene-
rality of the phenomena, but
likewise serves to  perpetuate »
the memory of the discoverer '
  In order to give rise to Gal-
vanic effects in animal bodies,
it is  necessary to establish a.
communication between  two
points of one series of nervous
and muscular organs.   In this
manner a circle is formed,one
arch of which consists of  the
animal  parts,   rendered   the
subject of experiment, while
the other arch is composed of
excita(ory instruments, which
generally  consist of several
pieces, some placed under the
animal parts called supporters,
others destined  lo establish a
communication between   the
latter, are called  conductors.
To form a complete Galvanic
circle, take the th'mh of a frog,
deprived  of its skin ;  detach
the crural nerve, as far as thy
knee ; put it on  a piece  of
zinc ; nut the  muscles of  the
leg on a piece  of silver; then
finish the excitatory arch, and
complete  the Galvanic circle
by establishing a communica-
tion by means of the 'wo sup-
porters ;  by means of iron or
copper wire,  pewter or lead.
The  instant that the two com-
municators touch the two sup-
porters, a part of ihe animal
arch  formed by the two sup-
porters  will  be convulsed.
Although  this  disposition  of
the animal parts,  and of Gal-
vanic instruments, be most fa-
vorable to  the  developement
of the phenwmena, yet  the
composition of the animal and
e^itatory arch may be much 
MEDICAL  DICTIONARY.
496
tared.'   Thus  contractions
are obtained,  by placing the
two  Mipporti-rs  under  the
nerve, and leaving the muscle
out of the c.hv!.:, wliich proves
that nerves  (•.-scntially consti-
tute ihe  i r.mal arch.
   Itis.. >l necessisry for nerves
to I   en) re  in order  to  pro-
duce contractions. They take
plac - wlvuher the organs be
tied  or cut  through, provided
there evsfs a simple contigu-
ity b tween the divided ends.
This proves that  we cannot
strict! concludewhathappens
in muscular action,  from that
which takes place in Galvan-
ic phenomena ;  since,  if a
nerve be tied or  divided, tlie
muscles on  which this is dis-
tributed lose (he power of ac-
tion.
   If silver has been applied  to
nerves, and zinc to muscles,
the irritability of the latter in-
creases in  proportion  to the
time  they  have  remained  in
the  chain.   By this  method,
• he thighs of  frogs have been
revivified in some degree, and
afterward become sensible  to
stimuli, that before had ceased
to act on them.  By distribu-
ting the metals in an inverse
manner,  applying   zinc  to
nerves, and silver to muscles,
an  effect absolutely  contrary
»s observed  ; and the muscles
that possess die most lively ir-
ritability when placed in the
chair, seem to be rendered en-
tirely paralytic  if they remain
long in this situation.
  This  difference  evidently
depends on the direction of the
Galvanic fluid, determined to
wards the muscles or nerves,
according to the  maimer  u>
wliich these metals are di:;
posed, and this is of some im-
portance to be  known for tho
application of Galvanic means
to the cure of diseases.

      GALVANIC PILE.
  Volta's apparatus is as fol-
lows  :
   Raise a pile,  by placing  a
plate of zinc, aflat piece of
wet cord, and a plate of silver,
successively ; then a  second
piece of zinc,  &c, until the
elevation  is several feet high ;
for the  effects  are greater in
proportion to its height; thea.
touch both extremities of the
pile, at  the same instant, with
one piece of iron wire ; at the
moment of contact, a spark is
excited from the  extremities
of  the  pile,  and   luminous
points are after  perceived at
different heights, where tb«
zinc and silver come into mu-
tual contact.   The  zinc end
of this pile appears to be nega-
tively electrified; that formed
by the silver, on the contrary,
indicates  marks  of positive
electricity.
   If we touch  both extremi-
ties of the pile,  after  havifig
dipped our  hands into water,
;p 
496
GLOSSARY,  OR
or what is  better, a saline so-
lution, a commotion, followed j
by a disagreeable prickling in
the fingers  and elbow,  is felt.
  If we place in a tube filled
with water, and hermetically
closed  by two corks, the ex-
tremities of two wires of the
same metal which are in con-
tact  at the  other extremity
one  with  the summit, the
other with the base of the pile,
these ends,  even  when sepa-
rated only by  the space of a
few lines, experience evident
changes at  the instant the ex-
tremities of the pile are touch-
ed ;  the wire in  contact with
that part of the pile composed
of silver becomes covered with
bulla of  hydrogen gas;  that
which  touches the extremity
formed by zinc, becomes oxi-
dized, or gives off oxygen gas.
Fourcroy attributes this phe-
nomenon to  the  decomposi-
tion of water by the Galvanic
fluid,  which  abandons  the
oxygen  to  the   metal  that
touches the positive extremity
of the pile ; then conducts the
other gas invisibly to the end
of the  other wire  there to be
disengaged.

     GALVANIC TROUGH.
  This is a much more con-
venient apparatus.  Plates of
two metals,  commonly zinc
and  copper,  are fastened  to-
gether, and cemented  into a
wooden trough,  so as to form
a, number of cells; or earthen-
I ware  troughs with  partition •-
I being procured,  the metals
1 connected by a  slips, are sus-
 pended over these,  so that in
 each cell, except at the ends,
 there is a plate of each metal;
 then a diluted acid,  (usually
 the sulphuric, nitric, or muri-
 atic mixed with  from twelve
 to twenty parts of water,) is
 poured into the trough.   It is
 necessary that  ttie metals be
 placed  in  the  same  order
 throughout, or one series will
 counteract another.  The zinc
 end   becomes  negative, the
 copper  positive  ;   and  the
 power is in proportion  to the
 series :   and  several   such
 troughs may be  connected to-
 gether, so as to form a  most
 powerful apparatus.
   From the number of expe-
 riments of Davy,  manv  new
 and  important facts have been
 established,  ancl  Galvanism
 has been found one of the most
 powerful  agen(s in chemistry:
 by i(s  influence,  platina wire
 has been melted ; gold, silver,
 copper, and most of the metals,
 have easily been  burnt; the
 fixed alkalies, and  many of
 the earths, have been made to
 appear as consisting of  a me-
 tallic base, and oxygen ; com-
 pound substances,  which were
 before extremely difficult to
 decompose, are now, by the
 aid  of Galvanism, easily re-
 solved into their constituents.
   According  to  Ritter the
 electricity of the positive pele. 
MEDI2AL  DICTIONARY.
497
 augments, while the negative
 diminishes, the actions of life.
 Tumefaction of parts is  pro-
 duced by the former ; depres-
 sion of the latter.   The pulse
 of the hand,  he says, held a
 few minutes in contact with
 the positive pole,  is strength-
 ened ; that of the one in con-
 tact with tfie negative, is en-
 feebled : the former is accom-
 panied with a  sense  of heat;
 the latter with of feeling a cold-
 ness.  Objects  appear to  a
 postively electrified eye, larg-
 er,  brighter,  and red;  while
 to one negatively  electrified,
 they seem smaller, less  dis-
 tinct, and bluish,—colors in-
 dicating  opposite extremities
 of  the prismatic  spectrum.
 The acid  and alkaline tastes,
 when the  tongue is  acted on
 in succession by the two elec-
 tricities, are well known, ancl
 have been ingeniously account-
 ed for by Sir H. Davy, in his
 admirable Bakerian  lectures.
 The smell of oxymuriate acid,
 and  of ammonia, are  said by
 Ritter to be the opposite odors,
 excited by the  two  opposite
 poles ;  as a full body of sound
 and  a sharp tone are  the cor-
 responding effects on the ears.
 These  experiments   require
 verification.
   Consonant in some respects,
 though  not in all,  with these
statements,  are the  doctrines
taught  by a London  practi-
tioner, experienced in the ad- j
I ministration of medical elec-
 tricity.   He affirms that  the
 influence of the electrical fluid
 of our common machines, in
 the cure  of diseases,  may be
i referred to three distinctheads;
 first, the  form  of radii, when
 projected from a  point posi-
 tively  electrified ;  secondly,
 that of a  star,  or the negative
 fire, concentrated  on  a brass
 ball;  thirdly, the  Leyden  ex-
 plosion.  To  each of  these
 forms be  assigns a specific ac-
 tion.  The first acts  as a seda-
 tive, allaying morbid activity;
 the second, as a stimulant;
 and the third has  a deobstru-
 ent operation,  in  dispersing
 chronic tumors.  An  ample
 narrative  of cases is given in
 confirmation of these general
 propositions.   My own expe-
rience  leads me to suppose,
that the  negative  pale of a
Voltaic battery gives   more
poignant  sensations than  the
positive.
   The  most precise and inte-
resting researches on the rela-
tion between Voltaic electrici-
ty and the phenomena of life,
are those contained in  Dr.
Wilson Philip's Dissertations
in the Philosophical Transac-
tions, as well as in  his expe-
rimental inquiry into the laws
of the  vital functions,  more
recently published.
   In his earlier researches he
endeavored  to prove, that the
circulation  of  the blood and 
498
GLOSSARY,  OR
the action of the involuntary
muscles, were independent of
the nervous influence.
   The eighth pair  of  nerves
distributed to  the  stomach,
and subservient to  digestion,
were divided by  incisions  in
the neck of several living rab-
bits.  After the operation, the
parsley  which  they ate  re-
mained  without alteration  in
(heir stomachs; and the ani-
mals, after evincing much dif-
ficulty of breathing,  seemed to
die of suffocation.   But when
in  other  rabbits,  similarly
treated,  the  Galvanic power,
was transmitted along the
nerve, below its section, to a
disc of  silver, placed closely
in contact with the skin of the
animal,  opposite to  the stom-
ach, no difficult of breathing
occurred.  The Voltaic action
being kept up for twenty-six
hours, the rabbits were then
killed,  and  the  parsley was
found  in as perfectly digested!
a state,  as that in healthy rab-
bits fed at the same time ; and;
their  stomachs  evolved the
smell peculiar to that of a rab-j
bit during digestion.   These]
experiments   were   several |
times repeated similar results. I
   Hence it  appears that the i
Galvanic energy is capable of I
supplying the place of the ner-1
vous influence, so that, while I
under it, the stomach,  other-
wise inactive, digests food  as |
usual.   I am not,  however,
willing  to adopt  the  conclu-
sion drawn by  its ingeniou5
author, that the  identity  of
Galvanic  electricity and ner-
vous influence  is  established
by these experiments.   They
clearly show a remarkable an-
alogy between these two pow-
ers,  since the one may serve
as a substitute for the other.
It might possibly bemrged  by
the anatomist,   that  as  the
stomach is supplied  by twigs
of other nerves,  which com-
municate  under the place of
Dr.  Philip's section  of the
par  vagum,  the  Galvanic
fluid may operate merely as a
powerful stimulus,  exciting
those slender twigs to perform
such an increase of action, as
may compensate for the want
of the principal nerve.   The
above  experiments were re-
peated on dogs,  with like re-
sults ; the battery never being
so strong as to occasion pain-
ful shocks.
  The removal of dyspnoea, as
stated above, led  him  to try
Galvanism  as  a  remedy  in
asthma.  By transmitting  it?
influence from the nape of the
neck to the pit of the stomach,
he gave decided relief in every
one of  twenty-two cases,  of
which  four were in  private
practice, and eighteen in (he
Worcester  Infirmary.   The
power employed varied from
ten to  twenty-five pairs.
   The several  inferences de-
duced  by him from his multi-
plied  experiments,  are, that 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
499
 "Voltaic electricity is capable1
 of effecting  the formation  of
 the secreted fluids, when ap-
 plied to the blood in the same j
 way in which the nervous in-
 fluence is applied to it; ancl
 that it  is capable of occasion-
 ing an  evolution of caloric
 ■from arterial  blood.   When
 the lungs are deprived  of the
 nervous influence, by  which
 their function is impeded, and
 even destroyed, when  diges-
 tion is  interrupted, byv with-
 drawing  this  influence from
 the stomach, these  two vital
 functions are reuewod  by ex-
 posing them to tho influence
 iif a Galvanic trough. Hence,
 says he,   Galvanism  seems
 capable of performing  all the
 functions  of the  nervous influ-
 ence in the animal economy;
 but obviously it cannot  excite
 the functions  of animal  life,
'unless when acting on parts
 endowed  with the living prin-
 ciple.
   Gallois, an eminent French
 physiologist, had endeavored to
 prove, that the motion  of the
 heart depend entirely upon the
 spinal marrow, and immediate-
 ly ceases when the spinal mar-
 row is removed or destroyed.
 Dr. Philip appears to  have
refuted this notion  by the fol-
lowing experiments.  Rabbits
 were rendered insensible by a
blow on the occiput; the spi-
nal  marrow and  brain were
then removed,  and the respi-
ration  kept up  by artificial
means;  the motion  of the
heart,  and  the  circulation,
were carried  on  as  usual.
When spirit of wine or opium,
was applied to the spinal mar-
row or brain, the rate of the
circulation was accelerated.
   A  middle-sized,  athletic,
and extremely muscular man,
about thirty years of age, was
the subject  of the  following
highly   interesting   experi-
ments.   He was  suspended
from  the gallows nearly an
hour, and made no convulsive
struggle   after  he  dropped;
while a thief, executed along
with him,  was violently agi-
tated for a considerable time.
He was brought to the anato-
mical theatre of our university
in about  ten minutes after he
was cut down.   His face had
a perfectly natural  aspect, be-
ing neither  livid nor  tumefi-
ed ; and  there was no disloca-
tion of his heck.
   Dr. Jeffray, the distinguish-
ed professor of anatomy, hav-
ing on the  preceding  day re-
quested  me  (says Dr. Ure)  to
perform the Galvanic  experi-
ments, I sent  to his theatre,
with his  view, next morning,
my  minor  Voltaic  battery,
consisting of two hundred and
seventy  pairs  of  four inch
plates, with wires  of commu-
nication, ancl pointed metallic
iods with insulating-handles,
for the more commodious ap-
plication of the electric power.
About five minutes before the 
500
GLOSSARY, OR
police officers arrival with the
body, the battery was charged
with a dilute  nitro-sulphuric
acid, which speedily brought
it into a state of intense action.
The dissections were skilfully
executed  by  Mr.  Marshal,
under the superintendence of
the professor.

      Experiment  1.
   A large incision was made
into the  nape  of the neck,
close below the occiput.  The
posterior half of the atlas ver-i
tebra  was  then  removed by!
bone forceps, when the spinal
marrow  was   brought  into
view.    A  profuse  flow  of
liquid blood gushed  from the
wound,   innudating  the floor.
A considerable incision was at
the same time  made in (he
left hip, through the great glu-
teal muscle, so as to bring the
sciatic nerve into sight; and a
small cut  was  made  in the
heel.   From neither of  these
did any  blood  flow.   The
pointed   rod  connected  with
one end  of the  battery,  was
now placed in  contact  with
the spinal  marrow, while the
other rod was appl ied to ihe
sciatic nerve.   Every muscle
of the body was immediately
agitated    with   convulsive
movements, resembling a vio-
lent  shuddering  from  cold.
The left side was most power-
fully convulsed  at each  re-
newal of the electric contact.
On moving the  second rod
frum the hip to the heel, the"
knee  being  previously  bent,
the leg was  thrown out with
such  violence  as nearly to
overturn one of the assistants,
who in vain  attempted to pre-
vent its extension.

      Experiment 2.
   The left phrenic nerve was
now laid bare at the outer edge
of the sterno-thyroideus mus-
cle, from three  to four inches
above the  clavicle ; the cuta-
neous incision  having been
made by the side of the sterno-
cleido mastoideus. Since this
nerve is distributed to the dia-
phragm, and since it cornmu-
icates with the  heart through
the eighth pair, it was expect-
ed, by transmitting  the  Gal-
vanic power along  with  it,
that  the  respiratory  process
would be  renewed.  Accord-
ingly, a small incision having
been made under the cartilage
of the seventh  rib,  the point
of the one insulating rod was
brought into contact with the
great head of the diaphragm,
while the other point was ap-
plied to the phrenic nerve in
the neck.    This  muscle, the
main agent  of respiration, was
instantly contracted, but with
less force than was expected.
Satisfied  from  ample  experi-
ence on the living body, that
more powerful effects can be
produced in Galvanic  excita-
tation, by leaving the extreme
communicating  rods in close 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
501
Contact  with the  parts to be
operated on,  while  the  e-
lectric   chain or  circuit is
completed by running the end
of the wires along the  top of
the plates in the last trough of
either pole, the other wire  be-
 ing steadily immersed  in  the
 •ast cell of  the opposite pole,
 I  had immediate recourse to
this method.   The success of
it was truly wonderful. Full,
nay,  laborious breathing,  in-
stantly   commenced.    The
■chest heaved, and fell;  the
belly was protruded, and again
collapsed, with the relaxing
and retiring diaphragm.  This
process was continued, with-
out interruption, as long as I
continued the electric dischar-
ges.
   In  the judgment of many
scientific gentlemen who wit-
nessed the scene, this respira-
tory experiment was perhaps
the most  striking  ever made
with a philosophical apparatus.
Let  it  also be remembered
that for full half an hour before
this period, tlie body had been
well nigh drained  of its blood,
and the spinal marrow severe-
ly  lacerated.  No pulsation
could be perceived meanwhile
at the heart  or wrist;  but it
may be supposed, that but for
the evacuation of  the  blood,
tthe essential  stimulus of that
organ, this phenomenon might
also have occurred.
      Experiment 3.
  The supra-orbital nerve was
laid bare in the forehead^as it
issues through the supra-cilia-
ry foramen,  in the eyebrow ;
the one  conducting rod being
applied  to it, and the other to
the heel,  most extraordinary
grimaces were exhibited eve-
ry time  that the  electric dis-
charges were  made, by run-
ning the wire in my har,<i a-
long  the edges of  tlie last
trough,  from the ^SOth to the
270th pair of plates; thus fif-
ty shocks, each  greater than
the preceding  one, were given
in two seconds.   Every mus-
cle in his  countenance was
simultaneously  thrown  into
fea.rful  action ;  rage, horror...
despair, anguish, and ghastly
smiles,  united their hideou*
expression  in the  murderer^
face, surpassing far the wild-
est representations of a Fuseli
or a  Kean.   At this  period
several  of the  spectators were
forced to leave the apartment
from terror  or sickness, and
one gentleman fainted.

       Experiment 4.
   The  last  galvanic  experi-
ment consisted in transmitting
the electric  power  from  the
spinal marrow  to  the  ulnar
nerve, as it  passes by the in-
ternal condyle at the elbow :
the fingers now moved nimbly,
like  those of a violin perform-
er ; an  assistant  who> tried to 
503
GLOSSARY, OR
close the fist, found  the hand
to open forcibly, in  spite of
his efforts.  When  the one
rod was applied to a slight in-
cision in the tip  of the fore
finger, the  fist being previ-
ously clenched, that finger ex-
tended instantly; and from the
convulsive  agitation of  the
arm, he seemed to point to the
different  spectators, some of
whom thought he had come to
life.
   About an hour was  spent
•in these operations.
   In deliberating on the above
galvanic phenomena, we are
almost willing to imagine, that
if,  without  cutting  into ancl
wounding the spinal  marrow
and blood vessels of the neck,
the  pulmonary  organs had
been set a playing at first, (as
tproposed) by electrifying the
phrenic nerve,  (which  may
be  clone without any danger-
ous incision,)  there is a prob-
ability that life  might  have
been restored.   This event,
however little desirable with
of the blood.  It is known
that cases of death like leth-
argy,  or suspended animation,
from  disease and accidents,
have occurred, where life has
returned,  after longer inter-
ruption of its functions than in
the subject of the  preceeding
experiments.
  It is probable,  when appa-
rent  death  supervenes  from
suffocation with noxious  gas-
es, ,&c. and  when there is no
organic  lesion, that  a  judi-
ciously directed galvanic  ex-
periment  will,  if any thing
will,  restore the  activity of
the vital functions. Tlie plans
of administering voltaic elec-
tricity,  hitherto  pursued  in
such cases, are, in my humble
apprehension, very defective.
No advantages, we perceive,
is like to accrue from passing
electric discharges across the
chest  directly  through   the
heart and lungs.   On the prin-
ciples so well  developed by
Dr. Philip,  and now illustra-
ted in Clydesdale's body, we
a murderer, ancl perhaps con- should transmit alonglhechan-
trary to law, would  yet havejnei of the nerves, that substi-
been  pardonable in  one in-; tute for nervous influence, or
stance, as it would have been!that  power  which  may pcr-
highly honorable and useful chance  awaken its  dormant
to science.   From the  accu-! faculties.   Then, indeed, fair
rate experiments of Dr. Phil-1 hopes may be formed of deriv-
\p it appears, that the action ing extensive   benefit   from
of the diaphragm and lungs is I galvanism;  and of raising this
indispensable towards restor- wonderful agent lo its expect-
ing the  suspended  action of; ed rank among  the ministers
tlie heart and great vessels,' of health and life to man.
subservient to the circulation I    I   would,  however, bej; 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
503
  leave to suggest another nerv-
  ous channel, which I conceive
  to be a still readier and more
  powerful one to the action of
  the heart ancl lungs, than  the
  phrenic  nerve.   If a longitu-
  dinal incision be made, as is
  frequently clone for aneurism,
  through   the  integuments  of
  the neck at the  outer edge of
  Vie  sterno-mastoideus mus-
  cle, about half  way between
  the clavicle  and angle of the
  lower jaw;  then on turning
  over the  edge of  this muscle,
  we bring into view the  throb-
  bing carotid, on the outside of
  which, the par  vagun,  and
  great sympathetic  nerve,  lie
 together in one sheath.   Here
  therefore, they  may both be
 directly touched  and pressed
 by a blunt metallic conductor.
 These nerves communicate
 directly, or indirectly with the
 phrenic ;  and the superficial
 nerve of  the  heart  is sent off
 from the  sympathetic.
   Should, however, the phre-
 nic nerve  be taken,that of the
 left side is  preferable of  the
 two.  From  the  position  of
 the heart, the left phrenic dif-
 fers a  little in its  course from
 the right.   It passes over the
 pericardium, covering  the a-
 pex of the heart.
   While  the point of one me-
 talic conductor is applied  to
 the nervous cords above des-
 cribed, the other  knob ought i
 to be  firmly pressed against'
the side of the person, imme-1
 diately under the cartilage of
 the seventh  rib.  The  skin
 should be  moistened with a
 solution of common  salt, or,
 what  is better, a hot saturated
 solution of sal ammoniac, by
 which means,  the  electrical
 energy will be  more  effectu-
 ally conveyed through the cut-
 icle so as  to  complete the
 Voltaic chain.
   To  lay  bare  the  nerves  a-
 bove described, requires, as I
 have stated, no  formidable in-
 cision, nor  does it  demand
 more anatomical skill, or sur-
 gical  dexterity, than  every
 practitioner of the healing ari
 ought  to possess.  We should
 always bear in mind, that the
 subject of  experiment  is at
 least insensible  to pain ; and
 that life is  at stake,  perhaps
 irrecoverably gone.    And as-
 suredly, if we place the  risk
 and difficulty of the operations
 in competition with the  bles-
 sings ancl glory consequent on
 success, they will weigh at*.
 nothing, with the intelligen
 ancl humane.  It is  possible,
 indeed, that two small bras*
 knobs,  covered  with  cloth
 moistened with solution of sal-
 ammoniac, pressed above and
 below,  on  the  place  of the
 nerve,  and the diaphragmatic
 region, may  suffice, without
any surgical operation; it may
 first be tried.
  Immersion of  the  body in
cold water accelerates oreatly
the  extinction of like arising 
504
GLOSSARY, OR
from  suffocation ;  and  hence j
less hopes need be entertained I
of recovering drowned persons
after a considerable  interval,
than when the  vital heat has
been suffered to continue with
little abatement.  None of the
ordinary practices judiciously
enjoined by the humane soci-
ety, should ever on such occa-
sion be neglected.   For it is
surely culpable to spare any
pains which may  contribute,
in the slightest degree,  to re-
call the fleeting breath of man
to its cherished mansion.
  My attention has been again
particularly directed to this
interesting subject, by a very
flattering letter which  I re-
ceived from the learned Secre-
tary of the Royal Humane So-
ciety.
  In the preceding account, I
had accidentally  omitted  to
>tate a very essential circum-
stance relative to  the electri-
zation  of  Clydesdale.   The
paper indeed was very rapidly
written, at the busiest  period
of my public prelection, to be
presented to the society, as a
substitute for the essay of an
absent friend, and  was sent off
to London the morning after
it was read.
  The positive pole or wire
connected  with  the zinc end
of the battery, was that  which
I applied to the nerve; and
the negative, or that connect-
ed  with the copper  end, was
that which I applied  to the
muscles.   This is a matter of
primary importance as  the
following  experiments  will
prove:
  Prepare the posterior limbs
of a frog for voltaic electriza-
tion, leaving the crural nerves
connected, as  usual, to a de-
tached portion of the spine.
When the excitability has be-
come nearly exhausted,plunge
the limbs into the water of one
wine glass,  and  the crural
nerves with their pendant por-
tion of spine, into that of tlie
other.   The edges of the two
glasses  should  be almost in
contact.   Then taking  a  rod
of zinc in one hand, and a rod
of silver, (or a silver teaspoon)
in the other, plunge the former
into the water  of  the limbs'
glass, ancl the latter  into that
of the nerves'  glass, without
touching the  frog itself,  and
gently strike the  dry parts of
the  bright metals  together.
Feeble convulsive movements
or mere twitching of  the  fi-
bres, will be  perceived at ev-
ery contact.    Reverse  now
the position  of the metallic
rods, that is,  plunge the  zinc
into  the nerves' glass, and the
silver into the other.  On re-
newing the contact of the dry
surfaces of the metal now, ve-
ry lively convulsions will take
place;  and if the limbs  are
skilfully disposed in a narrow-
ish conical "glass, they  will
probably spring out to some
distance. This interesting ex- 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
505
periment  may be  agreeably
varied  in the following way,
with  an  assistant  operator;
let the person seize, in the
moist fingers of bis left hand,
the spine and  nervous cords
of the prepared frog ; and in
those of the right hand, a sil-
ver rod ; ancl let the other per-
son  lay hold  of one of the
limbs   with his  right hand,
while he holds a  zinc rod in
the moist fingers  of the left.
On making the metallic con-
tact, feeble convulsive twitch-
ings will be perceived as be-
fore.   Holding still the frog
as above, let them merely ex-
change  tii.1 pieces  of metal.
On  renewing the  contacts
now,  lively movements will
take place, which become ve-
ry conspicuous, if one limb be
held nearlv horizontal, while
the other  hangs freely down, j
At each touch of the  voltaic j
pair, the drooping limb  will:
start up, and strike  the hand
of the experimenter.
   It is evident, therefore, that
for the  purposes of resuscita-
ting  dormant  irritability  of
nerves, or contractility of their,
subordinate muscles, the pos- j
itive pole must be applied to |
the former, and the negative
to the latter."
Gargle, a wash for the throat.
Ganglion, a knot.
   In anatomy, it is applied to
a  natural  knotelike  enlarge-
ment in the course of a nerve.
In surgery, it  is  an encysted
tumor, formed in  the sheath
of a tendon, ancl containing a
fluid like the while of an egg.
It nicst  frequently occurs on
the back of the hand  or foot.
   Gas, an  elastic,  aeriform
fluid.   This term  is  applied
to all permanently elastic flu-
ids, simple, or compound, ex-
cept the atmosphere to which
the term air is appropriated.
   Some of the gases exist in
nature without the aid of art,
and may therefore be collected;
others,  on the contrary, are
only producible by  artificial
means.
  All gases are combinations
of certain substances, reduced
to the gaseous form by the au-
dition of caloric.  It  is, there-
fore, necessary to distinguish
in every gas,  the matter  of
heat which acted the part of a
solvent,  and   tie substance
which forms the basis of the
gas.
  Gases are not contained in
those substances from which
we obtain them in the state of
gas, but  owe their formation
to the expansive  property  of
caloric.

   FORMATION OF GASES.
  The different forms under
which bodies appear, depend
upon a certain quantity of ca-
loric,  chemically  combined
with them.  The very forma-
tion of gases corroborates this
truth.  Their, production to-
tally depends upon the combi- 
506
GLOSSARY, OR
nation of  the  particular sub-
stances with  caloric;  and
though  called  permanently
elastic, they  are only  so  be-
cause we cannot so far reduce
their temperature, as  to dis-
pose  them to  part  with  it;
otherwise  they  would  un-
doubtedly become fluid or sol-
id.
  Water,  for instance, is a
"olid substance in all degrees
below 32 degrees of Fahren-
heit's scale ;  above this tem-
perature it combines with  ca-
Loric, and becomes a fluid.   It
retains its liquid state under
the ordinary  pressure  of the
atmosphere, till  its tempera-
ture is augmented  to 212  de-
crees.  It then combines with
a larger portion of caloric, and
is converted, apparently, into
gas,orn! least intoelastic vapor;
in which state it would contin-
ue, if the temperature of our at-
mosphere  was  above 212 de-
grees.  Gases  are  therefore
■<olid substances, between the
particles of which a repulsion
ss established by the quantity
of caloric.
a very forcible affinity, and no
diminution of temperature, or
increase of pressure, that has
ever  yet been  effected, can
separate it from  them.   Thus
the air of our atmosphere, in
the most intense cold, or when
very strongly compressed, still
remains in the aeriform state ;
and hence  is derived the es-
sential  character  of  gases,
namely,  that they shall re-
main aeriform,  under all va-
riations of pressure and tem-
perature.
   In  the modern nomencla-
ture, the name of every  sub-
stance existing in the aeriform
state, is derived  from its sup-
posed solid base; and the term
gas is used to denote its exis-
tence in this state.
   In  order to  illustrate the
formation of gases, or to show
in what manner caloric is com-
bined with them, the follow-
ing  experiment  may  serve.
Put into a retort, capable  of
holding half a pint of water,
two ounces of muriate of soda
(common  salt;) pour  on it
half its weight of sulphuric &-
But as in the gaseous water' cid, and apply the heat of a
or steam, the caloric is retain-
ed with but little force, on ac-
count of its quitting the water
when the vapor is merely ex-
posed to a lower temperature,
we do not admit steam among
the class of gasses, or perma-
nently elastic aeriform fluids.
In gases, caloric is united by
lamp;  a great quantity of gas
is produced, which might be
collected  and retained over
mercury.  But to serve the
purpose of this experiment, let
it pass through a glass receiv-
er, having two openings, into
one of which the neck of tha
1 retort passes, while, from the
j«ther, a bent tube proceeds, 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
507
which ends in a vessel of wa-
ter.   Before closing the appa-
ratus,  let a thermometer be
included in the  receiver, to
show the temperature  of the
gas.   It will be found that the
mercury in the thermometer
will rise only  a few degrees ;
whereas the water  in tlie ves-
sel which  receives the bent
tube, will  soon become  boil-
ing hot.
    Explanation.—Common
salt consists of muriatic acid,
united with soda ; on present-
ing sulphuric acid to this un-
ion, a  decomposition  takes
place, especially when assist-
ed  by heat.   The  sulphuric
acid unites by  virtue  of its
greater affinity  to  the soda,
and forms sulphate  of soda, or
glauber's ;ah ;  the muriatic
acid becomes therefore, disen-
gaged, and takes ihe gaseous
form in winch it is  capable of
existing at  t :e common tem-
perature.  To trace the calo-
ric during this experiment, as
was our object, wc must re-
mark, that it first flows from
the lamp  to the disengaged
muriatic acjd, and converts it
iato gas; but  the  heat  thus
expended is chemically uni-
ted, and therefore not appre-
ciable by  the  thermometer.
The caloric, however,-is again
evolved, when the  muriatic
acid gas is condensed  by the
water, with which it forms li-
quid muriatic acid.
  In this experiment we there-
fore trace caloric  in a chemi-
cal combination producing gas;
ancl from this union we again
trace it in the condensation of
the gas, producing  sensible
heat.
   Such,  in  general, is the
cause of the formation and fix-
ation of the gases.   It may be
further observed  that each of
these  fluids loses or suffers the
disengagement  of  different
quantities  of heat,  as  it bo-
comes more or less solid in its
new combination, or as that
combination is capable of re-
taining  more  or  less specific
heat.
   The discovery of  aeriform
gaseous fluids has occasioned
the necessity of sorra* peculiar
instruments,by meansof which
those  substances may be con-
veniently collected and  sub-
mitted to examination.   The
principal ones far that purpose
are styled the pr.eiyi.iaiic ap-
paratus.
   The pneumatic trough is
made  either cf wood  or strong
sheet  iron,  tinned, japanned,
or painted.   A trougu of about
two feet  long, sixteen  inches
wide, and  fifteen high, ha.-.
been found to be sufficient for
most  experiments.  Two  or
three inches below its brim, a
horizontal shelf is fastened, in
dimension  about  half  or one
third part of the width of il>&
troufih.   In this shelf are sev-
eral holes; these  holes must
be made  in  the? centre of a 
503
GLOSSARY, OH
small excavation, shaped like| fluid heavier than air.   For
a funnel,  which is formed in | that  purpose, take  a widc-
the lower part of the  shelf, mouthed bell-glass, or receiv-
Th.is trough is filled with wa-'er ; plunge it  under the wa-
ter sufficient to cover the shelf! ter in  the  trough in order to
to the height of an inch.     ; fill it;  then raise it with the
   The use of this shelf is to.mouth downwards, and place
support receivers, jars, or bell-j it on the shelf of the  trough,
                             so as to cover one or more of
                             the holes in it.
                               It will now be full of wa-
                             ter, and continue so as long as
                             the mouth remains below the
                             surface of the fluid in the cis-
                             tern ; for, in this case, the wa-
                             ter is sustained in the vessel
                             by the pressure of the atmos-
                             phere, in the same manner as
                             the mercury is  sustained  in
                             the barometer.  It may wilh-
glasses,  which, being  previ
ously filled with  water, are
plaflid invertedly, their open
end  turned down  upon the
above mentioned holes, thro'
which the  gases,  conveyed
there ancl directed by means
of the funnel-shaped  excava-
tions, rise in the form of air-
bubbles into the receiver.
   When the gaseous fluids are
capable of being absorbed bv
water, as  is  the  case  with j out difficulty be imagined, that
 omeof them, the trough must j if common air (or any  other
be filled with mercory.   The
price and gravity of this fluid
make it an object of  conven-
ience and  economy,  that the
trough should be smaller than
when water is used.
  A mercurial trough is best
cut in marble, free-stone, or a
solid block of wood. A trough
about twelve inches long,three
fluid resembling  common air
in lightness and elasticity,) be
suffered to enter  the inverted
vessel  filled  with  water,  it
will rise to the upper part, on
account of its  levity, and the
surface of the water will sub-
side.  To exemplify this, take
a glass, or any other vessel, in
that state which  is usually
inches wide,  and  four  deep, j call empty, and plunge it into
is sufficient for all private ex
periments.
   Method of collecting gas-
es, and  transferring them
from one vessel to another.
   If we are desirous of trans-
mitting air fiom one vessel to
another, it  is  necessary that
the, vessel destined to receive
it be  full of water*  or  some
the water with its mouthdown-
wards;  scarce  any of  it will
enter the glass, because its en-
trance is opposed by the elas-
ticity of the included air; but
if the vessel be  turned with
its mouth upwards, it immedi-
ately fills, and the air rises in
bubbles to the surface.
   Suppose  this operation, be 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
509
 performed under  one of the
 jars or  receivers,  which are
 filled with water, and placed
 upon the  perforated shelf, the
 air will ascend in bubbles as
 before, but, instead  of escap-
 ing, it will  be caught in the
 upper part of the jar, and ex-
 pel part of the water it con-
 rains.
    In this  manner we see that
 air may be emptied out of one
 vessel into another by a  kind
 of inverted pouring, by which
 means it is  made  to ascend
 from the lower to the upper
 vessel.  When the receiving
 vessel has a narrow neck, the
 air may  be poured, in a simi-
 lar manner, through an inver-
 ted  funnel,  inserted  in its
 mouth.
   If the  air is to  be transfer-
 red f i :u a vessel that is stop-
 ped like a bottle,  the bottle
 must be  unstopped,  with its
 orifice downwards  in the wa-
 ter ; and then inclined in such
 a manner that its  neck may
 eome under the perforated ex-
i a ration  of  the shelf.  The
gas  will  escape from the bot-
tle, and passing into the ves-
sel destined to receive it, will
ascend in it  in the  form of
bubbles.
  In  whatever manner this
operation  is performed,  the
necessity of the excavation in
the lower  part of  the  shelf
may be readily conceived. It
is, as mentioned before, des-
tined to collect the gas which
                           32
  escapes from  the vessel,  and
  direct it in its passage towards
  the vessel adapted to receive
  it.   Without this excavation,
  the gas, instead ef proceeding
  to the place of its destination,
  would be dispersed ancl lost,
  unless the mouth of the re-
  ceiving vessel  were large.
   The  vessels,  or receivers,
  for collecting the  disengaged
  gases, should  be glass  cylin-
  ders,  jars, or   bell-glasses of
  various sizes ;  some of them
  should be open at both ends,
  others should  be  filled with
  necks at the top, ground per-
  fectly level, in  order that thev
  may be stopped by ground flat
  pieces of  metal,  glass, slate,
  &c, others should be  furnish-
 ed with ground  stoppers.—
  Some should be graduated in-
 to cubic inches, and subdivi-
 ded into decimal or other c-
 quidistant   parts.    Besides
 these,  common glass bottles,
 tumblers, &c. may be used.
   Classification  of gases.—
 All the elastic aeriform fluids
 with  which we arc hitherto
 acquainted,  are generally di-
 vided,  by  systematic writers,
 into  two   classes,  namely:
 those that are respirable and
 capable of maintaining com-
 bustion, and  those that are
 not respirable and incapable
 of maintaining combustion.
 This division, indeed,  has its
 advantage, but the term res-
pirable,  in its  physiological
application, has been v^ry dif- 
510
•GLOSSARY. OH
ferently employed by different
Writers.   Sometimes by  tie
respirability of a gas has been
meant its power of supporting
life, when repeatedly applied
to the blood in the lungs.  At
other times  all  gases  have
been   considered  respirable
which were capable of  intro-
duction into the lungs by vol-
untary efforts, without any re-
lation  to their vitality.  In
the last case, the word respi-
rable  seems to us most proper-
ly employed, and in this sense
it is here used.
   Non-respirable gases are'
thoss  which, when applied to!
(he external organs of respi-!
ration, stimulate  the muscles|
of the epiglottis in such a man-1
ner as to  keep  it perfectly j
close  on the glottis ; thus pre- j
venting the  smallest particle I
of gas from  entering into the j
bronchia, in spite  ef voluntary!
exertions.                   i
  Of respirable gases, or those!
wliich are capable of being ta-1
ken into  the lungs  by volun- j
tary efforts, only one has the
power of uniformly supporting |
life, namely, atmospheric air ; i
other gases  when respired,'!
sooner or  later  impair the!
health of the human constitu-!
tion,or perhaps occasion death; j
but in different modes.
   Some  gases effect no posi-
tive change in the blood; an-
imals immersed in it die of a
disease produced by the priva-
tion of atmospheric air, anal-
ogous to that occasioned  by
their submersion in water.
   Others again produce SGmr
positive changes in the blood,
as appears from  the experi-
ments of Dr.  Beddoesand Sir
Humphrey Davy.  They seem
to render it incapable of sup-
plying the  nervous and mus-
cular fibres with principles es-
sential to sensibility and irri-
tability.  These gases, there-
fore, destroy animal life on a
different principle."
Gastric, appertaining to the
   stomach.
Gastric juice, a fluid separa-
   ted  by the stomach.  *It is
   the principal agent in th..:
   part of the digestive process
   oy which th.^. food is con-
   verted into chvme.
Gastritis, inflammation of the
   stomach.
Gastro,  names compounded
   with this word  have some
   connexion with the stomach.
Cast-reals, a rupture or her-
   nia of the stomach, in which
   it is protruded through the
   abdomen.
Ccclrclomia, the operation of
   cutting open  the belly.
Gelathi or jelly,  an animal
   substance, soluble in water,
   but not in alcohol; capable
   of assuming a well known
   elastic or tremulous consis-
   tence, by cooling, when th«
   water is not too  abundant,
   and  liquifiable   again, by
   increasing  its temperature.
   This last property remark- 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
514
   ably  distinguishes  it from
   albumen,  which  becomes
   consistent  by heat.  It is
   precipitated in an insoluble
   form  by  tannin,  and it is
   this action of tannin on gel-
   atin which is the foundation
   of the art of tanning leather.
   Jellies are very common in
 our kitchens; they  may  be
 extracted from all the parts of
 animals, by boiling  t! cm  in
 water.  Hot water dissolves
 a large quantity of this sub-
 ataiia.-.'.  'Acids likewise  dis-
 solve them as do also the al-
 kalies.  When jelly has been
 extracted without long decoc-
 tion, it possesses most of the
 characters of vegetable mucil-
 are ; but it is seldom obtained
 without a mixture of albumen.
   The jelly of various animal
 substances is prepared for the
 te;e of seafaring persons under
 (he name of portable roup.
   The whole art of perform-
ing the operation consists in
boiling the meat, and taking
the scum off,  as  usual, until
the soup  possesses the requis-
ite favor.  It is (hen suffered
to cool, in order  that  the fat
nay be  separated.   In  the
 long with  it.   The liquor. i»
 then 10 be strained  through
 flannel, and evaporated, on the
 water-bath, to the consistence
 of  very thick  paste;  after
 which it is spread, rather tain,
 upon  a  smooth  stone,  then
 cut into cakes, and lastly, dri
 ed in a stove, until it becomes
 brittle.  These cakes may, bo
 kept four or five  years, if de-
 fended from moisture.   When
 intended to be used,  nothing
 more is required to  be done
 than to dissolve  a sufficient
 quantity  in boiling  water,
 which by that means.becomes
 converted into soup.
   Genu, the knee.
   Genus.  By this term is v.v.
 derstood, in natural history, a
 certain analogy of a  number
 of species,  or likeness to each
 other,  making them agree  t >
 gether in number, figure, and
 situation of their  parts;  in
 such a manner, that they are
 easily distinguished from (i e
 species of any other genus, a*.
 least bj some one article.
  This is the proper  and-de:
terminate sense of  the  word
genus, whereby  it   forms a
subdivision of any  class,  o.r
next place, it  is mixed with ; order of natural beings, wheth-
five or 3ix whites of eggs, and er of the  animal,  vegetable,
slightly  boiled.   This opera-
t ion serves to clarify the liquor
by the removal of opaque par-
ticles, which unite -with the!
w"hite of the  e^g  at the time it •
becomes solid by  the heat,-and'
itre consequently removed  a-1
                           32
or mineral  kingdoms,, all
greeing in certain common and
distinct characters.
Geology, a description of the
  structure of the earth.  :•••,
Ginglymus, the  hingeJike
  joint.  . Itis a species of di- 
5W
GLOSSARY, OR
   arthrosis or moveable con-
   nexion of bones, which  ad-
   mits of  flexion and exten-
   sion, as the knee joint, Sec.
Gizzard, ths stomach of poul-
   try.
Gland, an organic part of the
   body, compounded of blood-
   vessels,  nerves, and absor-
  .bents, and destined for  the
   secretion  or  alteration  of
   some peculiar fluid.
(Hyndula, a small gland.
Ctenoid, the name of articu-
   late cavities of bones.
Globus, a ball.
Globose, rounded.
Glotner, a clue of thread.  A
  term  mostly   applied  to
  glands, as
Glomerate,  means   a  gland
  which is formed of a glomer
  of blood-vessels, having no
  cavity, but furnished  with
   in excretory duct; as  the
  lachrymal  and  mammary
  glands.
Glosso, names compounded
   with this word, belong to
  muscles, nerves, or vessels,
   from their  being  attached,
   or going to the tongue.
Chita, the tongue.
Glottis, the upper or superi-
   or opening of the  larynx at
   the bottom of the  tongue.
Gluteal, belonging to the but-
   tocks.
Giutia, ths buttocks.
Olydyrrhiza glabra, liquor-
   ice.
Gomphosis,  a species of im-
  moveable connexion of bones j
   in which one  bone is fixed
   in another,  like a nail in a
   board, as the teeth in their
   sockets.
 Granulation, in  surgery  it
   means  the  little grain-like
   fleshy bodies which form on
   the surfaces  of ulcers and
   suppurating  wounds,  and
   serve both for filling up the
   cavities, and  for  bringing
   nearer together and uniting
   their sides.
 Gravity, a term used by phys>-
   ical  writers to denote the
   cause  by which all  bodies
   move towards each other,
   unless prevented  by some
   other force or obstacle.
 Gravity specific.  The den-
   sity  of the matter of which
   any  body is composed, com-
   pared to the density of an-
   other body, assumed as the
   standard.  This standard is
pure distilled water,  at the
temperature of 60 degrees Fah -
renheit.   To  determine the
specific gravity of a solid, wc
weigh  it first in air,  and then
in water.   In  the latter caser
it loses of its weight a quanti-
ty precisely equal to the weigh ■
of its own bulk of water; an i
hence,   by comparing  this
weight, with its total weight,
we find its specific gravity.
The rule,  therefore, is to di-
vide the total  weight  by the
loss of weight in water,  and
the quotient will be the spe-
cific gravity.   If it be a liq-tiid
or a gas, we weigh it in some 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY,
513
 vessel of known capacity, and
 then by dividing that  weight
 by the weight ofthe same bulk
 of water, the quotient is, as
 before, the specific gravity.
 Gutta, a drop.
 Guttural, belonging  to  the
   throat.
 Gymnastic.   This term is
   applied to a method of cur-
   ing diseases by exercise, or
   thai part of physic  which
   treats of the rules that are
   to be  observed  in all  sorts
 cf exercises,  for the preserva-
 tion of health.  This is said to
 have  been  invented   by  one
 Herodicus, born at Salymbra,
 a  city of Thrace  ; or as some
 say, at Leutini, in Sicily.  He
 was first master of an acade-
 my  where young gentlemen
 came to learn  warlike  and
 manly exercises ; and  observ-
 ing them to be very healthful
 vn that account,  he made ex-
 ercise become an art in refer-
 ence to the recovering  of men.
 out of diseases, as well  as pre-
 serving them from them, and
 called it  Gymnastic,  which
 he made a great part  of his
 practice.   But  Hippocrates,
 vyho was his scholar,  blames
 him sometimes for his  exces-
 ses with this view.  And Pla-
 to exclaims against him with
 some warmth, for enjoining
 his patients to walk from Ath-
 ens to Megara, which is about
 twenty-five miles, and to come
home on foot as they went, as
soon as they had but touched
the walls of the city.
 Heematemesis, a vomiting ef
   blood from the stomach.
 H&matosis, a hemorrhage ». r
   flux of blood.
 Hcemoptysis,  a spitting o!
   blood.
 Harnorrhagia, a hemorrhage
   or flow of blood.
 Hemorrhoidal,  the name of
   of the vessels which are tl;<
   seat of the  hemorrhoids c;
   piles.
 TIcs,morrhois,ox hemorrh c kb\
   the piles.
 Iifditus, a va; or.
 Halhicincilc,  an erroneus im-
   agination.
 Karmonia, harmony.    A
   connexion of bones in which
   they are connected together
   by means of rough margins.
   not dentiform ; in this  way
   most ofthe bones ofthe face
   are connected together.
 Heat, animal.    Respiraticn
   appears to be the  principal,
   or at least the most evident
   source of animal heat.   The
   oxygen gas contained in the
   air  which   we breath by
   combining  with  the blood
   in the  lungs, forms carbon-
   ic acid,  in  consequence of
   which  an increase of  heat
   and the red florid color are
   imparted to the blood.
   This combination  of the ox-
ygen of the air with the  ear- 
514
GLOSSARY,  CR
bon of  the blood is sufficient
for the explanation of most of
rhe phenomena presented  by
■ he production of animal heat;
hut there are several circum-
stances  connected  with  the
subject, which if real,  could
:v>\ be explained in this way.
Authors AYorthy of credit have
remarked, that in certain lo-
ral diseases  the  temperature
:T the diseased place rises sev-
eral degrees above that ofthe
blood,  taken at the  left auri-
r le.   Jf this be so, the contin-
  .1 renewal  of  the  arterial
blood is not  sufficient to  ac-
count for this increase of heat.
This  second  source  of heat
•vist belong  to the  nutritive
phenomena which fake place
in the  diseased  part.  There
is nothing forced in this  sup-
rosition; for most ofthe oheni-
ical combinations produce ele-
vations of temperature, and it
cannot be doubted that both in
the secretions and in tho nu-
trition,  combinations of this
sort take place in the organ.
Heat, absolute.   This term is
  applied to  the whole quan-
  tity of caloric existing in a
  body in chemical union.
Heat, sensible or free.   If the
  heat  which  exists in any
  substance be from any cause
  forced in  some  degree to
   quit that substance, and to
  combine  with those  that
   surround it, then such h6at
   is said to be free, or sensi-
   ble, until the equilibrium iff
   destroyed.
 Heat, latent.   When any bo-
   by is in  equilibrium  with
   the bodies which surround
   it with respect to its  heat,
   that quantity which it con-
   tains is not perceptible  by
   any external sign, or organ
   of sense, and is termed  com-
   bined caloric, or latent  heat.
Helix,  the external circle or
   border of the outer ear, thai
   curls inwardly.
Helicis, it; a term applied to
   those  musclas  which  are
   connected with the helix.
Hemcrcdcpia.   A defect  in
   the sight, which consists in
   being able to see in the day
   time, but not in the evening.
   It is a hind of imperfect pe-
   riodical  amaurosis,   most
   commonly sympathetic with
   the stomach.
■   The disease  is endemic  in
some countries, and epidemic,
at certain seasons of the year,
in others.  At  sunset objects
appear  to the patient  as it
covered with  an ash colored
veil, which gradually changes
into a dense cloud, interven-
ing between the eyes and the
surrounding objects.
   The pupil of the eye,  both
in the clay and night time, is
more dilated, and less move-
able   than it usuaTy  is  in
healthy eyes.   The majority
of such patients however, have
the pupil more or less move- 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.              515
   able in the day time, and al- j
   ways expanded and motionless
   at night.  When brought into
«  a room  faintly  lighted by  a
   candle,  where all the bystan-
   ders can  see  tolerably well,
   they cannot discern at all, or
   in  a  very  feeble  manner,
   scarcely  any  one object; or
   (hey only find themselves able
   i -.) distinguish light from dark-
   ness, and at moonlight  their
   sight is still worse.  At day-
   break they recover their sight,
   wh»ehcontinues perfect all the
   rest of '.he day till sunset.
   Hemiopsia.   A defect of v is-
      ion, in which the patient
      sees the half,  but not the
      whole of an object.
   liemicrania.   A  pain that)
      affects only one side of the
      head.   It is generally nerv-
      ous or hysterical,sometimes
      bihous ; and in both cases
      sometimes comes at a regu-
      lar period, like an ague.
   Hemiplegia.  A paralytic af-
      fection of one side  of tire
      body.
   tlepaiic.  Belonging  to the
      iiver.
   Hepatitis.  An inflammation
      of the liver.
   Hermetic.  In  the  language
      of  the ancient  chemists,
      Hermes was the  father of
      chemistry, and the hermetic
      seal was the closing of the
      end of  a glass  vessel while
      in a state of fusion.
   Hernia.   A rupture.
   Herpes.    (From  a  Greek
  word signifying to creep.)
  Tetter.  An assemblage of
  numerous little creeping ul-
  cers, in clusters, itching ve-
  ry  much,  and difficult  to
  heal, but terminating in fur-
  furaceous scales.
Iliera picra, (holy bitter.)  It
  is prepared by mixing one
  pound of soeotorine  aloes
  with three ounces of white
  canella.
Herpetic. Relating to herpes.
Hippocrates,  usually called
  the  father  of physic,  was
  born in the island of  Cos,
  about 460  years  before
  Christ.   He  is  reckoned
  the 18th lineal  descendant
  from Esculapius,  the  pro-
fession  of  medicine having
been hereditarily followed  in
that family, tinder  whose di-
rection tie  Coan school at-
tained its high degree of emi-
nence, ancl  by  the  mother's
side he is said  to have descend-
ed from Hercules. Born with
these  advantages, and  stimu-
lated by the fame cf his  an-
cestors,  be  devoted  himself
zealously to the cultivation oh
tve healing art.   Not content
with  the  empirical  practice,
which was  derived  fr«m his
predecessors, he studied under
Herodicus, who had invented
the gymnastic  medicine,  an
well  as some other philoso-
phers.
   But he  appears  to have
judged carefully for himself,
ancl to have adopted only those 
516
GLOSSARY, OB
principles,which seemed foun-
ded in sound reason.   He was
thus enabled to throw light on
the deductions of experience,
and clear away the false theo-
ries with which medicine had
been loaded by those who had
no practical knowledge of dis-
eases,  and bring it  into  the
true path of  observation,,  un-
der the  guidance  of reason.
Hence the physicians of  the
rational or dogmatic sect  al-
ways acknowledged him  as
their leader.  The  events of
his life are involved  in much
obscurity and fable.   But he
appears to have traveled much,
residing at different places  for
some time, and  practising  his
profession there.  He died at
Larissa,  in Thessaly, at a  ve-
ry advanced age, which is  va-
riously stated from 85 to 109
years.    He left  two  sons,
Thessalus  and  Draco,  who
followed the  same profession,
and a daughter, married to his
favorite pupil Polybus, who
arranged  and published  his
works ; and he formed many.
other disciples.   He acquired
a high reputation among  his
countrymen,  which  has  de-
scended to modern times ; and
his opinions have been respec-
ted as oracles, not only in  the
schools of medicine,  but even
in the courts of law.   He  has
shared with Plato the title of
divine; statutes and temples
have been erected to his mem-1
ory,  and  his altars covered |
with incense like those of £»-
culapius himself.   Indeed, the
qualifications  and duties re-
quired in a physician, were
never more  fully exemplified
than in his conduct,  or more
eloquently described  than by
his pen.   He  is said  to have
admitted no one to his instruc-
tions without the  solemnity of
an oath,  in  which the chief
obligations are, the most reli-
gious attentions to the advant-
ages ofthe sick, the strictest
chastity, and inviolable secre-
sy concerning  matters  which
ought not to be divulged.  Be-
sides these characteristics, he
displayed   great   simplicity,
candor, and benevolence, with
unwearied zeal, in investiga-
ting the progress  and  nature
of disease, and in administer-
ing to their cure.   The books
attributed to   him amount to
72; of which, however, many
are considered spurious, and
others  have been  much cor-
rupted.   The  most esteemed,
and generally  admitted genu-
ine, are the  essay "  On  Air,
Water,  ancl  Situation,"  the
first and third  books Of" Epi-
demics," that  on " Prognos-
tics," the  " Aphorisms,"-  the
treatise " On the Diet in acute
Diseases,"  and  that  " On
Wounds of the Head."   He
wrote in the Ionic dialect, in
a pure but remarkably concise
style.   He  was  necessarily
deficient in the knowledge of
anatomy, as the dissection of 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
517
human bodies  was  not  then I
allowed ;  whence his Physi-
ology also is, in many respects,
erroneous ;  but he in a great
measure  compensated this by
unceasing observation of dis-
eases, whereby he attained so
much skill in pathology  and
therapeutics, that he has been
regarded  as the founder of
medical science ;  and his opin-
ions still influence the healing
art in a  considerable degree.
He diligently investigated the
several causes of diseases, but
especially  their  symptoms,
w hich enabled him readily to
distinguish   them  from each
other: ancl  very few of those
noticed by  him are now un-
known, mostly retaining even
the same  names.   But  he is
more remarkably distinguish-
ed by his Prognostics, which
have been comparatively lit-
tle improved since, founded
upon various  appearances in
the state of the patient,  but
especially  upon  the excre-
tions.   His attention seems to
have been directed chiefly to
these in consequence of a par-
ticular theory.  He supposed
that there are four humors in
the body, blood, phlegm,  yel-
low and black bile, having dif-
ferent degrees of heat or cold-
ness, moisture or dryness, and
that to certain changes in the
quantity or quality of these^
all diseases might be referred;
and farther, that in  acute dis-
orders a concoction ofthe mor-
bid humors took place, follow-
ed by  a  critical  discharge,
which he believed  to happen,
especially  on  certain  days.
But he  seems to  have  paid
little, if any attention, to the
state of the pulse.  He  ad-
vanced another opinion, which
has since very generally pre-
vailed, that there  is a  princi-
ple or power in the  system,
which he called nature, tend-
ing  to  the  preservation  of
health,  and the  removal  of
disease.   Kc therefore advis-
ed practitioners carefully  to
observe and promote the effort*
of nature,  at the  same  time
correcting morbid states bv
their opposit.es, ancl endeavor-
ing to bring back the fluids in-
to their proper channels.  The
chief part of his treatment at
first was a restriction  of the
diet; in very acute diseases
merely allowing the mouth to
be moistened occasionally for
three or four days, ancl  oniy
a  more  plentiful dilution dur-
ing a fortnight,  provided the
strength would bear it; after-
ward a  more substantial diet
was directed,  but  hardly any
medicines except gentle emet-
ics, and laxatives,  or clysters.
Where  these means failed ve-
ry active purgatives were em-
ployed,  as hellebore, elatcri-
um,  &c, or sometimes the su-
dorific regimen, or garlic and
other diuretics.   He seems
cautious in the use of narcot-
ics, but occasionally  had re- 
518
GLOSSARY, OR
course to some of  the prepa-
rations of lead, copper, silver,
and iron.   He bled freely in
cases of extreme pain or in-
flammation, sometimes open-
ing two  veins at once, so as
to p:\xluce  fainting;  and also
toak blood often by cupping,
but preferably from a remote
part with a view of producing
a  revulsion.    Where  medi-
cines fail, he recommends the
knife, or even fire,  as  a last
resource, and he advises tre-
panning  in cases of violent
headache.   But he wishes
the more difficult  operations
of surgery to be  performed
only by particular  persons,
who might thereby acquire
more expertness.
Hippocratic.    Relating  to
   Hippocrates.
Homogcncji's.  Uniform, of
   a like kind or species, of
   the same ouality.  It is us-
   ed  in contradistinction to
   heteroseneoue,  in which
   case the  parts are of differ-1
   ent qualities.             \
Hordeum.   Barley.        j
Horn.   An animal substance |
   chiefly membraneous, com-
   posed of coagulated  -albu-
   men, with a little gelatin,
   and about a half  per cent.
   of phosphate of lime.   The j
   horns of the buck and hart
   are of a different nature, be-
   ing intermediate  between
   bone  and horn.
Horripilation.  A. shudder-
   ing or a sense of creeping
   in different parts of the be •
   dy.   A symptom of the ap-
   proach of fever.
Humeral.   Belonging to the
   humerus or arm.
Humerus.   The  arm  from
   the shoulder to the elbow.
Humor vitreous.  The  vit-
   reous humor  of the eye.
   which takes its name from
   the resemblance to  melted
   glass, is  less  dense  than
   the crystalline, but more so
   than aqueous  humor; it  is
   very  considerable in  the
   human eye,  and seems  to
   Be formed by the  small ar-
   teries that are distributed in
   the cells  of tie  hyalcid
   membrane;  it is heavier
   than common water, slight-
   ly albuminous ancl saline.
Hyaloidcs.    The   hyaloid
   membrane or capsule which
   enclosesthe vitreous humor
   ofthe eye.
Hydsrihrus.  White  swel-
   ling^
Hydatid.   A  very singular
   animal, formed like a blad-
   der, and distended with an
   aqueous  or  watery  fluid.
   These animals are  some-
   times formed in the natural
   cavities of the  body,  as the
   abdomen and  ventricles 01
   the brain,butmore frequent-
   ly in the  liver, kidney, and
   lungs, where they produce
   diseased  actions  of  those
   viscera.  It is also the name
   of a tumor containing a wa-
   tery fluid. 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
519
 Bydragogue.   Hydragogue
   medicines or cathartics, are
   those which have a partic-
   ular power in  producino-
   watery discharges from the
   bowels.
 Hydrargyrum.    Mercury,
   or quicksilver.
 Hydriodate.   A salt consist-
   ing of the  hydriodic  acid,
   combined in a definite  pro-
   portion with an oxide.
 Hydrochloric acid.  Muriat-
   ic  acid;   a compound ofj
   chlorine and hydrogen.
 Hydrogen.  The base of in-'
   flammable air.
   Hydrogen   is a  substance
which is not pcfceptible to our
senses in a separate state,  but
 ies.   It  is a constituent part
 of all animal and vegetable
 acids, of ammonia, and vari-
 ous other compound gases.
   It possesses so great an af-
 finity for caloric,  that it can
 only  exist separately in  the
 state of gas;  it is consequent-
 ly impossible to  procure it in
 the concrete  or  liquid slate,
 independent of combination.
   Solid  hydrogen,  therefore,
united to caloric  and light.
forms hydrogen  gas.
  Properties  of  hydrogen
gas.
This
gas which was
commonly called inflammable
air, was discovered by Caven-
dish in  the  year  l?f,8,  or
rather he first obtained it in a
its existence is not at all the |.state of purity, and ascertain-
less certain.   For though wc I cd its more important proper-
cannot exhibit it experimen-1 ties, though  it had been  no-
tally uncornbined, we can pur-1 ticed  long before.   The fa-
sue it while  it passes  out oflmous philosophical candle at
one combination into another,
we cannot, indeed, arrest it on
its passage, but  we never fail
to discover it,  at least  if We
use the proper chemical means
when it presents itself to  our
notice in a new compound.
   Hydrogen, as its name  ex-
presses, is one ofthe constitu
tests the antiquity of this dis-
covery.
   Hydrogen gas, like oxygen
gas, is a triple compound con-"
sisting of Hydrogen,  caloric,
ancl light.   It possesses all the
mechanical  properties of at-
mospheric air.  It is not lifted
fir respiration ; animals when
ent elements of nature,  from | obliged to  breathe  ia  it, die
which it can alone be procur-1 almost instantaneousIv.   It is
ed.   Its  existence  was  un- j decomposed by living vegcta-
 :nown till lately.   It is plen
tifully distributed  in  nature,
and is one of the  ingredients
in the varieties bitumen, oils,
fat, ardent spirits,  ether,  ancl
«f animal and vegetable bod-
bles, ancl its basis becomes one
of the constituents of oil, resin,
i\'C   It  is inflammable,  and
burns rapidly when kindled ia
contact  with atmospheric air
or oxygen  gas;  but all burn- 
520
GLOSSARY,  OR
ing substances are immediate-
ly extinguished when immcrs-
edin]it.   It is therefore incapa-
ble of supporting combustion.
It is not injurious to growing
vegetables.   Very  few sub-
stances  are capable of absorb-
ing it;  water absorbs it,  but
very sparingly.   It is capable
of dissolving carbon, sulphur,
phosphorus, arsenic, and ma-
ny  other  bodies.  When its
basis  combines  with that of
oxygen  gas, water is formed ;
with nitrogen it forms ammo-
nia.   It does not act on earthy
substances.
  Method of obtaining Hy-
drogen gas.   This is clone
by decomposing water.   For
this purpose let sulphuric acid,
previously diluted  wi+h four
or five times its weight of wa-
ter, be poured on iron-filings,
or bits of  zinc, in a small re-
tort  or  gas bottle,  called a
pneumatic flask or proof;  as
soon as  tfie diluted acid comes
in contact with  the metal, a
violent  effervescence  takes
place, ancl  hydrogen gas  es-
capes without  external  heat
being applied.  It may be col-
lected  in  the usual  manner
over water, taking care  to let
a certain   portion escape on
account of the atmospheric air
contained  in the disengaging
vessels.
  The production of hydrogen
gas in the  above way is owing
to the decompositon of water.
The iron,  or zinc,  when  irt
contact with  the  water and
sulphric acid, has a greater
affinity to  oxygen  than  the
hydrogen has ;   the  oxygen
therefore  unites  to  it, and
forms an oxide of that  metal
which   is instantly  attacked
and dissolved by the acid ;  the
other constituent part of  the
water, the hydrogen is set free,
which  by uniting with caloric,
assumes the form of hydrogen
gas.   The oxygen is therefore
the bond of union between the
metal and the acid.
  The hissing noise  or  effer-
vescence,  observable during
the  process,  is owing to (he
rapid motion  excited in the
mixture by means of the great
number of air-bubbles quickly
disengaged  and  breaking  at
the surface of the fluid.
  We  see  also  in this case
that  two substances exert at-
traction, and  are even capable
of decomposing jointly a third,
which  neither of them is able
to do singly, that is, if we pre-
sent  sulphuric acid alone,  or ,
iron  or zinc alone, to water,
they  cannot detach the oxygen
from the hydrogen of that fluid;
but if  both are applied, a de-
composition is instantly effect-
ed.   This experiment there-
fore  proves that  the agency of
chemical affinity between two
or more bodies mny  be dor-
mant until  it is called into ac-
tion  by the   interposition  of. 
MEDICAL  DICTIONARY.
521
another body, which frequent-
ly exerts no energy upon  any
of them in a separate state. In-
stances of  this kind were for-
merly called predisposing af-
finity.
  Hydrogen gas may also be
obtained  by decomposing  wa-
fer  with  red hot iron  in  the
following manner :—
  Let a gun-barrel  having its
touch-hole  screwed  up,  pass
through a  furnace  or  large
crucible  perforated for  that
purpose, taking care to incline
 the barrel at  the  narrowest
 part;  ancl just to its upper ex-
 tremity a retort charged with
 water, and let the  other  ex-
 tremity terminate  in a tube
 introduced under a receiver in
 the pneumatic (rough.  When
 the apparatus is thus disposed,
 and well luted, bring the gun-
 barrel to a red heat, and when
 thoroughly red-hot  make  the
 water  in the retort boil;  the
 vapor,  when passing through
 the red-hot tube,  will yield
 hydrogen gas abundantly.   In
 this experiment, the oxygen
 of  the  water combines  with
 the iron at a red heat, so as to
 connect it into an  oxide, ancl
 the caioric,  applied combines
 with the hydrogen of the wa-
 ter and  forms hydrogen gas.
 It  is therefore the  result of a
 double  affinity,—that  of  the
 oxygen of the water for  the
 metal, and that of its hydrogen
for caloric.
   Hydrogen  gas   combined
  with  carbon  is  frequently
  found  in  great abundance in
  mines  and coal-pits,  when it
  is sometimes  generated  sud-
  denly,  and  becomes  mixed
  with the  atmospheric air of
  these subterraneous cavities.
    If a  lighted candle be bro't
  in,ihis mixture often explodes,
  and produces  the most dread-
  ful effects.
    It is called  by miners,  fire
  damps.  It generally forms a
  cloud in the upper part of the
  mine, on account of its levity,,
  but does not mix there with
 atmospheric air, unless some
 agitation takes place.    The
 miners frequently set fire  to it
 with a  candle, lying at   the
 same time  flat on  their faces
 to escape the  violence of  the
 shock.   An easier and safer
 method  of cleaning the mine,
 is by leading a long tube thro1
 the shaft of it, to  the ash-pit
 of a furnace;   by  this means
 the gas will be conducted to
 feed the fire.
   Sir Humphrey  Davy  ha.s
 invented a valuable  instru-
 ment called a safety lamp,
 which will enable the miners
 to  convey  a light  into such
 impure air  without risk. This
 is founded on the important dis-
 covery  made   by  him,  that
 flame is incapable  of passing
 through  minute appertures in
 a  metallic  substance,  which
 are yet   previous to air;   the
 reason of which appears to  be,
that the  ignited gas or vapor 
:22
GLOSSARY, OR
is so much cooled by the metal
in its passage, as to cease be-
ing luminous.
Hydrothorax.  Dropsy ofthe
  chest.
Hygeia.   Th.e  goddess  of.
  health.   One of the  four
  daughters  of Esculapius.
  She often accompanies her
  father in the  monuments of
  him now  remaining,  and
  appears like  a young  wo- i
  man, commonly holding a |
  serpent, in one hand, arid a j
  jaitera in the other.  Some-1
  times the serpent drinks out
  of  the patera ;  sometimes i
  he twines  about the whole
  body of the goddess.
Hygiene.  I/vgicde.  That)
  part of the art.  of  healing:
  which treats  of the diet and
  non-naturals of (he sick.
Hygrocieicr. An  instrument
  to measure (he  degrees  of
  moisture in the atmosphere.
  it aNo means an  infirm  pari
  of  the body, affected  by
  moisture ofthe atmosphere.
Hyo.   Names compounded
  with (his  word belong  to
  muscles   which  originate
  from, or are  inserted  into,
  or connected  with, the  os
  hyoides.
Hygrology.   The  doctrine
  ofthe fluids.
Mypercatharsis.   An exces-
  sive  purging from  medi-
  cines.
Mypercrisis.   A critical ex-
  cretion above measure;  as
  «Hicn a fever terminates in
  a looseness, the humors may
  flow  off  faster   than  the
  strength can bear, ancl there-
  fore it is to be checked.
Hypochlorosis.  A slight de-
  gree of chlorosis.
Hypochondriac.   Belonging
  to the hypochondria.   Al-
  so, a person affected with
  lowncss of spirits.
Hypochondriac  regions.—
  The spaces in  the abdomen
  that are  under the cartila-
  ges of (he spurious ribs on
  each side of the epigastrium.
Hypochondriasis.   The hy-
  pochondriac affection; low-
  nessofspiriiSjVapors., spleen,

Hcpcgaslriura.   The region
  ofthe abdomen that  reaches
  from  above the  p'lbes to
  within three finger;,'' breadth
  of the navel. *
Evpcgascrie.   Belonging to
  (he hypoga:.4rium.
Hypothesis.   An opinion, or
a system  of  general rules,
founded  parity on  fact, but
  principally on  conjecture.
  A  theory explains every
  fact and every circumstance
  connected with it;  an hy-
  pothesis  explains only  a
  certain  number,   leaving
  some unaccounted for,  and
  others in opposition to it.

            F
Ichor.   A thin,  watery, and
  acrid discharge.
Ichthyocolla.   Insinglass,.ar
  fish glue. 
MEDICAL  DICTIONARY.
5$J
 Me.  This termination is us-
   ed to express  the new sub-
   stance which is produced by
   the combination of oxygen,
   chlorine,  or iodine,  with
   each  other, or with simple
   combustibles  or metals, in
   proportions not forming an
   acid :—thus,  oxygen com-
   bined with  chlorine  forms
   the   ox-ide  of chlorine;
   chlorine with sulphur forms
   the chlor-ide   of sulphur ;
   iodine with iron, the  iod-
   ide of iron, &c.
•Ideology.   The doctrine or
   stud v ofthe understanding.
   Whatever  be   the  number
   and the diversify of the phe-
   nomena  which, belong  to
   human intelligence, howev-
   er different they appear from
   the other phenomena of life,
   though they* evidently  de-
 pend on the  soul, it  is abso-
 lutely  necessary to  consider
 them as tl.^  result, of the ac-
 tion ofthe brain, and to make
 no distinction  between  them
 and the  other phenomena that
 depend on the actions of that
 «a  a.n.   The  functions of  the
 brain are absolutely subject to
 the tame laws as the  other
 functions; they develope and
 go to decay in the progress of
 age ; they are modified by ha-
 bit, sex, temperament, and in-
 dividual disposition ;  they be-
 come confused, weakened, or
 elevated in diseases ;  the phy-
sical injuries of (he brain wea-
ilei or  destroy  them ; in a
 word, they are not susceptible
 of any  explanation more than
j the other  actions the organ ;
 and setting aside all hypothet-
 ical ideas,,they are capable of
 being studied  only  by obser-
 vation and experience.
   We must  also oe cautious
 in imagining that (he -i udy of
 the functions  of the  brain is
 more difficult than (hat of  the
 other organs,  ancl that it  ap-
 pertains peculiarly  to meta-
 physics.   By keeping close to
 observation,    and    avoiding
 carefully any  theory- or con-
jecture,  this  stud}'1'':becomes
 purely physiological, and per-
 haps it is easier (ban the most
 part ofthe other functions, on
 account of th.e facility  which
 the  phenomena  can bo "pro-
 duced and  observed.   The in-
 numerable phenomena which
 form the intellect of mar;,  are
 only modification'; of  the fac-
 ulty  of  perception.   If (hey
 are examined,attentively, this
 truth which is well illustrated
 by  modern   metaphysicians,
 will be found very clear.
   There are   four  pr.  ••pa!
 modifications of the' faculty of
 perception.
   1st.  Sensibility, or the  ac-
 tion of the brain, by which  we
receive  i mprefs ion :•:,
fithei
from within or from without.
  2d. The Memory, or  the
faculty  of re-producing  im-
pressions, or sensations  for-
merly received.
  3d. The faculty of perceiv- 
524
GLOSSARY, OR
ing the  relations  which  sen-
sations have to each other, on
the judgment.
   4th.  The Desires,  or the
will."
Idiopathic.  Applied  to any
   disease which  does  not de-
   pend  on any other disease,
   in  which respect  it is op-
   posed to a symptomatic dis-
   ease,  which is dependent on
   another.
Idiosyncrasy. A peculiarity
   of constitution, in which a
   person is affected by certain
   agents, which  if applied to
   a  hundred  other  persons, I
   would  produce no  effect;
   thus  some  people  cannot
   see a finger bleed without
   fainting, and  thus  violent
   inflammation is induced  on
   the skin of some persons  by
   substances that are perfect-
   ly  harmless to others.
Ignis.   Fire.
'ignis fatuus.   A  luminous
   appearance or  flame, fre-
   quently seen  in  the night
   in  country places, and cal-
   led in England,  Will  the
   wisp, or Jack with a lan-
   tern.  It seems to be most-
   ly  occasioned  by the extri-
   cation  of phosphorus  from
   rotting  leaves and other
   vegetable matters.   It  is
   probable that the motionless
   ignes fatui of  Italy, which
   are seen nightly on the same
   spot, are produced  by  the
   $4ow combustion of sulphur,
   emitted through clefts and
  apertures in the soil of that
  volcanic country.
Ileum.   Tie last  portion of
  the small intestines, about
  fifteen hands'  breadth in
  length, which terminates at
  (he valve ofthe caecum.
Ilia.   The small intestines.
  Also the part in which thty
  are enclosed.
Iliac.   Belonging to the ili-
  um ; an intestine so called.
Iliac  passion.   A  violent
  vomiting in  which the  ex-
  crements arc voided by the
  mouth.
Iliac region.   The  side of
  the  abdomen between the
  ribs and  hips.
Iliacvs.  Applied to mutcles,
  regions, or diseases, which
  are situated near to, or con-
  nected with the [arts  aL.ut
  the ilia or flanks.
Ilium cs.   The haunch bor.e.
Imposthumous.  Like an ab-
  scess.
Inanilio.  Inanition. Appli-
  ed to the bedy or vc.?sels, it
  means emptiness ;   applied
  to the mind, it means a tit-
  feet of its powers.
Incantation.   Away of cor-
  ing diseases by charms, de-
  fended by Paracelsus, }IA-
  men(, and some o(her the u.-
  ical enthusiasts.
Incineration.   (From inciii-
  ero, to reduce to ashes.)
  The combustion of vegeta-
  bles and animal substances,
  for the purpose of obtaining
   their ashes, or fixed residue. 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
525
 Incisor.  The four front teeth
   of both jaws are called in-
   cisors, because they cut the
   food.
 Index.  (From  indico,  to
   point out.)  The forefinger.
 Indication.   An  indication
   is that which  demonstrates
   in a disease what  ought to
   be done.   It is three-fold :
   preservative,   wliich  pre-
   serves  health;  curative,
   which expels a present dis-
   ease ;  ancl vital, which res-
   pects the  powers and rea-
   sons of diet.
 Indigenous.  Applied to dis-
   eases,  plants, and other ob-
  jects which are  peculiar to
   any country.
 Inflammable.   Such  bodies
   as burn  with facility and
   flame in an increased tem-
   perature are called  inflam-
  mable.
Influenza.    (The
                     Italian
  word for influence.)   The
  disease is so named because
  it Vvas supposed to be pro-
  duced by a peculiar  influ-
  ence of the stars.
Inguen.  The groin.
Inguinal.   Appertaining  to
  the groin.
Innominatus.    Without  a
  name.  Some parts of the
  body are so called; thus the
  bones of  the pelvis, which
  in  childhood  are  three in
  number, and to which names
  were given, become one in
  the adult, which was with-
  out a name.   Also an arte-
                          33
   ry from the arch of the aor-
   ta,  and  the  fifth pair of
   nerves, are  thus  termed,
   because they appear to have
   been forgotten by the older
   anatomists.
 Inoscidation.   The running
   of the veins and arteries in-
   to one another, or the inter-
   union o£ the extremities of
   the  arteries and veins.
 Insania.   Insanity,  or de-
   ranged intellect.
 Inspiration.    The act of
   drawing the   air into the
   lungs.
 Instinct.  The  natural  pro-
   pensity or disposition, ope-
   rating  without the aid of
   instruction or  experience,
   by which living beings are
   constantly inclined and ex-
   cited to fulfil the intentions
   of nature by the execution
   of those actions which are
   necessary for them.
   These  actions may be ac-
 complished in  two different
 modes, with  a  knowledge of
 the encl,or without that knowl-
 edge.  In the first mode, it is
 called  enlightened  instinct;
 in the  second, blind  instinct:
 the one is exclusively the gift
 of man, the other belongs to
 animals.
  In every speceies of anima-
 ted being nature has a double
design  to be fulfilled :—first,
the preservation  of the  indi-
vidual, and secondly the pre-
servation of the species.   Ev-
ery animal fulfils this end in 
526
GLOSSARY, OR
its own way, and according to
its  organization;  there  are
therefore  as many different
instincts as there are different
species ; and as the organiza-
tion varies in individuals, in-
stinct presents  individual dif-
ferences  sometimes strongly
marked.   In man  there  are
two sorts of instinct; the one
depends on his animal organ-
ization, and is nearly the same
as that of animals.  Theoth-j
er kind of instinct,  although i
depending  on  "organization,!
springs more especially from i
the social state, inasmuch as it ]
is not brought into action ex-
cept where  man  enjoys  the
advantages of civilized soci-
ety.
  To the first,  or animal in-
stinct, belong hunger,  thirst,
the necessity of clothing,  of a
covering from  the weather ;
the desire of agreeable sensa-
tions ; the  fear of pain  and
death;  the  desire to  injure
others if there  is any danger
to be feared from them, or any
advantages to arise from hurt-
ing them ; the  venereal incli-
nations ; the interest inspired
by  children;  inclination to
imitation; to live in society,
which leads man to pass thro'
the different degrees of civili-
zation, &c.   These different
instinctive feelings incline him
to concur in the established
order of organized beings.
   Of all animals, man is the
one whose natural wj^1"
the most numerous, and of the
greatest variety ; which  is in
proportion to the extent of his
intelligence; if he had  only
these wants, he would always
have a marked superiority o-
ver the animals.
   When man,  living in  soci-
ety, can easily provide for all
the  wants  which  we   have
mentioned,  he has  then  time
ancl  powers  of action  more
than his wants  require ;  it is
then that  new  wants arise ;
which may  be called social
wants ; such is that of a lively
perception of existence, a want
which becomes more  difficult
the more it is satisfied, because
the sensations become blunted
by habit.
  This want of vivid  exis-
tence, added to the continual-
ly increasing feebleness ofthe
sensations, causes a mechani-
cal restlessness, vague desires,
excited by  the remembrance
of vivid  sensations  formerly
felt:  in order to escape  from
this state, man  is continually
forced to change his object, or
to overstrain sensations of the
same kind.   Thence arises an
inconstancy which  never per-
mits our desires to rest, and a
progression of desires, which
always annihilated by enjoy-
ment, and irritated by remem-
brance, proceed forward with-
out end; then  arises ennui,
by which the civilized idler is
incessently  tormented.
   The want of vivid sensa- 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
527
 tions is balanced by the love j Interosseous.   (Interosseus;
 of repose and idleness in the
 opulent classes of society.—
 These  contradictory  feelings
 modify  each other, and  from
 their reciprocal re-action re
 suits the  love of power, of
 consideration, of fortune, &c
 wliich  gives us  the means of
 satisfying both.
    These two instinctive sen-
 sations are not the only  ones
 which spring from the social
 state ;  a crowd of others arise
 from it, equally real, though
 less  important; besides,  the
 natural wants become so chan-
 ged as no longer to be known ;
 hunger is often replaced  by a
 capricious  taste, the sexual
 desire  by a feeling of  quite
 another nature, &c.
   The natural wants  have a
 considerable  influence  upon
 those which arise from socie-
 ty ; these in their turn modi-
 fy the former; ancl if  we add
 age,  temperament, sex,  &c.
 which  tend to change every
 sort of want,  we should  find
 that  this part of physiology
 would be hardly begun.   We
 remark, however, that the so-
 cial wants are necessarily at-
 tended  with  enlargement of
 the understanding; there is
 no comparison in regard to the
 capacity of the mind, between
 a  man in the  higher  elass of
society,  and a man   whose
physical powers  are scarcely
sufficient to  provide  for  his
•atural wants.
                           33
   from inter,  between,  and
   os, a bone.)   A name giv-
   en to  muscles,  ligaments,
   &c.  which  are  between
   bones.
 Inversion.  The state of be-
   ing turned inside out.
 Involucrum.  (From in, and
   valvo, to wrap up; because
   parts are  enclosed  by it.)
   In general, it means a mem-
   brane which  covers  any
   part;  in particular,  it is a
   name given  to the pericar-
   dium.
 Irritability.   The vis insita,
   or contractility of muscular
   fibres, or a property pecul-
   iar to  muscles, by which
   they contract upon  the ap-
   plication of certain stimuli,
   without a consciousness of
   action.  This power may
   be seen in  the  tremulous
 contraction of muscles  when
 lacerated,  or when entirely
 separated  from the body.—
 Even when  the body  is dead
 to all appearance, and the ner-
 vous power is gone, this con-
 tractible  power remains  till
 tlie organization yields, and
 begins to be dissolved.  It is
 by this inherent power that a
 cut  muscles contracts,  and
 leaves a gap  ; that a cut  ar-
tery  shrinks  ancl grows stiff
after death.  This irritability
of muscles is so far independ-
ent of nerves, and so little con-
nected with feeling,  which is
the province of  the nerves, 
525
Glossary, or
that   upon stimulating  any
muscle  by touching  it with
caustic, or irritating it with a
sharp point, or driving the e-
lectric  spark through it,  or
exciting with the metallic con-
ductors, as those of silver or
zinc,  the muscle  instantly
contracts, although the nerve
of that muscle be tied, or sep-
arated from all connexion with
the system, and although the
muscle itself may be separated
from the body, and the crea-'
ture  have lost all sense ofj
feeling.
   Thus a muscle  cut from a l
limb trembles  and palpitates I
a long time after;  the heart, j
separated from the body, con-
tracts  when   irritated;   the
bowels, when  torn from  the
body, continue their peristal-
tic motion, so as to roll upon
the table, and only ceasing to i
answer to stimuli  when they
become stiff and cold; and too
often, in the human body,  the
vis insita  loses the  exciting
power of the nerves and then
palsy ensues; or  losing  the
government of the nerves,  the
vis insita, acting  without the
regulating power,  falls  into
partial or general convulsions.
 Even in vegetables, as in the
 sensitive plant, this contrac-
 tile  power  lives.    Thence
 comes the distinction between
 the irritability of muscles, and
 the sensibility of nerves; for
 the irritability of muscles sur-
 vives the animal,  as when it
is active after death; survives
the life of the part, or the feel-
ings of the  whole  system,  as
in universal palsy, where the
vital motions continue entire
and  perfect, and  where  the
muscles, though not obedient
to  the will, are subject to ir-
regular and violent actions ;
and it survives the connexion
with the rest of the system, as
when animals,  very tenacious
of life, are  cut into parts; but
sensibility, the  property of th.e
nerves, gives the various mod-
ifications of sense, as  vision,
bearing, ancl the  rest; gives'
also the general sense of plea-
sure or  pain, and  makes the
system, according to its vari-
ous conditions, feci vigorous
and healthy,or weary and low,
and thus the eye feels, and the
rkin feels ; but their appoint-
ed stimuli produce no emotions
in these parts;  they are sensi-
ble, but not  irritable.  The
heart, the  intestines, the uri-
nary bladder, and  all the mus-
cles of voluntary  motion, an-
swer to stimuli with a quick
and forcible contraction ; and
vet  thev hardly feel the stimu-
li by which these contractions
are  produced,  or at least, they
do not  convey that feeling to
the brain.    There  is  no con-
 sciousness of present stimulus
 in those parts  which are call-
 ed into action  by the impulse
 of the nerves,  and at the com-
 mand ofthe will:  so that mus-
 cular parts have all the irrita- 
MEDICAL  DICTIONARY.
529
feflity of the system, with but
little feeling, and that  little
owing to the nerves which en-
ter into their substance ; while
nerves have all the sensibility
of the system, but no motion.
   The discovery  of this sin-
gular property belongs to our
countryman, Glisson; but Ba-
ron  Haller must be considered
as the first who clearly point-
ed out its existence, and pro-
ved it to be the cause of mus-
cular motion.
   The laws of irritability, ac-
cording to Dr. Crichton, are,
   I. After every  action in an
irritable part,.a state of rest or
cessation from motion,  must
take place before the irritable
part can be  again  incited to
action.  If, by an act of voli-
tion,  we throw  any of our
muscles into action, the action
can only  be continued  for a
certain space  of  time; the
muscle becomes relaxed, not-
withstanding all our endeav-
ors  to the contrary, and re-
mains a certain time in that
relaxed state before it can be
again thrown into action.
   2. Each irritable part has a
certain portion or  quantity of
the  principle  of  irritability
which is natural to it, part of
which it loses  during action,
or from the application of stim-
uli.
   3. By a process wholly un-
known to us, it  regains this
lost quantity during its repose,
or state of rest.   In order to
express the different quantities
of irritability in any  part, we
say that it is either  more  or
less redundant, or more or less
defective. It becomes redund-
ant in a part when the stimu-
li which are calculated to act
on that part  are  withdrawn,
or withheld for a certain length
of time,  because then no ac-
tion can take place; while, on
the other hand, the application
of stimuli causes  it  to be ex-
hausted, or to be deficient, not
only  by exciting  action, but
by some secret influence, the
nature of which  has not yet
been detected ; for it is a cir-
cumstance extremely deserv-
ing of attention, that an irrita-
ble part, or body, may be sud-
denly deprived of its irritabil-
ity by powerful stimuli, and
yet no apparent  muscular or
vascular action takes place at
the time.
   A certain quantity of spir-
its,  taken  at  once  into  the
stomach, kills almost  as in-
stantaneously  as   lightning
does;  the  same thing may be
observed of some poisons, as
 opium, distilled laurel water,
 &c.
   4. Each irritable  part  has
 stimuli which are peculiar to
 it, and which are intended to
 support its natural  action:
 thus  if blood, which is the
 stimulus proper  to  the heart,
 and arteries, should  by any
 accident get into the stomach,
 it produces sickness or vomit- 
530
GLOSSARY,  OR  .
 in*.   If the gall, which is the
 natural stimulus to the ducts
 ofthe liver, the gall bladder,
 and the intestines,  is by any
 accident effused into the cavi-
 ty ofthe peritoneum, it excites
 too great action of the vessels
 of that part, and  induces  in-
 flammation.  The urine does
 not irritate  the tender fabric
 of the kidneys, uretus, or blad-
 der, except  in such  a degree
 as to preserve  their  healthy
 action; but if it be effused in-
 to the cellular  membrane, it
 brings on such  a  violent  ac-
 tion of the  vessels of these
 parts, as to produce gangrene.
 Such stimuli are called habit-
 ual stimuli of parts.
   5.  Each  irritable  part dif-
 fers from the rest in regard to
 the  quantity  of  irritability
 which it possesses.  This law
 explains to  us  the  reason of
 the great diversity which  we
 observe in the action of vari-
 ous irritable parts;  thus, the
muscles of voluntary motion
can remain a long time in a
state of action, and if it be con-
tinued as long as possible, an-
other considerable portion of
time  is required  before the
lost irritability can be regain-
ed ; but the heart and arteries
have  a more short and sudden
action, and their state of rest
is equally  so.   The circular
 muscles of the intestines have
 also a quick action and short
 rest.   The  urinary bladder
 does not fully regain the irri-
 tability it loses during its con-
 traction, for  a  considerable
 space  of time;  the'  vessels
 which separate the menstrual
 evacutions, act in general for
1 three or four days, and do not
I regain the irritability they lose
 for a lunar month.
   6.  All stimuli produce ac-
 tion  in proportion to their ir-
 ritating powers.  As a perscn
 approaches his hand to the fire
 it glows with heat in conse-
 quence ofthe increased action
 of all its Vessels; approach the
 hand still nearer, and the ac-
 tion  will soon be so much in-
 creased as to occasion redness
 and pain ;  by longer continu-
 ance,  active  inflammation
 takes place, and the part final-
 ly loses its  irritability, ancl a
 sphacelus or gangrene ensues.
|   7. Every  stimulus acts in
 an inverse  ratis,  to the fre-
| quency cf its application.   A
 small quantity of spirits taken
I into the stomach increases the
 action  of its muscular coat,
 and also of its various vessels,
 so that digestion is thereby fa-
 cilitated.   If the same quanti-
 ty, however,  be taken  fre-
 quently, it loses its effect.   In
 order to produce the same ef-
 fect as at first, a larger quan-
 tity is  necessary; and  hence
 the   origin  and  progress  of
 dram-drinking.
   8. The more the irritability
 of a  part is accumulated,  the
 mroe is that part disposed  to
 be acted  upon; and it is for 
MEDICAL  DICTIONARY.
531
 this reason that the activity of
 all animals  while  in perfect
 health, is much livelier in the
 morning than at any other part
 of the  day ; for  during  the
 night the  irritability of  the
 whole frame ancl especially
 that of the muscles  of volun-
 tary action is re-accumulated.
 The  same law  explains why
 digestion goes on more rapidly
 the first  hour  after  food is
 swallowed than at other time ;
 and it also  accounts  for  the
 great danger that accrues  to a
 famished person upon first ta-
 king food.
   9. If the stimuli which keep
 up the action of any irritable
 body be  withdrawn  for  too
 great a  length  of time,  that
 process on which the forma-
 tion of the principle depends
 is gradually diminished,   and
 at  last,   entirely  destroyed.
 When the irritability of  the
 system is too quickly exhaus-
 ted by heat, as is  the case in
 certain  warm  climates,  the
 application of cold invigorates
 the frame,  because cold  is a
 mere diminution of the  over-
 plus of that  stimulus which
 was  causing the rapid con-
 sumption of the principle.—
 Under such or similar circum-
 stances therefore,  cold is a to-
 nic remedy ;  but  if in a cold
 climate, a person  were to  go
 into a cold bath, and not soon
 return into a  warmer  atmos-
 phere, life would be destroyed
just in the same  manner  as
many poor people who have
no comfortable dwellings are
often  destroyed,  from being
too long exposed to the cold in
winter.  Upon the first appli-
cation of cold the irritability
is accumulated, and the mus-
cular system is  therefore ex-
posed to great action ; but af-
ter a certain time all action is
so much diminished,  the pro-
cess, whatever it be, on which
the formation  of the irritable
principle depends, is  entirely
lost.
Irritation.  The action  pro-
  duced by stimulus.
Issue.   An  artificial  ulcer
  made by cutting a portion
  of the skin, and burying  a
  pea or some other substance
  in it, so as to produce a dis-
  charge of matter.
Itis.   From the time of Bo-
  erhaave, visceral inflamma-
  tions have  been  generally
 . distinguished by anatomical
  terms derived from the or-
  gan affected with the Greek
  term itis  added to  it  as  a
  suffix, as carditis, &c.
Itis  is derived from  a Greek
  word which signifies " vio-
  lent or  impetuous  action."
  When this term, therefore,
  is  added to  the  genitive
  case of the  Greek  name of
  an  organ,  it  means  infla-
  mation of that organ: hence
  hepatitis, nephritis, gastri-
  tis, and  carditis,  mean in-
  flammation   of  the liver,
  kidney, stomach and heart.
A 
532                  GLOSSARY, OR
 Ivory.   The lusk or tooth of
   defence  of  the  male ele-
   phant.   It is an  intermedi-
   ate substance between bone
   and horn.
             J
 Jecur.  A name for the liver.
 Jejunum.   The  second por-
   tion of the small  intestines.
   So called because it is most-
   ly found empty.
 Jesuit's bark.   A   name  of
   the peruvian bark because
   it was first introduced into
   Europe  by Father de Lu-
  go, a Jesuit.
 Judgment.   The  judgment
   is the most  important  of
   the intellectual faculties.—
   We acquire all our knowl-
 edge  bv this faculty;   with-
 out it our life would be mere-
 ly  vegetative;   we   would
 have no idea either  of the ex-
 istence of  other bodies, or  of
 our own ;  for these two sorts
 of  notions,  like  our knowl-
 edge, are produced by our fac-
 ulty of judging.
   To judge is  to establish a
relation between  two  ideas,
or  between  two  groups  of
ideas.   When I judge of the
goodness of  a  work,  I feel 1
that the idea  of goodness be-
 longs to the  book which I
have read ; I establish  a rela-
 tion, I form to myself an idea
 of a different  kind from that
 which arises from  sensibility i
 and memory.
   A  continuation  of  judg-
 ments  linked  together firm
an  inference,  or  process  of
reasoning.  We see how im-
portant it is  to form correct
judgments, that is, to estab-
lish only those relations which
really exist.   If I judge that
a poisonous substance is salu-
tary, I am in danger of los-
ing my  life ;  my false judg-
ment is therefore hurtful.   It
is the same with all  (hose  of
the same kind.  Almost  all
the misfortunes which oppress
man in  a moral sense, arise
from errors of judgment; bad
conduct,  vices  ancl  crimes
springing from false judgment.
  The  science  of logic has
for its end the teaching of'lust
reasoning:  but  pure judg-
ment or good  sense, and false
judgment, or  wrong headed-
ness, depend  on organization.
We cannot change in this res-
pect ; we must remain as na-
ture has made us.  There are
men endowed with  the  pre-
cious  gift of  finding relatione
of things which have never
been  perceived be fire.    If
these relations are very impor-
tant, and beneficial to human-
ity, the  authors are  men  of
genius :  if the  relations are
of less  importance, they are
considered men of wit or im-
agination.  Men  differ  prin-
cipally  bv their meaner  of
feeling, different relations,  or
of judging.   The judgment
seems to be injured by an ex-
treme vivacity of sensations;
hence we see  that faculty be- 
MEDICAL  DICTIONARY.
533
comes more perfect with age. I
—Magendic's Physiology.
Jugular.   Belonging  to  the
  throat.
Jugul-um.    (From jugum,
  a yoke ;  because the yoke
  is  fastened to  this  part.)
  The throat or anterior part
  of  the neck.
Juvantia.    (From juvo, to
  assist.)   Whatever  assists
  in relieving a disease.
             K
Kali, the vegetable alkali Ki-
  nic Acid, an  acid obtained
  from cinchonia.
Kino.  Gum of the kino tree.
             Ei
Labium,  lip.
Labyrinth, that part  of the
  internal ear which is behind
  the' cavity  of  the tympa-
  num.
lac,  milk.
Lachryma, a (ear.
Lachrymal, belonging to tears
Lactecd, a vessel that carries a
  milk-like fluid.
Lacuna, a channel. -
Lambdoidal, the occipital su-
  (ure, so'called because  itis
  shaped like the letter A.
Laryngotomy,  the operation
  of cutting into the larynx.
Larynx, a cartilaginous cav-
  ity, situated   behind   the
  tongue, in the anterior part
  of  the fauces.
Lateral, the side.
Lateritious, like brick.
Laudanum, (from laus, or
  laud;  praise)  so  named
  from its valuable, or praise-
  worthy qualities.
Laurus, praise.
Leech, a genus of insects.
Lenitive, gently  purgative.
Lens; one of the  humors of
  the age.
Lepra, the leprosy.
Lethargy,  forgetfulness,  a
  heavy and constant  sleep,
  or disposition to  sleep.
Leucorrhea, whites;   fluor
  albus.
Levator, to lift up.
Li cider ia, see diarrhea.
Life, the mode  of existence
  peculiar to living  beings.
Ligament a strong cord or
  membrane to  bind, or tie
  together.
Ligneus, woody.
Linea Alba, a white line that
  extends from the lower- end
  of t!;e sternum, to  (he na-
  vel thence to trio pubes.
Lingua, the tongue.
Liniment, an oily substance
  of  a  mediate consistence
  between an ointment and oil.
Litharge, an oxide of lead,
  in an imperfect state of vit-
  rification.
Lithiasis, a stone.
Lithic, relating to stone,
Lithology, discourse or trea-
  tise on stones.
Lithordriptic, medicine  (hat
  has the power to dissolve
  the stone in the bladder.
Lithotomy, the operation of
  cutting into the  bladder to
  extract a stone. 
534
GLOSSARY, OR
Local, belonging to a  part
  and not the whole.
Longissimus, the longest.
Lotion, a wash.
Lumbago, a rhumalic affec-
  tion  of the  muscles  about
  the loins.
Luna, the moon.
Luxation, to put out of joint.
Lymph,  the liquid contained
  in the lymphatic vessels.
Lytta, cantharides fly.
            ill
M.    By  this  the  doctors
  mean,  when  it  follows,
  chips,  herbs, shavings, &c.
  that you  must take a hand-
  ful ; and when M. follows i
  the direction of several in- i
  gredients, thus m. f. haust. ;
  mix and  let a draught be I
  made.
 Maceration, to soften by wa-
  ter.
 Magnesia, the  name of one
  of the primitive earths.
 Magnetism,  the  property
  which iron  possesses of at-
  tracting  or repelling other
  iron;  the  similar poles of
  magnets repel, but opposite
  poles attract each other.
 Magnus, large.
 MaleabiUty, the property that
   some metals have of  being
   extended under  the  ham-
   mar.
 Man, a compound  of solids,
   fluids, and a vital principal,
   and distinguished from oth-
   er  animals by the posses-
   sion of a soul.
Mania, raving or furious mad-
   ness.
Marasmus,  to  grow lean,
   emaciation.
Marcores, the same.
Mastication, chewing.
Mater, signifies mother;  a
   name of two of the mem-
   branes of the brain.
Materia Medica,  a  general
   class of substances, which
   are used in the cure of  dis-
   eases.
Maxillare   Inferius,  lower
   iaw  bone.
Maxillaris, the jaw.
Meatus, an opening that leads
   to a canal or duct.
Median, between.
Mediastinum, the membran-
   ous  septun, formed  by the
   duplicature of  the pleura
   that  divides  the cavity of
   the  chest into two parts.
j Medicamentum,  to  heal,  a
   name frequently  given to
   quack medicines.
 Meditullium, the  middle.
Medulla, marrow.
Medidlary, like unto marrow.
Mel, honey.
Membrane,  (he various  kins
   of the body.
 Menorrhagia,   flooding,  or
   immoderate   flow of the
   menses.
 Menstruation, the periodical
   courses of women.
 Mesentery, a  duplicature  of
   the peritoneum, which sus-
   tains the intestines, and sup-
   ports and  conducts  with 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
535
  safety  the  blood vessels,
  lacteals, and nerves, serves
  to fix the glands, and give
  an external coat to the  in-
  testines.
Metastasis,   to  change,   to
  translate,  the translation of
  a disease from one place to
  another.
Miasma, pollution,corruption,
  general defilement, &c.
Minimum, the sixtieth part
  of  a fluid  dram, about  a
  drop.
Mistura, a  mixture.
MoUities, a  softness of  the
  bones, or nails.
Morbus, a disease.
Morbid, diseased.
Morphia,  or  Morphine,  a
  new  vegetable  alkali  ex-
  tracted from opium.
Mucilage, gum dissolved in
  water.
Mucus, the discharge or  ex-
  cretion from the nose, throat,
  &c
Mumps, an inflammation  of
  the parotid gland.
Murias, salt.
Muriate of Soda,  common
  salt.
Muriatic, belonging  to  sea
  salt.
Muriatic acid, spirit of salt.
Muscle, a distinct  portion of
  flesh, which by contracting
  itself  is  capable  of per-
  forming a motion.
Musk, an unctuous substance
  obtained from the Moschus
  Moschiferus, a ruminating
  animal  resembling the an-
  telope.
Mutitas, dumbness.
Myology,  doctrine  of  the
  muscles.
Mystax, the  beard upon the
  upper lip.
             N
N. in prescriptions stands for
  number.
Nevus, a  natural  mark  or
  blemish.
Naphtha, a native combusti-
  ble  liquid  of a yellowish
  white color, perfectly fluid
  and  shining.
Narcotic, a medicine that has
  the  power of procuring
  sleep.
Nascale,  a wood or  cotton
  pessary for the nose.
Nasalis, appertaining  to the
  nose.
Naris, the nostril.
Nasus, the nose.
Natron, (so  called from Na-
  tron a lake  in  Judea in
  which it was  produced)  a
  name formerly given to the
  akali, now called soda.
Nausea, an incliation to vom-
  it without  effecting it.
Nebula, a cloudy spot  in the
  cornea  of  the eye.
Necrosis, strictly means mor-
  tification,  but is  confined
  by surgeons to the death of
  the bones.
Nectar, a wine made of hon-
  ey-
Negro Cachexy, a propensi-
  ty for eating  earth among 
536
GLOSSARY, OR
  the negroes in the W. In-
  dies and Africa.
Nephralgia, pain in the kid-
  ney.
Nephritic,  belonging  to the
  kidney.
considering it a matter of but
little, if any consequence.—
The nosological arrangements
of authors are numerous, and
they vary so  much,  that an
observer  would  readily  see
Nephritis,   inflammation  of,that they are arbitrary, an<
  the kidney.
Nerve, long, white cords that
  arise  from the  brain, ancl
  marrow in the spine (back
  bone), and  that serve  for
  sensation.
Nervine, that which relieves
  disorders of  the nerves.
Neurolgia, pain in a nerve.
Neurology, the  doctrine of
  the nerves.
Neurosis,  nervous diseases.
Niger, black.
Nitrate, a salt formed  by  the
  union  of nit. ic acid with
  salifiable bases.
Nitre, salt petre.
Nitrate of Potash, nitre.
Nodus or Node,  a  swelling
  upon the bone.
Noli Me  Tangere,  (not  me
  to touch, or touch  me not)
  a species of herpes affect-
  ing the skin  and cartilages
  of tho nose, it is very diffi-
  cult to  cure, and so very
  sensible  that the  patient
   cannot bear the  slightest
   touch.
 Nosology, the doctrine of the
   names of diseases, or their
   arrangements in classes, or-
   ders, genera,  species, &c,
   &c
   In this work I have studied
 no  particular  arrangement,
would  be led to doubt their
necessity, if not their utility.
  My only  object in giving
the following arrangement is,
to give the reader  a perfect
idea of nosology.   The  sys-
tem is that of

    DR.  THOMAS.
          IN WHICH
      He has arranged
            THE
        DISEASES INTO
CLASSES  AND ORDERS ;
       AND HAS GIVEN
        The Explanation
            AND
 Derivation of  their names.

          CLASS 1.
Pyrexia,   febrile   diseases;
   from fire and habit.

          ORDER 1.
 Feb res, or  Fevers.
 Febris  Intermittens,  inter-
    mittent fever.
 Febris Remutcns,  remittent
    fever.
 Synochus, to continue,  sim-
    ple continued fever.
 Synocha;  inflammatory  fe-
    ver.
 Typhus Mitior; from stupor;
    low or nervous fever. 
MEDI2AL DICTIONARY.
537
 Typhus Gravior,  from  do.
   malignant or  putrid fever.
 Typhus Icterodes;  from stu-
   por, and  icterus;  yellow
   fever.

          ORDER II.
 Phlegmasia, inflammations ;
   from to burn.
 Phlegmon, phlegmonous in-
   flammations.
 Erysipelas, erysipelatous in-
   flammation ; from to draw,
   and adjoining: named from
   the neighboring parts being
   affected by the eruption.
 Phrenitis,  inflammation ofthe
   brain  and its  membranes,
   from a  phrenzy, a distrac-
   tion.
 Ophthalmia, inflammation of
   the eye.
 Otitis ; inflammation of the
   ear.
 Cynanche  Tonsillaris, inflam-
   matory sore throat; from a
   dog, and to suffocate.
 Do. Parotidia ; mump:;.
 Do. Maligna;  putrid or ul-
   cerated throat.
 Do. Trachealis, the  croup.
 Do. Pharyngea, inflammation
   of the pharynx.
 Pleuritis;  pleurisy,  an  in-
   flammation  of  the mem-
   brane that lines the lungs.
 Pneumonia;  inflammation of
   the  lungs, peripneumony.
 Pneumonia Notha;  spurious
   peripneumony.
Gastritis ; inflammation of the
   stomach.
Enteritis;   inflammation  of
   the intestines, from an  in-
   testine.
 Hepatitis, do. of the liver.
 Splenitis ;  do. of the  spleen.
 Nephritis; do. of the kidney.
 Cystitis; do. of the bladder.
 Podagra ; gout, from the foot
   and to seize.
 Rheumatismus ; rheumatism,
   to be affected with deflux-
   ions.

         ORDER III.
 Exanthemata;  eruptive  fe-
   vers, to  efflorerce.
 Variola ; the small  pox, from
   the skin being changed in
   color, or disfigured.
 Variola Vaccina ;  cow  pox.
 Varicella;  chicken  pox.
 Rubeola; the measles,  from
   rubio, to become  red.
 Scarlatina; scarlet fever.
 Pestis ; plague.
 Miliaris ;  miliary fever.
 Pemphigus ;  vesicular erup-
   tion.
 Urticaria ;  nettle rash,  from
   urtica, a nettle.

         ORDER IV.
 Ilemorrhagia ;   in vol untary
   discharge of blood.
Epistaxis ;  bleeding from  the
   nose.
Hemoptysis; spitting of blood.
Hematemesis;   vomiting of
   blood.
Hematuria; bloody urine.
Menorrhagia  ;   immoderate
   flow of the menses.
Hemorrhois; piles, from blood,
and to flow. 
538
GLOSSARY, OR
          ORDER V.
 Profluvia; fluxes with pyrex-
   ia,  from  profluo,  to  run
   down.
 Catarrhus, catarrh,  to flow
   down.
 Dysenteria; dysentery, from
   bad, intestine, and to flow.

        CLASS II.
 Neuroses; nervous diseases.

          ORDER I.
 Comata; soporose  disease,
   from a propensity to sleep.
 Apoplexia; apoplexy, to strike j
   down.
 Paralysis; palsy.

         ORDER II.
 Adynamia;  defect  of vital
   powers.
 Syncope ; fainting.
 Vertigo ; giddiness.
 Dyspepsia ;  indigestion.
 Hypochondriasis ;  hypochon-
   driac affections.

        ORDER III.
 Spasmi; spasmodic diseases.
 Hysteria ;  hysteric diseases.
 Epilepsia; epilepsy.
 Chorea Sancti  Viti;  St.  Vi-
   tus's Dance.
 RLsus  Sardonicus; sardonic
   or convulsive laughter.
 Tetanus ;  cramp.
 Singultus; hiccup, or convul-
  sive motion   of the dia-
   phragm and stomach.
 Pertussis;  hooping cough.
Pyrosis;  water brash.
Angina  Pectoris;   syncope
   anginosa.
Palpitatio ; palpitation of the
   heart.
Ashma.
Hydrophobia;  (canine  mad-
   ness), fear of water.
Colica;  colic.
Colica Pictonum ;  dry belly
   ache.
Cholera  Morbus;  vomiting
   and purging.
Diarrhea;  purging.
Diabetes; excessive discharge
   of urine.

         ORDER IV.
Vesania; mental diseases.
Mania ; madness.
Incubus ;  nightmare.

        CLASS III.
Cachexia; cachectic disea-
   ses.

         ORDER I.
Mar cores ; universal emaci-
   ation.
Atrophia ; Atrophy.
Phthisis:   pulmonary   con-
   sumption.
Cachexia Africana:   negro
   cachexy.
Aptha   Chronica :   chronic
   thrush.

         ORDER 11.
Intumenscentia:    general
   swellings.
Polysarchia:  corpulency.
Emphsema, from  a Greek
   word signifying to inflate. 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
539
Tympanites:   tympany,   to
   sound like a drum.
Hydrops ;  dropsy.
Anasarca, dropsy of the cellu-
   lai membrane.
Ascites : dropsy  of the belly.
Ascites Ovarii: dropsy ofthe
   ovarium.
Hydatids : water contained in
   membraneous bags.
Hydrocele, dropsy  ofthe  tu-
   nica vaginalis testes.
Hydrocephalus : dropsy in the
   head.
Hydrothorax :  dropsy of  the
   chest.
Rachitis : rickets.

         ORDER III.
Impetigines : Cutaneous dis-
   eases.
Scrofula :  King's evil.
Mesenterii GlandulaMorbosa;
   diseased mesenteric glands.
Syphilis :  venereal disease.
Sibbens : or sivvens.
Frambesia ; yaws.
Elephantiasis;  leg   swelled
   like an elephant's.
Lepra;  leprosy.
Plica Polonica ; plaited hair.
Scorbutus; scurvy.
Icterus ;  jaundice.

        CLASS  IV.
Locales, local diseases.

         ORDER I.
Dysesthesia; diseases of  the
   senses.
Nyctalopia;  night blindness.
Amaurosis; gutta serena.
Paracusis; deafness.

        OREDER  II.
    Increased Appetite.
Dysorexia ;  depraved appe-
  tites.
Bulima; canine appetite.
Furor Uterinus;  nymphoma-
  nia.
    Defective Appetites.
Anorexia; loss of appetite.
Anaphrodisia ; impotence.

        order,  nr.
Dyscinesia; motion impeded,
  from an imperfection of the
  organ.
Strabismus ;  squinting.

        ORDER  IV.
Apocenoses;  increased dis-
  charges.
Ephidrosis ; violent and mor-
  bid perspiration.
Eneuresis; incontinence   of
  urine.
Gonorrhoea Dormientum ; in-
  voluntary emission of  se-
  men during sleep.
Leucorrhea ;  whites.

         ORDER  V.
Epischeses ;  obstructions.
Obstipatio;  constipation   or
  costiveness.
Ischuria; suppression of urine.
Dysuria ;  difficulty of voiding
  urine.
Amenorrhea ; partial or total
  obstruction of  the  mensei
  from other causes than preg-
  nancy. 
540
GLOSSARY, OR
Chlorosis;  retention of the
   menses or green sickness.
Amenorrhea   Suppressionis,
   suppressed menses.
Amenorrhea  Difficillis ;  dif-
   ficult and painful menstru-
   ation.

        ORDER  VI.
Tumores; tumors.
Carcinoma; cancer.
Fungus Hematodes;   medul-
   lary sarcoma.
Bronchocele;Derbyshire neck.
Dracunculus; Guinea worm. !
        ORDER  VII.
Dolorosi;  painful affections
   without fever.
Cephalalgia ; headache.
Odontalgia ; toothache.
Faciei Morbus Nervorum.
Crucians;  tic douloureux.
Gastrodyriia ; pain the  stom-
   ach.
Luxatio; sprain.
Calculus; stone in the bladder
   and gravel.

        ORDER VIII.
Dialysis, solutions, or discon-
   tinuity of part:-.
Ulcus;  ulcer.
Vuluus ex  Ustione  factum ;
   scalds and burns.
Herpes ; tetters.
Tinea Capitas ;  scald head.
Psora ; itch.     *
Impetigo ;  ring worm.
Gutta Rosea ; pimpled face.
Chigre ;  an insect resembling
   a flea.
Pernio; Chilblains.
DISEASES NOT  REFERADLE TO
   ANY PARTICULAR CLASS.
Vermes ; worms.
Venena; poisons. *
Animatio suspensa; suspend-
  ed animation.
Gelatus; frost bitten.
Diseases of  the pregnant
           state.
Convulsiones,  convulsions.
Abortio ; abortions and flood-
  ings.
 Diseases ofthe Puerperal
          stale.
Febris Lactea  ; milk fever.
Inflammalin Mamma;; tumor
  and  inflammation  of  the
  breast.
Papilla Excoriala; excoriated
  nipples.
ErptionesMilliaria ;  Miliary
  eruptions.
Phlegmasia Dolens;  painful
  intumescence of the  lower
  extremity.
Hysteritis;  inflammation  of
  the womb.
Peritonitis,   inflammation  of
  the peritoneum.
Febris  Puerperarum ;  puer-
  peral, or child  bed fever.
Prolapsus Uteri.
    Diseases of  Infants.
Asphyxia;  apparent cessation
  oflifh.
Infantum Color Lividus; black
  and livid color of new born
  children.
Meconii Retentio ;  retention
  oft,he meconium.
Icterusjnfantum; yellowgum. 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
441
Excor iationes et U Ice rationes;
  excoriations and ulcerations.
Singultus.
Erysipelas Infantile.
Eruptions; eruptions.
Formina ; gripes from acidi-
  ties and flatulency.
Vomitus; vomiting.
Diarrhea ; purging.  *
Trismus; locked jaw.
Febris Remittents.
Aphtha; thrush.
Prolapsus ani; falling of the
  fundament.
AtrophiaAblactatorum; wean-
  ing brash.
Ophthalmia Purulenta ; puru-
  lent   inflammation of  the
  eyes.
Dentition ; teething.
Convulsiones.
Syphilis.
Nostrum, our own ; applied
  by quacks,  very appropri-
  ately to medicines of their
  own preparation.,
Nucleus, a kernel.
Nutrition, nourish.
Nyctalopia, night  blindness.

            ©
Obesity, see Polysarca.
Obliquus, Oblique, deviating
  from a right line.
Obstetric, belonging, to mid-
  wifery.
Obstipatio, to stop up.
Obturator, that which covers
  up.
Obtusus, Obtuse, blunt.
Occiput, the back part of the
  bead..
Occipital, belonging to  the
  back part of the head.
Occult, hidden, a term used
  by writers that do not  them-
  selves  clearly  understand
  what they attempt to  ex-
  plain.
Occulus, the eye.
Odontagra, tooth-ache.
Odontalgia, the same.
Odontoid, shaped like a tooth.
Odour, smell.
(Economy, the conduct of na-
  ture in unerring order, or-
  der, regularity.
(Edema, to swell.
(Esophagus, the gullet.
Officinal, any medicine di-
  rected  by the  colleges of
  physicians to be kept  in the
  shops,  is so termed.
Olecranon, the elbow, or  pro-
  cess of the ulna upon  which
  a person leans.
Oleum, oil.
Oleum Ricini, castor oil.
Oleum Oragani  oil of origa-
  num, &c. &c.
Olfactory, belonging to the
  organ,  or sense of smelling.
Olfactory  Nerve,  the  first
  pair of nerves,  so termed
  because they are the organs
  of smelling.
OZiyam,resemblingthe olive.
Omagra, the gout in theshoul-
  der.
Omentum,  Epiploony  the
  caul.
Onro, the shoulder.
Omphalocele, a rupture ofthe
  navel,  umbilical hernia.
34 
542
GLOSSARY, OR
   Opacity, the faculty  of ob-
   structing the passage of light.
   Ophthalmia, an inflammation
     of  the  membranes  of the
     eye or of the whole bulb of
     the eye.
   Ophthalmic, belonging to the
     eye.
   Opiate, having an effect like
     opium, the effect of opium.
   Opium,  the  inspisated juice
     ofthe poppy.
   Opodeldoc, a term of no ori-
    ginal meaning, now confin-
     ed  camphorated soap  lini-
     ment.
   Opponeus, opposing.
  Oppression, catalepsy, or a-
    ny pressure upon the brain.
  Optic, to see, relating  to the
    eye.
  Optic Nerves,  the organs of
    sight.
  Orbicularis, like a ring.
  Orbit, the two cavities  under
    the.forehead in which the
    eyes are situated.
  Organ, a part of the body ca-
    pable of performing perfect
ty   action.
  Organic, belonging to  an or-
    gan.
  Ornithology, the history of
    birds.
  Ossiculum, a little bone.
  Ossification, the formation of
    bone.
  Osieocopus, a  violent fixed
    pain in a bone.
  Osteogeny,  the growth  cf
    bones.
  Osteology, doctrine  of  the
    bones.
 Otalgia, the ear-ache.
 Otitis, inflammation ofthe ear.
 Ovum, an egg.
 Oxidation, the process of con-
   verting metals and  other
   substances  into oxides, by
   combining  with  them a
   certain portion of oxygen.
 Oxide, a substance combined
   with oxygen, without being
   in the state  of an acid.
 Oxygen, from  acid, and to
   generate, because it is the
   generation of acidity.
 Oxymel, honey and vjnegar,
   boiled to a syrup.

            P
P. part, a handful.
Pain, unpleasant sensation.
Palatum, Palate,  the roof of
   the mouth.
Palliativ e, to dissemble, med-
   icines given  only to afford
   temporary relief in diseases.
Palmaris, belonging to the
   hand.
Palmos,  a palpitation of the
   heart.
Palpebra, the  eyelids.
Palpitatio,  palpitation, con-
   vulsive motion.
Palsy, paralysis.
Panacea, cure all, a  name
   given  by the ancients to
   such medicines as they con-
   ceived, or wished  to make
   people believe, would curt
   all  diseases.
Panada,  bread boiled in wa-
   ter to the consistence of pap.
Pancreas, the sweat bread,
   being a glandular viscus of 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
543
  the abdomen of a  long fig-
  ure, compared to  a  dogs
  tongue, it lies in the epigas-
  tric region under the stom-
  ach.
 Pancreatic,  belonging to the
  pancreas.
 Pandemic, a disease is so cal-
  led that attacks  all  or a
  great many persons in the
  same place and at the same
  time.
 Panis, bread.
 Panophobia, that kind of mel-
  ancholy which is caused by
  groundless fears.
 Pa?ifago,medicines that drive
  humors out of the body.
 Papaver, the poppy.
 Papilla,  the nipple  of the
  breast.
 Pappus,  hairy,  downy, the
  hiar on the middle ofthe chin.
 Paula,  a small elevation  of
  the cuticle with an inflam-
  ed base.
 Par, pair.
 Paracentesis, to pierce thro',
  the operation of tapping to
  evacuate the water in drop-
  sy.
 Paracrusis, disarrangements,
  where the  patient  is inat-
  tentivtowhatissaid to him.
 Paracusis, depraved hearing.
 Paralogia,  a  delirium   in
  which  the patient  talks
  wildly.
Paralysis, to loose, or weak-
  en.
Paraphimosis, a retraction of
  the perpuce back ofthe glans i
  towards tlie root of the pe-
  nis.
Paraphonia, alteration of the
  voice.
Paraphrenias,  inflammation
  of the brain.
Paraphlegia,  palsy  of one
  half of the body taken trans-
  versely.
Paregoric, that which allays
  pain.
Parenchchyma, the  spongy
  and  cellular substance  or
  tissue that connects parts
  together.
Parhaemasia, disease of the
  blood.
Paroniria, disturbed sleep.
Paronychia, a whitlow.
Parotid Gland, a gland near
  the ear.
Parotitis, inflammation of tl-j
  parotid  gland.
Paroxysm, an increase of the
  symptoms, which continue
  for some time, and then de
  cline.
Parturition, the  expulsion
  or birth of the fcettis from
  the uterus.
Patella, the knee pan.
Pathognomonic,  the  syrop
  tcms by wliich a disease i.
  I. no wn.             /
Pathology, the  docp^  °^
  diseases.
Pectoral, the  breast, belong-
  ing to,  or that which re-
  lievesdisordersof the breast.
Pedethonus, the motion ofthe
  arteries.
Pediluviumi a bath for the feet.
34* 
444                  GLOSSARY,  OR
  Pelagra, a species of leprosy.
  Pelvic, pertaining to the pel-
    vis.
  Pelvis, the cavity below the
    belly.
  Pemphigus,  a buble or vesi-
    cle, the vesicular  or erup-
    tive fever.
  Pendulus, hanging.
  Peptic, that  which promotes
    digestion.
  Peracute, very sharp.
  Percolation,  is  generally ap-
    plied to animal secretion.
  Pericarditis,  inflammation of
    the pericardium.
  Pericardium, the membran-
    ous bag that surrounds the
    heart.
  Perichondrium,  the mem-
    brane that  covers a cartil-
    age.
  Pericranium, the membrane
    that is closely connected to
    the bones of the head.
  Perenium, the space between
    the anus and genital organs.
  Periostium,  the  membrane
    brane that invests the ex-
    ternal surface  of  all the
    bones, except the crowns of
    the teeth.
  Peripneumonia,  inflarnma-
n;  tion of the lungs.
  p°ripycma,  a  collection  of
    master about any part.
  Peritoiitnm,  the ^membrane
    that lines the cavity of the
    abdomen.
  Peritonitis,  inflammation  of
    peritoneum.
  Pernio, chilblain.
Perspiration, sweat.
Pertusis, hooping cough.
Pestilence, plague.
Pestis, plague.
Petechia, a red or purple spoi
   that resembles a flea bite.
Petrifaction, stony matter de-
   posited either in the way of
   incrustation, or within the
   cavities of organized sub-
   stances, are called petrifac-
   tions.  .|i
Petroleum, rock oil, a liquid
   bituminous substance which
   flows between rocks  or in
   different places at the sur-
   face of the earth.
Phagedenic, to eat.
P/ia/tzn;r,battalion,the rowsof
   bones ofthe fingers and toes.
Phantasma, imagination.
Pharmaceutic, belonging to
   pharmacy.
Phramacopeia, a dispensato-
   ry, or book of directions for
   the compositions  of  medi-
   cines.
Pharmacopeia,  a  seller  cf
   medicines.
Pharmacy, the art of prepar-
   ing remedies for the treat-
   ment of diseases.
Pharynx, the  muscular bag
   at the back part ofthe mouth
   it receives the  masticated
   food and conveys it into the
   oesophagus.
Pharyngotomia,  the opera-
   tion of cutting into the pha-
   rynx.
Philtrum, the  medicine that
   is used to excite love. 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
545
  Phymosis, a narrowness of
    tlie extremity of the pre-
    puce.
 Phleborrhagia, rupture of a
    vein.
 Phlegm,   mucous  secreted
    from the lungs.
 Phlegmasia, to burn,  an in-
    flammation.
 Phlegmon, a 'bright  red in-
    flammation, with throbing
    and  acute pain.
 Phlogiston, heat,  to bum.
 PhlogosiS,  to  inflame,  in-
    flammation.
 Phosphate, a salt  formed by
    the union of phosphoric acid
    with salifiable bases.
 Photophobia, a dread of light.
 Photopsia, an affection of the
   eye in which the patient
   perceives  luminous  rays,
   ignited lines, or corrusca-
   tions.
 Phrenes, the diaphragm.
 Phrenitis, phrenzy or inflam-
   mation of the  brain.
 Phrenic, belonging to the di-
   aphragm.
 P^isw,pulmonary consump-
   tion.
 Phyma, a tubercle on any ex-
   ternal part of  the body.
 Physema, a windy tumor.
 Physiognomy,  the  art of
   knowing  the disposition of
  a person by the countenance.
 Physiology,  that  science
  which has for  its object the
  knowledge ofthe  phenome-
  na  proper to living bodies.
Physis, nature.
Pia mater, the natural moth-
   er,  a membrane  so  called
   because  it embraces  the
   brain as a good mother folds
   her child.
 Pictonius,  colica pictonum,
   the painters colic, occasion-
   ed by their constant use of
   lead.
 Pigmentum, a mucous sub-
   stance found in the eye.
 Piperine, the active principle
   of pepper.
 Pisiform, like a pea.
 Pituitary,   belonging   to
   phlegm.
 Pix, pitch.
 Fix  Burgundica, Burgun-
   da pitch.
 Placebo, the name of those
   medicines which are given
   with a view to  please the
   patient, such are cinnamon,
   spice, camphor,  the essen-
   tial oils, bread pills, &c.
 Placenta, cake, the after-bur-
   then.
 Plethora,  an excessive  ful-
   ness of the blood vessels.
 Pleura, a  membrane wliich
   lines  the internal surface of
   the thorax.
 Pleuralgia, a pain  the pleu-
   ra or  side.
Pleuritis, Pleurisy, inflam-
   mation ofthe pleura.
Plexus, a net-work of vessels.
Plumbum,  or  Plumbago,
   lead.
Pneumatic, relating to air.
Pnumonia,  inflammation of
   the lungs.
Pnix, a sense of suffocation.
Podagra, the gout. 
546
GLOSSARY, OR
Poison, Venenum," that sub-
  stance which, when appli-
  ed externally, or taken into
  the human body, uniformly
  effects such a derangement
  in the animal economy as
  to produce disease, may be
  denned a poison.   It is ex-
  tremely difficult however,
  to give a definition of a poi-
  son, and the  above is sub-
  ject to  great inaccuracy.
Poisons are divided with res-
pect to the kingdom to which
they belong, into animal, veg-
etable, mineral, and habitu-
ous, or ©rial.
  Poisons are in general only I
deleterious in  certain doses ;
for the most active, in  small
doses, from the  most valuable
medicines.  There are never-
theless certain poisons, which
are really such in the smallest
quantity, and which are nev-
er administeied medicinally;
as the poision of hydrophobia
or  the  plague.   There  are
likewise substances which are
innocent when taken into  the
stomach, but which prove del-
eterious when taken into  the
lungs, or when  applied to an
abraded surface : thus  carbo-
nic acid is continually  swal-
lowed with fermented liquors
and thus the poison of the vi-
per is taken with  impunity;
while inspiring carbonic acid
kills, and the poison of the vi-
per inserted into the flesh, of-
ten proves fatal.
   Several substances also act
as poisonous when applied ei-
ther externally or internally ;
as arsenic.
  When a substance produces
disease not only in mankind,
but in all  animals, it is distin-
guished by the term common
poison ; as arsenic, sublimate,
&c.  while that which is poi-
sonous to  man only, or to an-
imals and often to one genu*
merely, is said to be a relative
poison ; thus aloes are poison-
ous to dogs and wolves ; the
Phellandrium aquaticum kills
horses, while  oxen devour it
with impunity.    It appear*
then,  that  substances  act  as
poisonsonly in relation to their
dose, the part of the body they
are applied, and the subject.
   Poisions enter the body in
the following ways :
   1. Through esoplugusalone
or with the food.
   2
clysters
   3. Through the nostrils.
   4. Through the lungs witTi
the air.
   5. Through the absorbents
to the skin, either whole, ul-
cerated, cut or torn.
Pollex, the thumb or great toe.
Polygalia, having abundance
   of mirth.
Polypus,  a  tumor which is
   generally narrow where  it
   originates,and then becomes
   wider,  somewhat   like  a
   pear.
Polysarca, corpulency, obe-
   sity or fatness.
Through the  anus by
 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
547
Pompholyx, a bladder, small
  vesicle, or bubble.
Pomum, apple.
Pons, a bridge.   ,
PopWea',relating to the knee.
Porrigo,  a disease  common
  among children, in which
  the skin ofthe head becomes
  dry and callous, and comes
  off like bran upon combing,
.Porlio, portion.
Porus, a pore or duct.
Posterior, behind.
Potassa, Potash, so called
  from the vessels or pots in
  which it was first made, the
  vegetable alkali.
Potassa, Nitrus, nitre.
Potassium, the metallic basis
  of potassa.
P oup art's Ligaments,astrong
  ligament or rather a tendi-
  nous expansion  of the ex-
  ternal oblique muscle going
  across from the inferior and
  anterior  spinous process of
  the ilium to the crista ofthe
  os pubis.
Precordia, the fore part ofthe
  region ofthe thorax.
Precipitation, to cast down.
Predisposing, to predispose.
Predispose, that constitution,
  or state ofthesolids,or fluids,
  or of both of which dispose
  the  body to  the action of
  disease.
Prima vice, the first passages,
  the stomach and bowels.
Prior, the  first.
Pro Re Natta,  occasionally.
Probang, a flexible piece of
   whale-bone  with a sponge
   fixed at the end.
 Probe, a long slender surgical
   instrument with which sur-
   geons  try the  extent  of
   wounds.
 Probosis, a  trunk as that of
   the elephant.
 Process, an eminence.
 Procidentia, a falling down of
   any part.
 Prognosis, the foretelling the
   event of diseases from par-
   ticular  symptoms.
 Prognostic,  to know before
   hand.
 Prolapsus, slip down.
 Pronation,  turning the palm
   of the hand downwards.
 Prone, natural.
 Prophylactic,any means mada
   use of to prevent disease.
 Prostate,  a  large  heart like
   gland  situated before  tho
   neck ofthe urinary bladder.
 Proximate, first, near, or  the
   thing itself.
 Prurigo,  the itch.
 Psora, the itch.
 Pterygium,  like a wing.
 Ptyalagogue,  see sialagogue.
 Ptyalism, salivation.
 Puerperal,  appertaining  to
   child bearing.
 Pulmo, the lung.
! Pulmonary, belonging to (he
   lungs.
 Pulmonics,  inflammation  of
   the lungs.
 Pulvis, a powder.
 Pupil, the opening in the mid-
   dle of the  iris. 
548
GLOSSARY, OR
Papillaris, belonging  to the
  pupil.
Purgative, any thing that in-
  creases the  peristaltic mo-
  tion of the bowels, so as to
  increase  the alvine evacua-
  tions.      '$
Puriform,  like  unto the se-
  cretion called pus.
Purpura, purple color.
Purulent, having the appear-
  ance of pus.
Pus, matter, a whitish,  bland,
  creamlike   fluid,  heavier
  than water, found  in phleg-
  monous abscesses, or on the
  surface of sores.
Pustule,  or elevation  of  the
  cuticle, containing matter,
  pus, or lymph which is gen-
  erally  discolored.
Putrefaction, the spontaneous
  decomposition of such veg-
  etable  and animal matters
  as exhale a fceted smell.
Pylorus, the  aperture  of the
  stomach  that opens into the
  intestines.
Pyrexia, from fire ;  fever.
Pyrexial, appertaining  to fe-
  ver.
Pyroligneous Acid, so called
  because  it  is  procured by
  distiling wood.  This acid
  will preserve animal flesh,
  longer than any other known
  substance.
Pyrosis, water brash.
Pyxis, a box, now applied to
  the cavity of the hip bone.

Q.  P. (quantum placet,) as
  much  as you please.
Q. & (quantum sufficit,) suf-
  ficient quantity.
Q. V. (quantum vis,) as much
  as you will.
Quartana,the fourth day ague.
Quassia, from a slave by the
  name of Quassi, who first
  used it with uncommon suc-
  cess as a secret remedy in
  the malignant endemic fe-
  vers which  frequently pre-
  vail at Surinam.  The roots,
  bark, and wood of the tree
  are used.   It is a valuable
  tonic.
Quercus, the oak.
Quicksilver, mercury.
Quiescent, at rest.
Qunia, cr Quinine, the active
  or  medicinal principle of
  Peruvian bark.
Quinquina, Cinchonia.
Quotidian, ague  that occurs
  daily.
R. This letter is placed at the
  beginning of a prescription,
  as a contraction of recipe ;
  take.
Rabies, Rabies Canines; mad-
  ness, hydrophobia.
Rachialgia,a pain in the spine.
Rachitis, the rickets.
Radial, belonging to the ra-
  dius.
Radix, the root.
Ranus, a branch.
Rancid,  oily substances, are
  said to be rancid when they
  acquire  a strong  offensive
  smell, and altered taste.
Ranine,  appertaining to a frog. 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
540
  Ranula, a disease  under the
    tongue, called  from its re-
    semblance to a frog or be-
    cause it makes the patient
    croak like a frog.
  Ranunculus,  crane's bill  or
    crow's foot.
  Raphe, a suture,  because the
    parts appear as if they were
    sewed together.
  Rash, eruptions. '
  Reccptaculum, a name given
    by the older anatomists to a
    part ofthe thoracic duct.
 Rectification, to  make clean.
 Rectum, the  last portion of
    the large intestines.
 Rectus, straight.
 Recurrent, reflected.
 Reduction, to replace, reduce,
   revive.
 Refrigerant,  to  cool, medi-
   cines which allay heat.
 Regimen, to govern, regula-
   tion of the diet.
 Region, a part.
 Regius, or Rex, a king, royal.
 Remedium, to cure, a remedy.
 Remittent,  any disorder the
   symptoms of wiiich dimin-
   ish very considerably,  and
   return again, so as not to
   leave  the  person entirely
   free.
 Reminiscence, an idea produ-
   ced that one does  not  re-
   member having had before.
 Ren, the kidney.
 Renal, appertaining to the kid-
   ney.
Reniformis, kidney shaped.
Repellent, to drive back.
Repens, creeping.
 Repulsion,  that property  of
   all bodies, which is in con-
  stant opposition to attraction.
 Resin, solid inflamable sub-
   stances, of vegetable origin,
   soluble in alcohol, and oil
   but not in water.
 Resolution, a termination  of
   inflammation, in which the
   disease disappears without
   any abscess, mortification,
   &c. being occasioned.
 Resolvent, such substances as
   discuss inflammatory and
   others tumors.
 Respiration, breathing.
 Resuscitation, from resuscita-
   tio, rcsuscito, to rouse, and
   awake.     Revivification.
 .  The restoring of persons ap-
   parently dead to life.
  FromconsideringthedrowB-
 ed  person is surrounded  by
 water instead of air, ancl that
 in  this situation  he  makes
 strong and repeated  efforts to
 breathe, we should naturally
 expect that  the water would
 enter ancl completely fill the
lungs. This opinion was once
 pretty general, and it still con-
tinues to  prevail  among t\»
common people.  Experience,
however,  has shown that un-
 less the body lies so long  ii*
the water as to have its living
principle  entirely destroyed,
the quantity of fluid  present
in the lungs is inconsiderable.
  The reason why the  lung*
of drowned animals are so free
from water,  is that the mus-
cles which form the  opening 
550
GLOSSARY,  CR
 into the windpipe are exquis-
 itely  sensible,  and  contract
 violently upon the least irrita-
 tion, as we frequently experi-
 ence when any part ofthe food
 or drink happens to touch that
 part.   In  the efforts  made by
 a drowning person, or animal
 to draw in air, the water rush-
 es into the mouth and throat,
 and is  applied to  these parts,
 which  immediately  contract
 in such a  manner as to shut
 up the passage into the lungs.
 This contracted state contin-
 ues as long as the muscles  re-
Jain the principle of life, upon
 which the power of muscular
 contraction depends.   When
 that is gone, they  relax and [
 (he water  enters (he windpipe
 and completely fills it.
   On dissection the body of a
 recently drowned animal,  no
 particular fulness of the ves-
 sels within the skull, nor any
 disease  of the brain or  its
 membranes are visible.  The
 lungs are also sound, and  the
 branches of the windpipe gen-
 erally contain more or less of
 a  frothy  matter,  consisting
 chiefly of air mixed with a
 small quantity of colorless  flu-
 id.
    The right  cavity of  the
 heart,  and the trunks of  the
 large internal  veins which o-
 pen into it, ancl also the  trunk
 and large branches of the ar-
 tery which carries the  blood
 from this  cavity through  the
 lungs, are all distended with
dark colored blood, approach-
ing almost to blackness.
  The left cavity of the heart
is nearly, or entirely empty,
as are likewise the large veins
of the lungs which supply it
(nourish) with blood, and the
trunk and principle branches
of the  great  artery that con-
veys the blood from this cavi-
ty to the  various parts of the
body.   The external  blood
vessels  are  empty ; and  the
fleshy parts are  as pale  as if
the animal had  been bled to
death.   When a. body has lain
in the water for sometime, oth-
er appearances will also be
observable, the skin will be
livid, the eyes blood-shot, and
the countenance bloated and
swollen.  But  while  these
parts are found entirely drain-
ed of blood, tho right cavity,
as before observed, together
with the  veins and arteries
leading  to and from it,  are
turgid  with blood;  and this
must be, at  least,  the direct
cause of death, as there evi-
dently is no injury suffered by
any part, from  which  death
could take place.
Rete, formed of meshes, a net.
Reticular, net-like.
Retiform, the  same.
Retina, the innermost mem-
   brane of  the eye, it is the
   expansion, and final termin-
   ation ofthe optic nerve, and
   the  immediate and sole or-
   gan of vision.
I Retraction, a muscle, the of- 
MIMICAL DICTIONARY.
551
  bee of which is to retract
  the part into which  it is
  inserted.
Retahens, drawing back.
Retrocedent,   Retrograde,
  backwards,  returning to a
  former position, back move-
  ment.
Revulsion, drawing  the con-
  trary way.
Rhagas,  a chap, bruise, or
  cleft.
Rheum Palmatum,  the  sys-
  tamic name of the officinal
  rhubarb.
Rhypia, foul,  ill conditioned.
Rib, costa.
Rima  Glottidis,  the opening
  ofthe larynx through which
  the air  passes in ar.d out of
  tlie lungs.
Risus, laughter.
Rosa, redness, like a rose.
Roseola,  rash, a rose colored
  efflorescence.
Rotator,  to  turn,  a muscle
   that is  to wheel  about any
   part.
Rotula, a wheel, the knee pan.
Rotundus, round.
Rubefacient,    a  substance
   which, when applied a cer-
   tain time to the skin produ-
   ces redness without blister-
   ing.
Rubeola,  to become red, the
   measles.
Rubigo,  red color, rust.
Rubigo Ferri, rust of iron.
 Ructus, an eruction.
Rugosus, rugged.
 Rupture, see  hernia.
            8
S. A. secundum  artcm,  ac-
  cording to art.
Si or ss. semis, or half,
Saburra,  dirt,  sordes, filth,
  foul stomach, &c.
Saccated, evcysted, contained
   in a sac.
Saccluirum, sugar, sweet, su-
   gar cane, &c.
Saccharum Saturni, sugar of
   lead  (acetate  of  lead or
   plumbum acetas.)
Saccho-lactic, sugar prepared
   from  milk.
Saccus, sac, a bag.
Sacral, belonging to the sa-
   crum.
Sacro, the same.
Sacrum, so called from sacer,
   sacred ; because it was for-
   merly offered in sacrifices ;
   the os sacrum, see anatomy,
Sagittal, shaped like an ar-
   row.
Salifiable, having the proper-
   ty of forming a salt.  ,
 Saline, of a salt nature.
 Salinus, the same.
 Saliva, the fluid which  is se-
   creted by the salivary glands
   into   the   cavity of  the
   mouth.
   The   secretory   organ   is
 composed of three pair of sal-
 ivary glands.   1.  The  paro-
 tid   glands, which  evacuate
 their saliva by means of the
 Stenonian  duct, behind the
I middle  dens molaris of tlie
| upper jaw.   2. The submax-
 illary glands, which pour out 
hh2
GLOSSARY,  OR
 their saliva through the War- j
 thonian ducts on  each side of j
 the frenulum  of the  tongue j
 by  a narrow osculum.    3. j
 The sublingual glands, situa-
 ted between the  internal  sur-1
 face of the  maxilla and  the '
 tongue, which pour out their j
 saliva through numerous  Ri-
 vinian  ducts at   the  apex of
 the tongue.
   The saliva in the mouth has
 mixed  with  it.   1. The mu-
 cus of  the  mouth.   2.  The
 roscid vapor from the whole
 surface  of the cavity  of  the
 mouth.
   The  saliva  is  continually
 swallowed  with  or  without
 masticated food,  and some is
 also  spit out.  It has no col-
 or nor smell; it  is  tasteless,
 although it  contains  a little
 salt, to which  the nerves  of
 the  tongue  are  accustomed.
 Its  specific  gravity is  some-
 what greater than water.   Its
 consistence  is rather  plastic
 and spumous from the entan-
 gled atmospheric air.
   The  quantity  of  twelve
 pounds  is supposed to  be  se-
 creted in twelve  hours.  Du-
 ring mastication and speaking,
 the  secretion  is  augmented,
 from the mechanical pressure
.of the muscles upon  the sali-
 vary  glands.    Those  who
 are  hungry  secrete  a great
 quantity, from   the  sight  of
 agreeable food.
   Its  use is,  1.  it augments
 the  taste of the food, by evo-
 lution  of  sapid  matter.   2.
 During  mastication  it  fixes
 with, dissolves, and  resolves
 into its  principles, the food;
 and changes it into a  pultace-
 otts mass fit to be swallowed,
 hence it commences  chymifi-
 cation.   3. It  moderates thirst
 by  moistening  the mouth and
 fauces.
 Salivial, spittle, or belonging
   to the saliva or spittle.
 Salivato,  Salivation, an  in-
   creased secretion of saliva,
   a ptyalism.
 Salpingo, a trumpet, or like
   a trumpet.
 Salsola Kali,  the plant which
  affords soda, the mineral al-
  kali.
 Salt,  this term has been usu-
  ally employed  to denote a
  compound  in  definite pro-
  portions, of  acid   matter
  with  an alkali, earth, or
  metalic  oxide.
  When  the   proportions of
 the constituents are so  adjus-
 ted that  the  resulting  sub-
 stance, does not affect the col-
 or  of infusion of litmus,  or
 red cabbage,  it is then called
 a neutral  salt.   When  the
 predominance  of  acid is evin-
 ced by the reddening of these
 infusions, the salt is said to be
 acidulous, and the prefix, su-
per or  oi, is used to  indicate
 this excess of acid.   If  on
 the contrary the  acid  matter
 appears  to be in  defect,  or
 short of the quantity necessa-
 ry for neutralizing the alka- 
MEDICAL  DICTIONARY.
553
 Knity of the base, the  salt is
 then said to be with excess of
 base, and the prefix, sub is at-
 tached to its name.
 Sanative, that  which  heals
    diseases.
 Sanctus, holy.
 Sanguification,  Sanguifica-
    to,  from sanguis, blood,
    and  faceo,  to  make.   A
    natural function of the bo-
    dy by which  the chyle is
    changed into blood.
 Sanguineous, bloody.
 Sanies Ichor, a thin limpid,
    and  greenish discharge, al-
    so a thick ancl bloody kind
    of pus.
 Sapindus, Indian soap.
 Sapo, soap.
 Sarcology, the doctrine  of the
   soft parts.
 Sarcoma,  a  fleshy excre-
   scence.
 Sarcosis, the same.
 Sardonic Laugh, a  convul-
   sive  laugh, or  spasmodic
   grin.
 Sartorius, a  tailor, the mus-
   cle by which tailors  cross
   the legs.
 Saturation, the state of  a  bo-
   dy which  has a  power  of
   dissolving an other in cer-
   tain  quantity  only ;  thus
   when as much sugar is put
in tea as the tea will dissolve,
the tea is then said to  be sat-
urated ;  if there  is  more put
in »o that the sugar is  not dis-
solved, it is called a super sat-
uration,   if there  is  not  as
much} sugar as the tea can dis-
 solve, it is called sub satura-
 tion.
 Satureia, from  satyri,. lust-
   ful,  the principle  of the
   love powder,  used  in un-
   civilized ages.
 Saturnus, the chemical name
   of lead.
 Scabies, to scratch, the ilcb.
 Scalpellum, a  scalpel or dis-
   secting knife.
 Scapula, the shoulder  blade.
 Scarf-Skin, see anatomy.
 Scarfication, a superficial in-
   cision, to scarify.
 Scarificator,  an  instrument
   used by surgeons and  cup-
   pers to evacuate blood.
 Sciatic,  belonging to the is-
   chium.
 Sciatica,  a rheumatic  affes-
   tion of the hip joint.
 Scilla, squill.
 Scirrhus, a hard indolent tm-
   mor of a glandular part.
 Sclerotic,  one  of the coats of
   the eye.
 Scorbutus, the  scurvy.
 Scrophula,  scrofula,  king's
   evil.
 Sebaceous, suetty, like tallow.
 Secale  Cornutum, a  black,
   curved, morbid excrescence
   like the spur of a fowl, the
   smut of rye.
Secondary,  something  that
   acts as second  or in subor-
   dination to another.
Secretion, a function by which
   a part of the  blood escapes
   from the organ of circula-
   tion, and diffuses itself with-
   out, or within, the body. 
554
GLOSSARY, OR
Secundines, the  after birth,
  &c.
Secundum Artem, according
  to art.
Sedative, to ease, medicines
  that diminish the animal en-
  ergy,  without  destroying
  life.
Sediment, the heavy parts of
  liquids which fall to the bot-
  tom.
Semen, seed.
Semi, half.
Semicircular, half circular.
Semicupium, a  half bath,  or
  such as receives  only  the
  hips or extremities.
Semilunar, half-moon shaped.
Sensation,  feeling,  the  con-
  sciousness of a change tak-
  ing place in any part, from
  the contact of a foreign bo-
  dy with the extremities of
  the nerves.
Sensibility, that action of the
  brain by which we receive
  impressions   either   from
  within or from without.
Sensorium, the organ of  any
  of the senses.
Sentient, the parts most sus-
  ceptible of feeling.
Septic, to putrefy, relating to
  putrefaction.
Septum j a partition.
Serous, relating to serum.
Serpentaria,   resembling  a
   snake.
Serrata, Serraticus, a saw, or
   resembling a saw.
Setaceus, bristly. •
 tuition, an artificial ulcer mad?.
   under the skin by means of
  an  instrument called  the
  seaton needle, which  car-
  ries  with it  a  portion of
  thread or silk, this is moved
  backwards  ancl  forwards,
  and thus keeps up a con-
  stant irritation.
Shingles, a species of erysip-
  elas.
Siagony the jaw.
Sialagogue, those medicines
  are so called  which excite
  an uncommon flow of saliva.
Sibbens, a disease resembling
  syphilis.
Silver, argentum.
Simplex, simple.
Sinapis, mustard.
Sinciput, fore part of the 1 ead.
Singultus, hiccup.
Sinus, a cavity or depression,
  a long hollow track.
Skeleton, from  to dry, when
  the  bones of the body are
  preserved  in their  natural
  situation, and deprived of
  the flesb^ the assemblage is
  called a Nkeleton.
Sleep, that s(ate of the  body
  in which the internal  and
  external senses and volun-
  tary motions are not exer-
  cised.   The  design   and
  end  of sleep is both to re-
  new, during the silence and
  darkness of the night, th«
  vital energy which  has been
   exhausted through the day,
   ancl to assist nutrition.
   " When the  time  of being
a wake has continued for six-
teen or  eighteen  hours,  we
hi ive a  general feeling  ef fer 
MEDICAL  DICTIONARY.
555
 tigue and weakness ; our mo-
 tions become  more  difficult,
 our senses lose their  activity,
 the mind  becomes  confused,
 receives sensations indistinct-
 ly, ancl governs muscular con-
 traction with  difficulty.   We
 recognise,  by  these signs, the
 necessity of sleep ; we choose
 such a position us can be pre-
 served with little effort; we
 seek  obscurity  and  silence,
 and sink into  the  arms of ob-
 livion.
    The man wo slumbers  lo-
 ses successively  his  senses,
 the sight first ceases to act by
 the closing of  the  eyelids, the
 smell becomes dormant only
 after  the  taste ; tide  hearing
 after (he smell, and (he touch
 after the hearing, tho  muscles
 of the limbs,  being  relaxed,
 cease  to act before those that
 support the head,  and these
 before those of the spine.   In
 proportion as these phenome-
 na proceed, the respiration be-
 comes slower and more deep ;
 the  circulation  diminishes;
 die biood proceeds in greater
 quantity to  the  bead ; animal
 heat sinks, (he  diffierent secre-
 tions   become  less abundant.
 Man,  although  plunged in
 this sopor, has  not yet lost the
 feeling of hrs existence, he is
 conscious of most of the chan-
 ges that happen  in him,  and
 which are  not without their
 charms; ideas more  or  less
incoherent, succeed each  oth-
 \r in  his  moid :  he  ceases,
 finally, to be sensible of exis-
 tence ; he is asleep.
    During sleep, the circula-
 tion, and  respiration are re-
 tarded, as well  as the diffier-
 ent secretions, and, in conse-
 quence, digestion becomes less
 rapid.   I know  not  on what
 foundation the  most part of
 authors  say that absorption
 alone acquires more energy.
 Since the nutritive  functions
 continue in sleep, itis evident
 that the  brain has  ceased to
 act, only with regard to mus-
 cular contraction, and as an
 organ  of  intelligence;   and
 that it continues to  influence
 the muscles of respiration, the
 heart, the arteries, the secre-
 tions and nutrition.    Sleep is
 profound  when  strong exci-
 tants  are  necessary  to arrest
 it;  it is light when  it ceases
 easily.  Sleep, such as it has
 been described, is perfect, (hat
 is, it results  from the  suspen-
 sion of the action of the rela-
 tive organs of life, and from
 the  diminution of the action
 of  the  nutritive functions;
 but  it is not extraordinary for
 some of the  relative organs
 of life to preserve their activ-
 ity during sleep,  as it happens
 when  one sleeps  standing;
 it  is also  frequent for one or
 more of the senses to remain
 awake, and transmit  the im-
 pressions which it receives to
 the  brain;  it is still more
common for the brain to take
cognizance  of diffierent  in- 
556
GLOSSARY,  OR
ternal sensations  that are de-
veloped   during  sleep,   as
wants, desires, pains, &c.
   The  understanding  itself
may  be  in exercise  in man
during sleep, either in an  ir-
regular or  incoherent,  as  it
happens in some persons hap-
ily  organised.    The  turn
which the  ideas assume  du-
ring sleep,  or the nature of
dreams, depends much on the
state of the organs.
   If the stomach is overchar-
ged with  indigested food,  the
respiration difficult on account
of position, or other causes,
dreams are painful;  fatigue-
ing;  if hunger  is  felt,  the
persons  dreams   of   eating
agreeable food, &c.  &c.   It
is because  the judgement is
sometimes correctly exercised
in dreams with regard  to fu-
ture events, that in times of
ignorance  the gift of divina-
tion was  attributed  to  them.
   Nothing  is  more curious in
the  study of  sleep,  than  the
history of sleep, wakers.
   Those   individuals  being
first profoundly asleep, rise all
at once, dress  themselves, see,
hear,  speak,  employ  their
bands with ease,  perform cer-
tain  exercises,  write, com-
pose, then go to bed, and pre-
serve, when  they are awake,
no recollection of what hap-
pened to them.   What differ-
ence is  there, then,  between
a sleepwalker of this kind,!
unci a man awake ?   A very |
evident difference—the one is
conscious  of his   existence,
the other is not.
   Many  hypotheseses  have
been offered on the proximate
cause of sleep, as the depres-
sion of  the lamina of the cer-
ebrum,  the afflux  of blood to
the brain,  fya.   Sleep which
is  the immediate effect of the
laws  of organization, cannot
depend  on  any physical cause
of the kind.  Its regular re-
turn is one of the circumstan-
ces that contributes the most
to the preservation of health ;
its  suppression,  even  for a
short  time, is often attended
with  serious inconvenience,
and in no case  can it be car-
ried beyond certain limits.
   The  ordinary duration  of
sleep  is variable;  generally
it  is from six to eight hours.
Fatigue of the  muscular sys-
tem,  strong  exertions  of the
mind,  lively and  multiplied
sensations, prolong it, as  well
as habits  of  idleness, the im-
moderate use of wine,  ancl of
too strong aliments.  Infancy
and youth, whose life of  rela-
tion is very active, have need
of longer repose.
   Riper age, more  frugal of
time, and tortured with cares,
devotes to  it but a small por-
tion.   Very  old people pre-
sent  two  opposite  modifica-
tions ;  either  they are  al-
most always slumbering, or
their sleep is  very light, but
the reason of this latter is not
Jl— 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
557
to be  found in the  foresight
they have of their  approach-
ing end.
   By uninterrupted,  peacea-
ble sleep,  restrained  within
certain  bounds, the  powers
are restored, and the  organs
recover their  facility  of  ac-
tion ; but if sleep is troubled
by disagreeable dreams, and
painful  impressions, or even
prolonged  beyond  measure,
very far from repairing, it ex-
hausts the strength,fatigues the
organs, and  sometimes  be-
comes the occasion  of  serious
diseases, as idiotism and mad-
ness.
Smell, see  sense of in anato-
   my.
Sneezing;  a convulsive ac-
   tion of the muscles of the
   chest from irritation of the
   nostrils.
Soda, the mineral alkali.
Sol;  the sun.
Solvent;. menstruum.
Solution,  an  intimate com-
   mixture   of   solid  bodies
   with  fluids,  into  one see-
   mingly   homogeneous  li-
   quor.  The dissolving fluid
   is called a  menstruum or
   solvent.
Somniferous, having the pow-
   er of inducing sleep.
Sopor, profound sleep.
Soporiferous, a  term  given
   to whatever  induces sleep.
Sowui,  an instrument which
  surgeons introduce through
  the urethra into the bladder,
  to discover whether there is
                           35
  a stone in the viscus or not.
Spasmus, cramp, convulsion,
  spasm.
Spatula, a  broad instrument
  for spreading salve.
Specific, a  remedy that is  an
  infallible  cure  for  disor-
  ders ; certain,  fixed, defi-
  nite  object, &c.
Sphacelus, a mortification of
  any  part.
Spheno or Spenoidal; be-
  longing  to  the  sphenoid
  bone.
Sphincter, from, to shut up,
  the  name  of several mus-
  cles, the offiee of which is
  to shut  or close  the  aper-
  ture around which they are
  placed
Spinal, belonging to the spine
  (back bone)  of the  back.
Spinal Marrow, the marrow
  in the back bone.
Spine,  the column  of bones
  from the  occiput to the os
  sacrum,  the  bones  of the
  neck and back.
Splanchnology, the doctrine
  of the viscera.
Speen, the melt.
Splenitis, inflammation of the
  spleen.
Spongiosis, spongy.
Sporadic,  such  diseases as
  seize a few persons at any
  time or season.
Sputum; spit,  any kind of
  expectoration.
Squamose, scaly.
Stapes, stirrup, a bone of the
  internal ear, so called from
  its resemblance tea stirrup. 
558
GLOSSARY,  OR
 Staphyloma, a disease of the
   eye bail in which the cor-
   nea loses its natural trans-
   parency,  rises  above  the
   level of the  eye, and suc-
   cessively projects, even be-
   yond the eye lids in form of
   a whitish pearl colored tu-
   mor.
 Steatoma, an encysted tumor,
   the contents  of which arc
   of a suety consistence.
 Sterility, barrenness in wo-
   men.
 Sterno, belonging to the ster-
   num.
 Sternum, the breast bone.
 Stertor, a noisy kind of res-
   piration, as is observed  in
   apoplexy.
 Stillicidium;  astranguary or
   discharge of  the urine drop
   by drop.
Stimulant, (hat which has (he
   power  of exciting animal
   energy.
Slimndus, that  which  rouses
   the action  or energy  of a
   part.
Stirolobium,  the cowage  or
   cowitch.
Stomach  Pump, this  is an
   instrument for  the purpose
   of  emptying  the  stomach
   of its  contents, when  poi-
   son  has been taken.   It is
   a  long catheter  made  of
   gum  elastic, which  being
   introduced into the mouth,
   is passed into the oesopha-
   gus, and pressed  forwards
   until the point reaches the
   stomach.
   A syringe adapted to the
 tipper end is then applied, and
 the stomach is emptied of its
 fluid contents.
 Stomachic,    (hat    which
   strengthens  the  action  of
   the stomach.
 Strabismus, squinting.
 Strangury,  a  difliculty  of
   passing urine.
 Stricture,   a  diminution  or
   contracted  state  of some
   tube or duct of the body.
 Strophulus, a papulous erup-
   tion peculiar to infants.
 Struma, this term is general-
   ly applied to  scrofula, and
   by some to bronchocele, or
   an induration  of the  tby-
   void gland.
 Strumcus,  of the nature of
   scrofula.
 Stupor, insensibility.
 Styliforui,  like a bodkin, or
   style.
 Styptic, a term given to those
   subs'a.ices  which   passes
   the  power of stopping he-
   morrhage.
 Sub ; under, beneath.
Subacelate, an imperfect ace-
   tate.
Sub cartilaginous, under the
   quality,  imperfect,  or  a
   structure   approaching to
   that of cartilage.
Sub. Clavian ; under, or that
   which passes  beneath the
   clavicle.
Sub  (under)    Cutnaeous,
   (skin) ;  under the skin.
Sublinuftion,  a  process by
   which volatile  substances 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.             559
   are  raised  by heat,, and
   again condensed in a solid
   form.
Sublingual, under the tongue.
Subluxatio, a sprain.
Submersion,  putting  under
   the water,  sinking  &c.
Submuriate,   an  imperfect
   muriate.
Subscapularis,  under  the
   shoulder blade or scapula.
Subsultus, to leap.
Subsultus Tendinum; weak
   convulsive    motions   or
   twitchings of the tendons,
   mostly  of the hands, gene-
   rally observed in  the ex-
   treme  stages of  putrid fe-
   vers.
Succedaneum;  a  medicine
   substituted for another.
Succiniate, a salt formed by
   the combination of the acid
   of amber  (succinic acid)
   with a salifiable base.
Succinic.   Belonging to am-
   ber
SuCCulens; juicy, rich.
Succus.   Juice.
Sudatib.   A sweating.
Sudatorium.     A  stew,  or
   sweating house.
Sudor.  Sweat or  perspira-
   tion.
Sudorific, see diaphoretic.
Suffocatio.   Suffocation.
Suffumigation.  The burn-
   ing  odorous substances to
   remove  an evil smell, or de-
   stroy miasma.
Suffusio,  to pour down a cat-
  aract, an  extravasation of
   blood &c.
                          35
Sugillation.  A bruise.   A
  spot or  mark made by a
  leech, cuppingglass, or any
  thing  that   ruptures  the
  small vessel and  causes an
  extravasation of  blood.
Sulphas.   A sulphate or salt
  formed by the union of  the
  sulphuric acid wiih a salifi-
  able base.
Sulphur.   Brimstone.
Sulphuric. Belonging to sul-
  phur.
Sulphuric Acid.  Oil of Vit-
  riol.
Super.  Over,  excess, addi-
  tion, upon.
Supercilium.   Eyebrow.
Suppuration.   That morbid
  action by which  pus is de-
  posited in inflammatory tu-
  mors.
Supra.  Above.   This word
  before any other  name,  im-
  plies  its situation  being
  above.
Surfeit.  The consequence oi
  excess in eating or drinking
  or of something unwhole-
  some in food
Suspcnsorium.
  bandage  to
  part.
Suture.   See
  surgery.
Sympathy.    The body
  sympathetically  connected
  together; and  dependent,
  the one part upon tho rest;
  constituting a general sym-
  pathy.
  Action  cannot  be greatly
increased  in anyone  orga*,
   A  bog  or
suspend  any

anatomy  and
t» 
560
GLOSSARY, OR
without being  diminished  in
some other; but certain parts
are more apt to be affected  by
the derangement of particular
organs  tban others;   and  it
was the observance  of this
tact which gave foundation  to
the old and well  known doc-
trine of sympathy, which was
said to proceed, turn ob com-
munionem  et similitudinem
generis turn ob  viciniam.—
It may be  thought that this
position  of action  being  di-
minished in one organ, by  its
increase, either in the  rest or
in some other part, is contra-
dicted by the existence of gen-
eral or actions affecting the
whole system.   But in them
we find in the first place, that
there  is always  some  part
more affected than the rest.
   This local affection is some-
times  the first  symptom, and
affects the  constitution  in a
secondary way, either  by the
irritation which  it produces,
or by an extension of the spe-
cific action.   At other  times
the local,  affection  is coeval
with the general disease, and
is called  sympathetic.   It is
 observed, in the second place,
 that as there  is  some part
which  is always more  affect-
 ed  than  the  rest, so  also is
 there  some organ which has
 its action,  in  consequence of
 this, diminished lower than
 that of tlie rest of  the system,
 and most  commonly lower
 than its natural, standard.—.
From the extensive sympafh /
of the stomach with  almost
every part of  the  body,  we
find that  this most frequently
suffers, and has  its action  di-
minished  in  every disease,
whether general or local, pro-
vided that the diseased action
arises to any considerable de-
gree.   There are also other
organs which  may,  in  like
manner, suffer from their asso-
ciation or connexion with oth-
ers wliich  become diseased.
Thus, for instance, we see, in
the  general  disease  called
puerperal fever, that  ihe  ac-
tion of the breast is diminish-
ed by the increased inflamma-
tory action of the uterus.
   In consequence  of this bal-
ance  of  action,  or  general
connection of the system, a
sudden pain, consequent to vi-
olent  action  of any part will
so weaken the  rest as to pro-
duce fainting, and occasional^
ly death.  But this depenci-
ence appears more evidently
in what  may be  called  the
smaller systems of the body,
or those  parts which seem to
be more  intimately connected
with each o(her (ban (hey are
witli  the general system.—
Of this kind is the connexion
of the breasts with the womb
of the female ; of the urethra
with the testicles of the mate;
of the stomach with, the liver;
and of the intestines with the
stomach; and of this agani
with, the brain ;. of one  e?h 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
561
tremity of the bone with  the
other ; and of the body of the
muscle with  its insertion ; of
the skin with the parts below
it; and all these systems, are
connected  to the  general sys-
tem by a universal sympathy.
   I shall give but one instance
for demonstration.
   In pregnancy, ancl ■ at  the
menstrual  periods, the uterus
is active, but, when the child
is born, the action of the ute-
rus subsides, while the breasts
in their turn  become active,
and secrete milk.  If, at this
time we should again produce
action in   the uterus, we di-
minish that of the breasts, and
destroy the secretion of milk,
as  is well illustrated by the
case  of  inflammation of the
uterus, which is  incident  to
lying-in women.
   When  the  uterus,  at  the
cessation of the menses, cea-
ses to be active, or to secrete,
we often find that the breasts
have an action excited in them
becoming slowly inflamed, and
assuming a cancerous disposi-
tion.   The uterus and breasts
seem to be glands that balance
each other ; for we seldom, if
ever  see, find that when  the
womb yields  the menstrual
discharge, the milk is secreted
in perfection,  nor during  the
time  of a  woman's  nursing,
that  the periodical shows are
regular or  perfect, neither do
we ever find  the  breasts and
uterus both inflamed at once.
 And the affection of one or-
 gan, weakens the one or those
 with which it has connection,
 thus in  inflammation of the
 womb, irregularities of  the
 stomach,  &c,  the brain is
 weakened through  sympathy,
 and the head, it is said, swims:
 when  the head is inflamed, or
 rather the brain ancl its mem-
 branes, the  womb becomes
 too weak for its natural offi-
 ces ; the stomach and bowels
 lose their  action,  the whole
j system following suit: hence
| the  debility and general ema-
 ciation attendant on such com-
 plaints ; and  the necessity of
 cathartics to promote the  pe-
 ristaltic motion of the bowels,
 and stimulants ancl tonics to
 avert  the  debility  and rouse
 the  system to vigorous action,
 and natural health.
 Symphysis.   A connexion of
   bones by means of an inter-
   venig body  such as carti-
   lage, ligament, &c.
 Synarthrosis.   Immoveable
   connexion.    A genus of
   connexion  of  bones,  in
   which they are  united  to-
   gether by an immoveable
   union.   It  has  three  spe-
   cies, viz. suture, harmony,
   and gomphosis
 Synchondrosis.   A  species
   of symphysis, in which one
   bone is united with another
   by means of an intervening
   cartilage ;  as  the vertebra,
   and the  bones  of the pu-
   bes. 
562
GLOSSARY, OR
Syncope. Fainting or swoon-

Syndesmosis.  That species
   of symphysis  or mediate
   connexion of bones in wliich
   they are united by ligament,
   as the radius with the ulna.
Syndesmus.  A  ligament.
Syneurosis.   That  species
   of symphysis in wliich one
   bone  is united to another by
   means  of an  intervening
   membrane.
Synovia,.  An unctuous fluid
   secreted from certain glands
   in the joint  in which  it is
   contained. Its use is to lu-
   bricate  the cartilaginous
   surfaces of the articulatory
   bones, and to facilitate their
   motions.
Synovial.   Relating  or be-
   longing to  tho synovia or
   fluid of the  joints.
Syntenosis.   A  species of
   articulation where (he bones
   are connected together  by
   tendons.
Synthesis.  Combination.'—
   It is opposed to analysis.
Syrups.   Sugar dissolved in
   water is called simple syr-
   ups.
Syssarcosis.   A  species of
   symphysis  in  which  one
-  .bone  is  united to another
   by means of an intervening
   muscle, as the  os hyoides
   with the sternum  and other
   parts.
Systole.   The contraction of
   the heart.
             T
 Tabacum.   Tobacco.
 Tabes.  A  wasting  of the
   body.
 Tanacetum.   Tansy.
 Tannin.  One of the imme-
   diate principles of vegeta-
   bles.  It is that which com-
   municates  tan to leather.
 Tarantula.  A kind of ven-
   omous spider, whose bite is
   said to be cured by music.
 Temperament.   A peculiar
   habit of  body.
 Technical.   Belonging to art.
 Tartar cream of.   The pop-
   ular name of the pulverized
   super tartrate of potassa.
Tear.   The  limpid fluid se-
  creted  ,by  the  lachrymal
  glands, and  flowing on the
  surface of the eyes.
Teguments.  Under the term
  common integuments, anat-
  omists comprehended  the
  cuticle,'  rete  mucosum,
  skin, ancl  adipose  mem-
  brane, as being the cover-
   ing  to every part, of  the
  body except the nails.
Temperature.    A  definite
  degree of sensible heat as
  measured by the thermom-
  eter.
Temple.    The lateral  and
   flat narts of the head above
   the ears.
Tendon.    The  white,  and
   glistening extremity of  a
   muscle.
Tenesmus.   A continual in-
  clination  to  go to  stool, 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
505
   without   any  evacuation.
 Tenser.   Applied  to  those
   muscles whose office  is to
   extend  the  part  to which
   they are fixed.
 Tent.  A roll of lint for dila-
   ting openings, sinuses, &c.
 Tentorium.   A process of
   the dura  mater, separating
   the cerebrum from the  cer-
   ebellum.
 Tercbinthina.   Turpentine.
 Teres.   Round cylindrical.
   Applied  to  some muscles
   and ligaments.
 Tsrcusy.  Consisting of the
   number three.
 Terncte.   Applied  in botany
   to a leaf which  consists of
   three leaflets,  or  to leaves
   when there are  three to-
   gether.
 Terra.  The earth.
 Thea. Tea.  The dried leaves
   of  the tea-tree,  of which
   there are  two species,  viz.
 1. The thea nigra,  bohea, or
 black tea.   2.  The viridis,
 or green  lea.   Both species
 »r<-  natives  of China or Ja-
 pan, where  they grow to  the
 heighlh of five or six feet.—
 The  leaves  are  collected at
 three different  times, in Feb-
 ruary, March,  and  April.—
 They are dried on iron plates
suspended over a fire, till they
 become dry and shrivelled.
  There are  three  kinds of
green, and five  of  bohea.—
 fhe green includes,
  X,  Imperial or bloom  tea,
 having a large leaf, faini smell
 and a  light green color.
   2.  Hyson,  having   small
 curled leaves, green shade in-
 clining to blue.
   3.  Singlo  tea,  so  called
 from the place where it is cul-
 tivated.
   The boheas comprehend,
   1.  Souchong,  the infusion
 of which gives  a yellowish
 green  color.
   2.  Camho, a fine tea, fra-
 grant  violent  smell,  and a
 pale shade.
   3.  Pekoe tea,  is known by
 the small while  flowers that
 are mixed with it.
   4.  Congo lea,  has a larger
 leaf than the  preceding, and
 yields  a deeper tint to water.
   5.   Common   bohea,  the
 leaves of which are of a uni-
 form green color.   There are
 many other kinds of tea such
 as gun powder tea, &c. &c.
 but. they differ from the pre-
 ceecling  only in  the manner
 of their  collection  and cure.
 According     to    professor
 Brande's experiments, there
 were,  in  one hundred parts of
 Green Hyson at  14s per  lb.
 56 parts  inert residue :  at
 12s, 57  parts; do.: at 10s,
 57 do. ; at 8s, 58 do. ;  at 7s,
 59 do.
  Black  Souchong  at 12s,
64 parts  inert residue :  at
 10s, 63 parts do.  : at  8s, 63
do.; at 7s, 64 do. j at  6s, 65
do. 
564
GLOSSARY,  OR
  Tea, in its natural state, is
narcotic, ancl the Chinese  re-
frain  from  its  use until, by
keeping  it for ai least twelve
months, it  becomes  divested
of its narcotic properties.
  Taken in moderate quanti-
ties with sufficient  milk and
sugar, it  invigorates the sys-
tem, but when  taken to ex-
cess,  it  is  apt to occasion
weakness,   tremor,   palsies,
&c, and to aggravate hyster-
ical and hypochondriacal com-
plaints.
Therapeutics.   That part  of
  medicine which  treats  of
  the application  and opera-
  tion of the different means
  employed for curing disea-
  ses.
Thorax.   The chest.   That
  part of  the  body situated
  between the neck  ancl the
  abdomen.
Thoracic.   Belonging to the
  thorax or chest.
Thrombus.  A small tumor
  which sometimes arises af-
  ter bleeding, from the blood
  escaping from the vein into
  the cellular structure  sur-
  rounding it.
Thyro.  Names compounded
  with  this word belong  to
  muscles which are attached
  to the  thyroid cartilage.
Thyroid.    Resembling  a
  shield.
Thyroid cartilage. The scu-
  tiform   cartilage,   which
constitutes  the
upper
and I
  forepart of the larynx, cal-
  led adam's apple.
Tibial.   Belonging to the ti-
  bia.
Tissue.  A term  introduced
  by the French anatomists to
  express the textures which
  compose the different organs
  of animals.
Tonic.  That which strength-
  ens or increases  the tone of
  the muscular fibre.  Appli-
  ed also to a rigid contrac-
  tion of  the muscles, as ia
  tetanus.
Topical.   Medicines applied
  to a particular place.
Tormina.   Severe pains.
Torpor.   A numbness,  or
  deficient sensation.
Tourniquet.  An instrument
  used for  stopping the flow
  of blood into a limb.
Toxicology.  A dissertation
  on poisons.
Trachea.   The windpipe.
Tracheotomy.   The opera-
  tion of cutting open the tra-
  chea.
Transfusion. The transmis-
  sion of  th.e blood from one
  living animal to  another by
  means of a canula.   Hai-
  vey was thirty years befor«
  he could get his discovery
  admitted,  though the most
evident proofs of it were every
where perceptible ; but as soon
asthe circulation was acknowl-
edged, people's minds  were
seized with a sort of delirium ;
it was thought that the means 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.
Ub
«&f  curing  all diseases  was
found, and  even of rendering
man immortal.  The cause of
all our evils was attributed to
the blood ; in  order  to cure
them, nothing  more  was ne-
cessary but to remove  the bad
blood,  and to  replace it by
pure  blood,  drawn   from a
sound animal.
   The first   attempts  were
made upon animals, ancl they
had complete success.   A dog
having lost a great part of its
blood, received by transfusion,
that of a sheep, and it became
well.  Another dog,  old and
deaf regained by this  means
the use of hearing, and seem-
ed to recover  its  youth.   A
horse of twenty-six years hav-
ing received  in his veins the
blood of four  lambs, he recov-
ed his strength.
  Transfusion  was soon at-
tempted  upon  man.  Denys
and  Emerez  of  Paris, were
the first who  ventured to try
it.   They  introduced  into the
veins of a young man, an ide-
ot, the blood of a calf, in great-
er  quantity  than  that which
had been drawn  from them,
and  he appeared  to  recover
his reason.    Leprosy  and the
ague were  also cured  by this
means; and  several  transfu-
sions were  made upon healthy
persons without any diagree-
able result.
  However,  some sad events
happened, to  calm the general
enthusiasm caused  by these
repeated successes. The young
ideot  we mentioned fell into
a state of madness a short time
after the experiment.  It was
tried on  him  again, and  he
was immediately seized witb
a hematuria,  and died in  a
state of sleepiness and torpor.
A young prince  of  the royal
blood was also the  victim of
it, and the parliament of Paris
prohibited  transfusion.    A
short time after,  two patients
in Italy died of the operation,
and the pope  prohibited it al-
so.  Since that period  trans-
fusion has been considered not
only useless, but even danger-
ous.
Transparency.   Clearness.
   That qual'uy of bodies  by*
   which  tf.oy  transmit tlie
   rays of light.
Transpiration,  see perspira-
   tion.
Transudation, the passing or
   oozing through the cells or
   pores of any thing.
Trapezium, a four sided fi-
   gure.
Trapezius, four square.
Traumatic,any thing relating
   to. a wound.
Treacle, molasses.
Tremor, an involuntary trem-
   bling.
Trepan  or trephine,  an  in-
   strument used by surgeons
   to remove a portion of bone
   from the skull.
Triceps.   Three headed. 
rM
GLOSSARY, OR
 Tricuspid.  Three pointed.
 Tripartite.   Divided   into
   three.
 Tritorium.  A mortar.
 Trituration.  The act of rub-
   bing or grinding to powder.
 Trochar.   An  instrument
   used in tapping for the drop-
   sy-
 Trochanter.  The name of
   two processes or  protuber-
   ances ofthe thigh bone.  It
   is derived from  a  Greek
   word which signifies to run:
   because the muscles insert-
   ed into them  perform the
   office of running.
Trochlea.   A kind of cartil-
   aginous   pulley  through
   which  the tendon of a mus-
   cle of the eye passes.
Trochoides.   Like a wheel.
   A moveable  connexion of
   bones  in  which one bone
   rotates upon another.
Truss.   An  instrument  to
   keep the intestines in their
   proper place in cases of rup-
   ture.
Tuber.  Applied, in anatomy,
   to some parts which  are
   rounded ;  in surgery, to a
  knot or  swelling in  any
   part;  in botany, to a round
  root,  as  a turnip; hence
   they  are called  tuberose
  roots.
Tubercles.     Small   hard
  bunches.
Tumour.   A swelling.
Tunica.    A  membrane  or
  covering,  as  the  coats  ofj
   the eye, &c.              j
 Turbinate.   Shaped  like  a
   sugar loaf.

             U
 Ulcer.  A running sore.
 Ulna or Cubit.   The  larger
   bone of the fore arm.
 Ulnar.  Belonging to the ul-
   na.
 Umbilicus.   The navel.
 Umbilical.   Belonging to the
   navel.
 Unciform.   Hook-like.
 Unguentum.  An ointment.
 Unguis.  The nail.
 Urea.   A constituent princi-
   ciple of the urine.
Urinary. Appertaining to the
   urine.
Urethra.  The  canal which
   conveys the urine.
Uterus.  The womb.
Uterine.  Belonging to  the
   womb.
Uvula.  The palate.

             V
Vacca.  The cow.
Vaccination.      Inoculation
   with cow-pox matter.
Vaccine.  Relating to cow-
   pox matter.
Vagina.  The passage to the
   uterus.
Valetudinarian.   A  weak,
   sickly person.
Valva.   A valve.   A thia
   transparent membrane situ-
   ated within certain vessels,
   as arteries, veins,  and ab-
   sorbents,  wliich  prevents
   the contents of the vessel
   from flowing back- 
MEDICAL  DICTIONARY.
567
 Variolus.   Small-pox matter.
 Vascular.   Belonging to the
   vessels.
 Vehicle.  A liquor  to take
   medicines in.
 Venous.   Belonging to the
   veins.
 Ventilation.  A  free admis-
   sion of air.
 Venomous,  (applied  to  ani-
   mals,) or virulent, (applied
   to medicines,) poisonous.
 Vermifuge.   That which de-
   stroys worms.
 Vertigo.   Giddiness.
 Vesicating.   Blistering.
 Villous.   Shaggy, rough, or
   hairv.
 Virus.   Poisonous matter.
 Viscus. Any organ  or part
   which has an  appropriate
   use,  as the viscera of the
   abdomen, the liver, spleen,
   intestines, &c.
 Viscid.  Glutinous, tenacious.
 Vas.  A vessel.
 Velum. A veil.
 Venereal.   Relating  to  the
   sexual intercourse.
 Vena.  A  vein.
 Ventricle.   A name given to
   the cavities of the brain and
   heart.
 Yermiform.   Worm-like.
 Vermicular.  Shaped like, or
   having the properties of a
   worm.
 Vermis.  A worm.
 Vertebra.  The bones of the
   spine from  the head to the
   lower part of the trunk.
Vertebral.   Appertaining  to
   the bones of the spine.
Vertex.  The crown of the
  head.
Vesicle.   A blister.
Vesicatory.  That which rais-
  es a blister.
Via.   A way or passage.
Vis.  Power.
Vis  insita.   That  inherent
  power or property of a mus-
  cle by which when irritated
  it contracts, independent of
  the  will and  without tha
  sense of pain.
"Vis vitas, or vital power.  Th®
  natural power ofthe animal
  machine in preserving life.
Vis a tergo.   Any iinpubivj
  power.
Vitreous.   Glassy.
Volatility.   That pronerty of
  bodies by which  they ars
  disposed to assume the va-
  porous or elastic state, quit-
  ting the  vessels in which
  they are placed.
Vulneraria,   or  vulnerary.
  Those  medicines  which
  heal wounds.
Vulnus.   A wound.
Water.   Pure water is trans-
   parent, without color, smell,
   or taste, but is hardly ever
   found  in that state.  Th«
waters that flow on the earth
contain various earthy, saline,
metallic,  vegetable, or ani-
mal particles, according to tht
substances over or thro' which
they pass.  Rain  and snow
waters are much purer  than
these, although they also con- 
568
GLOSSARY,  OR
 tain whatever floats in the air,
 or has been exhaled along with
 the watery  vapors.
 Winter Bark.   A useful  and
   cheap  aromatic.   It was
   named after  Capt. Winter
   who brought it from the
   straits of Magellan in 1579,
   and  introduced  it  to  the
   knowledge of physicians as
   being useful in scurvy, Sec.
 Wort.  An infusion of malt.
   This has been found useful
   in the cure of the  scurvy,
   and Dr. Macbride has laid
 it down  as  a principle  " that
 the scurvy depends on the fer-
 mentative quality in the rem-
 edies made  use of."  Its gen-1
 eral effects are laxative, nutri-1
 lious, and strengthening.  It
 has also been successfully us-
 ed in other cases where  a
 strong and  putrid disposition
 in the fluids appeared  to pre-
 vail, as in cancerous and phag-
 edenic ulcers.
   As the efficacy of the malt
 infusion depends upon its pro-
 ducing changes in  the whole
 mass of fluids,  it is plain that
 it must be taken in large quan-
 tities for a considerable length
 of time, and rather as an arti-
 cle  of diet than  medicine.
 From one to four pints is to
 be taken during the day.  One
 part  by  measure  of  ground
'malt, should be mixed with
 three  of boiling water, well
 stirred, covered, and  left to
 stand for  three or four hours. I
It ought to be made fresh eve-
ry day.

            X
Xiphoid.  A term given by
  anatomists to parts  which
  had  some resemblance to
  an  ancient  sword,  as tbe
  xiphoid cartilage.

            Y
Yaws.   The African name for
  raspberry.  Also the name
  of a disease  which resem-
  bles a raspberry.
Ypsiloides.  The os hyoides :
  so named  from its  likeness
  to the Greek letter ypsilon.
  or v.
Yttria.  An earthy or metallic
  substance, discovered  ia
  1794 by Professor Gadolin,
  in a stone from Ytterby, in
  Sweden.

            Z
Zero.  The commencement of
  a scale marked 0 :  thus we
  say, the zero of Fahrenheit,
  which is 32 degrees  below
  the freezing point of water.
  The absolute zero  is the
  imaginary point in the scale
  of temperature, when the
  whole heat is exhausted.
Zoology.  History of animals.
Zoonomia.  The laws  of or-
  ganic life.
Zootomy.  The dissection of
  animals.
Zygoma.  (From the  Greek
  word for yoke :  because it 
MEDICAL DICTIONARY.             569-
transmits the tendon ofthe
temporal  muscle   like  a
yoke.)  The cavity under
the zygomatic  process of
the temporal bone,  and os
malte.-
Zygomatic  Any thing rela-
  ting to the zygoma.
Zythogala.  A  mixture  of
  beer and milk, common call-
  ed passet drink- 
 
INDEX.
A	page		page
Ague, 16S		Antacids,	230
Causes, of	10	All acids, use of,	232
Prognosis, of	ib	Arrow,	234
Treatment of,	11	Anthelmintics,	235
Affusion, Cold,	18	Arabic emulsion, .	238
Acute rheumatism,	68	A tabic of medicines for	
Apoplexy,	74	family use with their	
Asthma, 89	. 172	doses and qualities,	241
Angina Pectoris,	93	A tablo of the prices of	
Animation suspended,	94	the principal medicines,	303
Asphyxia,	ib	Asiaiic Cholera,	307
Abdominal hemorrhage,	110	Anatomy,	339
Acne,	123	Arteries, 339	374
A sour stomach,	177	Aorta, of	ib
American Botanic Rem-		Artery, Pulmonary,	379
edies,	179	Act^n of Arteries, Ab$R-bents, of the,	ib
Angelica,	ib		383
Alum root,	180	" physiology of, _	ib
Agrimony,	ib	Abdomen, parts within,	384
Avens root,	ib	Aqueous humour of the	
Asarum or swamp Asara-		eye,	393
bacca,	ib	Aneurism, or enlarged	
Arrow root,	181	artery,	411
American senna,	191	Actual cautery,	419
American Hellebore,	197	Adhesive plaster,	420
A table of weights & meas-		Amputation,	444
ures,	201	" ofthe arm,	445
Antispasmodics,	206	" ofthe thigh,	446
Assafetida, 222.	207	" below the knee,	ib
Arsenic,	212	" of the fore arm,	447
Aqua Fortis,	ib	" ofthe fingers & toes,	ib
Anise, seeds and oil	215	B	
Astringents,	ib	Bark,	
Alum, 230.	216	Substitutes for,	14
Antimony,	218	Bilious fever, 164	. 16
44 Tartarized,	ib	Causes of	ib
44 Wine of,	ib	Symptoms,	ib
Aloes,	120	Treatment of,	ib
Ammoniac gum,	227	Warm bath in,	17
Ammonia,	229	Cold affusion, do.	18
 
-▼'
572                INDEX.
Diet in,	19	44 of the lower limb,	351
Bleeding from the nose, 72.	170	" of the connexion of	352
Bleeding from the lungs,	73	Buccinator muscle,	36*
Symptoms,	ib	Brain,	366
Treatment,	74	Basilic vein,	380
Bite of a mad dog, 85.	175	Belly contents of,	384
Breathing difficult,	89	Bladder, gall,	385
Broncbocele,	88	Ball ofthe eyo,	390
Bleeding from the urethra	,113	Breathing,	394
Blotched, or pimpled face,	123	Boils,	403
Bearing down,	145	Blind Boils,	404
Botanic practice,	163	Bleeding, means of stop-	
Bite of a rattle-snake,	175	Pin§S	417
Burns and scalds, 176.	407	Bite of the viper,	42*
Black Alder,	180	" of the rattle-snake,	423
Bearberry,	182	Bleeding or Venesection,	ib
Beech drops,	ib	44 ill consequences from	,424
Blood root,	183	Ball, of its course,	42S
Blackberry,	ib	Broken bones,	437
Burdock,	184	C	
Broad leaved laurel,	186	Continued fever,	24
Bittersweet,	189	Common, or simple con-	
Black snake root,	HP	tinued fever,	29
Blue flag,		Symptoms of	ib
Beth root,	194	treatment of	30
Blue cohosh,	ib	Cow pox,	36
Butternut tree,	195	Chicken pox,	39
Bitumen petroleum,	207	Catarrh,	51
Blue vitriol, 212.	216	Cynanche Tonsillaris,	52
Black Hellebore,	220	Cynancbe Parotidea,	54
Broom corn,	224	Chronic Laryngitis,	55
Balsam of Copaiba,	ib	Consumption, 167	'. 60
Boneset, 185.	226	Symptoms of	ib
BaUara of Tolu,	227	Causes of	61
" of Gilead,	ib	Treatment of	ib
44 of Peru,	ib	Chronic Rheumatism,	69
Benzoin and Benzoic acid	ib	Chorea,	81
Blisters,	228	Chronic diseases ofthe	
Burgundy pitch,	229	thorax,	88
Booes, ofthe,	340	Chronic affections of the	
" formation of	341	heart,	91.
44 number of	ib	Chemical tests,	99
44 of the skull,	342	Cholic,	107
" of the face,	ib	Chronic constitutional'.	
44 ofthe trunk,	346	diseases,	115
'• of .the upper limb,	'350	Cachexia,	116
 
INDEX.
»-«• a
OlO
Cachexia Africana,       117
Cutaneous Ilemorrhea,    118
Chronic diseases ofthe; skin, 123
Contagion,               131
Chlorosis or green sickness, 141
Cutaneous eruptions cf'
  children,               157
Cutting teeth,       158. 466
Convulsions,              158
Croup,                   161
  Symptoms  &. causes of   ib
  Treatment  of          162
Cholera morbus,          168
Cancers,                 173
Celandine,               181
Crawley or fever  root,     182
Comfrey,                   ib
Cholera, Asiatic,         307
  44   history of,           ib
  44   symptoms of,       310
  14   causes of,          312
  14   method of preyenting,317
  14   treatment of,         ib
  14   treatment of, in Asia,319
  "   treatment of, in Eu-
       rope,             320
  "   treatment of, in Can-
       ada and the United
       States,            328
Cholera deaths, a table of
  the proportion of,       333
Cholera, cases of    334. 335.
                    336
Cartilages,
Cicuta, or poison hemlock, 186  Comparative anatomy,
219
188
189
221.
Camomile,
Colts foot,
Charcoal of wood,
Crane's bill,         217. 196
Classification of medicines, 201
Chemical remedies,
Camphor,
Castor,
Calomel,
Copperas,
Copper,
Cinchona,
Cusporia febrihiga,
Columbo,
Cinnamon,
Cassia,
Canella alba,
Cloves,
Cardamon,
Cathartics,
Castor oil plant,
Cream of tartar,
Croton oil,
Corrosive sublimate,
Cowhage or cowitch,
Cabbage tree,
Consferves,
Camphor emulsion,
337
340
  ib
  10
 203
 207
 209
 211
  ib
 212
 213
  ib
 214
  ib
  ib
  ib
 215
 219
220
221
 222
 230
235
 236
  ib
238
     Cranium or skull, sutures
       and bones of,
197 i Cervical vertebra,
     Cavity of the pelvis,
     Clavicle or collar bone,
     Cubit'or ulna,
     Carpus or wrist,
     Connexion of bones,
     Cartilages and ligaments,
     Cuticle,
     Cutis, or true skin,
     Cellular membrane,
     Cerebrum or brain,
     Cerebellum,
     Coronary vessels,
     Carbuncle,
     Chilblains,
     Corns
     Schirrhus or cancer,
     Cicatrization,
     Concussion,
     Cataract,
     Couching, operation of,
     Cataract, extraction of,
     Caries, or decay of teeth,
     Cleaning the teeth,
     Cerates,
 342
 348
 350
  ib
  ib
 351
 352
 357
 364
  ib
  ib
 366
  ib
 370
 403
 408
  ib
 409
 430
 432
 448
 449
 450
 467
 470
.247
36 
574
INDEX.
             D
Delirium Tremens,
  symptome of,
  causes of,
  treatment of,
Difficult breathing,
Death beginning at the lungs,
Death beginning at the brain,
Death beginning at the heart,
Death by eflect upon the sys-
  tem generally.
Dysentery,          169.
Dracuuculus,
Diabetes,           172.
  symptoms of,
  treatment of,
Dropsy?             168.
  causes & treatment of,
Diseases of women & chil-
  dren,
Disease of the breast,
Diseases of children,
Distortion ofthe spine,
Dispecsator},       201.
Dandelion,
Dwarf elder,
Dogwood,
Deadly  nightshade,
Diuretics,
Diaphoretics,
Diluents,
Demulcents,
Decoctions,
Dorsal vertebra,
Dura mater,
Ductus alimentalis
Diaphragm,
Dislocations,
Dislocation ofthe lower jaw.
   '4  ofthe neck,
   44  of the shoulder,
   44  of the elbow,
   44  of the wrist, fingers,
        &c.
   44   ofthe hip  joint, or
        iHtish,
49	Disease ofthe tongue,	V>',
ib	44 ofthe tonsils & uvula	,454
ib	44 ofthe gums,	468
ib	Diseased teeth, effects of,	469
89	E	
,94	Eruptive fevers, or the ex-	
,95	anthemata,	34
, ib	character of,	ib
-	Eruptions, smaller,	45
ib	Eye, inflammation of,	50
105	Erysipelas,	71
109	Epistaxis,	72
118 Epilepsy,		77
ib!	Elecampane,	183
119	Ergot,	197
120 | Ether,		202
ib i Empyreumatic, or animal		
: on,		207
137	Emetics, 208.	217
155 i Epsom salts, 4p£l ib Errhincs, '~22^		
159 1 Epispastics,		ib
179 Euphorbia,		229
183 ; Escharotics,		ib
186 i Emmoiicnts,		234
187	Extraction of pulps,	236
188	Emulsions,	237
223	Electricity, see dictionary	j
225' also,		240
233 Ethmoid bone,		345
ib	Enarthrosis,	352
239	Expiation of plate I.	354
248 - "of plate II.		361
365	Elevator labii superioris	
385	proprius,	ib
386	External parts, and common	
434	integuments,	354
,435	External caroted artery,	374
ib	Esophagus,	385
436	Eye, of the,	390
ib	44 ball of,	ib
	44 humours of„	392
ib	Ear, ofthe,	393
	Enlarged veins,	410
437	Enlarged artery,	4W
<% 
	INDEX.		575
Encysted tumors,	412	Foreign bodies in the eso-	
Edema,	415	phagus,	456
Extraction of foreign bo-		Formation ofthe teeth,	462
dies from wounds,	419	Flowing,	147
Extraneous bodies in		G	
wounds,	428	Gastritis,	64
Extraction ofthe cataract,	450	Gout,	70
Effects of diseased teeth,	469	Guinea worm,	109
Extraction ofthe teeth,	470	Gravel,	112
		Gonorrhea dormientium,	114
Fevers, or febrile diseases	, 7	Gonorrhoea or clap,	128
Fever and ague, 163. 9		Gleet,	130
Frambesia,	47	General treatment of all	
Falling sickness,	77	fevers,	133
Fainting,	92	Green sickness,	141
Face, pimpled,	123	Griping,	157
Fomites,	133	Ground pine,	194
Fluor albus, 141.	178	Gravel weed,	192
Fits, hysterical,	142	Galbanum,	208
JFive fingers or cinquefoil,	182	Gentian, i>6	21fi
Fever-few or feather-few,	183	Ginger,	
Ferrum,	210	Galls,	217
Fox-glove,	224	Gamboge,	221
Fly, Spanish,	22S	Glauber salts,	ib
44 potatoe,	195	Guaiacum,	225
EJax seed,	233	Garlic, ,	226
Fixed or expressed oils,	237	Gum ammoniac,	227
Fibres,	339	44 Arabic,	233
Fluids,	340	General rule for making	
Frontis os,	344	inspissated juices,	237
Femoris os, *	351	Gases,	240
Fleshy polypus ofthe nose	,411	Ginglymus,	353
Fever sore,	414	Gomphosis,	ib
Fellon,	115	Glands, ofthe,	365
Fractures of the cranium,	431	Great artery,	374
Fractures in general,	437	Ganglion,	410
44 ofthe bone ofthe nose,438		Gun shot wounds,	428
44 ofthe lower jaw,	439	treatment of,	429
14 ofthe collar bone,	ib	Granulations,	430
44 of the fore arm, arm,		Gums, diseases of	468
wrist, and ribs,	440	Glossary,	273
Fracture of the thigh bone,441		II	
14 ofthe knee pan,	443	Herpes,	45
44 of the leg,	ib	Hepatitis,	66
44 ofthe bones ofthe foot,443		treatment of,	ib
36* 
576
INDEX.
chronic,	ib
treatment of,	67
Hemorrhages,	72
Hydrophobia,	85
Hooping cough,	90
Heart, description of,	369
44 affection of,	91
41 palpitation of,	92
44 death beginning at,	95
Heptalgia,	104
Hemorrhois,	111
Hematuria,	113
Hemorrhea,	118
Hydrothorax,	121
Hvdropericardium;	122
Hiccup, 157	127
Heart bum,	ib
Hysteria,	142
Hysteritis,	153
-.^Hydrocephalus,	159
Hives,	161
Headache, pills for,	176
Horse radish,	191
Henbane, hyosciamus,	205
Hydrargyrum,	209
Hydro sulphuret of ammo-	
nia,	218
Horn, hartshorn shavings,	234
Heat,	235
Hip bone,	349
Humeri ossa,	350
Hyoides os,	363
Healthy ulcers,	404
Humours ot the eye,	392
Hemorrhage, means of stop	
ping,	417
Head, injuries of,	431
Hip, dislocation ofr	437
Hare lip, I Introduction,	447
	3
Inflammatory fever, 165	25
causes,	ib
treatment,	26
Intermittent fever,	9
causes,	10
|   treatment,              H
 Inflammation of the brain,  48
   symptoms of,            ib
j   causes,                 ib
J   treatment,              ib
 Inflammatory diseases,     ib
 Inflammation ofthe eye,    50
 Influenza,                 51
   treatment,              52
 Inflammation ofthe larynx, 54
   causes, treatment,        55
Inflammation of the lungs,   57
   causes, and treatment,    58
Inflammation of the pericar-
   dium,                   62
Inflammation ofthe stom-
   ach,                    64
Inflammation of the bowels,  6-5
Inflammation of the liver,    66
Indigestion,              101
Inflammation ofthe kidncv,113
Ischuria renalis,	114
Impotency,	ib
Involuntary discharges of	
the semen,	ib
Itch,	124
Incubus,	126
Inflammation ofthe womb	, 153
Inward fits,	159
Inflammation ofthe trachea,161	
Itch ointment,	173
Indian tobacco,	184
Indigo weed,	196
Iron,	210
44 rust of,	ib
44 tincture of,	'ib
44 sulphate of	211
14 tartrate of, with pot-	
ash,	ib
44 wine of,	ib
44 water impregnated	
with,	ib
Ipecac,	219
Iceland liverwort,	234
Isinglass,	ib
Iron filings.	23c
 
'	INDEX.		577
Indian pink,	236	44 cautions to be obsen	«
Inspissated juices,	237	ed during,	ib
Infusions,	238	44 third stage of,	ib
Inominatum os,	349	44 general directions,	*52
Integuments common,	364	Ladies' slipper,	193
Insensible perspiration,	365	Lung-wort,	ib
Internal viscera,	368	Laurus camphora,	203
Inflammation of,	399	Lime,	212
44 phlegmonous,	ib	Lemon,	214
44 erysipelatous,	400	Lead,	215
Irritable ulcers,	405	Litharge,	ib
Indolent ulcers,	406	Lobelia inflata,	219
Injuries ofthe head,	431	Lunar caustic,	230
Irregularities ofthe teeth,	465	Lime water,	232
J		Liquorice,	233
Jaundice, 103	171	Lympheducts,	339
causes, symptoms,	ib	Ligaments^ 357.	340
treatment,	104	Lens,	393
Jenson,	186	Limbs, frozen,	407 418 9
Juniper berries,	224	Ligature,	
Jalap,	220	Lacerated wounds,	421
Jerusalem oak,	192	Leg, fracture of,	443
K		Lithotomy,	439
King's evil,	116	Loncitudinal sinuses,	266
cure for,	171	M	
King's evil weed,	192	Miliary fever,	22
Knee-pan,	443	causes, treatment of	23
L		Madness, mania,	79
Lichen,	46	symptoms, causes,	* ib
Local inflammatory diseases, 48		treatment,	£0
Laryngitis,	54	Menstruation,	138
Chronic,	55	Modified small pox,	166
Liniments,	247	Measles, 39.	166
Lungs, inflammation of,	57	Mercury, 227.	209
description of,	369	44 sore mouth from,	177
bleeding from,	73	Mortification, 178.	401
death beginning at,	94	Mallows,	187
Liver, inflammation of,	56	Mustard,	ib
description of,	385	Maiden hair,	194
Locked jaw, Life, turn of,	83	Milkweed,	169
	142	Meadow saffron,	198
Labor,	149	Measures,	201
44 natural,	150	Medicines, classification o	r ib
44 management in,	ib	" table of doses of,	241
44 second stage of,	151	14 table of prices of,	303
 
578
INDEX.
i
Mumps,	54-	Neuralgia,	87
Musk,	206	O	
Mild cathartics,	219	Ophthalmia,	50
Md|nesia,	220	Obstruction of the courses	
Muriate of soda,	222	in women,	139
Mandrake,	189	treatment of,	ib
Mustard seed,	223	Oak,	187
Mezereon.	228	Oak of Jerusalem,	192
Marsh maijow,	233	Opium,	204
Mixtures,	237	Oil, empyreumatic,	207
Mineral waters,	229	44 Cajeput,	208
Mucilages,	238	44 of vitriol,	215
Membranes,	239	44 castor plant,	220
Maxilla superior,	345	Orpiment,	212
Malarum, ossa,	ib	Orange,	214
Maxilla inferior,	347	Oil, croton,	222
Muscles,	357	44 of turpentine,	224
Mastoideus, or ) m Masse ter, )	3611	44 olive	234
		Orange, conserve of,	236
Membrane arachnoidea,	366	Oil of Almonds,	ib
Mixtures,	254	44 castor, how to make,237	
Minot exanthemata,	45	Occipital suture,	342
Medulla oblongata,	366	Osteology,	340
spinalis,	ib	Orbicularis muscle,	361
Mediastinum,	368	Omentum,	38-1
Messentery,	385	Oesophagus,	385
N		OZdema,	415
Nervous fever,	26	Operation of trephining,	433
causes, treatment of,	27	44 for the hare-lip,	447
Nose, bleeding from,	73	44 of couching,	449
Nerves,	339	44 for the stone,	459
44 painful affections	of, 87	Ointments,	247
Yight mare,	126	P	
Natural labor,	150	Practice of physic,	7
Nanny bush,	190	Paroxysm of ague,	* 9
'Nunk root,	ib	Prognosis, of,	10
Narcotics,	202	Plague,	32
Nutmegs and		Pox, cow or kino,	36
Mace,	214	44 small,	35
Nitre, Nitrate of potash,	223	44 modified do.	38
44 spirit of	ib	Pox, chicken,	29
Nerves, ofthe,	364	44 syphilitic,	129
44 functions of,	ib	Pemphigus,	46
Nose, polypus of	411	Pompholyx,	47
Neck, dislocation of,	435	Phrenitis,	48
" wounds of,	454	Pneumonia,	56
 
INDEX.                      579
 Pleurisy,                  5G
 Peripneumony,            57
      termination, causes,
       treatment,           5S
   "  notha,               59
 Pericarditis,               62
 Podagra,                  70
 Palsy,                     76
 Painful affections ofthe face,87
 Palpitation of the heart,     92
 Poisons,                   98
      from arsenic,         ib
      corrosive sublimate,   99
   "  pearl-ash,          101
   "  acid,                 ib
 Psora,                   124
 Psoriasis,                125
 Prurigo,                   ib
 Pulse, ofthe,            134
 Periodical courses,        138
 Pregnancy,               144
      diseases of,         145
 Putrid fever,             166
 Plasters,                 245
 Piles,               111. 170
 Pleurisy root,            185
 Powders,                244
 Pie plant,                189
 Pills,                    242
 Poplar,                  190
 Pride of china,       191. 236
 Pokeweed,                 ib
 Parsley,  wild,            192
 Potatoe flies,             195
Peach tree,                 ib
 Peppermint,             198
Prickly ash,              199
Papaver somniferum, or
Popy, white,             203
Precipitate,  red,          209
   "  white,              210
Peruvian bark,            212
Purging  cassia,           219
Purgatives,               220
Phosphate of soda,        222
Potash and potassa,       223
" nitrate of,	ib
Pelitory,	22S
Periosteum,	352'
Pili,	36.^
Pia mater,	366
Pleura,	36N
Pericardium,	369
Pulmonary artery,	379
Practice of surgery,	■ 399
Polypus of the nose,	411
Phymosis & paraphymosis, 416
Particular remarks,       419
Process by which a wound
  is united,              421
Punctured  wounds,        ib
Poisoned wounds,         422
Paracentesis,             452
             Q
Quotidian type,             9    t
Quartan do.,              ib
Quinsy,                   52
Queen of the meadow,     185
Quercus,                 187
Quinine,                 213
Quick lime,              216
Quilled suture,            420
             r>
             iX,
          Receipts.
For making bilious pills,   242
  "  Laxative pills,       243
  "  Pills of aloes and assa-
       foetida,             ib
  "  Anti-hysteric pills      ib
  "  Hull's colic pills,       ib
  "  Dr. Fuller's anti-relax
       pills,               ib
  "  Mercurial or blue pills, ib
  "  Half grain pills of cal-
       omel,              ib
  "  Strengthening  female
       pills,              244
For making powders,       ib
  "  Picra,                ib
  "  Gum powder,         ib
  "  Dover's powder,       ib
  "  Aromatic powder,      ib 
580
INDEX.
For making snuff powder,   ib
  "  Compound powder of
       chalk,             245
 •"• Compound powder of
       Kino,               ib
  "  Compound saline pow-
       der,                ib
For making plasters,       ib
  "  Diachylon, or common
       plaster,             ib
  "  Strengthening plaster, 246
  "  Adhesive plaster,      ib
  "  Anodyne plaster,      ib
  "  Blistering plastering,   ib
  "  Gum plaster,         ib
  "  Stomach plaster,      ib
 Cerates, liniments <$• oint-
       ments,             247
  "  Simple cerate or salve, ib
Goulard's cerate,          ib
Simple liniment,           ib
Lime water liniment,       ib
Liniment of camphor,      ib
Volatile liniment,          ib
Turpentine liniment,       ib
Ointment of nitrous acid,   ib
Turner's healing cerate.   248
Ointment of white hellebore, ib
Strong unguentum,         ib
Mild unguentum,          ib
Yellow ointments,          ib
Red precipitate,          249
 For ointment,             ib
 Sulphur ointment,         ib
 Basilicon  ointment,         ib
 For making tinctures,      ib
 Tincture of opium, or laud-
   anum,                   ib
 Paregoric,                 ib
 Tincture of aloes,          ib
   "  of rhubarb,           ib
   "  of myrrh,            ib
   "  of assafoetida,      250
   "  of camphor,          ib
   "  of kino,              ib
 Tincture compound,  of
       peruvian bark,      ib
   "  aromatic             ib
   "  of gum  myrrh  and
       pepper,             ib
   "  ofguaiacum,          ib
   "  of black hellebore,  251
   "  of colchicum,         ib
   "  ofthe muriate of iron, ib
   "  of essence of pepper-
       mint,               ib
   "  of American hellebore,ib
 Elixir of vitriol,            ib
 Spirit of mindererus,       ib
 For making syrups,        ib
 Simple syrup,              ib
 Syrup of vinegar,         252
   "  of orange,            ib
   "  of lemon,             ib
   "  of meadow saffron    ib
   "  of sarsaparilla,       ib
   "  of roses,             ib
 For making ivincs,       253
 Wines of meadow saffron,   ib
   "  of antimony,          ib
   "  of ipecacuanha,      ib
   "  of aloes,             ib
   "  ofrhubarb,           ib
   "   compound, of gentian, ib
 For making mixtures, fyc.  254
 Cathartic mixture,          ib
 Febrifuge mixture,         ib
 Sweating drops,            ib
 Solution of arsenic,         ib
 Solution of sal ammoniac,   ib
 Gravel mixture,            ib
 Gargle for sore mouth,     ib
 Itch lotion,               255
 Stimulating glyster,        ib
 Emollient glysters,         ib
 Tar water,                ib
 Styptic water,             ib
| Promiscuous  or misccllane-
i   ous receipts.             ib
e Fomentation  of poppies,    ib 
INDEX.
581
Cooling lotion,	ibl	Goulord's lotion,	261
Liniment for burns,	ib	Issue peas,	ib
Poultice for ulcers,	256	Tasteless ague drops,	ib
Lotion for old ulcers,	ib	Mosaic gold,	ib
Charcoal poultice,	ib	Queen's metal,	ib
Cure for corns,	ib	Red tombac.	ib
To stop bleeding,	ib	Common pewter,	ib
Eye waters,	ib	The best pewter,	ib
Dr. Iladcliffe's cough mixture,ib		Common solder,	2,_i2
For common use,	ib	Hard solder,	ib
For diarrhea or loseness,	ib	Soft solder,	ib
Cure for piles,	257	Printer's types,	202
Remedy for gout,	ib	Small types, and sferotype	
Gout cordial,	ib	plates,	ill
Worm pills,	ib	Mode of casting,	ib
Hooper's pills,	ib	Metallic injections,	C(>3
Lee's Windham antibilious		Cushions for electrical	
pills,	ib	machinery,	ib
Lee's New London bilious		To plate looking-glass,	ib
pills,	ib	To silver glass globes,	ib
Lip salve	258	To make brass,	264
Basilicon ointment,	ib	To make pinchbeck,	iii
Opodeldoc,	ib	To make bronze.	ib
Steer's opodeldoc,	ib	To make imitation of pla-	
Hill's balsam of honey,	ib	tina,	ib
Balsam of hoarhound,	ib	To make gilding metal,	ib
Bateman's pectoral drops,	ib	To make dipping metal,	ib
Swinton's daffy,	ib	To make solder for steel	
Squire's elixir,	259	joints,	ib
Black drop,	ib	To make solder for iron,	i j
Godfrey's cordial,	ib	To make Jewelers' solder,	ib
Black pectoral lozenges,	ib	To make silver solder	
Oxymel of squills,	ib	for plating,	265
Vinegar of squills,	ib	To make gold solder,	ib
Beef tea,	ib	To make ring gold, «	ib
Scidlitz powders,	260	To make imitation of	
Soda powders,	ib	gold,	ib
Tooth powder,	ib	To gild glass and porce-	
British oil,	ib	lain,	ib
Pomatum,	ib	To gild leather,	266
Styptic tincture,	ib	To gild writings, draw-	
Sponge tents,	ib	ings, etc., on paper or	
Emetin,	ib	parchment,	ib
Elastic gum bougies,	ib	To gild silk, satin, and	
Elastic gum cathetus,	ib	ivory with gold at a most	
 
582
INDEX.
  insignificant expense,
To dissolve gold in aqua
  regia,
To procure hydrogen gas,
To gild copper,
To gild steel with  gold at
   a trifling expense,
Gold powder for gilding,
To cover bars of copper
  with gold,
Grecian  gilding,
To make amalgam of gold,
To gild by amalgamation,
To silver by heat,
To silver in the  cold wry,
To plate iron,
To tin copper and brass,
To tin iron and olher ves-
  sels,
To prepare the silver tree,
•Metallic  watering,
To flower silks with silver,
To weld steel, iron, and
•  cast-steel,
Case hardening,
English cast-steel,
To make "edge-tools from
   cast-iron,
To color steel blue,
To give  a drying quality
  to fat and poppy oils,
For coarse painting,
Resinous drying oil,
Fat copal varnish',
Varnish  filr watch  cases
   in imitation  of turtoise
   shell,
Colorless copal varnish,
Gold colored varnish,
Camphorated mastic var-
   nish for paintings,
Shaw's mastic varnish for
   paintings,
To make painter's cream,
Sandarac varnish,
ib	Compound Sandarac var-	
	nish,	ib
ib	Wax varnish for furniture,	ib
267	To make Turner's varnish	
ib	for boxwood,	ib
	Gallipot varnish,	274
ib	Lacquer for brass,	ib
ib	To prepare water proof	
	boots	ib
ib	To make leather and oth-	
268	er articles water proof,	ib
ib	To make black japan,	275
ib	To make blacking,	ib
ib	To make Bailey's compo-	
269	sition for blacking cakes	ib
ib	To make blacking balls	
ib	for shoes, To make liquid japan	ib
ib	blacking,	ib
ib	A cheap method,	ib
ib	To make turpentine var-	
270	nish, To make varnishes for vio-	ib
ib	lins, &c,	ib
ib	To varnish glass,	276
ib	To make white copal var-	
	nish,	ib
ib	To make black copal var-	
ib	nish, To make yellow copal	ib
271	varnish,	ib
ib	To make blue copal var-	
ib	nish,	ib
272	To make india rubber var-	
	nish,	ib
	Economical white house	
ib	paint,	ib
ib	To make cheap beautiful	
ib	green paint, To make a composition	ib
ib	for rendering canvas, linen, and cloth, dura-	
273	ble, pliable, and water	
ib	proof,	277
ib	To make it green,	ib
J'^^B^^^^^^^^^^^ 
INDEX.
588
To make it yellow,	ib
To make it red,	ib
To make it white,	278
To prepare a substitute	
for cochineal,	ib
To clean pictures,	ib
To dye cotton and linen	
blue,	ib
To dye a silk shawl scar-	
let,	ib
To dye silk lilac,	279
To dye silk stockings,	
&c.,	ib
To obtain a dyeing mat-	
ter, from potatoe tops,	ib
To turn red hair black,	ib
To edge white gloves pur-	
ple,	ib
To dye gloves resembling	
Limerick,	ib
To stain beech wood a	
mahogany color,	280
For staining paper yellow,	ib
For staining it crimson,	ib
For staining it green,	ib
For staining it orange,	ib
For staining it purple,	ib
Hare's method of black-	
ing shell lac.	ib
To clean black veils,	ib
To clean white satin and	
flowered silks,	ib
To clean colored silks of	
all kinds,	281
For scouring clothes, &c.	ib
To revive faded black	
cloth,	ib
To take iron moulds out	
of linen,	ib
To remove spots of grease	
from cloth,	282
To take mildew out of	
linen,	ib
To take out spots of ink,	ib
To clean all sorts of metal,  ib
To take stains out of ma-
  hogany,                 ib
To take out writing,        ib
To make a fire and water
  proof cement,           ib
For brewing ale or strong
  beer in small families,   283
Cheap beer,               ib
For making beer and ale
  from pea-shells instead
  of malt,                 ib
To fine beer,              ib
To restore stale or sour
  beer,                  284
To restore  ropy beer,      ib
To make spruce beer,      ib
 "    "  red currant wine, ib
 "    "  compound wine,   ib
      "  imitation of port
           wine,          ib
         American honey
           wine,         285
         grape wine,      ib
To detect  sugar of lead,
  corrosive sublimate, ancl
  antimony, in wines,      ib
To make British brandy,   ib
To obtain rum from mo-
  lasses,                 286
To rectify whiskey into
  Holland  gin,             ib
 " obtain sugar from beet
  root,                    ib
 " make Usquebaugh,      ib
 " preserve meat or smo-
  ked hams,           '    ib
Acid of ants,              ib
Honey water for the hair,  287
Portable lemonade,         ib
Substitute for tea,          ib
Substitute for coffee,        ib
Coffee milk,               ib
To remove freckles from
  the face  and  improve
  the complexion,          ib 
584
INDEX.
To make the teeth white,	288	Remedy against the bite of	
" clean the teeth,	ib	the turnip fly,	ib
" prevent the tooth ache,	ib	To preserve eggs,	ib
" perfume clothes,	ib	A substitute for milk and	
The best rouge for the face, ib		cream,	ib
A wash for sun burnt faces		The best way to preserve	
and hands,	ib	butter,	ib
To make Windsor soap,	ib	To cure musty grain,	ib
Shining black ink,	ib	" remove flies from	
For making red ink,	ib	rooms,	ib
green writing		" make excellent bread,	293
ink,	289	" manufacture glass,	ib
good common		Materials for the best	
printing ink,	ib	looking-glass plates,	ib
best printing		For making common or	
ink,	ib	green window glass,	ib
printers'red ink, ib		To preserve milk,	ib
perpetual ink		" cure smoky chimneys,	ib
for inscriptions on tomb		" avoid injury from bees 294	
stones,	ib	" raise water in all situ-	
Substitute for Indian ink,	ib	ations,	ib
Indelible ink for marking		" bring horses out of a	
linen,	ib	stable on fire,	ib
To convert sheep-skins		Curious mode of silvering	
into leather,	290	ivory.	ib
To prepare sheep leather		Paste for sharponing ra-	
for various elegant pur-		zors,	ib
poses by dyeing,	ib	To escape the effects of	
To dye morocco and sheep		lightning,	ib
leather.	291	To remedy the effects of	
To dve it blue,	ib	dranrndrinking,	295
" " red,	ib	The air bath,	ib
" " purple,	ib	For botts in horses,	ib
" " green,	ib	To dye a silk shawl crim-	
" " yellow,	ib	son,	ib
" " * orange color,	ib	" dye feathers or bris-	
To preserve plants from		tles oreen,	ib
frost,	ib	Blue for the same,	ib
" preserve fruit trees in		Red for the same,	296
Mosso-m from frost,	ib	To stain oak a mahogany	
" remove the mildew on		color,	ib
wheat,	292	A suitable varnish for the	
Uses to which frozen pota-		same,	ib
toes may bo applied,	ib	To stain musical instru-	
To destroy the fly on tur-		ments crimson,	ib
nips,	ib	Purple for the same,	ib
 
INDEX.
595
To extract grease spots
  from silks and colored
  muslins,
To take stains out of silks,
 "  take spots of paint from
  cloth,
White' mead wine,
Red mead or metiieglin
  wine,
Cider wine,
Excellent ginger wine,
To restore sour wines,
Hard pomatum,
Cephalic, or headache snuff, ib
To tan without bark or
  mineral astringent,
 "  weld  tortoise shell,
 "  make  cement for met-
  als,
 "  make  isinglass glue,
Mahogany colored cement,
To make  red sealing wax,
 "   "   black scaling do.,
 "   "   green sealing do.,
 "   "   blue sealing  do.,
 "   "   yellow scaling da.,
 "  clean gold lace,
 "  obtain the fragrant  es-
  sences  from the  fresh
  rinds  of citrons, oran-
  ges, &c,
 '"  preserve phosphorus,
 "  make gun-powder,
A  mode  of preparing pa-
  per which  shall  resist
  moisture,
To render paper fire proof,
Shrewsbury cake,
Jumbles,
Savoy biscuit,
Almond cake,
Potind cake gingerbread.
Ginger cake,
Sugar cake,
Cap cake,
  ib
  ib

  ib
  ib

  ib
297
  ib
  ib
  ib
  ib
298

  ib
  ib
  ib
  ib
  ib
  ib
  ib
  ib
  ib
299
  ib
  ib
  ib
  ib
300
  ib
  ib
  ib
  ib

  ib
  ib
Cider cake,
Whip,
To make venison paste,
 "  dress a turtle,
A  good gravy for any use,
Wedding cake,
Election cake,
Bachelor's loaf,
Oyster pie,
Cure for sore backs of
   horses,
An  infallible  lotion for
   blows,   bruises,   and
   sprains in horses,
A  composition to render
   wood fire proof,
Foundered feet,
Hoof bound,
Lampas, or lampers, f
Instantaneous light boxes
To make exhilarating gas,
Remittent fever,      16.
Rheumatism,
Chronic,
Rattles,
Rose willow,
River  do.,
Rattlesnakes's plantain,
Red duckweed,
Red precipitate,
Rose water,
Red saunders,
Rochelle salt,
Rhubarb,
Refrigerants,
Rule for making inspissa-
   ted juices,  •
Rule for making volatile
   oils,
Receipts lor compounding
   medicines,
Rete mucosum,
Radial  artery,
Respiration,
Rupture,
  ib a
  ib
301
  ib
  ib
  ib
  ib
  ib
302

  ib
  ib

  ib
  ib
  ib
  ib
303
  ib
164
  68
  69
161
187
193
  ib
197
209
217
  ib
221
223
232

237

939

241
364
377
394
413 
586
INDEX.
Retention of urine,	458
Removing the tartar from	
th« teeth, S Substitutes for bark,	470
	14
Synochus,	29
Synocha or inflammatory	
fevers,.	25
treatment of,	26
Small Pox,	35
Scarlet fever or Scarlatina	, 41
Smaller eruptions,	45
St. Vitus's dance,	81
Syncope,	92
Suspended animation,	94
symotomsand treatment	
,0f\	95
Sea sickness,	111
Stoppage of the functions	
of the kidneys,	114
Scrofula,	115
Scurvy,	116
Scald head,	123
Squinting or strabismus,	126
Scabies,	ib
Singultus,	127
Syphilis,	129
Sickness in pregnancy,	144
Swellings of the legs,	146
Spitting blood,	170
Suppression and difficulty	
of urine,	172
Salt Rheum,	174
Scalds and burns, 176.	407
Strengthening plaster,	ib
Sore mouth,	177
Sour stomach,	ib
Sore eyes,	178
Sweet flag,	185
Sampson snake root,	187
Skunk cabbage,	190
Sanicle,	,ib
Slippery elm,	ib
Sumach or Shoemake,	191
Sarsaparilla,	193
Sassafras,	ib
Squirrel ear,	194
Spiknard,	195
Sulphate of zinc,	218
of copper,	ib
Squills,	219
Sulphur,	120
Senna,	ib
Scammony,	221
Savin,	223
Seneka snake root, ib.	226
Sal Diureticus,	ib
Spirit of nitre,	ib
Spanish fly, 228.	224
Sialagogues,	227
Sternutatories,	228
Soda,	230
Starch,	134
Spermaceti,	ib
Saline mineial waters,	239
Sulphureous " "	ib
Sutures of the skull,	342
Sphincter oris,	362
Sterno hyoidei,	ib
Smelling, sense of	367
Seeing, "	ib
Subclavian artcrv,	375
Sanguification,	384
Surgery,	399
Suppuration,	400
Scirrhus,	409
Sarcomatous tumors,	412
Scrophula,	413
Sutures, surgical,	420
Sprains,	434
Stone in the bladder,	459
Shedding the teeth,	464
Setting artificial teethy	472
Smut rye,	197
Sweet fern,	198
tinctures,	249
Syrups,	251
Solutions, &c,	354
T	
Typhus icterodes,	20
Typhus, or nervous fever	25
or putrid fever,,	166
 
	INDEX.			587
Syncopalis,	31 l	Vitriol blue,		212
Tic Douloureux,	87	" green,		211
Tinea capitis,	123	" oil of,		215
Treatment of all fevers,	133	Venice turpentine,		222
Thorn apple,	181	Volatile oils,		239
Tansy,	191	Verdigris,		212
Tag alder,	194	Vegetable tonics,		ib
Tonics,	208	Veins,		339
Tincture of iron,	201	Vertebra,	348.	349
Tartar emetic,	218	Veins, description of,		379
Tobacco,	226	Vitreous humor,		392
Tin,	235	Voice, of the,		395
Tendons,	339	Ventriloquism,		ib
Trapezius,	362	Varix, varicose vens,		410
Thoracic duct,	384	Venesection,		423
Tourniquet,	418	W		
Tonsils, diseases of,	454	Washington George death		
Trachea, wounds of,	455	of,		5i
Tracheotomy,	457	Worms,	171.	103
Teeth, of the,	462	" Guinea,		109
Tartar on the teeth,	469	Women, diseases of,	-	138
removing from the		Whites,	141.	178
teeth,	470	Womb, diseases of,		153
Tinctures,	449	Water in the head,		159
Tumours.	412	saline mineral,		239
Trephining,	433	chalybeate do.,		ib
Turn of life,	142	sulphureous do.,		ib
U		carbonated do.,		240
Urticaria,	46	Wounds, bleeding from,		171
Uterus, inflammation of,	153	general remarks oi	,	417
Eva ursi,	182	process of union,		421
Uuguentum,	248	puuetured,		ib
Unguis,	365	lacerated and contused,		ib
Ulcers, 404. 405.	406	poisoned,		422
Union of wounds,	421	Wounds, gun shot,		428
Uvula diseases of,	454	White swelling,	174.	414
Urine retention of,	458	Wild turnip,		183
V		Wintergreen,		ib
Variola Vaccina,	36	Wild parsley,		192
Varicella Varioloides.	38	Willow, river,		193
Varicella Lymphatica,	39	White poppy,		ib
Venereal disease,	127	Witch hazel,		199
Virulent gonorrhea,	128	Weights,		201
Vomica nut,	205	Wine of iron,		211
Valerian,	208	White oxide of zinc?		ib
Vitriol white,	21.1	White vitriol,		ib
l 
58S
INDEX.
White canella,	214	Wrist, fracture of,		-140
Wine of antimony,	218	Wounds of the neck,		454
Wild cucumber,	220	Wounds of the wind	pipe	455
White chalk,	231	3 " of the cesoph	agus,	451)
Wax, bee's,	234	Wry neck,		457
Wines,	253	Y		
Whole number of bones		Yellow fever,	19.	165
in the human body,	'341	Yaws,		it
Warts,	408	Yellow Ointment,		248
Weeping sinew,	410	" mild,		ib
Whitlow,	415	Yeast, use of,		402
* 
APPENDIX.
 THE THOMSONIAN PRACTICE OF  MEDICINE,-

   Dr. Thomson argues that the immediate cause of all dis-
 eases, in a sweater or less degree,  is cold, or an unequal dis-
 tribution of heat; and therefore that they  may be  removed
 by one general remedy.   That heat is life, and cold is death ;
 that cold is the enemy, and heat the friend of man, which, in
 all cases called   fever, is in a disturbed condition  by being
 driven from the inward part to the surface.  The  cold causes
 canker,  but before the canker is sealed, the  strife will take
 place between cold and heat, as in the ague and fever ;  while
 the hot lla.she.s and cold chills remain,  it is evident  that the
 canker is not  settled, ancl the hot  medicine alone, occasion-
 ally assisted  by  steam,  will throw  it orb  Then the  great
 point  is to raise  the inward hoat  by vegetable  stimulants,
 such as No. 2, 0, and the like, and keep the determining
 powers to the surface, by  keeping up the inward  heat on
 wliich life depends.
   But when the contest ceases between heat and cold, the
 hoat is steady on the outside ; then the  canker assumes the
 power insido ; this is called a settled fever.   Then the great
 'point is to raise  and keep  up tlie internal  heat with No. 1
 and 2, so as to overpower the cold,  and take off the  canker
 with No. 3, ancl give the same by injection.   In  this way a
 fever may soon be turned.   And disease in general may be
 treated by the same general rule: that  is,  by raising  the in-
 ternal heat to bring on perspiration, by cleansing and strength-
 ening the stomach, until  it can receive and digest a sulRcient
 quantity of food  to raise and maintain that heat which is ne-
 cessary to life.
  in all  cases of disease injections may be  administered to
 advantage;  they seldom or never do harm, ancl in many ca-
 ses they are indispensably necessary, especially where there
 is canker or inflammation in the bowels, and if  there is dan-
 ger of mortification, add to the injection a tea-spoonful of No.
6; in cams of this kind the injection  should be given first, or
at the same time of giving: the composition, or  No. 2, 3, oc
                           27 
590
OF  MEDICINE.
6 into  the stomach.   In all cases of disease where there is
danger of mortification, add a tea-spoonful of No. 6 to each
dose.
  In the first stages of a  fever, the patient should be carried
through a regular course ofthe medicine, ancl repeated ev-
ery second or third day, if the case should  require it.   The
inward heat and perspiration should be kept up bv giving a
dose of No. 2, or 6, or both together in a tea of No. 3, or of
the composition powder.  If any nervous  affections appear,
add to each dose half a tea-spoonful of nerve powder;  it may
be used instead of opium in all cases of pain, restlessness, &c.
and has none of those bad effects which often attend the use
of opium.  The doses of it may be repeated every  ten or
iwenty minutes  till it has tho desired effect.   The  nerve
powder is the root ofthe American valerian reduced to a fine
powder.
  Be careful in all cases after taking (he patient  through a
course of medicine, to keep up the internal  heat and perspi-
ration by giving No. 2 ancl 6, in a tea ofthe composition pow-
der.   To prevent a relapse ofthe disease  the piuient should
frequently drink, during the day, of a tea made of black pop-
lar bark, and evening and morning a tea-cupful of tea maciu
of No. 3.  If costive, use the  bitter root in powder, in doses
of half a tea-spoonful, ancl give injections of No. 2 and 6, in
a tea of No. 3, or according to the directions in the table of
medicine, so  as to procure at least one or two stools a dav.
  The patient's diet should be light and easy  of digestion,
given often  and in  small  quantities.   If  taken through  a
course of medicine, or while under the operation of the  emet-
ic, the strength is to be supported by chicken bruih, < r milk
porridge, to be given at each interval of vomiting.   To open
the pores on  the surface of the skin, the patient should  fre-
quently be washed with soap suds or an alkali wash, espe-
cially  when the fever runs high  and the  skin  is dry—this
helps to bring on a perspiration, and promotes the cure.
   Fever is a disturbed operation of heat; what is commonly
called fever  is the effect, and not the cause of disease.  Cold
 causes an obstruction, and ferer arises inconsequence of that
 obstruction to throw it off—(his is  universally  the case; re-
 move the cause and the effect  will  cease.  No person ever
 died of a. fever, for as death approaches the patient grows cold,
 until in death, the last spark of heat is extinguished. 
            APPENDIX--THE THOMSONIAN PRACTICE      591

   A table or list of medicines, and their preparation, accord-
                     ing to Dr. Thomson.
      No. 1. The emetic.   Lobelia inflate', or Indian tobac-
   co.   No. 1. may be prepared in three different ways.
      The first preparation is to reduce the leaves, pods and seed?,
   together or separate, to a fine powder.  The seeds are best.
   A tea-spoonful is a dose, and must be repeated once in ten or
   lifteen minutes until it  operates.   Put  nothing  hotter than
   blood-warm to the powder, or it will destroy its emetic virtues.
      The second p&paration is to bruise the green  Herb fine in
   a mortar, add the same  quantity of spirits, mix and pound to-
   gether, strain, and squeeze out all the liquor; a tea-spoonful
   of this liquor is a dose.   To be managed as above, when giv-
   en as an emetic.   This preparation is a proper  counter poi-
   son, and may  be taken into the stomach, or externally appli-
   ed.   It is also  an excellent medicine  for the asthma or any
   complaint ofthe lungs.   In cases where people get poisoned
   with  ivy, or  any other  way, a wash of this generally gives
   immediate relief; a tea of the composition powder, or cay-
   enne, should  be drank at the same time
     The third preparation is the seeds reduced to a fine pow-
   der, of which put a large spoonful, and as much of No. ■?, in-
   1 o a gill of No. 6, adding a tea-spoonful of nerve powder.  A
   tea-spoonful is a dose.   This, or either ofthe above prepara-
   tions, should be bottled tight and kept for v.:--\   Shake  well
   together  before taking it.  This third preparation is for th  >
   most violent attacks of disease, such as lockjaw, tits, bite of mad
   dog, drowned persons, and in all cases of suspended a.iimatioi .
   Jn cases where tlie spasms are so violent that the patient has
t   become stiff, and the jaws set, by pouring some of this liquid
   between  the teeth it will relax the spasms as soon as it touches
   tlie glands at  the root ofthe tongue, so  that the  moutli will
   open.  Then give a dose and repeat it if necessary.   After-
   wards give a  tea of No. 3, for canker, which -Hciom fails to
   give relief.  It is also good to bring out measles and small
   pox ;  and if applied to pimples, warts, &c. it removes them.'
     No preparation ofthe lobelia will operate  well as an emet-
   ic if the stomach  be  either  cold  or sour; therefore if the
   stomach be cold it should first be warmed  by some warming
   herb drink;  the composition tea, cayenne, or No. 6, is  best.
   If sour, take a lump of pearlash ofthe size of a pea, dissolved
   in a little water ; this will correct the acidify and sweeten
   the  stomach.   To promote the vomiting,  chink  pennyroyal 
592
OF MEDICINE.
tea ; in older to have the  stomach well cleansed repeat the
dose as the case may require, and in the intermediate limes
of vomiting, chicken broth or milk porridge may be given to
support the patient.
  Lobelia is  innocent on nature, and does not rend the sys-
tem like tartar emetic.  It never i educes the patient's strength
but little ; but when it comes in contact with disease of long
standing, low patients, and also when much opium has been
taken, &c. .the symptoms  are  sometimes  alarming; but no
danger need be apprehended, for it is a certain sign of a turn
of the disease.  This emetic may be ventured  on whenevoi
a puke is admissible.  After the operation is over the patient
rnay eat any food that is easy of digestion.
  No. 2. Cayenne pepper.   Grind it  fine, and for  a dose
give from half to a whole tea-spoonful, to be repeated every
ten or fifteen  minutes, until a free  perspiration is raised; it
may be given in a  tea of the composition powder, in hot wa-
ter, in a tea of No.  3, or any of the other numbers, and should
be sweetened.  The patient should be shielded at the same
time with a blanket by the fire, or in  be/1.  The American
cayenne is said to be equally as good for medicine as the im-
ported, but not so  strong.  Red pepper is a very good sub-
stitute.
  No. 3. For canker, called patent coffee.   Take of bay-
berry root, the bark ; white pond lily, the root;  hemlock, the
inner bark ;  of each  an  equal quantity, reduced to powder
and mixed together.  Steep half an ounce of this powder in
half a pint of boiling water.   For a dose, a  common wine-
glassful sweetened.  When all the ingredients cannot be had
they mav be used separate, or any ofthe following  substitu-
ted in their place, viz :  red raspberry, the leaves; witch-
hazel,  the leaves;  sumach, (or shoemake,) the leaves, bark,
or berries.
  No. 4.  The bitters.   Take of balmony the herb; black
poph-r,  the inner bark;  bay berry,  the inner bark; of each
equal parts to be reduced to powder—one ounce of this to a
pint of hot  water and a  half pint of spirits, or to a quart  of
spirits.   From a half to a whole wine glassful may be taken
three times a day.   For hot bitters, a tea-spoonful of No. 2,
to one ounce of the powders.
   No. 5. A strengthening syrup. Take of bayberry, the
bark of the roots,"and poplar bark, one pound of each; boil
them in two gallons of water, strain and add seven pounds of 
             appendix—The Thomsonian practice      503

     good sugar—then scald and skim it, add half a pound of peach
     or cherry stone meats, pounded fine ; when cold, add a gallon
     of good brandy, and keep it  in bottles for use.   Take half a
     wine glassful two or three times a day.
        No. 6.  The hot  drops, or  rheumatic  drops.  Take  of
     good fourth proof brandy, or alcohol, one gallon ; one pound
     of gum myrrh, pounded fine ; one ounce of No. 2 ; put them
     together in a stone jug, stand the jug unstopped a few min-
     utes in a kettle of boiling water;  then take it out and let it
     settle, and bottle it for use ; or let the ingredients stand four or
     five days in the jug without boiling.  A tea-spoonful is a close.
        These drops may be employed to advantage in rheumatism,
     pain in the back or side, corns, fellons, wind and pain in the
     stomach or bowels, sprains, bruises, and wounds.  They are
     good to bring down  swelling in old  sores,  and allay inflam*
     mation ; to ease pain, ancl prevent mortification internally or
     externally ;  good in most diseases either to be taken into the
     stomach, or by injection.  In headache they often give relief
     by rubbing some on the forehead,  snuffing  a little  up the
     nose, and  swallowing some.   It also prevents faint feelings
     by taking a small dose ; and it promotes perspiration.   When
     applied externally in rheumatic pains,  it may be mixed with
     tlie lobelia tincture,  (second preparation) ;  and in sprains,
     bruises, or strains, a little camphor and spirits of turpentine
     may be added.
        Vegetable composition powder.  Take of bayberry, the
     bark of the roots, two pounds; the  inaes-bark of T*ei»lock,
     one pound ;  ginger,  one pound ; cloves, two ounces ;  cay-
     enne pepper, two ounces ;  all reduced  to a fine powder, well
     mixed,  and sifted through a  fine sieve.  For a  dose, turn a
     tea-cupful  of hot water on  a large  tea-spoonful of this mix-
     ture, to be swTeetened and drank when cool enough.  In more
     violent  cases add a tea-spoonful of  No. 6  ; and in nervous
     affections, add half a tea-spoonful of nerve powder also, when
     cool enough to drink.   .^*.-"~------""*
 /     This valuable preparation  may  be used by young or old,
/   male or female, with perfect safety in all cases of colds, head-
    ache, pain  in the  limbs, stomach or bowels, dysentery, diar-
    rhea, cold feet or hands, and female obstructions caused by
    cold.   When taken, the patient should be warm in  bed, to
X.  promote perspiration.  ~~~..—.-.-»..—.—
      N. B.   It is said the above preparation  is better without
    the hemlock bark than with it.
                               37* 
594
OF MEDICINE.
   Cough Powder.  Take of skunk cabbage roots, four parts;
 hoarhound, two parts ; wake robin or wild turnip, one part.;
 lobelia, orie part;  cayenne, one part; bayberry  root bark,
 one part; bitter root, one part; nerve powder, one part;  all
 made fine, and well mixed together.   Half a tea-spoonful  for
 a dose, to be taken in West India molasses.  The best time
 when going to bed, and to be persisted in till relief is obtained.
 These powders are good in any cough, consumption, &c.
   Vegetable composition pills.   Take a  sufficient quantity
 of cold water, and the inner bark of slippery elm, reduced to
 a fine powder ; beat these well togther so as to form a jelly ;
 to one pint of this add four ounces of loaf sugar pounded fine ;
 stir them well  together, ancl then add two ounces of golden
 ^al; one ounce of bitter root; one ounce of bayberry,  the
 bark of the root; balmony, the  herb, half an ounce ; ginseng,
 two drachms—all to be  reduced to a  fine powder, and well
 mixed together; after this add a  sufficiqnt of cayenne and
 nerve powder to form it into a proper mass for making pills.
 When formed into pills  they may be rolled in the powdered
 bark ofthe elm, or in fine loaf  sugar,   r'rom three to si:: is a
 dose for an adult.   These pills are employed in costiveness,
 and other complaints of  the bowels ; they operate as  a wry
 mild laxative, good to strengthen  the digestive  organs, and
 warm the stomach ; and are beneficial in most diseases—they
 relieve pain in  the stomach of weak persons, caused by indi-
 gestion or weakness ofthe stomach.
   Emetic pills.  Take of the seeds of  lobelia in powder,
 one ounce ; cayenne in  powder, one ounce ; nerve powder,
 two drachms—take the extract or syrup of black poplar bark,
 three parts, and of No. 6, one part;  of these a sufficient quan-
 tity to form the whole into a proper mass for pills.   Tho ex-
 tract or syrup is made thus : boil the strength out of the bark;
 fill up the kettle with water two or three times, strain off the
 liquor and boil it down to the  consistency  of  thin molasses.
 These  pills may be employed  to  scour the  stomach; they
 should be taken at night  when going to bed.  Enough should
 be taken  to nauseate the stomach and not puke, (which is
 from two to six.)    Should  vomiting take  place, the patient
 should drink  pennyroyal tea, or  the  like,  as hot as he can
 bear it.  These pills are good for a sick  headache,  a cold
 watery and sour stomach, for indigestion, dyspepsia, &c.
   For  dyspepsia, in addition to taking the pills at night, half
a tea-spoonful of the bitter  root in powder, should be taken
two or three times a day. 
         APPENDIX--THE THOMSONIAN PRACTICE.     595

   Injection.   Make a strong tea of No. 3, or any of tlie ar-
 ticles recommended  for canker;  strain oh1'the tea while hot,
 add half a tea-spoonful of No. 2, and a tea-spoonful of No. 6.
 In nervous affections add half a tea-spoonful of nerve powder
 when cool enough to give—ancl in all cases two or three ta-
 ble-spoonsful  of West  India  molasses.   If poison ! as been
 taken into^ the stomach  or intestines,  a tea-spoonful of tlie
 tincture I\o. 1, may be added, and  likewise  slippery elm
 bark ; the bark must be added to the first ingredients for tlie
 tea.
  _ When  the bowels are  left sore on  account of any disease,
 give an  injection of a tea  made  of slippery  elm bark;  red
 raspberry leaves,  or witch-hazel  leaves, or both;  this has a
 tendency to heal them.
   Poultice.   Take  slippery elm bark, pulverized, with gin-
 ger  and pounded cracker, make a strong tea of red raspberry
 leaves, or .ho. 3,  and of these make a poultice.   This is a
 proper application to old sores, scalds, bad burns, parts fro-
 zen, fellons,  and whitlows.   Renew  the  poultice "nee in
 twelve or twenty-four hours, keeping it wet with cold water,
 or the above tea, at  each renewal wash the affected part with
 soap suds ; when the part discharges good matter, apply the

   Solve.   Take of bees' wax and salt butter each one pound,
 one  and a half pounds of turpentine, twelve ounces of babam
 of fir, melt and stir them well together, then strain off.  Af-
 ter the inflammation  is "allayed, it  may be  used  for bums,
 scalds, freezes, all bad sores, fresh wounds, &c.
   Nerve  ointment.   Take of bitter-sweet, the bark of the
 roots, two parts ;  equal quantities of  wormwood  and camo-
 mile, one part;  put  these into any kind of soft animal oil,
 simmer them over a slow fire for twelve  hours,  strain and
 add  to each pound of ointment, one ounce  of spirits of tur-
 pentine.   To  be  used  for bruises, sprains,  strains,  callus,
 swellings, corns, &c.
   Cancer balsam or plaster.  Boil a strong decoction of red
 clover heads in a brass kettle down to the consistence of tar,
 without burning it;  it is then fit for  use.   It cures cancers
 in the first stages,  s»re lips, and old sores.   Or see cancers,
 page 173.
  Strengthening plaster.  Take  of burdock and  mullen
 leaves, bruise, and put them into a kettle of water;  boil them
well, strain, and press all the juice out of the leaves.  Boil 
5S6
OF MEDICINE.
 down the liquor till half as thick as molasses, add three parts
 of rosin, and one of turpentine, simmer them together till the
 water is evaporated ; then pour it into cold water and work
 it with your hands, if too hard, add more turpentine.  Spread
' it on thin leather and apply to the part affected.  It is good
 for lame backs, sides, sprains, and rheumatism.
    Wine bitters.  Take of  golden seal two ounces, bitter
 root one ounce, nerve powder one drachm, balmonv 2 drachms,
 black poplar  the inner bark, two drachms, cayenne half a
 drachm.  One ounce of these reduced to a fine powder may
 be added to a quart of wine ;  from  half to a wine-glass may
 be taken three times a day.   Port or claret wine is best.
   These bitters cause an agreeable warmth through the sv;*-
 tefi, by increasing  the  circulation of the blood.  Good in
 dyspepsia, nervous weakness, and costiveness ;  they increase
 the appetite, give tone to the stomach, expel faint torpid feel-
 ings and headache, occasioned by cankered stomach, chronic-
 debility, or a sudden cold.   These bitters are harmless and
 may be used by young or old; good to strengthen weak pa-
 tients, &c.
   Eye water.  Take of white pond lilly root, marsh rose-
 mary root, witch-hazel,  and red raspberry  leaves,  make a
 strong tea of all or either of them, add one third  as much of
 No. (j,  and a little of No. 2.  Bathe the eyes four or iivi
 times a day; keep'your eyes at the same time  as  much  as
 possible from the external air, and immerse your face every
 morning in cold water,  shutting and opening  your eyes till
 well washed.
    Volatile salts.   Take of crude sal  ammoniac  one ounce,
 pearl ash  two ounces ; pound the ingredients separate,  mix
 them well together, bottle close for use; damp it with spirits
 or essence ; this applied to the nose is good for faintings, and
 to remo\re pain in the head.
   Steaming.  Steaming is of the utmost importance in ca-
 ses of suspended animation, such as drowned persons, and in
 many cases of spotted fever, when they fall apparently dead ;
 in this case place the body  over a moderate steam, shielded
 by a blanket from the external air, till you can raise the in-
 ternal heat so as to get the determining power to the surface,
 and as life gains, increase the steam as the patient can bear
 it;  if the patient  be  much distressed,  give  the more  hot
 medicine;  as soon  as an  equilibrium  takes  place,  the
 pain will cease.   In all cases of this kind the difficulty can-
Ss^m i_____a» 
          APPENDIX--THE THOMSONIAN  PRACTICE      597

 not be removed without the application of heat to the body,
 and it is more natural by steam than by any other means that
 can  be made use of.
    In cases of long standing where the patient  has been run
 down with mercury, and left in a cold obstructed state, lia-
 ble to rheumatism and other complaints  of a similar nature,
 medicine is insufficient  to effect a cure without steam,  .is
 nothing will remove mercury but heat.   When a patient has
 been long under mercurial treatment, ancl  while under the
 operation ofthe steam, when the heat is at the highest the
 (ace will swell in consequence of the poisonous vapor being
 condensed by the air, and the face being  open to it.   To re-
 lieve this put the patient in  bed, with the head  covered, arid
 let him breathe a lively steam as  hot as can be borne, from a
 steaming stone ; the cloths being wet with water ancl vine-
 gar in which the stones are  wrapped—this will throw out
 the poison in about  fifteen or twenty minutes after the swel-
 led part sweats freely, and then  the swelling will abate. For
 the ague  in the face, or for toothache, and when children are
 stufhh-d in  the lungs, the face may be steamed  as above di-
 rected.   In cases of pain in the legs, hips, back, or any other
 part, or a stitch of wind in the side, stomach or shoulder,—if
 a  steaming stone is applied to the part pained, it will gener-
 ally give relief.
   in all cases of falls or bruises, steaming is almost infallible,
 and is much better than bleeding;  if the advantages of steam-
 ing were generally known, in cases of falls bruises,  and (be
 like, bleeding would seldom be resorted  to in such cases.—
 Uefore arid after steaming, give  the hottestmedicineyou have
 and keep up the perspiration free until tlie pain and soreness
 abate.  In all cases where the heat of the body is so far ex-
 hausted as not to be rekindled by the use of medicine, as in
 chills, stupor, suspended  animation,  &c. heat by  steam   is
 more natural in producmg perspiration than any dry heat
 which can be applied to the body in any other manner.  Tlie
 use  <;f steaming is  to  apply heat to the body where it  is
 deficient,  and to clear off obstructions caused by cold, which
the operation of medicine will not raise heat enough to do;
the natural heat of the body must be raised as far above the
natural state,  as by disease it has fallen  below  it,  and this
must be repeated until the digestive powers are restored;  then
the food received into the stomach will maintain that heat on
which life depends. 
598
OF  MEDICINE.
  When steamed,  the  patient should stand or sit over the
steam bath divested of his clothes, and shielded from the air
by a blanket being pinned around his neck.   Previous to his
going over the* bath, be should take  one or two doses of the
composition tea, with the addition of either No. 2, or 6, or
both of them.   While steaming in all cases the internal heat
must be higher than  the  external,  by  repealing  the above
named closes—this presents faintness, and renders the opera-
tion  both safe and easy to the patient.   Should faintness take
place id any time while under the operation ofthe steam, af-
ter giving a sufficient quantity of hot medicine, the external
heat must be let down by washing the patient's face with a
little cold vinegar; should this be ineffectual, apply a little
to the stomach, ancl the faintness will subside.  The patient '
may continue over the steam from fifteen lo thirty minutes,
or as the case may require.   The steam may be raised or let
down at pleasure, by immersing small hot stones in  the wa-
ter  over  which (he patient is placed; the water shnild first
be mane boiling hot, and the steam  raised high enough to
bring on a free perspiration with the help of the hot medi-
cine, but not so high as to  burn the patient.  When done
steaming,  the patient should be lightly  washed off with cold
spirits, vinegar, or cold  water;  this closes the pores of  the
skin, prevents the  danger of taking cold,  and refreshes the
patient very much.  When the above named hot medicines
cannot be had,  others may be  substituted in their places, such
as red pepper, summer savory, and the  like.
  The way a steaming stone is prepared,  is by heating a stone
in the fire till nearly or quite red hot; then immerse the stone
in cold water, till it quits hissing; take it out and wrap it in
three or four folds of linen cloth, wrung out  of the water,
and  one fold of a dry flannel cloth wrapped over the whole.
The stone should be about the size of a man's head, and while
one  or more is  applied to the patient, more may be heating
if necessary.

      A  REGULAR  COURSE OF  MEDICINE.
  First, give No.  2, and No. 6, in  a tea of'the composition
powder, or in a tea of No. 3, then steam; after steaming, the
patient must be put in bed with a steaming stone  at his feet,
and take a close or two moro of the  hot medicine ; then take
the  emetic No. 1, and  repeat as occasion may require  to
cleanse the stomach ; this will also assist in keeping up th* 
  APPENDIX--THE THOMSONIAN PRACTICE OF MEDICINE.  599

  perspiration.  When the emetic is done  operating, o-ive an
  injection according to directions,  (see directions.)   When
  there are nervous symptoms, or nervous affections, or spasms,
  add kalf a tea-spoonful of nerve powder to each dose, and in-
  to the injection.  In the intermediate times of vomiting, the
  patient should drink milk porridge, chicken broth, or the like.
     This operation will be sufficient for once,  and may be re-
  neated every second, third, or fourth day, or as the case  may
  require.  In violent cases where immediate relief is needed,
  Xo. 1,2, 3, and 6, may be given together.   No. 2, and No.
  6, and the composition, are given  to raise the internal heat,
  and bring on a perspiration ;  the /steam is applied to open the
  pores and aid on the perspiration.   No. 3 is given to remove
  the canker,  and heal the stomach and bowels.
     In  slight attacks of disease a whole course of medicine will
  not be necessary; your judgment must be used, what medi-
  cine to give, and how much.  In  all cases of long standing
  and.severe attacks, a whole course of medicine will  be ne-
  c( ssarv, ancl must be repeated ;:s the case may require.
     Rejected medicine and practise.   The use of those herbs
  and minerals which possess a poisonous nature, such as gar-
  den hemlock, (cicuta,) laurel, swamp dogwood, ivy, arsenic,
^  antimony, calomel, opium, and tin; practice of bleeding,  blis-
  tering, giving many drastic purges,  &c.  are  rejected  by Dr.
  Thomson. 
                     ERRATA.
Page  9 for Remitted read Intermittent.
  "  o9  •  \ ancaila read Varicella.
  " HO  "  Haniorrhage, read Hemorrhage.
  'i.'. Vdf-  "  £'istic akali, read Caustic alkali.
         "     2r -ft's^lirer.us' &c- is the caPli°n ^  tiie  section
              winch follows it.
  u SS  «  £|l,nramo,»«">, read Cinnamoiniini.
  « X  u  ;S,lve£,Al'3ei»»"'. read Silver, (Argentum.)
    210    Iron Ferram. read Iron, (Ferrum?
    •i:»u  "  ls-2:',read 1832.
  "  S-   .'!  !fherCalues~lnamrn:l>''readiobe-comcS-mrjmr!rrv
  {t   .'    Rsophagus, read (Esophagus,
  "  4,)0  "  Lithomy, read Lithotomy.
  "1(7   "  Apricann. r^ad Africana. 
 
ij      mr*"'-  re*
 


 Book taken apart.  Leaves washed
 and deaoldlfied with nagnesiura
 bicarbonate,  flfcrlar wrapper and
 box constructed to protect.
 August 2578

 Carolyn Horton & Associates
*+30 West 22nd Street
New York, N.Y.  10011
v:
i'
' ft JL', / O

 * AW '  ■■.'■' 
•■'♦'■ -V':>'.   , /■> '>>T-


9&
rt&v
 iv^t»Ji' : ■ -a   ' ••
\*JSF^'<s<'. ■ -■A
;».v-.-'f';J ._
S3
'#*•. .*,%ja
L^-r


M':

4*>
m
**'
"*f*$